615 Series ANSI: Technical Manual

—
RELION® PROTECTION AND CONTROL
615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Document ID: 1MAC059074-MB
Issued: 2018-04-23
Revision: A
Product version: 5.0 FP1
© Copyright 2018 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor
used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may
be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product
names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
www.abb.com/mediumvoltage
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All
persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy
themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any
applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any
risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for
harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall
be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment, and those so
responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or
mitigate such risks.
This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data and information
via a network interface which should be connected to a secure network. It is the sole
responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network administration to ensure a
secure connection to the network and to take the necessary measures (such as, but not
limited to, installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of
data, installation of anti virus programs, etc.) to protect the product and the network, its
system and interface included, against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access,
interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB is not liable for
any such damages and/or losses.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely
ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the
manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB
be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the
application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on
the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use
within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is
the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standards EN 50263
and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and
EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the
international standards of the IEC 60255 series and ANSI C37.90. This product complies
with the UL 508 certification.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction..........................................................................35
This manual............................................................................................ 35
Intended audience.................................................................................. 35
Product documentation...........................................................................36
Product documentation set................................................................36
Document revision history................................................................. 36
Related documentation......................................................................37
Symbols and conventions.......................................................................37
Symbols.............................................................................................37
Document conventions...................................................................... 37
Functions, codes and symbols.......................................................... 38
Section 2 615 series overview.............................................................45

Overview.................................................................................................45
Product series version history........................................................... 46
PCM600 and relay connectivity package version..............................47
Local HMI................................................................................................48
Display...............................................................................................49
LEDs..................................................................................................49
Keypad.............................................................................................. 50
Web HMI.................................................................................................50
Authorization...........................................................................................52
Communication.......................................................................................52
Self-healing Ethernet ring.................................................................. 54
Ethernet redundancy......................................................................... 55
Section 3 Basic functions.................................................................... 59

General parameters................................................................................59
Self-supervision...................................................................................... 70
Internal faults..................................................................................... 70
Warnings............................................................................................73
LED indication control.............................................................................74
Function block................................................................................... 74
Functionality.......................................................................................75
Programmable LEDs.............................................................................. 75
Identification...................................................................................... 75
615 series ANSI 1

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block................................................................................... 75
Functionality.......................................................................................75
Signals...............................................................................................79
Settings..............................................................................................80
Monitored data...................................................................................82
Time synchronization..............................................................................83
Time master supervision GNRLLTMS............................................... 83
Function block.............................................................................. 83
Functionality................................................................................. 83
Signals..........................................................................................84
Settings.........................................................................................85
Parameter setting groups....................................................................... 87
Function block................................................................................... 87
Functionality.......................................................................................87
Test mode...............................................................................................89
Function blocks..................................................................................89
Functionality.......................................................................................89
Application configuration and Test mode.......................................... 90
Control mode..................................................................................... 90
Application configuration and Control mode......................................90
Authorization......................................................................................91
LHMI indications................................................................................ 91
Signals...............................................................................................91
Fault recorder FLR..................................................................................93
Function block................................................................................... 93
Functionality ......................................................................................93
Settings..............................................................................................94
Monitored data...................................................................................95
Non-volatile memory.............................................................................103
Sensor inputs for currents and voltages............................................... 104
Binary input...........................................................................................105
Binary input filter time...................................................................... 105
Binary input inversion...................................................................... 106
Oscillation suppression....................................................................107
Binary outputs.......................................................................................107
Power output contacts .................................................................... 108
Dual single-pole power outputs PO1 and PO2 in power supply
module........................................................................................108
Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit
supervision in power supply module...........................................109
2 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Dual single-pole high-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and

HSO3 in BIO0007.......................................................................110
Signal output contacts .................................................................... 111
Internal fault signal output IRF ...................................................111
Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module...............112
Signal outputs SO1, SO2, SO3 and SO4 in BIO0005................ 113
Signal outputs SO1, SO2 and SO3 in BIO0006......................... 113
RTD/mA inputs..................................................................................... 114
Functionality.................................................................................... 114
Operation principle.......................................................................... 114
Selection of input signal type......................................................114
Selection of output value format................................................. 115
Input linear scaling......................................................................116
Measurement chain supervision.................................................116
Self-supervision.......................................................................... 117
Calibration.................................................................................. 117
Limit value supervision............................................................... 117
Deadband supervision................................................................118
RTD temperature vs. resistance.................................................120
RTD/mA input connection...........................................................120
RTD/mA card variants................................................................ 123
Signals.............................................................................................126
Settings............................................................................................127
Monitored data.................................................................................128
SMV function blocks............................................................................. 129
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled values sending SMVSENDER............ 129
Function block............................................................................ 129
Functionality............................................................................... 130
Settings.......................................................................................130
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled values receiving SMVRECEIVER....... 130
Function block............................................................................ 130
Functionality............................................................................... 130
Signals........................................................................................130
ULTVTR function block....................................................................131
Function block............................................................................ 131
Functionality............................................................................... 131
Operation principle..................................................................... 131
Signals........................................................................................132
Settings.......................................................................................132
Monitored data............................................................................133
615 series ANSI 3

Technical Manual
Table of contents
RESTVTR function block.................................................................133

Function block............................................................................ 133
Functionality............................................................................... 133
Signals........................................................................................134
Settings.......................................................................................135
Monitored data............................................................................135
GOOSE function blocks........................................................................135
GOOSERCV_BIN function block..................................................... 136
Function block............................................................................ 136
Functionality............................................................................... 136
Signals........................................................................................136
GOOSERCV_DP function block...................................................... 136
Function block............................................................................ 136
Functionality............................................................................... 136
Signals........................................................................................137
GOOSERCV_MV function block......................................................137
Function block............................................................................ 137
Functionality............................................................................... 137
Signals........................................................................................137
GOOSERCV_INT8 function block................................................... 137
Function block............................................................................ 137
Functionality............................................................................... 138
Signals........................................................................................138
GOOSERCV_INTL function block................................................... 138
Function block............................................................................ 138
Functionality............................................................................... 138
Signals........................................................................................139
GOOSERCV_CMV function block................................................... 139
Function block............................................................................ 139
Functionality............................................................................... 139
Signals........................................................................................139
GOOSERCV_ENUM function block................................................ 140
Function block............................................................................ 140
Functionality............................................................................... 140
Signals........................................................................................140
GOOSERCV_INT32 function block................................................. 140
Function block............................................................................ 140
Functionality............................................................................... 140
Signals........................................................................................141
4 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Type conversion function blocks...........................................................141

QTY_GOOD function block............................................................. 141
Function block............................................................................ 141
Functionality............................................................................... 141
Signals........................................................................................141
QTY_BAD function block................................................................. 142
Function block............................................................................ 142
Functionality............................................................................... 142
Signals........................................................................................142
QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block.............................................. 143
Function block............................................................................ 143
Functionality............................................................................... 143
Signals........................................................................................143
T_HEALTH function block............................................................... 144
Function block............................................................................ 144
Functionality............................................................................... 144
Signals........................................................................................144
T_F32_INT8 function block..............................................................145
Function block............................................................................ 145
Functionality............................................................................... 145
Signals........................................................................................145
T_DIR function block....................................................................... 145
Function block............................................................................ 145
Functionality............................................................................... 146
Signals........................................................................................146
T_TCMD function block................................................................... 146
Function block............................................................................ 146
Functionality............................................................................... 146
Signals........................................................................................147
T_TCMD_BIN function block............................................................147
Function block............................................................................ 147
Functionality............................................................................... 147
Signals........................................................................................148
T_BIN_TCMD function block............................................................148
Function block............................................................................ 148
Functionality............................................................................... 148
Signals........................................................................................149
Configurable logic blocks......................................................................149
Standard configurable logic blocks..................................................149
OR function block....................................................................... 149
615 series ANSI 5

Technical Manual
Table of contents
AND function block..................................................................... 152

XOR function block.....................................................................154
NOT function block..................................................................... 155
MAX3 function block...................................................................155
MIN3 function block.................................................................... 156
R_TRIG function block................................................................157
F_TRIG function block................................................................ 158
T_POS_XX function blocks.........................................................159
SWITCHR function block............................................................160
SWITCHI32 function block......................................................... 161
SR function block........................................................................162
RS function block........................................................................163
Minimum pulse timer........................................................................164
Minimum pulse timer 62TP.........................................................164
Minimum pulse timer 62TPS...................................................... 166
Minimum pulse timer 62TPM......................................................167
Pulse timer function block 62PT...................................................... 168
Identification............................................................................... 168
Function block............................................................................ 169
Functionality............................................................................... 169
Signals........................................................................................169
Settings.......................................................................................170
Technical data............................................................................ 170
Time delay off (8 pcs) 62TOF.......................................................... 170
Identification............................................................................... 170
Function block............................................................................ 171
Functionality............................................................................... 171
Signals........................................................................................171
Settings.......................................................................................172
Technical data............................................................................ 172
Time delay on (8 pcs) 62TON......................................................... 173
Identification............................................................................... 173
Function block............................................................................ 173
Functionality............................................................................... 173
Signals........................................................................................174
Settings.......................................................................................174
Technical data............................................................................ 175
Set reset (8 pcs) SR........................................................................ 175
Identification............................................................................... 175
Function block............................................................................ 175
6 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Functionality............................................................................... 175
Signals........................................................................................176
Settings.......................................................................................177
Move (8 pcs) MV..............................................................................177
Function block............................................................................ 177
Functionality............................................................................... 178
Signals........................................................................................178
Settings.......................................................................................178
Integer value move MVI4.................................................................179
Function block............................................................................ 179
Functionality............................................................................... 179
Signals........................................................................................179
Analog value scaling SCA4............................................................. 180
Function block............................................................................ 180
Functionality............................................................................... 180
Signals........................................................................................181
Settings.......................................................................................181
Local/remote control function block CONTROL.............................. 182
Function block............................................................................ 182
Functionality............................................................................... 182
L/R control access...................................................................... 183
Station authority level “L,R”........................................................ 183
Station authority level “L,R,L+R”................................................ 184
Station authority level “L,S,R”.....................................................185
Station authority level “L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R”.............................187
Signals........................................................................................189
Settings.......................................................................................189
Monitored data............................................................................190
Generic control point (16 pcs) SPC................................................. 191
Identification............................................................................... 191
Function block............................................................................ 191
Functionality............................................................................... 191
Signals........................................................................................192
Settings.......................................................................................194
Generic up-down counter CTR........................................................196
Identification............................................................................... 196
Function block............................................................................ 196
Functionality............................................................................... 196
Signals........................................................................................198
615 series ANSI 7

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Settings.......................................................................................198
Monitored data............................................................................198
Factory settings restoration.................................................................. 198
Load profile record LOADPROF........................................................... 199
Functionality.................................................................................... 199
Quantities................................................................................... 199
Length of record......................................................................... 201
Uploading of record.................................................................... 201
Clearing of record....................................................................... 202
Configuration................................................................................... 203
Signals.............................................................................................203
Settings............................................................................................204
Monitored data.................................................................................206
ETHERNET channel supervision function blocks.................................206
Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH..................... 206
Function block............................................................................ 206
Functionality............................................................................... 206
Signals........................................................................................207
Settings.......................................................................................207
Monitored data............................................................................207
Ethernet channel supervision SCHLCCH........................................ 208
Function block............................................................................ 208
Functionality............................................................................... 208
Signals........................................................................................208
Settings.......................................................................................209
Monitored data............................................................................209
Section 4 Protection functions...........................................................211

Three-phase current protection............................................................ 211
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection 51P, 50P,
50P-3............................................................................................... 211
Identification............................................................................... 211
Function block............................................................................ 211
Functionality............................................................................... 211
Measurement modes..................................................................215
Timer characteristics.................................................................. 215
Application.................................................................................. 217
Signals........................................................................................224
Settings.......................................................................................226
8 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Monitored data............................................................................229
Technical data............................................................................ 230
Technical revision history........................................................... 231
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection 67/51P, 67/50P..... 231
Identification............................................................................... 231
Function block............................................................................ 232
Functionality............................................................................... 232
Operation principle .................................................................... 232
Directional overcurrent characteristics ...................................... 238
Application.................................................................................. 247
Signals........................................................................................250
Settings.......................................................................................251
Monitored data............................................................................255
Technical data............................................................................ 257
Three-phase voltage-dependent overcurrent protection 51V.......... 258
Identification............................................................................... 258
Function block............................................................................ 258
Functionality............................................................................... 258
Application.................................................................................. 264
Signals........................................................................................265
Settings.......................................................................................266
Monitored data............................................................................267
Technical data............................................................................ 268
Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and
distribution transformers 49F...........................................................268
Identification............................................................................... 268
Function block............................................................................ 269
Functionality............................................................................... 269
Application.................................................................................. 272
Signals........................................................................................273
Settings.......................................................................................274
Monitored data............................................................................274
Technical data............................................................................ 275
Three-phase thermal overload protection, two time constants 49T.275
Identification............................................................................... 275
615 series ANSI 9

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block............................................................................ 276

Functionality............................................................................... 276
Application.................................................................................. 280
Signals........................................................................................282
Settings.......................................................................................283
Monitored data............................................................................284
Technical data............................................................................ 284
Motor load jam protection 51LR...................................................... 285
Identification............................................................................... 285
Function block............................................................................ 285
Functionality............................................................................... 285
Application.................................................................................. 287
Signals........................................................................................287
Settings.......................................................................................287
Monitored data............................................................................288
Technical data............................................................................ 288
Loss of load supervision 37M.......................................................... 289
Identification............................................................................... 289
Function block............................................................................ 289
Functionality............................................................................... 289
Application.................................................................................. 290
Signals........................................................................................291
Settings.......................................................................................291
Monitored data............................................................................292
Technical data............................................................................ 292
Loss of phase 37............................................................................. 293
Identification............................................................................... 293
Function block............................................................................ 293
Functionality............................................................................... 293
Application.................................................................................. 295
Signals........................................................................................295
Settings.......................................................................................296
Monitored data............................................................................297
10 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Technical data............................................................................ 297

Thermal overload protection for motors 49M...................................297
Identification............................................................................... 297
Function block............................................................................ 298
Functionality............................................................................... 298
Application.................................................................................. 307
Signals........................................................................................311
Settings.......................................................................................312
Monitored data............................................................................313
Technical data............................................................................ 313
Ground-fault protection......................................................................... 314
Non-directional ground-fault protection 51N, 51G, 50N, 50G,
50N-3, 50G-3...................................................................................314
Identification............................................................................... 314
Function block............................................................................ 314
Functionality............................................................................... 314
Application.................................................................................. 319
Signals........................................................................................319
Settings.......................................................................................321
Monitored data............................................................................324
Technical data............................................................................ 325
Directional ground-fault protection 67/51N, 67/50N........................ 326
Identification............................................................................... 326
Function block............................................................................ 326
Functionality............................................................................... 326
Directional ground-fault principles.............................................. 332
Directional ground-fault characteristics...................................... 340
Application.................................................................................. 350
Signals........................................................................................352
Settings.......................................................................................353
Monitored data............................................................................357
615 series ANSI 11

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Technical data............................................................................ 359

Transient/intermittent ground-fault protection 67NIEF.....................360
Identification............................................................................... 360
Function block............................................................................ 361
Functionality............................................................................... 361
Application.................................................................................. 366
Signals........................................................................................368
Settings.......................................................................................368
Monitored data............................................................................369
Technical data............................................................................ 369
Admittance-based ground-fault protection 21YN.............................370
Identification............................................................................... 370
Function block............................................................................ 370
Functionality............................................................................... 371
Neutral admittance characteristics............................................. 386
Application.................................................................................. 393
Signals........................................................................................398
Settings.......................................................................................399
Monitored data............................................................................400
Technical data............................................................................ 400
Harmonics-based ground-fault protection 51NHA........................... 401
Identification............................................................................... 401
Function block............................................................................ 401
Functionality............................................................................... 401
Application.................................................................................. 405
Signals........................................................................................406
Settings.......................................................................................407
Monitored data............................................................................408
Technical data............................................................................ 408
Wattmetric-based ground-fault protection 32N................................ 409
Identification............................................................................... 409
Function block............................................................................ 409
Functionality............................................................................... 409
12 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents

Application.................................................................................. 418
Signals........................................................................................421
Settings.......................................................................................421
Monitored data............................................................................423
Technical data............................................................................ 423
Third harmonic-based stator ground-fault protection 27/59THN..... 424
Identification............................................................................... 424
Function block............................................................................ 424
Functionality............................................................................... 424
Application.................................................................................. 428
Signals........................................................................................435
Settings.......................................................................................435
Monitored data............................................................................436
Technical data............................................................................ 437
Multifrequency admittance-based ground-fault protection 67YN.....437
Identification............................................................................... 437
Function block............................................................................ 438
Functionality............................................................................... 438
Application.................................................................................. 457
Signals........................................................................................458
Settings.......................................................................................458
Monitored data............................................................................459
Technical data............................................................................ 460
Differential protection............................................................................460
Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer 87L...... 460
Identification............................................................................... 460
Function block............................................................................ 460
Functionality............................................................................... 461
Commissioning........................................................................... 483
Application.................................................................................. 489
Signals........................................................................................495
Settings.......................................................................................496
Monitored Data........................................................................... 498
615 series ANSI 13

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Technical data............................................................................ 499

Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for two-
winding transformers 87T................................................................ 500
Identification............................................................................... 500
Function block............................................................................ 500
Functionality............................................................................... 500
Application.................................................................................. 514
CT connections and transformation ratio correction...................527
Signals........................................................................................531
Settings.......................................................................................532
Monitored data............................................................................534
Technical data............................................................................ 537
Numerically stabilized low-impedance restricted ground-fault
protection 87LOZREF......................................................................538
Identification............................................................................... 538
Function block............................................................................ 538
Functionality............................................................................... 538
Application.................................................................................. 542
Signals........................................................................................548
Settings.......................................................................................548
Monitored data............................................................................549
Technical data............................................................................ 549
High-impedance differential protection 87A, 87B, 87C....................550
Identification............................................................................... 550
Function block............................................................................ 550
Functionality............................................................................... 551
Application.................................................................................. 553
Example calculations for busbar high-impedance differential
protection....................................................................................561
Signals........................................................................................564
Settings.......................................................................................565
Monitored data............................................................................567
Technical data............................................................................ 567
14 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Motor differential protection 87G..................................................... 568

Identification............................................................................... 568
Function block............................................................................ 568
Functionality............................................................................... 568
Application.................................................................................. 575
Signals........................................................................................584
Settings.......................................................................................584
Monitored data............................................................................585
Technical data............................................................................ 587
Unbalance protection............................................................................587
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection 46.................................587
Identification............................................................................... 587
Function block............................................................................ 587
Functionality............................................................................... 588
Application.................................................................................. 590
Signals........................................................................................591
Settings.......................................................................................591
Monitored data............................................................................592
Technical data............................................................................ 593
Phase discontinuity protection 46PD...............................................593
Identification............................................................................... 593
Function block............................................................................ 594
Functionality............................................................................... 594
Application.................................................................................. 596
Signals........................................................................................597
Settings.......................................................................................598
Monitored data............................................................................598
Technical data............................................................................ 598
Phase reversal protection 46R........................................................ 599
Identification............................................................................... 599
Function block............................................................................ 599
Functionality............................................................................... 599
Application.................................................................................. 600
Signals........................................................................................601
615 series ANSI 15

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Settings.......................................................................................601
Monitored data............................................................................602
Technical data............................................................................ 602
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection for machines 46M........ 603
Identification............................................................................... 603
Function block............................................................................ 603
Functionality............................................................................... 603
Application.................................................................................. 607
Signals........................................................................................607
Settings.......................................................................................608
Monitored data............................................................................609
Technical data............................................................................ 609
Voltage protection.................................................................................610
Three-phase overvoltage protection 59...........................................610
Identification............................................................................... 610
Function block............................................................................ 610
Functionality............................................................................... 610
Application.................................................................................. 615
Signals........................................................................................615
Settings.......................................................................................616
Monitored data............................................................................617
Technical data............................................................................ 617
Three-phase undervoltage protection 27.........................................618
Identification............................................................................... 618
Function block............................................................................ 618
Functionality............................................................................... 618
Application.................................................................................. 623
Signals........................................................................................624
Settings.......................................................................................625
Monitored data............................................................................626
Technical data............................................................................ 626
16 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents

Residual overvoltage protection 59N, 59G......................................627
Identification............................................................................... 627
Function block............................................................................ 627
Functionality............................................................................... 628
Application.................................................................................. 630
Signals........................................................................................630
Settings.......................................................................................631
Monitored data............................................................................631
Technical data............................................................................ 631
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection 47................................ 632
Identification............................................................................... 632
Function block............................................................................ 632
Functionality............................................................................... 632
Application.................................................................................. 634
Signals........................................................................................634
Settings.......................................................................................635
Monitored data............................................................................635
Technical data............................................................................ 636
Positive-sequence undervoltage protection 47U, 27PS.................. 636
Identification............................................................................... 636
Function block............................................................................ 637
Functionality............................................................................... 637
Application.................................................................................. 638
Signals........................................................................................639
Settings.......................................................................................640
Monitored data............................................................................640
Technical data............................................................................ 641
Overexcitation protection 24............................................................641
Identification............................................................................... 641
Function block............................................................................ 642
Functionality............................................................................... 642
Application.................................................................................. 651
615 series ANSI 17

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Signals........................................................................................655
Settings.......................................................................................656
Monitored data............................................................................657
Technical data............................................................................ 658
Low-voltage ride-through protection 27RT...................................... 658
Identification............................................................................... 658
Function block............................................................................ 658
Functionality............................................................................... 658
Application.................................................................................. 663
Signals........................................................................................664
Settings.......................................................................................665
Monitored data............................................................................666
Technical data............................................................................ 666
Voltage vector shift protection 78V..................................................666
Identification............................................................................... 666
Function block............................................................................ 666
Functionality............................................................................... 667
Application.................................................................................. 668
Signals........................................................................................670
Settings.......................................................................................671
Monitored data............................................................................672
Technical data............................................................................ 672
Three-phase remnant undervoltage protection 27R........................672
Identification............................................................................... 672
Function block............................................................................ 673
Functionality............................................................................... 673
Application.................................................................................. 675
Signals........................................................................................676
Settings.......................................................................................676
Monitored data............................................................................677
Technical data............................................................................ 677
Frequency protection............................................................................ 678
Frequency protection 81..................................................................678
Identification............................................................................... 678
Function block............................................................................ 678
Functionality............................................................................... 678
18 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Application.................................................................................. 682
Signals........................................................................................683
Settings.......................................................................................684
Monitored data............................................................................684
Technical data............................................................................ 685
Impedance protection........................................................................... 685
Out-of-step protection 78.................................................................685
Identification............................................................................... 685
Function block............................................................................ 686
Functionality............................................................................... 686
Application.................................................................................. 692
Signals........................................................................................693
Settings.......................................................................................694
Monitored data............................................................................695
Technical data............................................................................ 695
Three-phase underexcitation protection 40..................................... 696
Identification............................................................................... 696
Function block............................................................................ 696
Functionality............................................................................... 696
Application.................................................................................. 700
Signals........................................................................................703
Settings.......................................................................................704
Monitored data............................................................................705
Technical data............................................................................ 706
Three-phase underimpedance protection 21G................................706
Identification............................................................................... 706
Function block............................................................................ 706
Functionality............................................................................... 707
Application.................................................................................. 710
Signals........................................................................................715
Settings.......................................................................................715
Monitored data............................................................................716
Technical data............................................................................ 717
Power protection...................................................................................717
Underpower protection 32U.............................................................717
Identification............................................................................... 717
615 series ANSI 19

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block............................................................................ 717

Functionality............................................................................... 718
Application.................................................................................. 721
Signals........................................................................................722
Settings.......................................................................................722
Monitored data............................................................................723
Technical data............................................................................ 724
Reverse power/directional overpower protection 32R/32O............. 724
Identification............................................................................... 724
Function block............................................................................ 724
Functionality............................................................................... 725
Application.................................................................................. 729
Signals........................................................................................731
Settings.......................................................................................732
Monitored data............................................................................732
Technical data............................................................................ 733
Directional reactive power undervoltage protection 32Q-27............733
Identification............................................................................... 733
Function block............................................................................ 734
Functionality............................................................................... 734
Application.................................................................................. 737
Signals........................................................................................739
Settings.......................................................................................739
Monitored data............................................................................740
Technical data............................................................................ 740
Arc protection AFD............................................................................... 740
Identification.................................................................................... 740
Function block................................................................................. 741
Functionality.................................................................................... 741
Application....................................................................................... 743
Signals.............................................................................................747
Settings............................................................................................748
Monitored data.................................................................................748
Technical data................................................................................. 749
Technical revision history................................................................ 749
Motor start-up supervision 66/51LRS................................................... 749
20 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Identification.................................................................................... 749
Function block................................................................................. 750
Functionality.................................................................................... 750
Application....................................................................................... 756
Signals.............................................................................................760
Settings............................................................................................760
Monitored data.................................................................................761
Technical data................................................................................. 762
Multipurpose protection MAP................................................................762
Identification.................................................................................... 762
Function block................................................................................. 762
Functionality.................................................................................... 763
Application....................................................................................... 764
Signals.............................................................................................765
Settings............................................................................................765
Monitored data.................................................................................766
Technical data................................................................................. 766
Section 5 Protection related functions...............................................767

Three-phase inrush detector INR......................................................... 767
Identification.................................................................................... 767
Function block................................................................................. 767
Functionality.................................................................................... 767
Application....................................................................................... 769
Signals.............................................................................................770
Settings............................................................................................771
Monitored data.................................................................................771
Technical data................................................................................. 772
Circuit breaker failure protection 50BF................................................. 772
Identification.................................................................................... 772
Function block................................................................................. 772
Functionality.................................................................................... 773
Application....................................................................................... 780
615 series ANSI 21

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Signals.............................................................................................782
Settings............................................................................................782
Monitored data.................................................................................783
Technical data................................................................................. 783
Master trip 86/94...................................................................................784
Identification.................................................................................... 784
Function block................................................................................. 784
Functionality.................................................................................... 784
Application....................................................................................... 786
Signals.............................................................................................787
Settings............................................................................................788
Monitored data.................................................................................788
High-impedance fault detection HIZ..................................................... 788
Identification.................................................................................... 788
Function block ................................................................................ 789
Functionality.................................................................................... 789
Application....................................................................................... 792
Signals.............................................................................................793
Settings............................................................................................793
Monitored data.................................................................................794
Binary signal transfer BST.................................................................... 794
Identification.................................................................................... 794
Function block................................................................................. 795
Functionality.................................................................................... 795
Application....................................................................................... 797
Signals.............................................................................................798
Settings............................................................................................799
Technical data................................................................................. 800
Emergency start-up 62EST.................................................................. 800
Identification.................................................................................... 800
Function block................................................................................. 800
Functionality.................................................................................... 801
22 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Application....................................................................................... 802
Signals.............................................................................................802
Settings............................................................................................802
Monitored data.................................................................................803
Technical data................................................................................. 803
Fault locator 21FL.................................................................................803
Identification.................................................................................... 803
Function block................................................................................. 804
Functionality.................................................................................... 804
Phase selection logic..................................................................805
Fault impedance and distance calculation..................................806
Trigger detection.........................................................................822
Alarm indication.......................................................................... 823
Recorded data............................................................................ 824
Application....................................................................................... 825
Signals.............................................................................................826
Settings............................................................................................827
Monitored data.................................................................................828
Technical data................................................................................. 831
Switch onto fault SOTF.........................................................................831
Identification.................................................................................... 831
Function block................................................................................. 831
Functionality.................................................................................... 832
Application....................................................................................... 833
Signals.............................................................................................833
Settings............................................................................................833
Monitored data.................................................................................834
Technical data................................................................................. 834
Section 6 Supervision functions........................................................ 835

Trip circuit supervision TCM................................................................. 835
Identification.................................................................................... 835
Function block................................................................................. 835
Functionality ................................................................................... 835
615 series ANSI 23

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Application....................................................................................... 836
Signals.............................................................................................844
Settings............................................................................................845
Monitored data.................................................................................845
Current circuit supervision CCM........................................................... 845
Identification.................................................................................... 845
Function block................................................................................. 846
Functionality.................................................................................... 846
Application....................................................................................... 848
Signals.............................................................................................852
Settings............................................................................................853
Monitored data.................................................................................853
Technical data................................................................................. 853
Current transformer supervision for high-impedance protection
scheme MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C......................................................... 854
Identification.................................................................................... 854
Function block................................................................................. 854
Functionality.................................................................................... 854
Measuring modes............................................................................ 856
Application....................................................................................... 856
Signals.............................................................................................858
Settings............................................................................................859
Monitored data.................................................................................860
Technical data................................................................................. 861
Protection communication supervision PCS.........................................861
Identification.................................................................................... 861
Function block................................................................................. 861
Functionality.................................................................................... 862
Application....................................................................................... 864
Signals.............................................................................................865
Settings............................................................................................865
Monitored data.................................................................................865
Fuse failure supervision 60...................................................................866
24 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Identification.................................................................................... 866
Function block................................................................................. 866
Functionality.................................................................................... 867
Application....................................................................................... 870
Signals.............................................................................................871
Settings............................................................................................872
Monitored data.................................................................................873
Technical data................................................................................. 873
Runtime counter for machines and devices OPTM.............................. 874
Identification.................................................................................... 874
Function block................................................................................. 874
Functionality.................................................................................... 874
Application....................................................................................... 876
Signals.............................................................................................876
Settings............................................................................................876
Monitored data.................................................................................877
Technical data................................................................................. 877
Section 7 Condition monitoring functions.......................................... 879

Circuit breaker condition monitoring 52CM...........................................879
Identification.................................................................................... 879
Function block................................................................................. 879
Functionality.................................................................................... 879
Circuit breaker status..................................................................881
Circuit breaker operation monitoring.......................................... 881
Breaker contact travel time.........................................................882
Operation counter.......................................................................885
Accumulation of Iyt......................................................................885
Remaining life of circuit breaker................................................. 887
Circuit breaker spring-charged indication................................... 888
Gas pressure supervision...........................................................889
Application....................................................................................... 889
Signals.............................................................................................893
Settings............................................................................................894
Monitored data.................................................................................895
615 series ANSI 25

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Technical data................................................................................. 896

Section 8 Measurement functions..................................................... 897

Basic measurements............................................................................ 897
Functions......................................................................................... 897
Measurement functionality...............................................................898
Measurement function applications................................................. 905
Three-phase current measurement IA, IB, IC..................................906
Identification............................................................................... 906
Function block............................................................................ 906
Signals........................................................................................907
Settings.......................................................................................907
Monitored data............................................................................908
Technical data............................................................................ 909
Three-phase voltage measurement VA, VB, VC............................. 910
Identification............................................................................... 910
Function block............................................................................ 910
Signals........................................................................................910
Settings.......................................................................................911
Monitored data............................................................................911
Technical data............................................................................ 913
Residual current measurement IG...................................................913
Identification............................................................................... 913
Function block............................................................................ 914
Signals........................................................................................914
Settings.......................................................................................914
Monitored data............................................................................915
Technical data............................................................................ 915
Residual voltage measurement VG.................................................916
Identification............................................................................... 916
Function block............................................................................ 916
Signals........................................................................................916
Settings.......................................................................................917
Monitored data............................................................................917
Technical data............................................................................ 918
26 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Frequency measurement f...............................................................918

Identification............................................................................... 918
Function block............................................................................ 918
Functionality............................................................................... 919
Signals........................................................................................919
Settings.......................................................................................919
Monitored data............................................................................920
Technical data............................................................................ 920
Sequence current measurement I1, I2, I0....................................... 920
Identification............................................................................... 920
Function block............................................................................ 921
Signals........................................................................................921
Settings.......................................................................................921
Monitored data............................................................................922
Technical data............................................................................ 923
Sequence voltage measurement V1, V2, V0...................................924
Identification............................................................................... 924
Function block............................................................................ 924
Signals........................................................................................924
Settings.......................................................................................924
Monitored data............................................................................925
Technical data............................................................................ 926
Three-phase power and energy measurement P, E........................927
Identification............................................................................... 927
Function block............................................................................ 927
Signals........................................................................................927
Settings.......................................................................................928
Monitored data............................................................................928
Technical data............................................................................ 930
Single-phase power and energy measurement SP, SE.................. 930
Identification............................................................................... 930
Function block............................................................................ 931
Signals........................................................................................931
Settings.......................................................................................931
Monitored data............................................................................932
Technical data............................................................................ 937
Digital fault recorder DFR..................................................................... 937
615 series ANSI 27

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Identification.................................................................................... 937
Functionality.................................................................................... 937
Recorded analog inputs..............................................................937
Triggering alternatives................................................................ 938
Length of recordings...................................................................939
Sampling frequencies................................................................. 940
Uploading of recordings..............................................................940
Deletion of recordings.................................................................941
Storage mode............................................................................. 942
Pre-trigger and post-trigger data................................................ 942
Operation modes........................................................................ 942
Exclusion mode.......................................................................... 943
Configuration................................................................................... 943
Application....................................................................................... 944
Settings............................................................................................945
Monitored data.................................................................................949
Tap changer position indication 84T.....................................................950
Identification.................................................................................... 950
Function block................................................................................. 950
Functionality.................................................................................... 950
Application....................................................................................... 954
Signals.............................................................................................954
Settings............................................................................................955
Monitored data.................................................................................955
Technical data................................................................................. 956
Section 9 Control functions............................................................... 957

Circuit breaker control 52, Disconnector control 29DS and
Grounding switch control 29GS............................................................ 957
Identification.................................................................................... 957
Function block................................................................................. 958
Functionality.................................................................................... 958
Application....................................................................................... 964
Signals.............................................................................................965
Settings............................................................................................968
Monitored data.................................................................................970
28 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents

Disconnector position indication 52-TOC, 29DS and Grounding
switch indication 29GS......................................................................... 971
Identification.................................................................................... 971
Function block................................................................................. 972
Functionality.................................................................................... 972
Application....................................................................................... 973
Signals.............................................................................................973
Settings............................................................................................974
Monitored data.................................................................................975
Synchronism and energizing check 25................................................. 976
Identification.................................................................................... 976
Function block................................................................................. 976
Functionality.................................................................................... 976
Application....................................................................................... 986
Signals.............................................................................................988
Settings............................................................................................989
Monitored data.................................................................................990
Technical data................................................................................. 991
Autoreclosing 79................................................................................... 991
Identification.................................................................................... 991
Function block................................................................................. 992
Functionality.................................................................................... 992
Protection signal definition..........................................................992
Zone coordination.......................................................................993
Master and slave scheme...........................................................993
Thermal overload blocking......................................................... 994
Signal collection and delay logic.................................................996
Shot initiation............................................................................ 1000
Shot pointer controller.............................................................. 1004
Reclose controller.....................................................................1005
Sequence controller..................................................................1007
Protection coordination controller............................................. 1008
Circuit breaker controller.......................................................... 1009
Counters........................................................................................ 1011
615 series ANSI 29

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Application..................................................................................... 1011
Shot initiation............................................................................ 1013
Sequence................................................................................. 1017
Configuration examples............................................................1019
Delayed initiation lines..............................................................1023
Shot initiation from protection pickup signal............................. 1024
Fast trip in Switch on to fault.................................................... 1025
Signals...........................................................................................1026
Settings..........................................................................................1027
Monitored data...............................................................................1030
Technical data............................................................................... 1031
Technical revision history.............................................................. 1031
Section 10 Power quality measurement functions............................ 1033

Current total demand distortion PQI................................................... 1033
Identification.................................................................................. 1033
Function block............................................................................... 1033
Functionality.................................................................................. 1033
Operation principle........................................................................ 1033
Application..................................................................................... 1034
Signals...........................................................................................1035
Settings..........................................................................................1036
Monitored data...............................................................................1036
Voltage total harmonic distortion PQVPH...........................................1037
Identification.................................................................................. 1037
Function block............................................................................... 1037
Functionality.................................................................................. 1037
Application..................................................................................... 1039
Signals...........................................................................................1039
Settings..........................................................................................1039
Monitored data...............................................................................1040
Voltage variation PQSS...................................................................... 1041
Identification.................................................................................. 1041
Function block............................................................................... 1041
Functionality.................................................................................. 1041
Phase mode setting..................................................................1042
30 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Variation detection....................................................................1043
Variation validation................................................................... 1044
Duration measurement............................................................. 1048
Three/single-phase selection variation examples.....................1049
Recorded data............................................................................... 1051
Application..................................................................................... 1054
Signals...........................................................................................1056
Settings..........................................................................................1056
Monitored data...............................................................................1058
Technical data............................................................................... 1061
Voltage unbalance PQVUB................................................................ 1061
Identification.................................................................................. 1061
Function block............................................................................... 1062
Functionality.................................................................................. 1062
Application..................................................................................... 1068
Signals...........................................................................................1069
Settings..........................................................................................1070
Monitored data...............................................................................1071
Technical data............................................................................... 1072
Section 11 General function block features.......................................1073

Definite time characteristics................................................................1073
Definite time operation...................................................................1073
Current based inverse definite minimum time characteristics............ 1077
IDMT curves for overcurrent protection......................................... 1077
Standard inverse-time characteristics...................................... 1082
User-programmable inverse-time characteristics..................... 1097
RI and RD-type inverse-time characteristics............................ 1097
Reset in inverse-time modes......................................................... 1101
Inverse-timer freezing....................................................................1110
Voltage based inverse definite minimum time characteristics............ 1111
IDMT curves for overvoltage protection.........................................1111
Standard inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage protection1114
User programmable inverse-time characteristics for
overvoltage protection.............................................................. 1118
IDMT curve saturation of overvoltage protection......................1118
IDMT curves for undervoltage protection...................................... 1119
615 series ANSI 31

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Standard inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage

protection..................................................................................1119
User-programmable inverse-time characteristics for
undervoltage protection............................................................ 1122
IDMT curve saturation of undervoltage protection....................1122
Frequency measurement and protection............................................ 1123
Frequency adaptivity and generator start-up protection..................... 1123
Measurement modes.......................................................................... 1125
Calculated measurements.................................................................. 1127
Section 12 Requirements for measurement transformers.................1131

Current transformers...........................................................................1131
Current transformer requirements for overcurrent protection........ 1131
Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit factor..1131
Non-directional overcurrent protection..................................... 1132
Example for non-directional overcurrent protection..................1133
Current transformer requirements for transformer differential
protection.......................................................................................1134
Section 13 Protection relay's physical connections...........................1139

Module slot numbering....................................................................... 1139
Protective ground connections........................................................... 1141
Binary and analog connections...........................................................1141
Communication connections...............................................................1142
Ethernet RJ-45 front connection....................................................1142
Ethernet rear connections............................................................. 1143
EIA-232 serial rear connection...................................................... 1144
EIA-485 serial rear connection...................................................... 1144
Line differential protection communication connection..................1144
Optical ST serial rear connection.................................................. 1145
Communication interfaces and protocols...................................... 1145
Rear communication modules....................................................... 1146
COM0001-COM0014 jumper locations and connections ........ 1151
COM0023 jumper locations and connections ..........................1154
COM0008 and COM0010 jumper locations and connections.. 1160
COM0032-COM0034 jumper locations and connections......... 1163
Section 14 Technical data................................................................. 1167
Section 15 Protection relay and functionality tests............................1175
Section 16 Applicable standards and regulations............................. 1179
32 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table of contents
Section 17 Glossary.......................................................................... 1181
615 series ANSI 33

Technical Manual
34
1MAC059074-MB A Section 1
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 This manual
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical
data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the
engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
1.2 Intended audience
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel,
who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal
service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection
equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the protection
relays. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in
handling electronic equipment.
615 series ANSI 35

Technical Manual
Section 1 1MAC059074-MB A
Introduction
1.3 Product documentation
1.3.1 Product documentation set
deinstallation & disposal

Decommissioning,
Commissioning
Maintenance
Engineering
Planning &
Installation
Operation
Quick start guide purchase
Quick installation guide
Brochure
Product guide
Operation manual
Installation manual
Connection diagram
Engineering manual
Technical manual
Application manual
Communication protocol manual
IEC 61850 engineering guide
Point list manual
Cyber security deployment guideline
GUID-12DC16B2-2DC1-48DF-8734-0C8B7116124C V2 EN
Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle
Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from the

ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/relion.
1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date Product series version History
A/2018-04-23 5.0 FP1 First release
Download the latest documents from the ABB Web site

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.
36 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Introduction
1.3.3 Related documentation

Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB Web site
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.
1.4 Symbols and conventions
1.4.1 Symbols
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could
result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
personal injury.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard
which could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or
property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project
or how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that
under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in
degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, comply
fully with all warning and caution notices.
1.4.2 Document conventions

A particular convention may not be used in this manual.
615 series ANSI 37

Technical Manual
Introduction
• Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also
contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push
button icons.
To navigate between the options, use and .
• Menu paths are presented in bold.
Select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
To save the changes in nonvolatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Parameter values are indicated with quotation marks.
The corresponding parameter values are "Enabled" and "Disabled".
• Input/output messages and monitored data names are shown in Courier font.
When the function picks up, the PICKUP output is set to TRUE.
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and mm. If it is not specifically mentioned,
the dimension is in mm.
• This document assumes that the parameter setting visibility is "Advanced".
1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols

All available functions are listed in the table. All of them may not be applicable to all
products.
Table 1: Functions included in the relays
Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/C37.2-2008

RED615 REF615 REG615 REM615 RET615
Protection
Three-phase non- PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 51P-1 51P 51P (1)
directional overcurrent PHLPTOC2 3I> (2) 51P-2 51P (2)
protection, low stage
Three-phase non- PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 50P-1 50P-1 50P-1 50P-1 (1)
directional overcurrent PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 50P-2 50P-2 50P-1 (2)
protection, high stage
Three-phase non- PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P-3 50P-3 50P-3 50P-3 50P-3 (1)
directional overcurrent PHIPTOC2 3I>>> (2) 50P-3 (2)
protection, instantaneous
stage
Three-phase directional DPHLPDOC1 3I> -> (1) 67/51P-1 67/51P-1 67/51P-1 67/51P-1(2)
overcurrent protection, low DPHLPDOC2 3I> -> (2) 67/51P-2 67/51P-2 67/51P-2(2)
stage
Three-phase directional DPHHPDOC1 3I>> -> (1) 67/50P-1 67/50P-1 67/50P-1
overcurrent protection, DPHHPDOC2 3I>> -> (2) 67/50P-2
high stage
Three-phase voltage- PHPVOC1 3I(U)> (1) 51V
dependent overcurrent
protection
Non-directional ground- EFLPTOC1 Io> (1) 51G 51G
fault protection, low stage
Table continues on next page
38 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Introduction

EFLPTOC2 Io> (2) 51N-1 51N (2)
Non-directional ground- EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 50G-1 50G-1 50G-1 50G-1
fault protection, high stage EFHPTOC2 Io>> (2) 50G-2 50G-2 50G-2 (2)
EFHPTOC3 Io>> (3) 50N-1
EFHPTOC4 Io>> (4) 50N-2
Non-directional ground- EFIPTOC1 Io>>> (1) 50G-3
fault protection, EFIPTOC2 Io>>> (2) 50N-3
instantaneous stage
Directional ground-fault DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67/51N-1 67/51N-1 67/51N-1 67/51N 67/51N-1 (2)
protection, low stage DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67/51N-2 67/51N-2 67/51N-2 67/51N-2 (2)
Directional ground-fault DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> (1) 67/50N-1 67/50N-1 67/50N-1
protection, high stage DEFHPDEF2 Io>> -> (2) 67/50N-2
Admittance-based ground- EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN-1 21YN-1
fault protection EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN-2 21YN-2
EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN-3 21YN-3
Wattmetric-based ground- WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N-1 32N-1
fault protection WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N-2 32N-2
WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N-3 32N-3
Transient/intermittent INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF (1) 67NIEF 67NIEF
ground-fault protection
Harmonics-based ground- HAEFPTOC1 Io>HA (1) 51NHA 51NHA
fault protection
Negative-sequence NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46-1 46-1 46 (1)
overcurrent protection NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46-2 46-2 46 (2)
Phase discontinuity PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> (1) 46PD 46PD
protection
Residual overvoltage ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G 59G 59G 59G-1 59G (1)
protection ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59N-1 59N-1 59N-1 59N-1 59N (1)
ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59N-2 59N-2 59N (2)
Three-phase undervoltage PHPTUV1 3U< (1) 27-1 27-1 27-1 27-1 27-1 (2)
protection PHPTUV2 3U< (2) 27-2 27-2 27-2 27-2 27-2 (2)
PHPTUV3 3U< (3) 27-3 27-3
Three-phase overvoltage PHPTOV1 3U> (1) 59-1 59-1 59-1 59-1 59-1 (2)
protection PHPTOV2 3U> (2) 59-2 59-2 59-2 59-2 59-2 (2)
PHPTOV3 3U> (3) 59-3 59-3
Positive-sequence PSPTUV1 U1< (1) 47U-1 47U-1 47U-1 27PS
undervoltage protection PSPTUV2 U1< (2) 47U-2 47U-2
Negative-sequence NSPTOV1 U2> (1) 47-1 47-1 47-1 47-1
overvoltage protection NSPTOV2 U2> (2) 47-2 47-2 47-2
Three-phase remnant MSVPR1 3U< (1) 27R-1 27R
undervoltage protection MSVPR2 3U< (2) 27R-2
Frequency protection FRPFRQ1 f>/f<,df/dt (1) 81-1 81-1 81-1 81-1 81-1 (2)
FRPFRQ2 f>/f<,df/dt (2) 81-2 81-2 81-2 81-2 81-2 (2)
FRPFRQ3 f>/f<,df/dt (3) 81-3 81-3 81-3
FRPFRQ4 f>/f<,df/dt (4) 81-4 81-4 81-4
FRPFRQ5 f>/f<,df/dt (5) 81-5 81-5
FRPFRQ6 f>/f<,df/dt (6) 81-6 81-6
Overexcitation protection OEPVPH1 U/f> (1) 24 24-1 24-1 (2)
OEPVPH2 U/f> (2) 24-2 24-2 (2)
615 series ANSI 39

Technical Manual
Introduction

Three-phase thermal T1PTTR1 3Ith>F (1) 49F-1 49F-1
protection for feeders,
cables and distribution
transformers
Three-phase thermal T2PTTR1 3Ith>T/G/C (1) 49T-1 49T-1 49T (1)
overload protection, two
time constants
Negative-sequence MNSPTOC1 I2>M (1) 46M-1 46M-1
overcurrent protection for MNSPTOC2 I2>M (2) 46M-2 46M-2
machines
Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC1 3I< (1) 37M-1
LOFLPTUC2 3I< (2) 37M-2
Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC1 Ist> (1) 51LR-1
JAMPTOC2 Ist> (2) 51LR-2
Motor start-up supervision STTPMSU1 Is2t n< (1) 66/51LRS
Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC1 I2>> (1) 46R
Thermal overload MPTTR1 3Ith>M (1) 49M
protection for motors
Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO1 BST (1) BST-1
Motor differential protection MPDIF1 3dl>M 87G-1 87M
High-impedance HIAPDIF1 dHi_A>(1) 87A 87A
differential protection for
phase A
High-impedance HIBPDIF1 dHi_B>(1) 87B 87B
phase B
High-impedance HICPDIF1 dHi_C>(1) 87C 87C
phase C
Stabilized and TR2PTDF1 3dI>T (1) 87T
instantaneous differential
protection for two-winding
transformers
Numerically stabilized low- LREFPNDF1 dIoLo> (1) 87LOZREF 87LOZREF (2)
impedance restricted
Circuit breaker failure CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF (1) 50BF-1 50BF-1 50BF-1 50BF 50BF (1)
protection CCBRBRF2 3I>/Io>BF (2) 50BF-2 50BF (2)
Three-phase inrush INRPHAR1 3I2f> (1) INR-1 INR-1 INR-1
detector
Switch onto fault CBPSOF1 SOTF (1) SOTF-1 SOTF-1
Master trip TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 86/94-1 86/94-1 86/94-1 86/94-1 86/94-1
TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 86/94-2 86/94-2 86/94-2 86/94-2 86/94-2
TRPPTRC3 Master Trip (3) 86/94-3 86/94-3 86/94-3 86/94-3
TRPPTRC6 Master Trip (6) 86/94-6
Arc protection ARCSARC1 ARC (1) AFD-1 AFD-1 AFD-1 AFD-1 (2)
ARCSARC2 ARC (2) AFD-2 AFD-2 AFD-2 AFD-2 (2)
ARCSARC3 ARC (3) AFD-3 AFD-3 AFD-3 AFD-3 (2)
Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC1 MAP (1) MAP-1 MAP-1 MAP-1 MAP-1 MAP-1
MAPGAPC2 MAP (2) MAP-2 MAP-2 MAP-2 MAP-2 MAP-2
40 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Introduction

Fault locator SCEFRFLO1 FLOC (1) 21FL-1 21FL-1
Loss of phase PHPTUC1 3I< (1) 37-1
Line differential protection LNPLDF1 3Id/I> (1) 87L-1
with in-zone power
transformer
High-impedance fault PHIZ1 HIF (1) HIZ-1 HIZ-1
detection
Third harmonic-based H3EFPSEF1 dUo>/Uo3H (1) 27/59THN
stator ground-fault
protection
Underpower protection DUPPDPR1 P< (1) 32U-1 32U-1 32U-1
DUPPDPR2 P< (2) 32U-2 32U-2 32U-2
Reverse power/directional DOPPDPR1 P>/Q> (1) 32R/32O-1 32R-32 32O-1
overpower protection DOPPDPR2 P>/Q> (2) 32R/32O-2 32R-32 32O-2
DOPPDPR3 P>/Q> (3) 32R-32 32O-3
Three-phase UEXPDIS1 X< (1) 40-1
underexcitation protection
Three-phase UZPDIS1 Z<G (1) 21G-1
underimpedance
protection
Out-of-step protection OOSRPSB1 OOS (1) 78-1
Multifrequency admittance- MFADPSDE1 Io> ->Y (1) 67YN-1
based ground-fault
protection
Interconnection functions
Directional reactive power DQPTUV1 Q> ->,3U< (1) 32Q-27
undervoltage protection
Low-voltage ride-through LVRTPTUV1 U<RT (1) 27RT-1
protection LVRTPTUV2 U<RT (2) 27RT-2
LVRTPTUV3 U<RT (3) 27RT-3
Voltage vector shift VVSPPAM1 VS (1) 78V-1
protection
Power quality
Current total demand CMHAI1 PQM3I (1) PQI-1 PQI-1 PQI-1
distortion CMHAI2 PQM3I(B)
615 series ANSI 41

Technical Manual
Introduction

Voltage total harmonic VMHAI1 PQM3U (1) PQVPH-1 PQVPH-1 PQVPH-1
distortion VMHAI2 PQM3U(B) PQVPH-2
Voltage variation PHQVVR1 PQMU (1) PQSS-1 PQSS-1 PQSS-1
PHQVVR2 PQ 3U<>(B) PQSS-2
Voltage unbalance VSQVUB1 PQUUB (1) PQVUB-1 PQVUB-1 PQVUB-1
Control
Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB (1) 52-1 52-1 52-1 52 52 (1)
CBXCBR2 I <-> O CB (2) 52-2 52 (2)
Disconnector control DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC (1) 29DS-1 29DS-1 29DS-1 29DS-1 29DS-1
DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC (2) 29DS-2 29DS-2 29DS-2 29DS-2 29DS-2
Grounding switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC (1) 29GS-1 29GS-1 29GS-1 29GS-1 29GS-1
Disconnector position DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) 52-TOC 52-TOC 52-TOC 52-TOC 52-TOC
indication DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) 29DS-1 29DS-1 29DS-1 29DS-1 29DS-1
DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) 29DS-2 29DS-2 29DS-2 29DS-2 29DS-2
Grounding switch ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) 29GS-1 29GS-1 29GS-1 29GS-1 29GS-1
indication ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) 29GS-2 29GS-2 29GS-2 29GS-2 29GS-2
Emergency startup ESMGAPC1 ESTART (1) 62EST
Autoreclosing DARREC1 O -> I (1) 79 79
Tap changer position TPOSYLTC1 TPOSM (1) 84T
indication
Synchronism and SECRSYN1 SYNC (1) 25 25 25 25 (2)
energizing check
Condition monitoring
Circuit-breaker condition SSCBR1 CBCM (1) 52CM-1 52CM-1 52CM-1 52CM 52CM (1)
monitoring SSCBR2 CBCM (2) 52CM-2 52CM (2)
Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM-1 TCM-1 TCM-1 TCM-1 TCM-1
TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM-2 TCM-2 TCM-2 TCM-2 TCM-2
Current circuit supervision CCSPVC1 MCS 3I (1) CCM CCM CCM
Current transformer HZCCASPVC1 MCS I_A(1) MCS-A
supervision for high-
impedance protection
scheme for phase A
Current transformer HZCCBSPVC1 MCS I_B(1) MCS-B
scheme for phase B
Current transformer HZCCCSPVC1 MCS I_C(1) MCS-C
scheme for phase C
Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC1 FUSEF (1) 60-1 60-1 60-1 60 60 (1)
SEQSPVC2 FUSEF (2) 60-2
Protection communication PCSITPC1 PCS (1) PCS-1
supervision
Runtime counter for MDSOPT1 OPTS (1) OPTM-1 OPTM-1 OPTM-1 OPTM-1 OPTM-1
machines and devices
Measurement
Load profile record LDPRLRC1 LOADPROF (1) LoadProf LoadProf LoadProf LoadProf LoadProf
Three-phase current CMMXU1 3I (1) IA, IB, IC IA, IB, IC IA, IB, IC IA, IB, IC IA, IB, IC (1)
measurement CMMXU2 3I (2) IA, IB, IC (2) IA, IB, IC (2) IA, IB, IC (2)
Sequence current CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 (1) I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0 (1)
measurement
42 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Introduction

Residual current RESCMMXU1 Io (1) IG IG IG IG
measurement RESCMMXU2 Io (2) IG (2)
Three-phase voltage VMMXU1 3U (1) VA, VB, VC VA, VB, VC VA, VB, VC VA, VB, VC VA, VB, VC (2)
measurement VMMXU2 3U (2) VA, VB, VC (2) VA, VB, VC (2) VA, VB, VC (2)
Residual voltage RESVMMXU1 Uo (1) VG-1 VG VG-1 VG VG (2)
measurement RESVMMXU2 Uo (2) VG-2
Sequence voltage VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 (1) V1, V2, V0 V1, V2, V0 V1, V2, V0 V1, V2, V0 V1, V2, V0 (2)
measurement VSMSQI2 U1, U2, U0(B) V1, V2, V0 (2)
Single-phase power and SPEMMXU1 SP, SE SP, SE-1 SP, SE-1 SP, SE-1 SP, SE-1 SP, SE (2)
energy measurement
Three-phase power and PEMMXU1 P, E (1) P, E-1 P, E-1 P, E-1 P, E-1 P, E (2)
energy measurement
RTD/mA measurement XRGGIO130 X130 (RTD) (1) X130 (RTD) (1) X130 (RTD) (1) X130 (RTD) (1) X130 (RTD) (1) X130 (RTD) (1)
Frequency measurement FMMXU1 f (1) f f f f f
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled SMVSENDER SMVSENDER SMVSENDER SMVSENDER SMVSENDER SMVSENDER SMVSENDER
value sending
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled SMVRECEIVE SMVRECEIVE SMVRECEIVE SMVRECEIVE SMVRECEIVE SMVRECEIVE SMVRECEIVE
value receiving (voltage R R R R R R R
sharing)
Other
Minimum pulse timer (2 TPGAPC1 TP (1) 62TP-1 62TP-1 62TP-1 62TP-1 62TP-1
pcs) TPGAPC2 TP (2) 62TP-2 62TP-2 62TP-2 62TP-2 62TP-2
TPGAPC3 TP (3) 62TP-3 62TP-3 62TP-3 62TP-3 62TP-3
TPGAPC4 TP (4) 62TP-4 62TP-4 62TP-4 62TP-4 62TP-4
Minimum pulse timer (2 TPSGAPC1 TPS (1) 62TPS-1 62TPS-1 62TPS-1 62TPS-1 62TPS-1
pcs, second resolution)
Minimum pulse timer (2 TPMGAPC1 TPM (1) 62TPM-1 62TPM-1 62TPM-1 62TPM-1 62TPM-1
pcs, minute resolution)
Pulse timer (8 pcs) PTGAPC1 PT (1) 62PT-1 62PT-1 62PT-1 62PT-1 62PT-1
PTGAPC2 PT (2) 62PT-2 62PT-2 62PT-2 62PT-2 62PT-2
Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC1 TOF (1) 62TOF-1 62TOF-1 62TOF-1 62TOF-1 62TOF-1
TOFGAPC2 TOF (2) 62TOF-2 62TOF-2 62TOF-2 62TOF-2 62TOF-2
Time delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC1 TON (1) 62TON-1 62TON-1 62TON-1 62TON-1 62TON-1
TONGAPC2 TON (2) 62TON-2 62TON-2 62TON-2 62TON-2 62TON-2
Set-reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC1 SR (1) SR-1 SR-1 SR-1 SR-1 SR-1
SRGAPC2 SR (2) SR-2 SR-2 SR-2 SR-2 SR-2
Move (8 pcs) MVGAPC1 MV (1) MV-1 MV-1 MV-1 MV-1 MV-1
MVGAPC2 MV (2) MV-2 MV-2 MV-2 MV-2 MV-2
Generic control point (16 SPCGAPC1 SPC (1) SPC-1 SPC-1 SPC-1 SPC-1 SPC-1
pcs) SPCGAPC2 SPC (2) SPC-2 SPC-2 SPC-2 SPC-2 SPC-2
Analog value scaling SCA4GAPC1 SCA4 (1) SCA4-1 SCA4-1 SCA4-1 SCA4-1 SCA4-1
SCA4GAPC2 SCA4 (2) SCA4-2 SCA4-2 SCA4-2 SCA4-2 SCA4-2
615 series ANSI 43

Technical Manual
Introduction

Integer value move MVI4GAPC1 MVI4 (1) MVI4-1 MVI4-1 MVI4-1 MVI4-1 MVI4-1
Generic up-down counters UDFCNT1 UDCNT (1) CTR-1 CTR-1 CTR-1 CTR-1 CTR-1
UDFCNT2 UDCNT (2) CTR-2 CTR-2 CTR-2 CTR-2 CTR-2
44 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
615 series overview
Section 2 615 series overview
2.1 Overview
615 series is a product family of relays designed for protection, control, measurement and
supervision of utility substations and industrial switchgear and equipment. The design of
the relay has been guided by the IEC 61850 standard for communication and
interoperability of substation automation devices.
The relays feature a draw-out-type design with a variety of mounting methods, compact
size and ease of use. Depending on the product, optional functionality is available at the
time of order for both software and hardware, for example, autoreclosing and additional
I/Os.
The 615 series relays support a range of communication protocols including IEC 61850
with Edition 2 support, process bus according to IEC 61850-9-2 LE, Modbus® and
DNP3.
615 series ANSI 45

Technical Manual
615 series overview
2.1.1 Product series version history

Product series version Product series history
1.0.1 First product from 615 series REF615 released
1.1 • Circuit breaker condition monitoring
• Replaced EFIPTOC3 with EFLPTOC3
• New communication modules COMB11A, COMB12A, COMB13A and
COMB14A
• IRIG-B
• CB interlocking functionality enhanced
• TCS functionality in HW enhanced
• Non-volatile memory added
• Serial communications
2.0 New products:
• REM615
• RET615
Platform enhancements
• Support for DNP3 serial or TCP/IP

• Voltage measurement and protection
• Power and energy measurement
• Disturbance recorder upload via WHMI
• Fuse failure supervision
46 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
615 series overview
Product series version Product series history

4.0 • User programming through Application Configuration tool
• Frequency measurement protection
• Load shedding and restoration
• Single phase power and energy measurement
• Load profile recorder
4.2 • HSR/PRP functionality

• 320 and 32U over- and underpower protection
• 27R remnant undervoltage protection
• High-impedance differential protection
5.0 FP1 New products:
• RED615
• REG615
New standard configurations:
• RED615: D and E
• REF615: D, F, L, N and P
• REG615: C and D
• REM615: A, B, D, E
• RET615: B and F
Platform enhancements
• Support for IEC 61850-9-2 LE

• IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization
• Fault locator
• Line differential protection with in-zone transformer
• Load profile recorder
• High-speed binary outputs
• Profibus adapter support
• Support for multiple SLD pages
• Import/export of settings via WHMI
• Setting usability improvements
• HMI event filtering tool
• IEC 61850 Edition 2
• Currents sending support with IEC 61850-9-2 LE
• Support for synchronism and energizing check with IEC 61850-9-2 LE
• Software closable Ethernet ports
• Report summary via WHMI
• Multifrequency admittance-based ground-fault protection
• Support for high-impedance differential protection
• Voltage unbalance power quality option
• Additional timer, set-reset and analog value scaling functions
2.1.2 PCM600 and relay connectivity package version

• Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 2.8 or later
• RED615 Connectivity Package Ver.5.1 or later
• REF615 Connectivity Package Ver.5.1 or later
615 series ANSI 47

Technical Manual
615 series overview
• REG615 Connectivity Package Ver.5.1 or later

• REM615 Connectivity Package Ver.5.1 or later
• RET615 Connectivity Package Ver.5.1 or later
Download connectivity packages from the ABB Web site

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation or directly with Update
Manager in PCM600.
2.2 Local HMI
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the protection relay. The LHMI
comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.
A070704-ANSI V3 EN
Figure 2: Example of the LHMI
48 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
615 series overview
2.2.1 Display
The LHMI includes a graphical display that supports one character size. The character size
depends on the selected language. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view
depends on the character size.
Table 2: Large display
Character size1) Rows in the view Characters per row

Small, mono-spaced (6 × 12 pixels) 10 20
1) Depending on the selected language
The display view is divided into four basic areas.
1 2
3 4
A070705-ANSI V3 EN
Figure 3: Display layout
1 Header
2 Icon
3 Content
4 Scroll bar (displayed when needed)
2.2.2 LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Normal, Pickup and
Trip.
615 series ANSI 49

Technical Manual
615 series overview
There are 11 matrix programmable LEDs on front of the LHMI. The LEDs can be
configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI, WHMI
or PCM600.
There are two additional LEDs which are embedded into the control buttons and .
They represent the status of breaker 1 (CBXCBR1).
2.2.3 Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push buttons which are used to navigate in different views or
menus. With the push buttons you can give open or close commands to objects in the
primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or a disconnector. The push
buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help and switch
between local and remote control mode.
A071176-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 4: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push buttons
and RJ-45 communication port
2.3 Web HMI
The WHMI allows secure access to the protection relay via a Web browser. The supported
Web browser versions are Internet Explorer 9.0, 10.0 and 11.0. When the Secure
Communication parameter in the protection relay is activated, the Web server is forced to
take a secured (HTTPS) connection to WHMI using TLS encryption.The WHMI is
verified with Internet Explorer 11.0.
WHMI is disabled by default.WHMI is enabled by default.
50 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
615 series overview
WHMI offers several functions.
• Programmable LEDs and event lists

• System supervision
• Parameter settings
• Measurement display
• DFR records
• Fault records
• Load profile record
• Phasor diagram
• Single-line diagram
• Importing/Exporting parameters
• Report summary
The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.
A070754 V6 EN
Figure 5: Example view of the WHMI
The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely.
• Locally by connecting the laptop to the protection relay via the front communication
port.
• Remotely over LAN/WAN.
615 series ANSI 51

Technical Manual
615 series overview
2.4 Authorization
Four user categories have been predefined for the LHMI and the WHMI, each with
different rights and default passwords.
The default passwords in the protection relay delivered from the factory can be changed
with Administrator user rights.
User authorization is disabled by default for LHMI but WHMI always

uses authorization.
Table 3: Predefined user categories

Username User rights
VIEWER Read only access
OPERATOR •
Selecting remote or local state with (only locally)
• Changing setting groups
• Controlling
• Clearing indications
ENGINEER • Changing settings

• Clearing event list
• Clearing DFRs and load profile record
• Changing system settings such as IP address, serial baud rate or
DFR settings
• Setting the protection relay to test mode
• Selecting language
ADMINISTRATOR • All listed above

• Changing password
• Factory default activation
For user authorization for PCM600, see PCM600 documentation.
2.5 Communication
The protection relay supports a range of communication protocols including IEC 61850,
IEC 61850-9-2 LE, Modbus® and DNP3. Operational information and controls are
available through these protocols. However, some communication functionality, for
52 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
615 series overview
example, horizontal communication between the protection relays, is only enabled by the
IEC 61850 communication protocol.
The protection relay utilizes Ethernet communication extensively for different purposes.
The exact services depend on the ordered product variant and enabled functionality.
HSR/PRP is available in 615 series Ver.5.0 FP1 ANSI.
HSR/PRP availability depends on the product ordering information. See

the Rear communication modules chapter for information on HSR/PRP
supported COM cards.
Table 4: TCP and UDP ports used for different services

Service Port
File Transfer Protocol (FTP and FTPS) 20, 21
IEC 61850 102
Web Server HTTP 80
Web Server HTTPS 443
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) 123
Modbus TCP 502
DNP TCP 20000
The IEC 61850 communication implementation supports all monitoring and control
functions. Additionally, parameter setting and DFR records can be accessed using the IEC
61850 protocol. Oscillographic files are available to any Ethernet-based application in the
standard COMTRADE format. The protection relay can send and receive binary signals
from other devices (so-called horizontal communication) using the IEC 61850-8-1
GOOSE profile, where the highest performance class with a total transmission time of 3
ms is supported. Furthermore, the protection relay supports sending and receiving of
analog values using GOOSE messaging. The protection relay meets the GOOSE
performance requirements for tripping applications in distribution substations, as defined
by the IEC 61850 standard. The protection relay can simultaneously report events to five
different clients on the station bus.
The protection relay can support five simultaneous clients. If PCM600 reserves one client
connection, only four client connections are left, for example, for IEC 61850 and Modbus.
All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on
integrated optional communication modules. The protection relay can be connected to
Ethernet-based communication systems via the RJ-45 connector (100Base-TX) or the
fiber optic LC connector (100Base-FX).
615 series ANSI 53

Technical Manual
615 series overview
2.5.1 Self-healing Ethernet ring

For the correct operation of self-healing loop topology, it is essential that the external
switches in the network support the RSTP protocol and that it is enabled in the switches.
Otherwise, connecting the loop topology can cause problems to the network. The
protection relay itself does not support link-down detection or RSTP. The ring recovery
process is based on the aging of the MAC addresses, and the link-up/link-down events can
cause temporary breaks in communication. For a better performance of the self-healing
loop, it is recommended that the external switch furthest from the protection relay loop is
assigned as the root switch (bridge priority = 0) and the bridge priority increases towards
the protection relay loop. The end links of the protection relay loop can be attached to the
same external switch or to two adjacent external switches. A self-healing Ethernet ring
requires a communication module with at least two Ethernet interfaces for all protection
relays.
GUID-AB81C355-EF5D-4658-8AE0-01DC076E519C-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 6: Self-healing Ethernet ring solution
The Ethernet ring solution supports the connection of up to 30 protection

relays. If more than 30 protection relays are to be connected, it is
recommended that the network is split into several rings with no more than
30 protection relays per ring. Each protection relay has a 50-μs store-and-
forward delay, and to fulfil the performance requirements for fast
horizontal communication, the ring size is limited to 30 protection relays.
54 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
615 series overview
2.5.2 Ethernet redundancy

IEC 61850 specifies a network redundancy scheme that improves the system availability
for substation communication. It is based on two complementary protocols defined in the
IEC 62439-3:2012 standard: parallel redundancy protocol PRP and high-availability
seamless redundancy HSR protocol. Both protocols rely on the duplication of all
transmitted information via two Ethernet ports for one logical network connection.
Therefore, both are able to overcome the failure of a link or switch with a zero-switchover
time, thus fulfilling the stringent real-time requirements for the substation automation
horizontal communication and time synchronization.
PRP specifies that each device is connected in parallel to two local area networks. HSR
applies the PRP principle to rings and to the rings of rings to achieve cost-effective
redundancy. Thus, each device incorporates a switch element that forwards frames from
port to port. The HSR/PRP option is available for all 615 series protection relays.
However, RED615 supports this option only over fiber optics.
IEC 62439-3:2012 cancels and replaces the first edition published in

2010. These standard versions are also referred to as IEC 62439-3 Edition
1 and IEC 62439-3 Edition 2. The protection relay supports IEC
62439-3:2012 and it is not compatible with IEC 62439-3:2010.
PRP
Each PRP node, called a double attached node with PRP (DAN), is attached to two
independent LANs operated in parallel. These parallel networks in PRP are called LAN
A and LAN B. The networks are completely separated to ensure failure independence, and
they can have different topologies. Both networks operate in parallel, thus providing zero-
time recovery and continuous checking of redundancy to avoid communication failures.
Non-PRP nodes, called single attached nodes (SANs), are either attached to one network
only (and can therefore communicate only with DANs and SANs attached to the same
network), or are attached through a redundancy box, a device that behaves like a DAN.
615 series ANSI 55

Technical Manual
615 series overview
COM600
SCADA
Ethernet switch Ethernet switch

IEC 61850 PRP
GUID-334D26B1-C3BD-47B6-BD9D-2301190A5E9D V2 EN
Figure 7: PRP solution
In case a laptop or a PC workstation is connected as a non-PRP node to one of the PRP

networks, LAN A or LAN B, it is recommended to use a redundancy box device or an
Ethernet switch with similar functionality between the PRP network and SAN to remove
additional PRP information from the Ethernet frames. In some cases, default PC
workstation adapters are not able to handle the maximum-length Ethernet frames with the
PRP trailer.
There are different alternative ways to connect a laptop or a workstation as SAN to a PRP
network.
• Via an external redundancy box (RedBox) or a switch capable of connecting to PRP

and normal networks
• By connecting the node directly to LAN A or LAN B as SAN
• By connecting the node to the protection relay's interlink port
HSR
HSR applies the PRP principle of parallel operation to a single ring, treating the two
directions as two virtual LANs. For each frame sent, a node, DAN, sends two frames, one
over each port. Both frames circulate in opposite directions over the ring and each node
forwards the frames it receives, from one port to the other. When the originating node
receives a frame sent to itself, it discards that to avoid loops; therefore, no ring protocol is
needed. Individually attached nodes, SANs, such as laptops and printers, must be attached
through a “redundancy box” that acts as a ring element. For example, a 615 or 620 series
protection relay with HSR support can be used as a redundancy box.
56 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
615 series overview
GUID-207430A7-3AEC-42B2-BC4D-3083B3225990 V2 EN
Figure 8: HSR solution
615 series ANSI 57

Technical Manual
58
Basic functions
Section 3 Basic functions
3.1 General parameters
Table 5: Analog input settings, phase currents

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Primary current 1.0...6000.0 A 0.1 100.0 Rated primary current
Secondary current 2=1A 2=1A Rated secondary current
3=5A
Amplitude corr. A 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase A amplitude correction factor
Amplitude corr. B 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase B amplitude correction factor
Amplitude corr. C 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase C amplitude correction factor
Nominal Current1) 39...4000 A 1 1300 Network Nominal Current (In)
Rated secondary Val1) 1.000...150.000 mV/Hz 0.001 3.000 Rated Secondary Value (RSV) ratio
Reverse polarity 0=False 0=False Reverse the polarity of the phase CTs
1=True
Angle Corr A -20.0000...20.0000 deg 0.0001 0.0000 Phase A angle correction factor
Angle Corr B -20.0000...20.0000 deg 0.0001 0.0000 Phase B angle correction factor
Angle Corr C -20.0000...20.0000 deg 0.0001 0.0000 Phase C angle correction factor
1) Available for sensor analog inputs only
Table 6: Analog input settings, residual current

Primary current 1.0...6000.0 A 0.1 100.0 Primary current
Secondary current 1=0.2A 2=1A Secondary current
2=1A
3=5A
Amplitude corr. 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Amplitude correction
Reverse polarity 0=False 0=False Reverse the polarity of the residual CT
1=True
Angle correction -20.0000...20.0000 deg 0.0001 0.0000 Angle correction factor
615 series ANSI 59

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 7: Analog input settings, phase voltages

Primary voltage 0.100...440.000 kV 0.001 20.000 Primary rated voltage
Secondary voltage 60...210 V 1 100 Secondary rated voltage
VT connection 1=Wye 2=Delta Voltage transducer measurement connection
2=Delta
3=VAB
4=VA
Amplitude corr. A 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase A Voltage phasor magnitude correction
of an external voltage transformer
Amplitude corr. B 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase B Voltage phasor magnitude correction
Amplitude corr. C 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase C Voltage phasor magnitude correction
Division ratio 1000...20000 1 10000 Voltage sensor division ratio
Voltage input type 1=Voltage trafo 1=Voltage trafo Type of the voltage input
3=CVD sensor
Angle Corr A -20.0000...20.0000 deg 0.0001 0.0000 Phase A Voltage phasor angle correction of an
external voltage transformer
Angle Corr B -20.0000...20.0000 deg 0.0001 0.0000 Phase B Voltage phasor angle correction of an
Angle Corr C -20.0000...20.0000 deg 0.0001 0.0000 Phase C Voltage phasor angle correction of an
Table 8: Analog input settings, residual voltage

Primary voltage 0.100...440.0001) kV 0.001 11.547 Primary voltage
Secondary voltage 60...210 V 1 100 Secondary voltage

1) In 9-2 applications, Primary voltage maximum is limited to 126 kV.
60 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 9: Authorization settings

Remote Update 0=Disable 0=Disable Remote update
1=Enable
Secure Communication 0=False 1=True Secure Communication
1=True
Authority logging 1=None 1=None Authority logging level
2=Configuration
change
3=Setting group
4=Setting group,
control
5=Settings edit
6=All
Remote override 0=False1) 1=True Disable authority
1=True2)
Remote viewer (9-20 0 Set password (9-20 chars)
chars)
Remote operator (9-20 0 Set password (9-20 chars)
chars)
Remote engineer (9-20 0 Set password (9-20 chars)
chars)
Remote admin (9-20 0 Set password (9-20 chars)
chars)
Local override 0=False3) 1=True Disable authority
1=True4)
Local viewer (4-8 chars) 0 Set password (4-8 chars)
Local operator (4-8 0 Set password (4-8 chars)
chars)
Local engineer (4-8 0 Set password (4-8 chars)
chars)
Local admin (4-8 chars) 0 Set password (4-8 chars)
1) Authorization override disabled, communication tools ask password to enter the protection relay
2) Authorization override enabled, communication tools do not need password to enter the protection relay, except for WHMI which always requires
it
3) Authorization override disabled, LHMI password must be entered
4) Authorization override enabled, LHMI password is not asked
Table 10: Binary input settings

Threshold voltage 16...176 Vdc 2 16 Digital input threshold voltage
Input osc. level 2...50 events/s 1 30 Digital input oscillation suppression threshold
Input osc. hyst 2...50 events/s 1 10 Digital input oscillation suppression hysteresis
615 series ANSI 61

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Adjust the binary input threshold voltage correctly. The threshold voltage
should be comparable to the nominal value instead of the default
minimum value. The factory default is 16 V to ensure the binary inputs’
operation regardless of the auxiliary voltage used (24, 48, 60, 110, 125,
220 or 250 V DC). However, the default value is not optimal for the higher
auxiliary voltages. The binary input threshold voltage should be set as
high as possible to prevent any inadvertent activation of the binary inputs
due to possible external disturbances. At the same time, the threshold
should be set so that the correct operation is not jeopardized in case of
undervoltage of the auxiliary voltage.
Table 11: Binary input signals in card location Xnnn

Name Type Description
See the application manual for standard
Xnnn-Input m 1)2) BOOLEAN configuration specific terminal connections
1) Xnnn = Slot ID, for example, X100, X110, as applicable

2) m =For example, 1, 2, depending on the serial number of the binary input in a particular BIO or AIM card
Table 12: Binary output signals in card location Xnnn

Name Type Default Description
See the application
manual for standard
configuration specific
Xnnn-Pmm1)2) BOOLEAN 0=False terminal connections

2) Pmm = For example, PO1, PO2, SO1, SO2, as applicable
Table 13: Binary input settings in card location Xnnn
Name 1) Value Unit Step Default

Input m2) filter time 5…1000 ms 5
Input m inversion 0= False 0=False
1= True

2) m = For example, 1, 2, depending on the serial number of the binary input in a particular BIO or AIM card
Table 14: Ethernet front port settings

IP address 192.168.0.254 IP address for front port (fixed)
Mac address XX-XX-XX-XX- Mac address for front port
XX-XX
62 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 15: Ethernet rear port settings

IP address 192.168.2.10 IP address for rear port(s)
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask for rear port(s)
Default gateway 192.168.2.1 Default gateway for rear port(s)
Mac address XX-XX-XX-XX- Mac address for rear port(s)
XX-XX
Table 16: General system settings

Rated frequency 1=50Hz 1=50Hz Rated frequency of the network
2=60Hz
Phase rotation 1=ABC 1=ABC Phase rotation order
2=ACB
Blocking mode 1=Freeze timer 1=Freeze timer Behavior for function BLOCK inputs
2=Block all
3=Block TRIP
output
Bay name1) REF6152) Bay name in system
IDMT Sat point 10...50 I/I> 1 50 Overcurrent IDMT saturation point
Frequency adaptivity3) 0=Disable 0=Disable Enabling frequency adaptivity

1=Enable
SMV Max Delay 0=1.90 1.58 ms 1=3.15 2.62 ms SMV Maximum allowed delay
1=3.15 2.62 ms
2=4.40 3.67 ms
3=5.65 4.71 ms
4=6.90 5.75 ms
1) Used in the protection relay main menu header and as part of the disturbance recording identification
2) Depending on the product variant
3) Available only in REG615
Table 17: HMI settings

FB naming convention 1=IEC61850 1=IEC61850 FB naming convention used in IED
2=IEC60617
3=IEC-ANSI
Default view 1=Measurements 1=Measurements LHMI default view
2=Main menu
3=SLD page 1
Backlight timeout 1...60 min 1 3 LHMI backlight timeout
Web HMI mode 1=Active read only 3=Disabled Web HMI functionality
2=Active
3=Disabled
615 series ANSI 63

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Web HMI timeout 1...60 min 1 3 Web HMI login timeout
SLD symbol format 1=IEC 1=IEC Single Line Diagram symbol format
2=ANSI
Autoscroll delay 0...30 s 1 0 Autoscroll delay for Measurements view
Setting visibility 1=Basic 1=Basic Setting visibility for HMI
2=Advanced
Table 18: IEC 61850-8-1 MMS settings

Unit mode 1=Primary1) 0=Nominal IEC 61850-8-1 unit mode
0=Nominal2)
2=Primary-
Nominal3)
1) MMS client expects primary values from event reporting and data attribute reads
2) MMS client expects nominal values from event reporting and data attribute reads; this is the default for PCM600
3) For PCM600 use only, When Unit mode is set to "Primary", the PCM600 client can force its session to "Nominal" by selecting "Primary-Nominal"
and thus parameterizing in native form. The selection is not stored and is therefore effective only for one session. This value has no effect if
selected via the LHMI.
Table 19: Modbus settings

Operation 1=enable 5=disable Enable or disable this protocol instance
5=disable
Port 1=COM 1 3=Ethernet - TCP Port selection for this protocol instance. Select
2=COM 2 1 between serial and Ethernet based
3=Ethernet - TCP 1 communication.
Mapping selection 1...2 1 1 Chooses which mapping scheme will be used
for this protocol instance.
Address 1...254 1 1 Unit address
Link mode 1=RTU 1=RTU Selects between ASCII and RTU mode. For
2=ASCII TCP, this should always be RTU.
TCP port 1...65535 1 502 Defines the listening port for the Modbus TCP
server. Default = 502.
Parity 0=none 2=even Parity for the serial connection.
1=odd
2=even
Start delay 0...20 1 4 Start delay in character times for serial
connection
End delay 0...20 1 4 End delay in character times for serial
connections
CRC order 0=Hi-Lo 0=Hi-Lo Selects between normal or swapped byte order
1=Lo-Hi for checksum for serial connection. Default: Hi-
Lo.
64 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Client IP 0.0.0.0 Sets the IP address of the client. If set to zero,
connection from any client is accepted.
Write authority 0=Read only 2=Full access Selects the control authority scheme
1=Disable 0x write
2=Full access
Time format 0=UTC 1=Local Selects between UTC and local time for events
1=Local and timestamps.
Event ID selection 0=Address 0=Address Selects whether the events are reported using
1=UID the MB address or the UID number.
Event buffering 0=Keep oldest 0=Keep oldest Selects whether the oldest or newest events
1=Keep newest are kept in the case of event buffer overflow.
Event backoff 1...500 1 200 Defines how many events have to be read after
event buffer overflow to allow new events to be
buffered. Applicable in "Keep oldest" mode
only.
ControlStructPWd 1 **** Password for control operations using Control
Struct mechanism, which is available on 4x
memory area.
memory area.
memory area.
memory area.
memory area.
memory area.
memory area.
memory area.
615 series ANSI 65

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 20: DNP3 settings

Operation 1=enable 5=disable Operation Disable / Enable
5=disable
Port 1=COM 1 3=Ethernet - TCP Communication interface selection
2=COM 2 1
3=Ethernet - TCP 1
4=Ethernet TCP
+UDP 1
Unit address 1...65519 1 1 DNP unit address
Master address 1...65519 1 3 DNP master and UR address
Mapping select 1...2 1 1 Mapping select
ClientIP 0.0.0.0 IP address of client
TCP port 20000...65535 1 20000 TCP Port used on ethernet communication
TCP write authority 0=No clients 2=All clients 0=no client controls allowed; 1=Controls
1=Reg. clients allowed by registered clients; 2=Controls
2=All clients allowed by all clients
Link keep-alive 0...65535 s 1 0 Link keep-alive interval for DNP
Validate master addr 1=Disable 1=Disable Validate master address on receive
2=Enable
Self address 1=Disable 2=Enable Support self address query function
2=Enable
Need time interval 0...65535 min 1 30 Period to set IIN need time bit
Time format 0=UTC 1=Local UTC or local. Coordinate with master.
1=Local
CROB select timeout 1...65535 s 1 10 Control Relay Output Block select timeout
Data link confirm 0=Never 0=Never Data link confirm mode
1=Only Multiframe
2=Always
Data link confirm TO 100...65535 ms 1 3000 Data link confirm timeout
Data link retries 0...65535 1 3 Data link retries count
Data link Rx to Tx delay 0...255 ms 1 0 Turnaround transmission delay
Data link inter char delay 0...20 char 1 4 Inter character delay for incoming messages
App layer confirm 1=Disable 1=Disable Application layer confirm mode
2=Enable
App confirm TO 100...65535 ms 1 5000 Application layer confirm and UR timeout
App layer fragment 256...2048 bytes 1 2048 Application layer fragment size
UR mode 1=Disable 1=Disable Unsolicited responses mode
2=Enable
UR retries 0...65535 1 3 Unsolicited retries before switching to UR
offline mode
UR TO 0...65535 ms 1 5000 Unsolicited response timeout
UR offline interval 0...65535 min 1 15 Unsolicited offline interval
66 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

UR Class 1 Min events 0...999 1 2 Min number of class 1 events to generate UR
UR Class 1 TO 0...65535 ms 1 50 Max holding time for class 1 events to generate
UR
UR
UR
Legacy master UR 1=Disable 1=Disable Legacy DNP master unsolicited mode support.
2=Enable When enabled relay does not send initial
unsolicited message.
Legacy master SBO 1=Disable 1=Disable Legacy DNP Master SBO sequence number
2=Enable relax enable
Default Var Obj 01 1=1:BI 1=1:BI 1=BI; 2=BI with status.
2=2:BI&status
Default Var Obj 02 1=1:BI event 2=2:BI event&time 1=BI event; 2=BI event with time.
2=2:BI event&time
Default Var Obj 03 1=1:DBI 1=1:DBI 1=DBI; 2=DBI with status.
2=2:DBI&status
Default Var Obj 04 1=1:DBI event 2=2:DBI 1=DBI event; 2=DBI event with time.
2=2:DBI event&time
event&time
Default Var Obj 20 1=1:32bit Cnt 2=2:16bit Cnt 1=32 bit counter; 2=16 bit counter; 5=32 bit
2=2:16bit Cnt counter without flag; 6=16 bit counter without
5=5:32bit Cnt flag.
noflag
6=6:16bit Cnt
noflag
Default Var Obj 21 1=1:32bit FrzCnt 6=6:16bit 1=32 bit frz counter; 2=16 bit frz counter; 5=32
2=2:16bit FrzCnt FrzCnt&time bit frz counter with time; 6=16 bit frz counter
5=5:32bit with time; 9=32 bit frz counter without flag;
FrzCnt&time 10=16 bit frz counter without flag.
6=6:16bit
FrzCnt&time
9=9:32bit FrzCnt
noflag
10=10:16bit FrzCnt
noflag
Default Var Obj 22 1=1:32bit Cnt evt 6=6:16bit Cnt 1=32 bit counter event; 2=16 bit counter event;
2=2:16bit Cnt evt evt&time 5=32 bit counter event with time; 6=16 bit
5=5:32bit Cnt counter event with time.
evt&time
6=6:16bit Cnt
evt&time
615 series ANSI 67

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Default Var Obj 23 1=1:32bit FrzCnt 6=6:16bit FrzCnt 1=32 bit frz counter event; 2=16 bit frz counter
evt evt&time event; 5=32 bit frz counter event with time;
2=2:16bit FrzCnt 6=16 bit frz counter event with time.
evt
5=5:32bit FrzCnt
evt&time
6=6:16bit FrzCnt
evt&time
Default Var Obj 30 1=1:32bit AI 5=5:AI float 1=32 bit AI; 2=16 bit AI; 3=32 bit AI without flag;
2=2:16bit AI 4=16 bit AI without flag; 5=AI float; 6=AI
3=3:32bit AI noflag double.
4=4:16bit AI noflag
5=5:AI float
6=6:AI double
Default Var Obj 32 1=1:32bit AI evt 7=7:float AI 1=32 bit AI event; 2=16 bit AI event; 3=32 bit AI
2=2:16bit AI evt evt&time event with time; 4=16 bit AI event with time;
3=3:32bit AI 5=float AI event; 6=double AI event; 7=float AI
evt&time event with time; 8=double AI event with time.
4=4:16bit AI
evt&time
5=5: float AI evt
6=6:double AI evt
7=7:float AI
evt&time
8=8:double AI
evt&time
Default Var Obj 40 1=1:32bit AO 2=2:16bit AO 1=32 bit AO; 2=16 bit AO; 3=AO float; 4=AO
2=2:16bit AO double.
3=3:AO float
4=4:AO double
Default Var Obj 42 1=1:32bit AO evt 4=4:16bit AO 1=32 bit AO event; 2=16 bit AO event; 3=32 bit
2=2:16bit AO evt evt&time AO event with time; 4=16 bit AO event with
3=3:32bit AO time; 5=float AO event; 6=double AO event;
evt&time 7=float AO event with time; 8=double AO event
4=4:16bit AO with time.
evt&time
5=5:float AO evt
6=6:double AO evt
7=7:float AO
evt&time
8=8:double AO
evt&time
68 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 21: COM1 serial communication settings

Fiber mode 0=No fiber 0=No fiber Fiber mode
2=Fiber light OFF
loop
Serial mode 1=RS485 2Wire 1=RS485 2Wire Serial mode
2=RS485 4Wire
3=RS232 no
handshake
4=RS232 with
handshake
CTS delay 0...60000 ms 1 0 CTS delay
RTS delay 0...60000 ms 1 0 RTS delay
Baudrate 1=300 6=9600 Baudrate
2=600
3=1200
4=2400
5=4800
6=9600
7=19200
8=38400
9=57600
10=115200
Table 22: COM2 serial communication settings

Fiber mode 0=No fiber 0=No fiber Fiber mode
2=Fiber light OFF
loop
Serial mode 1=RS485 2Wire 1=RS485 2Wire Serial mode
2=RS485 4Wire
3=RS232 no
handshake
4=RS232 with
handshake
CTS delay 0...60000 ms 1 0 CTS delay
RTS delay 0...60000 ms 1 0 RTS delay
Baudrate 1=300 6=9600 Baudrate
2=600
3=1200
4=2400
5=4800
6=9600
7=19200
8=38400
9=57600
10=115200
615 series ANSI 69

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.2 Self-supervision
The protection relay's extensive self-supervision system continuously supervises the

software and the electronics. It handles run-time fault situation and informs the user about
a fault via the LHMI and through the communication channels.
There are two types of fault indications.
• Internal faults
• Warnings
3.2.1 Internal faults

When an internal relay fault is detected, the green Normal LED begins to flash and the
self-supervision output contact is activated.
Internal fault indications have the highest priority on the LHMI. None of
the other LHMI indications can override the internal fault indication.
An indication about the fault is shown as a message on the LHMI. The text Internal
Fault with an additional text message, a code, date and time, is shown to indicate the
fault type.
Different actions are taken depending on the severity of the fault. The protection relay tries
to eliminate the fault by restarting. After the fault is found to be permanent, the protection
relay stays in the internal fault mode. All other output contacts are released and locked for
the internal fault. The protection relay continues to perform internal tests during the fault
situation.
If an internal fault disappears, the green Normal LED stops flashing and the protection
relay returns to the normal service state. The fault indication message remains on the
display until manually cleared.
The self-supervision signal output operates on the closed-circuit principle. Under normal
conditions, the protection relay is energized and the contact gaps 3-5 in slot X100 is
closed. If the auxiliary power supply fails or an internal fault is detected, the contact gaps
3-5 are opened.
70 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
A070789 V1 EN
Figure 9: Output contact
The internal fault code indicates the type of internal relay fault. When a fault appears, the
code must be recorded so that it can be reported to ABB customer service.
Table 23: Internal fault indications and codes
Fault indication Fault code Additional information
Internal Fault 2 An internal system error has occurred.
System error
Internal Fault 7 A file system error has occurred.
File system error
Internal Fault 8 Internal fault test activated manually by the
Test user.
Internal Fault 10 Watchdog reset has occurred too many
SW watchdog error times within an hour.
Internal Fault 43 Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in card
SO-relay(s),X100 located in slot X100.
Internal Fault 53 Faulty Power Output relay(s) in card
PO-relay(s),X100 located in slot X100.
Internal Fault 57 Faulty ARC light sensor input(s).
Light sensor error
615 series ANSI 71

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Fault indication Fault code Additional information

Internal Fault 62 Card in slot X000 is wrong type, is missing,
Conf. error,X000 does not belong to original configuration or
card firmware is faulty.
Internal Fault 63 Card in slot X100 is wrong type or does not
Conf. error,X100 belong to the original composition.
Internal Fault 64 Card in slot X110 is wrong type, is missing
Conf. error,X110 or does not belong to the original
composition.
Conf. error,X120 or does not belong to the original
composition.
Conf.error,X130 or does not belong to the original
composition.
Internal Fault 72 Card in slot X000 is faulty.
Card error,X000
Card error,X100
Card error,X110
Card error,X120
Card error,X130
Internal Fault 79 LHMI module is faulty. The fault indication
LHMI module may not be seen on the LHMI during the
fault.
Internal Fault 80 Error in the RAM memory on the CPU
RAM error card.
Internal Fault 81 Error in the ROM memory on the CPU
ROM error card.
Internal Fault 82 Error in the EEPROM memory on the CPU
EEPROM error card.
Internal Fault 83 Error in the FPGA on the CPU card.
FPGA error
Internal Fault 84 Error in the RTC on the CPU card.
RTC error
Internal Fault 96 RTD card located in slot X130 may have
RTD card error,X130 permanent fault. Temporary error has
occurred too many times within a short
time.
Internal Fault 116 Error in the COM card.
COM card error
For further information on internal fault indications, see the operation manual.
72 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.2.2 Warnings
In case of a warning, the protection relay continues to operate except for those protection
functions possibly affected by the fault, and the green Normal LED remains lit as during
normal operation.
Warnings are indicated with the text Warning additionally provided with the name of the
warning, a numeric code and the date and time on the LHMI. The warning indication
message can be manually cleared.
If a warning appears, record the name and code so that it can be provided
to ABB customer service.
Table 24: Warning indications and codes

Warning indication Warning code Additional information
Warning 10 A watchdog reset has occurred.
Watchdog reset
Warning 11 The auxiliary supply voltage has dropped
Power down det. too low.
Warning 20 Error when building the IEC 61850 data
IEC61850 error model.
Warning 21 Error in the Modbus communication.
Modbus error
Warning 22 Error in the DNP3 communication.
DNP3 error
Warning 24 Error in the Data set(s).
Dataset error
Warning 25 Error in the Report control block(s).
Report cont. error
Warning 26 Error in the GOOSE control block(s).
GOOSE contr. error
Warning 27 Error in the SCL configuration file or the file
SCL config error is missing.
Warning 28 Too many connections in the
Logic error configuration.
Warning 29 Error in the SMT connections.
SMT logic error
Warning 30 Error in the GOOSE connections.
GOOSE input error
ACT error 31 Error in the ACT connections.
Warning 32 Error in the GOOSE message receiving.
GOOSE Rx. error
615 series ANSI 73

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Warning indication Warning code Additional information

Warning 33 Analog channel configuration error.
AFL error
Warning 34 Error in the SMV configuration.
SMV config error
Warning 35 Redundant Ethernet (HSR/PRP)
Comm. channel down communication interrupted.
Warning 40 A new composition has not been
Unack card comp. acknowledged/accepted.
Warning 50 Error in protection communication.
Protection comm.
Warning 85 A continuous light has been detected on
ARC1 cont. light the ARC light input 1.
Warning 96 Temporary error occurred in RTD card
RTD card error,X130 located in slot X130.
Warning 106 Measurement error in RTD card located in
RTD meas. error,X130 slot X130.
For further information on warning indications, see the operation manual.
3.3 LED indication control
3.3.1 Function block
GUID-B5D22C6D-951D-4F34-BE68-F5AF08580140 V2 EN
Figure 10: Function block
74 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.3.2 Functionality
The protection relay includes a global conditioning function LEDPTRC that is used with
the protection indication LEDs.
LED indication control should never be used for tripping purposes. There
is a separate trip logic function 86/94 available in the relay configuration.
LED indication control is preconfigured in a such way that all the protection function
general pickup and trip signals are combined with this function (available as output
signals OUT_START and OUT_OPERATE). These signals are always internally
connected to Pickup and Trip LEDs. LEDPTRC collects and combines phase information
from different protection functions (available as output signals OUT_ST_A /_B /_C
and OUT_OPR_A /_B /_C). There is also combined ground fault information collected
from all the ground-fault functions available in the relay configuration (available as output
signals OUT_ST_NEUT and OUT_OPR_NEUT).
3.4 Programmable LEDs
3.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE
identification identification identification
Programmable LEDs LED LED LED
GUID-00339108-34E4-496C-9142-5DC69F55EE7A V1 EN
3.4.3 Functionality
The programmable LEDs reside on the right side of the display on the LHMI.
615 series ANSI 75

Technical Manual
Basic functions
A070704-ANSI V3 EN
Figure 12: Programmable LEDs on the right side of the display
All the programmable LEDs in the HMI of the protection relay have two colors, green and
red. For each LED, the different colors are individually controllable.
Each LED has two control inputs, ALARM and OK. The color setting is common for all the
LEDs. It is controlled with the Alarm colour setting, the default value being "Red". The OK
input corresponds to the color that is available, with the default value being "Green".
Changing the Alarm colour setting to "Green" changes the color behavior of the OK inputs
to red.
The ALARM input has a higher priority than the OK input.
Each LED is seen in the Application Configuration tool as an individual function block.
Each LED has user-editable description text for event description. The state ("None",
76 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
"OK", "Alarm") of each LED can also be read under a common monitored data view for
programmable LEDs.
The LED status also provides a means for resetting the individual LED via
communication. The LED can also be reset from configuration with the RESET input.
The resetting and clearing function for all LEDs is under the Clear menu.
The menu structure for the programmable LEDs is presented in Figure 13. The common
color selection setting Alarm colour for all ALARM inputs is in the General menu, while
the LED-specific settings are under the LED-specific menu nodes.
Programmable LEDs
General Alarm color Red
Green
LED 1
Alarm mode
LED 2
Description
Follow-S
Follow-F
Latched-S
LatchedAck-F-S
Programmable LED description
GUID-0DED5640-4F67-4112-9A54-E8CAADFFE547 V1 EN
Figure 13: Menu structure
Alarm mode alternatives

The ALARM input behavior can be selected with the alarm mode settings from the
alternatives "Follow-S", "Follow-F", "Latched-S" and "LatchedAck-F-S". The OK input
behavior is always according to "Follow-S". The alarm input latched modes can be cleared
with the reset input in the application logic.
GUID-58B6C3F2-873A-4B13-9834-9BB21FCA5704 V1 EN
Figure 14: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
"Follow-S": Follow Signal, ON

In this mode ALARM follows the input signal value, Non-latched.
615 series ANSI 77

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Activating
signal
LED
GUID-952BD571-874A-4572-8710-F0E879678552 V1 EN
Figure 15: Operating sequence "Follow-S"
"Follow-F": Follow Signal, Flashing

Similar to "Follow-S", but instead the LED is flashing when the input is active, Non-
latched.
"Latched-S": Latched, ON
This mode is a latched function. At the activation of the input signal, the alarm shows a
steady light. After acknowledgement by the local operator pressing any key on the
keypad, the alarm disappears.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
GUID-055146B3-780B-43E6-9E06-9FD8D342E881 V1 EN
Figure 16: Operating sequence "Latched-S"
"LatchedAck-F-S": Latched, Flashing-ON

This mode is a latched function. At the activation of the input signal, the alarm starts
flashing. After acknowledgement, the alarm disappears if the signal is not present and
gives a steady light if the signal is present.
78 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
GUID-1B1414BD-2535-40FA-9642-8FBA4D19BA4A V1 EN
Figure 17: Operating sequence "LatchedAck-F-S"
3.4.4 Signals
Table 25: LED Input signals
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 1
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 1
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 1
615 series ANSI 79

Technical Manual
Basic functions

3.4.5 Settings
Table 26: LED settings
Alarm color 1=Green 2=Red Color for the alarm state of the LED
2=Red
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 1
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 1
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
LEDs LED 2
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
LEDs LED 3
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
LEDs LED 4
80 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
LEDs LED 5
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
LEDs LED 6
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
LEDs LED 7
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
LEDs LED 8
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
LEDs LED 9
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
LEDs LED 10
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
LEDs LED 11
615 series ANSI 81

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.4.6 Monitored data

Table 27: LED Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable LED
1 1=Ok 1
3=Alarm
2 1=Ok 2
3=Alarm
3 1=Ok 3
3=Alarm
4 1=Ok 4
3=Alarm
5 1=Ok 5
3=Alarm
6 1=Ok 6
3=Alarm
7 1=Ok 7
3=Alarm
8 1=Ok 8
3=Alarm
9 1=Ok 9
3=Alarm
10 1=Ok 10
3=Alarm
11 1=Ok 11
3=Alarm
82 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.5 Time synchronization
3.5.1 Time master supervision GNRLLTMS
3.5.1.1 Function block
GUID-52938D64-7CEC-4CFC-BBC1-04FA6860EAD1 V1 EN
3.5.1.2 Functionality
The protection relay has an internal real-time clock which can be either free-running or
synchronized from an external source. The real-time clock is used for time stamping
events, recorded data and disturbance recordings.
The protection relay is provided with a 48 hour capacitor backup that enables the real-time
clock to keep time in case of an auxiliary power failure.
The setting Synch source determines the method to synchronize the real-time clock. If it
is set to “None”, the clock is free-running and the settings Date and Time can be used to
set the time manually. Other setting values activate a communication protocol that
provides the time synchronization. Only one synchronization method can be active at a
time but SNTP provides time master redundancy.
The protection relay supports SNTP, IRIG-B, IEEE 1588 v2, DNP3 and Modbus to update
the real-time clock. IEEE 1588 v2 with GPS grandmaster clock provides the best accuracy
±1 µs. The accuracy using IRIG-B and SNTP is ±1 ms.
The protection relay's 1588 time synchronization complies with the IEEE C37.238-2011
Power Profile, interoperable with IEEE 1588 v2. According to the power profile, the
frame format used is IEEE 802.3 Ethernet frames with 88F7 Ethertype as communication
service and the delay mechanism is P2P. PTP announce mode determines the format of
PTP announce frames sent by the protection relay when acting as 1588 master, with
options “Basic IEEE1588” and “Power Profile”. In the “Power Profile” mode, the TLVs
required by the IEEE C37.238-2011 Power Profile are included in announce frames.
IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization requires a communication card with

redundancy support (COM0031...COM0037).
615 series ANSI 83

Technical Manual
Basic functions
When Modbus TCP or DNP3 over TCP/IP is used, SNTP or IRIG-B time
synchronization should be used for better synchronization accuracy.
With the legacy protocols, the synchronization message must be received

within four minutes from the previous synchronization. Otherwise bad
synchronization status is raised for the protection relay. With SNTP, it is
required that the SNTP server responds to a request within 12 ms,
otherwise the response is considered invalid.
The relay can use one of two SNTP servers, the primary or the secondary server. The
primary server is mainly in use, whereas the secondary server is used if the primary server
cannot be reached. While using the secondary SNTP server, the relay tries to switch back
to the primary server on every third SNTP request attempt. If both the SNTP servers are
offline, event time stamps have the time invalid status. The time is requested from the
SNTP server every 60 seconds. Supported SNTP versions are 3 and 4.
IRIG-B time synchronization requires the IRIG-B format B004/B005 according to the
200-04 IRIG-B standard. Older IRIG-B standards refer to these as B000/B001 with
IEEE-1344 extensions. The synchronization time can be either UTC time or local time. As
no reboot is necessary, the time synchronization starts immediately after the IRIG-B sync
source is selected and the IRIG-B signal source is connected.
IRIG-B time synchronization requires a COM card with an IRIG-B input.
When using line differential communication between RED615 protection relays, the time
synchronization messages can be received from the other line end protection relay within
the protection telegrams. The protection relay begins to synchronize its real-time clock
with the remote end protection relay's time if the Line differential time synchronization
source is selected. This does not affect the protection synchronization used in the line
differential protection or the selection of the remote end protection relay's time
synchronization method. [1]
3.5.1.3 Signals
Table 28: GNRLLTMS output signals
ALARM BOOLEAN Time synchronization alarm
WARNING BOOLEAN Time synchronization warning
[1] The line differential protection is available only in RED615.
84 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.5.1.4 Settings
Table 29: Time format
Time format 1=24H:MM:SS:MS 1=24H:MM:SS:M Time format
2=12H:MM:SS:MS S
Date format 1=DD.MM.YYYY 1=DD.MM.YYYY Date format
2=DD/MM/YYYY
3=DD-MM-YYYY
4=MM.DD.YYYY
5=MM/DD/YYYY
6=YYYY-MM-DD
7=YYYY-DD-MM
8=YYYY/DD/MM
Table 30: Time settings

Synch source 0=None 1=SNTP Time synchronization source
1=SNTP
2=Modbus
3=IEEE 1588
5=IRIG-B
9=DNP
PTP domain ID 0...255 1 0 The domain is identified by an integer, the
domainNumber, in the range of 0 to 255.
PTP priority 1 0...255 1 128 PTP priority 1, in the range of 0 to 255.
PTP priority 2 0...255 1 128 PTP priority 2, in the range of 0 to 255.
PTP announce mode 1=Basic IEEE1588 1=Basic IEEE1588 PTP announce frame mode
2=Power Profile

Date 0 Date
Time 0 Time
Local time offset -840...840 min 1 0 Local time offset in minutes

IP SNTP primary 10.58.125.165 IP address for SNTP primary server
IP SNTP secondary 192.168.2.165 IP address for SNTP secondary server
615 series ANSI 85

Technical Manual
Basic functions

DST in use 0=False 1=True DST in use setting
1=True
DST on time (hours) 0...23 h 2 Daylight saving time on, time (hh)
DST on time (minutes) 0...59 min 0 Daylight saving time on, time (mm)
DST on date (day) 1...31 1 Daylight saving time on, date (dd:mm)
DST on date (month) 1=January 5=May Daylight saving time on, date (dd:mm)
2=February
3=March
4=April
5=May
6=June
7=July
8=August
9=September
10=October
11=November
12=December
DST on day (weekday) 0=reserved 0=reserved Daylight saving time on, day of week
1=Monday
2=Tuesday
3=Wednesday
4=Thursday
5=Friday
6=Saturday
7=Sunday
DST off time (hours) 0...23 h 2 Daylight saving time off, time (hh)
DST off time (minutes) 0...59 min 0 Daylight saving time off, time (mm)
DST off date (day) 1...31 25 Daylight saving time off, date (dd:mm)
DST off date (month) 1=January 9=September Daylight saving time off, date (dd:mm)
2=February
3=March
4=April
5=May
6=June
7=July
8=August
9=September
10=October
11=November
12=December
DST off day (weekday) 0=reserved 0=reserved Daylight saving time off, day of week
1=Monday
2=Tuesday
3=Wednesday
4=Thursday
5=Friday
6=Saturday
7=Sunday
DST offset -720...720 min 1 60 Daylight saving time offset
86 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.6 Parameter setting groups
GUID-DFF8F71A-895C-4C06-B287-63C3CA26154C V2 EN
3.6.2 Functionality
The protection relay supports six setting groups. Each setting group contains parameters
categorized as group settings inside application functions. The customer can change the
active setting group at run time.
The active setting group can be changed by a parameter or via binary inputs depending on
the mode selected with the Configuration/Setting Group/SG operation mode setting.
The default value of all inputs is FALSE, which makes it possible to use only the required
number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected. The setting group selection is not
dependent on the SG_x_ACT outputs.
Table 34: Optional operation modes for setting group selection

SG operation mode Description
Operator (Default) Setting group can be changed with the setting
Settings/Setting group/Active group.
Value of the SG_LOGIC_SEL output is FALSE.
Logic mode 1 Setting group can be changed with binary inputs

(BI_SG_2...BI_SG_6). The highest TRUE binary
input defines the active setting group.
Value of the SG_LOGIC_SEL output is TRUE.
Logic mode 2 Setting group can be changed with binary inputs

where BI_SG_4 is used for selecting setting groups
1-3 or 4-6.
When binary input BI_SG_4 is FALSE, setting
groups 1-3 are selected with binary inputs BI_SG_2
and BI_SG_3. When binary input BI_SG_4 is TRUE,
setting groups 4-6 are selected with binary inputs
BI_SG_5 and BI_SG_6.
Value of the SG_LOGIC_SEL output is TRUE.
615 series ANSI 87

Technical Manual
Basic functions
For example, six setting groups can be controlled with three binary inputs. The SG
operation mode is set to “Logic mode 2” and inputs BI_SG_2 and BI_SG_5 are
connected together the same way as inputs BI_SG_3 and BI_SG_6.
Table 35: SG operation mode = “Logic mode 1”

Input
BI_SG_2 BI_SG_3 BI_SG_4 BI_SG_5 BI_SG_6 Active group
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 1
TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 2
any TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE 3
any any TRUE FALSE FALSE 4
any any any TRUE FALSE 5
any any any any TRUE 6
Table 36: SG operation mode = “Logic mode 2”

Input
BI_SG_2 BI_SG_3 BI_SG_4 BI_SG_5 BI_SG_6 Active group
FALSE FALSE FALSE any any 1
TRUE FALSE FALSE any any 2
any TRUE FALSE any any 3
any any TRUE FALSE FALSE 4
any any TRUE TRUE FALSE 5
any any TRUE any TRUE 6
The setting group 1 can be copied to any other or all groups from HMI (Copy group 1).
88 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.7 Test mode
3.7.1 Function blocks
GUID-DFF8F71A-895C-4C06-B287-63C3CA26154C V2 EN
GUID-FA386432-3AEF-468D-B25E-D1C5BDA838E3 V3 EN
Figure 20: Function blocks
3.7.2 Functionality
The mode of all the logical nodes in the relay's IEC 61850 data model can be set with Test
mode. Test mode is selected through one common parameter via the WHMI path
Tests/IED test. By default, Test mode can only be set locally through LHMI. Test mode is
also available via IEC 61850 communication (LD0.LLN0.Mod).
Table 37: Test mode
Test mode Description Protection BEH_BLK
Normal mode Normal operation FALSE
IED blocked Protection working as in “Normal mode” but ACT TRUE
configuration can be used to block physical outputs
to process. Control function commands blocked.
IED test Protection working as in “Normal mode” but FALSE
protection functions are working in parallel with test
parameters.
IED test and blocked Protection working as in “Normal mode” but TRUE
protection functions are working in parallel with test
parameters. ACT configuration can be used to block
physical outputs to process. Control function
commands blocked.
615 series ANSI 89

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Behavior data objects in all logical nodes follow LD0.LLN0.Mod value.

If "Normal mode" is selected, behaviour data objects follow mode (.Mod)
data object of the corresponding logical device.
Vertical and horizontal communication is not blocked by the “IED

blocked” or “IED test and blocked” modes.
3.7.3 Application configuration and Test mode

The physical outputs from control commands to process are blocked with ”IED blocked”
and “IED test and blocked” modes. If physical outputs need to be blocked from the
protection, the application configuration must be used to block these signals. Blocking
scheme needs to use BEH_BLK output of PROTECTION function block.
3.7.4 Control mode

The mode of all logical nodes located under CTRL logical device can be set with Control
mode. The Control mode parameter is available via the HMI or PCM600 path
Configuration/Control/General. By default, Control mode can only be set locally
through LHMI.Control mode inherits its value from Test mode but Control mode ”On”,
“Blocked” and “Off” can also be set independently. Control mode is also available via IEC
61850 communication (CTRL.LLN0.Mod).
Table 38: Control mode
Control mode Description Control BEH_BLK
On Normal operation FALSE
Blocked Control function commands blocked TRUE
Off Control functions disabled FALSE
Behavior data objects under CTRL logical device follow

CTRL.LLN0.Mod value. If "On" is selected, behavior data objects follow
the mode of the corresponding logical device.
3.7.5 Application configuration and Control mode

The physical outputs from commands to process are blocked with “Blocked“ mode. If
physical outputs need to be blocked totally, meaning also commands from the binary
90 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
inputs, the application configuration must be used to block these signals. Blocking scheme
uses BEH_BLK output of CONTROL function block.
3.7.6 Authorization
By default, Test mode and Control mode can only be changed from LHMI. It is possible
to write test mode by remote client, if it is needed in configuration. This is done via LHMI
only by setting the Remote test mode parameter via Tests/IED test/Test mode. Remote
operation is possible only when control position of the relay is in remote position. Local
and remote control can be selected with R/L button or via Control function block in
application configuration.
When using the Signal Monitoring tool to force online values, the following conditions
need to be met.
• Remote force is set to “All levels”

• Test mode is enabled
• Control position of the relay is in remote position
Table 39: Remote test mode

Remote test mode 61850-8-1-MMS WHMI/PCM600
Off No access No access
Maintenance Command originator category maintenance No access
All levels All originator categories Yes
3.7.7 LHMI indications

The yellow Start LED flashes when the relay is in “IED blocked” or “IED test and
blocked” mode. The green Ready LED flashes to indicate that the “IED test and blocked”
mode or "IED test" mode is activated.
3.7.8 Signals
Table 40: PROTECTION input signals
BI_SG_2 BOOLEAN 0 Setting group 2 is active
615 series ANSI 91

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 41: CONTROL input signals

CTRL_OFF BOOLEAN 0 Control OFF
CTRL_LOC BOOLEAN 0 Control local
CTRL_STA BOOLEAN 0 Control station
CTRL_REM BOOLEAN 0 Control remote
CTRL_ALL BOOLEAN 0 Control all
Table 42: PROTECTION output signals

SG_LOGIC_SEL BOOLEAN Logic selection for setting group
SG_1_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
BEH_BLK BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 block status
BEH_TST BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 test status
FRQ_ADP_FAIL BOOLEAN Frequency adaptivity status fail
Table 43: CONTROL output signals

OFF BOOLEAN Control OFF
LOCAL BOOLEAN Control local
STATION BOOLEAN Control station
REMOTE BOOLEAN Control remote
ALL BOOLEAN Control all
BEH_BLK BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 block status
BEH_TST BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 test status
92 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.8 Fault recorder FLR

FLR
BLOCK
CB_CLRD
GUID-313A171A-40C7-4329-9C87-1E6A7D704479 V1 EN
3.8.2 Functionality
The protection relay has the capacity to store the records of 128 latest fault events. Fault
records include fundamental or RMS current values. The records enable the user to
analyze recent power system events. Each fault record (FLTRFRC) is marked with an up-
counting fault number and a time stamp that is taken from the beginning of the fault.
The fault recording period begins from the pickup event of any protection function and
ends if any protection function trips or the pickup(s) is restored before the trip event. If a
pickup is restored without a trip event, the pickup duration shows the protection function
that has picked up first.
Pickup duration that has the value of 100% indicates that a protection function has tripped
during the fault and if none of the protection functions has been tripped, Pickup duration
shows always values less than 100%.
The Fault recorded data Protection and Pickup duration is from the same protection
function. The Fault recorded data trip time shows the time of the actual fault period. This
value is the time difference between the activation of the internal pickup and trip signals.
The actual trip time also includes the pickup time and the delay of the output relay. The
Fault recorded data Breaker clear time is the time difference between internal trip signal
and activation of CB_CLRD input.
If some functions in relay application are sensitive to start frequently it

might be advisable to set the setting parameter Trig mode to “From trip”.
Then only faults that cause an trip event trigger a new fault recording.
The fault-related current, voltage, frequency, angle values, shot pointer and the active
setting group number are taken from the moment of the operate event, or from the
beginning of the fault if only a pickup event occurs during the fault. The maximum current
value collects the maximum fault currents during the fault. In case frequency cannot be
measured, nominal frequency is used for frequency and zero for Frequency gradient and
validity is set accordingly.
615 series ANSI 93

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Measuring mode for phase current and residual current values can be selected with the
Measurement mode setting parameter.
3.8.3 Settings
Table 44: FLR settings (Basic)
Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable
5=disable
Trig mode 0=Trip or Pickup 0=Trip or Pickup Triggering mode
1=Trip only
2=Pickup only
Table 45: FLR settings (Advanced)

Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
94 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Table 46: FLR Monitored data
Fault number INT32 0...999999 Fault record number
Time and date Timestamp Fault record time stamp
Protection Enum 0=Unknown Protection function
1=PHLPTOC1
2=PHLPTOC2
6=PHHPTOC1
7=PHHPTOC2
8=PHHPTOC3
9=PHHPTOC4
12=PHIPTOC1
13=PHIPTOC2
17=EFLPTOC1
18=EFLPTOC2
19=EFLPTOC3
22=EFHPTOC1
23=EFHPTOC2
24=EFHPTOC3
25=EFHPTOC4
30=EFIPTOC1
31=EFIPTOC2
32=EFIPTOC3
35=NSPTOC1
36=NSPTOC2
-7=INTRPTEF1
-5=STTPMSU1
-3=JAMPTOC1
41=PDNSPTOC
1
44=T1PTTR1
46=T2PTTR1
48=MPTTR1
50=DEFLPDEF1
51=DEFLPDEF2
53=DEFHPDEF
1
56=EFPADM1
57=EFPADM2
58=EFPADM3
59=FRPFRQ1
60=FRPFRQ2
61=FRPFRQ3
62=FRPFRQ4
63=FRPFRQ5
64=FRPFRQ6
615 series ANSI 95

Technical Manual
Basic functions

65=LSHDPFRQ
1
66=LSHDPFRQ
2
67=LSHDPFRQ
3
68=LSHDPFRQ
4
69=LSHDPFRQ
5
71=DPHLPDOC
1
72=DPHLPDOC
2
74=DPHHPDOC
1
77=MAPGAPC1
78=MAPGAPC2
79=MAPGAPC3
85=MNSPTOC1
86=MNSPTOC2
88=LOFLPTUC1
90=TR2PTDF1
91=LNPLDF1
92=LREFPNDF1
94=MPDIF1
96=HREFPDIF1
100=ROVPTOV
1
101=ROVPTOV
2
102=ROVPTOV
3
104=PHPTOV1
105=PHPTOV2
106=PHPTOV3
108=PHPTUV1
109=PHPTUV2
110=PHPTUV3
112=NSPTOV1
113=NSPTOV2
116=PSPTUV1
118=ARCSARC
1
119=ARCSARC
2
120=ARCSARC
3
-96=SPHIPTOC
1
-93=SPHLPTOC
2
-92=SPHLPTOC
1
-89=SPHHPTOC
2
-88=SPHHPTOC
1
-87=SPHPTUV4
-86=SPHPTUV3
-85=SPHPTUV2
-84=SPHPTUV1
96 Table continues on next page 615 series ANSI
Technical Manual
Basic functions

-83=SPHPTOV4
-82=SPHPTOV3
-81=SPHPTOV2
-80=SPHPTOV1
-25=OEPVPH4
-24=OEPVPH3
-23=OEPVPH2
-22=OEPVPH1
-19=PSPTOV2
-18=PSPTOV1
-15=PREVPTOC
1
-12=PHPTUC2
-11=PHPTUC1
-9=PHIZ1
5=PHLTPTOC1
20=EFLPTOC4
26=EFHPTOC5
27=EFHPTOC6
37=NSPTOC3
38=NSPTOC4
45=T1PTTR2
54=DEFHPDEF
2
75=DPHHPDOC
2
89=LOFLPTUC2
103=ROVPTOV
4
117=PSPTUV2
-13=PHPTUC3
3=PHLPTOC3
10=PHHPTOC5
11=PHHPTOC6
28=EFHPTOC7
29=EFHPTOC8
107=PHPTOV4
111=PHPTUV4
114=NSPTOV3
115=NSPTOV4
-30=PHDSTPDI
S1
-29=TR3PTDF1
-28=HICPDIF1
-27=HIBPDIF1
-26=HIAPDIF1
-32=LSHDPFRQ
8
-31=LSHDPFRQ
7
70=LSHDPFRQ
6
80=MAPGAPC4
81=MAPGAPC5
82=MAPGAPC6
615 series ANSI 97

Technical Manual
Basic functions

83=MAPGAPC7
-102=MAPGAPC
12
-101=MAPGAPC
11
-100=MAPGAPC
10
-99=MAPGAPC9
-98=RESCPSCH
1
-57=FDEFLPDE
F2
-56=FDEFLPDE
F1
-54=FEFLPTOC
1
-53=FDPHLPDO
C2
-52=FDPHLPDO
C1
-50=FPHLPTOC
1
-47=MAP12GAP
C8
-46=MAP12GAP
C7
-45=MAP12GAP
C6
-44=MAP12GAP
C5
-43=MAP12GAP
C4
-42=MAP12GAP
C3
-41=MAP12GAP
C2
-40=MAP12GAP
C1
-37=HAEFPTOC
1
-35=WPWDE3
-34=WPWDE2
-33=WPWDE1
52=DEFLPDEF3
84=MAPGAPC8
93=LREFPNDF2
97=HREFPDIF2
-117=XDEFLPD
EF2
-116=XDEFLPD
EF1
98 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

-115=SDPHLPD
OC2
-114=SDPHLPD
OC1
-113=XNSPTOC
2
-112=XNSPTOC
1
-111=XEFIPTOC
2
-110=XEFHPTO
C4
-109=XEFHPTO
C3
-108=XEFLPTO
C3
-107=XEFLPTO
C2
-66=DQPTUV1
-65=VVSPPAM1
-64=PHPVOC1
-63=H3EFPSEF
1
-60=HCUBPTO
C1
-59=CUBPTOC1
-72=DOPPDPR1
-69=DUPPDPR1
-61=COLPTOC1
-106=MAPGAPC
16
-105=MAPGAPC
15
-104=MAPGAPC
14
-103=MAPGAPC
13
-76=MAPGAPC1
8
-75=MAPGAPC1
7
-62=SRCPTOC1
-74=DOPPDPR3
-73=DOPPDPR2
-70=DUPPDPR2
-58=UZPDIS1
-36=UEXPDIS1
14=MFADPSDE
1
-10=LVRTPTUV
1
-8=LVRTPTUV2
-6=LVRTPTUV3
615 series ANSI 99

Technical Manual
Basic functions

-122=DPH3LPD
OC1
-121=DPH3HPD
OC2
-120=DPH3HPD
OC1
-119=PH3LPTO
C2
-118=PH3LPTO
C1
-79=PH3HPTOC
2
-78=PH3HPTOC
1
-77=PH3IPTOC1
-127=PHAPTUV
1
-124=PHAPTOV
1
-123=DPH3LPD
OC2
-68=PHPVOC2
-67=DQPTUV2
-39=UEXPDIS2
98=MHZPDIF1
-4=MREFPTOC
1
-21=JAMPTOC2
Pickup duration FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Maximum pickup duration of
all stages during the fault
Trip time FLOAT32 0.000...999999.9 s Trip time
99
Breaker clear time FLOAT32 0.000...3.000 s Breaker clear time
Fault distance FLOAT32 0.00...3000.00 pu Distance to fault measured in
pu
Fault resistance FLOAT32 0.00...1000000.0 ohm Fault resistance
0
Fault loop resistance FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000. ohm Resistance of fault loop
00
Fault loop reactance FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000. ohm Reactance of fault loop
00
Setting group INT32 1...6 Active setting group
Shot pointer INT32 1...7 Autoreclosing shot pointer
value
Max diff current IA FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Maximum phase A differential
current
Max diff current IB FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Maximum phase B differential
current
Max diff current IC FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Maximum phase C differential
current
Diff current IA FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Differential current phase A
100 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Diff current IB FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Differential current phase B
Diff current IC FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Differential current phase C
Max bias current IA FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Maximum phase A bias
current
Max bias current IB FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Maximum phase B bias
current
Max bias current IC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Maximum phase C bias
current
Bias current IA FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Bias current phase A
Bias current IB FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Bias current phase B
Bias current IC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Bias current phase C
Diff current IG FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Differential current residual
Bias current IG FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Bias current residual
Max current IA FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase A current
Max current IB FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase B current
Max current IC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase C current
Max current IG FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum residual current
Current IA FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase A current
Current IB FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase B current
Current IC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase C current
Current IG FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Residual current
Current IN FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Calculated residual current
Current I1 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Positive sequence current
Current I2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Negative sequence current
Max current IA2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase A current (b)
Max current IB2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase B current (b)
Max current IC2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase C current (b)
Max current IG2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum residual current (b)
Current IA2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase A current (b)
Current IB2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase B current (b)
Current IC2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase C current (b)
Current IG2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Residual current (b)
Current I0B FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Calculated residual current (b)
Current I1B FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Positive sequence current (b)
Current I2B FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Negative sequence current (b)
Max current IA3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase A current (c)
Max current IB3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase B current (c)
615 series ANSI 101

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Max current IC3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase C current (c)
Max current IG3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum residual current (c)
Current IA3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase A current (c)
Current IB3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase B current (c)
Current IC3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase C current (c)
Current IG3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Residual current (c)
Current I0C FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Calculated residual current (c)
Current I1C FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Positive sequence current (c)
Current I2C FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Negative sequence current (c)
Voltage VA FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase A voltage
Voltage VB FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase B voltage
Voltage VC FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase C voltage
Voltage VAB FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase A to phase B voltage
Voltage VBC FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase B to phase C voltage
Voltage VCA FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase C to phase A voltage
Voltage VG FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Residual voltage
Voltage V0 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Zero sequence voltage
Voltage V1 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Positive sequence voltage
Voltage V2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Negative sequence voltage
Voltage VA2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase A voltage (b)
Voltage VB2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase B voltage (b)
Voltage VC2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase B voltage (b)
Voltage VAB2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase A to phase B voltage (b)
VoltageVBC2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase B to phase C voltage
(b)
Voltage VCA2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase C to phase A voltage
(b)
Voltage VG2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Residual voltage (b)
Voltage Zro-SeqB FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Zero sequence voltage (b)
Voltage Ps-SeqB FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Positive sequence voltage (b)
Voltage Ng-SeqB FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Negative sequence voltage
(b)
49 thermal level FLOAT32 0.00...99.99 49 calculated temperature of
the protected object relative to
the trip level
PDNSPTOC1 rat. FLOAT32 0.00...999.99 % 46PD ratio I2/I1
I2/I1
Frequency FLOAT32 30.00...80.00 Hz Frequency
102 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Frequency gradient FLOAT32 -10.00...10.00 Hz/s Frequency gradient
Conductance Yo FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000. mS Conductance Yo
00
Susceptance Yo FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000. mS Susceptance Yo
00
Angle VG - IG FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle residual voltage -
residual current
Angle VBC - IA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase B to phase C
voltage - phase A current
Angle VCA - IB FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase C to phase A
voltage - phase B current
Angle VAB - IC FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase A to phase B
voltage - phase C current
Angle VG2 - IG2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle residual voltage -
residual current (b)
Angle VBC2 - IA2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase B to phase C
voltage - phase A current (b)
Angle VCA2 - IB2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase C to phase A
voltage - phase B current (b)
Angle VAB2 - IC2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase A to phase B
voltage - phase C current (b)
3.9 Non-volatile memory
The relay does not include any battery backup power. If the auxiliary power is lost, critical
information such as relay configuration and settings, events, disturbance recordings and
other critical data are saved to the relay’s non-volatile memory. The relay’s real-time
clock keeps running via a 48-hour capacitor backup.
• Up to 1024 events are stored. The stored events are visible in LHMI and WHMI only
• Recorded data
• Fault records (up to 128)
• Maximum demands
• Circuit breaker condition monitoring
• Latched alarm and trip LEDs' statuses
• Trip circuit lockout
• Counter values
• Load profile
615 series ANSI 103

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.10 Sensor inputs for currents and voltages
This chapter gives short examples on how to define the correct parameters for sensors.
Sensors have corrections factors, measured and verified by the sensor

manufacturer, to increase the measurement accuracy of primary values.
Correction factors are recommended to be set. Two types of correction
factors are available for voltage and rogowski sensors. The Amplitude
correction factor is named Amplitude corr. A(B/C) and Angle correction
factor is named Angle corr A(B/C). These correction factors can be found
on the Sensor's rating plate. If the correction factors are not available,
contact the sensor manufacturer for more information.
Rogowski sensor setting example

In this example, an 80 A/0.150 V at 50 Hz sensor is used and the application has a 150 A
nominal current (In). As the Rogowski sensor is linear and does not saturate, the 80 A/
0.150 V at 50 Hz sensor also works as a 150 A/0.28125 V at 50 Hz sensor. When defining
another primary value for the sensor, also the nominal voltage has to be redefined to
maintain the same transformation ratio. However, the setting in the protection relay
(Rated Secondary Value) is not in V but in mV/Hz, which makes the same setting value
valid for both 50 and 60 Hz nominal frequency.
In
× Kr
I pr
RSV =
fn
GUID-6A480073-5C35-4319-8B38-402608D4C098 V2 EN (Equation 1)
RSV Rated Secondary Value in mV/Hz

In Application nominal current
Ipr Sensor-rated primary current
fn Network nominal frequency
Kr Sensor-rated voltage at the rated current in mV
In this example, the value is as calculated using the equation.
150 A
× 150mV
80 A mV
= 5.625
50Hz Hz
GUID-13DE42A0-29C0-4FE0-B00B-1215B37E3B7B V2 EN (Equation 2)
104 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
With this information, the protection relay's Rogowski sensor settings can be set.
Table 47: Example setting values for rogowski sensor
Setting Value
Primary current 150 A
Rated secondary value 5.625 mV/Hz
Nominal current 150 A
Unless otherwise specified, the Nominal Current setting should always be

the same as the Primary Current setting.
Voltage sensor setting example

The voltage sensor is based on the resistive divider or capacitive divider principle.
Therefore, the voltage is linear throughout the whole measuring range. The output signal
is a voltage, directly proportional to the primary voltage. For the voltage sensor all
parameters are readable directly from its rating plate and conversions are not needed.
In this example the system phase-to-phase voltage rating is 10 kV. Thus, the Primary
voltage parameter is set to 10 kV. For protection relays with sensor measurement support
the Voltage input type is always set to “CVD sensor” and it cannot be changed. The same
applies for the VT connection parameter which is always set to “WYE” type. The division
ratio for ABB voltage sensors is most often 10000:1. Thus, the Division ratio parameter
is usually set to “10000”. The primary voltage is proportionally divided by this division
ratio.
Table 48: Example setting values for voltage sensor
Setting Value
Primary voltage 10 kV
VT connection Wye
Voltage input type 3=CVD sensor
Division ratio 10000
3.11 Binary input
3.11.1 Binary input filter time

The filter time eliminates debounces and short disturbances on a binary input. The filter
time is set for each binary input of the protection relay.
615 series ANSI 105

Technical Manual
Basic functions
1 2
4
5 5
GUID-13DA5833-D263-4E23-B666-CF38B1011A4B V1 EN
Figure 22: Binary input filtering
1 t0
2 t1
3 Input signal
4 Filtered input signal
5 Filter time
At the beginning, the input signal is at the high state, the short low state is filtered and no
input state change is detected. The low state starting from the time t0 exceeds the filter
time, which means that the change in the input state is detected and the time tag attached
to the input change is t0. The high state starting from t1 is detected and the time tag t1 is
attached.
Each binary input has a filter time parameter Input # filter, where # is the number of the
binary input of the module in question (for example Input 1 filter).
Table 49: Input filter parameter values
Parameter Values Default
Input # filter time 5...1000 ms 5 ms
3.11.2 Binary input inversion

The parameter Input # invert is used to invert a binary input.
106 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 50: Binary input states

Control voltage Input # invert State of binary input
No 0 FALSE (0)
Yes 0 TRUE (1)
No 1 TRUE (1)
Yes 1 FALSE (0)
When a binary input is inverted, the state of the input is TRUE (1) when no control voltage
is applied to its terminals. Accordingly, the input state is FALSE (0) when a control
voltage is applied to the terminals of the binary input.
3.11.3 Oscillation suppression

Oscillation suppression is used to reduce the load from the system when a binary input
starts oscillating. A binary input is regarded as oscillating if the number of valid state
changes (= number of events after filtering) during one second is equal to or greater than
the set oscillation level value. During oscillation, the binary input is blocked (the status is
invalid) and an event is generated. The state of the input will not change when it is blocked,
that is, its state depends on the condition before blocking.
The binary input is regarded as non-oscillating if the number of valid state changes during
one second is less than the set oscillation level value minus the set oscillation hysteresis
value. Note that the oscillation hysteresis must be set lower than the oscillation level to
enable the input to be restored from oscillation. When the input returns to a non-oscillating
state, the binary input is deblocked (the status is valid) and an event is generated.
Table 51: Oscillation parameter values
Parameter Values Default
Input osc. level 2...50 events/s 30 events/s
Input osc. hyst 2...50 events/s 10 events/s
3.12 Binary outputs
The protection relay provides a number of binary outputs used for tripping, executing
local or remote control actions of a breaker or a disconnector, and for connecting the
protection relay to external annunciation equipment for indicating, signalling and
recording.
615 series ANSI 107

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Power output contacts are used when the current rating requirements of the contacts are
high, for example, for controlling a breaker, such as energizing the breaker trip and closing
coils.
The contacts used for external signalling, recording and indicating, the signal outputs,
need to adjust to smaller currents, but they can require a minimum current (burden) to
ensure a guaranteed operation.
The protection relay provides both power output and signal output contacts. To guarantee
proper operation, the type of the contacts used are chosen based on the operating and reset
time, continuous current rating, make and carry for short time, breaking rate and minimum
connected burden. A combination of series or parallel contacts can also be used for special
applications. When appropriate, a signal output can also be used to energize an external
trip relay, which in turn can be confiugred to energize the breaker trip or close coils.
Using an external trip relay can require an external trip circuit supervision
relay. It can also require wiring a separate trip relay contact back to the
protection relay for breaker failure protection function.
All contacts are freely programmable, except the internal fault output IRF.
3.12.1 Power output contacts

Power output contacts are normally used for energizing the breaker closing coil and trip
coil, external high burden lockout or trip relays.
3.12.1.1 Dual single-pole power outputs PO1 and PO2 in power supply module
Dual (series-connected) single-pole (normally open/form A) power output contacts PO1

and PO2 are rated for continuous current of 8 A. The contacts are normally used for
closing circuit breakers and energizing high burden trip relays. They can be arranged to
trip the circuit breakers when the trip circuit supervision is not available or when external
trip circuit supervision relay is provided.
The power outputs are included in slot X100 of the power supply module.
108 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
X100
PO1
6
7
PO2
8
9
GUID-4E1E21B1-BEEC-4351-A7BE-9D2DBA451985 V1 EN
Figure 23: Dual single-pole power output contacts PO1 and PO2
3.12.1.2 Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision in
power supply module
The power outputs PO3 and PO4 are double-pole normally open/form A power outputs
with trip circuit supervision.
When the two poles of the contacts are connected in series, they have the same technical
specification as PO1 for breaking duty. The trip circuit supervision hardware and
associated functionality which can supervise the breaker coil both during closing and
opening condition are also provided. Contacts PO3 and PO4 are almost always used for
energizing the breaker trip coils.
615 series ANSI 109

Technical Manual
Basic functions
X100
16
PO3
17
15
19
TCM-1
18
20
22
PO4
21
23
TCM-2 24
GUID-99C2B8B7-C74C-41CB-90A3-72C9D2DA65B6 V1 EN
Figure 24: Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision
Power outputs PO3 and PO4 are included in the power supply module located in slot X100
of the protection relay.
3.12.1.3 Dual single-pole high-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 in
BIO0007
HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 are dual parallel connected, single-pole, normally open/form A
high-speed power outputs. The high-speed power output is a hybrid discrete and
electromechanical output that is rated as a power output.
The outputs are normally used in applications that require fast relay output contact
activation time to achieve fast opening of a breaker, such as, arc-protection or breaker
failure protection, where fast operation is required either to minimize fault effects to the
equipment or to avoid a fault to expand to a larger area. With the high-speed outputs, the
total time from the application to the relay output contact activation is 5...6 ms shorter than
when using output contacts with conventional mechanical output relays. The high-speed
power outputs have a continuous rating of 6 A.
110 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
X110
15
HSO1
16
19
HSO2
20
23
HSO3
24
GUID-38EDD366-7456-4933-B49E-0F43FE1D6C39 V1 EN
Figure 25: High-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3
The reset time of the high-speed output contacts is longer than that of the conventional
output contacts.
High-speed power contacts are part of the card BIO0007 with eight binary inputs and three
HSOs. They are optional alternatives to conventional BIO cards of the protection relay.
3.12.2 Signal output contacts

Signal output contacts are single-pole, single (normally open/form A or change-over/form
C) signal output contacts (SO1, SO2,...) or parallel connected dual contacts.
The signal output contacts are used for energizing, for example, external low burden trip
relays, auxiliary relays, annunciators and LEDs.
A single signal contact is rated for a continuous current of 5 A. It has a make and carry for
0.5 seconds at 15 A.
When two contacts are connected in parallel, the relay is of a different design. It has the
make and carry rating of 30 A for 0.5 seconds. This can be applied for energizing breaker
close coil and tripping coil. Due to the limited breaking capacity, a breaker auxiliary
contact can be required to break the circuit.
3.12.2.1 Internal fault signal output IRF
The internal fault signal output (change-over/form C) IRF is a single contact included in
the power supply module of the protection relay.
615 series ANSI 111

Technical Manual
Basic functions
X100
3
IRF
4
5
GUID-C09595E9-3C42-437A-BDB2-B20C35FA0BD2 V1 EN
Figure 26: Internal fault signal output IRF
3.12.2.2 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module
Signal outputs (normally open/form A or change-over/form C) SO1 (dual parallel form C)

and SO2 (single contact/form A) are part of the power supply module of the protection
relay.
X100
10
SO1
11
12
X100
13
SO2
14
GUID-83F96C39-652F-494A-A226-FD106568C228 V1 EN
Figure 27: Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module
112 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.12.2.3 Signal outputs SO1, SO2, SO3 and SO4 in BIO0005
The optional card BIO0005 provides the signal outputs SO1, SO2 SO3 and SO4. Signal
outputs SO1 and SO2 are dual, parallel form C contacts; SO3 is a single form C contact,
and SO4 is a single form A contact.
X110
14
SO1
16
15
17
SO2
19
18
X110
20
SO3
22
21
23
SO4
24
GUID-CBA9A48A-2549-455B-907D-8261E2259BF4 V1 EN
Figure 28: Signal output in BIO0005
3.12.2.4 Signal outputs SO1, SO2 and SO3 in BIO0006
The optional card BIO0006 provides the signal outputs SO1, SO2 and SO3. Signal outputs
SO1 and SO2 are dual, parallel form C contacts; SO3 is a single form C contact.
615 series ANSI 113

Technical Manual
Basic functions
X130
10
SO1
12
11
13
SO2
15
14
16
SO3
18
17
GUID-C5B5FD1C-617B-4F38-A0D4-D98735E69530 V1 EN
Figure 29: Signal output in BIO0006
3.13 RTD/mA inputs
3.13.1 Functionality
The RTD and mA analog input module is used for monitoring and metering current (mA),
temperature (°C) and resistance (Ω). Each input can be linearly scaled for various
applications, for example, transformer’s tap changer position indication. Each input has
independent limit value supervision and deadband supervision functions, including
warning and alarm signals.
3.13.2 Operation principle

All the inputs of the module are independent RTD and mA channels with individual
protection, reference and optical isolation for each input, making them galvanically
isolated from each other and from the rest of the module. However, the RTD inputs share
a common ground.
3.13.2.1 Selection of input signal type
The function module inputs accept current or resistance type signals. The inputs are
configured for a particular type of input type by the channel-specific Input mode setting.
114 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
The default value for all inputs is “Not in use”, which means that the channel is not
sampled at all, and the output value quality is set accordingly.
Table 52: Limits for the RTD/mA inputs
Input mode Description
Not in use Default selection. Used when the corresponding input is not used.
0...20 mA Selection for analog DC milliampere current inputs in the input range of 0...20 mA.
Resistance Selection for RTD inputs in the input range of 0...2000 Ω.
Pt100 Selection for RTD inputs, when temperature sensor is used. All the selectable sensor
Pt250 types have their resistance vs. temperature characteristics stored in the module;
Ni100 default measuring range is -40...200°C.
Ni120
Ni250
Cu10
3.13.2.2 Selection of output value format
Each input has independent Value unit settings that are used to select the unit for the
channel output. The default value for the Value unit setting is “Dimensionless”. Input
minimum and Input maximum, and Value maximum and Value minimum settings have to
be adjusted according to the input channel. The default values for these settings are set to
their maximum and minimum setting values.
When the channel is used for temperature sensor type, set the Value unit setting to
“Degrees celsius”. When Value unit is set to “Degrees celsius”, the linear scaling is not
possible, but the default range (-40…200 °C) can be set smaller with the Value maximum
and Value minimum settings.
When the channel is used for DC milliampere signal and the application requires a linear
scaling of the input range, the Value unit setting value has to be "Dimensionless”, where
the input range can be linearly scaled with settings Input minimum and Input maximum to
Value minimum and Value maximum. When milliampere is used as an output unit, Value
unit has to be "Ampere”. When Value unit is set to “Ampere”, the linear scaling is not
possible, but the default range (0…20 mA) can be set smaller with the Value maximum and
Value minimum settings.
When the channel is used for resistance type signals and the application requires a linear
scaling of the input range, the Value unit setting value has to be "Dimensionless”, where
the input range can be linearly scaled with the setting Input minimum and Input maximum
to Value minimum and Value maximum. When resistance is used as an output unit, Value
unit has to be "Ohm". When Value unit is set to “Ohm”, the linear scaling is not possible,
but the default range (0…2000 Ω) can be set smaller with the Value maximum and Value
minimum settings.
615 series ANSI 115

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.13.2.3 Input linear scaling
Each RTD/mA input can be scaled linearly by the construction of a linear output function
in respect to the input. The curve consists of two points, where the y-axis (Input minimum
and Input maximum) defines the input range and the x-axis (Value minimum and Value
maximum) is the range of the scaled value of the input.
The input scaling can be bypassed by selecting Value unit = "Ohm" when
Input mode = "Resistance" is used and by selecting Value unit = "Ampere"
when Input mode = "0...20 mA" is used.
Example for linear scaling

Milliampere input is used as tap changer position information. The sensor information is
from 4 mA to 20 mA that is equivalent to the tap changer position from -36 to 36,
respectively.
X130-Input#
20 mA
Input maximum
”0..20mA”
Input mode
4 mA
Input minimum AI_VAL#
-36 ”Dimensionless” 36
Value minimum Value unit Value maximum
GUID-85338A5E-3D2F-4031-A598-EA8A525190D3 V1 EN
Figure 30: Milliampere input scaled to tap changer position information
3.13.2.4 Measurement chain supervision
Each input contains a functionality to monitor the input measurement chain. The circuitry
monitors the RTD channels continuously and reports a circuitry break of any enabled
input channel. If the measured input value is outside the limits, minimum/maximum value
is shown in the corresponding output. The quality of the corresponding output is set
accordingly to indicate misbehavior in the RTD/mA input.
116 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 53: Function identification, limits for the RTD/mA inputs

Input Limit value
RTD temperature, high > 200 °C
RTD temperature, low < -40 °C
mA current, high > 23 mA
Resistance, high > 2000 Ω
3.13.2.5 Self-supervision
Each input sample is validated before it is fed into the filter algorithm. The samples are
validated by measuring an internally set reference current immediately after the inputs are
sampled. Each RTD sensor type has expected current based on the sensor type. If the
measured offset current deviates from the reference current more than 20%, the sample is
discarded and the output is set to invalid. The invalid measure status deactivates as soon
as the measured input signal is within the measurement offset.
3.13.2.6 Calibration
RTD and mA inputs are calibrated at the factory. The calibration circuitry monitors the
RTD channels continuously and reports a circuitry break of any channel.
3.13.2.7 Limit value supervision
The limit value supervision function indicates whether the measured value of AI_INST#
exceeds or falls below the set limits. All the measuring channels have an individual limit
value supervision function. The measured value contains the corresponding range
information AI_RANGE# and has a value in the range of 0 to 4:
• 0: “normal”
• 1: “high”
• 2: “low”
• 3: “high-high”
• 4: “low-low”
The range information changes and the new values are reported.
615 series ANSI 117

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Y Out of Range
Value maximum
AI_RANGE#=3
Val high high limit
Hysteresis
AI_RANGE#=1
Val high limit
AI_RANGE#=0
AI_RANGE#=0 t
Val low limit

AI_RANGE#=2
Val low low limit
AI_RANGE#=4
Value Reported
Value minimum
GUID-6A6033E6-22C8-415D-AABD-D0556D38C986 V1 EN
Figure 31: Limit value supervision for RTD
The range information of “High-high limit” and “Low-low limit” is combined from all
measurement channels to the Boolean ALARM output. The range information of “High
limit” and “Low limit” is combined from all measurement channels to the Boolean
WARNING output.
Table 54: Settings for RTD analog input limit value supervision
Function Settings for limit value supervision
RTD analog input Out of range Value maximum
High-high limit Val high high limit
High limit Val high limit
Low limit Val low limit
Low-low limit Val low low limit
Out of range Value minimum
When the measured value exceeds either the Value maximum setting or the Value
minimum setting, the corresponding quality is set to out of range and a maximum or
minimum value is shown when the measured value exceeds the added hysteresis,
respectively. The hysteresis is added to the extreme value of the range limit to allow the
measurement slightly to exceed the limit value before it is considered out of range.
3.13.2.8 Deadband supervision
Each input has an independent deadband supervision. The deadband supervision function
reports the measured value according to integrated changes over a time period.
118 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
GUID-63CA9A0F-24D8-4BA8-A667-88632DF53284 V1 EN
Figure 32: Integral deadband supervision
The deadband value used in the integral calculation is configured with the Value
deadband setting. The value represents the percentage of the difference between the
maximum and minimum limits in the units of 0.001 percent * seconds. The reporting delay
of the integral algorithms in seconds is calculated with the formula:
deadband
(Value maximum − Value minimum ) ⋅ s
t (s ) = 100000
∆Y
GUID-CC447162-C1B4-4E74-A253-828F388266EB V2 EN (Equation 3)
Example of X130 (RTD) analog input deadband supervision

Temperature sensor Pt100 is used in the temperature range of 15...180 °C. Value unit
“Degrees Celsius” is used and the set values Value minimum and Value maximum are set
to 15 and 180, respectively.
Value deadband = 7500 (7.5% of the total measuring range 165)
AI_VAL# = AI_DB# = 85
If AI_VAL# changes to 90, the reporting delay is:
7500%s
(180°C − 15°C ) ⋅ s
t (s ) = 100000 ≈ 2.5s
90°C − 85°C
GUID-F47EF6B6-9A14-44A2-AD19-BC067E4A7D78 V3 EN (Equation 4)
Table 55: Settings for RTD analog deadband supervision

Function Setting Maximum/minimum (=range)
RTD analog input Value deadband Value maximum / Value minimum
(=20000)
615 series ANSI 119

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Since the function can be utilized in various measurement modes, the

default values are set to the extremes; thus, it is very important to set
correct limit values to suit the application before the deadband supervision
works properly.
3.13.2.9 RTD temperature vs. resistance

Table 56: Temperature vs. resistance
Temp Platinum TCR 0.00385 Nickel TCR 0.00618 Copper TCR
°C 0.00427
Pt 100 Pt 250 Ni 100 Ni 120 Ni 250 Cu 10
-40 84.27 210.675 79.1 94.92 197.75 7.49
-30 88.22 220.55 84.1 100.92 210.25 -
-20 92.16 230.4 89.3 107.16 223.25 8.263
-10 96.09 240.225 94.6 113.52 236.5 -
0 100 250 100 120 250 9.035
10 103.9 259.75 105.6 126.72 264 -
20 107.79 269.475 111.2 133.44 278 9.807
30 111.67 279.175 117.1 140.52 292.75 -
40 115.54 288.85 123 147.6 307.5 10.58
50 119.4 298.5 129.1 154.92 322.75 -
60 123.24 308.1 135.3 162.36 338.25 11.352
70 127.07 317.675 141.7 170.04 354.25 -
80 130.89 327.225 148.3 177.96 370.75 12.124
90 134.7 336.75 154.9 185.88 387.25 -
100 138.5 346.25 161.8 194.16 404.5 12.897
120 146.06 365.15 176 211.2 440 13.669
140 153.58 383.95 190.9 229.08 477.25 14.442
150 - - 198.6 238.32 496.5 -
160 161.04 402.6 206.6 247.92 516.5 15.217
180 168.46 421.15 223.2 267.84 558 -
200 175.84 439.6 240.7 288.84 601.75 -
3.13.2.10 RTD/mA input connection
RTD inputs can be used with a 2-wire or 3-wire connection with common ground. When
using the 3-wire connection, it is important that all three wires connecting the sensor are
120 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
symmetrical, that is, the wires are of the same type and length. Thus the wire resistance is
automatically compensated.
GUID-BC4182F7-F701-4E09-AB3D-EFB48280F097 V1 EN
Figure 33: Three RTD/resistance sensors connected according to the 3-wire

connection
615 series ANSI 121

Technical Manual
Basic functions
GUID-2702C0B0-99CF-40D0-925C-BEC0725C0E97 V1 EN
Figure 34: Three RTD/resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire

connection
X130
+
Sensor 1
Shunt
Transducer (44 Ω)
-
2
...
...
...
11
12
...
...
...
GUID-88E6BD08-06B8-4ED3-B937-4CC549697684 V1 EN
Figure 35: mA wiring connection
122 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.13.2.11 RTD/mA card variants
The available variants of RTD cards are 6RTD/2mA and 2RTD/1mA. The features are
similar in both cards.
6RTD/2mA card
This card accepts two milliampere inputs and six inputs from the RTD sensors. The inputs
1 and 2 are used for current measurement, whereas inputs from 3 to 8 are used for
resistance type of measurements.
RTD/mA input connection

Resistance and temperature sensors can be connected to the 6RTD/2mA board with 3-
wire and 2-wire connections.
X110
+ mA
5
-
mA1
6
+ mA
7
- mA2
8
Resistor sensor
+
9
- RTD1
10
11 +
-
RTD2
12
+
13
- RTD3
14
15
16
...
...
...
GUID-CEF1FA63-A641-4F5E-89A3-E1529307D198 V2 EN
Figure 36: Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to
the 3-wire connection for 6RTD/2mA card
615 series ANSI 123

Technical Manual
Basic functions
X110
+ mA
5
-
mA1
6
+ mA
7
- mA2
8
Resistor sensor
+
9
- RTD1
10
+
11
-
RTD2
12
+
13
- RTD3
14
15
16
...
...
...
GUID-8DAE1E59-160B-4E90-ABB3-952C84E129D2 V2 EN
Figure 37: Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to
the 2-wire connection for 6RTD/2mA card
X110
+
Sensor 5
Shunt
Transducer (44 Ω)
-
6
...
...
...
15
16
...
...
...
GUID-FC23D8FC-E9BF-4B62-B8AA-52B4EDE2FF12 V2 EN
Figure 38: mA wiring connection for 6RTD/2mA card
2RTD/1mA card
This type of card accepts one milliampere input, two inputs from RTD sensors and five
inputs from VTs. The Input 1 is assigned for current measurements, inputs 2 and 3 are for
RTD sensors and inputs 4 to 8 are used for measuring input data from VT.
124 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
RTD/mA input connections

The examples of 3-wire and 2-wire connections of resistance and temperature sensors to
the 2RTD/1mA board are as shown:
X130
+ mA
1
-
mA
2
Resistor sensor
+
3
- RTD1
4
6 +
- RTD2
7
GUID-9233377B-F015-46E7-A0D9-2B580F436B2E V2 EN
Figure 39: Two RTD and resistance sensors connected according to the 3-wire
connection for RTD/mA card
X130
+ mA
1
-
mA
2
Resistor sensor
+
3
- RTD1
4
6 +
- RTD2
7
GUID-F939E7EE-B932-4002-9D27-1CEA7C595E0B V2 EN
Figure 40: Two RTD and resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire
connection for RTD/mA card
615 series ANSI 125

Technical Manual
Basic functions
X130
+
Sensor 1
Shunt
Transducer (44 Ω)
-
2
...
...
...
GUID-FBB50B49-0EFE-4D1C-AB71-204C3E170C1D V2 EN
Figure 41: mA wiring connection for RTD/mA card
3.13.3 Signals
Table 57: RTD Output signals
ALARM BOOLEAN General alarm
WARNING BOOLEAN General warning
AI_VAL1 FLOAT32 mA input, Connectors 1-2, instantaneous value
AI_VAL2 FLOAT32 mA input, Connectors 3-4, instantaneous value
AI_VAL3 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 5-6-11c, instantaneous value
126 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.13.4 Settings
Table 58: RTD input settings
Input mode 1=Not in use 1=Not in use Analogue input mode
2=Resistance
10=Pt100
11=Pt250
20=Ni100
21=Ni120
22=Ni250
30=Cu10
Input maximum 0...2000 Ω 1 2000 Maximum analogue input value for mA or
resistance scaling
Input minimum 0...2000 Ω 1 0 Minimum analogue input value for mA or
resistance scaling
Value unit 1=Dimensionless 1=Dimensionless Selected unit for output value format
5=Ampere
23=Degrees
celsius
30=Ohm
Value maximum -10000.0...10000.0 1 10000.0 Maximum output value for scaling and
supervision
Value minimum -10000.0...10000.0 1 -10000.0 Minimum output value for scaling and
supervision
Val high high limit -10000.0...10000.0 1 10000.0 Output value high alarm limit for supervision
Value high limit -10000.0...10000.0 1 10000.0 Output value high warning limit for supervision
Value low limit -10000.0...10000.0 1 -10000.0 Output value low warning limit for supervision
Value low low limit -10000.0...10000.0 1 -10000.0 Output value low alarm limit for supervision
Value deadband 100...100000 1 1000 Deadband configuration value for integral
calculation. (percentage of difference between
min and max as 0,001 % s)
Table 59: mA input settings

Input mode 1=Not in use 1=Not in use Analogue input mode
5=0..20mA
Input maximum 0...20 mA 1 20 Maximum analogue input value for mA or
resistance scaling
Input minimum 0...20 mA 1 0 Minimum analogue input value for mA or
resistance scaling
Value unit 1=Dimensionless 1=Dimensionless Selected unit for output value format
5=Ampere
23=Degrees
celsius
30=Ohm
615 series ANSI 127

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Value maximum -10000.0...10000.0 1 10000.0 Maximum output value for scaling and
supervision
Value minimum -10000.0...10000.0 1 -10000.0 Minimum output value for scaling and
supervision
Val high high limit -10000.0...10000.0 1 10000.0 Output value high alarm limit for supervision
Value high limit -10000.0...10000.0 1 10000.0 Output value high warning limit for supervision
Value low limit -10000.0...10000.0 1 -10000.0 Output value low warning limit for supervision
Value low low limit -10000.0...10000.0 1 -10000.0 Output value low alarm limit for supervision
Value deadband 100...100000 1 1000 Deadband configuration value for integral

Table 60: Monitored data
AI_DB1 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 mA input, Connectors 1-2,
.0 reported value
AI_RANGE1 Enum 0=normal mA input, Connectors 1-2,
1=high range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
AI_DB2 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 mA input, Connectors 3-4,
.0 reported value
AI_RANGE2 Enum 0=normal mA input, Connectors 3-4,
1=high range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
AI_DB3 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 RTD input, Connectors
.0 5-6-11c, reported value
AI_RANGE3 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors
1=high 5-6-11c, range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
128 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
3.14 SMV function blocks
SMV function blocks are used in the process bus applications with the sending of the
sampled values of analog currents and voltages and with the receiving of the sampled
values of voltages.
3.14.1 IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled values sending SMVSENDER
SMVSENDER
GUID-6CB54826-9591-4688-8A23-AE49795C9E60 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 129

Technical Manual
Basic functions
The SMVSENDER function block is used for activating the SMV sending functionality.
It adds/removes the sampled value control block and the related data set into/from the
sending device's configuration. It has no input or output signals.
SMVSENDER can be disabled with the Operation setting value “off”. If the
SMVSENDER is disabled from the LHMI, it can only be enabled from the LHMI. When
disabled, the sending of the samples values is disabled.
3.14.1.3 Settings
Table 61: SMVSENDER Settings
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation
5=off
3.14.2 IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled values receiving SMVRECEIVER
SMVRECEIVER
UL1
UL2
UL3
Uo
GUID-EB0B6F8A-724A-4090-A94B-0BD935BB03F4 V1 EN
The SMVRECEIVER function block is used for activating the SMV receiving
functionality.
3.14.2.3 Signals
Table 62: SMVRECEIVER Output signals
UL1 INT32-UL1 IEC61850-9-2 phase 1 voltage
U0 INT32-Uo IEC61850-9-2 residual voltage
130 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.14.3 ULTVTR function block
ULTVTR
UL1 ALARM
UL2 WARNING
UL3
MINCB_OPEN
GUID-F090C5C8-31A3-4CD1-953C-8055E3E9A52B V1 EN
The ULTVTR function is used in the receiver application to perform the supervision for
the sampled values and to connect the received analog phase voltage inputs to the
application. Synchronization accuracy, sampled value frame transfer delays and missing
frames are being supervised.
The typical additional operate time increase is +2 ms for all the receiver
application functions (using either local or remote samples) when SMV is
used.
3.14.3.3 Operation principle
The ALARM in the receiver is activated if the synchronization accuracy of the sender or the
receiver is either unknown or worse than 100 ms. The output is held on for 10 seconds after
the synchronization accuracy returns within limits.
ALARM is activated when two or more consecutive SMV frames are lost or late. A single
loss of frame is corrected with a zero-order hold scheme. In this case the effect on
protection is considered negligible and the WARNING or ALARM outputs are not activated.
The output is held on for 10 seconds after the conditions return to normal.
The SMV Max Delay parameter defines how long the receiver waits for the SMV frames
before activating the ALARM output. This parameter can be accessed via Configuration/
System/Common. Waiting of the SMV frames also delays the local measurements of the
receiver to keep them correctly time aligned. The SMV Max Delay values include
sampling, processing and network delay.
The MINCB_OPEN input signal is supposed to be connected through a protection relay's

binary input to the NC auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
615 series ANSI 131

Technical Manual
Basic functions
secondary circuit. The MINCB_OPEN signal sets the FUSEF_U output signal to block all
the voltage-related functions when MCB is in the open state.
The WARNING output in the receiver is activated if the synchronization accuracy of the
sender or the receiver is worse than 4 μs. The output is held on for 10 seconds after the
synchronization accuracy returns within limits. If the protection relay supports frequency
adaptivity and it is enabled, the WARNING output is also activated when the adaptivity is
not ready.
The WARNING output is always internally active whenever the ALARM output is active.
The receiver activates the WARNING and ALARM outputs if any of the quality bits, except
for the derived bit, is activated. When the receiver is in the test mode, it accepts SMV
frames with test bit without activating the WARNING and ALARM outputs.
3.14.3.4 Signals
Table 63: ULTVTR Input signals
UL1 INT32-UL1 0 IEC 61850-9-2 phase 1 voltage
MINCB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Active when external MCB opens protected voltage
circuit
Table 64: ULTVTR Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning
3.14.3.5 Settings
Table 65: ULTVTR Non group settings (Basic)
Primary voltage 0.100...440.000 kV 0.001 20.000 Primary rated voltage
Secondary voltage 60...210 V 1 100 Secondary rated voltage
VT connection 1=Wye 2=Delta Voltage transducer measurement connection
2=Delta
3=VAB
4=VA
132 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Amplitude corr. A 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase A Voltage phasor magnitude correction
Amplitude corr. B 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase B Voltage phasor magnitude correction
Amplitude corr. C 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000 Phase C Voltage phasor magnitude correction
Division ratio 1000...20000 1 10000 Voltage sensor division ratio
Voltage input type 1=Voltage trafo 1=Voltage trafo Type of the voltage input
3=CVD sensor
Angle Corr A -20.0000...20.0000 deg 0.0001 0.0000 Phase A Voltage phasor angle correction of an
Angle Corr B -20.0000...20.0000 deg 0.0001 0.0000 Phase B Voltage phasor angle correction of an
Angle Corr C -20.0000...20.0000 deg 0.0001 0.0000 Phase C Voltage phasor angle correction of an
3.14.3.6 Monitored data
Monitored data is available in three locations.
• Monitoring/I/O status/Analog inputs

• Monitoring/IED status/SMV traffic
• Monitoring/IED status/SMV accuracy
3.14.4 RESTVTR function block

RESTVTR
VG ALARM
WARNING
GUID-9C7DCCB2-018C-4DB3-9F70-30E2B411FD6F V1 EN
The RESTVTR function is used in the receiver application to perform the supervision for
the sampled values of analog residual voltage and to connect the received analog residual
voltage input to the application. Synchronization accuracy, sampled value frame transfer
delays and missing frames are being supervised.
615 series ANSI 133

Technical Manual
Basic functions
The typical additional operate time increase is +2 ms for all the receiver
application functions (using either local or remote samples) when SMV is
used.
The ALARM in the receiver is activated if the synchronization accuracy of the sender or the
receiver is either unknown or worse than 100 ms. The output is held on for 10 seconds after
the synchronization accuracy returns within limits.
ALARM is activated when two or more consecutive SMV frames are lost or late. A single
loss of frame is corrected with a zero-order hold scheme. In this case, the effect on
protection is considered negligible and the WARNING or ALARM outputs are not activated.
The output is held on for 10 seconds after the conditions return to normal.
The SMV Max Delay parameter defines how long the receiver waits for the SMV frames
before activating the ALARM output. This parameter can be accessed via Configuration/
System/Common. Waiting of the SMV frames also delays the local measurements of the
receiver to keep them correctly time aligned. The SMV Max Delay values include
sampling, processing and network delay.
The WARNING output in the receiver is activated if the synchronization accuracy of the
sender or the receiver is worse than 4 μs. The output is held on for 10 seconds after the
synchronization accuracy returns within limits.
The WARNING output is always internally active whenever the ALARM output is active.
3.14.4.4 Signals
Table 66: RESTVTR Input signals
VG INT32-UL0 0 IEC 61850-9-2 residual
voltage
Table 67: RESTVTR Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning
134 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.14.4.5 Settings
Table 68: RESTVTR Non group settings (Basic)
Primary voltage 0.100...440.000 kV 0.001 11.547 Primary voltage
Secondary voltage 60...210 V 1 100 Secondary voltage
Monitored data is available in three locations.
• Monitoring/I/O status/Analog inputs

• Monitoring/IED status/SMV traffic
• Monitoring/IED status/SMV accuracy
3.15 GOOSE function blocks
GOOSE function blocks are used for connecting incoming GOOSE data to application.
They support BOOLEAN, Dbpos, Enum, FLOAT32, INT8 and INT32 data types.
Common signals
The VALID output indicates the validity of received GOOSE data, which means in case
of valid, that the GOOSE communication is working and received data quality bits (if
configured) indicate good process data. Invalid status is caused either by bad data quality
bits or GOOSE communication failure. See IEC 61850 engineering guide for details.
The OUT output passes the received GOOSE value for the application. Default value (0)
is used if VALID output indicates invalid status. The IN input is defined in the GOOSE
configuration and can always be seen in SMT sheet.
Settings
The GOOSE function blocks do not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.
615 series ANSI 135

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.15.1 GOOSERCV_BIN function block
GUID-44EF4D6E-7389-455C-BDE5-B127678E2CBC V1 EN
The GOOSERCV_BIN function is used to connect the GOOSE binary inputs to the
application.
3.15.1.3 Signals
Table 69: GOOSERCV_BIN Output signals
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
VALID BOOLEAN Output signal
3.15.2 GOOSERCV_DP function block
GUID-63C0C3EE-1C0E-4F78-A06E-3E84F457FC98 V1 EN
The GOOSERCV_DP function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary inputs to the
application.
136 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.15.2.3 Signals
Table 70: GOOSERCV_DP Output signals
OUT Dbpos Output signal
3.15.3 GOOSERCV_MV function block
GUID-A59BAF25-B9F8-46EA-9831-477AC665D0F7 V1 EN
The GOOSERCV_MV function is used to connect the GOOSE measured value inputs to
the application.
3.15.3.3 Signals
Table 71: GOOSERCV_MV Output signals
OUT FLOAT32 Output signal
3.15.4 GOOSERCV_INT8 function block
GUID-B4E1495B-F797-4CFF-BD19-AF023EA2D3D9 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 137

Technical Manual
Basic functions
The GOOSERCV_INT8 function is used to connect the GOOSE 8 bit integer inputs to the
application.
3.15.4.3 Signals
Table 72: GOOSERCV_INT8 Output signals
OUT INT8 Output signal
3.15.5 GOOSERCV_INTL function block
GUID-241A36E0-1BB9-4323-989F-39668A7B1DAC V1 EN
The GOOSERCV_INTL function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary input to
the application and extracting single binary position signals from the double binary
position signal.
The OP output signal indicates that the position is open. Default value (0) is used if
VALID output indicates invalid status.
The CL output signal indicates that the position is closed. Default value (0) is used if
VALID output indicates invalid status.
The OK output signal indicates that the position is neither in faulty or intermediate state.
The default value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status.
138 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.15.5.3 Signals
Table 73: GOOSERCV_INTL Output signals
POS_OP BOOLEAN Position open output signal
POS_CL BOOLEAN Position closed output signal
POS_OK BOOLEAN Position OK output signal
3.15.6 GOOSERCV_CMV function block
GUID-4C3F3A1A-F5D1-42E1-840F-6106C58CB380 V1 EN
The GOOSERCV_CMV function is used to connect GOOSE measured value inputs to the
application. The MAG_IN (amplitude) and ANG_IN (angle) inputs are defined in the
GOOSE configuration (PCM600).
The MAG output passes the received GOOSE (amplitude) value for the application.
Default value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status.
The ANG output passes the received GOOSE (angle) value for the application. Default
value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status.
3.15.6.3 Signals
Table 74: GOOSERCV_CMV Output signals
MAG FLOAT32 Output signal (amplitude)
ANG FLOAT32 Output signal (angle)
615 series ANSI 139

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.15.7 GOOSERCV_ENUM function block
GUID-E1AE8AD3-ED99-448A-8C11-558BCA68CDC4 V1 EN
The GOOSERCV_ENUM function block is used to connect GOOSE enumerator inputs

to the application.
3.15.7.3 Signals
Table 75: GOOSERCV_ENUM Output signals
OUT Enum Output signal
3.15.8 GOOSERCV_INT32 function block
GUID-61FF1ECC-507D-4B6D-8CA5-713A59F58D5C V1 EN
The GOOSERCV_INT32 function block is used to connect GOOSE 32 bit integer inputs
to the application.
140 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.15.8.3 Signals
Table 76: GOOSERCV_INT32 Output signals
3.16 Type conversion function blocks
3.16.1 QTY_GOOD function block
GUID-1999D6D9-4517-4FFE-A14D-08FDB5E8B9F6 V1 EN
The QTY_GOOD function block evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and passes
it as a Boolean signal for the application.
The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal (logic function output,
binary input, application function output or received GOOSE signal). Due to application
logic quality bit propagation, each (simple and even combined) signal has quality which
can be evaluated.
The OUT output indicates quality good of the input signal. Input signals that have no
quality bits set or only test bit is set, will indicate quality good status.
3.16.1.3 Signals
Table 77: QTY_GOOD Input signals
IN Any 0 Input signal
615 series ANSI 141

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 78: QTY_GOOD Output signals

3.16.2 QTY_BAD function block
GUID-8C120145-91B6-4295-98FB-AE78430EB532 V1 EN
The QTY_BAD function block evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and passes it
as a Boolean signal for the application.
The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal (logic function output,
binary input, application function output or received GOOSE signal). Due to application
logic quality bit propagation, each (simple and even combined) signal has quality which
can be evaluated.
The OUT output indicates quality bad of the input signal. Input signals that have any other
than test bit set, will indicate quality bad status.
3.16.2.3 Signals
Table 79: QTY_BAD Input signals
Table 80: QTY_BAD Output signals

142 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.16.3 QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block
GUID-0FDC082E-C9A8-4B02-9878-6C49E44B7C0E V1 EN
The QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block evaluates the peer device communication

status from the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal to the
application.
The IN input can be connected to any GOOSE application logic output signal, for
example, GOOSERCV_BIN.
The OUT output indicates the communication status of the GOOSE function block. When
the output is in the true (1) state, the GOOSE communication is active. The value false (0)
indicates communication timeout.
3.16.3.3 Signals
Table 81: QTY_GOOSE_COMM Input signals
Table 82: QTY_GOOSE_COMM Output signals

COMMVALID BOOLEAN Output signal
615 series ANSI 143

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.16.4 T_HEALTH function block
GUID-B5FCAE66-8026-4D5F-AC38-028E5A8171BB V1 EN
The T_HEALTH function evaluates enumerated data of “Health” data attribute. This
function block can only be used with GOOSE.
The IN input can be connected to GOOSERCV_ENUM function block, which is

receiving the LD0.LLN0.Health.stVal data attribute sent by another device.
The outputs OK, WARNING and ALARM are extracted from the enumerated input value.
Only one of the outputs can be active at a time. In case the GOOSERCV_ENUM function
block does not receive the value from the sending device or it is invalid, the default value
(0) is used and the ALARM is activated in the T_HEALTH function block.
3.16.4.3 Signals
Table 83: T_HEALTH Input signals
IN1 Any 0 Input signal
Table 84: T_HEALTH Output signals

OK BOOLEAN Output signal
WARNING BOOLEAN Output signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Output signal
144 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.16.5 T_F32_INT8 function block
GUID-F0F44FBF-FB56-4BC2-B421-F1A7924E6B8C V1 EN
The T_F32_INT8 function is used to convert 32-bit floating type values to 8-bit integer
type. The rounding operation is included. Output value saturates if the input value is below
the minimum or above the maximum value. .
3.16.5.3 Signals
Table 85: T_F32_INT8 Input signals
F32 FLOAT32 0.0 Input signal
Table 86: T_F32_INT8 Output signal

INT8 INT8 Output signal
3.16.6 T_DIR function block
GUID-BD31ED40-3A32-4F65-A697-3E7344730096 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 145

Technical Manual
Basic functions
The T_DIR function evaluates enumerated data of the FAULT_DIR data attribute of the
directional functions. T_DIR can only be used with GOOSE. The DIR input can be
connected to the GOOSERCV_ENUM function block, which is receiving the
LD0.<function>.Str.dirGeneral or LD0.<function>.Dir.dirGeneral data attribute sent by
another device.
In case the GOOSERCV_ENUM function block does not receive the value from the
sending device or it is invalid, the default value (0) is used in function outputs.
The outputs FWD and REV are extracted from the enumerated input value.
3.16.6.3 Signals
Table 87: T_DIR Input signals
DIR Enum 0 Input signal
Table 88: T_DIR Output signals

FWD BOOLEAN 0 Direction forward
REV BOOLEAN 0 Direction backward
3.16.7 T_TCMD function block
GUID-1CE485AE-2BCA-4D1E-92F5-417340F2589F V1 EN
The T_TCMD function is used to convert enumerated input signal to Boolean output
signals.
146 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 89: Conversion from enumerated to Boolean

IN RAISE LOWER
0 FALSE FALSE
1 FALSE TRUE
2 TRUE FALSE
x FALSE FALSE
3.16.7.3 Signals
Table 90: T_TCMD input signals
IN Enum 0 Input signal
Table 91: T_TCMD output signals

RAISE BOOLEAN Raise command
LOWER BOOLEAN Lower command
3.16.8 T_TCMD_BIN function block
GUID-A5C813D8-399A-4FBC-B1A0-E62E5C423EA5 V1 EN
The T_TCMD_BIN function is used to convert 32 bit integer input signal to Boolean
output signals.
615 series ANSI 147

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 92: Conversion from integer to Boolean

IN RAISE LOWER
0 FALSE FALSE
1 FALSE TRUE
2 TRUE FALSE
x FALSE FALSE
3.16.8.3 Signals
Table 93: T_TCMD_BIN input signals
IN INT32 0 Input signal
Table 94: T_TCMD_BIN output signals

RAISE BOOLEAN Raise command
LOWER BOOLEAN Lower command
3.16.9 T_BIN_TCMD function block
GUID-54A013A3-E253-4A06-B033-01C7E11EC997 V1 EN
The T_BIN_TCMD function is used to convert Boolean input signals to 32 bit integer
output signals.
Table 95: Conversion from Boolean to integer
RAISE LOWER OUT
FALSE FALSE 0
FALSE TRUE 1
TRUE FALSE 2
148 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.16.9.3 Signals
Table 96: T_BIN_TCMD input signals
RAISE BOOLEAN 0 Raise command
LOWER BOOLEAN 0 Lower command
Table 97: T_BIN_TCMD output signals

3.17 Configurable logic blocks
3.17.1 Standard configurable logic blocks
3.17.1.1 OR function block
Function block
GUID-A845F2F1-DCC2-40C9-8A77-893EF5694436 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 149

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Functionality
OR, OR6 and OR20 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean
variables.
The O output is activated when at least one input has the value TRUE. The default value
of all inputs is FALSE, which makes it possible to use only the required number of inputs
and leave the rest disconnected.
OR has two inputs, OR6 six and OR20 twenty inputs.
Signals
Table 98: OR Input signals
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
Table 99: OR6 Input signals

Table 100: OR20 Input signals

150 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Table 101: OR Output signal

O BOOLEAN Output signal
Table 102: OR6 Output signal

Table 103: OR20 Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.
615 series ANSI 151

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.17.1.2 AND function block
Function block
GUID-F560A373-4DB9-42E9-B687-DF4A3E45359C V1 EN
Functionality
AND, AND6 and AND20 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean
variables.
The default value in all inputs is logical true, which makes it possible to use only the
required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.
AND has two inputs, AND6 six inputs and AND20 twenty inputs.
Signals
Table 104: AND Input signals
152 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 105: AND6 Input signals

Table 106: AND20 Input signals

Table 107: AND Output signal

615 series ANSI 153

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 108: AND6 Output signal

Table 109: AND20 Output signal

Settings
3.17.1.3 XOR function block
Function block
GUID-9C247C8A-03A5-4F08-8329-F08BE7125B9A V1 EN
Functionality
The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with
Boolean variables.
The output signal is TRUE if the input signals are different and FALSE if they are equal.
Signals
Table 110: XOR Input signals
Table 111: XOR Output signal

154 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Settings
3.17.1.4 NOT function block
Function block
GUID-0D0FC187-4224-433C-9664-908168EE3626 V1 EN
Functionality
NOT is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables.
NOT inverts the input signal.
Signals
Table 112: NOT Input signal
I BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
Table 113: NOT Output signal

Settings
3.17.1.5 MAX3 function block
Function block
GUID-5454FE1C-2947-4337-AD58-39D266E91993 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 155

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Functionality
The maximum function MAX3 selects the maximum value from three analog values.
Disconnected inputs and inputs whose quality is bad are ignored. If all inputs are
disconnected or the quality is bad, MAX3 output value is set to -2^21.
Signals
Table 114: MAX3 Input signals
IN1 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 1
Table 115: MAX3 Output signal

Settings
3.17.1.6 MIN3 function block
Function block
GUID-40218B77-8A30-445A-977E-46CB8783490D V1 EN
Functionality
The minimum function MIN3 selects the minimum value from three analog values.
Disconnected inputs and inputs whose quality is bad are ignored. If all inputs are
disconnected or the quality is bad, MIN3 output value is set to 2^21.
156 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Signals
Table 116: MIN3 Input signals
Table 117: MIN3 Output signal

Settings
3.17.1.7 R_TRIG function block
Function block
GUID-3D0BBDC3-4091-4D8B-A35C-95F6289E6FD8 V1 EN
Functionality
R_TRIGTrig is used as a rising edge detector.
R_TRIG detects the transition from FALSE to TRUE at the CLK input. When the rising
edge is detected, the element assigns the output to TRUE. At the next execution round, the
output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input.
Signals
Table 118: R_TRIG Input signals
CLK BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
615 series ANSI 157

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 119: R_TRIG Output signal

Q BOOLEAN Output signal
Settings
3.17.1.8 F_TRIG function block
Function block
GUID-B47152D2-3855-4306-8F2E-73D8FDEC4C1D V1 EN
Functionality
F_TRIG is used as a falling edge detector.
The function detects the transition from TRUE to FALSE at the CLK input. When the
falling edge is detected, the element assigns the Q output to TRUE. At the next execution
round, the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input.
Signals
Table 120: F_TRIG Input signals
CLK BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
Table 121: F_TRIG Output signal

Q BOOLEAN Output signal
Settings
158 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.17.1.9 T_POS_XX function blocks
Function block
GUID-4548B304-1CCD-454F-B819-7BC9F404131F V1 EN
Functionality
The circuit breaker position information can be communicated with the IEC 61850
GOOSE messages. The position information is a double binary data type which is fed to
the POS input.
T_POS_CL and T_POS_OP are used for extracting the circuit breaker status information.
Respectively, T_POS_OK is used to validate the intermediate or faulty breaker position.
Table 122: Cross reference between circuit breaker position and the output of the function block
Circuit breaker position Output of the function block
T_POS_CL T_POS_OP T_POS_OK
Intermediate '00' FALSE FALSE FALSE
Close '01' TRUE FALSE TRUE
Open '10' FALSE TRUE TRUE
Faulty '11' TRUE TRUE FALSE
Signals
Table 123: T_POS_CL Input signals
POS Double binary 0 Input signal
Table 124: T_POS_OP Input signals

Table 125: T_POS_OK Input signals

615 series ANSI 159

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 126: T_POS_CL Output signal

CLOSE BOOLEAN Output signal
Table 127: T_POS_OP Output signal

OPEN BOOLEAN Output signal
Table 128: T_POS_OK Output signal

OK BOOLEAN Output signal
Settings
3.17.1.10 SWITCHR function block
Function block
GUID-63F5ED57-E6C4-40A2-821A-4814E1554663 V1 EN
Functionality
SWITCHR switching block for REAL data type is operated by the CTL_SW input, selects
the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs.
CTL_SW OUT
FALSE IN2
TRUE IN1
160 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Signals
Table 129: SWITCHR Input signals
CTL_SW BOOLEAN 1 Control Switch
IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2
Table 130: SWITCHR Output signals

OUT REAL Real switch output
3.17.1.11 SWITCHI32 function block
Function block
GUID-E5DC5DEC-6A0E-4385-9FA9-0F5EFD87304C V1 EN
Functionality
SWITCHI32 switching block for 32-bit integer data type is operated by the CTL_SW
input, which selects the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs.
Table 131: SWITCHI32

CTL_SW OUT
FALSE IN2
TRUE IN1
Signals
Table 132: SWITCHI32 input signals
CTL_SW BOOLEAN 1 Control Switch
IN1 INT32 0 Input signal 1
IN2 INT32 0 Input signal 2
615 series ANSI 161

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 133: SWITCHI32 output signals

3.17.1.12 SR function block
Function block
GUID-0B62CAED-F8A4-4738-B546-677DA362FE24 V2 EN
Functionality
The SR flip-flop output Q can be set or reset from the S or R inputs. S input has a higher
priority over the R input. Output NOTQ is the negation of output Q.
The statuses of outputs Q and NOTQ are not retained in the nonvolatile
memory.
Table 134: Truth table for SR flip-flop

S R Q
0 0 01)
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 1
1) Keep state/no change
Signals
Table 135: SR Input signals
S BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q output when set
R BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q output when
set
162 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 136: SR Output signals

Q BOOLEAN Q status
NOTQ BOOLEAN NOTQ status
3.17.1.13 RS function block
Function block
GUID-3876F400-A7D1-45DA-B20F-DFA5AE863073 V1 EN
Functionality
The RS flip-flop output Q can be set or reset from the S or R inputs. R input has a higher
priority over the S input. Output NOTQ is the negation of output Q.
The statuses of outputs Q and NOTQ are not retained in the nonvolatile
memory.
Table 137: Truth table for RS flip-flop

S R Q
0 0 01)
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
Signals
Table 138: RS Input signals
S BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q output when set
R BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q output when
set
615 series ANSI 163

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 139: RS Output signals

Q BOOLEAN Q status
NOTQ BOOLEAN NOTQ status
Technical revision history

Table 140: RS Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
L The name of the function has been changed from SR
to RS.
3.17.2 Minimum pulse timer
3.17.2.1 Minimum pulse timer 62TP
Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs) TPGAPC TP 62TP
Function block
62TP
IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2
GUID-637103D5-5868-4D09-9229-F4FD68423519 V1 EN
Functionality
The Minimum pulse timer function TP contains two independent timers. The function has
a settable pulse length (in milliseconds). The timers are used for setting the minimum
pulse length for example, the signal outputs. Once the input is activated, the output is set
for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting. Both timers use the same setting
parameter.
164 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
GUID-8196EE39-3529-46DC-A161-B1C40224559F V1 EN
Figure 77: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting, B = Trip pulse is longer
than Pulse time setting
Signals
Table 141: 62TP Input signals
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1
Table 142: 62TP Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status
Settings
Table 143: 62TP Non group settings (Basic)
Pulse time 0...60000 ms 1 150 Minimum pulse time

Table 144: 62TP Technical revision history
B Outputs now visible in menu
C Internal improvement
615 series ANSI 165

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.17.2.2 Minimum pulse timer 62TPS
Identification
Minimum second pulse timer (2 pcs) TPSGAPC TPS 62TPS
Function block
62TPS
IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2
GUID-F47E9742-1C94-4E8E-B2D8-CC9F3A8FE0EF V1 EN
Functionality
The Minimum second pulse timer function 62TPS contains two independent timers. The
function has a settable pulse length (in seconds). The timers are used for setting the
minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs. Once the input is activated, the
output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting. Both timers use the same
setting parameter.
GUID-9BE17BA5-70D3-442B-8D24-8544C7A9441A V1 EN
Figure 79: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Cold load time setting, B = Trip pulse is
longer than Cold load time setting
Signals
Table 145: 62TPS Input signals
166 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 146: 62TPS Output signals

Settings
Table 147: 62TPS Non group settings (Basic)
Cold load time 0...300 s 1 0 Cold load time

Table 148: 67TPS Technical revision history
B Outputs now visible in menu
3.17.2.3 Minimum pulse timer 62TPM
Identification
Minimum minute pulse timer (2 pcs) TPMGAPC TPM 62TPM
Function block
62TPM
IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2
GUID-4B1768D1-AC32-4305-893F-9CEEFEA24AC8 V1 EN
Functionality
The Minimum minute pulse timer function 62TPM contains two independent timers. The
function has a settable pulse length (in minutes). The timers are used for setting the
minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs. Once the input is activated, the
615 series ANSI 167

Technical Manual
Basic functions
output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting. Both timers use the same
setting parameter.
GUID-9BE17BA5-70D3-442B-8D24-8544C7A9441A V1 EN
Figure 81: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Cold load time setting, B = Trip pulse is
longer than Cold load time setting
Signals
Table 149: 62TPM Input signals
Table 150: 62TPM Output signals

Settings
Table 151: 62TPM Non group settings (Basic)
Cold load time 0...300 min 1 0 Cold load time
3.17.3 Pulse timer function block 62PT
3.17.3.1 Identification
Pulse timer (8 pcs) PTGAPC PT 62PT
168 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
62PT
IN1 Q1
IN2 Q2
IN3 Q3
IN4 Q4
IN5 Q5
IN6 Q6
IN7 Q7
IN8 Q8
GUID-7B9A4839-E8A9-4ECB-B3C7-7DC407D84569 V1 EN
The pulse timer function 62PT contains eight independent timers. The function has a
settable pulse length. Once the input is activated, the output is set for a specific duration
using the Pulse delay time setting.
t0 t0+dt t1 t1+dt t2 t2+dt
dt = Pulse delay time

GUID-08F451EE-5110-41D9-95ED-084D7296FA22 V1 EN
Figure 83: Timer operation
3.17.3.4 Signals
Table 152: 62PT Input signals
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status
615 series ANSI 169

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 153: 62PT Output signals

Q1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status
3.17.3.5 Settings
Table 154: 62PT Non group settings (Basic)
Pulse delay time 1 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
3.17.3.6 Technical data

Table 155: 62PT Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
3.17.4 Time delay off (8 pcs) 62TOF
Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC TOF 62TOF
170 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
62TOF
IN1 Q1
IN2 Q2
IN3 Q3
IN4 Q4
IN5 Q5
IN6 Q6
IN7 Q7
IN8 Q8
GUID-0F47E31C-225B-4B3B-91DD-7731EDD0AC9E V1 EN
The time delay off (8 pcs) function 62TOF can be used, for example, for a drop-off-
delayed output related to the input signal. The function contains eight independent timers.
There is a settable delay in the timer. Once the input is activated, the output is set
immediately. When the input is cleared, the output stays on until the time set with the Off
delay time setting has elapsed.
t0 t1 t1+dt t2 t3 t4 t5 t5+dt
dt = Off delay time

GUID-D45492E6-5FBC-420C-B1BF-B3A1F65ADF96 V1 EN
3.17.4.4 Signals
Table 156: 62TOF Input signals
615 series ANSI 171

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Table 157: 62TOF Output signals

3.17.4.5 Settings
Table 158: 62TOF Non group settings (Basic)
Off delay time 1 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time

Table 159: 62TOF Technical data
172 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.17.5 Time delay on (8 pcs) 62TON
Time delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC TON 62TON
62TON
IN1 Q1
IN2 Q2
IN3 Q3
IN4 Q4
IN5 Q5
IN6 Q6
IN7 Q7
IN8 Q8
GUID-EA56F318-A059-4BC4-B2CE-397AEF1D7677 V1 EN
The time delay on (8 pcs) function 62TON can be used, for example, for time-delaying the
output related to the input signal. 62TON contains eight independent timers. The timer has
a settable time delay. Once the input is activated, the output is set after the time set by the
On delay time setting has elapsed.
t0 t0+dt t1 t2 t3 t4 t4+dt t5
dt = On delay time
GUID-B74EE764-8B2E-4FBE-8CE7-779F6B739A11 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 173

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.17.5.4 Signals
Table 160: 62TON Input signals
Table 161: 62TON Output signals

Q1 BOOLEAN Output 1
Q2 BOOLEAN Output 2
Q3 BOOLEAN Output 3
Q4 BOOLEAN Output 4
Q5 BOOLEAN Output 5
Q6 BOOLEAN Output 6
Q7 BOOLEAN Output 7
Q8 BOOLEAN Output 8
3.17.5.5 Settings
Table 162: 62TON Non group settings (Basic)
On delay time 1 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
174 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Table 163: 62TON Technical data
3.17.6 Set reset (8 pcs) SR
Set reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC SR SR
GUID-3DD0D0F2-A477-4C73-B07C-089059EA3F26 V1 EN
The set-reset (8 pcs) function SR is a simple SR flip-flop with a memory that can be set or
that can reset an output from the S# or R# inputs, respectively. The function contains eight
independent set-reset flip-flop latches where the SET input has the higher priority over the
RESET input. The status of each Q# output is retained in the nonvolatile memory. The
615 series ANSI 175

Technical Manual
Basic functions
individual reset for each Q# output is available on the LHMI or through tool via
communication.
Table 164: Truth table for SR
S# R# Q#
0 0 01)
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 1
3.17.6.4 Signals
Table 165: SR Input signals
S1 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q1 output when set
R1 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q1 output when set
Table 166: SR Output signals

Q1 BOOLEAN Q1 status
176 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

3.17.6.5 Settings
Table 167: SR Non group settings (Basic)
Reset Q1 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q1 output when set
1=Reset
1=Reset
1=Reset
1=Reset
1=Reset
1=Reset
1=Reset
1=Reset
3.17.7 Move (8 pcs) MV
MV
IN1 Q1
IN2 Q2
IN3 Q3
IN4 Q4
IN5 Q5
IN6 Q6
IN7 Q7
IN8 Q8
GUID-3BBB09B3-6115-4E5D-912A-980A52B44016 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 177

Technical Manual
Basic functions
The move (8 pcs) function MV is used for user logic bits. Each input state is directly
copied to the output state. This allows the creating of events from advanced logic
combinations.
3.17.7.3 Signals
Table 168: MV Input signals
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False IN1 status
Table 169: MV Output signals

3.17.7.4 Settings
Table 170: MV Non group settings (Basic)
Description MVGAPC1 Q1 Output description
178 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

3.17.8 Integer value move MVI4
MVI4
IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2
IN3 OUT3
IN4 OUT4
GUID-CE97EB1B-8C1B-4998-B976-D0C793ED9573 V1 EN
The integer value move function MVI4 is used for creation of the events from the integer
values. The integer input value is received via IN1...4 input. The integer output value
is available on OUT1...4 output.
The integer input range is from -2147483648 to 2147483647.
3.17.8.3 Signals
Table 171: MVI4 Input signals
IN1 INT32 0 Integer input value 1
615 series ANSI 179

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 172: MVI4 Output signals

OUT1 INT32 Integer output value 1
3.17.9 Analog value scaling SCA4
SCA4
AI1_VALUE AO1_VALUE
AI2_VALUE AO2_VALUE
AI3_VALUE AO3_VALUE
AI4_VALUE AO4_VALUE
GUID-80E9A308-4A02-4773-8F7C-3D49ED830639 V1 EN
The analog value scaling function SCA4 is used for scaling the analog value. It allows
creating events from analog values.
The analog value received via the AIn_VALUE input is scaled with the Scale ratio n
setting. The scaled value is available on the AOn_VALUE output.
Analog input range is from -10000.0 to 10000.0.
Analog output range is from -2000000.0 to 2000000.0.
If the value of the AIn_VALUE input exceeds the analog input range,
AOn_VALUE is set to 0.0.
180 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
If the result of AIn_VALUE multiplied by the Scale ratio n setting

exceeds the analog output range, AOn_VALUE shows the minimum or
maximum value, according to analog value range.
3.17.9.3 Signals
Table 173: SCA4 Input signals
AI1_VALUE FLOAT32 0.0 Analog input value of channel 1
Table 174: SCA4 Output signals

AO1_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 1 after scaling
3.17.9.4 Settings
Table 175: SCA4 Non group settings (Basic)
Scale ratio 1 0.001...1000.000 0.001 1.000 Scale ratio for analog value 1
615 series ANSI 181

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.17.10 Local/remote control function block CONTROL
GUID-FA386432-3AEF-468D-B25E-D1C5BDA838E3 V3 EN
Local/Remote control is by default realized through the R/L button on the front panel. The
control via binary input can be enabled by setting the value of the LR control setting to
"Binary input". The binary input control requires that the CONTROL function is
instantiated in the product configuration.
Local/Remote control supports multilevel access for control operations in substations

according to the IEC 61850 standard. Multilevel control access with separate station
control access level is not supported by other protocols than IEC 61850.
The actual Local/Remote control state is evaluated by the priority scheme on the function
block inputs. If more than one input is active, the input with the highest priority is selected.
The priority order is “off”, “local”, “station”, “remote”, “all”.
The actual state is reflected on the CONTROL function outputs. Only one output is active
at a time.
Table 176: Truth table for CONTROL
Input Output
CTRL_OFF CTRL_LOC CTRL_STA CTRL_REM CTRL_ALL
TRUE N/A N/A N/A N/A OFF = TRUE
FALSE TRUE N/A N/A N/A LOCAL =
TRUE
FALSE FALSE TRUE N/A N/A STATION =
TRUE
FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE REMOTE =
TRUE
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE ALL = TRUE
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE OFF = TRUE
182 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.17.10.3 L/R control access
Four different Local/Remote control access scenarios are possible depending on the
selected station authority level: “L,R”, “L,R,L+R”, “L,S,R” and “L, S, S+R, L+S, L+S
+R”. If control commands need to be allowed from multiple levels, multilevel access can
be used. Multilevel access is possible only by using the station authority levels “L,R,L+R”
and “L, S, S+R, L+S, L+S+R”. Multilevel access status is available from IEC 61850 data
object CTRL.LLN0.MltLev.
Control access selection is made with R/L button or CONTROL function block and IEC
61850 data object CTRL.LLN0.LocSta. When writing CTRL.LLN0.LocSta IEC 61850
data object, IEC 61850 command originator category station must be used by the client,
and remote IEC 61850 control access must be allowed by the relay station authority.
CTRL.LLN0.LocSta data object value is retained in the nonvolatile memory. The present
control status can be monitored in the HMI or PCM600 via Monitoring/Control
command with the LR state parameter or from the IEC 61850 data object CTRL.LLN0.
LocKeyHMI.
IEC 61850 command originator category is always set by the IEC 61850 client. The relay
supports station and remote IEC 61850 command originator categories, depending on the
selected station authority level.
3.17.10.4 Station authority level “L,R”
Relay's default station authority level is “L,R”. In this scenario only local or remote
control access is allowed. Control access with IEC 61850 command originator category
station is interpreted as remote access. There is no multilevel access.
REMOTE LOCAL OFF
IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850
remote remote remote remote remote remote
IED IED IED
GUID-08BACCE4-AF4A-4150-A01A-49FBEE63B438 V1 EN
Figure 93: Station authority is “L,R”
When station authority level “L,R” is used, control access can be selected using R/L
button or CONTROL function block. IEC 61850 data object CTRL.LLN0.LocSta and
CONTROL function block inputs CTRL_STA and CTRL_ALL are not applicable for this
station authority level.
615 series ANSI 183

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 177: Station authority level “L,R” using R/L button

L/R control L/R control status Control access
R/L button CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 client 1)
CTRL.LLN0.LocKeyHMI
Local N/A FALSE 1 x
Remote N/A FALSE 2 x
Off N/A FALSE 0
1) Client IEC 61850 command originator category check is not performed.
Table 178: Station authority “L,R” using CONTROL function block

L/R control L/R control status Control access
Control FB input CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 client 1)
CTRL.LLN0.LocKeyHMI
CTRL_OFF N/A FALSE 0
CTRL_LOC N/A FALSE 1 x
CTRL_STA N/A FALSE 0
CTRL_REM N/A FALSE 2 x
CTRL_ALL N/A FALSE 0
3.17.10.5 Station authority level “L,R,L+R”
Station authority level “L,R, L+R” adds multilevel access support. Control access can also
be simultaneously permitted from local or remote location. Simultaneous local or remote
control operation is not allowed as one client and location at time can access controllable
objects and they remain reserved until the previously started control operation is first
completed by the client. Control access with IEC 61850 originator category station is
interpreted as remote access.
REMOTE LOCAL OFF L+R
IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850
remote remote remote remote remote remote remote remote
IED IED IED IED
GUID-10D77281-14C3-4066-B641-98A6F8904E39 V1 EN
Figure 94: Station authority is “L,R,L+R”
184 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
When station authority level “L,R, L+R” is used, the control access can be selected using
R/L button or CONTROL function block. IEC 61850 data object CTRL.LLN0.LocSta
and CONTROL function block input CTRL_STA are not applicable for this station
authority level.
Table 179: Station authority level “L,R,L+R” using R/L button
L/R Control L/R Control status Control access
R/L button CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 client 1)
CTRL.LLN0.LocKeyHMI
Local N/A FALSE 1 x
Remote N/A FALSE 2 x
Local + Remote N/A TRUE 4 x x
Off N/A FALSE 0
Table 180: Station authority “L,R,L+R” using CONTROL function block

Control FB input CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 client 1)
CTRL.LLN0.LocKeyHMI
CTRL_OFF N/A FALSE 0
CTRL_LOC N/A FALSE 1 x
CTRL_STA N/A FALSE 0
CTRL_REM N/A FALSE 2 x
CTRL_ALL N/A TRUE 4 x x
3.17.10.6 Station authority level “L,S,R”
Station authority level “L,S,R” adds station control access. In this level IEC 61850
command originator category validation is performed to distinguish control commands
with IEC 61850 command originator category set to “Remote” or “Station”. There is no
multilevel access.
615 series ANSI 185

Technical Manual
Basic functions
LOCAL REMOTE STATION OFF
IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850

remote remote remote remote
IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850

station station station station
IED IED IED IED
GUID-7BC51FAF-B097-4CD9-AFF4-6D1F3D548C7F V1 EN
Figure 95: Station authority is “L,S,R”
When the station authority level “L,S,R” is used, the control access can be selected using
R/L button or CONTROL function block. IEC 61850 data object CTRL.LLN0.LocSta
and CONTROL function block input CTRL_STA are applicable for this station authority
level.
Station control access can be reserved by using R/L button or CONTROL function block
together with IEC 61850 data object CTRL.LLN0.LocSta.
Table 181: Station authority level “L,S,R” using R/L button
R/L button CTRL.LLN0.LocSta 1) CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 IEC 61850
CTRL.LLN0.LocKeyHMI client 2) client 3)
Local FALSE FALSE 1 x
Remote FALSE FALSE 2 x
Remote TRUE FALSE 3 x
Off FALSE FALSE 0
1) Station client reserves the control operating by writing controllable point LocSta.
2) Client IEC 61850 command originator category is remote.
3) Client IEC 61850 command originator category is station.
186 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 182: Station authority level “L,S,R” using CONTROL function block
Control FB input CTRL.LLN0.LocSta 1) CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 IEC 61850
CTRL_OFF FALSE FALSE 0
CTRL_LOC FALSE FALSE 1 x
CTRL_STA TRUE FALSE 3 x
CTRL_REM 4) TRUE FALSE 3 x
CTRL_REM FALSE FALSE 2 x

CTRL_ALL FALSE FALSE 0
2) Client IEC 61850 command originator category is remote.
3) Client IEC 61850 command originator category is station.
4) CTRL_STA unconnected in application configuration. Station client reserves the control operating by writing controllable point LocSta.
3.17.10.7 Station authority level “L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R”
Station authority level “L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R” adds station control access together with
several different multilevel access scenarios. Control access can also be simultaneously
permitted from local, station or remote location. Simultaneous local, station or remote
control operation is not allowed as one client and location at time can access controllable
objects and they remain reserved until the previously started control operation is first
completed by the client.
LOCAL STATION S+R L+S L+S+R OFF
remote remote remote remote remote remote
station station station station station station
IED IED IED IED IED IED
GUID-3F4E6CD7-A89E-4057-8E25-8846B5387C82 V1 EN
Figure 96: Station authority is “L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R”
When station authority level “L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R” is used, control access can be

selected using R/L button or CONTROL function block. IEC 61850 data object
CTRL.LLN0.LocSta and CONTROL function block input CTRL_STA are applicable for
this station authority level.
615 series ANSI 187

Technical Manual
Basic functions
“Station” and “Local + Station” control access can be reserved by using R/L button or
CONTROL function block in combination with IEC 61850 data object
CTRL.LLN0.LocSta.
Table 183: Station authority level “L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R” using R/L button
R/L button CTRL.LLN0.LocSta 1) CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 IEC 61850
Local FALSE FALSE 1 x
Remote FALSE TRUE 7 x x
Remote TRUE FALSE 3 x
Local + Remote FALSE TRUE 6 x x x
Local + Remote TRUE TRUE 5 x x
Off FALSE FALSE 0
2) Client IEC61850 command originator category is remote.
3) Client IEC61850 command originator category is station.
Table 184: Station authority level “L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R” using CONTROL function block
Control FB input CTRL.LLN0.LocSta 1) CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 IEC 61850
CTRL_OFF FALSE FALSE 0
CTRL_LOC FALSE FALSE 1 x
CTRL_STA FALSE FALSE 3 x
CTRL_REM 4) TRUE TRUE 3 x
CTRL_REM FALSE TRUE 7 x x

CTRL_ALL FALSE TRUE 6 x x x
CTRL_ALL 4) TRUE TRUE 5 x x
2) Client IEC61850 command originator category is remote.
3) Client IEC61850 command originator category is station.
4) CTRL_STA unconnected in application configuration. Station client reserves the control operating by writing controllable point LocSta.
188 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.17.10.8 Signals
Table 185: CONTROL input signals
CTRL_OFF BOOLEAN 0 Control input OFF
CTRL_LOC BOOLEAN 0 Control input Local
CTRL_STA BOOLEAN 0 Control input Station
CTRL_REM BOOLEAN 0 Control input Remote
CTRL_ALL BOOLEAN 0 Control input All
Table 186: CONTROL output signals

OFF BOOLEAN Control output OFF
LOCAL BOOLEAN Control output Local
STATION BOOLEAN Control output Station
REMOTE BOOLEAN Control output Remote
ALL BOOLEAN Control output All
BEH_BLK BOOLEAN Logical device CTRL block status
BEH_TST BOOLEAN Logical device CTRL test status
3.17.10.9 Settings
Table 187: Control settings
LR control 1=LR key 1=LR key LR control through LR key or binary input
2=Binary input
Station authority 1=L,R 1=L,R Control command originator category usage
2=L,S,R
3=L,R,L+R
4=L,S,S+R,L+S,L
+S+R
Control mode 1=Enable 1=Enable Enabling and disabling control
2=Blocked
5=Disable
615 series ANSI 189

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Table 188: Monitored data
Command response Enum 0=No commands Latest command response
1=Select open
2=Select close
3=Trip open
4=Trip close
5=Direct open
6=Direct close
7=Cancel
8=Position
reached
9=Position
timeout
10=Object status
only
11=Object direct
12=Object select
13=RL local
allowed
14=RL remote
allowed
15=RL off
16=Function off
17=Function
blocked
18=Command
progress
19=Select
timeout
20=Missing
authority
21=Close not
enabled
22=Open not
enabled
23=Device in IRF
24=Already
close
25=Wrong client
26=RL station
allowed
27=RL change
28=Maximum 3
seconds
unbalance
voltage
LR state Enum 0=Disable LR state monitoring for PCM
1=Local
2=Remote
3=Station
4=L+R
5=L+S
6=L+S+R
7=S+R
190 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.17.11 Generic control point (16 pcs) SPC
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/
identification identification IEEEidentification
Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC SPC SPC
SPC
BLOCK Q1
IN1 Q2
IN2 Q3
IN3 Q4
IN4 Q5
IN5 Q6
IN6 Q7
IN7 Q8
IN8 Q9
IN9
Q10
IN10
Q11
IN11
Q12
IN12
Q13
IN13
Q14
IN14
Q15
IN15
Q16
IN16
GUID-0AA1476A-9C7C-418A-B104-580BC573B53D V1 EN
The generic control points function SPC contains 16 independent control points. SPC
offers the capability to activate its outputs through a local or remote control. The local
control request can be issued through the buttons in the single-line diagram or via inputs
and the remote control request through communication. The rising edge of the input signal
is interpreted as a control request, and the output operation is triggered. When remote
control requests are used, the control points behave as persistent.
The Loc Rem restriction setting is used for enabling or disabling the restriction for SPC to
follow the R/L button state. If Loc Rem restriction is "True", as it is by default, the local
or remote control operations are accepted according to the R/L button state.
Each of the 16 generic control point outputs has the Operation mode, Pulse length and
Description setting. If Operation mode is "Toggle", the output state is toggled for every
control request received. If Operation mode is "Pulsed", the output pulse of a preset
duration (the Pulse length setting) is generated for every control request received. The
615 series ANSI 191

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Description setting can be used for storing information on the actual use of the control
point in application, for instance.
For example, if the Operation mode is "Toggle", the output O# is initially “False”. The
rising edge in IN# sets O# to “True”. The falling edge of IN# has no effect. Next rising
edge of IN# sets O# to “False”.
GUID-F0078144-A40B-4A72-915A-0E6665F8DEB1 V1 EN
Figure 98: Operation in "Toggle" mode
The BLOCK input can be used for blocking the functionality of the outputs. The operation
of the BLOCK input depends on the Operation mode setting. If Operation mode is
"Toggle", the output state freezes and cannot be changed while the BLOCK input is active.
If Operation mode is "Pulsed", the activation of the BLOCK input resets the outputs to the
"False" state and further control requests are ignored while the BLOCK input is active.
From the remote communication point of view SPC toggled operation

mode is always working as persistent mode. The output O# follows the
value written to the input IN#.
3.17.11.4 Signals
Table 189: SPC Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 1
192 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Table 190: SPC Output signals

O1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status
615 series ANSI 193

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.17.11.5 Settings
Table 191: SPC Non group settings (Basic)
Loc Rem restriction 0=False 1=True Local remote switch restriction
1=True
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGAPC1 Generic control point description
Output 1
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 2
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 3
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 4
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 5
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 6
1=Toggle
-1=Off
194 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Output 7
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 8
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 9
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 10
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 11
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 12
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 13
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 14
615 series ANSI 195

Technical Manual
Basic functions

1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 15
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Output 16
3.17.12 Generic up-down counter CTR
Generic up-down counter UDFCNT UDCNT CTR
GUID-222CC574-D72D-4426-876C-526D7C264C1E V1 EN
The multipurpose generic up-down counter function CTR counts up or down for each
positive edge of the corresponding inputs. The counter value output can be reset to zero or
preset to some other value if required.
The function provides up-count and down-count status outputs, which specify the relation
of the counter value to a loaded preset value and to zero respectively.
196 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding
parameter values are “Enable” and “Disable”.
The operation of CTR can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the next sections.
GUID-9D9880AB-4CA7-4DD5-BA0C-C1D958FC04F6 V1 EN
Figure 100: Functional module diagram
Up-down counter
Each rising edge of the UP_CNT input increments the counter value CNT_VAL by one and
each rising edge of the DOWN_CNT input decrements the CNT_VAL by one. If there is a
rising edge at both the inputs UP_CNT and DOWN_CNT, the counter value CNT_VAL is
unchanged. The CNT_VAL is available in the monitored data view.
The counter value CNT_VAL is stored in a nonvolatile memory. The range of the counter
is 0...+2147483647. The count of CNT_VAL saturates at the final value of 2147483647,
that is, no further increment is possible.
The value of the setting Counter load value is loaded into counter value CNT_VAL either
when the LOAD input is set to "True" or when the Load Counter is set to "Load" in the
LHMI. Until the LOAD input is "True", it prevents all further counting.
The function also provides status outputs UPCNT_STS and DNCNT_STS. The
UPCNT_STS is set to "True" when the CNT_VAL is greater than or equal to the setting
Counter load value. DNCNT_STS is set to "True" when the CNT_VAL is zero.
The RESET input is used for resetting the function. When this input is set to "True" or
when Reset counter is set to "reset", the CNT_VAL is forced to zero.
615 series ANSI 197

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.17.12.5 Signals
Table 192: CTR Input signals
UP_CNT BOOLEAN 0=False Input for up counting
DOWN_CNT BOOLEAN 0=False Input for down counting
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for counter
LOAD BOOLEAN 0=False Load input for counter
Table 193: CTR Output signals

UPCNT_STS BOOLEAN Status of the up counting
DNCNT_STS BOOLEAN Status of the down counting
3.17.12.6 Settings
Table 194: CTR Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Counter load value 0...2147483647 1 10000 Preset counter value
Reset counter 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets counter value
1=Reset
Load counter 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Loads the counter to preset value
1=Load

Table 195: CTR Monitored data
CNT_VAL INT64 0...2147483647 Output counter value
3.18 Factory settings restoration
In case of configuration data loss or any other file system error that prevents the protection
relay from working properly, the whole file system can be restored to the original factory
198 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
state. All default settings and configuration files stored in the factory are restored. For
further information on restoring factory settings, see the operation manual.
3.19 Load profile record LOADPROF
The protection relay is provided with a load profile recorder. The load profile feature
stores the historical load data captured at a periodical time interval (demand interval). Up
to 12 load quantities can be selected for recording and storing in a nonvolatile memory.
The value range for the recorded load quantities is about eight times the nominal value,
and values larger than that saturate. The recording time depends on a settable demand
interval parameter and the amount of quantities selected. The record output is in the
COMTRADE format.
3.19.1.1 Quantities
Selectable quantities are product-dependent.

Table 196: Quantity Description
Quantity Sel x Description
Disabled Quantity not selected
IA Phase A current
IB Phase B current
IC Phase C current
IG Neutral/ground/residual current
IA2 Phase A current, B side
IB2 Phase B current, B side
IC2 Phase C current, B side
IG2 Neutral/ground/residual current, B side
VAB Phase-to-phase AB voltage
VBC Phase-to-phase BC voltage
VCA Phase-to-phase CA voltage
VA Phase-to-ground A voltage
VB Phase-to-ground B voltage
VC Phase-to-ground C voltage
VAB2 Phase-to-phase AB voltage, B side
VBC2 Phase-to-phase BC voltage, B side
615 series ANSI 199

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Quantity Sel x Description

VCA2 Phase-to-phase CA voltage, B side
VA2 Phase-to-ground A voltage, B side
VB2 Phase-to-ground B voltage, B side
VC2 Phase-to-ground C voltage, B side
S Apparent power
P Real power
Q Reactive power
PF Power factor
S2 Apparent power, B side
P2 Real power, B side
Q2 Reactive power, B side
PF2 Power factor, B side
SA Apparent power, phase A
SB Apparent power, phase B
SC Apparent power, phase C
PA Real power, phase A
PB Real power, phase B
PC Real power, phase C
QA Reactive power, phase A
QB Reactive power, phase B
QC Reactive power, phase C
PFA Power factor, phase A
PFB Power factor, phase B
PFC Power factor, phase C
SA2 Apparent power, phase A, B side
SB2 Apparent power, phase B, B side
SC2 Apparent power, phase C, B side
PA2 Real power, phase A, B side
PB2 Real power, phase B, B side
PC2 Real power, phase C, B side
QA2 Reactive power, phase A, B side
QB2 Reactive power, phase B, B side
QC2 Reactive power, phase C, B side
PFA2 Power factor, phase A, B side
PFB2 Power factor, phase B, B side
PFC2 Power factor, phase C, B side
200 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
If the data source for the selected quantity is removed, for example, with
Application Configuration in PCM600, the load profile recorder stops
recording it and the previously collected data are cleared.
3.19.1.2 Length of record
The recording capability is about 7.4 years when one quantity is recorded and the demand
interval is set to 180 minutes. The recording time scales down proportionally when a
shorter demand time is selected or more quantities are recorded. The recording lengths in
days with different settings used are presented in Table 197. When the recording buffer is
fully occupied, the oldest data are overwritten by the newest data.
Table 197: Recording capability in days with different settings
Demand interval
1 5 10 15 30 60 180
minute minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes
Amount of
quantities Recording capability in days
1 15.2 75.8 151.6 227.4 454.9 909.7 2729.2
2 11.4 56.9 113.7 170.6 341.1 682.3 2046.9
3 9.1 45.5 91.0 136.5 272.9 545.8 1637.5
4 7.6 37.9 75.8 113.7 227.4 454.9 1364.6
5 6.5 32.5 65.0 97.5 194.9 389.9 1169.6
6 5.7 28.4 56.9 85.3 170.6 341.1 1023.4
7 5.1 25.3 50.5 75.8 151.6 303.2 909.7
8 4.5 22.7 45.5 68.2 136.5 272.9 818.8
9 4.1 20.7 41.4 62.0 124.1 248.1 744.3
10 3.8 19.0 37.9 56.9 113.7 227.4 682.3
11 3.5 17.5 35.0 52.5 105.0 209.9 629.8
12 3.2 16.2 32.5 48.7 97.5 194.9 584.8
3.19.1.3 Uploading of record
The protection relay stores the load profile COMTRADE files to the C:\LDP
\COMTRADE folder. The files can be uploaded with the PCM600 tool or any appropriate
computer software that can access the C:\LDP\COMTRADE folder.
The load profile record consists of two COMTRADE file types: the configuration file
(.CFG) and the data file (.DAT). The file name is same for both file types.
615 series ANSI 201

Technical Manual
Basic functions
To ensure that both the uploaded file types are generated from the same data content, the
files need to be uploaded successively. Once either of the files is uploaded, the recording
buffer is halted to give time to upload the other file.
Data content of the load profile record is sequentially updated. Therefore,

the size attribute for both COMTRADE files is "0".
192 . 168 . 10 . 187 L D P 1
0 A B B L D P 1 . C F G
0 A B B L D P 1 . D A T
GUID-43078009-323D-409C-B84A-5EB914CDEE53 V1 EN
Figure 101: Load profile record file naming
3.19.1.4 Clearing of record
The load profile record can be cleared with Reset load profile rec via HMI,
communication or the ACT input in PCM600. Clearing of the record is allowed only on
the engineer and administrator authorization levels.
The load profile record is automatically cleared if the quantity selection parameters are
changed or any other parameter which affects the content of the COMTRADE
configuration file is changed. Also, if data source for selected quantity is removed, for
example, with ACT, the load profile recorder stops recording and previously collected
data are cleared.
202 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.19.2 Configuration
The load profile record can be configured with the PCM600 tool or any tool supporting the
IEC 61850 standard.
The load profile record can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting under the
Configuration/Load Profile Record menu.
Each protection relay can be mapped to each of the quantity channels of the load profile
record. The mapping is done with the Quantity selection setting of the corresponding
quantity channel.
The IP number of the protection relay and the content of the Bay name
setting are both included in the COMTRADE configuration file for
identification purposes.
The memory consumption of load profile record is supervised, and indicated with two
signals MEM_WARN and MEM_ALARM, which could be used to notify the customer that
recording should be backlogged by reading the recorded data from the protection relay.
The levels for MEM_WARN and MEM_ALARM are set by two parameters Mem.warn
level and Mem. Alarm level.
3.19.3 Signals
Table 198: LOADPROF Output signals
MEM_WARN BOOLEAN Recording memory warning status
MEM_ALARM BOOLEAN Recording memory alarm status
615 series ANSI 203

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.19.4 Settings
204 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
Table 199: LOADPROF Non group settings (Basic)

Operation 1=enable 1=disable Operation Disable / Enable
5=disable
Quantity Sel x (1...12) 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded
1=IA
2=IB
3=IC
4=IG
5=IA2
6=IB2
7=IC2
8=IG2
9=VAB
10=VBC
11=VCA
12=VA
13=VB
14=VC
15=VAB2
16=VBC2
17=VCA2
18=VA2
19=VB2
20=VC2
21=S
22=P
23=Q
24=PF
25=S2
26=P2
27=Q2
28=PF2
29=SA
30=SB
31=SC
32=PA
33=PB
34=PC
35=QA
36=QB
37=QC
38=PFA
39=PFB
40=PFC
41=SA2
42=SB2
43=SC2
44=PA2
45=PB2
46=PC2
47=QA2
48=QB2
49=QC2
50=PFA2
51=PFB2
52=PFC2
Mem. warning level 0...100 % 1 0 Set memory warning level
615 series ANSI 205

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Mem. alarm level 0...100 % 1 0 Set memory alarm level

Table 200: LOADPROF Monitored data
Rec. memory used INT32 0...100 % How much recording memory
is currently used
3.20 ETHERNET channel supervision function blocks
3.20.1 Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH
GUID-CD9E923F-7B50-45C0-AE3E-39F576E01906 V1 EN
Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH represents LAN A and LAN B

redundant Ethernet channels.
206 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.20.1.3 Signals
Table 201: RCHLCCH output signals
CHLIV True Status of redundant Ethernet channel
False LAN A. When Redundant mode is set to
"HSR" or "PRP", value is "True" if the
protection relay is receiving redundancy
supervision frames. Otherwise value is
"False".
REDCHLIV True Status of redundant Ethernet channel
False LAN B. When Redundant mode is set to
"HSR" or "PRP", value is "True" if the
protection relay is receiving redundancy
supervision frames. Otherwise value is
"False".
LNKLIV Up Link status of redundant port LAN A. Valid
Down only when Redundant mode is set to
"HSR" or "PRP".
REDLNKLIV Up Link status of redundant port LAN B. Valid
Down only when Redundant mode is set to
"HSR" or "PRP".
3.20.1.4 Settings
Table 202: Redundancy settings
Redundant None None Mode selection for Ethernet switch on
mode PRP redundant communication modules. The
HSR "None" mode is used with normal and Self-
healing Ethernet topologies.
Monitored data is available in four locations.
• Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Activity/CHLIV_A
• Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Activity/REDCHLIV_B
• Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Link statuses/LNKLIV_A
• Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Link statuses/REDLNKLIV_B
615 series ANSI 207

Technical Manual
Basic functions
3.20.2 Ethernet channel supervision SCHLCCH
GUID-DBA25BB9-6BF5-4C45-A39F-1920113A22F2 V1 EN
Ethernet channel supervision SCHLCCH represents X1/LAN, X2/LAN and X3/LAN

Ethernet channels.
An unused Ethernet port can be set "Off" with the setting Configuration/
Communication/Ethernet/Rear port(s)/Port x Mode. This setting closes the port from
software, disabling the Ethernet communication in that port. Closing an unused Ethernet
port enhances the cyber security of the relay.
3.20.2.3 Signals
Table 203: SCHLCCH1 output signals
CH1LIV True Status of Ethernet channel X1/LAN. Value
False is "True" if the port is receiving Ethernet
frames. Valid only when Redundant mode
is set to "None" or port is not one of the
redundant ports (LAN A or LAN B).
LNK1LIV Up Link status of Ethernet port X1/LAN.
Down

Down
208 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Basic functions

Down
3.20.2.4 Settings
Table 206: Port mode settings
Port 1 Mode Off On Mode selection for rear port(s). If port is not
On used, it can be set to “Off”. Port cannot be
set to “Off” when Redundant mode is
“HSR” or “PRP” and port is one of the
redundant ports (LAN A or LAN B) or when
port is used for line differential
communication.
Monitored data is available in six locations.
• Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Activity/CH1LIV
• Monitoring/Communication/Ethernet/Link statuses/LNK1LIV
615 series ANSI 209

Technical Manual
210
Protection functions
Section 4 Protection functions
4.1 Three-phase current protection
4.1.1 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection 51P, 50P,

50P-3
Three-phase non-directional PHLPTOC 3I> 51P
overcurrent protection, low stage
Three-phase non-directional PHHPTOC 3I>> 50P
overcurrent protection, high stage
Three-phase non-directional PHIPTOC 3I>>> 50P-3
overcurrent protection, instantaneous
stage
51P 50P 50P-3

I_A TRIP I_A TRIP I_A TRIP
I_B PICKUP I_B PICKUP I_B PICKUP
I_C I_C I_C
BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK
ENA_MULT ENA_MULT ENA_MULT
GUID-5CFFB25F-7DB5-4683-B405-03CE02826062 V1 EN
The three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection function 51P, 50P, 50P-3 is used
as one-phase, two-phase or three-phase non-directional overcurrent and short-circuit
protection.
The function picks up when the current exceeds the set limit. The trip time characteristics
for low stage 51P and high stage 50P can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or
615 series ANSI 211

Technical Manual
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT). The instantaneous stage 50P-3 always trips with
the DT characteristic.
In the DT mode, the function trips after a predefined trip time and resets when the fault
current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent timer characteristics.
The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.
The operation of 51P, 50P, 50P-3 can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
A070552-ANSI V1 EN
Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Pickup value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Pickup value, the level detector reports the exceeding of
the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Pickup value
setting is multiplied by the Pickup value Mult setting.
The protection relay does not accept the Pickup value or Pickup value
Mult setting if the product of these settings exceeds the Pickup value
setting range.
The pickup value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.
212 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-640654EC-1E77-4ED5-BE41-9EC399B686BA-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 106: Pickup value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated
Phase selection logic

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the
phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting. If the phase
information matches the Num of pickup phases setting, the phase selection logic activates
the timer module.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output. Depending on the value of the
Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When
the operation timer has reached the value of Trip delay time in the DT mode or the
maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the TRIP output is activated.
When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics
are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter
C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.
If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the trip delay is
exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the timer in the reset state
depends on the combination of the Operating curve type, Type of reset curve and Reset
delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is selected, the reset timer runs until the set
615 series ANSI 213

Technical Manual
Reset delay time value is exceeded. When the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset
curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset
curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time
reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type
"Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The
PICKUP output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.
The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another operating
curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the drop-off
situation.
The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT trip and reset times.
The setting parameter Minimum trip time defines the minimum desired trip time for
IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.
The Minimum trip time setting should be used with great care because the
operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but always at least the
value of the Minimum trip time setting. For more information, see the
IDMT curves for overcurrent protection section in this manual.
The timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time. The value is available in the
monitored data view.
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/Blocking
mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary
input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's
program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global
setting Blocking mode.
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the
operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the TRIP output is not deactivated
when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the
timers are reset. In the "Block TRIP output" mode, the function operates normally but the
TRIP output is not activated.
214 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.1.1.5 Measurement modes
The function operates on four alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT", "Peak-to-
Peak" and "P-to-P + backup". Additionally, there is “Wide P-to-P” measurement mode in
some products variants. The measurement mode is selected with the setting Measurement
mode.
Table 207: Measurement modes supported by 51P/50P stages
Measurement mode 51P 50P 50P-3
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x
P-to-P + backup x
Wide P-to-P x 1)
1) Available only in REG615 standard configurations C and D
For a detailed description of the measurement modes, see the

Measurement modes section in this manual.
4.1.1.6 Timer characteristics
51P, 50P, 50P-3 supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the timer
characteristics with the Operating curve type and Type of reset curve settings. When the
DT characteristic is selected, it is only affected by the Trip delay time and Reset delay time
settings.
The protection relay provides 16 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply
with the IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the
special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this,
a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable. The
DT characteristics can be chosen by selecting the Operating curve type values "ANSI Def.
Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is identical in both cases.
The timer characteristics supported by different stages comply with the list in the IEC
61850-7-4 specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages:
615 series ANSI 215

Technical Manual
Table 208: Timer characteristics supported by different stages

Operating curve type 51P 50P
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse x x
(2) ANSI Very Inverse x
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse x x
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse x
(5) ANSI Definite Time x x
(6) Long Time Extremely Inverse x
(7) Long Time Very Inverse x
(8) Long Time Inverse x
(9) IEC Normal Inverse x x
(10) IEC Very Inverse x x
(11) IEC Inverse x
(12) IEC Extremely Inverse x x
(13) IEC Short Time Inverse x
(14) IEC Long Time Inverse x
(15) IEC Definite Time x x
(17) User programmable x x
(18) RI type x
(19) RD type x
50P-3 supports only definite time characteristic.
For a detailed description of timers, see the General function block

features section in this manual.
Table 209: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages

Reset curve type 51P 50P Note
(1) Immediate x x Available for all reset time curves
(2) Def time reset x x Available for all reset time curves
(3) Inverse reset x x Available only for ANSI and user
programmable curves
216 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The Type of reset curve setting does not apply to 50P-3 or when the DT
operation is selected. The reset is purely defined by the Reset delay time
setting.
4.1.1.7 Application
51P, 50P, 50P-3 is used in several applications in the power system. The applications
include but are not limited to:
• Selective overcurrent and short-circuit protection of feeders in distribution and

subtransmission systems
• Backup overcurrent and short-circuit protection of power transformers and
generators
• Overcurrent and short-circuit protection of various devices connected to the power
system, for example shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and motors
• General backup protection
51P, 50P, 50P-3 is used for single-phase, two-phase and three-phase non-directional
overcurrent and short-circuit protection. Typically, overcurrent protection is used for
clearing two and three-phase short circuits. Therefore, the user can choose how many
phases, at minimum, must have currents above the pickup level for the function to trip.
When the number of pickup-phase settings is set to "1 out of 3", the operation of 51P, 50P,
50P-3 is enabled with the presence of high current in one-phase.
When the setting is "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3", single-phase faults are not
detected. The setting "3 out of 3" requires the fault to be present in all three
phases.
Many applications require several steps using different current pickup levels and time
delays. 51P/50P consists of three protection stages:
• Low 51P
• High 50P
• Instantaneous 50P-3
51P is used for overcurrent protection. The function contains several types of time-delay
characteristics. 50P and 50P-3 are used for fast clearance of very high overcurrent
situations.
615 series ANSI 217

Technical Manual
Transformer overcurrent protection

The purpose of transformer overcurrent protection is to operate as main protection, when
differential protection is not used. It can also be used as coarse back-up protection for
differential protection in faults inside the zone of protection, that is, faults occurring in
incoming or outgoing feeders, in the region of transformer terminals and tank cover. This
means that the magnitude range of the fault current can be very wide. The range varies
from 6xIn to several hundred times In, depending on the impedance of the transformer and
the source impedance of the feeding network. From this point of view, it is clear that the
operation must be both very fast and selective, which is usually achieved by using coarse
current settings.
The purpose is also to protect the transformer from short circuits occurring outside the
protection zone, that is through-faults. Transformer overcurrent protection also provides
protection for the LV-side busbars. In this case the magnitude of the fault current is
typically lower than 12xIn depending on the fault location and transformer impedance.
Consequently, the protection must operate as fast as possible taking into account the
selectivity requirements, switching-in currents, and the thermal and mechanical withstand
of the transformer and outgoing feeders.
Traditionally, overcurrent protection of the transformer has been arranged as shown in

Figure 107. The low-set stage 51P operates time-selectively both in transformer and LV-
side busbar faults. The high-set stage 50P operates instantaneously making use of current
selectivity only in transformer HV-side faults. If there is a possibility, that the fault current
can also be fed from the LV-side up to the HV-side, the transformer must also be equipped
with LV-side overcurrent protection. Inrush current detectors are used in start-up
situations to multiply the current pickup value setting in each particular protection relay
where the inrush current can occur. The overcurrent and contact based circuit breaker
failure protection 50BF is used to confirm the protection scheme in case of circuit breaker
malfunction.
218 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A070978-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 107: Example of traditional time selective transformer overcurrent protection
The operating times of the main and backup overcurrent protection of the above scheme
become quite long, this applies especially in the busbar faults and also in the transformer
LV-terminal faults. In order to improve the performance of the above scheme, a multiple-
stage overcurrent protection with reverse blocking is proposed. Figure 108 shows this
arrangement.
Transformer and busbar overcurrent protection with reverse blocking

principle
By implementing a full set of overcurrent protection stages and blocking channels
between the protection stages of the incoming feeders, bus-tie and outgoing feeders, it is
possible to speed up the operation of overcurrent protection in the busbar and transformer
LV-side faults without impairing the selectivity. Also, the security degree of busbar
protection is increased, because there is now a dedicated, selective and fast busbar
protection functionality which is based on the blockable overcurrent protection principle.
The additional time selective stages on the transformer HV and LV-sides provide
increased security of backup protection for the transformer, busbar and also for the
outgoing feeders.
Depending on the overcurrent stage in question, the selectivity of the scheme in Figure
108 is based on the operating current, operating time or blockings between successive
overcurrent stages. With blocking channels, the operating time of the protection can be
drastically shortened if compared to the simple time selective protection. In addition to the
busbar protection, this blocking principle is applicable for the protection of transformer
615 series ANSI 219

Technical Manual
LV terminals and short lines. The functionality and performance of the proposed
overcurrent protections can be summarized as seen in the table.
Table 210: Proposed functionality of numerical transformer and busbar overcurrent protection. DT =
definite time, IDMT = inverse definite minimum time
O/C-stage Operating char. Selectivity mode Operation speed Sensitivity
HV/51P DT/IDMT time selective low very high
HV/50PHV/ DT blockable/time high/low high
50P-1/2 selective
HV/50P-3 DT current selective very high low
LV/51P DT/IDMT time selective low very high
LV/50P DT time selective low high
LV/50P-3 DT blockable high high
In case the bus-tie breaker is open, the operating time of the blockable overcurrent
protection is approximately 100 ms (relaying time). When the bus-tie breaker is closed,
that is, the fault current flows to the faulted section of the busbar from two directions, the
operation time becomes as follows: first the bus-tie relay unit trips the tie breaker in the
above 100 ms, which reduces the fault current to a half. After this the incoming feeder
relay unit of the faulted bus section trips the breaker in approximately 250 ms (relaying
time), which becomes the total fault clearing time in this case.
220 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A070980-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 108: Numerical overcurrent protection functionality for a typical sub-

transmission/distribution substation (feeder protection not
shown).Blocking output = digital output signal from the pickup of a
protection stage, Blocking in = digital input signal to block the operation of
a protection stage
The operating times of the time selective stages are very short, because the grading
margins between successive protection stages can be kept short. This is mainly due to the
advanced measuring principle allowing a certain degree of CT saturation, good operating
accuracy and short retardation times of the numerical units. So, for example, a grading
margin of 150 ms in the DT mode of operation can be used, provided that the circuit
breaker interrupting time is shorter than 60 ms.
The sensitivity and speed of the current-selective stages become as good as possible due
to the fact that the transient overreach is very low. Also, the effects of switching inrush
currents on the setting values can be reduced by using the protection relay's logic, which
recognizes the transformer energizing inrush current and blocks the operation or
multiplies the current pickup value setting of the selected overcurrent stage with a
predefined multiplier setting.
Finally, a dependable trip of the overcurrent protection is secured by both a proper

selection of the settings and an adequate ability of the measuring transformers to
reproduce the fault current. This is important in order to maintain selectivity and also for
the protection to operate without additional time delays. For additional information about
available measuring modes and current transformer requirements, see the Measurement
modes chapter in this manual.
615 series ANSI 221

Technical Manual
Radial outgoing feeder overcurrent protection

The basic requirements for feeder overcurrent protection are adequate sensitivity and
operation speed taking into account the minimum and maximum fault current levels along
the protected line, selectivity requirements, inrush currents and the thermal and
mechanical withstand of the lines to be protected.
In many cases the above requirements can be best fulfilled by using multiple-stage
overcurrent units. Figure 109 shows an example of this. A brief coordination study has
been carried out between the incoming and outgoing feeders.
The protection scheme is implemented with three-stage numerical overcurrent protection

where the low-set stage 51P operates in IDMT-mode and the two higher stages 50P and
50P-3 in DT-mode. Also the thermal withstand of the line types along the feeder and
maximum expected inrush currents of the feeders are shown. Faults occurring near the
station, where the fault current levels are the highest, are cleared rapidly by the
instantaneous stage in order to minimize the effects of severe short circuit faults. The
influence of the inrush current is taken into consideration by connecting the inrush current
detector to the pickup value multiplying input of the instantaneous stage. In this way, the
pickup value is multiplied with a predefined setting during the inrush situation and
nuisance tripping can be avoided.
222 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A070982-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 109: Functionality of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection
The coordination plan is an effective tool to study the operation of time selective operation
characteristics. All the points mentioned earlier, required to define the overcurrent
protection parameters, can be expressed simultaneously in a coordination plan. In Figure
110, the coordination plan shows an example of operation characteristics in the LV-side
incoming feeder and radial outgoing feeder.
615 series ANSI 223

Technical Manual
A070984 V2 EN
Figure 110: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection
4.1.1.8 Signals
Table 211: 51P Input signals
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier
Table 212: 50P Input signals

224 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 213: 50P-3 Input signals

Table 214: 51P Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup
Table 215: 50P Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
Table 216: 50P-3 Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
615 series ANSI 225

Technical Manual
4.1.1.9 Settings
Table 217: 51P Group settings (Basic)
Pickup value 0.05...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.05 Pickup value
Pickup value mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the pickup value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Trip delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Trip delay time
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext Inv 15=IEC DT Selection of time delay curve type
2=ANSI Very Inv
3=ANSI Norm Inv
4=ANSI Mod Inv
5=ANSI DT
6=LT Ext Inv
7=LT Very Inv
8=LT Inv
9=IEC Norm Inv
10=IEC Very Inv
11=IEC Inv
12=IEC Ext Inv
13=IEC ST Inv
14=IEC LT Inv
15=IEC DT
17=Programmable
18=RI Type
19=RD Type
Table 218: 51P Group settings (Advanced)

Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Table 219: 51P Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Num of pickup phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for trip activation
2=2 out of 3
3=3 out of 3
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 1 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 1 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
226 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 1 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 1 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Table 220: 51P Non group settings (Advanced)

Minimum trip time 20...60000 ms 1 20 Minimum trip time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
5=IL1-unb
Table 221: 50P Group settings (Basic)

3=ANSI Norm Inv
5=ANSI DT
9=IEC Norm Inv
10=IEC Very Inv
12=IEC Ext Inv
15=IEC DT
17=Programmable
Table 222: 50P Group settings (Advanced)

2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
615 series ANSI 227

Technical Manual
Table 223: 50P Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
2=2 out of 3
3=3 out of 3
curve
curve
curve
curve
curve
Table 224: 50P Non group settings (Advanced)

2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Table 225: 50P-3 Group settings (Basic)

Table 226: 50P-3 Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
2=2 out of 3
3=3 out of 3
228 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 227: 50P-3 Non group settings (Advanced)


Table 228: 51P Monitored data
PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of pickup time / trip time
51P Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Table 229: 50P Monitored data

50P Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Table 230: 50P-3 Monitored data

50P-3 Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
615 series ANSI 229

Technical Manual

Table 231: 51P, 50P, 50P-3 Technical data
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured
current: fn ±2 Hz
51P ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
50P ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 × In

and (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 × In)
50P-3 ±5.0% of the set value
(at currents in the range of 10…40 × In)
Pickup time 1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

50P-3:
IFault = 2 × set Pickup 16 ms 19 ms 23 ms
value
value
50P and 51P:
IFault = 2 × set Pickup
value 23 ms 26 ms 29 ms
Reset time Typically 40 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <30 ms
Trip time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression
P-to-P+backup: No suppression
1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, fault current in
one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Pickup value = 2.5 × In, Pickup value multiples in range of 1.5...20
230 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.1.1.12 Technical revision history

Table 232: 50P-3 Technical revision history
B Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms for
the Trip delay time setting
C Minimum and default values changed to 20 ms for
Minimum value changed to 1.00 x In for the Pickup
value setting
D Internal improvement
E Internal improvement
Table 233: 50P Technical revision history

C Measurement mode "P-to-P + backup" replaced with
"Peak-to-Peak"
D Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the Time
multiplier setting
F Internal improvement
Table 234: 51P Technical revision history

C Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the Time
multiplier setting
4.1.2 Three-phase directional overcurrent protection 67/51P, 67/50P
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHLPDOC 3I> -> 67/51P
protection, low stage
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHHPDOC 3I>> -> 67/50P
protection, high stage
615 series ANSI 231

Technical Manual
67-1 67-2
I_A TRIP I_A TRIP
I_B PICKUP I_B PICKUP
I_C I_C
I2 I2
V_A_AB V_A_AB
V_B_BC V_B_BC
V_C_CA V_C_CA
V1 V1
V2 V2
BLOCK BLOCK
ENA_MULT ENA_MULT
NON_DIR NON_DIR
GUID-E3431A8A-7DA8-41CA-96E9-8F560E5FCC35 V1 EN
The three-phase directional overcurrent protection function 67/51P, 67/50P is used as

one-phase, two-phase or three-phase directional overcurrent and short-circuit protection
for feeders.
67/51P, 67/50P picks up when the value of the current exceeds the set limit and directional
criterion is fulfilled. The trip time characteristics for low stage 67/51P and high stage
67/50P can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT).

The operation of 67/51P, 67/50P can be described using a module diagram. All the
232 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
V_A_AB
V_B_BC
V_C_CA
V1
V2 Directional Phase
calculation selection
I2
logic
I_A
I_B
Timer
I_C
TRIP
t
NON_DIR
Level Blocking t
PICKUP
detector logic
ENA_MULT
BLOCK
GUID-92621351-8DF2-4606-A043-F79C018C12A4 V2 EN
Directional calculation
The directional calculation compares the current phasors to the polarizing phasor. A
suitable polarization quantity can be selected from the different polarization quantities,
which are the positive sequence voltage, negative sequence voltage, self-polarizing
(faulted) voltage and cross-polarizing voltages (healthy voltages). The polarizing method
is defined with the Pol quantity setting.
Table 235: Polarizing quantities
Polarizing quantity Description
Pos. seq. volt Positive sequence voltage
Neg. seq. volt Negative sequence voltage
Self pol Self polarization
Cross pol Cross polarization
The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting. The user can
select either "Non-directional", "Forward" or "Reverse" operation. By setting the value of
Allow Non Dir to "True", the non-directional operation is allowed when the directional
information is invalid.
615 series ANSI 233

Technical Manual
The Characteristic angle setting is used to turn the directional characteristic. The value of
Characteristic angle should be chosen in such a way that all the faults in the operating
direction are seen in the operating zone and all the faults in the opposite direction are seen
in the non-operating zone. The value of Characteristic angle depends on the network
configuration.
Reliable operation requires both the operating and polarizing quantities to exceed certain
minimum amplitude levels. The minimum amplitude level for the operating quantity
(current) is set with the Min trip current setting. The minimum amplitude level for the
polarizing quantity (voltage) is set with the Min trip voltage setting. If the amplitude level
of the operating quantity or polarizing quantity is below the set level, the direction
information of the corresponding phase is set to "Unknown".
The polarizing quantity validity can remain valid even if the amplitude of the polarizing
quantity falls below the value of the Min trip voltage setting. In this case, the directional
information is provided by a special memory function for a time defined with the Voltage
Mem time setting.
67/51P, 67/50P is provided with a memory function to secure a reliable and correct
directional protection relay operation in case of a close short circuit or a ground fault
characterized by an extremely low voltage. At sudden loss of the polarization quantity, the
angle difference is calculated on the basis of a fictive voltage. The fictive voltage is
calculated using the positive phase sequence voltage measured before the fault occurred,
assuming that the voltage is not affected by the fault. The memory function enables the
function to trip up to a maximum of three seconds after a total loss of voltage. This time
can be set with the Voltage Mem time setting. The voltage memory cannot be used for the
"Negative sequence voltage" polarization because it is not possible to substitute the
positive sequence voltage for negative sequence voltage without knowing the network
unsymmetry level. This is the reason why the fictive voltage angle and corresponding
direction information are frozen immediately for this polarization mode when the need for
a voltage memory arises and these are kept frozen until the time set with Voltage Mem time
elapses.
The value for the Min trip voltage setting should be carefully selected
since the accuracy in low signal levels is strongly affected by the
measuring device accuracy.
When the voltage falls below Min trip voltage at a close fault, the fictive voltage is used
to determine the phase angle. The measured voltage is applied again as soon as the voltage
rises above Min trip voltage and hysteresis. The fictive voltage is also discarded if the
measured voltage stays below Min trip voltageand hysteresis for longer than Voltage Mem
time or if the fault current disappears while the fictive voltage is in use. When the voltage
is below Min trip voltage and hysteresis and the fictive voltage is unusable, the fault
direction cannot be determined. The fictive voltage can be unusable for two reasons:
234 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
• The fictive voltage is discarded after Voltage Mem time

• The phase angle cannot be reliably measured before the fault situation.
67/51P, 67/50P can be forced to the non-directional operation with the NON_DIR input.
When the NON_DIR input is active, 67/51P, 67/50P operates as a non-directional
overcurrent protection, regardless of the Directional mode setting.
Operating
quantity
Memory function Operating zone

operate zone
Min trip
current
Non-operating zone
Min trip
voltage Polarizing
quantity
GUID-C30CD1A2-93E2-4A92-9FF3-58B7B2A98458 V1 EN
Figure 113: Operating zones at minimum magnitude levels
Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Pickup value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Pickup value, the level detector reports the exceeding of
the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Pickup value
setting is multiplied by the Pickup value Mult setting.
615 series ANSI 235

Technical Manual
setting range.
GUID-640654EC-1E77-4ED5-BE41-9EC399B686BA-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 114: Pickup value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector and the directional calculation, the
phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds
the setting. If the phase information matches the Num of pickup phases setting, the phase
selection logic activates the timer module.
Timer
236 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

situation.
Blocking logic
615 series ANSI 237

Technical Manual
The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: “RMS”, “DFT” and
“Peak-to-Peak” . The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode setting.
Table 236: Measurement modes supported by 67/51P, 67/50P stagesMeasurement modes supported
by 67/51P and 67/50P stages
Measurement mode 67/51P 67/50P
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x
4.1.2.6 Directional overcurrent characteristics
The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area is
limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse operation
area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings.
The sector limits are always given as positive degree values.
In the forward operation area, the Max forward angle setting gives the counterclockwise
sector and the Min forward angle setting gives the corresponding clockwise sector,
measured from the Characteristic angle setting.
In the backward operation area, the Max reverse angle setting gives the counterclockwise
sector and the Min reverse angle setting gives the corresponding clockwise sector, a
measurement from the Characteristic angle setting that has been rotated 180 degrees.
Relay characteristic angle (RCA) is set positive if the operating current lags the polarizing
quantity and negative if the operating current leads the polarizing quantity.
238 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-18902907-5666-4AB6-80FD-BE875DFCBBD6-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 115: Configurable operating sectors
Table 237: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view
Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C
The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined sectors, or 0 = unknown
the direction cannot be defined due too low
amplitude
The ANGLE_X is in the forward sector 1 = forward
The ANGLE_X is in the reverse sector 2 = backward
(The ANGLE_X is in both forward and reverse 3 = both
sectors, that is, when the sectors are overlapping)
615 series ANSI 239

Technical Manual
Table 238: Momentary phase combined direction value for monitored data view
Criterion for phase combined direction information The value for DIRECTION
The direction information (DIR_X) for all phases is 0 = unknown
unknown
The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one 1 = forward
phase is forward, none being in reverse
The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one 2 = backward
phase is reverse, none being in forward
The direction information (DIR_X) for some phase is 3 = both
forward and for some phase is reverse
FAULT_DIR gives the detected direction of the fault during fault situations, that is, when
the PICKUP output is active.
Self-polarizing as polarizing method

Table 239: Equations for calculating angle difference for self-polarizing method
Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference
phases current polarizing
voltage
A IA VA ANGLE _ A = ϕ (V A ) - ϕ ( I A ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-97073FAF-B617-4ECD-A4E9-752AFA1F7B89-ANSI V1 EN
B IB VB ANGLE _ B = ϕ (V B ) - ϕ ( I B ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-624E8145-C8F3-4831-A45C-AD47D4A77A83-ANSI V1 EN
C IC VC ANGLE _ C = ϕ (V C ) - ϕ ( I C ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-7E8BA4E2-4CAE-453C-ADEA-D0BF05EE3ED8-ANSI V1 EN
A-B IA - IB VAB ANGLE _ A = ϕ (V AB ) - ϕ ( I A - I B ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-90E82618-DEB6-4949-A968-C2FE034FBE79-ANSI V1 EN
B-C IB - IC VBC ANGLE _ B = ϕ (V BC ) - ϕ ( I B - I C ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-CC92DF0C-402E-4FAE-AC8A-16C35594ED9F-ANSI V1 EN
C-A IC - IA VCA ANGLE _ C = ϕ (V CA ) - ϕ ( I C - I A ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-475F1BB1-9A6F-4A5B-8FFC-7FA14117537D-ANSI V1 EN
In an example case of the phasors in a single-phase ground fault where the faulted phase
is phase A, the angle difference between the polarizing quantity VA and operating quantity
IA is marked as φ. In the self-polarization method, there is no need to rotate the polarizing
quantity.
240 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-FF99F2A3-811A-4DAD-85E0-23AEC4C57183-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 116: Single-phase ground fault, phase A
In an example case of a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between phases
B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity VBC and
operating quantity IB - IC in the self-polarizing method.
GUID-7CBA5DD4-CABC-4365-A4E3-4B5F73527ECA-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 117: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C
615 series ANSI 241

Technical Manual
Cross-polarizing as polarizing quantity

Table 240: Equations for calculating angle difference for cross-polarizing method
Faulted Used Used Angle difference
phases fault polarizing
current voltage
A IA VBC
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (V BC ) - ϕ ( I A ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-330CBC28-7CE9-431A-9EC2-8590092DDAFF-ANSI V1 EN
B IB VCA
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (V CA ) - ϕ ( I B ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-3D93A608-FA6D-4F3E-9264-19776122A8E1-ANSI V1 EN
C IC VAB
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (V AB ) - ϕ ( I C ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-03176C00-8F5C-4791-A92C-9DBC0BA47EBF-ANSI V1 EN
A-B IA - IB VBC - VCA

ANGLE _ A = ϕ (V BC - V CA ) - ϕ ( I A - I B ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-FA1C82F1-94F6-4669-8303-D465948F0611-ANSI V1 EN
B-C IB - IC VCA - VAB

ANGLE _ B = ϕ (V CA - V AB ) - ϕ ( I B - I C ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-6D5785FC-2D25-48F9-B5D6-BD4E12A440E8-ANSI V1 EN
C-A IC - IA VAB - VBC

ANGLE _ C = ϕ (V AB - V BC ) - ϕ ( I C - I A ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-B1524B24-5D74-4E0F-9432-7D19AC5A18C3-ANSI V1 EN
The angle difference between the polarizing quantity VBC and operating quantity IA is
marked as φ in an example of the phasors in a single-phase ground fault where the faulted
phase is phase A. The polarizing quantity is rotated with 90 degrees. The characteristic
angle is assumed to be ~ 0 degrees.
242 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-56AF9F5B-BFEA-4775-865F-2C76D9D3BCCC-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 118: Single-phase ground fault, phase A
In an example of the phasors in a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between
the phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity VAB
and operating quantity IB - IC marked as φ.
615 series ANSI 243

Technical Manual
GUID-8D3A8A1A-C78B-46F7-A102-DCB1A6BD60D6-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 119: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C
The equations are valid when network rotating direction is counter-

clockwise, that is, ABC. If the network rotating direction is reversed, 180
degrees is added to the calculated angle difference. This is done
automatically with a system parameter Phase rotation.
244 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Negative sequence voltage as polarizing quantity

When the negative voltage is used as the polarizing quantity, the angle difference between
the operating and polarizing quantity is calculated with the same formula for all fault
types:
ANGLE _ X = ϕ (−V 2) − ϕ ( I 2) − ϕ RCA

GUID-7AC132D5-033D-468F-ADB6-7E04C3C7E153-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 5)
This means that the actuating polarizing quantity is -V2.
GUID-41DF2169-686B-4564-98D5-B09F7F6BBEA0-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 120: Phasors in a single-phase ground fault, phases A-N, and two-phase short
circuit, phases B and C, when the actuating polarizing quantity is the
negative-sequence voltage -V2
Positive sequence voltage as polarizing quantity

Table 241: Equations for calculating angle difference for positive-sequence quantity polarizing method
voltage
A IA V1 ANGLE _ A = ϕ (V 1) − ϕ ( I A ) − ϕ RCA
GUID-7BCB8B12-2484-49AD-92A3-839A39BE5D01-ANSI V1 EN
B IB V1
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (V 1) − ϕ ( I B ) − ϕ RCA − 120o
GUID-E4D7718C-A73E-46C6-89A6-8EEFDBEAB046-ANSI V1 EN
C IC V1
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (V 1) − ϕ ( I C ) − ϕ RCA + 120o
GUID-6BCAA5DE-778A-4623-B196-2433045A5B2A-ANSI V1 EN
615 series ANSI 245

Technical Manual

voltage
A-B IA - IB V1
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (V 1) − ϕ ( I A − I B ) − ϕ RCA + 30o
GUID-D510F5F5-D43B-4D35-8963-CDFA325D8036-ANSI V1 EN
B-C IB - IC V1
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (V 1) − ϕ ( I B − I C ) − ϕ RCA − 90o
GUID-59B67A43-4CE8-45F6-9D2F-F7177CDC7605-ANSI V1 EN
C-A IC - IA V1
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (V 1) − ϕ ( I C − I A ) − ϕ RCA + 150o
GUID-FD2EB060-2CB9-49FE-96A8-4E10384AFF95-ANSI V1 EN
VA
IA V1
V1
VA
-90°
IA
IB - Ic
-IC
IB
IB IC
IC
VC VB
VC VB
A B
GUID-75629DC6-2382-4B00-AB14-1A37836DE736-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 121: Phasors in a single-phase ground fault, phase A to ground, and a two-
phase short circuit, phases B-C, are short-circuited when the polarizing
quantity is the positive-sequence voltage V1
Network rotation direction

Typically, the network rotating direction is counter-clockwise and defined as "ABC". If
the network rotating direction is reversed, meaning clockwise, that is, "ACB", the
equations for calculating the angle difference needs to be changed. The network rotating
direction is defined with a system parameter Phase rotation. The change in the network
rotating direction affects the phase-to-phase voltages polarization method where the
calculated angle difference needs to be rotated 180 degrees. Also, when the sequence
components are used, which are, the positive sequence voltage or negative sequence
voltage components, the calculation of the components are affected but the angle
difference calculation remains the same. When the phase-to-ground voltages are used as
the polarizing method, the network rotating direction change has no effect on the direction
calculation.
246 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The network rotating direction is set in the protection relay using the
parameter in the HMI menu Configuration/System/Phase rotation. The
default parameter value is "ABC".
NETWORK ROTATION ABC NETWORK ROTATION ACB
VA VA
IA IA
VCA VAB VAB VCA
IB IC
IC IB
VC VBC VB VB VBC VC
GUID-BF32C1D4-ECB5-4E96-A27A-05C637D32C86-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 122: Examples of network rotating direction
4.1.2.7 Application
67/51P, 67/50P is used as short-circuit protection in three-phase distribution or sub

transmission networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz.
In radial networks, phase overcurrent protection relays are often sufficient for the short
circuit protection of lines, transformers and other equipment. The current-time
characteristic should be chosen according to the common practice in the network. It is
recommended to use the same current-time characteristic for all overcurrent protection
relays in the network. This includes the overcurrent protection of transformers and other
equipment.
The phase overcurrent protection can also be used in closed ring systems as short circuit
protection. Because the setting of a phase overcurrent protection system in closed ring
networks can be complicated, a large number of fault current calculations are needed.
There are situations with no possibility to have the selectivity with a protection system
based on overcurrent protection relays in a closed ring system.
In some applications, the possibility of obtaining the selectivity can be improved

significantly if 67/51P, 67/50P is used. This can also be done in the closed ring networks
and radial networks with the generation connected to the remote in the system thus giving
fault current infeed in reverse direction. Directional overcurrent protection relays are also
615 series ANSI 247

Technical Manual
used to have a selective protection scheme, for example in case of parallel distribution
lines or power transformers fed by the same single source.In ring connected supply
feeders between substations or feeders with two feeding sources, 67/51P, 67/50P is also
used.
Parallel lines or transformers

When the lines are connected in parallel and if a fault occurs in one of the lines, it is
practical to have 67/51P, 67/50P to detect the direction of the fault. Otherwise, there is a
risk that the fault situation in one part of the feeding system can de-energize the whole
system connected to the LV side.
GUID-E92DF9EA-D7AD-4866-B426-08533D5E2973-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 123: Overcurrent protection of parallel lines using directional protection relays
67/51P, 67/50P can be used for parallel operating transformer applications. In these
applications, there is a possibility that the fault current can also be fed from the LV-side
up to the HV-side. Therefore, the transformer is also equipped with directional
overcurrent protection.
248 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-1845C47B-BA8C-4F85-9E7D-DC6872D3AB8B-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 124: Overcurrent protection of parallel operating transformers
Closed ring network topology

The closed ring network topology is used in applications where electricity distribution for
the consumers is secured during network fault situations. The power is fed at least from
two directions which means that the current direction can be varied. The time grading
between the network level stages is challenging without unnecessary delays in the time
settings. In this case, it is practical to use the directional overcurrent protection relays to
achieve a selective protection scheme. Directional overcurrent functions can be used in
closed ring applications. The arrows define the operating direction of the directional
functionality. The double arrows define the non-directional functionality where faults can
be detected in both directions.
615 series ANSI 249

Technical Manual
GUID-FA46F951-B376-4BC7-BCF4-F970C876CA7A-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 125: Closed ring network topology where feeding lines are protected with
directional overcurrent protection relays
4.1.2.8 Signals
Table 242: 67/51P Input signals
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence current
V_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage A or phase to phase voltage AB

V_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage B or phase to phase voltage BC
V_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage C or phase to phase voltage
CA
V1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase sequence voltage
V2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence voltage
NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional
250 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 243: 67/50P Input signals


CA
NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional
Table 244: 67/51P Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
Table 245: 67/50P Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.1.2.9 Settings
Table 246: 67/51P Group settings (Basic)
615 series ANSI 251

Technical Manual

2=ANSI Very Inv
3=ANSI Norm Inv
4=ANSI Mod Inv
5=ANSI DT
6=LT Ext Inv
7=LT Very Inv
8=LT Inv
9=IEC Norm Inv
10=IEC Very Inv
11=IEC Inv
12=IEC Ext Inv
13=IEC ST Inv
14=IEC LT Inv
15=IEC DT
17=Programmable
18=RI Type
19=RD Type
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Characteristic angle -179...180 deg 1 60 Characteristic angle
Max forward angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in forward direction
Max reverse angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse direction
Min forward angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in forward direction
Min reverse angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction
Table 247: 67/51P Group settings (Advanced)

2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Voltage Mem time 0...3000 ms 1 40 Voltage memory time
Pol quantity 1=Self pol 5=Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine fault
4=Neg. seq. volt. direction
5=Cross pol
7=Pos. seq. volt.
252 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 248: 67/51P Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
2=2 out of 3
3=3 out of 3
curve
curve
curve
curve
curve
Table 249: 67/51P Non group settings (Advanced)

2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Allow Non Dir 0=False 0=False Allows prot activation as non-dir when dir info is
1=True invalid
Min trip current 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.01 Minimum trip current
Min trip voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.01 Minimum trip voltage
Table 250: 67/50P Group settings (Basic)

2=Forward
3=Reverse
615 series ANSI 253

Technical Manual

3=ANSI Norm Inv
5=ANSI DT
9=IEC Norm Inv
10=IEC Very Inv
12=IEC Ext Inv
15=IEC DT
17=Programmable
Characteristic angle -179...180 deg 1 60 Characteristic angle
Table 251: 67/50P Group settings (Advanced)

2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Voltage Mem time 0...3000 ms 1 40 Voltage memory time
Pol quantity 1=Self pol 5=Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine fault
5=Cross pol
7=Pos. seq. volt.
Table 252: 67/50P Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
curve
curve
curve
curve
curve
2=2 out of 3
3=3 out of 3
254 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 253: 67/50P Non group settings (Advanced)

1=True invalid
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak

Table 254: 67/51P Monitored data
FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIRECTION Enum 0=unknown Direction information
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_A Enum 0=unknown Direction phase A
1=forward
2=backward
-1=both
DIR_B Enum 0=unknown Direction phase B
1=forward
2=backward
-1=both
DIR_C Enum 0=unknown Direction phase C
1=forward
2=backward
-1=both
ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle difference,
Phase A
ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle difference,
Phase B
615 series ANSI 255

Technical Manual

ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle difference,
Phase C
VMEM_USED BOOLEAN 0=False Voltage memory in use status
1=True
67/51P Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Table 255: 67/50P Monitored data

1=forward
2=backward
3=both
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_A Enum 0=unknown Direction phase A
1=forward
2=backward
-1=both
DIR_B Enum 0=unknown Direction phase B
1=forward
2=backward
-1=both
DIR_C Enum 0=unknown Direction phase C
1=forward
2=backward
-1=both
ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle difference,
Phase A
ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle difference,
Phase B
ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle difference,
Phase C
VMEM_USED BOOLEAN 0=False Voltage memory in use status
1=True
67/50P Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
256 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 256: 67/51P, 67/50P Technical data
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current/voltage
measured: fn ±2 Hz
67/51P Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
Voltage:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Vn
Phase angle: ±2°
67/50P Current:
(at currents in the range of 0.1…10 × In)
±5.0% of the set value
Voltage:
Phase angle: ±2°
Pickup time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

IFault = 2.0 × set Pickup 39 ms 43 ms 47 ms
value
Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms3)
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
1) Measurement mode and Pol quantity = default, current before fault = 0.0 × In, voltage before fault = 1.0 ×
Vn, fn = 50 Hz, fault current in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results
based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
3) Maximum Pickup value = 2.5 × In,Pickup value multiples in range of 1.5...20

Table 257: 67/50P Technical revision history
B Added a new input NON_DIR

multiplier setting.
D Monitored data VMEM_USED indicating voltage
memory use.
E Internal improvement.
615 series ANSI 257

Technical Manual
Table 258: 67/51P Technical revision history

B Added a new input NON_DIR

multiplier setting.
D Monitored data VMEM_USED indicating voltage
memory use.
4.1.3 Three-phase voltage-dependent overcurrent protection 51V
Three-phase voltage-dependent PHPVOC 3I(U)> 51V
overcurrent protection
51V
I_A TRIP
I_B PICKUP
I_C
V_AB
V_BC
V_CA
BLOCK
ENA_MULT
ENA_U_MULT
GUID-6290E1B0-0380-40DD-A5AF-60D789C30DF2 V1 EN
The three-phase voltage-dependent overcurrent protection function 51V is used for

single-phase, two-phase or three-phase voltage-dependent time overcurrent protection of
generators against overcurrent and short circuit conditions.
The function picks up when the input phase current exceeds a limit which is dynamically
calculated based on the measured terminal voltages. The operating characteristics can be
selected to be either inverse definite minimum time IDMT or definite time DT.
258 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

parameter values are "Enable" and "Disable".
The operation of 51V can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
I_A
Phase Timer
I_B Level
selection
I_C detector t TRIP
logic
ENA_MULT
V_AB Effective
V_BC pickup t PICKUP
V_CA value
ENA_V_MULT calculator
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-6216276B-61C3-498C-9E59-6ECB920E84D9 V1 EN
Effective pickup value calculator

The normal pickup current above which the overcurrent protection picks up is set through
the Pickup value setting. The Effective pickup value of the current may need to be changed
during certain conditions like magnetizing inrush or when the terminal voltages drop due
to a fault. Hence, the effective pickup value calculator module dynamically calculates the
effective pickup value above which the overcurrent protection picks up.
Four methods of calculating the effective pickup value are provided in 51V. These can be
chosen with the Control mode setting to be either "Voltage control", "Input control", "Volt
& Input Ctrl" or "No Volt dependency".
The calculated effective pickup value per phase, EFF_ST_VAL_A, EFF_ST_VAL_B,

EFF_ST_VAL_C, is available in the Monitored data view and is used by the Level
detector module.
All three phase-to-phase voltages should be available for the function to

operate properly.
615 series ANSI 259

Technical Manual
Voltage control mode

In the Voltage control mode, the Effective pickup value is calculated based on the
magnitude of input voltages V_AB, V_BC and V_CA. The voltage dependency is phase
sensitive, which means that the magnitude of one input voltage controls the pickup value
of only the corresponding phase, that is, the magnitude of voltage inputs V_AB, V_BC and
V_CA independently control the current pickup values of phases A, B and C.
Two voltage control characteristics, voltage step and voltage slope, can be achieved with
the Voltage high limit and Voltage low limit settings.
The voltage step characteristic is achieved when the Voltage high limit setting is equal to
the Voltage low limit setting. The effective pickup value is calculated based on the
equations.
Voltage level Effective pickup value (I> effective)
V < Voltage high limit Pickup value low
V ≥ Voltage high limit Pickup value
In this example, V represents the measured input voltage. This voltage step characteristic
is graphically represented in Figure.
Effective
pickup value
Pickup value
Pickup value low
Voltage high limit = V

Voltage low limit
GUID-D4FB20C7-61E4-4BF0-9F3F-B86FE500FFAE V1 EN
Figure 128: Effective pickup value for voltage step characteristic
260 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The voltage slope characteristic is achieved by assigning different values to Voltage high
limit and Voltage low limit. The effective pickup value calculation is based on the
equations.
Voltage level Effective pickup value (I> effective)
V < Voltage low limit Pickup value low
V ≥ Voltage high limit Pickup value
If Voltage low limit ≤ V < Voltage high limit,
 A − I >  
I > (effective) = A −   ⋅ (C − V ) 
 C − D  
GUID-4236A6A6-504B-4A1B-B91D-263066A187B4 V1 EN (Equation 6)
A set Pickup value low

I> set Pickup value
C set Voltage high limit
D set Voltage low limit
Here V represents the measured input voltage. The voltage slope characteristic is
graphically represented.
Starting
current
Pickup value
Pickup value low
Voltage Voltage
low limit high limit V
GUID-E3667B8C-7352-4970-BE53-56EA702DAA47 V1 EN
Figure 129: Effective pickup value or voltage slope characteristic
615 series ANSI 261

Technical Manual
To achieve the voltage slope characteristics, Voltage high limit must

always be set to a value greater than Voltage low limit.
If Voltage high limit is lower than Voltage low limit, the voltage step
characteristic is active with Voltage low limit being the cutoff value.
The value of the setting Pickup value should always be greater than the
setting Pickup value low. Otherwise, Pickup value low is used as the
effective pickup value.
External input control mode

The External input control mode is used to enable voltage control from an external
application. If Control mode is set to the "Input Control" mode, the effective pickup value
for all phases is influenced by the status of the binary input ENA_V_MULT.
If ENA_V_MULT is TRUE:
Effective pickup value = Pickup value
e low
GUID-6FAAB486-772A-4A2D-A267-87C3778F2175 V1 EN (Equation 7)
If ENA_V_MULT is FALSE:
Effective pickup value = Pickup valu
ue
GUID-32BD51B9-7EE5-4FCB-B576-709044E6E188 V1 EN (Equation 8)
Voltage and input control mode

If Control mode is set to "Voltage and input Ctrl", both the "Voltage control" and "Input
control" modes are used. However, the “Input control” functionality is dominant over the
“Voltage control” mode when ENA_V_MULT is active.
No voltage dependency mode

When Control mode is set to "No Volt dependency", the effective pickup value has no
voltage dependency and the function acts as a normal time overcurrent function with
effective pickup value being equal to the Pickup value setting.
Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the calculated effective pickup
value. If the measured value exceeds the calculated effective pickup value, the Level
detector reports the exceeding value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input
is active, the effective pickup value is multiplied by the Pickup value Mult setting.
262 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Do not set the multiplier Pickup value Mult setting higher than necessary.
If the value is too high, the function may not trip at all during an inrush
followed by a fault, no matter how severe the fault is.
The pickup value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function INR
is connected to the ENA_MULT input.

phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting. If the phase
information matches the Num of pickup phases setting, the phase selection logic activates
the Timer module.
Timer
Once activated, the Timer module activates the PICKUP output.
Depending on the value of the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are
according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Trip delay
time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the TRIP
output is activated.
When the user programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics
are defined by the settings Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C,
Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.
In a drop-off situation, that is, when a fault suddenly disappears before the trip delay is
exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the Timer in the reset state

situation.
The Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT trip and reset times.
615 series ANSI 263

Technical Manual
The Minimum trip time setting defines the minimum desired trip time for IDMT operation.
The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.
Though the Time multiplier and Minimum trip time settings are common
for different IDMT curves, the trip time essentially depends upon the type
of IDMT curve chosen.
The Timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the
percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time. This output is available in the
Monitored data view.
Blocking logic
controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration/System/Blocking
operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all" mode, the whole
function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block TRIP output" mode, the function
operates normally but the TRIP output is not activated.
4.1.3.5 Application
The three-phase voltage-dependent overcurrent protection is used as a backup protection

for the generators and system from damage due to the phase faults which are not cleared
by primary protection and associated breakers.
In case of a short circuit, the sustained fault current of the generator, determined by the
machine synchronous reactance, could be below the full-load current. If the generator
excitation power is fed from the generator terminals, a voltage drop caused by a short
circuit also leads to low fault current. The primary protection, like normal overcurrent
protection, might not detect this kind of fault situation. In some cases, the automatic
voltage regulator AVR can help to maintain high fault currents by controlling the
generator excitation system. If the AVR is out of service or if there is an internal fault in
the operation of AVR, the low fault currents can go unnoticed and therefore a voltage-
depended overcurrent protection should be used for backup.
Two voltage control characteristics, voltage step and voltage slope, are available in 51V.
The choice is made based on the system conditions and the level of protection to be
provided.
264 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Voltage step characteristic is applied to generators used in industrial systems. Under

close-up fault conditions when the generator terminal voltages drop below the settable
threshold value, a new pickup value of the current, well below the normal load current, is
selected. The control voltage setting should ensure that 51V does not trip under the highest
loading conditions to which the system can be subjected. Choosing too high a value for the
control voltage may allow an undesired tripping of the function during wide-area
disturbances. When the terminal voltage of the generator is above the control voltage
value, the normal pickup value is used. This ensures that 51V does not trip during normal
overloads when the generator terminal voltages are maintained near the normal levels.
Voltage slope characteristic is often used as an alternative to impedance protection on

small to medium (5...150 MVA) size generators to provide backup to the differential
protection. Other applications of the voltage slope characteristic protection exist in
networks to provide better coordination and fault detection than plain overcurrent
protection. The voltage slope method provides an improved sensitivity of overcurrent
operation by making the overcurrent pickup value proportional to the terminal voltage.
The current pickup value varies correspondingly with the generator terminal voltages
between the set voltage high limit and voltage low limit, ensuring the operation of 51V
despite the drop in fault current value.
The operation of 51V should be time-graded with respect to the main protection scheme
to ensure that 51V does not trip before the main protection.
4.1.3.6 Signals
Table 259: 51V Input signals
V_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-phase voltage AB
V_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-phase voltage BC
V_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-phase voltage CA
ENA_LOW_LIM BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for voltage dependent lower pickup value
Table 260: 51V Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
615 series ANSI 265

Technical Manual
4.1.3.7 Settings
Table 261: 51V Group settings (Basic)
Pickup value low 0.05...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.05 Lower pickup value based on voltage control
Voltage high limit 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 1.00 Voltage high limit for voltage control
Voltage low limit 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 1.00 Voltage low limit for voltage control
2=ANSI Very Inv
3=ANSI Norm Inv
4=ANSI Mod Inv
5=ANSI DT
6=LT Ext Inv
7=LT Very Inv
8=LT Inv
9=IEC Norm Inv
10=IEC Very Inv
11=IEC Inv
12=IEC Ext Inv
13=IEC ST Inv
14=IEC LT Inv
15=IEC DT
17=Programmable
18=RI Type
19=RD Type
Table 262: 51V Group settings (Advanced)

2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Table 263: 51V Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
2=2 out of 3
3=3 out of 3
curve
266 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

curve
curve
curve
curve
Table 264: 51V Non group settings (Advanced)

2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Control mode 1=Voltage control 1=Voltage control Type of control
2=Input control
3=Voltage and
input Ctl
4=No Volt
dependency

Table 265: 51V Monitored data
EFF_ST_VAL_A FLOAT32 0.00...50.00 xIn Effective pickup value for
phase A
EFF_ST_VAL_B FLOAT32 0.00...50.00 xIn Effective pickup value for
phase B
EFF_ST_VAL_C FLOAT32 0.00...50.00 xIn Effective pickup value for
phase C
51V Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
615 series ANSI 267

Technical Manual

Table 266: 51V Technical data
current and voltage:
fn ±2 Hz
Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ± 0.002 × In
Voltage:
Pickup time1)2) Typically 26 ms

Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
1) Measurement mode = default, current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, fault current in one phase with
nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements
4.1.4 Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and

distribution transformers 49F
Three-phase thermal protection for T1PTTR 3Ith>F 49F
feeders, cables and distribution
transformers
268 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
49F
I_A TRIP
I_B PICKUP
I_C ALARM
ENA_MULT BLK_CLOSE
BLK_OPR
AMB_TEMP
GUID-8E72B316-4C05-468D-B691-D3A654CAE834 V1 EN
The increased utilization of power systems closer to the thermal limits has generated a
need for a thermal overload function for power lines as well.
A thermal overload is in some cases not detected by other protection functions, and the
introduction of the three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and distribution
transformers function 49F allows the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal
limits.
An alarm level gives an early warning to allow operators to take action before the line
trips. The early warning is based on the three-phase current measuring function using a
thermal model with first order thermal loss with the settable time constant. If the
temperature rise continues the function operates based on the thermal model of the line.
Re-energizing of the line after the thermal overload operation can be inhibited during the
time the cooling of the line is in progress. The cooling of the line is estimated by the
thermal model.
The operation of 49F can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
The function uses ambient temperature which can be measured locally or remotely. Local
measurement is done by the protection relay. Remote measurement uses analog GOOSE
to connect AMB_TEMP input.
615 series ANSI 269

Technical Manual
If the quality of remotely measured temperature is invalid or

communication channel fails the function uses ambient temperature set in
Env temperature Set.
A070747-ANSI V2 EN
Max current selector

The max current selector of the function continuously checks the highest measured TRMS
phase current value. The selector reports the highest value to the temperature estimator.
Temperature estimator
The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents
according to the expression:
2
 I 
Θ final =  ⋅ Tref
 I ref 
 
A070780 V2 EN (Equation 9)
I the largest phase current

Iref set Current reference
Tref set Temperature rise
The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature rise estimation, and
the ambient temperature value used in the calculation is also available in the monitored
data as TEMP_AMB in degrees. If the final temperature estimation is larger than the set
Maximum temperature, the PICKUP output is activated.
Current reference and Temperature raise setting values are used in the final temperature
estimation together with the ambient temperature. It is suggested to set these values to the
maximum steady state current allowed for the line or cable under emergency operation for
a few hours per years. Current values with the corresponding conductor temperatures are
given in cable manuals. These values are given for conditions such as ground
270 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
temperatures, ambient air temperature, the way of cable laying and ground thermal
resistivity.
Thermal counter
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
 ∆t 
−
(
Θn = Θn −1 + Θ final − Θn −1 ) 
⋅ 1− e τ 
 
 
Θn calculated present temperature
Θn-1 calculated temperature at previous time step
Θfinal calculated final temperature with actual current
Δt time step between calculation of actual temperature

t thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable), set Time constant
The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by adding
the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The ambient
temperature can be given a constant value or it can be measured. The calculated
component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real
figure.
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level Alarm value, the output
signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level Maximum
temperature, the TRIP output is activated. The TRIP signal pulse length is fixed to 100
ms.
There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:
 Θ − Θtrip 
ttrip = −τ ⋅ ln  final 
 Θfinal − Θn 
A070782-ANSI V2 EN (Equation 11)
Caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout to reconnect
the tripped circuit after operating. The lockout output BLK_CLOSE is activated at the
same time when the TRIP output is activated and is not reset until the device temperature
has cooled down below the set value of the Reclose temperature setting. The Maximum
temperature value must be set at least two degrees above the set value of Reclose
temperature.
615 series ANSI 271

Technical Manual
The time to lockout release is calculated, that is, the calculation of the cooling time to a set
value. The calculated temperature can be reset to its initial value (the Initial temperature
setting) via a control parameter that is located under the clear menu. This is useful during
testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.
 Θ final −Θlockout _ release 

tlockout _ release = −τ ⋅ ln  
 Θ final − Θn 
 
Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature.
In some applications, the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This is
often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the
Current multiplier parameter to the number of parallel lines (cables), the actual current on
one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option, the ENA_MULT input
must be activated.
The ambient temperature can be measured with the RTD measurement. The measured
temperature value is then connected, for example, from the AI_VAL3 output of the X130
(RTD) function to the AMB_TEMP input of 49F.
The Env temperature set setting is used to define the ambient temperature if the ambient
temperature measurement value is not connected to the AMB_TEMP input. The Env
temperature set setting is also used when the ambient temperature measurement
connected to 49F is set to “Not in use” in the X130 (RTD) function.
The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined with the Initial
temperature setting parameter. This is done in case the protection relay is powered up, the
function is disabled and enabled back or reset through the Clear menu. The temperature is
also stored in the nonvolatile memory and restored in case the protection relay is restarted.
The thermal time constant of the protected circuit is given in seconds with the Time
constant setting. Please see cable manufacturers manuals for further details.
49F thermal model complies with the IEC 60255-149 standard.
4.1.4.5 Application
The lines and cables in the power system are constructed for a certain maximum load
current level. If the current exceeds this level, the losses will be higher than expected. As
a consequence, the temperature of the conductors will increase. If the temperature of the
272 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
lines and cables reaches too high values, it can cause a risk of damages by, for example,
the following ways:
• The sag of overhead lines can reach an unacceptable value.
• If the temperature of conductors, for example aluminium conductors, becomes too
high, the material will be destroyed.
• Overheating can damage the insulation on cables which in turn increases the risk of
phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground faults.
In stressed situations in the power system, the lines and cables may be required to be
overloaded for a limited time. This should be done without any risk for the above-
mentioned risks.
The thermal overload protection provides information that makes temporary overloading
of cables and lines possible. The thermal overload protection estimates the conductor
temperature continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the line/
cable that is based on the current measurement.
If the temperature of the protected object reaches a set warning level, a signal is given to
the operator. This enables actions in the power system to be done before dangerous
temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to the maximum
allowed temperature value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected line.
4.1.4.6 Signals
Table 267: 49F Input signals
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable Current multiplier
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for trip outputs
AMB_TEMP FLOAT32 0 The ambient temperature used in the calculation
Table 268: 49F Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
ALARM BOOLEAN Thermal Alarm
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator. To inhibite reclose.
615 series ANSI 273

Technical Manual
4.1.4.7 Settings
Table 269: 49F Group settings (Basic)
Env temperature set -50...100 °C 1 40 Ambient temperature used when AmbiSens is
set to Off
Current reference 0.05...4.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 The load current leading to Temperature raise
temperature
Temperature raise 0.0...200.0 °C 0.1 75.0 End temperature rise above ambient
Time constant 60...60000 s 1 2700 Time constant of the line in seconds.
Maximum temperature 20.0...200.0 °C 0.1 90.0 Temperature level for trip
Alarm value 20.0...150.0 °C 0.1 80.0 Temperature level for pickup (alarm)
Reclose temperature 20.0...150.0 °C 0.1 70.0 Temperature for reset of block reclose after trip
Table 270: 49F Group settings (Advanced)

Current multiplier 1...5 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used for
parallel lines
Table 271: 49F Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 272: 49F Non group settings (Advanced)

Initial temperature -50.0...100.0 °C 0.1 0.0 Temperature raise above ambient temperature
at startup

Table 273: 49F Monitored data
TEMP FLOAT32 -100.0...9999.9 °C The calculated temperature of
the protected object
TEMP_RL FLOAT32 0.00...99.99 The calculated temperature of
the trip level
T_TRIP INT32 0...60000 s Estimated time to trip
274 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

T_ENA_CLOSE INT32 0...60000 s Estimated time to deactivate
BLK_CLOSE
TEMP_AMB FLOAT32 -99...999 °C The ambient temperature
used in the calculation
49F Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 274: 49F Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz
Current measurement: ±1.5% of the set value or

±0.002 × In (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 ×
In)
Trip time accuracy1) ±2.0% of the theoretical value or ±0.50 s
1) Overload current > 1.2 × Trip level temperature

Table 275: 49F Technical revision history
C Removed the Sensor available setting parameter
D Added the AMB_TEMP input
F Internal improvement.
4.1.5 Three-phase thermal overload protection, two time constants

49T
Three-phase thermal overload T2PTTR 3Ith>T/G/C 49T
protection, two time constants
615 series ANSI 275

Technical Manual
GUID-68AADF30-9DC7-49D5-8C77-14E774C8D1AF-ANSI V2 EN
The three-phase thermal overload, two time constants, protection function 49T protects
the transformer mainly from short-time overloads. The transformer is protected from
long-time overloads with the oil temperature detector included in its equipment.
The alarm signal gives an early warning to allow the operators to take action before the
transformer trips. The early warning is based on the three-phase current measuring
function using a thermal model with two settable time constants. If the temperature rise
continues, 49T operates based on the thermal model of the transformer.
After a thermal overload operation, the re-energizing of the transformer is inhibited during
the transformer cooling time. The transformer cooling is estimated with a thermal model.
The operation of 49T can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the

276 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-FF965F1C-6039-4A01-9A4F-B378F8356279-ANSI V2 EN

The max current selector of the function continuously checks the highest measured TRMS
phase current value. The selector reports the highest value to the thermal estimator.
Temperature estimator
The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents
according to the expression:
2
 I 
Θ final =  ⋅ Tref
 I ref 
 
GUID-06DE6459-E94A-4FC7-8357-CA58988CEE97 V2 EN (Equation 13)
I highest measured phase current

Iref the set value of the Current reference setting
Tref the set value of the Temperature rise setting (temperature rise (°C) with the steady-state current Iref
The ambient temperature value is added to the calculated final temperature rise
estimation. If the total value of temperature is higher than the set trip temperature level, the
PICKUP output is activated.
The Current reference setting is a steady-state current that gives the steady-state end
temperature value Temperature rise. It gives a setting value corresponding to the rated
power of the transformer.
The Temperature rise setting is used when the value of the reference temperature rise
corresponds to the Current reference value. The temperature values with the
corresponding transformer load currents are usually given by transformer manufacturers.
615 series ANSI 277

Technical Manual
Thermal counter
49T applies the thermal model of two time constants for temperature measurement. The
temperature rise in degrees Celsius (°C) is calculated from the highest of the three-phase
currents according to the expression:
  2   ∆t 2 ∆t 
I  −      
 ⋅  1 − e τ 1  + (1 − p ) ⋅  I
−
∆Θ =  p *   * Tref  ⋅ Tref  ⋅ 1 − e τ 2 
  I ref       I ref    
           
GUID-27A879A9-AF94-4BC3-BAA1-501189F6DE0C V2 EN (Equation 14)
ΔΘ calculated temperature rise (°C) in transformer

I measured phase current with the highest TRMS value
Iref the set value of the Current reference setting (rated current of the protected object)
Tref the set value of the Temperature rise setting (temperature rise setting (°C) with the steady-state current
Iref)
p the set value of the Weighting factor p setting (weighting factor for the short time constant)
Δt time step between the calculation of the actual temperature
t1 the set value of the Short time constant setting (the short heating / cooling time constant)
t2 the set value of the Long time constant setting (the long heating / cooling time constant)
The warming and cooling following the two time-constant thermal curve is a
characteristic of transformers. The thermal time constants of the protected transformer are
given in seconds with the Short time constant and Long time constant settings. The Short
time constant setting describes the warming of the transformer with respect to windings.
The Long time constant setting describes the warming of the transformer with respect to
the oil. Using the two time-constant model, the protection relay is able to follow both fast
and slow changes in the temperature of the protected object.
The Weighting factor p setting is the weighting factor between Short time constant τ1 and
Long time constant τ2. The higher the value of the Weighting factor p setting, the larger is
the share of the steep part of the heating curve. When Weighting factor p =1, only Short-
time constant is used. When Weighting factor p = 0, only Long time constant is used.
278 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-E040FFF4-7FE3-4736-8E5F-D96DB1F1B16B V1 EN
Figure 134: Effect of the Weighting factor p factor and the difference between the two
time constants and one time constant models
The actual temperature of the transformer is calculated by adding the ambient temperature
to the calculated temperature.
Θ = ∆Θ + Θ amb
GUID-77E49346-66D2-4CAB-A764-E81D6F382E74 V2 EN (Equation 15)
Θ temperature in transformer (°C)

ΔΘ calculated temperature rise (°C) in transformer
Θamb set value of the Env temperature Set setting or measured ambient temperature
The ambient temperature can be measured with RTD measurement. The measured
temperature value is connected, for example, from the AI_VAL3 output of the X130
(RTD) function to the AMB_TEMP input of 49T.
The Env temperature Set setting is used to define the ambient temperature if the ambient
temperature measurement value is not connected to the AMB_TEMP input. The Env
temperature Set setting is also used when the ambient temperature measurement
connected to 49T is set to “Not in use” in the X130 (RTD) function.
615 series ANSI 279

Technical Manual
The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined with the Initial
temperature and Max temperature setting parameters. The initial value is a percentage of
Max temperature defined by Initial temperature. This is done when the protection relay
is powered up or the function is disabled and then enabled or reset through the Clear menu.
The temperature is stored in a nonvolatile memory and restored if the protection relay is
restarted.
The Max temperature setting defines the maximum temperature of the transformer in
degrees Celsius (°C). The value of the Max temperature setting is usually given by
transformer manufacturers. The actual alarm, trip and lockout temperatures for 49T are
given as a percentage value of the Max temperature setting.
When the transformer temperature reaches the alarm level defined with the Alarm
temperature setting, the ALARM output signal is set. When the transformer temperature
reaches the trip level value defined with the Trip temperature setting, the TRIP output is
activated. The TRIP output is deactivated when the value of the measured current falls
below 10 percent of the Current Reference value or the calculated temperature value falls
below Trip temperature.
There is also a calculation of the present time to trip with the present current. T_TRIP
calculation is only monitored if the final temperature is calculated to be above the trip
temperature. The value is available in the monitored data view.
After tripping, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit due to the thermal
overload protection function. The BLK_CLOSE lockout output is activated when the
device temperature is above the Reclose temperature lockout release temperature setting
value. The time to lockout release T_ENA_CLOSE is also calculated. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
4.1.5.5 Application
The transformers in a power system are constructed for a certain maximum load current
level. If the current exceeds this level, the losses are higher than expected. This results in
a rise in transformer temperature. If the temperature rise is too high, the equipment is
damaged:
• Insulation within the transformer ages faster, which in turn increases the risk of
internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground faults.
• Possible hotspots forming within the transformer degrade the quality of the
transformer oil.
During stressed situations in power systems, it is required to overload the transformers for
a limited time without any risks. The thermal overload protection provides information
and makes temporary overloading of transformers possible.
280 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The permissible load level of a power transformer is highly dependent on the transformer
cooling system. The two main principles are:
• ONAN: The air is naturally circulated to the coolers without fans, and the oil is
naturally circulated without pumps.
• OFAF: The coolers have fans to force air for cooling, and pumps to force the
circulation of the transformer oil.
The protection has several parameter sets located in the setting groups, for example one
for a non-forced cooling and one for a forced cooling situation. Both the permissive
steady-state loading level as well as the thermal time constant are influenced by the
transformer cooling system. The active setting group can be changed by a parameter, or
through a binary input if the binary input is enabled for it. This feature can be used for
transformers where forced cooling is taken out of operation or extra cooling is switched
on. The parameters can also be changed when a fan or pump fails to operate.
The thermal overload protection continuously estimates the internal heat content, that is,
the temperature of the transformer. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of
the transformer which is based on the current measurement.
If the heat content of the protected transformer reaches the set alarm level, a signal is given
to the operator. This enables the action that needs to be taken in the power systems before
the temperature reaches a high value. If the temperature continues to rise to the trip value,
the protection initiates the trip of the protected transformer.
After the trip, the transformer needs to cool down to a temperature level where the
transformer can be taken into service again. 49T continues to estimate the heat content of
the transformer during this cooling period using a set cooling time constant. The
energizing of the transformer is blocked until the heat content is reduced to the set level.
The thermal curve of two time constants is typical for a transformer. The thermal time
constants of the protected transformer are given in seconds with the Short time constant
and Long time constant settings. If the manufacturer does not state any other value, the
Long time constant can be set to 4920 s (82 minutes) for a distribution transformer and
7260 s (121 minutes) for a supply transformer. The corresponding Short time constants are
306 s (5.1 minutes) and 456 s (7.6 minutes).
If the manufacturer of the power transformer has stated only one, that is, a single time
constant, it can be converted to two time constants. The single time constant is also used
by itself if the p-factor Weighting factor p setting is set to zero and the time constant value
is set to the value of the Long time constant setting. The thermal image corresponds to the
one time constant model in that case.
615 series ANSI 281

Technical Manual
Table 276: Conversion table between one and two time constants
Single time constant (min) Short time constant (min) Long time constant (min) Weighting factor p
10 1.1 17 0.4
15 1.6 25 0.4
20 2.1 33 0.4
25 2.6 41 0.4
30 3.1 49 0.4
35 3.6 58 0.4
40 4.1 60 0.4
45 4.8 75 0.4
50 5.1 82 0.4
55 5.6 90 0.4
60 6.1 98 0.4
65 6.7 107 0.4
70 7.2 115 0.4
75 7.8 124 0.4
The default Max temperature setting is 105°C. This value is chosen since even though the
IEC 60076-7 standard recommends 98°C as the maximum allowable temperature in long-
time loading, the standard also states that a transformer can withstand the emergency
loading for weeks or even months, which may produce the winding temperature of 140°C.
Therefore, 105°C is a safe maximum temperature value for a transformer if the Max
temperature setting value is not given by the transformer manufacturer.
4.1.5.6 Signals
Table 277: 49T Input signals
282 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 278: 49T Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator. To inhibite reclose.
4.1.5.7 Settings
Table 279: 49T Group settings (Basic)
Env temperature Set -50...100 °C 1 40 Ambient temperature used when no external
temperature measurement available
Temperature rise 0.0...200.0 °C 0.1 78.0 End temperature rise above ambient
Maximum temperature 0.0...200.0 °C 0.1 105.0 Temperature level for trip
Trip temperature 80.0...120.0 % 0.1 100.0 Trip temperature, percent value
Alarm temperature 40.0...100.0 % 0.1 90.0 Alarm temperature, percent value
Reclose temperature 40.0...100.0 % 0.1 60.0 Temperature for reset of block reclose after trip
Short time constant 6...60000 s 1 450 Short time constant in seconds
Long time constant 60...60000 s 1 7200 Long time constant in seconds
Weighting factor p 0.00...1.00 0.01 0.40 Weighting factor of the short time constant
Table 280: 49T Group settings (Advanced)

temperature
Table 281: 49T Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 282: 49T Non group settings (Advanced)

Initial temperature, 0.0...100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Temperature raise at startup
percent value
615 series ANSI 283

Technical Manual

Table 283: 49T Monitored data
TEMP FLOAT32 -100.0...9999.9 °C The calculated temperature of
the protected object
the trip level
T_TRIP INT32 0...60000 s Estimated time to trip
T_ENA_CLOSE INT32 0...60000 s Estimated time to deactivate
BLK_CLOSE in seconds
49T Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 284: 49T Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz

±0.002 x In (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 x
In)
1) Overload current > 1.2 x Trip level temperature

Table 285: 49T Technical revision history
B Added the AMB_TEMP input
C Internal improvement.
D Internal improvement.
284 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.1.6 Motor load jam protection 51LR
Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC Ist> 51LR
GUID-E6B45EAE-D0FA-4310-AA47-6F03A7B5EBBE V2 EN
The motor load jam protection function 51LR is used for protecting the motor in stall or
mechanical jam situations during the running state.
When the motor is started, a separate function is used for the startup protection, and 51LR
is normally blocked during the startup period. When the motor has passed the starting
phase, 51LR monitors the magnitude of phase currents. The function picks up when the
measured current exceeds the breakdown torque level, that is, above the set limit. The
operation characteristic is definite time.
The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function outputs.
The operation of 51LR can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
615 series ANSI 285

Technical Manual
TIMER
I_A
Level
I_B TRIP
detector t
I_C
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-93025A7F-12BE-4ACD-8BD3-C144CB73F65A-ANSI V2 EN
Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared to the set Pickup value. The TRMS values of
the phase currents are considered for the level detection. The timer module is enabled if
at least two of the measured phase currents exceed the set Pickup value.
Timer
Once activated, the internal PICKUP signal is activated. The value is available only
through the Monitored data view. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the
operation timer has reached the Trip delay time value, the TRIP output is activated.
When the timer has elapsed but the motor stall condition still exists, the TRIP output
remains active until the phase currents values drop below the Pickup value, that is, until
the stall condition persists. If the drop-off situation occurs while the trip time is still
counting, the reset timer is activated. If the drop-off time exceeds the set Reset delay time,
the operation timer is reset.
Blocking logic
286 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.1.6.5 Application
The motor protection during stall is primarily needed to protect the motor from excessive
temperature rise, as the motor draws large currents during the stall phase. This condition
causes a temperature rise in the stator windings. Due to reduced speed, the temperature
also rises in the rotor. The rotor temperature rise is more critical when the motor stops.
The physical and dielectric insulations of the system deteriorate with age and the
deterioration is accelerated by the temperature increase. Insulation life is related to the
time interval during which the insulation is maintained at a given temperature.
An induction motor stalls when the load torque value exceeds the breakdown torque value,
causing the speed to decrease to zero or to some stable operating point well below the rated
speed. This occurs, for example, when the applied shaft load is suddenly increased and is
greater than the producing motor torque due to the bearing failures. This condition
develops a motor current almost equal to the value of the locked-rotor current.
51LR is designed to protect the motor in stall or mechanical jam situations during the
running state. To provide a good and reliable protection for motors in a stall situation, the
temperature effects on the motor have to be kept within the allowed limits.
4.1.6.6 Signals
Table 286: 51LR Input signals
Table 287: 51LR Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.1.6.7 Settings
Table 288: 51LR Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
615 series ANSI 287

Technical Manual
Table 289: 51LR Non group settings (Advanced)


Table 290: 51LR Monitored data
PICKUP BOOLEAN 0=False Pickup
1=True
51LR Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 291: 51LR Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz


Table 292: 51LR Technical revision history
B Internal improvement
288 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.1.7 Loss of load supervision 37M
Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC 3I< 37M

37
I_A TRIP
I_B PICKUP
I_C
BLOCK
GUID-79688824-6B61-45E2-B88B-60560AE5B51C V1 EN
The loss of load supervision function 37M is used to detect a sudden load loss which is
considered as a fault condition.
37M picks up when the current is less than the set limit. It operates with the definite time
(DT) characteristics, which means that the function operates after a predefined trip time
and resets when the fault current disappears.
The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, the
definite timer or the function itself, if desired.
The operation of 37M can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
615 series ANSI 289

Technical Manual
I_A Timer PICKUP

Level
I_B
detector 1 t
I_C TRIP
Level
detector 2
BLOCK
GUID-4A6308B8-47E8-498D-A268-1386EBBBEC8F-ANSI V1 EN
Level detector 1
This module compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the set Pickup value high
setting. If all the phase current values are less than the set Pickup value high value, the loss
of load condition is detected and an enable signal is sent to the timer. This signal is
disabled after one or several phase currents have exceeded the set Pickup value high value
of the element.
Level detector 2
This is a low-current detection module, which monitors the de-energized condition of the
motor. It compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the set Pickup value low setting. If
any of the phase current values is less than the set Pickup value low, a signal is sent to block
the operation of the timer.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Trip delay time,
the TRIP output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module trips, the reset timer
is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operation timer
resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated.
The BLOCK signal blocks the operation of the function and resets the timer.
4.1.7.5 Application
When a motor runs with a load connected, it draws a current equal to a value between the
no-load value and the rated current of the motor. The minimum load current can be
determined by studying the characteristics of the connected load. When the current drawn
by the motor is less than the minimum load current drawn, it can be inferred that the motor
290 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
is either disconnected from the load or the coupling mechanism is faulty. If the motor is
allowed to run in this condition, it may aggravate the fault in the coupling mechanism or
harm the personnel handling the machine. Therefore, the motor has to be disconnected
from the power supply as soon as the above condition is detected.
37M detects the condition by monitoring the current values and helps disconnect the
motor from the power supply instantaneously or after a delay according to the
requirement.
When the motor is at standstill, the current will be zero and it is not recommended to
activate the trip during this time. The minimum current drawn by the motor when it is
connected to the power supply is the no load current, that is, the higher pickup value
current. If the current drawn is below the lower pickup value current, the motor is
disconnected from the power supply. 37M detects this condition and interprets that the
motor is de-energized and disables the function to prevent unnecessary trip events.
4.1.7.6 Signals
Table 293: 37M Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
Table 294: 37M Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.1.7.7 Settings
Table 295: 37M Group settings (Basic)
Pickup value low 0.01...0.50 xIn 0.01 0.10 Current setting/Pickup value low
Pickup value high 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.50 Current setting/Pickup value high
615 series ANSI 291

Technical Manual
Table 296: 37M Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 297: 37M Non group settings (Advanced)


Table 298: 37M Monitored data
37M Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 299: 37M Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz
Pickup time Typically 300 ms


Table 300: 37M Technical revision history
292 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.1.8 Loss of phase 37
Loss of phase PHPTUC 3I< 37
37
I_A TRIP
I_B TRIP_A
I_C TRIP_B
BLOCK TRIP_C
PICKUP
PICKUP_A
PICKUP_B
PICKUP_C
GUID-C6685AEC-7D6B-4B3E-B162-8D316BCC9B2D V1 EN
The loss of phase function 37 is used to detect an undercurrent that is considered as a fault
condition.
37 picks up when the current is less than the set limit. Operation time characteristics are
according to definite time (DT).
The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs and
reset the definite timer if desired.
The operation of 37 can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
615 series ANSI 293

Technical Manual
GUID-7B0FC64E-8C0B-4742-8252-522B91EFC4BC-ANSI V1 EN
Level detector 1
This module compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the Pickup value setting. The
Operation mode setting can be used to select the "Three Phase" or "Single Phase" mode.
If in the "Three Phase" mode all the phase current values are less than the value of the
Pickup value setting, the condition is detected and an enabling signal is sent to the timer.
This signal is disabled after one or several phase currents have exceeded the set Pickup
value value of the element.
If in the "Single Phase" mode any of the phase current values are less than the value of the
Pickup value setting, the condition is detected and an enabling signal is sent to the timer.
This signal is disabled after all the phase currents have exceeded the set Pickup value value
of the element.
The protection relay does not accept the Pickup value to be smaller than
Current block value.
Level detector 2
This is a low-current detection module that monitors the de-energized condition of the
protected object. The module compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the Current
block value setting. If all the phase current values are less than the Current block value
setting, a signal is sent to block the operation of the timer.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output and the phase-specific PICKUP_X
output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached
the value set by Trip delay time, the TRIP output and the phase-specific TRIP_X output
are activated. If the fault disappears before the module trips, the reset timer is activated.
294 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and
the PICKUP output is deactivated.
percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time. The value is available through
the monitored data view.
The BLOCK signal blocks the operation of the function and resets the timer.
4.1.8.5 Application
In some cases, smaller distribution power transformers are used where the high-side
protection involves only power fuses. When one of the high-side fuses blows in a single-
phase condition, knowledge of it on the secondary side is lacking. The resulting negative-
sequence current leads to a premature failure due to excessive heating and breakdown of
the transformer insulation. Knowledge of this condition when it occurs allows for a quick
fuse replacement and saves the asset.
The Current block value setting can be set to zero to not block 37 with a low three-phase
current. However, this results in an unnecessary event sending when the transformer or
protected object is disconnected.
Phase-specific pickup and trip can give a better picture about the evolving faults when one
phase has picked up first and another follows.
37 is meant to be a general protection function, so that it could be used in other cases too.
In case of undercurrent-based motor protection, see the Loss of load protection.
4.1.8.6 Signals
Table 301: 37 Input signals
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase Bcurrent
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
615 series ANSI 295

Technical Manual
Table 302: 37 Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TRIP_A BOOLEAN Trip phase A
TRIP_B BOOLEAN Trip phase B
TRIP_C BOOLEAN Trip phase C
PICKUP_A BOOLEAN Pickup phase A
PICKUP_B BOOLEAN Pickup phase B
PICKUP_C BOOLEAN Pickup phase C
4.1.8.7 Settings
Table 303: 37 Group settings (Basic)
Current block value 0.00...0.50 xIn 0.01 0.10 Low current setting to block internally
Pickup value 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.50 Current setting to pickup
Table 304: 37 Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Operation mode 1=Three Phase 1=Three Phase Number of phases needed to pickup
2=Single Phase
Table 305: 37 Non group settings (Advanced)

296 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 306: 37 Monitored data
37 Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 307: 37 Technical data
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz
Pickup time Typically <55 ms

Reset time <40 ms
Trip time accuracy in definite time mode mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
4.1.9 Thermal overload protection for motors 49M
Thermal overload protection for motors MPTTR 3Ith>M 49M
615 series ANSI 297

Technical Manual
GUID-5552A9D8-ADEF-4153-AB1A-0C97F97D15EB V3 EN
The thermal overload protection for motors function 49M protects the electric motors
from overheating. 49M models the thermal behavior of motor on the basis of the measured
load current and disconnects the motor when the thermal content reaches 100 percent.
Thermal overload conditions are the most often encountered abnormal conditions in
industrial motor applications. The thermal overload conditions are typically the result of
an abnormal rise in the motor running current, which produces an increase in the thermal
dissipation of the motor and temperature or reduces cooling. 49M prevents an electric
motor from drawing excessive current and overheating, which causes the premature
insulation failures of the windings and, in worst cases, burning out of the motors.
The operation of 49M can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the

298 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-1E5F2337-DA4E-4F5B-8BEB-27353A6734DC-ANSI V2 EN

Max current selector selects the highest measured TRMS phase current and reports it to
Thermal level calculator.
Internal FLC calculator

Full load current (FLC) of the motor is defined by the manufacturer at an ambient
temperature of 40°C. Special considerations are required with an application where the
ambient temperature of a motor exceeds or remains below 40°C. A motor operating at a
higher temperature, even if at or below rated load, can subject the motor windings to
excessive temperature similar to that resulting from overload operation at normal ambient
temperature. The motor rating has to be appropriately reduced for operation in such high
ambient temperatures. Similarly, when the ambient temperature is considerably lower
than the nominal 40°C, the motor can be slightly overloaded. For calculating thermal level
it is better that the FLC values are scaled for different temperatures. The scaled currents
are known as internal FLC. An internal FLC is calculated based on the ambient
temperature shown in the table. The Env temperature mode setting defines whether the
thermal level calculations are based on FLC or internal FLC.
When the value of the Env temperature mode setting is set to the "FLC Only" mode, no
internal FLC is calculated. Instead, the FLC given in the data sheet of the manufacturer is
used. When the value of the Env temperature mode setting is set to "Set Amb Temp" mode,
the internal FLC is calculated based on the ambient temperature taken as an input through
the Env temperature Set setting. When the Env temperature mode setting is on "Use input"
mode, the internal FLC is calculated from temperature data available through resistance
temperature detectors (RTDs) using the AMB_TEMP input.
615 series ANSI 299

Technical Manual
Table 308: Modification of internal FLC

Ambient Temperature Tamb Internal FLC
<20°C FLC x 1.09
20 to <40°C FLC x (1.18 - Tamb x 0.09/20)
40°C FLC
>40 to 65°C FLC x (1 –[(Tamb -40)/100])
>65°C FLC x 0.75
The ambient temperature is used for calculating thermal level and it is available in the
monitored data view from the TEMP_AMB output. The activation of the BLOCK input does
not affect the TEMP_AMB output.
The Env temperature Set setting is used:

• If the ambient temperature measurement value is not connected to the AMB_TEMP
input in ACT.
• When the ambient temperature measurement connected to 49M is set to Not in use in
the RTD function.
• In case of any errors or malfunctioning in the RTD output.
Thermal level calculator

The module calculates the thermal load considering the TRMS and negative-sequence
currents. The heating up of the motor is determined by the square value of the load current.
However, in case of unbalanced phase currents, the negative-sequence current also causes
additional heating. By deploying a protection based on both current components,
abnormal heating of the motor is avoided.
The thermal load is calculated based on different situations or operations and it also
depends on the phase current level. The equations used for the heating calculations are:
 I  2  I2  
2
−t /τ

θB =   + K2 × 
 k × I r 
  × 1− e
 k × I r  
× p%( )

GUID-526B455A-67DD-46E7-813D-A64EC619F6D7 V2 EN (Equation 16)
 I  2  I2  
2
−t /τ

θA =   + K2 × 
 k × I r  
  × 1− e
k × Ir  
(
× 100% )
 
GUID-9C893D3E-7CAF-4EA6-B92D-C914288D7CFC V2 EN (Equation 17)
300 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
I TRMS value of the measured max of phase currents

Ir set Current reference, FLC or internal FLC
I2 measured negative sequence current
k set value of Overload factor

K2 set value of Negative Seq factor
p set value of Weighting factor

t time constant
The equation θB is used when the values of all the phase currents are below the overload
limit, that is, k x Ir. The equation θA is used when the value of any one of the phase currents
exceeds the overload limit.
During overload condition, the thermal level calculator calculates the value of θB in
background, and when the overload ends the thermal level is brought linearly from θA to
θB with a speed of 1.66 percent per second. For the motor at standstill, that is, when the
current is below the value of 0.12 x Ir, the cooling is expressed as:
−t
θ = θ02 × e τ
GUID-2C640EA9-DF69-42A9-A6A8-3CD20AEC76BD V2 EN (Equation 18)
θ02 initial thermal level when cooling begins
GUID-A19F9DF2-2F04-401F-AE7A-6CE55F88EB1D V2 EN
Figure 143: Thermal behavior
The required overload factor and negative sequence current heating effect factor are set by
the values of the Overload factor and Negative Seq factor settings.
615 series ANSI 301

Technical Manual
In order to accurately calculate the motor thermal condition, different time constants are
used in the above equations. These time constants are employed based on different motor
running conditions, for example starting, normal or stop, and are set through the Time
constant start, Time constant normal and Time constant stop settings. Only one time
constant is valid at a time.
Table 309: Time constant and the respective phase current values
Time constant (tau) in use Phase current
Time constant start Any current whose value is over 2.5 x Ir
Time constant normal Any current whose value is over 0.12 x Ir and all
currents are below 2.5 x Ir
Time constant stop All the currents whose values are below 0.12 x Ir
The Weighting factor p setting determines the ratio of the thermal increase of the two
curves θA and θB.
The thermal level at the power-up of the protection relay is defined by the Initial thermal
Val setting.
The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined in the Initial thermal Val
setting. This is done if the protection relay is powered up or the function is disabled and
then enabled or reset through the Clear menu.
The calculated temperature of the protected object relative to the operate level, the
TEMP_RL output, is available through the monitored data view. The activation of the
BLOCK input does not affect the calculated temperature.
The thermal level at the beginning of the start-up condition of a motor and at the end of the
start-up condition is available in the monitored data view at the THERMLEV_ST and
THERMLEV_END outputs respectively. The activation of the BLOCK input does not have
any effect on these outputs.
Alarm and tripping logic

The module generates alarm, restart inhibit and tripping signals.
When the thermal level exceeds the set value of the Alarm thermal value setting, the
ALARM output is activated. Sometimes a condition arises when it becomes necessary to
inhibit the restarting of a motor, for example in case of some extreme starting condition
like long starting time. If the thermal content exceeds the set value of the Restart thermal
val setting, the BLK_RESTART output is activated. The time for the next possible motor
start-up is available through the monitored data view from the T_ENARESTART output.
The T_ENARESTART output estimates the time for the BLK_RESTART deactivation
considering as if the motor is stopped.
302 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
When the emergency start signal START_EMERG is set high, the thermal level is set to a
value below the thermal restart inhibit level. This allows at least one motor start-up, even
though the thermal level has exceeded the restart inhibit level.
When the thermal content reaches 100 percent, the TRIP output is activated. The TRIP
output is deactivated when the value of the measured current falls below 12 percent of
Current reference or the thermal content drops below 100 percent.
The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the ALARM, BLK_RESTART and TRIP
outputs.
615 series ANSI 303

Technical Manual
Tau [s]
3840
1920
960
640
480
320
160
80
GUID-F3D1E6D3-86E9-4C0A-BD43-350003A07292 V1 EN
Figure 144: Trip curves when no prior load and p=20...100 %. Overload factor = 1.05.
304 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Tau [s]
3840
1920
80 160 320 480 640 960
GUID-44A67C51-E35D-4335-BDBD-5CD0D3F41EF1 V1 EN
Figure 145: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=100 %, Overload factor = 1.05.
615 series ANSI 305

Technical Manual
Tau [s]
3840
1920
960
640
480
320
80 160
GUID-5CB18A7C-54FC-4836-9049-0CE926F35ADF V1 EN
Figure 146: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=50 %. Overload factor = 1.05.
306 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.1.9.5 Application
49M is intended to limit the motor thermal level to predetermined values during the
abnormal motor operating conditions. This prevents a premature motor insulation failure.
The abnormal conditions result in overheating and include overload, stalling, failure to
start, high ambient temperature, restricted motor ventilation, reduced speed operation,
frequent starting or jogging, high or low line voltage or frequency, mechanical failure of
the driven load, improper installation and unbalanced line voltage or single phasing. The
protection of insulation failure by the implementation of current sensing cannot detect
some of these conditions, such as restricted ventilation. Similarly, the protection by
sensing temperature alone can be inadequate in cases like frequent starting or jogging. The
thermal overload protection addresses these deficiencies to a larger extent by deploying a
motor thermal model based on load current.
The thermal load is calculated using the true RMS phase value and negative sequence
value of the current. The heating up of the motor is determined by the square value of the
load current. However, while calculating the thermal level, the rated current should be re-
rated or de-rated depending on the value of the ambient temperature. Apart from current,
the rate at which motor heats up or cools is governed by the time constant of the motor.
Setting the weighting factor

There are two thermal curves: one which characterizes the short-time loads and long-time
overloads and which is also used for tripping and another which is used for monitoring the
thermal condition of the motor. The value of the Weighting factor p setting determines the
ratio of the thermal increase of the two curves.
When the Weighting factor p setting is 100 percent, a pure single time constant thermal
unit is produced which is used for application with the cables. As presented in Figure 147,
the hot curve with the value of Weighting factor p being 100 percent only allows an
operate time which is about 10 percent of that with no prior load. For example, when the
set time constant is 640 seconds, the operate time with the prior load 1 x FLC (full Load
Current) and overload factor 1.05 is only 2 seconds, even if the motor could withstand at
least 5 to 6 seconds. To allow the use of the full capacity of the motor, a lower value of
Weighting factor p should be used.
Normally, an approximate value of half of the thermal capacity is used when the motor is
running at full load. Thus by setting Weighting factor p to 50 percent, the protection relay
notifies a 45 to 50 percent thermal capacity use at full load.
For direct-on-line started motors with hot spot tendencies, the value of Weighting factor p
is typically set to 50 percent, which will properly distinguish between short-time thermal
stress and long-time thermal history. After a short period of thermal stress, for example a
motor start-up, the thermal level starts to decrease quite sharply, simulating the leveling
615 series ANSI 307

Technical Manual
out of the hot spots. Consequently, the probability of successive allowed start-ups
increases.
When protecting the objects without hot spot tendencies, for example motors started with
soft starters, and cables, the value of Weighting factor p is set to 100 percent. With the
value of Weighting factor p set to 100 percent, the thermal level decreases slowly after a
heavy load condition. This makes the protection suitable for applications where no hot
spots are expected. Only in special cases where the thermal overload protection is required
to follow the characteristics of the object to be protected more closely and the thermal
capacity of the object is very well known, a value between 50 and 100 percent is required.
For motor applications where, for example, two hot starts are allowed instead of three cold
starts, the value of the setting Weighting factor p being 40 percent has proven to be useful.
Setting the value of Weighting factor p significantly below 50 percent should be handled
carefully as there is a possibility to overload the protected object as a thermal unit might
allow too many hot starts or the thermal history of the motor has not been taken into
account sufficiently.
308 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
t/s
4000
3000
2000
1000
500
400
300
200
100
50
40
Cold
30
curve
20
10
20
5
4 50
75
2
p
[%]
1.05
100
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 I/Iq
GUID-B6F9E655-4FFC-4B06-841A-68DADE785BF2 V1 EN
Figure 147: The influence of Weighting factor p at prior load 1xFLC, timeconstant =
640 s, and Overload factor = 1.05
Setting the overload factor

The value of Overload factor defines the highest permissible continuous load. The
recommended value is 1.05.
615 series ANSI 309

Technical Manual
Setting the negative sequence factor

During the unbalance condition, the symmetry of the stator currents is disturbed and a
counter-rotating negative sequence component current is set up. An increased stator
current causes additional heating in the stator and the negative sequence component
current excessive heating in the rotor. Also mechanical problems like rotor vibration can
occur.
The most common cause of unbalance for three-phase motors is the loss of phase resulting
in an open fuse, connector or conductor. Often mechanical problems can be more severe
than the heating effects and therefore a separate unbalance protection is used.
Unbalances in other connected loads in the same busbar can also affect the motor. A
voltage unbalance typically produces 5 to 7 times higher current unbalance. Because the
thermal overload protection is based on the highest TRMS value of the phase current, the
additional heating in stator winding is automatically taken into account. For more accurate
thermal modeling, the Negative Seq factor setting is used for taking account of the rotor
heating effect.
RR 2
Negative Seq factor =
RR1
GUID-EA5AD510-A3CA-47FB-91F0-75D7272B654E V1 EN (Equation 19)
RR2 Rotor negative sequence resistance
RR1 Rotor positive sequence resistance
A conservative estimate for the setting can be calculated:

175
Negative Seq factor = 2
I LR
GUID-13CE37C5-295F-41D4-8159-400FA377C84C V1 EN (Equation 20)
ILR Locked rotor current (multiple of set Rated current). The same as the start-up current at the beginning of
the motor start-up.
For example, if the rated current of a motor is 230 A, start-up current is 5.7 x Ir,
175
Negative Seq factor = = 5.4
5.7 2
GUID-DF682702-E6B1-4814-8B2E-31C28F3A03DF V1 EN (Equation 21)
Setting the thermal restart level

The restart disable level can be calculated as follows:
310 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
 startup time of the motor 

θ = 100% −  × 100% + margin 
i  operate time when no prior load 
GUID-5B3B714D-8C58-4C5D-910D-A23852BC8B15 V2 EN (Equation 22)
For example, the motor start-up time is 11 seconds, start-up current 6 x rated and Time
constant start is set for 800 seconds. Using the trip curve with no prior load, the operation
time at 6 x rated current is 25 seconds, one motor start-up uses 11/25 ≈ 45 percent of the
thermal capacity of the motor. Therefore, the restart disable level must be set to below 100
percent - 45 percent = 55 percent, for example to 50 percent (100 percent - (45 percent +
margin), where margin is 5 percent).
Setting the thermal alarm level

Tripping due to high overload is avoided by reducing the load of the motor on a prior
alarm.
The value of Alarm thermal value is set to a level which allows the use of the full thermal
capacity of the motor without causing a trip due to a long overload time. Generally, the
prior alarm level is set to a value of 80 to 90 percent of the trip level.
4.1.9.6 Signals
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current
START_EMERG BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for indicating the need for emergency start

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator, to inhibit restart
615 series ANSI 311

Technical Manual
4.1.9.7 Settings
Overload factor 1.00...1.20 0.01 1.05 Overload factor (k)
Alarm thermal value 50.0...100.0 % 0.1 95.0 Thermal level above which function gives an
alarm
Restart thermal Val 20.0...80.0 % 0.1 40.0 Thermal level above which function inhibits
motor restarting
Negative Seq factor 0.0...10.0 0.1 0.0 Heating effect factor for negative sequence
current
Weighting factor p 20.0...100.0 % 0.1 50.0 Weighting factor (p)
Time constant normal 80...4000 s 1 320 Motor time constant during the normal
operation of motor
Time constant start 80...4000 s 1 320 Motor time constant during the start of motor
Time constant stop 80...60000 s 1 500 Motor time constant during the standstill
condition of motor
Env temperature mode 1=FLC Only 1=FLC Only Mode of measuring ambient temperature
2=Use input
3=Set Amb Temp
Env temperature Set -20.0...70.0 °C 0.1 40.0 Ambient temperature used when no external
temperature measurement available

5=disable

temperature
Initial thermal Val 0.0...100.0 % 0.1 74.0 Initial thermal level of the motor
312 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

the trip level
THERMLEV_ST FLOAT32 0.00...9.99 Thermal level at beginning of
motor startup
THERMLEV_END FLOAT32 0.00...9.99 Thermal level at the end of
motor startup situation
T_ENARESTART INT32 0...99999 s Estimated time to reset of
block restart
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Therm-Lev FLOAT32 0.00...9.99 Thermal level of protected
object (1.00 is the trip level)

current: fn ±2 Hz

±0.002 × In (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 ×
In)
1) Overload current > 1.2 × Operate level temperature
615 series ANSI 313

Technical Manual

B Added a new input AMB_TEMP.
Added a new selection for the Env temperature
mode setting "Use input".
D Time constant stop range maximum value changed
from 8000 s to 60000 s.
4.2 Ground-fault protection
4.2.1 Non-directional ground-fault protection 51N, 51G, 50N, 50G,

50N-3, 50G-3
Non-directional ground-fault protection, EFLPTOC Io> 51N, 51G
low stage
Non-directional ground-fault protection, EFHPTOC Io>> 50N, 50G
high stage
Non-directional ground-fault protection, EFIPTOC Io>>> 50N-3, 50G-3
instantaneous stage
51N,51G 50N,50G 50N-3,50G-3

IG TRIP IG TRIP IG TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP BLOCK PICKUP BLOCK PICKUP
ENA_MULT ENA_MULT ENA_MULT
GUID-7EBE9C0C-3933-49AD-90BB-C4DF391547D6 V1 EN
The non-directional ground-fault protection function 51N, 51G, 50N, 50G, 50N-3, 50G-3
is used as non-directional ground-fault protection for feeders.
314 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The function picks up and trips when the residual current exceeds the set limit. The trip
time characteristic for low stage 51N, 51G and high stage 50N, 50G can be selected to be
either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT). The instantaneous
stage 50N-3, 50G-3 always trips with the DT characteristic.

A070437-ANSI V1 EN
Level detector
The operating quantity can be selected with the setting IG/I0 signal Sel. The selectable
options are "Measured IG" and "Calculated I0". The operating quantity is compared to the
set Pickup value. If the measured value exceeds the set Pickup value, the level detector
sends an enable-signal to the timer module. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Pickup
value setting is multiplied by the Pickup value Mult setting.
setting range.
615 series ANSI 315

Technical Manual
Timer

situation.
Blocking logic
316 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and
"Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode setting.
Table 318: Measurement modes supported by 51N/50N or 51G/50G stages
Measurement mode 51N, 51G 50N, 50G 50N-3, 50G-3
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x x

51N, 51G, 50N, 50G supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the
timer characteristics with the Operating curve type and Type of reset curve settings. When
the DT characteristic is selected, it is only affected by the Trip delay time and Reset delay
time settings.
user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating curve type values "ANSI
Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is identical in both cases.
The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages:
615 series ANSI 317

Technical Manual

Operating curve type 51N, 51G 50N, 50G
(9) IEC Normal Inverse x x
(10) IEC Very Inverse x x
(11) IEC Inverse x
(12) IEC Extremely Inverse x x
(17) User programmable curve x x
(18) RI type x
(19) RD type x
50N-3, 50G-3 supports only definite time characteristics.
For a detailed description of timers, see the General function block


Reset curve type 51N, 51G 50N, 50G Note
(1) Immediate x x Available for all reset time curves
(2) Def time reset x x Available for all reset time curves
programmable curves
318 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The Type of reset curve setting does not apply to 50N-3, 50G-3 or when
the DT operation is selected. The reset is purely defined by the Reset delay
time setting.
4.2.1.7 Application
51N, 51G, 50N, 50G, 50N-3, 50G-3 is designed for protection and clearance of ground
faults in distribution and sub-transmission networks where the neutral point is isolated or
grounded via a resonance coil or through low resistance. It also applies to solidly grounded
networks and ground-fault protection of different equipment connected to the power
systems, such as shunt capacitor bank or shunt reactors and for backup ground-fault
protection of power transformers.
delays. 51N, 51G, 50N, 50G, 50N-3, 50G-3 consists of three different protection stages:
• Low 51N, 51G
• High 50N, 50G
• Instantaneous 50N-3, 50G-3
51N, 51G contains several types of time-delay characteristics. 50N, 50G and 50N-3,
50G-3 are used for fast clearance of serious ground faults.
4.2.1.8 Signals
Table 321: 51N,51G Input signals
IG SIGNAL 0 Ground current

615 series ANSI 319

Technical Manual
Table 323: 50N-3,50G-3 Input signals

Table 324: 51N,51G Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
Table 326: 50N-3,50G-3 Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
320 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.2.1.9 Settings
Table 327: 51N,51G Group settings (Basic)
2=ANSI Very Inv
3=ANSI Norm Inv
4=ANSI Mod Inv
5=ANSI DT
6=LT Ext Inv
7=LT Very Inv
8=LT Inv
9=IEC Norm Inv
10=IEC Very Inv
11=IEC Inv
12=IEC Ext Inv
13=IEC ST Inv
14=IEC LT Inv
15=IEC DT
17=Programmable
18=RI Type
19=RD Type
Table 328: 51N,51G Group settings (Advanced)

2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Table 329: 51N,51G Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
curve
curve
curve
curve
curve
615 series ANSI 321

Technical Manual
Table 330: 51N,51G Non group settings (Advanced)

2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
IG/I0 signal Sel 1=Measured IG 1=Measured IG Measured IG or calculated I0
2=Calculated I0

3=ANSI Norm Inv
5=ANSI DT
9=IEC Norm Inv
10=IEC Very Inv
12=IEC Ext Inv
15=IEC DT
17=Programmable
Table 332: 50N,50G Group settings (Advanced)

2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset

5=disable
curve
curve
322 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

curve
curve
curve

2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
2=Calculated I0
Table 335: 50N-3,50G-3 Group settings (Basic)

Table 336: 50N-3,50G-3 Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 337: 50N-3,50G-3 Non group settings (Advanced)

2=Calculated I0
615 series ANSI 323

Technical Manual

Table 338: 51N,51G Monitored data
51N,51G Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Table 340: 50N-3,50G-3 Monitored data

50N-3,50G-3 Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
324 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 341: 50N-3, 50G-3 Technical revision history
B The minimum and default values changed to 40 ms
for the Trip delay time setting
C Minimum and default values changed to 20 ms for
Minimum value changed to 1.00 x In for the Pickup
value setting
D Added a setting parameter for the "Measured IG" or
"Calculated I0" selection
Table 342: 50N, 50G Technical revision history

C Added a setting parameter for the "Measured IG" or
multiplier setting
Table 343: 51N, 51G Technical revision history

B The minimum and default values changed to 40 ms
for the Trip delay time setting
C Pickup value step changed to 0.005
D Added a setting parameter for the "Measured IG" or
E Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the Time
multiplier setting
G Internal improvement
615 series ANSI 325

Technical Manual
4.2.2 Directional ground-fault protection 67/51N, 67/50N
Directional ground-fault protection, low DEFLPDEF I0> -> 67/51N
stage
Directional ground-fault protection, high DEFHPDEF I0>> -> 67/50N
stage
67/51N 67/50N
IG TRIP IG TRIP
VG PICKUP VG PICKUP
I2 I2
U2 U2
BLOCK BLOCK
ENA_MULT ENA_MULT
RCA_CTL RCA_CTL
GUID-7CA3F40E-E448-4D5D-8D1C-59F2D1DDF29C V1 EN
The directional ground-fault function 67/51N, 67/50N is used as directional ground-fault

protection for feeders.
The function picks up and trips when the operating quantity (current) and polarizing
quantity (voltage) exceed the set limits and the angle between them is inside the set
operating sector. The trip time characteristic for low stage (DEFLPDEF) and high stage
(DEFHPDEF) can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum
time (IDMT).

326 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The operation of 67/51N, 67/50N can be described using a module diagram. All the
A070438-ANSI V1 EN
Level detector
The magnitude of the operating quantity is compared to the set Pickup value and the
magnitude of the polarizing quantity is compared to the set Voltage pickup value. If both
the limits are exceeded, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer module.
When the Enable voltage limit setting is set to "False", Voltage pickup value has no effect
and the level detection is purely based on the operating quantity. If the ENA_MULT input
is active, the Pickup value setting is multiplied by the Pickup value Mult setting.
The operating quantity (residual current) can be selected with the setting IG/I0 signal Sel.
The options are "Measured IG" and "Calculated I0". If "Measured IG" is selected, the
current ratio for IG-channel is given in Configuration/Analog inputs/Current
(IG,CT). If "Calculated I0" is selected, the current ratio is obtained from the phase-current
channels given in Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (3I,CT).
The operating quantity (residual voltage) can be selected with the setting Vg or V0 The
options are "Measured VG" and "Calculated V0". If "Measured VG" is selected, the
voltage ratio for VG-channel is given in Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage
(VG,VT). If "Calculated V0" is selected, the voltage ratio is obtained from the phase-
voltage channels given in Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (3V,VT).
Example 1: IG is measured with cable core CT (100/1 A) and VG is measured from open-
delta connected VTs (20/sqrt(3) kV : 100/sqrt(3) V : 100/3 V). In this case, "Measured IG"
and "Measured VG" are selected. The nominal values for residual current and residual
voltage are obtained from CT and VT ratios entered in Residual current IG:
Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (IG,CT): 100 A : 1 A. The Residual voltage VG:
Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (VG,VT): 11.547 kV : 100 V. The Pickup value
615 series ANSI 327

Technical Manual
of 1.0 × In corresponds to 1.0 * 100 A = 100 A in the primary. The Voltage pickup value
of 1.0 × Vn corresponds to 1.0 * 11.547 kV = 11.547 kV in the primary.
Example 2: Both I0 and V0 are calculated from the phase quantities. Phase CT-ratio is
100 : 1 A and phase VT-ratio is 20/sqrt(3) kV : 100/sqrt(3) V. In this case, "Calculated I0"
and "Calculated V0" are selected. The nominal values for residual current and residual
voltage are obtained from CT and VT ratios entered in Residual current I0:
Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (3I,CT): 100 A : 1 A. The residual voltage V0:
Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (3V,VT): 20.000 kV : 100 V. The Pickup value
of 1.0 × In corresponds to 1.0 * 100 A = 100 A in the primary. The Voltage pickup value
of 1.0 × Vn corresponds to 1.0 * 20.000 kV = 20.000 kV in the primary.
If "Calculated V0" is selected, the residual voltage nominal value is

always phase-to-phase voltage. Thus, the valid maximum setting for
residual Voltage pickup value is 0.577 x Vn. The calculated V0 requires
that all the three phase-to-ground voltages are connected to the protection
relay. V0 cannot be calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages.
If the Enable voltage limit setting is set to "True", the magnitude of the
polarizing quantity is checked even if the Directional mode was set to
"Non-directional" or Allow Non Dir to "True". The protection relay does
not accept the Pickup value or Pickup value Mult setting if the product of
these settings exceeds the Pickup value setting range.
Typically, the ENA_MULT input is connected to the inrush detection function INR. In case
of inrush, INR activates the ENA_MULT input, which multiplies Pickup value by the
Pickup value Mult setting.
The directional calculation module monitors the angle between the polarizing quantity
and operating quantity. Depending on the Pol quantity setting, the polarizing quantity can
be the residual voltage (measured or calculated) or the negative sequence voltage. When
the angle is in the operation sector, the module sends the enabling signal to the timer
module.
The minimum signal level which allows the directional operation can be set with the Min
trip current and Min trip voltage settings.
If Pol quantity is set to "Zero. seq. volt", the residual current and residual voltage are used
for directional calculation.
If Pol quantity is set to "Neg. seq. volt", the negative sequence current and negative
sequence voltage are used for directional calculation.
328 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
In the phasor diagrams representing the operation of 67/51N, 67/50N, the polarity of the
polarizing quantity (VG or V2) is reversed, that is, the polarizing quantity in the phasor
diagrams is either -VG or -V2. Reversing is done by switching the polarity of the residual
current measuring channel (see the connection diagram in the application manual).
Similarly the polarity of the calculated IG and I2 is also switched.
For defining the operation sector, there are five modes available through the Operation
mode setting.
Table 344: Operation modes
Operation mode Description
Phase angle The operating sectors for forward and reverse are
defined with the settings Min forward angle, Max
forward angle, Min reverse angle and Max reverse
angle.
IoSin The operating sectors are defined as "forward" when
|IG| x sin (ANGLE) has a positive value and "reverse"
when the value is negative. ANGLE is the angle
difference between -VG and IG.
IoCos As "IoSin" mode. Only cosine is used for calculating
the operation current.
Phase angle 80 The sector maximum values are frozen to 80
degrees respectively. Only Min forward angle and
Min reverse angle are settable.
Phase angle 88 The sector maximum values are frozen to 88
degrees. Otherwise as "Phase angle 80" mode.
Polarizing quantity selection "Neg. seq. volt." is available only in the

"Phase angle" operation mode.
The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting. The
alternatives are "Non-directional", "Forward" and "Reverse" operation. The operation
criterion is selected with the Operation mode setting. By setting Allow Non Dir to "True",
non-directional operation is allowed when the directional information is invalid, that is,
when the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is less than the value of the Min trip voltage
setting.
Typically, the network rotating direction is counter-clockwise and defined as "ABC". If

the network rotating direction is reversed, meaning clockwise, that is, "ACB", the
equation for calculating the negative sequence voltage component need to be changed.
The network rotating direction is defined with a system parameter Phase rotation. The
calculation of the component is affected but the angle difference calculation remains the
same. When the residual voltage is used as the polarizing method, the network rotating
direction change has no effect on the direction calculation.
615 series ANSI 329

Technical Manual
The network rotating direction is set in the protection relay using the
parameter in the HMI menu: Configuration/System/Phase rotation.
The default parameter value is "ABC".
If the Enable voltage limit setting is set to "True", the magnitude of the
polarizing quantity is checked even if Directional mode is set to "Non-
directional" or Allow Non Dir to "True".
The Characteristic angle setting is used in the "Phase angle" mode to adjust the operation
according to the method of neutral point grounding so that in an isolated network the
Characteristic angle (φRCA) = -90° and in a compensated network φRCA = 0°. In addition,
the characteristic angle can be changed via the control signal RCA_CTL. RCA_CTL
affects the Characteristic angle setting.
The Correction angle setting can be used to improve selectivity due the inaccuracies in the
measurement transformers. The setting decreases the operation sector. The correction can
only be used with the "IoCos" or "IoSin" modes.
The polarity of the polarizing quantity can be reversed by setting the Pol reversal to
"True", which turns the polarizing quantity by 180 degrees.
For definitions of different directional ground-fault characteristics, see

the Directional ground-fault characteristics section in this manual.
For definitions of different directional ground-fault characteristics, refer

to general function block features information.
The directional calculation module calculates several values which are presented in the
monitored data.
330 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 345: Monitored data values

Monitored data values Description
FAULT_DIR The detected direction of fault during fault situations,
that is, when PICKUP output is active.
DIRECTION The momentary operating direction indication

output.
ANGLE
ANGLE_RCA The angle difference between the operating angle
and Characteristic angle, that is, ANGLE_RCA =
ANGLE – Characteristic angle.
I_OPER The current that is used for fault detection. If the
Operation mode setting is "Phase angle", "Phase
angle 80" or "Phase angle 88", I_OPER is the
measured or calculated residual current. If the
Operation mode setting is "IoSin", I_OPER is
calculated as follows I_OPER = IG x sin(ANGLE). If
the Operation mode setting is "IoCos", I_OPER is
calculated as follows I_OPER = IG x cos(ANGLE).
Monitored data values are accessible on the LHMI or through tools via communications.
Timer

615 series ANSI 331

Technical Manual

situation.
Blocking logic
setting Blocking mode
.
4.2.2.5 Directional ground-fault principles
In many cases it is difficult to achieve selective ground-fault protection based on the

magnitude of residual current only. To obtain a selective ground-fault protection scheme,
it is necessary to take the phase angle of IG into account. This is done by comparing the
phase angle of the operating and polarizing quantity.
Relay characteristic angle

The Characteristic angle setting, also known as Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA), Relay
Base Angle or Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), is used in the "Phase angle" mode to turn
the directional characteristic if the expected fault current angle does not coincide with the
332 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
polarizing quantity to produce the maximum torque. That is, RCA is the angle between the
maximum torque line and polarizing quantity. If the polarizing quantity is in phase with
the maximum torque line, RCA is 0 degrees. The angle is positive if the operating current
lags the polarizing quantity and negative if it leads the polarizing quantity.
Example 1
The "Phase angle" mode is selected, compensated network (φRCA = 0 deg)
=> Characteristic angle = 0 deg
maximum torque line

Characteristic angle = 0 deg
-VG(polarizing
quantity)
Forward tripping zone
IG (tripping quantity)
Min forward angle Max forward angle
Non-tripping zone
zero torque line
Max reverse angle Min reverse angle
Min trip current
Backward tripping zone
GUID-D491B874-769D-4D2F-9E74-2788A829E7E3 V1 EN
Figure 152: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=0 degrees in a

compensated network
Example 2
The "Phase angle" mode is selected, solidly grounded network (φRCA = +60 deg)
=> Characteristic angle = +60 deg
615 series ANSI 333

Technical Manual
quantity)
Characteristic angle
= +60 deg
maximum torque line
Min forward angle

Min trip current
IG (tripping quantity)
Max reverse angle
Max forward angle
Backward tripping zone Forward tripping zone
Min reverse angle
zero torque line

GUID-7F29880D-18AB-4B4C-9953-6D186760D35A V1 EN
Figure 153: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=+60 degrees in a solidly
grounded network
Example 3
The "Phase angle" mode is selected, isolated network (φRCA = -90 deg)
=> Characteristic angle = -90 deg
334 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
quantity)
Characteristic angle
= -90 deg
Forward Backward
tripping zone tripping zone
Max forward angle Min reverse angle
maximum torque line

IG
(operating quantity)
Min forward angle Max reverse angle
Non-tripping zone
Min operate
current
zero torque line

GUID-04370359-62D0-4D09-B296-D72C961293C4 V1 EN
Figure 154: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=–90 degrees in an

isolated network
Directional ground-fault protection in an isolated neutral network

In isolated networks, there is no intentional connection between the system neutral point
and ground. The only connection is through the phase-to-ground capacitances (C0) of
phases and leakage resistances (R0). This means that the residual current is mainly
capacitive and has a phase shift of -90 degrees compared to the polarizing voltage.
Consequently, the relay characteristic angle (RCA) should be set to -90 degrees and the
operation criteria to "IoSin" or "Phase angle". The width of the operating sector in the
phase angle criteria can be selected with the settings Min forward angle, Max forward
angle, Min reverse angle or Max reverse angle. Figure 155 illustrates a simplified
equivalent circuit for an ungrounded network with a ground fault in phase C.
For definitions of different directional ground-fault characteristics, see

Directional ground-fault principles.
615 series ANSI 335

Technical Manual
A B C ΣI01
- V0
C0 R0
V0 - V0
ΣI02
ΣI02
Ief
A070441-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 155: Ground-fault situation in an isolated network
Directional ground-fault protection in a compensated network

In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive resonance coil
current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on the reactive current
measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would disturb the operation of
the protection relays. In this case, the selectivity is based on the measurement of the active
current component. The magnitude of this component is often small and must be increased
by means of a parallel resistor in the compensation equipment. When measuring the
resistive part of the residual current, the relay characteristic angle (RCA) should be set to
0 degrees and the operation criteria to "IoCos" or "Phase angle". Figure 156 illustrates a
simplified equivalent circuit for a compensated network with a ground fault in phase C.
A B C ΣI01
- V0
C0 R0
ΣI 01
ΣI02
L RL - V0
V0
Ief ΣI02
A070444-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 156: Ground-fault situation in a compensated network
336 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The Petersen coil or the grounding resistor may be temporarily out of operation. To keep
the protection scheme selective, it is necessary to update the Characteristic angle setting
accordingly. This can be done with an auxiliary input in the protection relay which
receives a signal from an auxiliary switch of the disconnector of the Petersen coil in
compensated networks. As a result the characteristic angle is set automatically to suit the
grounding method used. The RCA_CTL input can be used to change the operation criteria
as described in Table 346 and Table 347.
Table 346: Relay characteristic angle control in Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) operation criteria
Operation mode setting: RCA_CTL = FALSE RCA_CTL = TRUE
Iosin Actual operation mode: Iosin Actual operation mode: Iocos
Iocos Actual operation mode: Iocos Actual operation mode: Iosin
Table 347: Characteristic angle control in phase angle operation mode

Characteristic angle setting RCA_CTL = FALSE RCA_CTL = TRUE
-90° φRCA = -90° φRCA = 0°
0° φRCA = 0° φRCA = -90°
Use of the extended phase angle characteristic

The traditional method of adapting the directional ground-fault protection function to the
prevailing neutral grounding conditions is done with the Characteristic angle setting. In
an ungrounded network, Characteristic angle is set to -90 degrees and in a compensated
network Characteristic angle is set to 0 degrees. In case the grounding method of the
network is temporarily changed from compensated to ungrounded due to the
disconnection of the arc suppression coil, the Characteristic angle setting should be
modified correspondingly. This can be done using the setting groups or the RCA_CTL
input. Alternatively, the operating sector of the directional ground-fault protection
function can be extended to cover the operating sectors of both neutral grounding
principles. Such characteristic is valid for both ungrounded and compensated network and
does not require any modification in case the neutral grounding changes temporarily from
the ungrounded to compensated network or vice versa.
The extended phase angle characteristic is created by entering a value of over 90 degrees
for the Min forward angle setting; a typical value is 170 degrees (Min reverse angle in case
Directional mode is set to "Reverse"). The Max forward angle setting should be set to
cover the possible measurement inaccuracies of current and voltage transformers; a
typical value is 80 degrees (Max reverse angle in case Directional mode is set to
"Reverse").
615 series ANSI 337

Technical Manual
RCA= 0 deg -VG
Negative Positive
operation operation
zone zone
IG
Max forward angle
Pickup value
Min forward angle

GUID-06B18504-D22B-44E5-AB19-3084A1D44C36 V1 EN
Figure 157: Extended operation area in directional ground-fault protection
Table 348: Measurement modes supported by 67/51N, 67/50N stages
Measurement mode 67/51N 67/50N
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x

338 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
67/51N, 67/50N supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the timer
characteristics with the Operating curve type setting.
user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating curve type values "ANSI
Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is identical in both cases.
The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages.
Operating curve type 67/51N 67/50N
(9) IEC Normal Inverse x
(10) IEC Very Inverse x
(11) IEC Inverse x
(12) IEC Extremely Inverse x
(17) User programmable curve x x
(18) RI type x
(19) RD type x
For a detailed description of the timers, see the General function block
615 series ANSI 339

Technical Manual

Reset curve type 67/51N 67/50N Note
(1) Immediate x x Available for all operate time curves
(2) Def time reset x x Available for all operate time curves
programmable curves
4.2.2.8 Directional ground-fault characteristics
Phase angle characteristic

The operation criterion phase angle is selected with the Operation mode setting using the
value "Phase angle".
When the phase angle criterion is used, the function indicates with the DIRECTION
output whether the operating quantity is within the forward or reverse operation sector or
within the non-directional sector.
The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area is
limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse operation
area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings.
The sector limits are always given as positive degree values.
In the forward operation area, the Max forward angle setting gives the clockwise sector
and the Min forward angle setting correspondingly the counterclockwise sector,
measured from the Characteristic angle setting.
In the reverse operation area, the Max reverse angle setting gives the clockwise sector and
the Min reverse angle setting correspondingly the counterclockwise sector, measured
from the complement of the Characteristic angle setting (180 degrees phase shift) .
The relay characteristic angle (RCA) is set to positive if the operating current lags the
polarizing quantity. It is set to negative if it leads the polarizing quantity.
340 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
-VG
RCA = 0 deg
Forward
area
IG
Min forward angle
Max forward angle

Non-operating area
Max reverse angle
Min reverse angle
Min operate
current
Backward
area
GUID-A41E27BC-B5F2-4B8C-891D-BEF592013BEB V1 EN
Figure 158: Configurable operating sectors in phase angle characteristic
Table 351: Momentary operating direction

Fault direction The value for DIRECTION
Angle between the polarizing and operating quantity 0 = unknown
is not in any of the defined sectors.
Angle between the polarizing and operating quantity 1= forward
is in the forward sector.
Angle between the polarizing and operating quantity 2 = backward
is in the reverse sector.
Angle between the polarizing and operating quantity 3 = both
is in both the forward and the reverse sectors, that is,
the sectors are overlapping.
615 series ANSI 341

Technical Manual
If the Allow Non Dir setting is "False", the directional operation (forward, reverse) is not
allowed when the measured polarizing or operating quantities are invalid, that is, their
magnitude is below the set minimum values. The minimum values can be defined with the
settings Min trip current and Min trip voltage. In case of low magnitudes, the
FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs are set to 0 = unknown, except when the Allow
non dir setting is "True". In that case, the function is allowed to operate in the directional
mode as non-directional, since the directional information is invalid.
Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) criteria

A more modern approach to directional protection is the active or reactive current
measurement. The operating characteristic of the directional operation depends on the
grounding principle of the network. The I0sin(φ) characteristics is used in an isolated
network, measuring the reactive component of the fault current caused by the ground
capacitance. The I0cos(φ) characteristics is used in a compensated network, measuring the
active component of the fault current.
The operation criteria Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) are selected with the Operation mode setting
using the values "IoSin" or "IoCos" respectively.
The angle correction setting can be used to improve selectivity. The setting decreases the
operation sector. The correction can only be used with the Iosin(φ) or Iocos(φ) criterion.
The RCA_CTL input is used to change the IG characteristic:
Table 352: Relay characteristic angle control in the IoSin and IoCos operation criteria
Operation mode: RCA_CTL = "False" RCA_CTL = "True"
IoSin Actual operation criterion: Iosin(φ) Actual operation criterion:
Iocos(φ)
IoCos Actual operation criterion: Actual operation criterion: Iosin(φ)
Iocos(φ)
When the Iosin(φ) or Iocos(φ) criterion is used, the component indicates a forward- or
reverse-type fault through the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs, in which 1 equals
a forward fault and 2 equals a reverse fault. Directional operation is not allowed (the Allow
non dir setting is "False") when the measured polarizing or operating quantities are not
valid, that is, when their magnitude is below the set minimum values. The minimum
values can be defined with the Min trip current and Min trip voltage settings. In case of
low magnitude, the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs are set to 0 = unknown,
except when the Allow non dir setting is "True". In that case, the function is allowed to
operate in the directional mode as non-directional, since the directional information is
invalid.
342 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The calculated Iosin(φ) or Iocos(φ) current used in direction determination can be read
through the I_OPER monitored data. The value can be passed directly to a decisive
element, which provides the final pickup and trip signals.
The I_OPER monitored data gives an absolute value of the calculated

current.
The following examples show the characteristics of the different operation criteria:
Example 1.
Iosin(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault
=> FAULT_DIR = 1
-VG
Backward
Correction
angle
tripping zone
IG
RCA = -90 deg
IGsin
Min operating
current
non-tripping
Forward
tripping zone
zone
GUID-BC040813-ECB4-4D8C-9329-6CA29EE239C7 V1 EN
Figure 159: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in forward fault
The operating sector is limited by angle correction, that is, the operating sector is 180
degrees - 2*(angle correction).
Example 2.
Iosin(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault
=> FAULT_DIR = 2
615 series ANSI 343

Technical Manual
-VG
Correction
angle
IG
RCA = -90 deg

IGsin
Min operating
current
Forward non-tripping Backward

operating zone zone operating zone
GUID-20659C27-4886-497F-82E3-6EE27C8B9984 V1 EN
Figure 160: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in reverse fault
Example 3.
Iocos(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault
=> FAULT_DIR = 1
344 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
RCA = 0 deg
Forward
tripping zone -VG
IGcos
IG
Correction
angle
non-tripping
zone
Min operating
current
Backward
tripping zone
GUID-5D6DC72B-7B8F-4B8B-B345-767CC1302BC2 V1 EN
Figure 161: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in forward fault
Example 4.
Iocos(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault
=> FAULT_DIR = 2
615 series ANSI 345

Technical Manual
RCA = 0 deg
Forward
tripping zone -VG
Min operating
current
non-tripping
zone
Correction
angle
Backward IG
tripping zone IGcos
GUID-FD40209E-1D00-4CF5-B593-B2DD971BA33F V1 EN
Figure 162: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in reverse fault
Phase angle 80
The operation criterion phase angle 80 is selected with the Operation mode setting by
using the value "Phase angle 80".
Phase angle 80 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the
following differences:
• The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they have
a fixed value of 80 degrees
• The sector limits of the fixed sectors are rounded.
The sector rounding is used for cancelling the CT measurement errors at low current
amplitudes. When the current amplitude falls below three percent of the nominal current,
the sector is reduced to 70 degrees at the fixed sector side. This makes the protection more
selective, which means that the phase angle measurement errors do not cause faulty
operation.
There is no sector rounding on the other side of the sector.
346 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
If the current amplitude falls below one percent of the nominal current, the
direction enters the non-directional area.
-VG
RCA
Forward
area
IG
70 deg
80 deg
Min forward angle
Non-operating area Max forward angle
80 deg
70 deg
Max reverse angle Min reverse angle
3% nominal Backward
amplitude
1% nominal
area
amplitude
GUID-2F0D9869-85AD-400A-97EC-8295D06D4F9E V1 EN
Figure 163: Operating characteristic for phase angle classic 80
I 0 / % of I n
10
Min forward angle 80 deg
9
8
Forward 7
area 6
5
4
3 3% of I n
2 70 deg
Non- 1 1% of I n
operating
area -90 -75 -60 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 60 75 90
GUID-49D23ADF-4DA0-4F7A-8020-757F32928E60-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 164: Phase angle classic 80 amplitude
615 series ANSI 347

Technical Manual
Phase angle 88
The operation criterion phase angle 88 is selected with the Operation mode setting using
the value "Phase angle 88".
Phase angle 88 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the
following differences:
• The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they have
a fixed value of 88 degrees
• The sector limits of the fixed sectors are rounded.
Sector rounding in the phase angle 88 consists of three parts:

• If the current amplitude is between 1...20 percent of the nominal current, the sector
limit increases linearly from 73 degrees to 85 degrees
• If the current amplitude is between 20...100 percent of the nominal current, the sector
limit increases linearly from 85 degrees to 88 degrees
• If the current amplitude is more than 100 percent of the nominal current, the sector
limit is 88 degrees.
There is no sector rounding on the other side of the sector.
348 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
-VG
RCA
Forward
area
IG
Min forward angle
Max forward angle

Non-operating area
88 deg
88 deg
Max reverse angle
Min reverse angle
1% nominal
Backward
amplitude
20% nominal
area
amplitude
100% nominal
amplitude
GUID-A8A4ACE3-9DDE-46E3-9E0D-E45E12023841 V1 EN
Figure 165: Operating characteristic for phase angle classic 88
I 0 / % of I n
88 deg
100%
100
Min forward angle of I n
90
80
Forward
70
area 60
50
40
30 85 deg
20%
20
of I n
Non- 10 73 deg
operating 1% of
In
area -90 -75 -60 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 60 75 90
GUID-F9F1619D-E1B5-4650-A5CB-B62A7F6B0A90-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 166: Phase angle classic 88 amplitude
615 series ANSI 349

Technical Manual
4.2.2.9 Application
The directional ground-fault protection 67/51N, 67/50N is designed for protection and
clearance of ground faults and for ground-fault protection of different equipment
connected to the power systems, such as shunt capacitor banks or shunt reactors, and for
backup ground-fault protection of power transformers.
delays. 67/51N, 67/50N consist of two different stages.
• Low 67/51N
• High 67/50N
67/51N contains several types of time delay characteristics. 67/50N is used for fast
clearance of serious ground faults.
The protection can be based on the phase angle criterion with extended operating sector.
It can also be based on measuring either the reactive part Iosin(φ) or the active part
Iocos(φ) of the residual current. In isolated networks or in networks with high impedance
grounding, the phase-to-ground fault current is significantly smaller than the short-circuit
currents. In addition, the magnitude of the fault current is almost independent of the fault
location in the network.
The function uses the residual current components Iocos(φ) or Iosin(φ) according to the
grounding method, where φ is the angle between the residual current and the reference
residual voltage (-VG). In compensated networks, the phase angle criterion with extended
operating sector can also be used. When the relay characteristic angle RCA is 0 degrees,
the negative quadrant of the operation sector can be extended with the Min forward angle
setting. The operation sector can be set between 0 and -180 degrees, so that the total
operation sector is from +90 to -180 degrees. In other words, the sector can be up to 270
degrees wide. This allows the protection settings to stay the same when the resonance coil
is disconnected from between the neutral point and ground.
System neutral grounding is meant to protect personnel and equipment and to reduce
interference for example in telecommunication systems. The neutral grounding sets
challenges for protection systems, especially for ground-fault protection.
In isolated networks, there is no intentional connection between the system neutral point
and ground. The only connection is through the line-to-ground capacitances (C0) of
phases and leakage resistances (R0). This means that the residual current is mainly
capacitive and has -90 degrees phase shift compared to the residual voltage (-VG). The
characteristic angle is -90 degrees.
In resonance-grounded networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive resonance
coil current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on the reactive current
measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would disturb the operation of
350 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
the relays. In this case, the selectivity is based on the measurement of the active current
component. This means that the residual current is mainly resistive and has zero phase
shift compared to the residual voltage (-VG) and the characteristic angle is 0 degrees.
Often the magnitude of this component is small, and must be increased by means of a
parallel resistor in the compensation equipment.
In networks where the neutral point is grounded through low resistance, the characteristic
angle is also 0 degrees (for phase angle). Alternatively, Iocos(φ) operation can be used.
In solidly grounded networks, the Characteristic angle is typically set to +60 degrees for
the phase angle. Alternatively, Iosin(φ) operation can be used with a reversal polarizing
quantity. The polarizing quantity can be rotated 180 degrees by setting the Pol reversal
parameter to "True" or by switching the polarity of the residual voltage measurement
wires. Although the Iosin(φ) operation can be used in solidly grounded networks, the
phase angle is recommended.
Connection of measuring transformers in directional ground fault

applications
The residual current IG can be measured with a core balance current transformer or the
residual connection of the phase current signals. If the neutral of the network is either
isolated or grounded with high impedance, a core balance current transformer is
recommended to be used in ground-fault protection. To ensure sufficient accuracy of
residual current measurements and consequently the selectivity of the scheme, the core
balance current transformers should have a transformation ratio of at least 70:1. Lower
transformation ratios such as 50:1 or 50:5 are not recommended.
Attention should be paid to make sure the measuring transformers are connected correctly
so that 67/51N, 67/50N is able to detect the fault current direction without failure. As
directional ground fault uses residual current and residual voltage (-VG), the poles of the
measuring transformers must match each other and also the fault current direction. Also
the grounding of the cable sheath must be taken into notice when using core balance
current transformers. The following figure describes how measuring transformers can be
connected to the protection relay.
615 series ANSI 351

Technical Manual
52 dn
da
P1 s1
P2 s2
A070697-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 167: Connection of measuring transformers
4.2.2.10 Signals
Table 353: 67/51N Input signals
IG SIGNAL 0 Residual current
VG SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
U2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence voltage
RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0=False Relay characteristic angle control
352 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 354: 67/50N Input signals

U2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence voltage
Table 355: 67/51N Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
Table 356: 67/50N Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.2.2.11 Settings
Table 357: 67/51N Group settings (Basic)
2=Forward
3=Reverse
615 series ANSI 353

Technical Manual

2=ANSI Very Inv
3=ANSI Norm Inv
4=ANSI Mod Inv
5=ANSI DT
6=LT Ext Inv
7=LT Very Inv
8=LT Inv
9=IEC Norm Inv
10=IEC Very Inv
11=IEC Inv
12=IEC Ext Inv
13=IEC ST Inv
14=IEC LT Inv
15=IEC DT
17=Programmable
18=RI Type
19=RD Type
Characteristic angle -179...180 deg 1 -90 Characteristic angle
Voltage pickup value 0.010...1.000 xUn 0.001 0.010 Voltage pickup value
Table 358: 67/51N Group settings (Advanced)

2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Operation mode 1=Phase angle 1=Phase angle Operation criteria
2=IoSin
3=IoCos
4=Phase angle 80
5=Phase angle 88
Enable voltage limit 0=False 1=True Enable voltage limit
1=True
354 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 359: 67/51N Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
curve
curve
curve
curve
curve
Table 360: 67/51N Non group settings (Advanced)

1=True invalid
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Correction angle 0.0...10.0 deg 0.1 0.0 Angle correction
Pol reversal 0=False 0=False Rotate polarizing quantity
1=True
2=Calculated I0
Vg or V0 1=Measured VG 1=Measured VG Selection for used Uo signal
2=Calculated V0
Pol quantity 3=Zero seq. volt. 3=Zero seq. volt. Reference quantity used to determine fault
615 series ANSI 355

Technical Manual
Table 361: 67/50N Group settings (Basic)

2=Forward
3=Reverse
3=ANSI Norm Inv
5=ANSI DT
15=IEC DT
17=Programmable
Table 362: 67/50N Group settings (Advanced)

2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Operation mode 1=Phase angle 1=Phase angle Operation criteria
2=IoSin
3=IoCos
4=Phase angle 80
5=Phase angle 88
Enable voltage limit 0=False 1=True Enable voltage limit
1=True
Table 363: 67/50N Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
curve
curve
356 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

curve
curve
curve
Table 364: 67/50N Non group settings (Advanced)

1=True invalid
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
1=True
2=Calculated I0
2=Calculated V0
Pol quantity 3=Zero seq. volt. 3=Zero seq. volt. Reference quantity used to determine fault

Table 365: 67/51N Monitored data
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
615 series ANSI 357

Technical Manual

ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle between polarizing and
operating quantity
ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle between operating
angle and characteristic angle
I_OPER FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Calculated operating current
67/51N Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Table 366: 67/50N Monitored data

1=forward
2=backward
3=both
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
operating quantity
I_OPER FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Calculated operating current
67/50N Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
358 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 367: 67/51N, 67/50N Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz
67/51N Current:
Voltage
Phase angle:
±2°
67/50N Current:
Voltage:
Phase angle:
±2°

67/50N
value
67/51N 58 ms 62 ms 66 ms
value
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression
1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, ground-fault
current with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of
1000 measurements
615 series ANSI 359

Technical Manual

Table 368: 67/50N Technical revision history
B Maximum value changed to 180 deg for the Max
forward angle setting
"Calculated I0" selection and setting parameter for
the "Measured VG", "Calculated V0" or "Neg. seq.
volt." selection for polarization. Trip delay time and
Minimum trip time changed from 60 ms to 40 ms. The
sector default setting values are changed from 88
degrees to 80 degrees.
multiplier setting.
E Unit added to calculated operating current output
(I_OPER).
F Added setting Pol quantity.
Table 369: 67/51N Technical revision history

B Maximum value changed to 180 deg for the Max
forward angle setting.
Pickup value step changed to 0.005
"Calculated I0" selection and setting parameter for
the "Measured VG", "Calculated V0" or "Neg. seq.
volt." selection for polarization. The sector default
setting values are changed from 88 degrees to 80
degrees.
multiplier setting.
E Unit added to calculated operating current output
(I_OPER).
F Added setting Pol quantity. Minimum value for Trip
delay time and Minimum trip time changed from “60
ms” to “50 ms”. Default value for Trip delay time and
Minimum trip time changed from “60 ms” to “50 ms”.
4.2.3 Transient/intermittent ground-fault protection 67NIEF
Transient/intermittent ground-fault INTRPTEF Io> -> IEF 67NIEF
protection
360 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

67NIEF
IG TRIP
VG PICKUP
BLOCK BLK_EF
GUID-F7F1D35D-8897-422C-BF6F-0559BC64100F V1 EN
The transient/intermittent ground-fault protection function 67NIEF is a function designed

for the protection and clearance of permanent and intermittent ground faults in
distribution and sub-transmission networks. Fault detection is done from the residual
current and residual voltage signals by monitoring the transients.
The operating time characteristics are according to definite time (DT).

The operation of 67NIEF can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
Timer 1
IG Fault TRIP
Transient
indication t
detector
VG logic PICKUP
Level Timer 2
detector
BLK_EF
Blocking
BLOCK logic
GUID-500A035B-0431-4278-B5ED-DD22992685E4 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 361

Technical Manual
Level detector
The residual voltage can be selected from the Vg or V0 setting. The options are "Measured
VG" and "Calculated V0". If "Measured VG" is selected, the voltage ratio for VG-channel
is given in the global setting Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (VG,VT). If
"Calculated V0" is selected, the voltage ratio is obtained from phase-voltage channels
given in the global setting Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (3V,VT).
Example 1: VG is measured from open-delta connected VTs (20/sqrt(3) kV : 100/sqrt(3)

V : 100/3 V). In this case, "Measured VG" is selected. The nominal values for residual
voltage is obtained from VT ratios entered in Residual voltage VG: Configuration/
Analog inputs/Voltage (VG,VT): 11.547 kV :100 V. The residual voltage start value of
1.0 × Vn corresponds to 1.0 × 11.547 kV = 11.547 kV in the primary.
Example 2: V0 is calculated from phase quantities. The phase VT-ratio is 20/sqrt(3) kV :

100/sqrt(3) V. In this case, "Calculated V0" is selected. The nominal values for residual
current and residual voltage are obtained from VT ratios entered in Residual voltage V0:
Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (3V,VT): 20.000 kV : 100 V. The residual
voltage start value of 1.0 × Vn corresponds to 1.0 × 20.000 kV = 20.000 kV in the primary.
If "Calculated V0" is selected, the residual voltage nominal value is

residual voltage pickup value is 0.577 × Vn. Calculated V0 requires that
all three phase-to-ground voltages are connected to the protection relay.
V0 cannot be calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages.
Transient detector
The Transient detector module is used for detecting transients in the residual current and
residual voltage signals.
The transient detection is supervised with a settable current threshold. With a special
filtering technique, the setting Min trip current is based on the fundamental frequency
current. This setting should be set based on the value of the parallel resistor of the coil, with
security margin. For example, if the resistive current of the parallel resistor is 10 A, then
a value of 0.7×10 A = 7 A could be used. The same setting is also applicable in case the
coil is disconnected and the network becomes ungrounded. Generally, a smaller value
should be used and it must never exceed the value of the parallel resistor in order to allow
operation of the faulted feeder.
Fault indication logic

Depending on the set Operation mode, 67NIEF has two independent modes for detecting
ground faults. The "Transient EF" mode is intended to detect all kinds of ground faults.
The "Intermittent EF" mode is dedicated for detecting intermittent ground faults in cable
networks.
362 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
To satisfy the sensitivity requirements, basic ground-fault protection

(based on fundamental frequency phasors) should always be used in
parallel with the 67NIEF function.
The Fault indication logic module determines the direction of the fault. The fault direction
determination is secured by multi-frequency neutral admittance measurement and special
filtering techniques. This enables fault direction determination which is not sensitive to
disturbances in measured IG and VG signals, for example, switching transients.
When Directional mode setting "Forward" is used, the protection operates when the fault
is in the protected feeder. When Directional mode setting "Reverse" is used, the protection
operates when the fault is outside the protected feeder (in the background network). If the
direction has no importance, the value "Non-directional" can be selected. The detected
fault direction (FAULT_DIR) is available in the monitored data view.
In the "Transient EF" mode, when the start transient of the fault is detected and the VG
level exceeds the set Voltage start value, Timer 1 is activated. Timer 1 is kept activated
until the VG level exceeds the set value or in case of a drop-off, the drop-off duration is
shorter than the set Reset delay time.
In the "Intermittent EF" mode, when the start transient of the fault is detected and the VG
level exceeds the set Voltage pickup value, the Timer 1 is activated. When a required
number of intermittent ground-fault transients set with the Peak counter limit setting are
detected without the function being reset (depends on the drop-off time set with the Reset
delay time setting), the PICKUP output is activated. The Timer 1 is kept activated as long
as transients are occurring during the drop-off time defined by setting Reset delay time.
Timer 1
The time characteristic is according to DT.
In the "Transient EF" mode, the TRIP output is activated after Trip delay time if the
residual voltage exceeds the set Voltage pickup value. The Reset delay time starts to elapse
when residual voltage falls below Voltage pickup value. If there is no TRIP activation, for
example, the fault disappears momentarily, PICKUP stays activated until the the Reset
delay time elapses. After TRIP activation, PICKUP and TRIP signals are reset as soon as
VG falls below Voltage pickup value.
615 series ANSI 363

Technical Manual
Residual voltage VG
Voltage pickup value
Residual current IG
Transient detection
Fault direction FWD FWD
VG >
Reset timer Reset time
Res
et
PICKUP tim
e
TRIP
Reset delay time Trip delay time
GUID-63841048-C490-4262-8840-EA06FD46E68C V1 EN
Figure 170: Example of 67NIEF operation in ”Transient EF” mode in the faulty feeder
In the "Intermittent EF" mode the TRIP output is activated when the following conditions
are fulfilled:
• the number of transients that have been detected exceeds the Peak counter limit
setting
• the timer has reached the time set with the Trip delay time
• and one additional transient is detected during the drop-off cycle
The Reset delay time starts to elapse from each detected transient (peak). In case there is no
TRIP activation, for example, the fault disappears momentarily PICKUP stays activated
until the Reset delay time elapses, that is, reset takes place if time between transients is
more than Reset delay time. After TRIP activation, a fixed pulse length of 100 ms for
TRIP is given, whereas PICKUP is reset after Reset delay time elapses
364 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Residual voltage VG
Residual current IG
Transient detection
Fault direction FWD FWD
VG >
Reset timer
Reset time
PICKUP
Reset delay time
Peak counter
1 1 2
3 4
Reset time
TRIP
Reset delay time Trip delay time 100ms pulse
GUID-013ADFBD-CD8D-4B21-BAFA-73EFE661AD43 V1 EN
Figure 171: Example of 67NIEF operation in ”Intermittent EF” mode in the faulty
feeder, Peak counter limit=3
The timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in
Timer 2
If the function is used in the directional mode and an opposite direction transient is
detected, the BLK_EF output is activated for the fixed delay time of 25 ms. If the PICKUP
output is activated when the BLK_EF output is active, the BLK_EF output is deactivated.
Blocking logic
615 series ANSI 365

Technical Manual
4.2.3.5 Application
67NIEF is a ground-fault function dedicated to operate in intermittent and permanent

ground faults occurring in distribution and sub-transmission networks. Fault detection is
done from the residual current and residual voltage signals by monitoring the transients
with predefined criteria. As the function has a dedicated purpose for the fault types, fast
detection and clearance of the faults can be achieved.
Intermittent ground fault

Intermittent ground fault is a special type of fault that is encountered especially in
compensated networks with underground cables. A typical reason for this type of fault is
the deterioration of cable insulation either due to mechanical stress or due to insulation
material aging process where water or moisture gradually penetrates the cable insulation.
This eventually reduces the voltage withstand of the insulation, leading to a series of cable
insulation breakdowns. The fault is initiated as the phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the
reduced insulation level of the fault point and mostly extinguishes itself as the fault current
drops to zero for the first time, as shown in Figure 172. As a result, very short transients,
that is, rapid changes in the form of spikes in residual current (IG) and in residual voltage
(VG), can be repeatedly measured. Typically, the fault resistance in case of an intermittent
ground fault is only a few ohms.
366 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Residual current Io and residual voltage VG

COMP. COIL
IGv
Re (Healthy
K Feeder)
0.1
Residual Voltage x 10 (kV)

FEEDER FEEDER MEAS
2
Residual Current (kA)
INCOMER
0
VG
Ictot IGj IGv -0.1 VG
Pulse width
400 ‐ 800 s
Fault -0.2
Point UU
tres
R IGj
tres f Pulse interval
(Faulty 5 ‐ 300 ms
Feeder)
-0.3
Peak value
~0.1 ... 5 kA
GUID-10F6E368-89A9-426D-908D-B92EF2988BE4 V1 EN
Figure 172: Typical intermittent ground-fault characteristics
Ground-fault transients
In general, ground faults generate transients in currents and voltages. There are several
factors that affect the magnitude and frequency of these transients, such as the fault
moment on the voltage wave, fault location, fault resistance and the parameters of the
feeders and the supplying transformers. In the fault initiation, the voltage of the faulty
phase decreases and the corresponding capacitance is discharged to ground (→ discharge
transients). At the same time, the voltages of the healthy phases increase and the related
capacitances are charged (→ charge transient).
If the fault is permanent (non-transient) in nature, only the initial fault transient in current
and voltage can be measured, whereas the intermittent fault creates repetitive transients.
615 series ANSI 367

Technical Manual
VA
VB
VC
GUID-80AEDA11-131C-473D-B6F7-5EFDA102A11B V1 EN
Figure 173: Example of ground-fault transients, including discharge and charge

transient components, when a permanent fault occurs in a 20 kV network
in phase C
4.2.3.6 Signals
Table 370: 67NIEF Input signals
Table 371: 67NIEF Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
BLK_EF BOOLEAN Block signal for EF to indicate opposite direction peaks
4.2.3.7 Settings
Table 372: 67NIEF Group settings (Basic)
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode, Non-directional / Forward /
2=Forward Reverse
3=Reverse
Voltage pickup value 0.05...0.50 xUn 0.01 0.20 Voltage pickup value for transient EF
368 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 373: 67NIEF Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Operation mode 1=Intermittent EF 1=Intermittent EF Operation criteria
2=Transient EF
2=Calculated V0
Table 374: 67NIEF Non group settings (Advanced)

Peak counter limit 2...20 1 2 Min requirement for peak counter before
pickup in IEF mode
Min trip current 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current for transient
detector

Table 375: 67NIEF Monitored data
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
67NIEF Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 376: 67NIEF Technical data
Operation accuracy (VG criteria with transient Depending on the frequency of the measured
protection) current: fn ±2 Hz
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × VG

Trip time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5
615 series ANSI 369

Technical Manual

Table 377: 67NIEF Technical revision history
C The Minimum trip current setting is added.
Correction in IEC 61850 mapping: DO BlkEF
renamed to InhEF. Minimum value changed from
0.01 to 0.10 (default changed from 0.01 to 0.20) for
the Voltage pickup value setting. Minimum value
changed from 0 ms to 40 ms for the Reset delay time
setting.
D Voltage pickup value description changed from
"Voltage pickup value for transient EF" to "Voltage
pickup value" since the pickup value is effective in
both operation modes. Added support for calculated
V0. Vg or V0 source (measured/calculated) can be
selected with "Vg or V0". Voltage pickup value
setting minimum changed from 0.10 to 0.05.
E Min trip current setting scaling corrected to RMS
level from peak level.
4.2.4 Admittance-based ground-fault protection 21YN
Admittance-based ground-fault EFPADM Yo> -> 21YN
protection
21YN
IG TRIP
VG PICKUP
BLOCK
RELEASE
GUID-1F42E8A5-E97D-4C47-BF81-87E82687CC36 V1 EN
370 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The admittance-based ground-fault protection function 21YN provides a selective

ground-fault protection function for high-resistance grounded, ungrounded and
compensated networks. It can be applied for the protection of overhead lines as well as
with underground cables. It can be used as an alternative solution to traditional residual
current-based ground-fault protection functions, such as the IoCos mode in 67/51N,
67/50N. Main advantages of 21YN include a versatile applicability, good sensitivity and
easy setting principles.
21YN is based on evaluating the neutral admittance of the network, that is, the quotient:
Yo = IG / −VG
GUID-2243DAE1-B639-48A9-9A19-AA4159413026 V1 EN (Equation 23)
The measured admittance is compared to the admittance characteristic boundaries in the

admittance plane. The supported characteristics include overadmittance,
oversusceptance, overconductance or any combination of the three. The directionality of
the oversusceptance and overconductance criteria can be defined as forward, reverse or
non-directional, and the boundary lines can be tilted if required by the application. This
allows the optimization of the shape of the admittance characteristics for any given
application.
The function supports two calculation algorithms for admittance. The admittance
calculation can be set to include or exclude the prefault zero-sequence values of IG and
VG. Furthermore, the calculated admittance is recorded at the time of the trip and it can
be monitored for post-fault analysis purposes.
To ensure the security of the protection, the admittance calculation is supervised by a

residual overvoltage condition which releases the admittance protection during a fault
condition. Alternatively, the release signal can be provided by an external binary signal.

The operation of 21YN can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
615 series ANSI 371

Technical Manual
Timer
IG Neutral TRIP
admittance
Operation t
characteristics
VG calculation PICKUP
RELEASE
Blocking
BLOCK logic
GUID-1C8D95FA-FA08-4869-B74B-40D2096F160F V1 EN
Neutral admittance calculation

The residual current can be selected from the IG or I0 setting. The setting options are
"Measured IG" and "Calculated I0". If "Measured IG" is selected, the current ratio for IG-
channel is given in Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (IG,CT). If "Calculated I0"
is selected, the current ratio is obtained from phase-current channels given in
Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (3I,CT).
Respectively, the residual voltage can be selected from the Vg or V0 setting. The setting
options are "Measured VG" and "Calculated V0". If "Measured VG" is selected, the
voltage ratio for VG-channel is given in Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage
(VG,VT). If "Calculated V0" is selected, the voltage ratio is obtained from phase-voltage
channels given in Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (3V,VT).
Example 1: VG is measured from open-delta connected VTs (20/sqrt(3) kV : 100/sqrt(3)

V:100/3 V). In this case, "Measured VG" is selected. The nominal values for residual
voltage is obtained from the VT ratios entered in Residual voltage VG: Configuration/
Analog inputs/Voltage (VG,VT): 11.547 kV : 100 V. The residual voltage pickup value
of 1.0 × Vn corresponds to 1.0 × 11.547 kV = 11.547 kV in the primary.
Example 2: V0 is calculated from phase quantities. The phase VT-ratio is 20/sqrt(3) kV :

100/sqrt(3) V. In this case, "Calculated V0" is selected. The nominal value for residual
voltage is obtained from the VT ratios entered in Residual voltage V0 : Configuration/
Analog inputs/Voltage (3V,VT) : 20.000kV : 100V. The residual voltage pickup value
of 1.0 × Vn corresponds to 1.0 × 20.000 kV = 20.000 kV in the primary.
In case, if "Calculated V0" is selected, the residual voltage nominal value

is always phase-to-phase voltage. Thus, the valid maximum setting for
residual voltage pickup value is 0.577 × Vn. The calculated V0 requires
that all three phase-to-ground voltages are connected to the protection
When the residual voltage exceeds the set threshold Voltage pickup value, a ground fault
is detected and the neutral admittance calculation is released.
372 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
To ensure a sufficient accuracy for the IG and VG measurements, it is required that the
residual voltage exceeds the value set by Min trip voltage. If the admittance calculation
mode is "Delta", the minimum change in the residual voltage due to a fault must be 0.01
× Vn to enable the operation. Similarly, the residual current must exceed the value set by
Min trip current.
The polarity of the polarizing quantity VG can be changed, that is, rotated
by 180 degrees, by setting the Pol reversal parameter to "True" or by
switching the polarity of the residual voltage measurement wires.
As an alternative for the internal residual overvoltage-based pickup condition, the neutral
admittance protection can also be externally released by utilizing the RELEASE input.
When Admittance Clc mode is set to "Delta", the external logic used must be able to give
RELEASE in less than 0.1 s from fault initiation. Otherwise the collected pre-fault values
are overwritten with fault time values. If it is slower, Admittance Clc mode must be set to
“Normal”.
Neutral admittance is calculated as the quotient between the residual current and residual
voltage (polarity reversed) fundamental frequency phasors. The Admittance Clc mode
setting defines the calculation mode.
Admittance Clc mode = "Normal"
IG fault
Yo =
−VG fault
GUID-A831002F-5145-4700-8D9A-C80FBF6757AF V1 EN (Equation 24)
Admittance Clc mode = "Delta"
IG fault − IG prefault ∆IG

Yo = =
−(VG fault − VG prefault ) − ∆VG
GUID-3AD86A5A-52E7-421E-96CC-C69838CB026C V1 EN (Equation 25)
Yo Calculated neutral admittance [Siemens]

IGfault Residual current during the fault [Amperes]
VGfault Residual voltage during the fault [Volts]
IGprefault Prefault residual current [Amperes]
VGprefault Prefault residual voltage [Volts]
ΔIG Change in the residual current due to fault [Amperes]

ΔVG Change in the residual voltage due to fault [Volts]
615 series ANSI 373

Technical Manual
Traditionally, admittance calculation is done with the calculation mode "Normal", that is,
with the current and voltage values directly measured during the fault. As an alternative,
by selecting the calculation mode "Delta", the prefault zero-sequence asymmetry of the
network can be removed from the admittance calculation. Theoretically, this makes the
admittance calculation totally immune to fault resistance, that is, the estimated admittance
value is not affected by fault resistance. Utilization of the change in VG and IG due to a
fault in the admittance calculation also mitigates the effects of the VT and CT
measurement errors, thus improving the measuring accuracy, the sensitivity and the
selectivity of the protection.
Calculation mode "Delta" is recommended in case a high sensitivity of the

protection is required, if the network has a high degree of asymmetry
during the healthy state or if the residual current measurement is based on
sum connection, that is, the Holmgren connection.
Neutral admittance calculation produces certain values during forward and reverse faults.
Fault in reverse direction, that is, outside the protected feeder.
Yo = −Y Fdtot
GUID-B6E3F720-1F9F-4C11-A5DC-722838E8CCDA V1 EN (Equation 26)
IgFd
≈ −j ⋅
Vph
GUID-135FBF62-1C0B-4327-9FA5-E8EC5F215B29 V1 EN (Equation 27)
YFdtot Sum of the phase-to-ground admittances (YFdA, YFdB, YFdC) of the protected feeder
IgFd Magnitude of the ground-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance is zero
ohm
Vph Magnitude of the nominal phase-to-ground voltage of the system
Equation 26 shows that in case of outside faults, the measured admittance equals the
admittance of the protected feeder with a negative sign. The measured admittance is
dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the measured admittance is due to the
leakage losses of the feeder. Theoretically, the measured admittance is located in the third
quadrant in the admittance plane close to the im(Yo) axis, see Figure 176.
The result of Equation 26 is valid regardless of the neutral grounding

method. In compensated networks the compensation degree does not
affect the result. This enables a straightforward setting principle for the
neutral admittance protection: admittance characteristic is set to cover the
value Yo = –YFdtot with a suitable margin.
374 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Due to inaccuracies in voltage and current measurement, the small real

part of the calculated neutral admittance may appear as positive, which
brings the measured admittance in the fourth quadrant in the admittance
plane. This should be considered when setting the admittance
characteristic.
615 series ANSI 375

Technical Manual
IG
Io
A B C
Protected feeder
EA
~ YFd
EB
EC
~
~ Background network
Rn
VG
Uo
Lcc Reverse
Rcc Fault
YBg
(IeTot ‐ IeFd) IeFd
Im(Yo)
Re(Yo)
Reverse fault:
Vph
Yo ≈ ‐j*IeFd/Uph
GUID-2C307D73-EF4A-479A-A6E5-47CAC730188C V1 EN
Figure 176: Admittance calculation during a reverse fault
RCC Resistance of the parallel resistor
LCC Inductance of the compensation coil
Rn Resistance of the neutral grounding resistor
YFd Phase-to-ground admittance of the protected feeder
YBg Phase-to-ground admittance of the background network
For example, in a 15 kV compensated network with the magnitude of the ground-fault

current in the protected feeder being 10 A (Rf = 0 Ω), the theoretical value for the
measured admittance during a ground fault in the reverse direction, that is, outside the
protected feeder, can be calculated.
376 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
IgFd 10 A
Yo ≈ − j ⋅ = −j ⋅ = − j ⋅ 1.15 milliSiemens
Vph 15 3kV
GUID-97B578C9-6433-40A1-8900-69BC344E4756 V1 EN (Equation 28)
The result is valid regardless of the neutral grounding method.
In this case, the resistive part of the measured admittance is due to leakage losses of the
protected feeder. As they are typically very small, the resistive part is close to zero. Due
to inaccuracies in the voltage and current measurement, the small real part of the apparent
neutral admittance may appear positive. This should be considered in the setting of the
admittance characteristic.
Fault in the forward direction, that is, inside the protected feeder.
Ungrounded network:
Yo = Y Bgtot
GUID-5F1D2145-3C0F-4F8F-9E17-5B88C1822566 V1 EN (Equation 29)
I −I 
≈ j ⋅  gTot gFd 
 V
 ph 
GUID-A59B653A-E421-4A65-BD70-77512A1106BE V1 EN (Equation 30)
Compensated network:
Yo = Y Bgtot + Y CC
GUID-F3810944-D0E1-4C9A-A99B-8409F4D3CF05 V1 EN (Equation 31)
IRcc + j ⋅ ( IgTot ⋅ (1 − K ) − IgFd )

≈
Vph
GUID-8F6E7E63-7784-46F1-B1B4-5872F11BDF8C V1 EN (Equation 32)
High-resistance grounded network:
Yo = Y Bgtot + Y Rn
GUID-F91DA4E4-F439-4BFA-AA0D-5839B1574946 V1 EN (Equation 33)
615 series ANSI 377

Technical Manual
IRn + j ⋅ ( IgTot − IgFd )

≈
Vph
GUID-C6108088-7C33-47E0-9F8C-21BAA16B0898 V1 EN (Equation 34)
YBgtot Sum of the phase-to-ground admittances (YBgA, YBgB, YBgC) of the background network
YCC Admittance of the grounding arrangement (compensation coil and parallel resistor)
IRcc Rated current of the parallel resistor
IgFd Magnitude of the ground-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance is zero ohm
IgTot Magnitude of the uncompensated ground-fault current of the network when Rf is zero ohm
K Compensation degree, K = 1 full resonance, K<1 undercompensated, K>1 overcompensated

IRn Rated current of the neutral grounding resistor
Equation 29 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in ungrounded
networks, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the background network. The
admittance is dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the measured admittance is
due to the leakage losses of the background network. Theoretically, the measured
admittance is located in the first quadrant in the admittance plane, close to the im(Yo) axis,
see Figure 177.
Equation 31 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in compensated
networks, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the background network and
the coil including the parallel resistor. Basically, the compensation degree determines the
imaginary part of the measured admittance and the resistive part is due to the parallel
resistor of the coil and the leakage losses of the background network and the losses of the
coil. Theoretically, the measured admittance is located in the first or fourth quadrant in the
admittance plane, depending on the compensation degree, see Figure 177.
Before the parallel resistor is connected, the resistive part of the measured
admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network and the
losses of the coil. As they are typically small, the resistive part may not be
sufficiently large to secure the discrimination of the fault and its direction
based on the measured conductance. This and the rating and the operation
logic of the parallel resistor should be considered when setting the
admittance characteristic in compensated networks.
Equation 33 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in high-resistance
grounded systems, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the background
network and the neutral grounding resistor. Basically, the imaginary part of the measured
admittance is due to the phase-to-ground capacitances of the background network, and the
resistive part is due to the neutral grounding resistor and the leakage losses of the
378 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
background network. Theoretically, the measured admittance is located in the first

quadrant in the admittance plane, see Figure 177.
IG
Io
A B C
Protected feeder
Forward
Fault
EA
~ YFd
EB
EC
~
IeFd IeTot
~ Background network
Rn
VG
Uo
Lcc
Rcc
YBg (IeTot ‐ IeFd)
Forward fault,
high resistance earthed network:
Yo ≈ (IRn+j*(IeTot‐IeFd))/U
Vph
ph
Im(Yo)
Forward fault,
ungrounded network:
Yo ≈ j*(IeTot‐IeFd )/U
Vph
ph
Under‐ comp. (K<1)
Re(Yo)
Resonance (K=1)
Reverse fault:
Y o ≈ ‐ j*IeFd /U
Vph
ph
Over‐ comp. (K>1)
Forward fault, compensated network:
Yo ≈ (Ircc + j*(IeTot*(1‐ K) ‐ IeFd ))/U
Vph
ph
GUID-99A93925-B7EF-4154-A90B-AE3DFC3ABFA1 V1 EN
Figure 177: Admittance calculation during a forward fault
615 series ANSI 379

Technical Manual
When the network is fully compensated in compensated networks,

theoretically during a forward fault, the imaginary part of the measured
admittance equals the susceptance of the protected feeder with a negative
sign. The discrimination between a forward and reverse fault must
therefore be based on the real part of the measured admittance, that is,
conductance. Thus, the best selectivity is achieved when the compensated
network is operated either in the undercompensated or overcompensated
mode.
For example, in a 15 kV compensated network, the magnitude of the ground-fault current

of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 Ω) and the magnitude of the network is 100 A (Rf = 0
Ω). During a ground fault, a 15 A resistor is connected in parallel to the coil after a 1.0
second delay. Compensation degree is overcompensated, K = 1.1.
During a ground fault in the forward direction, that is, inside the protected feeder, the
theoretical value for the measured admittance after the connection of the parallel resistor
can be calculated.
IRcc + j ⋅ (IgTot ⋅ (1 − K ) − IgFd )

Yo ≈
Vph
15 A + j ⋅ (100 A ⋅ (1 − 1.1) − 10 A )
= ≈ (1.73 − j ⋅ 2.31) milliSiemens
15kV 3
GUID-0A181CF5-7EBC-4DF6-BB02-FC76290044D1 V1 EN (Equation 35)
Before the parallel resistor is connected, the resistive part of the measured admittance is
due to the leakage losses of the background network and the losses of the coil. As they are
typically small, the resistive part may not be sufficiently large to secure the discrimination
of the fault and its direction based on the measured conductance. This and the rating and
the operation logic of the parallel resistor should be considered when setting the
admittance characteristic.
When a high sensitivity of the protection is required, the residual current

should be measured with a cable/ring core CT, that is, the Ferranti CT.
Also the use of the sensitive IG input should be considered. The residual
voltage measurement should be done with an open delta connection of the
three single pole-insulated voltage transformers.
The sign of the admittance characteristic settings should be considered

based on the location of characteristic boundary in the admittance plane.
All forward-settings are given with positive sign and reverse-settings with
negative sign.
380 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Operation characteristic
After the admittance calculation is released, the calculated neutral admittance is compared
to the admittance characteristic boundaries in the admittance plane. If the calculated
neutral admittance Yo moves outside the characteristic, the enabling signal is sent to the
timer.
21YN supports a wide range of different characteristics to achieve the maximum

flexibility and sensitivity in different applications. The basic characteristic shape is
selected with the Operation mode and Directional mode settings. Operation mode defines
which operation criterion or criteria are enabled and Directional mode defines if the
forward, reverse or non-directional boundary lines for that particular operation mode are
activated.
Table 378: Operation criteria
Yo Admittance criterion
Bo Susceptance criterion
Go Conductance criterion
Yo, Go Admittance criterion combined with the conductance
criterion
Yo, Bo Admittance criterion combined with the susceptance
criterion
Go, Bo Conductance criterion combined with the
susceptance criterion
Yo, Go, Bo Admittance criterion combined with the conductance
and susceptance criterion
The options for the Directional mode setting are "Non-directional", "Forward" and
"Reverse".
Figure 178, Figure 179 and Figure 180 illustrate the admittance characteristics supported
by 21YN and the settings relevant to that particular characteristic. The most typical
characteristics are highlighted and explained in details in the chapter Neutral admittance
characteristics. Operation is achieved when the calculated neutral admittance Yo moves
outside the characteristic (the operation area is marked with gray).
The settings defining the admittance characteristics are given in primary

milliSiemens (mS). The conversion equation for the admittance from
secondary to primary is:
615 series ANSI 381

Technical Manual
niCT
Y pri = Ysec ⋅
nuVT
GUID-2F4EAEF7-0D92-477F-8D4C-00C7BEDE04CB V1 EN (Equation 36)
niCT CT ratio for the residual current IG
nuVT VT ratio for the residual voltage VG
Example: Admittance setting in the secondary is 5.00 milliSiemens. The

CT ratio is 100/1 A and the VT ratio is 11547/100 V. The admittance
setting in the primary can be calculated.
100 1A
Y pri = 5.00 milliSiemens ⋅ = 4.33 milliSiemens
11547 100V
GUID-9CFD2291-9894-4D04-9499-DF38F1F64D59 V1 EN (Equation 37)
382 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Operation mode
Yo Bo Go
Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo)
Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo)
Settings: Settings: Settings:

• Circle conductance • Susceptance forward • Conductance forward
• Circle susceptance • Susceptance reverse • Conductance reverse
• Circle radius • Susceptance tilt Ang • Conductance tilt Ang
Not applicable in high Not applicable in
resistance grounded or ungrounded systems!
compensated systems!
Operation mode
Yo,Go Yo,Bo Go,Bo Yo,Go,Bo
Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo)
Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo)
Settings: Settings: Settings: Settings:

• Circle conductance • Circle conductance • Conductance forward • Circle conductance
• Circle susceptance • Circle susceptance • Conductance reverse • Circle susceptance
• Circle radius • Circle radius • Conductance tilt Ang • Circle radius
• Conductance forward • Susceptance forward • Susceptance forward • Conductance forward
• Conductance reverse • Susceptance reverse • Susceptance reverse • Conductance reverse
• Conductance tilt Ang • Susceptance tilt Ang • Susceptance tilt Ang • Conductance tilt Ang
• Susceptance forward
• Susceptance reverse
• Susceptance tilt Ang
GUID-77B6138F-168E-4A98-B8D8-018164E79A6B V1 EN
Figure 178: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when

Directional mode = "Non-directional"
615 series ANSI 383

Technical Manual
Operation mode
Yo Bo Go

• Circle conductance • Susceptance forward • Conductance forward
• Circle susceptance • Susceptance tilt Ang • Conductance tilt Ang
• Circle radius
resistance grounded or ungrounded systems!
compensated systems!
Operation mode

• Circle conductance • Circle conductance • Conductance forward • Circle conductance
• Circle susceptance • Circle susceptance • Conductance tilt Ang • Circle susceptance
• Circle radius • Circle radius • Susceptance forward • Circle radius
• Conductance forward • Susceptance forward • Susceptance tilt Ang • Conductance forward
• Conductance tilt Ang • Susceptance tilt Ang • Conductance tilt Ang
• Susceptance forward
GUID-8E434DF4-F67C-473A-AB3E-6492ADD364BC V1 EN

Directional mode = "Forward"
384 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Operation mode
Yo Bo Go
Re(Yo) Re(Yo)
Re(Yo)

• Circle conductance • Susceptance reverse • Conductance reverse
• Circle susceptance • Susceptance tilt Ang • Conductance tilt Ang
• Circle radius
resistance grounded or ungrounded systems
compensate systems!
Operation mode

• Circle conductance • Circle conductance • Conductance reverse • Circle conductance
• Circle susceptance • Circle susceptance • Conductance tilt Ang • Circle susceptance
• Circle radius • Circle radius • Susceptance reverse • Circle radius
• Conductance reverse • Susceptance reverse • Susceptance tilt Ang • Conductance reverse
• Conductance tilt Ang • Susceptance tilt Ang • Conductance tilt Ang
• Susceptance reverse
GUID-B6939383-152A-4EE8-9C1A-3DFD01F6EA89 V1 EN

Directional mode = "Reverse"
Timer
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set with the TRIP delay
615 series ANSI 385

Technical Manual
time setting, the TRIP output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module
operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set with the Reset
delay time setting, the operation timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated. The
timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR, which indicates the percentage
ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time. The value is available in the monitored
data view.
Blocking logic
4.2.4.5 Neutral admittance characteristics
The applied characteristic should always be set to cover the total admittance of the
protected feeder with a suitable margin. However, more detailed setting value selection
principles depend on the characteristic in question.
The settings defining the admittance characteristics are given in primary

milliSiemens.
The forward and reverse boundary settings should be set so that the forward setting is
always larger than the reverse setting and that there is space between them.
Overadmittance characteristic
The overadmittance criterion is enabled with the setting Operation mode set to "Yo". The
characteristic is a circle with the radius defined with the Circle radius setting. For the sake
of application flexibility, the midpoint of the circle can be moved away from the origin
with the Circle conductance and Circle susceptance settings. Default values for Circle
conductance and Circle susceptance are 0.0 mS, that is, the characteristic is an origin-
centered circle.
Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the circle.
386 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The overadmittance criterion is typically applied in ungrounded networks, but it can also
be used in compensated networks, especially if the circle is set off from the origin.
Im(Yo) Im(Yo)
TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP
Circle radius
Re(Yo) Re(Yo)
Circle susceptance
Circle radius
Circle conductance
TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP
GUID-202AAFD7-C61F-4169-881E-25757CECE368 V1 EN
Figure 181: Overadmittance characteristic. Left figure: classical origin-centered

admittance circle. Right figure: admittance circle is set off from the origin.
Non-directional overconductance characteristic

The non-directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting
set to "Go" and Directional mode to "Non-directional". The characteristic is defined with
two overconductance boundary lines with the Conductance forward and Conductance
reverse settings. For the sake of application flexibility, the boundary lines can be tilted by
the angle defined with the Conductance tilt Ang setting. By default, the tilt angle is zero
degrees, that is, the boundary line is a vertical line in the admittance plane. A positive tilt
value rotates the boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis.
In case of non-directional conductance criterion, the Conductance reverse setting must be

set to a smaller value than Conductance forward.
Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over either of the boundary
lines.
The non-directional overconductance criterion is applicable in high-

resistance grounded and compensated networks. It must not be applied in
ungrounded networks.
615 series ANSI 387

Technical Manual

Conductance tilt Ang <0 Conductance tilt Ang >0
TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP
Conductance reverse Re(Yo) Conductance reverse Re(Yo) Conductance reverse Re(Yo)
Conductance forward Conductance forward Conductance forward
GUID-87294480-9029-4D2C-AAAE-358147FA262E V1 EN
Figure 182: Non-directional overconductance characteristic. Left figure: classical

non-directional overconductance criterion. Middle figure: characteristic is
tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure: characteristic is tilted with
positive tilt angle.
Forward directional overconductance characteristic

The forward directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode
setting set to "Go" and Directional mode set to "Forward". The characteristic is defined by
one overconductance boundary line with the Conductance forward setting. For the sake
of application flexibility, the boundary line can be tilted with the angle defined with the
Conductance tilt Ang setting. By default, the tilt angle is zero degrees, that is, the boundary
line is a vertical line in the admittance plane. A positive tilt value rotates the boundary line
counterclockwise from the vertical axis.
Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over the boundary line.
The forward directional overconductance criterion is applicable in high-

resistance grounded and compensated networks. It must not be applied in
ungrounded networks.
388 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
TRIP Conductance tilt Ang <0
Conductance tilt Ang >0
TRIP TRIP
Conductance forward Conductance forward Conductance forward
TRIP TRIP TRIP
GUID-3D218EC0-4681-471D-B279-52D7810C1A24 V1 EN
Figure 183: Forward directional overconductance characteristic. Left figure: classical

forward directional overconductance criterion. Middle figure:
characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure: characteristic
is tilted with positive tilt angle.
Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic

The forward directional oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode
setting set to "Bo" and Directional mode to "Forward". The characteristic is defined by
one oversusceptance boundary line with the Susceptance forward setting. For the sake of
application flexibility, the boundary line can be tilted by the angle defined with the
Susceptance tilt Ang setting. By default, the tilt angle is zero degrees, that is, the boundary
line is a horizontal line in the admittance plane. A positive tilt value rotates the boundary
line counterclockwise from the horizontal axis.
Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over the boundary line.
The forward directional oversusceptance criterion is applicable in

ungrounded networks. It must not be applied to compensated networks.
615 series ANSI 389

Technical Manual

Susceptance tilt Ang >0
Susceptance tilt Ang <0
Susceptance forward Susceptance forward Susceptance forward

Re(Yo) Re(Yo)
GUID-3E09080E-9063-4D3B-A29E-3AA34EB03812 V1 EN
Figure 184: Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic. Left figure: classical

forward directional oversusceptance criterion. Middle figure:
characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure: characteristic
is tilted with positive tilt angle.
Combined overadmittance and overconductance characteristic

The combined overadmittance and overconductance criterion is enabled with the
Operation mode setting set to "Yo, Go" and Directional mode to "Non-directional". The
characteristic is a combination of a circle with the radius defined with the Circle radius
setting and two overconductance boundary lines with the settings Conductance forward
and Conductance reverse. For the sake of application flexibility, the midpoint of the circle
can be moved from the origin with the Circle conductance and Circle susceptance
settings. Also the boundary lines can be tilted by the angle defined with the Conductance
tilt Ang setting. By default, the Circle conductance and Circle susceptance are 0.0 mS and
Conductance tilt Ang equals zero degrees, that is, the characteristic is a combination of an
origin-centered circle with two vertical overconductance boundary lines. A positive tilt
value for the Conductance tilt Ang setting rotates boundary lines counterclockwise from
the vertical axis.
In case of the non-directional conductance criterion, the Conductance reverse setting

must be set to a smaller value than Conductance forward.
Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the characteristic.
The combined overadmittance and overconductance criterion is applicable in

ungrounded, high-resistance grounded and compensated networks or in systems where
the system grounding may temporarily change during normal operation from
compensated network to ungrounded system.
Compared to the overadmittance criterion, the combined characteristic improves

sensitivity in high-resistance grounded and compensated networks. Compared to the non-
directional overconductance criterion, the combined characteristic enables the protection
to be applied also in ungrounded systems.
390 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Im(Yo) Im(Yo)
TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP

Conductance tilt Ang
Conductance reverse Re(Yo) Conductance reverse Re(Yo)
Conductance forward Conductance forward
Circle radius Circle susceptance
Circle radius
Circle conductance
TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP
GUID-1CA6B05B-D011-47E0-B251-7F5F6C18C81F V1 EN
Figure 185: Combined overadmittance and overconductance characteristic. Left

figure: classical origin-centered admittance circle combined with two
overconductance boundary lines. Right figure: admittance circle is set off
from the origin.
Combined overconductance and oversusceptance characteristic

The combined overconductance and oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the
Operation mode setting set to "Go, Bo".
By setting Directional mode to "Forward", the characteristic is a combination of two

boundary lines with the settings Conductance forward and Susceptance forward. See
Figure 186.
By setting Directional mode to "Non-directional", the characteristic is a combination of

four boundary lines with the settings Conductance forward, Conductance reverse,
Susceptance forward and Susceptance reverse. See Figure 187.
For the sake of application flexibility, the boundary lines can be tilted by the angle defined
with the Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings. By default, the tilt angles
are zero degrees, that is, the boundary lines are straight lines in the admittance plane. A
positive Conductance tilt Ang value rotates the overconductance boundary line
counterclockwise from the vertical axis. A positive Susceptance tilt Ang value rotates the
oversusceptance boundary line counterclockwise from the horizontal axis.
In case of the non-directional conductance and susceptance criteria, the Conductance

reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than Conductance forward and the
Susceptance reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than Susceptance forward.
Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the characteristic.
615 series ANSI 391

Technical Manual
The combined overconductance and oversusceptance criterion is applicable in high-

resistance grounded, ungrounded and compensated networks or in the systems where the
system grounding may temporarily change during normal operation from compensated to
ungrounded system.
Im(Yo) Im(Yo)
TRIP TRIP TRIP Conductance tilt Ang >0

TRIP
Susceptance forward Susceptance forward Susceptance tilt Ang <0
Conductance forward Re(Yo) Conductance forward Re(Yo)
TRIP TRIP
GUID-60D007C4-2B08-41FC-A30B-580B3DF37361 V1 EN
Figure 186: Combined forward directional overconductance and forward directional

oversusceptance characteristic. Left figure: the Conductance tilt Ang and
Susceptance tilt Ang settings equal zero degrees. Right figure: the
setting Conductance tilt Ang > 0 degrees and the setting Susceptance tilt
Ang < 0 degrees.
392 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Im(Yo)
TRIP TRIP
Conductance tilt Ang >0
Susceptance forward
Susceptance tilt Ang <0
Re(Yo)
TRIP TRIP
Susceptance reverse
Conductancereverse Conductance forward
GUID-5BF18732-8375-40EE-B64A-73D44D04B906 V1 EN
Figure 187: Combined non-directional overconductance and non-directional

oversusceptance characteristic
The non-directional overconductance and non-directional

oversusceptance characteristic provides a good sensitivity and selectivity
when the characteristic is set to cover the total admittance of the protected
feeder with a proper margin.
The sign of the admittance characteristic settings should be considered

based on the location of characteristic boundary in the admittance plane.
All forward-settings are given with positive sign and reverse-settings with
negative sign.
4.2.4.6 Application
Admittance-based ground-fault protection provides a selective ground-fault protection

for high-resistance grounded, ungrounded and compensated networks. It can be applied
for the protection of overhead lines as well as with underground cables. It can be used as
615 series ANSI 393

Technical Manual
an alternative solution to traditional residual current-based ground-fault protection

functions, for example the IoCos mode in 67/51N, 67/50N. Main advantages of 21YN
include versatile applicability, good sensitivity and easy setting principles.
Residual overvoltage condition is used as a pickup condition for the admittance-based

ground-fault protection. When the residual voltage exceeds the set threshold Voltage
pickup value, a ground fault is detected and the neutral admittance calculation is released.
In order to guarantee a high security of protection, that is, avoid false pickups, the Voltage
pickup value setting must be set above the highest possible value of VG during normal
operation with a proper margin. It should consider all possible operation conditions and
configuration changes in the network. In ungrounded systems, the healthy-state VG is
typically less than 1%×Vph (Vph = nominal phase-to-ground voltage). In compensated
networks, the healthy-state VG may reach values even up to 30%×Vph if the network
includes large parts of overheadlines without a phase transposition. Generally, the highest
VG is achieved when the compensation coil is tuned to the full resonance and when the
parallel resistor of the coil is not connected.
The residual overvoltage-based trip condition for the admittance protection enables a
multistage protection principle. For example, one instance of 21YN could be used for
alarming to detect faults with a high fault resistance using a relatively low value for the
Voltage pickup value setting. Another instance of 21YN could then be set to trip with a
lower sensitivity by selecting a higher value of the Voltage pickup value setting than in the
alarming instance (stage).
To apply the admittance-based ground-fault protection, at least the following network

data are required:
• System grounding method

• Maximum value for VG during the healthy state
• Maximum ground-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance Rf is
zero ohm
• Maximum uncompensated ground-fault current of the system (Rf = 0 Ω)
• Rated current of the parallel resistor of the coil (active current forcing scheme) in the
case of a compensated neutral network
• Rated current of the neutral grounding resistor in the case of a high-resistance
grounded system
• Knowledge of the magnitude of VG as a function of the fault resistance to verify the
sensitivity of the protection in terms of fault resistance
Figure 188 shows the influence of fault resistance on the residual voltage magnitude in
ungrounded and compensated networks. Such information should be available to verify
the correct Voltage pickup value setting, which helps fulfill the requirements for the
sensitivity of the protection in terms of fault resistance.
394 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Ungrounded Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under - Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8

100 100 100
90 90 90
80 Rf = 500 ohm 80 80
Rf = 2500 ohm
70 70 70
Rf = 5000 ohm
60 Rf = 10000 ohm 60 60
Residual voltage (%)

50 50 50

40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Total ground fault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total ground fault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total ground fault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm
GUID-61455001-8012-43B9-867D-AD579844CE7F V1 EN
Figure 188: Influence of fault resistance on the residual voltage magnitude in 10 kV

ungrounded and compensated networks. The leakage resistance is
assumed to be 30 times larger than the absolute value of the capacitive
reactance of the network. Parallel resistor of the compensation coil is
assumed to be disconnected.
Ungrounded Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under‐ Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8

100 100 100
90 90 90
80 Rf = 500 ohm 80 80
70 Rf = 2500 ohm 70 70
60 Rf = 5000 ohm 60 60
Rf = 10000 ohm
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
GUID-2565F0BD-88F7-4678-87D8-40592E9D81BC V1 EN

615 series ANSI 395

Technical Manual
Ungrounded Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under Compensated,

- K = 1.2/0.8
100 100 100
90 90 90
80 Rf = 500 ohm 80 80
70 Rf = 2500 ohm 70 70
60 Rf = 5000 ohm 60 60
Rf = 10000 ohm

50 50 50

40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
GUID-0696D6D3-3811-4E4B-BC7C-AF00A27B95C9 V1 EN

Example
In a 15 kV, 50 Hz compensated network, the maximum value for VG during the healthy
state is 10%×Vph. Maximum ground-fault current of the system is 100 A. The maximum
ground-fault current of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 Ω). The applied active current
forcing scheme uses a 15 A resistor (at 15 kV), which is connected in parallel to the coil
during the fault after a 1.0 second delay.
Solution: As a pickup condition for the admittance-based ground-fault protection, the

internal residual overvoltage condition of 21YN is used. The Voltage pickup value setting
must be set above the maximum healthy-state VG of 10%×Vph with a suitable margin.
Voltage pickup value = 0.15 × Vn
According to Figure 189, this selection ensures at least a sensitivity corresponding to a

2000 ohm fault resistance when the compensation degree varies between 80% and 120%.
The greatest sensitivity is achieved when the compensation degree is close to full
resonance.
A ground-fault current of 10 A can be converted into admittance.
10 A
Y Fdtot = ≈ j ⋅ 1.15 mS
15kV 3
GUID-3631BAB9-7D65-4591-A3D6-834687D0E03C V2 EN (Equation 38)
A parallel resistor current of 15 A can be converted into admittance.
15 A
Gcc = ≈ 1.73 mS
15kV 3
GUID-4B7A18DE-68CB-42B2-BF02-115F0ECC03D9 V2 EN (Equation 39)
396 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
According to Equation 26, during an outside fault 21YN measures the following
admittance:
Yo = −Y Fdtot ≈ − j ⋅1.15 mS
GUID-AD02E209-1740-4930-8E28-AB85637CEF0D V2 EN (Equation 40)
According to Equation 29, during an inside fault 21YN measures the admittance after the
connection of the parallel resistor:
Yo = Y Bgtot + Y CC ≈ (1.73 + j ⋅ B ) mS
GUID-28AF4976-1872-48A1-ACC7-7CC3B51CD9D8 V2 EN (Equation 41)
Where the imaginary part of the admittance, B, depends on the tuning of the coil
(compensation degree).
The admittance characteristic is selected to be the combined overconductance and

oversusceptance characteristic ("Box"-characteristics) with four boundary lines:
Operation mode = "Go, Bo"
Directional mode = "Non-directional"
The admittance characteristic is set to cover the total admittance of the protected feeder
with a proper margin, see Figure 191. Different setting groups can be used to allow
adaptation of protection settings to different feeder and network configurations.
Conductance forward
This setting should be set based on the parallel resistor value of the coil. It must be set to
a lower value than the conductance of the parallel resistor, in order to enable dependable
operation. The selected value should move the boundary line from origin to include some
margin for the admittance operation point due to CT/VT-errors, when fault is located
outside the feeder.
Conductance forward: 15 A/(15 kV/sqrt(3)) * 0.2 = +0.35 mS corresponding to 3.0 A (at

15 kV). The selected value provides margin considering also the effect of CT/VT-errors
in case of outside faults.
In case of smaller rated value of the parallel resistor, for example, 5 A (at 15 kV), the
recommended security margin should be larger, for example 0.7, so that sufficient margin
for CT/VT-errors can be achieved.
Susceptance forward
By default, this setting should be based on the minimum trip current of 1 A.
Susceptance forward: 1 A/(15 kV/sqrt(3)) = +0.1 mS
615 series ANSI 397

Technical Manual
Susceptance reverse
This setting should be set based on the value of the maximum ground-fault current
produced by the feeder (considering possible feeder topology changes) with a security
margin. This ensures that the admittance operating point stays inside the "Box"-
characteristics during outside fault. The recommended security margin should not be
lower than 1.5.
Susceptance reverse: - (10 A * 1.5)/ (15 kV/sqrt(3)) = -1.73 mS
Conductance reverse
This setting is used to complete the non-directional characteristics by closing the "Box"-
characteristic. In order to keep the shape of the characteristic reasonable and to allow
sufficient margin for the admittance operating point during outside fault, it is
recommended to use the same value as for setting Susceptance reverse.
Conductance reverse = -1.73 mS

5 5
Bo ( mS ) Bo ( mS )
4 4
3 3 TRIP TRIP
2 2
1 1
+0.1 mS
0 0
Go ( mS ) Go ( mS )
‐1 ‐1
Backward fault: ‐ 1.73 mS
‐2 ‐2
Yo ≈ ‐ j*1.15mS Forward fault,
‐3 Y o ≈ 1.73+j*Bo mS ‐3 ‐ 1.73 mS +0.35 mS
‐4 ‐4 TRIP TRIP
‐5 ‐5
‐5 ‐4 ‐3 ‐2 ‐1 0 1 2 3 4 5 ‐5 ‐4 ‐3 ‐2 ‐1 0 1 2 3 4 5
GUID-1E9D7C77-63A6-40BF-AF9D-60CF77EA8940 V1 EN
Figure 191: Admittances of the example
4.2.4.7 Signals
Table 379: 21YN Input signals
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0=False External trigger to release neutral admittance protection
398 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 380: 21YN Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.2.4.8 Settings
Table 381: 21YN Group settings (Basic)
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Operation mode 1=Yo 1=Yo Operation criteria
2=Go
3=Bo
4=Yo, Go
5=Yo, Bo
6=Go, Bo
7=Yo, Go, Bo
Circle radius 0.05...500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Admittance circle radius
Circle conductance -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 0.00 Admittance circle midpoint, conductance
Circle susceptance -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 0.00 Admittance circle midpoint, susceptance
Conductance forward -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Conductance threshold in forward direction
Conductance reverse -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 -1.00 Conductance threshold in reverse direction
Susceptance forward -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Susceptance threshold in forward direction
Susceptance reverse -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 -1.00 Susceptance threshold in reverse direction
Table 382: 21YN Group settings (Advanced)

Conductance tilt Ang -30...30 deg 1 0 Tilt angle of conductance boundary line
Susceptance tilt Ang -30...30 deg 1 0 Tilt angle of susceptance boundary line
Table 383: 21YN Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
615 series ANSI 399

Technical Manual
Table 384: 21YN Non group settings (Advanced)

Admittance Clc mode 1=Normal 1=Normal Admittance calculation mode
2=Delta
1=True
Min trip current 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current
Min trip voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage
IG or I0 1=Measured IG 1=Measured IG Selection for used Io signal
2=Calculated I0
2=Calculated V0

Table 385: 21YN Monitored data
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
Y0_REAL FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000. mS Real part of calculated neutral
00 admittance
Y0_IMAG FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000. mS Imaginary part of calculated
00 neutral admittance
21YN Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 386: 21YN Technical data
Operation accuracy1) At the frequency f = fn
±1.0% or ±0.01 mS
(In range of 0.5...100 mS)
Pickup time2) Minimum Typical Maximum

56 ms 60 ms 64 ms
400 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Reset time 40 ms
Trip time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value of ±20 ms
1) VG = 1.0 × Vn
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact, results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements

Table 387: 21YN Technical revision history
B Internal improvement.
C Voltage pickup value setting range and default value
change.
4.2.5 Harmonics-based ground-fault protection 51NHA
Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Harmonics-based ground-fault HAEFPTOC Io>HA 51NHA
protection
51NHA
IG PICKUP
I_REF_RES TRIP
BLOCK
GUID-9A831169-A6A0-4689-9715-A61794979C12 V1 EN
The harmonics-based ground-fault protection function 51NHA is used instead of a

traditional ground-fault protection in networks where a fundamental frequency
component of the bround-fault current is low due to compensation.
615 series ANSI 401

Technical Manual
By default, 51NHA is used as a standalone mode. Substation-wide application can be

achieved using horizontal communication where the detection of a faulty feeder is done
by comparing the harmonics ground-fault current measurements.
The function picks up when the harmonics content of the ground-fault current exceeds the
set limit. The operation time characteristic is either definite time (DT) or inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT). If the horizontal communication is used for the exchange of
current values between the protection relays, the function operates according to the DT
characteristic.

timer or the function itself, if desired.
The operation of 51NHA can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
Timer
Harmonics Level
IG calculation detector
TRIP
t
Current t
comparison
PICKUP
I_REF_RES
Blocking
BLOCK logic
GUID-D9185AD6-2682-46EE-B6A8-5DB16FB2AC9A V1 EN
Harmonics calculation
This module feeds the measured residual current to the high-pass filter, where the
frequency range is limited to start from two times the fundamental frequency of the
network (for example, in a 50 Hz network the cutoff frequency is 100 Hz), that is,
summing the harmonic components of the network from the second harmonic. The output
of the filter, later referred to as the harmonics current, is fed to the Level detector and
Current comparison modules.
402 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The harmonics current I_HARM_RES is available in the monitored data view. The value
is also sent over horizontal communication to the other protection relays on the parallel
feeders configured in the protection scheme.
1.0
Normalized output
0.5
0
0 f 2f
Frequency
GUID-F05BA8C4-AC2B-420C-AE9D-946E815682D5 V1 EN
Figure 194: High-pass filter
Level detector
The harmonics current is compared to the Pickup value setting. If the value exceeds the
value of the Pickup value setting, Level detector sends an enabling signal to the Timer
module.
Current comparison
The maximum of the harmonics currents reported by other parallel feeders in the
substation, that is, in the same busbar, is fed to the function through the I_REF_RES
input. If the locally measured harmonics current is higher than I_REF_RES, the enabling
signal is sent to Timer.
If the locally measured harmonics current is lower than I_REF_RES, the fault is not in
that feeder. The detected situation blocks Timer internally, and simultaneously also the
BLKD_I_REF output is activated.
The module also supervises the communication channel validity which is reported to the
Timer.
615 series ANSI 403

Technical Manual
Timer
The PICKUP output is activated when Level detector sends the enabling signal.
Functionality and the time characteristics depend on the selected value of the Enable
reference use setting.
Table 388: Values of the Enable reference use setting
Enable reference use Functionality
Standalone In the standalone mode, depending on the value of the
Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are
according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has
reached the value of the Trip delay time setting in the DT
mode or the value defined by the inverse time curve, the
TRIP output is activated.
Reference use Communication When using the horizontal communication, the function is
valid forced to use the DT characteristics. When the operation
timer has reached the value of the Minimum trip time setting
and simultaneously the enabling signal from the Current
comparison module is active, the TRIP signal is activated.
Communication Function operates as in the standalone mode.

invalid
The Enable reference use setting forces the function to use the DT
characteristics where the operating time is set with the Minimum trip time
setting.
If the communication for some reason fails, the function switches to use the Operation
curve type setting, and if DT is selected, Trip delay time is used. If the IDMT curve is
selected, the time characteristics are according to the selected curve and the Minimum trip
time setting is used for restricting too fast an operation time.
In case of a communication failure, the pickup duration may change substantially

depending on the user settings.
When the programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics are
defined with the Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C, Curve
parameter D and Curve parameter E parameters.
exceeded, the Timer reset state is activated. The functionality of Timer in the reset state
delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is selected, the reset timer runs until the
value of the Reset delay time setting is exceeded. When the IDMT curves are selected, the
Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset".
The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type
"Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset
404 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
curve type "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off
situation. If the drop-off situation continues, the reset timer is reset and the PICKUP
output is deactivated.
The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or the

situation.
The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operation and reset times.
The setting parameter Minimum trip time defines the minimum desired operation time for
IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used
operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the
value of the Minimum trip time setting. More information can be found in
the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection.
Timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the pickup situation, and the set operating time, which can be either
according to DT or IDMT. The value is available in the monitored data view.
More information can be found in the General function block features.
Blocking logic
4.2.5.5 Application
During a ground fault, 51NHA calculates the maximum current for the current feeder. The
value is sent over an analog GOOSE to other protection relays of the busbar in the
615 series ANSI 405

Technical Manual
substation. At the configuration level, all the values received over the analog GOOSE are
compared through the MAX function to find the maximum value. The maximum value is
sent back to 51NHA as the I_REF_RES input. The operation of 51NHA is allowed in
case I_REF_RES is lower than the locally measured harmonics current. If I_REF_RES
exceeds the locally measured harmonics current, the operation of 51NHA is blocked.
Analogue
GOOSE
receive
Analogue
GOOSE
receive 51NHA
IG PICKUP
MAX I_REF_RES TRIP Analogue
BLOCK I_HARM_RES GOOSE
BLKD_I_REF send
Analogue
GOOSE
receive
GUID-BC6D478E-223B-48C1-BF0B-918B10CDBDB8 V1 EN
Figure 195: Protection scheme based on the analog GOOSE communication with
three analog GOOSE receivers
4.2.5.6 Signals
Table 389: 51NHA Input signals
I_REF_RES FLOAT32 0.0 Reference current
Table 390: 51NHA Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
406 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.2.5.7 Settings
Table 391: 51NHA Group settings (Basic)
2=ANSI Very Inv
3=ANSI Norm Inv
4=ANSI Mod Inv
5=ANSI DT
6=LT Ext Inv
7=LT Very Inv
8=LT Inv
9=IEC Norm Inv
10=IEC Very Inv
11=IEC Inv
12=IEC Ext Inv
13=IEC ST Inv
14=IEC LT Inv
15=IEC DT
17=Programmable
18=RI Type
19=RD Type
Table 392: 51NHA Group settings (Advanced)

2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Enable reference use 0=False 0=False Enable using current reference from other
1=True IEDs instead of stand-alone
Table 393: 51NHA Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
curve
curve
615 series ANSI 407

Technical Manual

curve
curve
curve
Table 394: 51NHA Non group settings (Advanced)


Table 395: 51NHA Monitored data
I_HARM_RES FLOAT32 0.0...30000.0 A Calculated harmonics current
BLKD_I_REF BOOLEAN 0=False Current comparison status
1=True indicator
51NHA Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 396: 51NHA Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz
±5% of the set value or ±0.004 × In
Pickup time 1)2) Typically 77 ms

408 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Trip time accuracy in IDMT mode 3) ±5.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics -50 dB at f = fn
-3 dB at f = 13 × fn
1) Fundamental frequency current = 1.0 × In, harmonics current before fault = 0.0 × In, harmonics fault current
2.0 × Pickup value, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
3) Maximum Pickup value = 2.5 × In, Pickup value multiples in range of 2...20

Table 397: 51NHA Technical revision history
4.2.6 Wattmetric-based ground-fault protection 32N
Wattmetric-based ground-fault WPWDE Po> -> 32N
protection
32N
IG TRIP
VG PICKUP
BLOCK
RCA_CTL
GUID-4C60F4EA-02BE-4E2A-AEE4-CFC5B15A4B08 V1 EN
The wattmetric-based ground-fault protection function 32N can be used to detect ground
faults in ungrounded networks, compensated networks (Petersen coil-grounded
networks) or networks with a high-impedance grounding. It can be used as an alternative
solution to the traditional residual current-based ground-fault protection functions, for
615 series ANSI 409

Technical Manual
example, the IoCos mode in the directional ground-fault protection function 67/51N,
67/50N.
32N measures the ground-fault power 3UoIoCosφ and gives a trip signal when the
residual current IG, residual voltage VG and the ground-fault power exceed the set limits
and the angle (φ) between the residual current and the residual voltage is inside the set
operating sector, that is, forward or backward sector. The operating time characteristic can
be selected to be either definite time (DT) or a special wattmetric-type inverse definite
minimum type (wattmetric type IDMT).
The wattmetric-based ground-fault protection is very sensitive to current transformer

errors and it is recommended that a core balance CT is used for measuring the residual
current.

For 32N, certain notations and definitions are used.

Residual voltage VG or V0 = (VA+VB+VC)/3 = V 0, where V0 = zero-
sequence voltage
Residual current IG or I0 = -(IA+IB+IC) = 3×- I0, where I0 = zero-
sequence current
The minus sign (-) is needed to match the polarity of calculated and
measured residual currents.
The operation of 32N can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
410 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
IG Timer
Directional Level
TRIP
calculation detector t
VG
RCA_CTL
Residual t
power PICKUP
calculation
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-ADCF64D0-2E7F-4806-BE05-9F9D59137D9D V1 EN
Figure 197: Function module diagram
The Directional calculation module monitors the angle between the operating quantity
(residual current IG or I0) and polarizing quantity (residual voltage VG or V0). The
operating quantity can be selected with the setting Io signal Sel. The selectable options are
“Measured IG” and “Calculated I0”. The polarizing quantity can be selected with the
setting Pol signal Sel. The selectable options are “Measured VG” and “Calculated V0”.
When the angle between operating quantity and polarizing quantity after considering the
Characteristic angle setting is in the operation sector, the module sends an enabling signal
to Level detector. The directional operation is selected with the Directional mode setting.
Either the “Forward” or “Reverse” operation mode can be selected. The direction of fault
is calculated based on the phase angle difference between the operating quantity IG or I0
and polarizing quantity VG or V0, and the value (ANGLE) is available in the monitored
data view.
In the phasor diagrams representing the operation of 32N, the polarity of the polarizing
quantity (residual voltage VG or V0) is reversed. Reversing is done by switching the
polarity of the residual current measuring channel (See the connection diagram in the
application manual).
If the angle difference lies between -90° to 0° or 0° to +90°, a forward-direction fault is

considered. If the phase angle difference lies within -90° to -180° or +90° to +180°, a
reverse-direction fault is detected. Thus, the normal width of a sector is 180°.
615 series ANSI 411

Technical Manual
Maximum torque line

forward direction (RCA = 0˚)
-VG (Polarizing quantity)
IG (Operating quantity)
Forward Forward
area area
Zero torque line
Minimum
operate current
Backward Backward
area area
VG
Maximum torque line
reverse direction (RCA = 0˚)
GUID-CA5E7641-C50F-4303-B101-70181A1F3071 V1 EN
Figure 198: Definition of the relay characteristic angle
The phase angle difference is calculated based on the Characteristic angle setting (also
known as Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) or Relay Base Angle or Maximum Torque
Angle (MTA)). The Characteristic angle setting is done based on the method of
grounding employed in the network. For example, in case of an ungrounded network, the
Characteristic angle setting is set to -90°, and in case of a compensated network, the
Characteristic angle setting is set to 0°. In general, Characteristic angle is selected so that
it is close to the expected fault angle value, which results in maximum sensitivity.
412 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Characteristic angle can be set anywhere between -179° to +180°. Thus, the effective
phase angle (ϕ) for calculating the residual power considering characteristic angle is
according to the equation.
φ = ( ∠( −VG) − ∠IG − Characteristic angle )

GUID-A701B02C-78E6-4600-BC87-51096246609C V1 EN (Equation 42)
In addition, the characteristic angle can be changed via the control signal RCA_CTL. The
RCA_CTL input is used in the compensated networks where the compensation coil
sometimes is temporarily disconnected. When the coil is disconnected, the compensated
network becomes isolated and the Characteristic angle setting must be changed. This can
be done automatically with the RCA_CTL input, which results in the addition of -90° in the
Characteristic angle setting.
The value (ANGLE_RCA) is available in the monitored data view.
Forward area Backward area
RCA = -90˚
Maximum torque line
IG (Operating quantity) Minimum

operate current
Forward area Backward area
GUID-75AA11D4-D05D-4B07-9A0C-83F2D87DC1E2 V1 EN
Figure 199: Definition of relay characteristic angle, RCA = -90° in an isolated network
Characteristic angle should be set to a positive value if the operating

signal lags the polarizing signal and to a negative value if the operating
signal leads the polarizing signal.
Type of network Recommended characteristic angle

Compensated network 0°
Ungrounded network -90°
615 series ANSI 413

Technical Manual
In ungrounded networks, when the characteristic angle is -90°, the

measured residual power is reactive (varmetric power).
The fault direction is also indicated FAULT_DIR (available in the monitored data view),
which indicates 0 if a fault is not detected, 1 for faults in the forward direction and 2 for
faults in the backward direction.
The direction of the fault is detected only when the correct angle calculation can be made.
If the magnitude of the operating quantity or polarizing quantity is not high enough, the
direction calculation is not reliable. Hence, the magnitude of the operating quantity is
compared to the Min trip current setting and the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is
compared to Min trip voltage, and if both the operating quantity and polarizing quantity
are higher than their respective limit, a valid angle is calculated and the residual power
calculation module is enabled.
The Correction angle setting can be used to improve the selectivity when there are
inaccuracies due to the measurement transformer. The setting decreases the operation
sector. The Correction angle setting should be done carefully as the phase angle error of
the measurement transformer varies with the connected burden as well as with the
magnitude of the actual primary current that is being measured. An example of how
Correction angle alters the operating region is as shown:
Maximum torque line

forward direction (RCA = 0˚)
Forward Forward
Zero torque line area area
Correction angle Correction angle
Minimum
operate current
Backward Backward
area area
GUID-80D74A1C-3D75-4548-ABA5-318F2E65F91F V1 EN
Figure 200: Definition of correction angle
414 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The polarity of the polarizing quantity can be changed (rotated by 180°)

by setting Pol reversal to "True" or by switching the polarity of the
residual voltage measurement wires.
Residual power calculation

The Residual power calculation module calculates the magnitude of residual power
3VGIGCosφ. Angle φ is the angle between the operating quantity and polarizing quantity,
compensated with a characteristic angle. The angle value is received from the Directional
calculation module. The Directional calculation module enables the residual power
calculation only if the minimum signal levels for both operating quantity and polarizing
quantity are exceeded. However, if the angle calculation is not valid, the calculated
residual power is zero. Residual power (RES_POWER) is calculated continuously and it
is available in the monitored data view. The power is given in relation to nominal power
calculated as Pn = Vn × In, where Vn and In are obtained from the entered voltage
transformer and current transformer ratios entered, and depend on the Io signal Sel and Vg
or V0 settings.
Level detector
Level detector compares the magnitudes of the measured operating quantity (residual
current IG), polarizing quantity (residual voltage VG) and calculated residual power to the
set Current pickup value (×In), Voltage pickup value (×Vn) and Power pickup value (×Pn)
respectively. When all three quantities exceed the limits, Level detector enables the Timer
module.
When calculating the setting values for Level detector, it must be considered that the
nominal values for current, voltage and power depend on whether the residual quantities
are measured from a dedicated measurement channel or calculated from phase quantities,
as defined in the Io signal Sel and Vg or V0 settings.
For residual current IG or I0, if "Measured IG" is selected, the nominal values for primary
and secondary are obtained from the current transformer ratio entered for residual current
channel Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (IG, CT). If "Calculated I0" is selected,
the nominal values for primary and secondary are obtained from the current transformer
ratio entered for phase current channels Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (3I,
CT).
For residual voltage VG or V0, if "Measured VG" is selected, the nominal values for
primary and secondary are obtained from the voltage transformer ratio entered for residual
voltage channel Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (VG, VT). If "Calculated V0" is
selected, the nominal values for primary and secondary are obtained from the voltage
transformer ratio entered for phase voltage channels Configuration/Analog inputs/
Voltage (3V, VT).
615 series ANSI 415

Technical Manual
Calculated V0 requires that all three phase-to-ground voltages are

connected to the protection relay. V0 cannot be calculated from the phase-
to-phase voltages.
As nominal power is the result of the multiplication of the nominal current and the nominal
voltage Pn = Vn × In, the calculation of the setting value for Power pickup value (×Pn)
depends on whether IG and VG or V0 are measured or calculated from the phase
quantities.
Table 398: Measured and calculated IG or I0 and VG or V0
Measured IG Calculated I0
Measured VG Pn = (VG, VT) × (IG, CT) Pn = (VG, VT) × (3I, CT)
Calculated V0 Pn = (3V, VT) × (IG, CT) Pn = (3V, VT) × (3I, CT)
Example 1. IG is measured with cable core CT (100/1A) and VG is measured from open
delta-connected VTs (20/sqrt(3) kV:100/sqrt(3) V:100/3 V). In this case, "Measured IG"
and "Measured VG" are selected. The nominal values for residual current and residual
voltage are obtained from CT and VT ratios.
Residual current IG: Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (IG, CT): 100 A:1 A
Residual voltage VG: Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (VG, VT): 11.547 kV:100

V
Residual Current pickup value of 1.0 × In corresponds then 1.0 × 100 A = 100 A in primary
Residual Voltage pickup value of 1.0 × Vn corresponds then 1.0 × 11.547 kV = 11.547 kV
in primary
Residual Power pickup value of 1.0 × Pn corresponds then 1.0 × 11.547 kV × 100 A =
1154.7kW in primary
Example 2. Both I0 and V0 are calculated from phase quantities. Phase CT-ratio is 100:1
A and Phase VT-ratio 20/sqrt(3) kV:100/sqrt(3) V. In this case "Calculated I0" and
"Calculated V0" are selected. The nominal values for residual current and residual voltage
are obtained from CT and VT ratios entered in:
Residual current I0: Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (3I, CT): 100 A:1 A
Residual voltage V0: Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (3V, VT): 20.000 kV:100

V
Residual Current pickup value of 1.0 × In corresponds then 1.0 × 100 A = 100 A in primary
416 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Residual Voltage pickup value of 1.0 × Vn corresponds then 1.0 × 20.000 kV = 20.000 kV
in primary
Residual Power pickup value of 1.0 × Pn corresponds then 1.0 × 20.000 kV × 100 A =
2000kW in primary
If "Calculated V0" is selected for the Vg or V0 setting, the nominal value

for residual voltage Vn is always phase-to-phase voltage. Thus, the valid
maximum setting for residual Voltage pickup value is 0.577 × Vn, which
corresponds to full phase-to-ground voltage in primary.
Timer
Once activated, Timer activates the PICKUP output. Depending on the value of the
Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or wattmetric
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Trip delay time in the DT mode
or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the TRIP output is activated. If
a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the trip delay is
exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The reset time is identical for both DT or
wattmeter IDMT. The reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting.
percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.
Blocking logic
In the wattmetric IDMT mode, the TRIP output is activated based on the timer
characteristics:
615 series ANSI 417

Technical Manual
k * Pref
t [s ] =
Pcal
GUID-FEA556F2-175E-4BDD-BD0F-52E9F5499CA8 V3 EN (Equation 43)
t[s] operation time in seconds

k set value of Time multiplier
Pref set value of Reference power
Pcal calculated residual power
GUID-D2ABEA2C-B0E3-4C60-8E70-404E7C62C5FC V1 EN
Figure 201: Operation time curves for wattmetric IDMT for Sref set at 0.15 xPn
4.2.6.7 Application
The wattmetric method is one of the commonly used directional methods for detecting the
ground faults especially in compensated networks. The protection uses the residual power
418 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
component 3VGIGCosφ (φ is the angle between the polarizing quantity and operating
quantity compensated with a relay characteristic angle).
Forward
area
Zero torque line

(RCA = 0˚)
Minimum
operate current
Backward
area
VG
GUID-E5FD8983-CAD2-401F-A223-F6FB8AF0E121 V1 EN
Figure 202: Characteristics of wattmetric protection
In a fully compensated radial network with two outgoing feeders, the ground-fault
currents depend mostly on the system ground capacitances (C0) of the lines and the
compensation coil (L). If the coil is tuned exactly to the system capacitance, the fault
current has only a resistive component. This is due to the resistances of the coil and
distribution lines together with the system leakage resistances (R0). Often a resistor (RL)
in parallel with the coil is used for increasing the fault current.
When a single phase-to-ground fault occurs, the capacitance of the faulty phase is
bypassed and the system becomes unsymmetrical. The fault current is composed of the
currents flowing through the ground capacitances of two healthy phases. The protection
relay in the healthy feeder tracks only the capacitive current flowing through its ground
capacitances. The capacitive current of the complete network (sum of all feeders) is
compensated with the coil.
A typical network with the wattmetric protection is an undercompensated network where

the coil current IL = ICtot - ICfd (ICtot is the total ground-fault current of the network and ICfd
is the ground-fault current of the healthy feeder).
615 series ANSI 419

Technical Manual
A B C ΣIG 1
- VG
C0 R0
Σ IG 1
ΣIG 2
L RL - VG
VG
IG f
Σ IG 2
GUID-E2D023A9-1EDC-4C78-8541-2F92D3536F0B V1 EN
Figure 203: Typical radial compensated network employed with wattmetric protection
The wattmetric function is activated when the residual active power component exceeds
the set limit. However, to ensure a selective trip, it is also required that the residual current
and residual voltage also exceed the set limit.
It is highly recommended that core balance current transformers are used for measuring
IG when using the wattmetric method. When a low transformation ratio is used, the
current transformer can suffer accuracy problems and even a distorted secondary current
waveform with some core balance current transformers. Therefore, to ensure a sufficient
accuracy of the residual current measurement and consequently a better selectivity of the
scheme, the core balance current transformer should preferably have a transformation
ratio of at least 70:1. Lower transformation ratios such as 50:1 or 50:5 are not
recommended, unless the phase displacement errors and current transformer amplitude
are checked first.
It is not recommended to use the directional wattmetric protection in case of a ring or

meshed system as the wattmetric requires a radial power flow to operate.
The relay characteristic angle needs to be set based on the system grounding. In an
ungrounded network, that is, when the network is only coupled to ground via the
capacitances between the phase conductors and ground, the characteristic angle is chosen
as -90º.
In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and inductive resonance coil
current compensate each other, meaning that the fault current is mainly resistive and has
zero phase shift compared to the residual voltage. In such networks, the characteristic
angle is chosen as 0º. Often the magnitude of an active component is small and must be
420 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
increased by means of a parallel resistor in a compensation coil. In networks where the

neutral point is grounded through a low resistance, the characteristic angle is always 0º.
As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the selectivity
of the ground-fault protection is achieved with time coordination.
The use of wattmetric protection gives a possibility to use the dedicated inverse definite
minimum time characteristics. This is applicable in large high-impedance grounded
networks with a large capacitive ground-fault current.
In a network employing a low-impedance grounded system, a medium-size neutral point

resistor is used. Such a resistor gives a resistive ground-fault current component of about
200...400 A for an excessive ground fault. In such a system, the directional residual power
protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by the inverse time power
characteristics.
4.2.6.8 Signals
Table 399: 32N Input signals
Table 400: 32N Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.2.6.9 Settings
Table 401: 32N Group settings (Basic)
Directional mode 2=Forward 2=Forward Directional mode
3=Reverse
Current pickup value 0.010...5.000 xIn 0.001 0.010 Minimum trip residual current for deciding fault
direction
Voltage pickup value 0.010...1.000 xUn 0.001 0.010 Pickup value for residual voltage
Power pickup value 0.003...1.000 xPn 0.001 0.003 Pickup value for residual active power
615 series ANSI 421

Technical Manual

Reference power 0.050...1.000 xPn 0.001 0.150 Reference value of residual power for
Wattmetric IDMT curves
Time multiplier 0.05...2.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for Wattmetric IDMT curves
Operating curve type 5=ANSI DT 15=IEC DT Selection of time delay curve type
15=IEC DT
20=Wattmetric
IDMT
Trip delay time 60...200000 ms 10 60 Trip delay time for definite time
Table 402: 32N Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 403: 32N Non group settings (Advanced)

Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used current measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
1=True
Io signal Sel 1=Measured IG 1=Measured IG Selection for used Io signal
2=Calculated I0
Vg or V0 1=Measured VG 1=Measured VG Selection for used polarization signal
2=Calculated V0
422 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 404: 32N Monitored data
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
operating quantity
RES_POWER FLOAT32 -160.000...160.0 xPn Calculated residual active
00 power
32N Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 405: 32N Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz
Current and voltage:

Power:
±3% of the set value or ±0.002 × Pn
Pickup time 1)2) Typically 63 ms

Trip time accuracy in IDMT mode ±5.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2,3,4,5,…
1) IG varied during the test, VG = 1.0 × Vn = phase-to-ground voltage during ground fault in compensated or
ungrounded network, the residual power value before fault = 0.0 pu, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical
615 series ANSI 423

Technical Manual

Table 406: 32N Technical revision history
B Equation for residual power calculation has been
updated: Po = 3VGIGCosϕ. The previous equation
was: Po = VGIGCosϕ. The change has an effect on
the Power pickup value definition.
The previous equation is in use in the 615 Ver.4.0
with SW revision 4.0 and 615 Ver.4.0 FP1 with SW
revision 4.1. All newer versions of 615 series have
the updated equation.
4.2.7 Third harmonic-based stator ground-fault protection 27/59THN
Third harmonic-based stator ground- H3EFPSEF dUo>/Uo3H 27/59THN
fault protection

27/59THN
V_3H_A TRIP
V_3H_B PICKUP
V_3H_C INT_BLKD
V_3H_N
V_3H_RES
BLOCK
GCB_CLOSED
GUID-EDBB2CBA-B779-4B3B-97D1-497219FDB813 V1 EN
The third harmonic-based stator ground-fault protection 27/59THN is used to detect stator
ground fault at the neutral point and at least up to 15...20% from the neutral point along the
stator winding. 27/59THN compares the third harmonic voltages produced by the
generator itself at both neutral and terminal side of the generator for detecting ground
fault.
27/59THN provides two alternative protection methods.
424 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
• Differential of the third harmonic component measured both at generator neutral and
terminal side
• Neutral side third harmonic undervoltage
27/59THN operates with the definite time DT characteristics.
The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and reset
timers.
The operation of 27/59THN can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in
the diagram are explained in the next sections.
V_3H_A Timer
3rd TRIP
V_3H_B Differential Level
harmonic t
V_3H_C calculation detector
calculation PICKUP
V_3H_RES
INT_BLKD
V_3H_N
Bias
calculation
GCB_CLOSED
BLOCK
GUID-705CF2E6-CD84-4DA4-8370-5B894BFD1789 V1 EN
3rd harmonic calculation (terminal side)

3rd harmonic calculation calculates the magnitude and phase angle of the third harmonic
voltage at the generator terminal V 3H _ T . Calculation of the third harmonic voltage
depends on the availability of terminal side voltage and is specified by the Voltage
selection setting.
• Voltage selection setting is set to "No voltage" if phase-to-ground voltages are not
available at the terminal side. Even in a situation where only phase-to-phase voltages
are available, Voltage selection is set to "No Voltage" because phase-to-phase
voltages do not contain a third harmonic component. With Voltage selection set to
"No Voltage", third harmonic-based ground-fault protection is based on third
harmonic neutral side undervoltage protection.
• Voltage selection setting is set to "Measured VG" if the terminal side voltage is fed
from an open delta voltage connection of the voltage transformer. In this case, the
terminal side third harmonic voltage V 3H _ T is same as the measured open delta
615 series ANSI 425

Technical Manual
voltage V 3H _ RES . This is the recommended option for calculating the terminal side
third harmonic voltage.
V 3H _ T = V 3H _ RES
GUID-FA9E6643-E455-45F6-8CF7-E227FA184B9A V1 EN (Equation 44)
• Voltage selection setting is set to "Calculated V0" if all three phase-to-ground
voltages are available. In this case, the terminal side third harmonic voltage is
calculated as a vector average of the third harmonic voltage of all three phases.
1
V 3H _ T =
3
(
⋅ V 3H _ A + V 3H _ B + V 3H _ C )
GUID-BE0AAF09-4061-4E1F-AF03-16693214E14F V1 EN (Equation 45)
• If only one phase-to-ground voltage is available, the Voltage selection setting is set to
the respective phase, that is, "Phase A" or "Phase B" or "Phase C" based on the
available phase. In this case, the magnitude of the terminal side third harmonic
voltage is assumed to be equal to the third harmonic voltage of the phase available.
V 3H _ T = V 3H _ A or V 3H _ B or V 3H _ C
GUID-EC492C5F-586D-465F-A591-CEEB5095C6CE V1 EN (Equation 46)
The function is internally blocked if the magnitude of calculated V 3H _ T is lower than the
set Voltage block value, this also activates the INT_BLKD output.
Differential calculation
The amplitude of the third harmonic differential voltage can be calculated using the
following equation.
VD3H = V 3H _ T + V 3H _ N
GUID-DAB7253C-E06A-4D3A-84B1-8FA66DF15920 V1 EN (Equation 47)
VD3H Magnitude of the third harmonic differential voltage
Terminal side third harmonic voltage phasor

V 3H _ T
Neutral side third harmonic voltage phasor
V 3H _ N
The magnitude of the third harmonic differential voltage UD_3H and the phase angle
difference between the terminal side and neutral side third harmonic voltage
U_3HANGL_T_N are available in the Monitored data view.
426 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Bias calculation
The amplitude of the third harmonic bias voltage can be calculated using the following
equation.
VB3 H =Beta ⋅ V 3H _ N
GUID-8F320BC7-0F6E-4C5A-960C-3272BA65EB18 V1 EN (Equation 48)
VB3H Magnitude of the third harmonic bias voltage
Beta Setting to achieve the required degree of security under healthy conditions
V 3H _ N
The third harmonic bias voltage calculation shown in Equation 48 is valid under all
operating conditions if there is no generator circuit breaker between generator and
transformer. But if the generator circuit breaker is used, it is needed to reduce the
sensitivity of the protection when it is open. The use of the generator circuit breaker is
defined by Generator CB used setting set to "Yes" and the open position is sensed when
the binary input GCB_CLOSED available is FALSE.
With the generator breaker in the open position, function desensitizes the protection by
multiplying the value of the Beta setting with the set constant CB open factor setting.
VB3 H =CB open factor ⋅ Beta ⋅ V 3H _ N

GUID-C9813B89-E86E-4E07-8848-648E88F92EE6 V1 EN (Equation 49)
Neutral side third harmonic voltage is measured via a voltage transformer between the
generator neutral point and the ground. The magnitude of the third harmonic biased
voltage UB_3H is available in the Monitored data view.
Level detector
In the third harmonic differential method, the Level detector compares the third harmonic
differential voltage with the third harmonic bias voltage. If the differential voltage
exceeds the biased voltage, the module sends an enabling signal to start the timer.
If the terminal voltage is not available, that is, Voltage selection is set to "No voltage" the
module compares the neutral side third harmonic voltage V_3H_N to the set Voltage N
3.H Lim.
Timer
Once activated, the Timer activates the PICKUP output. The Timer characteristic is
the TRIP output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module operates, the reset
615 series ANSI 427

Technical Manual
timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operation
timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated.
The Timer calculates the pickup duration PICKUP_DUR value, which indicates the
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK
input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers.
4.2.7.5 Application
Mechanical and thermal stress deteriorates stator winding insulation, which can
eventually cause a ground fault between the winding and stator core.
The fault current magnitude in case of stator ground fault depends on the grounding type.
Common practice in most countries is to ground the generator neutral side through a
resistor. The resistor is selected such as to limit the maximum ground-fault current in the
range of 5...10 A. The same can be done by connecting a single phase voltage transformer
between the neutral side and ground, and with an equivalent resistor on the secondary side
of the transformer.
In a normal operating condition, that is, when there is no ground fault, the residual voltage
is close to zero with no zero-sequence current flowing in the generator. When a phase-to-
ground fault occurs, the residual voltage increases and the current flows through the
neutral. The simplest way to protect the stator winding against a ground fault is by
providing residual overvoltage protection (or residual/neutral overcurrent protection).
However, at best these simple schemes can protect only 95% of the stator winding, leaving
5% of the neutral end unprotected. This is because the voltage generated in the faulted
winding decreases as the fault point becomes closer to the neutral point and it is not
enough to drive the protection. Under certain unfavorable conditions, the blind zone may
extend up to 20% from the neutral point.
A ground fault close to the neutral point is not dangerous, but an undetected fault may
develop into an interturn fault or phase-to-phase fault. Also an undetected ground fault
near the neutral point is bypassing the high-impedance grounding, and then another
ground fault at the terminal results in a catastrophic situation.
Therefore, it is important to extend the protection to full 100%. The third harmonic
voltage-based protection is one such protection which provides effective protection
during a ground fault at the neutral point, and at least in the range up to 15...20% from the
neutral point along the stator winding.
To achieve a complete stator ground-fault protection, two protection functions should

always run in parallel.
428 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
• Fundamental frequency-based residual overvoltage protection 59N, 59G

• Third harmonic voltage-based protection 27/59THN
Stator winding
x E3H (1-x)E3H Generator CB Step-up unit Circuit breaker
Neutral Terminal
side side
RN Rf
Fault at distance ‘x’

from generator neutral
x 1- x
59N/59G protection
27/59THN
protection
GUID-D96A0B1A-E8AB-4B59-ABE8-37DC055BE0FE V1 EN
Figure 206: Complete stator ground-fault protection
Third harmonic voltage-based differential protection

The voltage generated by a generator is not a perfect sinusoidal wave but contains triplen
harmonics voltages. These triplen harmonics appear in each phase with the same
magnitude and angle, due to which they do not sum to zero and thus also appear in the
neutral side of the generator as a zero-sequence quantity. Among all the triplen harmonics
voltages generated, the third harmonic voltage has the highest magnitude with the
magnitude varying between 1% and 10% of the terminal voltage, depending on the
generator design philosophy. However, for a particular generator the magnitude of third
harmonics on the neutral side and terminal side depends also on the active power
generated.
615 series ANSI 429

Technical Manual
V3H_T
Full load
No load
Neutral Terminal
No load
Full load Normal operation

V3H_T
V3H_N
Full load
No load
Neutral Terminal
Fault at neutral
V3H_T
V3H_N
Neutral Terminal
No load
Full load Fault at terminal
V3H_N
GUID-B85C3CE6-129D-4B09-8B77-2FE59D9DA1B9 V1 EN
Figure 207: Typical example of the third-harmonic voltage measured at the generator
neutral and terminals under different conditions
The operating equation of the protection is described in the following equation.
V 3H _ T + V 3H _ N − Beta ⋅ V 3H _ N = 0
GUID-50A69B54-0D20-45BE-92BB-DE939C62A1C5 V1 EN (Equation 50)
The third harmonic voltages V 3H _ T and V 3H _ N are the phasor with its real and imaginary
parts. V 3H _ T is approximately in the opposite direction to that of the V 3H _ N , however the
actual no-fault angle between those two phasors depends on the type of generator
430 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
grounding. For example, the angle is about 145 degrees for a high-resistance-grounded
unit generator.
The equation defines the "operate" and "restrain" regions of the protection. The third
harmonic differential protection operates according to the following equation.
V 3H _ T + V 3H _ N ≥ Beta ⋅ V 3H _ N
GUID-6F60D909-1976-4A51-A8F5-97370554C78A V1 EN (Equation 51)

V 3H _ N
Terminal side third harmonic voltage phasor
V 3H _ T
Beta Setting to achieve a required degree of security under healthy conditions
Magnitude of the third harmonic differential voltage
V 3H _ T + V 3H _ N
Magnitude of the third harmonic bias (restrain) voltage

Beta ⋅ V 3H _ N
Factor Beta, which is a setting, can be determined from the condition.
Beta ⋅ V 3H _ N
=K
V 3H _ T + V 3H _ N
GUID-57727225-84D4-4B41-B618-05351CE22A7E V1 EN (Equation 52)
K is the security factor, for example K = 1.5. Equation 52 must be satisfied in the normal,
healthy condition of the protected generator, with a high enough value for K, so that no
unwanted operation of the protection should be expected, regardless the load on the
generator.
To assure a reliable functioning of the protection, it is necessary that the

generator produces third harmonic voltage which is at least 1% of the
generator rated voltage.
As phase-to-phase voltages do not contain a third harmonic component, in situations

where the VTs on the terminal side are connected between phase-to-phase, the differential
protection in Equation 52 cannot work. In such case, the Voltage selection setting is set to
"No Voltage" and 27/59THN operates as a simple neutral side third harmonic
undervoltage protection.
615 series ANSI 431

Technical Manual
When 27/59THN is reduced to function as only a third harmonic neutral

point undervoltage protection, it is necessary to block the function during
start-up and shutdown of generator and also when there is no sufficient
voltage.
Calculating Beta value

The setting Beta gives the proportion of the third harmonic voltage in the neutral point of
the generator to be used as bias quantity. Beta must be set so that there is no risk of trip
during the normal, non-faulted operation of the generator. If Beta is set high, this limits the
portion of the stator winding covered by the protection. In most cases, the default setting
“3.00” gives an acceptable sensitivity for a ground fault near the neutral point of the stator
winding. However, to assure the best performance, measurements during the normal
operation of the generator are to be made during commissioning.
1. The value of the Beta setting must be set to “1.00”.

2. Loading of the generator is done at 5 to 10 different load points and the third harmonic
differential and bias voltage are measured. Both quantities can be obtained from the
Monitored data view of the function.
3. A graph indicating differential and bias voltages as a functions of the load on the
generator must be plotted.
4. Based on the graph, such value of the Beta setting must be selected that the bias
voltage, even in the worst condition, is at least 30% to 50% higher than the differential
voltage.
The angle between the third harmonic voltage phasors V 3H _ T and V 3H _ N is 150°, and
with the Beta setting value "1.0", protection guarantees a stability margin of 25%. This
requires the value of Beta to be increased so as to increase the stability of protection. The
recommended value of the Beta setting is at least “1.2”.
432 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Magnitude of
3rd Harmonic
voltage in
secondary volts
8
If beta = 1.00 then

Security factor K:
Beta  V 3H _ N
K  Bias voltage
6 V 3H _ T V 3H _ N
If Beta = 1.00, bias voltage
is same as V3H_N
1 . 00  1 . 5
K   1 . 25
1 .2
4
Differential voltage
2 1.5
Stability margin is 25%.

These should be atleast
1.2 30-50%.
Beta = 1.2 recommended
25 50 75 100
% Generator load
GUID-C6CF4531-2EEE-4EE2-AABF-5B177579383E V1 EN
Figure 208: Typical example of variation of the bias voltage and differential voltage
with a change in the active generated load (the angle between the third
harmonic terminal and neutral voltage is 150°)
Calculating CB Open factor

One of the factors, though not major, governing the magnitude of the generated third
harmonic voltage is the generator terminal capacitance. If there is no generator breaker,
the capacitive coupling to ground is the same under all operating conditions. However, the
generator breaker normally exists between the protected generator and its power
transformer.
615 series ANSI 433

Technical Manual
Stator winding
x E3H (1-x) E3H Generator CB Step-up unit Circuit breaker
Neutral Terminal
side x (1-x) side
Rf
3*Cg/2 3*Ct
3*Cg/2
Fault at distance ‘x’
from generator neutral
CN = 3*Cg/2
CT = 3*Cg/2 + 3*Ct
or
CT = 3*Cg/2
GUID-5A88B023-8F01-46B5-8A6F-CD9AD652E2B4 V1 EN
Figure 209: Capacitance seen at generator terminal and neutral side
Cg Phase capacitance of generator stator winding
Ct Total external phase capacitance of the system as seen from the generator
CN Phase-to-ground lumped capacitance of the generator stator winding, between the ground-fault location
and the generator neutral
CT Phase-to-ground lumped capacitance of the generator stator winding, between the generator terminal
and ground-fault location
When there is a generator breaker, the capacitive coupling to ground differs between the
operating conditions when the generator is running with the generator breaker open
(before synchronization) and with the circuit breaker closed.
With the generator breaker open, the total capacitance is smaller compared to normal
operating conditions. This means that the neutral side third harmonic voltage is reduced
compared to the normal operating condition. Therefore, there is a need to reduce the
sensitivity of the protection. When generator breaker is open, 27/59THN desensitizes the
protection by multiplying the Beta setting with a set constant CB open factor setting.
V 3H _ T + V 3H _ N ≥ CB open factor ⋅ Beta ⋅ V 3H _ N

GUID-DE97C93B-50F3-48EA-A558-9FF3ED57FC62 V1 EN (Equation 53)
The CB Open factor setting is obtained during commissioning.
434 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
1. For a particular value of Beta the third harmonic neutral voltage is measured with the
generator in the no-load condition and the circuit breaker in the closed position.
2. With the same condition, the third harmonic neutral voltage with the circuit breaker
in the open position is measured.
3. CB Open factor should be set equal to the ratio of the third harmonic neutral voltage
measured with the circuit breaker in the closed position to that in the open.
4.2.7.6 Signals
Table 407: 27/59THN Input signals
V_3H_A SIGNAL 0 Third harmonic of phase A voltage
V_3H_B SIGNAL 0 Third harmonic of phase B voltage
V_3H_C SIGNAL 0 Third harmonic of phase C voltage
V_3H_N SIGNAL 0 Third harmonic of neutral voltage
V_3H_RES SIGNAL 0 Third harmonic of residual voltage
GCB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False Generator CB in closed position
Table 408: 27/59THN Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
INT_BLKD BOOLEAN Protection internally blocked
4.2.7.7 Settings
Table 409: 27/59THN Group settings (Basic)
Beta 0.50...10.00 0.01 3.00 Portion of neutral side 3rd harmonic used as
bias
Voltage N 3.H Lim 0.005...0.200 xUn 0.001 0.010 Pickup value for 3rd harmonic residual
undervoltage protection
615 series ANSI 435

Technical Manual
Table 410: 27/59THN Group settings (Advanced)

Voltage selection 1=No voltage 2=Measured VG Type of voltage connection available at
2=Measured VG generator terminal
3=Calculated V0
4=Phase A
5=Phase B
6=Phase C
CB open factor 1.00...10.00 0.01 1.00 Multiplication factor for beta when CB is in open
condition
Table 411: 27/59THN Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 412: 27/59THN Non group settings (Advanced)

Voltage block value 0.010...0.100 xUn 0.001 0.010 Low level blocking for 3rd harmonic differential
protection
Generator CB used 0=No 0=No Defines if generator circuit breaker exists
1=Yes

Table 413: 27/59THN Monitored data
UD_3H FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xUn 3rd harmonic differential
voltage amplitude
UB_3H FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xUn 3rd harmonic bias voltage
amplitude
U_3H_T FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xUn Terminal side 3rd harmonic
voltage amplitude
U_3H_N FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xUn Neutral side 3rd harmonic
voltage amplitude
436 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

U_3H_N FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xUn Neutral side 3rd harmonic
voltage amplitude
U_3HANGL_T_N FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Phase angle between 3rd
harmonic terminal and neutral
voltage
27/59THN Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 414: 27/59THN Technical data
voltage:
fn ±2 Hz
±5% of the set value or ±0.004 × Vn

Reset ratio Typically 0.96 (differential mode)
Typically 1.04 (under voltage mode)
1) fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

4.2.8 Multifrequency admittance-based ground-fault protection 67YN
Multifrequency admittance-based MFADPSDE Io> ->Y 67YN
615 series ANSI 437

Technical Manual

67YN
IG TRIP
VG PICKUP
BLOCK BLK_EF
RELEASE INTR_EF
RESET PEAK_IND
GUID-A65D073B-32BA-45B6-9881-77C146EA64F6 V1 EN
The multifrequency admittance-based ground-fault protection function 67YN provides

selective directional ground-fault protection for high-impedance grounded networks, that
is, for compensated, ungrounded and high resistance grounded systems. It can be applied
for the ground-fault protection of overhead lines and underground cables.
The operation of 67YN is based on multifrequency neutral admittance measurement,

utilizing cumulative phasor summing technique. This concept provides extremely secure,
dependable and selective ground-fault protection also in cases where the residual
quantities are highly distorted and contain non-fundamental frequency components.
The sensitivity that can be achieved is comparable with traditional fundamental frequency
based methods such as IoCos/IoSin (67/51N, 67/50N), Watt/Varmetric (32N) and neutral
admittance (21YN).
67YN is capable of detecting faults with dominantly fundamental frequency content as

well as transient, intermittent and restriking ground faults. 67YN can be used as an
alternative solution to transient or intermittent function 67NIEF.
67YN supports fault direction indication both in operate and non-operate direction, which
may be utilized during fault location process. The inbuilt transient detector can be used to
identify restriking or intermittent ground faults, and discriminate them from permanent or
continuous ground faults.
The operation characteristic is defined by a tilted operation sector, which is universally

valid for ungrounded and compensated networks.
The operating time characteristic is according to the definite time (DT).
The function contains a blocking functionality to block function outputs, timers or the
function itself.
438 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The operation of 67YN can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the following sections.
PEAK_IND
Transient
INTR_EF
detector
IG Multi-
Fault
frequency TRIP
direction Operation
VG admittance PICKUP
determination logic
calculation
General
RELEASE fault
criterion Timer
BLK_EF
RESET
BLOCK
GUID-42CB0D5D-7A13-4496-8218-5F65CB8EA6B5 V1 EN
General fault criterion

The General fault criterion (GFC) module monitors the presence of ground fault in the
network and it is based on the value of the fundamental frequency zero-sequence voltage
defined as the vector sum of fundamental frequency phase voltage phasors divided by
three.
V01 = VA1 + VB1 + VC1 / 3

( )
GUID-BF09651A-0D05-4805-9560-011B279495EC V1 EN (Equation 54)
1
When the magnitude of V o exceeds setting Voltage pickup value, a ground fault is
detected. The GFC module reports the exceeded value to the Fault direction determination
module and Operation logic. The reporting is referenced as General Fault Criterion
release.
The setting Voltage pickup value defines the basic sensitivity of the 67YN function. To
avoid unselective pickup or trip, Voltage pickup value must always be set to a value which
exceeds the maximum healthy-state zero-sequence voltage value, taking into
615 series ANSI 439

Technical Manual
consideration of possible network topology changes, compensation coil and parallel

resistor switching status and compensation degree variations.
As an alternative for internal residual zero-sequence overvoltage based pickup-condition,

67YN function can also be externally released by utilizing the RELEASE input. In this
case, the external release signal overrides the Voltage pickup value setting and sets the
internal limit to minimum value.
Multi-frequency admittance calculation

Multi-frequency admittance calculation module calculates neutral admittances utilizing
fundamental frequency and the 2nd, 3rd, 5th, 7th and 9th harmonic components of
residual current and zero-sequence voltage. The following admittances are calculated, if
the magnitude of a particular harmonic in residual current and zero-sequence voltage are
measurable by the protection relay.
Fundamental frequency admittance (conductance and susceptance)
3 ⋅ I01
Y01 = = Go1 + j ⋅ Bo1
−V01
GUID-24706434-ECF8-40C5-8F88-27DD2BB84699 V1 EN (Equation 55)
The fundamental frequency neutral admittance phasor.

Y01
The fundamental frequency zero-sequence current phasor
I 01
(= ( I 1A + I B1 + I C1 ) / 3)
The fundamental frequency zero-sequence voltage phasor
V01
= VA1 + VB1 + VC1 / 3
The fundamental frequency conductance,
Go1
Re Y01 ( )
The fundamental frequency susceptance,
Bo1
Im Y01 ( )
Harmonic susceptance
3 ⋅ In 
Im Y0n  = Im  0  = j ⋅ Bon
  n
 −V0 
GUID-67114C57-781D-4665-A69A-5E43C9E19937 V1 EN (Equation 56)
440 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
where n = 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9
The nth harmonic frequency neutral admittance phasor.

Y0n
The nth harmonic frequency zero-sequence current phasor.
I 0n
The nth harmonic frequency zero-sequence voltage phasor.
V0n
Bon ( )
Im Y0n
The nth harmonic frequency susceptance,
For fault direction determination, the fundamental frequency admittance and harmonic
susceptances are summed together in phasor format. The result is the sum admittance
phasor defined as below.
9
 
Y osum = Re Y01  + j ⋅ Im Y01 + ∑ Y0n  = Go1 + j ⋅ Bosum
   n =2 
GUID-6660AD60-0694-4808-8146-A1F053DA5F7C V1 EN (Equation 57)
The polarity of the polarizing quantity (residual voltage) can be changed

(rotated by 180 degrees) by setting the Pol reversal parameter to "True" or
by switching the polarity of the residual voltage measurement wires.
Fault direction determination

If a ground fault is detected by the GFC module, the fault direction is evaluated based on
the calculated sum admittance phasor Y osum obtained from the Multi-frequency
admittance calculation module. To obtain dependable and secure fault direction
determination regardless of the fault type (transient, intermittent, restriking, permanent,
high or low ohmic), the fault direction is calculated using a special filtering algorithm,
Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS) technique. This filtering method is advantageous
during transient, intermittent and restriking ground faults with dominantly non-sinusoidal
or transient content. It is equally valid during continuous (stable) ground faults.
The concept of CPS is illustrated in Figure 212. It is the result of adding values of the
measured sum admittance phasors together in phasor format in chronological order during
the fault. Using the discrete sum admittance phasors Y osum in different time instants
(t1...t5), the corresponding accumulated sum admittance phasor Y osum _ CPS is calculated.
This phasor is used as directional phasor in determining the direction of the fault.
615 series ANSI 441

Technical Manual
Y osum _ CPS (t1 ) = Y osum (t1 )

GUID-EDC80710-FA5D-4966-AE81-888E8B4D2CD5 V1 EN (Equation 58)
Y osum _ CPS (t2 ) = Y osum (t1 ) + Y osum (t2 )

GUID-696EFC44-7AF4-45A9-A3F4-11C153143D55 V1 EN (Equation 59)
Y osum _ CPS (t3 ) = Y osum (t1 ) + Y osum (t2 ) + Y osum (t3 )

GUID-A18538B4-EFCD-4844-AEFB-0BB92358582A V1 EN (Equation 60)
Y osum _ CPS (t4 ) = Y osum (t1 ) + Y osum (t2 ) + Y osum (t3 ) + Y osum (t4 )
GUID-EBDE2421-0F49-4141-87E2-433DF64503C9 V1 EN (Equation 61)
Y osum _ CPS (t5 ) = Y osum (t1 ) + Y osum (t2 ) + Y osum (t3 ) + Y osum (t4 ) + Y osum (t5 )
GUID-8E0FAAAB-F656-4FCF-AC71-42C357E77F3E V1 EN (Equation 62)
GUID-69E030E7-F3CF-4872-AF6A-3D12002EA3AC V1 EN
Figure 212: Principle of Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS)
The CPS technique provides a stable directional phasor quantity despite individual
phasors varying in magnitude and phase angle in time due to a non-stable fault type such
as restriking or intermittent ground fault. This is also true for harmonic components
included in the sum admittance phasor. Harmonics have typically a highly fluctuating
character.
Harmonic components provide a more distinctive directional determination in

compensated networks than the fundamental frequency component. The higher the
frequencies, the compensation coil appears as very high impedance and the harmonics are
not affected by compensation coil and degree of compensation. When harmonics are
442 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
present, they cause the sum admittance phasor to behave as in case of an ungrounded
network, where directional phasors point in fully opposite directions in the faulty and
healthy feeder.
The direction of the 67YN function is defined with setting Directional mode as “Forward”
or “Reverse”. The operation characteristic is defined by tilted operation sector as
illustrated in Figure 213. The characteristic provides universal applicability, that is, it is
valid both in compensated and ungrounded networks, also if the compensation coil is
temporarily switched off. The tilt of the operation sector is defined with setting Tilt angle
to compensate the measurement errors of residual current and voltage transformers. The
typical setting value of 5 degrees is recommended, but it should always reflect the actual
maximum expected measurement errors.
In case of ungrounded network operation, adequate tilt angle must be

allowed to ensure dependable operation of 67YN.
In Figure 214, phasors 1...4 demonstrate the behavior of the directional phasor in different
network fault conditions.
• Phasor 1 depicts the direction of accumulated sum admittance phasor in case of
ground fault outside the protected feeder (assuming that the admittance of the
protected feeder is dominantly capacitive). The result is valid regardless of the fault
type (low ohmic, high(er) ohmic, permanent, intermittent or restriking). In case
harmonic components are present in the fault quantities, they would turn the phasor
align to the negative Im(Yo) axis.
• Phasor 2 depicts the direction of accumulated sum admittance phasor in case of
ground fault inside the protected feeder when the network is ungrounded. The result
is also valid in compensated networks when there are harmonic components present
in the fault quantities (typically low ohmic permanent or intermittent or restriking
fault). In this case, the result is valid regardless of network’s actual compensation
degree. Harmonics would turn the phasor align to the positive Im(Yo) axis.
• Phasors 3 and 4 depict the direction of accumulated sum admittance phasor in case of
higher-ohmic ground fault in the protected feeder without harmonics in the fault
quantities when the network is compensated. As no harmonic components are
present, the phase angle of the accumulated phasor is determined by the
compensation degree of the network. With high degree of overcompensation, the
phasor turns towards the negative Im(Yo) axis (as phasor 4).
615 series ANSI 443

Technical Manual
GUID-8E589324-78E1-4E05-8FD9-49607B977DA2 V1 EN
Figure 213: Directional characteristic of 67YN
The residual current is recommended to be measured with accurate core

balance current transformer to minimize the measurement errors,
especially phase displacement. This is especially important, when high
sensitivity of protection is targeted.
The characteristic Tilt angle should reflect the measurement errors, that is,
the larger the measurement errors, the larger the Tilt angle setting should
be. Typical setting value of 5 degrees is recommended.
The detected fault direction is available in the Monitored data view as parameter
DIRECTION.
444 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
To adapt the fault direction determination to possible fault direction change during the
fault, for example, during manual fault location process, a cyclic accumulation of sum
admittance phasors is conducted. The duration of this directional evaluation cycle is 1.2 ·
Reset delay time (minimum of 600 ms). If the fault direction based on the cyclic phasor
accumulation is opposite to the function direction output for Reset delay time or 500 ms
(minimum of 500 ms), the function is reset and fault direction calculation of 67YN is
restarted.
In case the ground-fault protection is alarming, the 67YN includes also a RESET input,
which can be utilized to externally re-trigger the fault direction determination, if re-
evaluation of fault direction during a persistent ground fault is required. It is also
recommended to connect the pickup signal of non-directional ground-fault protection
(51N, 51G, 50N, 50G, 50N-3, 50G-3), set to trip in case of a cross-country fault, to RESET
input of 67YN to reset phasor accumulation during a cross-country fault. 67YN is then
able to adapt to possible fault direction change more rapidly, if single phase ground fault
still persists in the system after the other faulty feeder has been tripped (cross-country fault
has been transformed back to a single phase ground fault).
The direction of the 67YN function is supervised by a settable current magnitude

threshold. The trip current used in the magnitude supervision is measured with a special
filtering method, which provides very stable residual current estimate regardless of the
fault type. This stabilized current estimate is the result from fundamental frequency
admittance calculation utilizing the CPS technique. The stabilized current value is
obtained (after conversion) from the corresponding admittance value by multiplying it
with the system nominal phase-to-ground voltage value, which is entered as a base value
for the residual voltage (Vbaseres). The equations for calculating the stabilized values of the
fundamental frequency admittance and the corresponding current are given below.
3 ⋅ I01 CPS
Yo1 stab = = Re Yo1 stab  + j ⋅ Im Yo1 stab  = Gost
1 1
ab + j ⋅ Bostab
−V01CPS    
GUID-66B0BAEF-BDA1-40CF-B5A0-71B7D0284C03 V1 EN (Equation 63)
The stabilized fundamental frequency admittance estimate, which is result from fundamental
Yo1 stab frequency admittance calculation utilizing the Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS) technique.
The fundamental frequency zero-sequence current phasor calculated utilizing the Cumulative
I 01 CPS Phasor Summing (CPS) technique.
The fundamental frequency zero-sequence voltage phasor calculated utilizing the Cumulative
V01 CPS Phasor Summing (CPS) technique.
The real-part of stabilized fundamental frequency conductance estimate.

Go1stab
The imaginary part of stabilized fundamental frequency susceptance estimate.
Bo1stab
615 series ANSI 445

Technical Manual
Io1 stab = (Gostab

1 1
+ j ⋅ Bostab 1
) ⋅ Vbaseres = IoCosstab 1
+ j ⋅ IoSinstab
GUID-0D93E27A-4B7A-4166-928B-40E7EEED0CDE V1 EN (Equation 64)
The stabilized fundamental frequency residual current estimate, which is obtained (after
I o1 stab conversion) from the corresponding admittance value by multiplying it with the system nominal
phase-to-ground voltage value.
The real-part of stabilized fundamental frequency residual current estimate.
I o1 Cosstab
The imaginary-part of stabilized fundamental frequency residual current estimate.
I o1 Sinstab
The main advantage of the filtering method is that due to the admittance calculation, the
resulting current value does not depend on the value of fault resistance, that is, the
estimated current magnitude equals the value that would be measured during a solid
ground fault (Rf = 0 Ω). Another advantage of the method is that it is capable of estimating
correct current magnitude also during intermittent or restriking faults.
The setting Min trip current defines the minimum trip current.
Setting Operating quantity defines whether the current magnitude supervision is based on
either the “Adaptive” or “Amplitude” methods.
When “Adaptive” is selected, the method adapts the principle of magnitude supervision
automatically to the system grounding condition. In case the phase angle of accumulated
sum admittance phasor is greater than 45 degrees, the set minimum trip current threshold
1
is compared to the amplitude of I o stab (see Figure 214). In case the phase angle of
accumulated sum admittance phasor is below 45 degrees, the set minimum trip current
1
threshold is compared to the resistive component of I o stab . This automatic adaptation of
the magnitude supervision enables secure and dependable directional determination in
compensated networks, and it is also valid when the network is ungrounded
(compensation coil is switched off).
In case operation direction is set to reverse, the resistive and amplitude sectors are
mirrored in the operation characteristics.
When “Amplitude” is selected, the set minimum trip current threshold is compared to the
1
amplitude of I o stab . This selection can be used in ungrounded networks.
In compensated networks, setting Operating quantity should be set to

“Adaptive”. This enables secure and dependable directional
446 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
determination on compensated networks and it is also valid when

compensation coil is switched off and network becomes ungrounded.
GUID-0A818501-E0BD-402F-BF8B-22BA6B91BBA2 V1 EN
Figure 214: Illustration of amplitude and resistive current sectors if Operating quantity
is set “Adaptive” and Directional mode is set “Forward”
The setting rules for current thresholds are given below.
In case the “Adaptive” operating quantity is selected, the setting Min trip current should
be set to value:
[ pu ] < p ⋅ IRtot
GUID-77CF1715-3730-414C-BC8E-075792F791FB V1 EN (Equation 65)
IRtot The total resistive ground-fault current of the network corresponding to the resistive current of the
parallel resistor of the coil and the natural losses of the system (typically in order of 1...5 % of the total
capacitive ground-fault current of the network).
615 series ANSI 447

Technical Manual
p security factor = 0.5…0.7
This setting should be set based on the total resistive ground-fault current of the network
including the parallel resistor of the coil and the network losses. It must be set to a value
which is lower than total resistive ground-fault current in order to enable dependable
operation.
For example, if the resistive current of the parallel resistor is 10 A (at primary voltage
level), then a value of 0.5 · 10 A = 5 A could be used. The same setting is also applicable
in case the coil is disconnected and the network becomes ungrounded (as in this case this
1
setting is compared to the amplitude of I o stab ). The selected setting value must never
exceed the ampere value of the parallel resistor in order to allow operation in the faulty
feeder. In case of smaller ampere value of the parallel resistor, for example 5 A, the
recommended security factor should be larger, for example 0.7, so that sufficient margin
for CT and VT errors can be achieved.
In case the “Amplitude” operating quantity is selected, the setting should be selected
based on the capacitive ground-fault current values produced by the background network
in case of a solid ground fault with a security margin.
The main task of the current magnitude supervision module is to secure

the correct directional determination of a ground fault, so that only the
faulty feeder is disconnected or alarmed. Therefore, the threshold values
should be selected carefully and not set too high as this can inhibit the
disconnection of the faulty feeder.
The residual current should be measured with accurate core balance

current transformer to minimize the measurement errors, especially phase
displacement.
Transient detector
The Transient detector module is used for detecting transients in the residual current and
zero-sequence voltage signals. Whenever transient is detected, this is indicated with the
PEAK_IND output. When the number of detected transients equals or exceeds the Peak
counter limit setting (without the function being reset, depending on the drop-off time set
with the Reset delay time setting), INTR_EF output is activated. This indicates detection
of restriking or intermittent ground fault in the network. Transient detector affects the
operation of 67YN (PICKUP and TRIP outputs) when operation mode is “Intermittent
EF”. For other operation modes, (“General EF”, “Alarming EF”), PEAK_IND and
448 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
INTR_EF outputs can be used for monitoring purposes. The operation of the Transient
detector is illustrated in Figure 215.
Several factors affect the magnitude and frequency of fault transients,

such as the fault inception angle on the voltage wave, fault location, fault
resistance and the parameters of the feeders and the supplying
transformers. If the fault is permanent (non-transient) in nature, the initial
fault transient in current and voltage can be measured, whereas the
intermittent fault creates repetitive transients. The practical sensitivity of
transient detection is limited to approximately few hundreds of ohms of
fault resistance. Therefore the application of transient detection is limited
to low ohmic ground faults.
VG
IG
PEAK_IND
GFC
release
Reset timer
INTR_EF
Reset delay time Reset delay time
GUID-A5B0DD30-710A-4E95-82F8-1D2692452239 V2 EN
Figure 215: Example of operation of Transient detector: indication of detected

transient by PEAK_IND output and detection of restriking or intermittent
ground fault by INTR_EF output (setting Peak counter limit = 3)
615 series ANSI 449

Technical Manual
Operation logic
67YN supports three operation modes selected with setting Operation mode: “General
EF”, “Alarming EF” and “Intermittent EF”.
Operation mode “General EF” is applicable in all kinds of ground faults in ungrounded
and compensated networks. It is intended to detect all kinds of ground faults regardless of
their type (transient, intermittent or restriking, permanent, high or low ohmic). The setting
Voltage pickup value defines the basic sensitivity of the 67YN function.
In “General EF” mode, the operate timer is started in the following conditions.
• Ground fault is detected by the General Fault Criterion (GFC)

• Fault direction equals Directional mode setting
• Estimated stabilized fundamental frequency residual current exceeds the set Min trip
current level
The PICKUP output is activated once Pickup delay time has elapsed. TRIP output is
activated once Trip delay time has elapsed and the above three conditions are valid. Reset
timer is started if any of the above three conditions is not valid. In case fault is transient and
self-extinguishes, PICKUP output stays activated until the elapse of reset timer (setting
Reset delay time). After TRIP output activation, PICKUP and TRIP outputs are reset
immediately, if any of the above three conditions is not valid. The pickup duration value
PICKUP_DUR, available in the Monitored data view, indicates the percentage ratio of the
pickup situation and the set operating time.
In case detection of temporary ground faults is not desired, the activation

of PICKUP output can be delayed with setting Pickup delay time. The
same setting can be also used to avoid restarting of the function during
long lasting post-fault oscillations, if time constant of post-fault
oscillations is very long (network losses and damping is low).
To keep the operate timer activated between current spikes during

intermittent or restriking ground fault, the Reset delay time should be set
to a value exceeding the maximum expected time interval between fault
spikes (obtained at full resonance condition). Recommended value is at
least 300 ms.
450 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
VG
IG
GFC release
Trip timer
Reset timer
PICKUP
TRIP
Pickup delay time Pickup delay time
GUID-D2629C82-34BA-4E64-99E8-B3541D5016B4 V1 EN
Figure 216: Operation in “General EF” mode
Operation mode “Alarming EF” is applicable in all kinds of ground faults in ungrounded
and compensated networks, where fault detection is only alarming. It is intended to detect
ground faults regardless of their type (transient, intermittent or restriking, permanent, high
or low ohmic). The setting Voltage pickup value defines the basic sensitivity of the 67YN
function. In “Alarming EF” mode, the operate timer is started during the following
conditions.
• Ground fault is detected by the GFC

current level
615 series ANSI 451

Technical Manual
The PICKUP output is activated once Pickup delay time has elapsed. TRIP output is not
valid in the “Alarming EF” mode. Reset timer is started if any of the above three
conditions are not valid. In case the fault is transient and self-extinguishes, PICKUP
output stays activated until the elapse of reset timer (setting Reset delay time).
In case detection of temporary ground faults is not desired, the activation

of PICKUP output can be delayed with setting Pickup delay time.

intermittent or restriking ground fault, the Reset delay time should be set
to a value exceeding the maximum expected time interval between fault
spikes (obtained at full resonance condition). The recommended value is
at least 300 ms.
452 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
VG
IG
GFC release
Trip timer
Reset timer
PICKUP
TRIP
Reset delay time
Pickup delay time Pickup delay time
GUID-8ED1EC6A-214F-4837-A8BA-EBDA8299F785 V1 EN
Figure 217: Operation in “Alarming EF” mode
Operation mode “Intermittent EF” is dedicated for detecting restriking or intermittent

ground faults. A required number of intermittent ground fault transients set with the Peak
counter limit setting must be detected for operation. Therefore, transient faults or
permanent faults with only initial fault ignition transient are not detected in “Intermittent
EF” mode. The application of “Intermittent EF” mode is limited to low ohmic intermittent
or restriking ground faults.
In the “Intermittent EF” mode, the operate timer is started when the following conditions
are met.
615 series ANSI 453

Technical Manual
• Transient is detected by the Transient detector (indicated with PEAK_IND output)

• Ground fault is detected by the GFC at time of transient
current level
When a required number of intermittent ground-fault transients set with the Peak counter
limit setting are detected without the function being reset (depends on the drop-off time set
with the Reset delay time setting), the PICKUP output is activated. The INTR_EF output
is activated to indicate the fault type is intermittent or restriking ground fault. The operate
timer is kept activated as long as transients occur during the drop-off time defined by
setting Reset delay time.
The TRIP output is activated when Trip delay time has elapsed, required number of
transients has been detected, ground fault is detected by the GFC, fault direction matches
the Directional mode setting and estimated stabilized fundamental frequency residual
current exceeds set Minimum trip current setting.
The Reset delay time starts to elapse from each detected transient. Function is reset if time
between current peaks is more that Reset delay time or if the General Fault Criterion
release is reset. After TRIP output activation, PICKUP and TRIP outputs are reset
immediately at the falling edge of General Fault Criterion release, that is, when zero-
sequence voltage falls below Voltage pickup value. This should be considered if
“Intermittent EF" mode is applied in case ground faults are only alarmed to avoid
repetitive pickup and trip events.

intermittent or restriking ground fault, Reset delay time should be set to a
value exceeding the maximum expected time interval between (obtained
at full resonance condition). The recommended value is at least 300 ms.
454 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
VG
IG
PEAK_IND
GFC release
Trip timer
Reset timer
INTR_EF
PICKUP
TRIP
GUID-21DD081C-AB4D-4120-A8AB-4F29E2EE4117 V1 EN
Figure 218: Operation in “Intermittent EF” mode, Peak counter limit = 3
Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes are
615 series ANSI 455

Technical Manual
Timer
If the detected fault direction is opposite to the set directional mode and GFC release is
active, BLK_EF output is activated once Pickup delay time has elapsed. Reset timer is
activated at the falling edge of General Fault Criterion release, that is, when zero-sequence
voltage falls below Voltage pickup value. BLK_EF is reset once the reset delay time
elapses. Activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the BLK_EF output and resets Timer.
VG
IG
GFC release
Reset timer
BLK_EF
Reset delay time Reset delay time
Pickupt delay time Pickup delay time
GUID-A2A55E4C-395C-43BB-A942-2991EA37E3A4 V1 EN
Figure 219: Activation of BLK_EF output (indication that fault is located opposite to
the set operate direction)
456 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.2.8.5 Application
67YN provides selective directional ground-fault protection for high-impedance

grounded networks, that is, for compensated, ungrounded and high resistance grounded
systems. It can be applied for the ground-fault protection of overhead lines and
underground cables.
The operation of 67YN is based on multi-frequency neutral admittance measurement

utilizing cumulative phasor summing technique. This concept provides extremely secure,
dependable and selective ground-fault protection also in cases where the residual
quantities are highly distorted and contain non-fundamental frequency components.
67YN is well-suited for compensated networks where measurement signals may have
such characteristics, for example, during intermittent ground faults.
67YN is capable of operating with both low ohmic and higher ohmic ground faults, where
the sensitivity limit is defined with residual overvoltage condition. This allows ground
faults with several kilohms of fault resistance to be detected in a symmetrical system. The
sensitivity that can be achieved is comparable with traditional fundamental frequency
based methods such as the IoCos/IoSin (67/51N, 67/50N), Watt/Varmetric (32N) and
neutral admittance (21YN).
67YN is capable of detecting faults with dominantly fundamental frequency content as

well as transient, intermittent or restriking ground faults. 67YN can be used as an
alternative solution to transient or intermittent function 67NIEF.
67YN supports Fault direction indication in operate and non-operate direction which may
be utilized during fault location process. The inbuilt transient detector can be used to
identify restriking or intermittent ground faults, and discriminate them from permanent or
continuous ground faults.
The direction of 67YN can be set as forward or reverse. The operation characteristic is
defined by a tilted operation sector, which is universally valid both in ungrounded and
compensated networks. The tilt of the operation sector should be selected based on the
measurement errors of the applied residual current and voltage measurement
transformers.
The operating time characteristic is according to the definite time (DT).
The function contains a blocking functionality to block function outputs, timers or the
function itself.
67YN supports both tripping and alarming mode of operation. For alarming ground-fault
protection application, the function contains a dedicated operation mode.
67YN provides reliability and sensitivity of protection with a single function. This enables
simpler implementation of protection schemes as separate fault type dedicated ground-
fault functions and coordination between them are not necessarily required. Other
615 series ANSI 457

Technical Manual
advantages of 67YN includes versatile applicability, good selectivity, good sensitivity

and easy setting principles.
One instance (stage) of 67YN function is available.
4.2.8.6 Signals
Table 415: 67YN Input signals
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0=False External trigger to release neutral admittance protection
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False External trigger to reset direction calculatio
Table 416: 67YN Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
BLK_EF BOOLEAN Block signal for EF to indicate opposite direction peaks
INTR_EF BOOLEAN Intermittent ground-fault indication
PEAK_IND BOOLEAN Current transient detection indication
4.2.8.7 Settings
Table 417: 67YN Group settings (Basic)
3=Reverse
Table 418: 67YN Group settings (Advanced)

Operating quantity 1=Adaptive 1=Adaptive Operating quantity selection
2=Amplitude
Min trip current 0.005...5.000 xIn 0.001 0.010 Minimum alarm current
Characteristic tilt angle 2.0...20.0 deg 0.1 5.0 Characteristic tilt angle
458 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 419: 67YN Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Operation mode 1=Intermittent EF 3=General EF Operation criteria
3=General EF
4=Alarming EF
Table 420: 67YN Non group settings (Advanced)

2=Calculated I0
2=Calculated V0
Peak counter limit 2...20 1 2 Peak counter limit for restriking EF
Pickup delay time 30...60000 ms 1 30 Pickup delay time
1=True

Table 421: 67YN Monitored data
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
67YN Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
615 series ANSI 459

Technical Manual

Table 422: 67YN Technical data
voltage:
fn ±2 Hz
Pickup time1) Typically 35 ms

1) Includes the delay of the signal output contact, results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements
4.3 Differential protection
4.3.1 Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer 87L
Line differential protection with in-zone LNPLDF 3Id/I> 87L
power transformer

87L
I_LOC_A TRIP
I_LOC_B PICKUP
I_LOC_C STR_LS_LOC
I_REM_A STR_LS_REM
I_REM_B OPR_LS_LOC
I_REM_C OPR_LS_REM
BLOCK OPR_HS_LOC
BLOCK_LS OPR_HS_REM
ENA_MULT_HS BLKD2H_LOC
BLKD2H_REM
PROT_ACTIVE
GUID-802DA45B-DC38-44F8-8BA2-ABCCD8338C6D V1 EN
460 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The line differential protection with in-zone power transformer function 87L is used as
feeder differential protection for the distribution network lines and cables. 87L includes
low, stabilized and high, non-stabilized stages. The line differential protection can also be
used when there is an in-zone transformer in the protected feeder section.
The stabilized low stage provides a fast clearance of faults while remaining stable with
high currents passing through the protected zone increasing errors on current measuring.
Second harmonic restraint insures that the low stage does not operate due to energizing of
a tapped or in-zone transformer. The high stage provides a very fast clearance of severe
faults with a high differential current regardless of their harmonics.
The operating time characteristic for the low stage can be selected to be either definite time
(DT) or inverse definite time (IDMT). The direct inter-trip ensures both ends are always
operated, even without local criteria.
The function can also be set into test mode by setting the Operation setting to “test/
blocked”.
The operation of 87L can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the following sections.
615 series ANSI 461

Technical Manual
I_LOC_A TRIP
I_LOC_B Inrush detector
PICKUP
I_LOC_C
Direct STR_LS_LOC
From remote end
intertrip OPR_LS_LOC
Stabilized low OPR_HS_LOC
Differential stage
calculation STR_LS_REM
From
remote end OPR_LS_REM
Transformer vector OPR_HS_REM
group matching
I_REM_A
I_REM_B Zero-sequence Instantaneous
component elimination high stage
I_REM_C
BLOCK_LS
ENA_MULT_HS
BLOCK
BLKD2H_LOC
BLKD2H_REM
Fail safe
PROT_ACTIVE
function
GUID-4CA762E0-EC72-417B-AA6C-B5D3F627B483 V1 EN
Figure 221: Functional module diagram. I_LOC_x stands for current of the local end
and I_REM_x for phase currents of the remote ends.
Stabilized low stage

In the stabilized low stage, the higher the load current is, the higher the differential current
required for tripping is. This happens on normal operation or during external faults. When
an internal fault occurs, the currents on both sides of the protected object flow towards the
fault and cause the stabilizing current to be considerably lower. This makes the operation
more sensitive during internal faults. The low stage includes a timer delay functionality.
The characteristic of the low stage taking the apparent differential current into account is
influenced by various factors:
• Small tapped loads within the protection zone
• Current transformer errors
• Current transformer saturation
• Small asymmetry of the communication channel go and return paths
• Small steady state line charging current
• In-zone transformer no load current
• Impact of tap changer positions
The timer is activated according to the calculated differential, stabilizing current and the
set differential characteristic.
462 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
PROT_ACTIVE ENABLE OPERATION

(from Fail safe function)
BLOCK_LS
I_DIFF Charact. Timer
(from Differential calculation) OPR_LS_LOC
t
I_BIAS I
(from Differential calculation)
RSTD2H_LOC
(from Inrush detector) t
Ibias STR_LS_LOC
RSTD2H_REM
(from Inrush detector)
End section 1 Operating curve type
Slope section 2 Trip delay time
End section 2 Reset delay time
Minimum operate
Slope section 3
time
Low trip value Time multiplier
GUID-02958DCF-AC09-4D58-B5B4-2016691C7DC2 V1 EN
Figure 222: Operation logic of the stabilized low stage
The stabilization affects the operation of the function.
Id/Ir
TRIP TRIP AREA (HS)
AREA (LS &HS) NON-TRIP AREA (LS)
High trip value
Slope
section 3
(S3)
TRIP
AREA (LS)
Slope NON-TRIP
section 2
(S2)
AREA (LS & HS)
Low trip value

Id_lim
End section 1 (B1) End section 2 (B2) Ib/Ir
GUID-193E5367-5910-4F1E-A6B1-7D5E8A35C94C V1 EN
Figure 223: Operating characteristics of the protection. (LS) stands for the low stage
and (HS) for the high stage.
The slope of the operating characteristic curve of the differential function varies in the
different sections of the range:
• Section 1 where 0.0 < Ib/Ir < End section 1. The differential current required for
tripping is constant. The value of the differential current is the same as the basic
setting (Low trip value) selected for the function. The basic setting allows the
615 series ANSI 463

Technical Manual
appearance of the no-load current of the line, the load current of the tapped load and
minor inaccuracies of the current transformers. It can also be used to influence the
overall level of the operating characteristic.
• Section 2 where End section 1 < Ib/Ir < End Section 2. This is called the influence area
of the starting ratio. In this section, the variations in the starting ratio affect the slope
of the characteristic, meaning the required change for tripping in the differential
current in comparison with the change in the load current. CT errors should be
considered in the starting ratio.
• Section 3 where End section 2 < Ib/Ir. By setting the slope in this section, attention can
be paid to prevent unnecessary operation of the protection when there is an external
fault, and the differential current is mainly produced by saturated current
transformers.
The operation of the differential protection is based on the fundamental frequency

components. The operation is accurate and stable and the DC component and the
harmonics of the current do not cause unwanted operations.
Inrush detector
The transformer inrush currents cause high degrees of second harmonic to the measured
phase currents. The inrush detector detects inrush situations in transformers. The second
harmonic based local blocking is selected into use with the Restraint mode parameter. The
blocking for the low stage on the local end is issued when the second harmonic blocking
is selected and the inrush is detected.
The inrush detector calculates the ratio of the second harmonic current I_2H_LOC_A and
the fundamental frequency current I_1H_LOC_A. If the line differential protection is
used in normal mode (Winding selection is “Not in use”), the calculated value is compared
with the parameter value of the Pickup value 2.H setting. If the calculated value exceeds
the set value and the fundamental frequency current I_1H_LOC_A is more that seven
percent of the nominal current, the output signal BLK2H_A is activated. The inrush
detector handles the other phases the same way.
If the line differential protection is used in the in-zone transformer mode (Winding
selection is “Winding 1” or “Winding 2”), the weighed average is calculated for the 2nd
harmonic ratios in different phases and the weighed ratio is then compared with the value
of the Pickup value 2.H setting. If the calculated weighed ratio value exceeds the set value
and the fundamental frequency current I_1H_LOC_A is more than seven percent of the
nominal current, output signal BLK2H_A is activated.
The locally detected transformer inrush is also transferred to the remote end as a binary
indication signal independently of the local Restraint mode setting parameter value. When
the internal blocking of the stabilized low stage is activated, the RSTD2H_LOC and
RSTD2H_REM outputs will also be activated at the same time depending on whether the
inrush has been detected on local or remote end or on both ends.
464 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-92818F6B-4FB7-4D5C-AF64-36786F31AED8 V3 EN
Figure 224: Inrush current detection logic
The operating principle is to calculate on both ends differential current from currents
entering and leaving the protection zone by utilizing the digital communication channels
for data exchange. The differential currents are almost zero on normal operation. The
differential protection is phase segregated and the differential currents are calculated
separately on both ends.
RED 615 RED 615
Communication
INCOMING
INCOMING
PROTECTED ZONE
GUID-E9D80758-16A2-4748-A08C-94C33997E603 V3 EN
Figure 225: Basic protection principle
The differential current I∆ (Id) of the protection relay is obtained on both ends with the
formula:
I d = I LOC + I REM
GUID-9C08695B-8241-4B74-AA2A-B64783F9C288 V2 EN (Equation 66)
The stabilizing current Ibias (Ib) of the protection relay is obtained on both ends with the
formula:
615 series ANSI 465

Technical Manual
I LOC − I REM
Ib =
2
GUID-6014FAFC-12CB-4DB3-85A9-0EF254D1729D V2 EN (Equation 67)
Depending on the location of the star points of the current transformers, the polarity of the
local end remote currents may be different causing malfunction of the calculation
algorithms. The CT transformation ratio may be different and this needs to be
compensated to provide a correct differential current calculation result on both ends.
The operation characteristics related settings are given in units as percentage of the current
transformer secondary nominal current on each line end protection relay. For the actual
primary setting, the corresponding CT ratio on each line end has to be considered. An
example of how the CT ratio correction parameter values should be selected on both line
ends in the example case to compensate the difference in the nominal levels can be
presented.
Another example for differential application without in-zone transformer where line rated
current is 400 A. The ratio of CTs are 800/1 and 400/1.
Rated current (primary)

400A
P1 P2 P2 P1
S1 S2 S2 S1
800A/1 400A/1
N IC IB IA IA IB IC N
CT Ratio Correction CT Ratio Correction

800A / 400A = 2.000 400A / 400A = 1.000
(A) (B)
CT connection type CT connection type
= Type 1 = Type 1
GUID-4BCD4742-1DBC-4CAC-B409-7A603C4669B2 V1 EN
Figure 226: Example of CT ratio correction setting calculation in line differential

application
The settings for CT ratio Corrections for protection relay A and protection relay (B) are:
CT ratio Correction (A) = 800 A / 400 A = 2.000
CT ratio Correction (B) = 400 A / 400 A = 1.000
The CT secondary current often differs from the rated current at the rated load of the power
transformer. The CT transforming ratio can be corrected on both sides of the power
transformer with the CT ratio Correction setting.
466 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
First, the rated load of the power transformer is calculated on both sides when the apparent
power and phase-to-phase voltage are known.
Sn
InT =
3 ⋅Vn
GUID-FD7DAEE6-80AB-4C5E-98C7-863063099802 V1 EN (Equation 68)
InT rated load of the power transformer
Sn rated power of the power transformer
Vn rated phase-to-phase voltage
Next, the settings for the CT ratio correction can be calculated with the formula:
In
CT ratio correction =
I nT
GUID-F950DE9C-6AFB-4DF9-B299-6631693C55C0 V1 EN (Equation 69)
In nominal primary current of the CT
After the CT ratio correction, the measured currents and corresponding setting values of
87L are expressed in multiples of the rated power transformer current Ir (×Ir) or
percentage value of Ir (%Ir).
An example shows how the CT ratio correction settings are calculated; when the rated
power of the transformer is 5 MVA, the ratio of CTs on the 20 kV side is 200/1 and that
on the 10.5 kV side is 300/1.
615 series ANSI 467

Technical Manual
GUID-74289FF5-E90D-4633-9FEE-04DB8E86A3AE V1 EN
Figure 227: Example of CT ratio correction setting calculation with in-zone

transformer
The rated load of the transformer is:
HV side (A): InT_A = 5 MVA / (1.732 × 20 kV) = 144.3 A
LV side (A): InT_B = 5 MVA / (1.732 × 10.5 kV) = 274.9 A
So the settings for CT ratio Corrections at HV (A) and LV (B) side are:
CT ratio Correction (A) = 200 A / 144.3 A = 1.386
CT ratio Correction (B) = 300 A / 274.9 A = 1.091
CT connections
The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as “Type 1” and
“Type 2”.
• If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 protection relay currents are
opposite, the CT connection type setting parameter is “Type 1”. The connection
examples of “Type 1” are as shown in the Figure 228 and Figure 229.
• If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 protection relay currents
equate, the CT connection type setting parameter is “Type 2”. The connection
examples of “Type 2” are as shown in the Figure 230 and Figure 231.
• The default value of the CT connection type setting is “Type 1”.
468 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A B C
P1 X120
S1
7 1/5A
S2 IA
P2 8 N
9 1/5A
IB
10 N
11 1/5A
IC
12 N
P2
S2
S1
P1 X120
7 1/5A
IA
8 N
9 1/5A
IB
10 N
11 1/5A
A B C IC
12 N
GUID-022848B7-518F-4410-939D-B6646E7419D2 V1 EN
Figure 228: Connection example of current transformers of Type 1
615 series ANSI 469

Technical Manual
A B C
P2
S2
S1
P1 X120
7 1/5A
IA
8 N
9 1/5A
IB
10 N
11 1/5A
IC
12 N
P1 X120
S1
7 1/5A
S2 IA
P2 8 N
9 1/5A
IB
10 N
11 1/5A
IC
12 N
A B C
GUID-C42E6AC5-E9A4-45DD-AFF4-BF6F8D40B42E V1 EN
470 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A B C
P1 X120
S1
7 1/5A
S2 IA
P2 8 N
9 1/5A
IB
10 N
11 1/5A
IC
12 N
P1 X120
S1
7 1/5A
S2 IA
P2 8 N
9 1/5A
IB
10 N
11 1/5A
IC
12 N
A B C
GUID-FD0C1731-3D13-4317-9B84-86DA2434E3B9 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 471

Technical Manual
A B C
P2
S2
S1
P1 X120
7 1/5A
IA
8 N
9 1/5A
IB
10 N
11 1/5A
IC
12 N
P2
S2
S1
P1 X120
7 1/5A
IA
8 N
9 1/5A
IB
10 N
11 1/5A
A B C IC
12 N
GUID-75245AA5-315C-4018-95E3-FEEC1D1CD4B3 V1 EN
Transformer vector group matching

Before differential and bias currents can be calculated, the phase difference of the currents
must be vector group matched based on the transformer connection type. The vector group
472 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
of the power transformer is numerically matched on the high voltage and low voltage sides
by means of the Winding selection, Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type and Clock number
settings. Thus no interposing CTs are needed if there is only a power transformer inside
the protected zone. The matching is based on phase shifting and a numerical delta
connection in the protection relay. If the neutral of a star-connected power transformer is
grounded, any ground-fault in the network is perceived by the protection relay as a
differential current. The elimination of the zero-sequence component can be selected for
that winding by setting the Zro A elimination parameter.
Winding selection setting defines the protection relay location respect to the transformer.
If the protection relay is situated at the HV side of the transformer, then protection relay
location setting is set to “Winding 1” and respectively to “Winding 2” if protection relay
is situated at the LV side. If the differential protection relays are used to protect a line
without in-zone transformer, then the setting is set to “Not in use”. In this case vector
group matching is ignored.
The matching of the phase difference is based on the phase shifting and the numerical delta
connection inside the protection relay. The Winding 1 type parameter determines the
connection on winding 1 (“Y”, “YN”, “D”, “Z”, “ZN”). The vector group matching can
be implemented either on both, winding 1 and winding 2, or only on winding 1 or winding
2, at intervals of 30° with the Clock number setting. Similarly, the Winding 2 type
parameter determines the connections of the phase windings on the low voltage side (“y”,
“yn”, “d”, “z”, “zn”).
When the vector group matching is Yy0 and the CT connection type is according to “Type
2”, the phase angle of the phase currents connected to the protection relay does not change.
When the vector group matching is Yy6, the phase currents are on one side turned 180° in
the protection relay.
Example 1, vector group matching of an YNd11-connected power transformer on

winding 1, CT connection type according to type 1. The Winding 1 type setting is “YN”,
Winding 2 type is “d” and Clock number is “Clk Num 11”. This is compensated internally
by giving winding 1 internal compensation value +30° and winding 2 internal
compensation value 0°:
− −
−
IA− IB
I AmHV =
3
GUID-DB4A8A17-38B7-41B3-874B-B93776082C6E V1 EN (Equation 70)
− −
−
I B − IC
I BmHV =
3
GUID-147F5433-7B16-4BC7-A502-90D5B0F00B06 V1 EN (Equation 71)
− −
−
IC − I A
I CmHV =
3
GUID-11FB9BCE-F16E-4795-9AAD-FDCA4024241A V1 EN (Equation 72)
615 series ANSI 473

Technical Manual
Example 2, if vector group is Yd11 and CT connection type is according to type 1, the
compensation is a little different. The Winding 1 type setting is “Y”, Winding 2 type is “d”
and Clock number is “Clk Num 11”. This is compensated internally by giving winding 1
internal compensation value 0° and winding 2 internal compensation value -30°:
− −
−
I A − IC
I AmLV =
3
GUID-40A4A54A-160D-4745-A2D3-A81C5BFC8C1F V1 EN (Equation 73)
− −
−
IB− IA
I BmLV =
3
GUID-041FD5D6-FE2B-487E-8BF4-AC44FD0C4D34 V1 EN (Equation 74)
− −
−
IC − I B
I CmLV =
3
GUID-BD2F98BD-4BB1-4F8B-AD4E-0EEA8BADBAF3 V1 EN (Equation 75)
The “Y” side currents stay untouched, while the “d” side currents are compensated to
match the currents actually flowing in the windings.
In this example there is no neutral current on either side of the transformer (assuming there
are no grounding transformers installed). In the previous example, the matching is done
differently to have the winding 1 neutral current compensated at the same time.
Table 423: 87L vector group matching
Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Phase shift Zero sequence
transformer current elimination
Yy0 Y y 0 Not needed
YNy0 YN y 0 HV side
YNyn0 YN yn 0 HV & LV side
Yyn0 Y yn 0 LV side
YNy2 YN y 2 (Automatic)
YNyn2 YN yn 2 (Automatic)
Yyn2 Y yn 2 (Automatic)
YNy6 YN y 6 HV side
YNyn6 YN yn 6 HV & LV side
474 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Yyn6 Y yn 6 LV side
Yd1 Y d 1 Not needed
YNd1 YN d 1 (Automatic)
YNd11 YN d 11 (Automatic
Dd0 D d 0 Not needed
Dy1 D y 1 Not needed
Dyn1 D yn 1 (Automatic)
Yz1 Y z 1 Not needed
YNz1 YN z 1 (Automatic)
YNzn1 YN zn 1 LV side
Yzn1 Y zn 1 (Automatic)
615 series ANSI 475

Technical Manual
Zy1 Z y 1 Not needed
Zyn1 Z yn 1 (Automatic)
ZNyn1 ZN yn 1 HV side
ZNy1 ZN y 1 (Automatic)
Dz0 D z 0 Not needed
Dzn0 D zn 0 LV side
Dzn2 D zn 2 (Automatic)
Dzn6 D zn 6 LV side
476 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Zd0 Z d 0 Not needed
ZNd0 ZN d 0 HV side
ZNd2 ZN d 2 (Automatic)
ZNd6 ZN d 6 HV side
Zz0 Z z 0 Not needed
ZNz0 ZN z 0 HV side
ZNzn0 ZN zn 0 HV & LV side
Zzn0 Z zn 0 LV side
ZNz2 ZN z 2 (Automatic)
ZNzn2 ZN zn 2 (Automatic)
Zzn2 Z zn 2 (Automatic)
ZNz6 ZN z 6 HV side
ZNzn6 ZN zn 6 HV & LV side
Zzn6 Z zn 6 LV side
615 series ANSI 477

Technical Manual
Zero-sequence component elimination

If Clock number is “Clk Num 2“, “Clk Num 4”, “Clk Num 8” or “Clk Num 10”, the vector
group matching is always done on both, winding 1 and winding 2. The combination results
in the correct compensation. In this case the zero-sequence component is always removed
from both sides automatically. The Zro A elimination parameter cannot change this.
If Clock number is “Clk Num 1”, “Clk Num 5”, “Clk Num 7” or “Clk Num 11”, the vector
group matching is done on one side only. A possible zero-sequence component of the
phase currents at ground faults occurring outside the protection area is automatically
eliminated in the numerically implemented delta connection before the differential
current and the biasing current are calculated. This is why the vector group matching is
almost always made on the star connected side of the “Ynd” and “Dyn” connected
transformers.
If Clock number is “Clk Num 0” or “Clk Num 6”, the zero-sequence component of the
phase currents is not eliminated automatically on either side. Therefore, the zero-sequence
component on the star connected side that is grounded at its star point has to be eliminated
by using the Zro A elimination parameter.
The same parameter has to be used to eliminate the zero-sequence component if there is,
for example, a grounding transformer on the delta-connected side of the “Ynd” power
transformer in the area to be protected. In this case, the vector group matching is normally
made on the side of the star connection. On the side of the delta connection, the elimination
of the zero-sequence component has to be eliminated by using the Zro A elimination
parameter.
By using the Zro A elimination parameter, the zero-sequence component of the local
phase currents is calculated and reduced for each phase current:
− − 1 − − −

I LOC _ A = I LOC _ A − ×  I LOC _ A + I LOC _ B + I LOC _ C 
3  
GUID-7C504C11-31C0-47A2-8253-E05020CA1CF7 V1 EN (Equation 76)
− − 1 − − −

I LOC _ B = I LOC _ B − ×  I LOC _ A + I LOC _ B + I LOC _ C 
3  
GUID-6FEF478B-7DA1-4012-9F59-43B21AF813E3 V1 EN (Equation 77)
478 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
− − 1 − − −

I LOC _ C = I LOC _ C − ×  I LOC _ A + I LOC _ B + I LOC _ C 
3  
GUID-D5203A0B-D0A0-4147-B1F0-06C2B78B288B V1 EN
Fail safe function

To prevent malfunction during communication interference, the operation of 87L is
blocked when the protection communication supervision detects severe interference in the
communication channel. The timer reset stage is activated in case the stabilized stage is
started during a communication interruption. The protection communication supervison
is connected internally from PCS to 87L (dotted OK line).
Protection
communication
supervision OK
(PCS)
BLOCK
AND PROT_ACTIVE
Operation ”Test/blocked”
Operation ”Off”
GUID-A0935D4B-06D6-4384-8652-3E7D28D839D8 V1 EN
Figure 232: Operation logic of the fail safe function
The function can also be set into “test/blocked” state with the Operation setting. This can
also be utilized during the commissioning.
The BLOCK input is provided for blocking the function with the logic. When the function
is blocked, the monitored data and measured values are still available but the binary
outputs are blocked. When the function is blocked, the direct inter-trip is also blocked.
The PROT_ACTIVE output is always active when the protection function is capable of
operating. PROT_ACTIVE can be used as a blocking signal for backup protection
functions.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the STR_LS_LOC output. Depending on the value of
the set Operating curve type, the timer characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When
the operation timer has reached the value set with the Trip delay time in the DT mode, the
maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPR_LS_LOC output is activated.
When the operation mode is according to IDMT, Low trip value is used as reference value
615 series ANSI 479

Technical Manual
(Trip value) in the IDMT equations presented in the Standard inverse-time characteristics
section.
A timer reset state is activated when a drop-off situation happens. The reset is done
according to the DT characteristics.
For a detailed description of the timer characteristics, see the “General

function block features” section in this manual.
Instantaneous high stage

In addition to the stabilized low stage, 87L has an instantaneous high stage. The stabilizing
is not done with the instantaneous high stage. The instantaneous high stage trips
immediately when the differential current amplitude is higher than the set value of the
High trip value setting. If the ENA_MULT_HS input is active, the High trip value setting
is internally multiplied by the High Op value Mult setting.
I_DIFF Charact.
(from Differential calculation)
ENA_MULT_HS I
AND OPR_HS_LOC
High trip value
High trip value Mult
PROT_ACTIVE ENABLE OPERATION

(from Fail safe function)
GUID-64B2FA70-1FCC-44D8-83EC-73EA8F880FB4 V1 EN
Figure 233: Operation logic of instantaneous high stage
Direct inter-trip
Direct inter-trip is used to ensure the simultaneous opening of the circuit breakers at both
ends of the protected line when a fault is detected. Both pickup and trip signals are sent to
the remote end via communication. The direct-intertripping of the line differential
protection is included into 87L. The TRIP output is combined to operate the signal from
both stages, local and remote, so that it can be used for the direct inter-trip signal locally.
480 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
OR TRIP
OR PICKUP
OPR_HS_A
Inst. OPR_HS_B SEND OR OPR_HS_LOC
high stage
OPR_HS_C
OPR_LS_A
OPR_LS_B SEND OR OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_C
Stabilized
low stage
STR_LS_A
STR_LS_B SEND OR STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_C
OPR_HS_A
RECEIVE OPR_HS_B OR OPR_HS_REM
OPR_HS_C
OPR_LS_A
RECEIVE OPR_LS_B OR OPR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_C
STR_LS_A
RECEIVE STR_LS_B OR STR_LS_REM
STR_LS_C
GUID-271C0849-2D46-44A9-A6C6-AA576F2A0DF6 V1 EN
Figure 234: Operation logic of the direct intertrip function
The pickup and trip signals are also provided separately for the low and high stages, and
in local and remote.
Blocking functionality
There are two independent inputs that can be used for blocking the function: BLOCK and
BLOCK_LS. The difference between these inputs is that BLOCK_LS (when TRUE)
blocks only the stabilized low stage leaving the instantaneous high stage operative.
BLOCK (when TRUE) blocks both stages and also the PROT_ACTIVE output is updated
according to the BLOCK input status, as described in the Fail safe function chapter.
615 series ANSI 481

Technical Manual
The BLOCK and BLOCK_LS input statuses affect only the behavior of the local protection
instance. When a line differential protection stage (stabilized low or instantaneous high)
is blocked, also the received remote signals related to the corresponding stage are ignored
(received direct inter-trip signals from the remote end). The binary signal transfer
functionality should therefore be used for transferring the possible additional blocking
information between the local and remote terminals whenever the blocking logic behavior
needs to be the same on both line ends.
Test mode
The line differential function in one protection relay can be set to test mode, that is, the
Operation setting is set to “test/blocked”. This blocks the line differential protection
outputs in the protection relay and sets the remote protection relay to a remote test mode,
such that the injected currents are echoed back with the shifted phase. It is also possible
that both protection relays are simultaneously in the test mode. When the line differential
protection function is in the test mode:
• The remote end protection relay echoes locally injected current samples back with the
shifted phase. The current samples that are sent to the remote protection relay are
scaled with the CT ratio correction setting.
• The operation of both stages (stabilized low or instantaneous high) are blocked, and
also the direct inter-trip functionality is blocked (both receive and send) in the
protection relay where the test mode is active.
• The remote end line differential protection function that is in the normal mode (On)
is not affected by the local end being in the test mode. This means that the remote end
function is operative but, at the same time, it ignores the received current samples
from the other end protection relay which is in the test mode.
• The PROT_ACTIVE output is false only in the protection relay that is currently in the
test mode.
Local phasors CT ratio CT ratio Local phasors

correction correction
CT ratio CT ratio
correction Remote phasors Remote phasors correction
Time align PCSRTPC Sample latency PCSRTPC Time align
I_INST_REM I_INST_REM
I_INST_LOC I_INST_LOC
87L 87L
Operation ”On” Operation ”On”

GUID-6B900ECD-6BB0-47D4-95F7-F7037FDBD6BA V1 EN
Figure 235: Operation during the normal operation of the line differential protection
482 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Local phasors CT ratio Local phasors

correction
CT ratio CT ratio
correction correction
Remote phasors
Time align PCSRTPC Sample latency PCSRTPC Phase shift
I_INST_REM I_INST_REM
I_INST_LOC I_INST_LOC
87L 87L
Operation ”Test / blocked” Operation ”On”

GUID-23F2C11A-D27F-4767-9826-79F9F4B7BAA1 V1 EN
Figure 236: Operation during test operation of the line differential protection
4.3.1.5 Commissioning
The commissioning of the line differential protection scheme would be difficult without
any support features in the functionality because of the relatively long distance between
the protection relays. This has been taken into consideration in the design of the line
differential protection. The communication channel can be used for echoing the locally
fed current phasors from the remote end. By using this mode, it is possible to verify that
differential calculation is done correctly in each phase. Also, the protection
communication operation is taken into account with the differential current calculation
when this test mode is used.
Required material for testing the protection relay

• Calculated settings
• Terminal diagram
• Circuit diagrams
• Technical and application manuals of the protection relay
• Single of three-phase secondary current source
• Single of three-phase primary current source
• Timer with start and stop interfaces
• Auxiliary voltage source for the protection relays
• PC with related software, a Web browser for WHMI
The setting and configuration of the protection relay must be completed before testing.
The terminal diagram, available in the technical manual, is a general diagram of the
protection relay.
615 series ANSI 483

Technical Manual
The same diagram is not always applicable to each specific delivery,

especially for the configuration of all the binary inputs and outputs.
Therefore, before testing, check that the available terminal diagram
corresponds to the protection relay.
The circuit diagrams of the application are recommended to be available. These are
required for checking the terminal block numbers of the current, trip, alarm and possibly
other auxiliary circuits.
The technical and application manuals contain application and functionality summaries,
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical
data sorted per function.
The minimum requirement for a secondary current injection test device is the ability to
work as a one phase current source.
The protection relay should be prepared for the test before testing a particular function.
The logic diagram of the tested protection function must be considered while performing
the test. All included functions in the protection relay are tested according to the
corresponding test instructions in this chapter. The functions can be tested in any order
according to user preferences. Therefore, the test instructions are presented in alphabetical
order. Only the functions that are in use (Operation is set to "On") should be tested.
The response from the test can be viewed in different ways.
• Binary output signals

• Monitored data values in the LHMI (logical signals)
• A PC with a Web browser for WHMI use (logical signals and phasors)
All used setting groups should be tested.
Checking the external optical and electrical connections

The user must check the installation to verify that the protection relay is connected to the
other required parts of the protection system. The protection relay and all the connected
circuits are to be de-energized during the check-up.
Checking CT circuits
Check that the wiring is in strict accordance with the supplied connection
diagram.
The CTs must be connected in accordance with the terminal diagram provided with the
protection relay, both with regards to phases and polarity. The following tests are
recommended for every primary CT or CT core connected to the protection relay.
484 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
• Primary injection test to verify the current ratio of the CT, the correct wiring up to the
protection relay and correct phase sequence connection (that is A, B, C.)
• Polarity check to prove that the predicted direction of the secondary current flow is
correct for a given direction of the primary current flow. This is an essential test for
the proper operation of the directional function, protection or measurement in the
protection relay.
• CT secondary loop resistance measurement to confirm that the current transformer
secondary loop DC resistance is within specification and that there are no high
resistance joints in the CT winding or wiring.
• CT excitation test to ensure that the correct core in the CT is connected to the
protection relay. Normally only a few points along the excitation curve are checked
to ensure that there are no wiring errors in the system, for example, due to a mistake
in connecting the CT's measurement core to the protection relay.
• CT excitation test to ensure that the CT is of the correct accuracy rating and that there
are no short circuited turns in the CT windings. Manufacturer's design curves should
be available for the CT to compare the actual results.
• Grounding check of the individual CT secondary circuits to verify that each three-
phase set of main CTs is properly connected to the station ground and only at one
electrical point.
• Insulation resistance check.
• Phase identification of CT shall be made.
Both the primary and the secondary sides must be disconnected from the
line and the protection relay when plotting the excitation characteristics.
If the CT secondary circuit is opened or its ground connection is missing

or removed without the CT primary being de-energized first, dangerous
voltages may be produced. This can be lethal and cause damage to the
insulation. The re-energizing of the CT primary should be prohibited as
long as the CT secondary is open or ungrounded.
Checking of the power supply

Check that the auxiliary supply voltage remains within the permissible input voltage range
under all operating conditions. Check that the polarity is correct before powering the
protection relay.
Checking binary I/O circuits

Always check the binary input circuits from the equipment to the protection relay
interface to make sure that all signals are connected correctly. If there is no need to test a
particular input, the corresponding wiring can be disconnected from the terminal of the
protection relay during testing. Check all the connected signals so that both input voltage
615 series ANSI 485

Technical Manual
level and polarity are in accordance with the protection relay specifications. However,
attention must be paid to the electrical safety instructions.
Always check the binary output circuits from the protection relay to the equipment
interface to make sure that all signals are connected correctly. If a particular output needs
to be tested, the corresponding wiring can be disconnected from the terminal of the
protection relay during testing. Check all the connected signals so that both load and
polarity are in accordance with the protection relay specifications. However, attention
must be paid to the electrical safety instructions.
Checking optical connections

Check that the Tx and Rx optical connections are correct.
A relay equipped with optical connections requires a minimum depth of

180 mm (7.2 inches) for plastic fiber cables and 275 mm (10.9 inches) for
glass fiber cables. Check the allowed minimum bending radius from the
optical cable manufacturer.
Applying required settings for the protection relay

Download all calculated settings and measurement transformer parameters in the
protection relay.
Connecting test equipment to the protection relay

Before testing, connect the test equipment according to the protection relay specific
connection diagram.
Pay attention to the correct connection of the input and output current terminals. Check
that the input and output logical signals in the logic diagram for the function under test are
connected to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the protection relay. Select
the correct auxiliary voltage source according to the power supply module of the
protection relay. Select the correct auxiliary voltage source according to the power supply
module of the protection relay.
486 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-F1F4E199-8B6A-4066-ACCB-07FE4F887417 V3 EN
Figure 237: Example of connections to test the line differential protection relay
Secondary current injection

There are two alternative modes to check the operation of a line differential protection
relay. These are not exclusive methods for each other and can be used for various test on
the protection relay.
Normal mode
In normal mode, that is, the mode when the function is on normal operation, the local end
protection relay sends phasors to the remote end protection relay and receives phasors
measured by the remote end protection relay. This mode can be used in testing the
operating level and time of the low and high stages of the local end protection relay. This
is due to a test situation when the remote end does not measure any current and therefore,
all the current fed to the local end current circuit is seen as differential current at both ends.
615 series ANSI 487

Technical Manual
Testing of the line differential protection is done with both protection relays separated
geographically from each other. It is important to note that local actions in one protection
relay cause operation also in the remotely located protection relay. When testing the line
differential function, actions have to be done in both protection relays.
Before the test, the trip signal to the circuit breaker shall be blocked, for example by
breaking the trip circuit by opening the terminal block or by using some other suitable
method.
When injecting current to one phase in the local end protection relay, the current is seen
as a differential current at both ends. If a current Iinjected is injected, A in phase A, the
differential and stabilizing currents for phase A are:
ID _ A = I injected
GUID-B5B84B9B-B26C-421F-B4D0-E301EE4883F3 V3 EN (Equation 78)
IB _ A = I injected / 2
GUID-6A1A367B-241B-4831-A1F2-9373AE4D26ED V1 EN (Equation 79)
The operation is equal for phases B and C.
Verifying the settings
1. Block the unwanted trip signals from the protection relay units involved.
2. Inject a current in phase A and increase the current until the function operates for
phase A.
The injected operate current corresponds to the set Low operate value. The
monitored values for ID_A should be equal to the injected current.
3. Repeat point 2 by current injection in phases B and C.
4. Measure the operating time by injecting the single-phase current in phase A.
The injected current should be four times the operating current. The time
measurement is stopped by the trip output from the protection relay unit.
5. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect the current transformers and all other
circuits including the trip circuit.
Phasor echoing method

The line differential function in one protection relay can be set to special test mode, that
is, the Operation setting is set to “test/blocked”. When this mode is in use, the remote end
protection relay echoes locally injected current phasors back with the shifted phase and
settable amplitude. Therefore, the local end line differential function is also automatically
blocked and the remote end line differential function discards the phasors it receives from
the protection relay in the test mode.
When the test mode is active, the CT connection type is still used by the line differential
protection function as in the normal operation mode. The setting can be used for shifting
the phase (0 or 180 degrees).
488 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-6F26D761-CB1D-4D86-80AA-CEC95CEBC1A9 V2 EN
Figure 238: An example of a test mode situation where three-phase currents are
injected to the local end protection relay
GUID-21BCDEC5-2A22-4AEE-831E-BC8A72E40A64 V2 EN
Figure 239: Local and remote end currents presented in a web HMI of the protection
relay
4.3.1.6 Application
87L is designed for the differential protection of overhead line and cable feeders in a
distribution network. 87L provides absolute selectivity and fast trip times as unit
protection also in short lines where distance protection cannot be applied.
615 series ANSI 489

Technical Manual
87L provides selective protection for radial, looped and meshed network topologies and
can be used in isolated neutral networks, resistance grounded networks, compensated
(impedance grounded) networks and solidly grounded networks. In a typical network
configuration where the line differential protection scheme is applied, the protected zone,
that is, the line or cable, is fed from two directions.
RED 615 RED 615
Communication
INCOMING
INCOMING
PROTECTED ZONE
GUID-E9D80758-16A2-4748-A08C-94C33997E603 V3 EN
Figure 240: Line protection with phase segregated line differential with in-zone
transformer
87L can be utilized for various types of network configurations or topologies. Case A
shows the protection of a ring-type distribution network. The network is also used in the
closed ring mode. 87L is used as the main protection for different sections of the feeder.
In case B, the interconnection of two substations is done with parallel lines and each line
is protected with the line differential protection. In case C, the connection line to mid scale
power generation (typical size around 10...50 MVA) is protected with the line differential
function. The protection includes the transformer from the protection field. In case D, the
connection between two substations and a small distribution transformer is located at the
tapped load. The use of 87L is not limited to these applications.
490 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-64A6AADE-275F-43DA-B7D9-2B1340166A4D V2 EN
Figure 241: Line differential applications
Communication supervision
A typical line differential protection application includes 87L as the main protection.
Backup over current functions is needed if a protection communication failure occurs.
When the communication supervision function detects a failure in the communication
between the protective units, the safe operation of the line is still guaranteed by blocking
the line differential protection and unblocking the over current functions.
When a communication failure is detected, the protection communication supervision

function issues block for the 87L line differential protection and unblock for the
instantaneous and high stages (instance 2) of the over current protection. These are used
to give backup protection for the remote end feeder protection relay. In situations where
the selectivity is weaker than usually, the protection should still be available for the
system.
615 series ANSI 491

Technical Manual
PCS
BLOCK
87L
UNBLOCK
50-P3
UNBLOCK
50P(2)
RED 615
50P(1)
51P
PCS
BLOCK
87L
UNBLOCK RED 615
50-P3
UNBLOCK
50P(2)
50P(1)
51P
51P
RED 615
50P(1)
50-P3
GUID-55C38CA8-1D7D-4CBC-A555-E38B024FF2BA V1 EN
Figure 242: Protection communication supervision detects failures on

communication
In-zone transformer
RED 615 RED 615
PROTECTED Yd11
1500A/1 ZONE 40MW 300A/1
20kV 110kV
L ~
LV HV
GUID-52FC4852-C9D1-4DD1-B2D7-62FCE98B7FD7 V2 EN
Figure 243: In-zone transformer example about CT ratio correction calculation
The CT ratio correction calculation starts with the rated load current calculation for HV
and LV sides. The rated load current is defined as the rated power of the transformer
492 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
divided by the square root of three times the nominal phase-to-phase voltage at the HV or
LV side.
Sn
InT =
3 ⋅Vn
GUID-FD7DAEE6-80AB-4C5E-98C7-863063099802 V1 EN (Equation 80)
The rated load current of the transformer on the HV side is 209.9 A (40 MW / (√3 × 110
kV)) and the rated load current of the transformer on the LV side is 1154.7 A (40 MW /
(√3 × 20 kV)). This means that the CT ratio corrections for the HV and LV sides are:
CT ratio correction (HV) = 1.429 (300 A / 209.9 A)
CT ratio correction (LV) = 1.299 (1500 A / 1154.7 A)
Small power transformers in a tap

With a relatively small power transformer in a line tap, the line differential protection can
be applied without the need of current measurement from the tap. In such cases, the line
differential function is time delayed for low differential currents below the high set limit
and 87L coordinates with the downstream protection relays in the relevant tap. For
differential currents above the set limit, the operation is instantaneous. As a consequence,
when the load current of the tap is negligible, the low resistive line faults are cleared
instantaneously at the same time as maximum sensitivity for the high resistive faults are
maintained but with a time delayed operation. The maximum sensitivity for high resistive
faults is maintained at the same time, but with a time delayed operation.
RED 615 RED 615
400A/1 PROTECTED ZONE 400A/1

Time delayed
33kV
Inst.
500kVA
500kVA
IL   8.75 A
3  33kV
 8.75 A 
I    * 1A  0.02 A  2%
 400 A 
GUID-F1B36FF9-7463-4D8D-8EDC-70A09B52CAE9 V2 EN
Figure 244: Influence of the tapped transformer load current to the stabilized low
stage setting
615 series ANSI 493

Technical Manual
The stabilized stage provides both DT and IDMT characteristics that are used for time
selective protection against faults which are not covered by the instantaneous stage. The
impedance of the line is typically an order of magnitude lower than the transformer
impedance providing significantly higher fault currents when the fault is located on the
line.
RED 615 RED 615
400A/1 400A/1
Time delayed
33kV
Inst.
500kVA
Z=10%
1.1  500kVA
IF   96.23 A
3  33kV  0.10
 96.23 A 
I    * 1A  0.24 A  24%
 400 A 
GUID-F9600D18-75B9-4EA5-8F9B-656FCB1FC938 V2 EN
Figure 245: Influence of the short circuit current at LV side of the tapped transformer
to the differential current
Detection of the inrush current during transformer start-up

When the line is energized, the transformer magnetization inrush current is seen as
differential current by the line differential protection and may cause malfunction of the
protection if not taken into account. The inrush situation may only be detected on one end
but the differential current is always seen on both ends. The inrush current includes high
order harmonic components which can be detected and used as the blocking criteria for the
stabilized stage. The inrush detection information is changed between two ends so that fast
and safe blocking of the stabilized stage can be issued on both ends.
494 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
ID> BLOCKED ID> BLOCKED

RED 615 RED 615
INRUSH
INCOMING
Phase 1 current
Phase 1 differential current
Low trip value
BLKD2H_LOC
GUID-817BC757-05A6-4888-9DE5-E53C59456718 V1 EN
Figure 246: Blocking of line differential functions during detected transformer start-up
current
If the protection stage is allowed to start during the inrush situation, the time delay can be
selected so that the stabilized stage does not trip in the inrush situation.
4.3.1.7 Signals
Table 424: 87L Input signals
I_LOC_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A local current
I_LOC_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B local current
I_LOC_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C local current
I_REM_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A remote current
I_REM_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B remote current
I_REM_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C remote current
615 series ANSI 495

Technical Manual

BLOCK_LS BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for blocking the stab. stage
ENA_MULT_HS BOOLEAN 0=False Enables the high stage multiplier
Table 425: 87L Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
STR_LS_LOC BOOLEAN Pickup stabilized stage local
STR_LS_REM BOOLEAN Pickup stabilized stage remote
OPR_LS_LOC BOOLEAN Trip stabilized stage local
OPR_LS_REM BOOLEAN Trip stabilized stage remote
OPR_HS_LOC BOOLEAN Trip instantaneous stage local
OPR_HS_REM BOOLEAN Trip instantaneous stage remote
BLKD2H_LOC BOOLEAN Restraint due 2nd harmonics detected local
BLKD2H_REM BOOLEAN Restraint due 2nd harmonics detected remote
PRO_ACTIVE BOOLEAN Status of the protection, true when function is operative
4.3.1.8 Settings
Table 426: 87L Group settings (Basic)
Low trip value 10...200 %Ir 1 10 Basic setting for the stabilized stage pickup
High trip value 200...4000 %Ir 1 2000 Instantaneous stage trip value
Pickup value 2.H 10...50 % 1 20 The ratio of the 2. harmonic component to
fundamental component required for blocking
High Op value Mult 0.5...1.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the high stage trip value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IDMT curves
End section 1 0...200 %Ir 1 100 Turn-point between the first and the second
line of the operating characteristics
Slope section 2 10...50 % 1 50 Slope of the second line of the operating
characteristics
End section 2 200...2000 %Ir 1 500 Turn-point between the second and the third
496 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Slope section 3 10...200 % 1 150 Slope of the third line of the operating
characteristics
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext Inv 15=IEC DT Selection of time delay curve for stabilized
3=ANSI Norm Inv stage
5=ANSI DT
9=IEC Norm Inv
10=IEC Very Inv
12=IEC Ext Inv
15=IEC DT
Table 427: 87L Non group settings (Basic)

Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Disable / Enable
4=test/blocked
5=off
Winding selection 1=Not in use 1=Not in use IED location respect to transformer, HV
2=Winding 1 (Winding 1) side or LV (Winding 2) side
3=Winding 2
Winding 1 type 1=Y 1=Y Connection of the HV side windings.
2=YN Determined by the transformer connection
3=D group (e.g. Dyn11 ->"D")
4=Z
5=ZN
Winding 2 type 1=y 1=y Connection of the LV side windings.
2=yn Determined by the transformer connection
3=d group (e.g. Dyn11 ->"yn")
4=z
5=zn
Clock number 0=Clk Num 0 0=Clk Num 0 Setting the phase shift between HV and LV with
1=Clk Num 1 clock number for connection group
2=Clk Num 2 compensation (e.g. Dyn11 -> 11)
4=Clk Num 4
5=Clk Num 5
6=Clk Num 6
7=Clk Num 7
8=Clk Num 8
10=Clk Num 10
11=Clk Num 11
CT ratio correction 0.200...5.000 0.001 1.000 Local phase current transformer ratio
correction
CT connection type 1=Type 1 1=Type 1 CT connection type. Determined by the
2=Type 2 directions of the connected current
transformers.
Zro A elimination 1=Not eliminated 1=Not eliminated Elimination of the zero-sequence current
2=Winding 1
3=Winding 2
4=Winding 1 and 2
Restraint mode 1=None 1=None Selects what restraint modes are in use
2=Harmonic2
615 series ANSI 497

Technical Manual
Table 428: 87L Non group settings (Advanced)

Minimum trip time 45...60000 ms 1 45 Minimum trip time for stabilized stage IDMT
curves
4.3.1.9 Monitored Data

Table 429: 87L Monitored data
I_AMPL_LOC_A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Local phase A amplitude after
correction
I_AMPL_LOC_B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Local phase B amplitude after
correction
I_AMPL_LOC_C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Local phase C amplitude after
correction
I_AMPL_REM_A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Remote phase A amplitude
after correction
I_AMPL_REM_B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Remote phase B amplitude
after correction
I_AMPL_REM_C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Remote phase C amplitude
after correction
ID_A FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential current phase A
ID_B FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential current phase B
ID_C FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential current phase C
IB_A FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Stabilization current phase A
IB_B FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Stabilization current phase B
IB_C FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Stabilization current phase C
I_ANGL_DIFF_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
differential between local and
remote, phase A
I_ANGL_DIFF_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
remote, phase B
I_ANGL_DIFF_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
remote, phase C
87L Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
IA-diff FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Differential current phase A
498 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

IB-diff FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Differential current phase B
IC-diff FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Differential current phase C
IA-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Stabilization current phase A
IB-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Stabilization current phase B
IC-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Stabilization current phase C

Table 430: 87L Technical data
Characteristics Value
Operation accuracy 1) Depending on the frequency of the measured
current: fn ±2 Hz
Low stage ±2.5% of the set value

High stage ±2.5% of the set value
High stage, trip time 2)3) Minimum Typical Maximum

22 ms 25 ms 29 ms
Retardation time (Low stage) <40 ms
Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the set value or ±20 ms 4)
1) With the symmetrical communication channel (as when using dedicated fiber optic).
2) Without additional delay in the communication channel (as when using dedicated fiber optic).
3) Including the delay of the output contact. When differential current = 2 × High trip value and fn = 50 Hz with
galvanic pilot wire link + 5 ms.
4) Low operate value multiples in range of 1.5...20.

Table 431: 87L Technical revision history
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the Time
multiplier setting.
C Support for in-zone transformer added.
Differential and bias currents are shown as rated
currents in the Measurements view.
D Internal Improvement.
615 series ANSI 499

Technical Manual
4.3.2 Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for two-

winding transformers 87T
Stabilized and instantaneous differential TR2PTDF 3dI>T 87T
protection for two-winding transformers
GUID-134E8524-738D-4232-A6BD-4C9BD2A62F8D-ANSI V1 EN
The stabilized and instantaneous differential protection function 87T is designed to

protect two-winding transformers and generator-transformer blocks. 87T includes low
biased and high instantaneous stages.
The biased low stage provides a fast clearance of faults while remaining stable with high
currents passing through the protected zone increasing errors on current measuring. The
second harmonic restraint, together with the waveform based algorithms, ensures that the
low stage does not trip due to the transformer inrush currents. The fifth harmonic restraint
ensures that the low stage does not trip on apparent differential current caused by a
harmless transformer over-excitation.
The instantaneous high stage provides a very fast clearance of severe faults with a high
differential current regardless of their harmonics.
The setting characteristic can be set more sensitive with the aid of tap changer position
compensation. The correction of transformation ratio due to the changes in tap position is
done automatically based on the tap changer status information.
500 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The operation of 87T can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
Differential
calculation
I_A1
Transformer
I_B1
vector group
I_C1 matching OR TRIP
I_A2 Zero- Instantaneous

OPR_LS
sequence high stage
I_B2 component
OPR_HS
elimination
I_C2
TAP_POS Compensation
of tap changer
position
BLK_OPR_HS
BLOCK
BLK_OPR_LS
Second
harmonic BLKD2H
blocking
Biased
BLKD5H
low stage
Fifth harmonic BLKDWAV

blocking
Waveform
blocking
GUID-C4FFDFA8-A197-4983-87D4-A6A426FE1BF1 V1 EN
87T operates phase-wise on a difference of incoming and outgoing currents. The positive
direction of the currents is towards the protected object.
615 series ANSI 501

Technical Manual
GUID-DABAB343-214F-4A86-ADC8-BFD8E64B25A7-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 249: Positive direction of the currents
Id = I W 1 + I W 2
GUID-0B35503B-CA7D-4598-A1E4-59C9AA66012D V2 EN (Equation 81)
In a normal situation, no fault occurs in the area protected by 87T. Then the currents I W1
and I W 2 are equal and the differential current Id is zero. In practice, however, the
differential current deviates from zero in normal situations. In the power transformer
protection, the differential current is caused by CT inaccuracies, variations in tap changer
position (if not compensated), transformer no-load current and instantaneous transformer
inrush currents. An increase in the load current causes the differential current, caused by
the CT inaccuracies and the tap changer position, to grow at the same percentage rate.
In a biased differential protection relay in normal operation or during external faults, the
higher the load current is the higher is the differential current required for tripping. When
an internal fault occurs, the currents on both sides of the protected object are flowing into
it. This causes the biasing current to be considerably smaller, which makes the operation
more sensitive during internal faults.
IW1 − IW 2
Ib =
2
GUID-1403DDDA-D840-4746-A925-F426AC7A8608 V2 EN (Equation 82)
If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current or if the phase angle
between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero (in a normal situation,
the phase difference is 180 degrees), a fault has most certainly occurred in the area
protected by the differential protection relay. Then the trip value set for the instantaneous
stage is automatically halved and the internal blocking signals of the biased stage are
inhibited.
Transformer vector group matching

The phase difference of the winding 1 and winding 2 currents that is caused by the vector
group of the power transformer is numerically compensated. The matching of the phase
difference is based on the phase shifting and the numerical delta connection inside the
protection relay. The Winding 1 type parameter determines the connection on winding 1
(”Y”, ”YN”, ”D”, ”Z”, ”ZN”). The Winding 2 type parameter determines the connections
of the phase windings on the low voltage side (“y”, ”yn”, ”d”, ”z”, ”zn”).
502 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The vector group matching can be implemented either on both, winding 1 and winding 2,
or only on winding 1 or winding 2, at intervals of 30° with the Clock number setting.
When the vector group matching is Yy0 and the CT connection type is according to "Type
2", the phase angle of the phase currents connected to the protection relay does not change.
When the vector group matching is Yy6, the phase currents are turned 180° in the
protection relay.
Example 1
Vector group matching of a Ynd11-connected power transformer on winding 1, CT
connection type according to type 1. The Winding 1 type setting is ”YN”, Winding 2 type
is “d” and Clock number is “Clk Num 11”. This is compensated internally by giving
winding 1 internal compensation value +30° and winding 2 internal compensation value
0°:
IA − IB
I AmHV =
3
I B − IC
I BmHV =
3
IC − I A
I CmHV =
3
GUID-88668B82-9EC4-4FE7-AFE0-71360F72543F V1 EN (Equation 83)
Example 2
But if vector group is Yd11 and CT connection type is according to type 1, the
compensation is a little different. The Winding 1 type setting is ”Y”, Winding 2 type is “d”
and Clock number is “Clk Num 11”. This is compensated internally by giving winding 1
internal compensation value 0° and winding 2 internal compensation value -30°;
I A − IC
I AmLV =
3
IB − I A
I BmLV =
3
IC − I B
I CmLV =
3
GUID-06FCDC6B-7FD0-4205-886F-D36A4C2EEB38 V1 EN (Equation 84)
The "Y" side currents stay untouched, while the "d" side currents are compensated to
match the currents actually flowing in the windings.
In this example there is no neutral current on either side of the transformer (assuming there
are no grounding transformers installed). In the previous example, however, the matching
is done differently to have the winding 1 neutral current compensated at the same time.
615 series ANSI 503

Technical Manual
Zero-sequence component elimination

If Clock number is "Clk Num 2", "Clk Num 4", "Clk Num 8" or "Clk Num 10", the vector
group matching is always done on both, winding 1 and winding 2. The combination results
in the correct compensation. In this case the zero-sequence component is always removed
from both sides automatically. The Zro A elimination parameter cannot change this.
If Clock number is "Clk Num 1", "Clk Num 5", "Clk Num 7" or "Clk Num 11", the vector
group matching is done on one side only. A possible zero-sequence component of the
phase currents at ground faults occurring outside the protection area is eliminated in the
numerically implemented delta connection before the differential current and the biasing
current are calculated. This is why the vector group matching is almost always made on
the star connected side of the "Ynd" and "Dyn" connected transformers.
If Clock number is "Clk Num 0" or "Clk Num 6", the zero-sequence component of the
phase currents is not eliminated automatically on either side. Therefore, the zero-sequence
component on the star connected side that is grounded at its star point has to be eliminated
by using the Zro A elimination parameter.
The same parameter has to be used to eliminate the zero-sequence component if there is,
for example, an grounding transformer on the delta-connected side of the "Ynd" power
transformer in the area to be protected. In this case, the vector group matching is normally
made on the side of the star connection. On the side of the delta connection, the elimination
of the zero-sequence component has to be separately selected.
By using the Zro A elimination parameter, the zero-sequence component of the phase
currents is calculated and reduced for each phase current:
1
I Am = I A −
3
(
x I A + I B + IC )
1
I Bm (
= I B − x I A + I B + IC
3
)
1
I Cm (
= IC − x I A + I B + IC
3
)
GUID-BD8D0B4F-E3A9-4E58-834F-3736858F5430 V1 EN (Equation 85)
In many cases with the grounded neutral of a "wye" winding, it is possible

to make the compensation so that a zero-sequence component of the phase
currents is automatically eliminated. For example, in a case of a "Ynd"
transformer, the compensation is made on the winding 1 side to
automatically eliminate the zero-sequence component of the phase
currents on that side (and the "d" side does not have them). In those cases,
explicit elimination is not needed.
504 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Compensation of tap changer position

The position of the tap changer used for voltage control can be compensated and the
position information is provided for the protection function through the tap position
indication function 84T.
Typically, the tap changer is located within the high voltage winding, that is, winding 1,
of the power transformer. The Tapped winding parameter specifies whether the tap
changer is connected to the high voltage side winding or the low voltage side winding.
This parameter is also used to enable and disable the automatic adaptation to the tap
changer position. The possible values are "Not in use", "Winding 1" or "Winding 2".
The Tap nominal parameter tells the number of the tap, which results in the nominal
voltage (and current). When the current tap position deviates from this value, the input
current values on the side where the tap changer resides are scaled to match the currents
on the other side.
A correct scaling is determined by the number of steps and the direction of the deviation
from the nominal tap and the percentage change in voltage resulting from a deviation of
one tap step. The percentage value is set using the Step of tap parameter.
The operating range of the tap changer is defined by the Min winding tap and Max winding
tap parameters. The Min winding tap parameter tells the tap position number resulting in
the minimum effective number of winding turns on the side of the transformer where the
tap changer is connected. Correspondingly, the Max winding tap parameter tells the tap
position number resulting in the maximum effective number of winding turns.
The Min winding tap and Max winding tap parameters help the tap position compensation
algorithm know in which direction the compensation is being made. This ensures also that
if the current tap position information is corrupted for some reason, the automatic tap
changer position adaptation does not try to adapt to any unrealistic position values.
GUID-317C68F8-A517-458A-A5D0-32FCE6C5F547 V1 EN
Figure 250: Simplified presentation of the high voltage and medium voltage windings
with demonstration of the Max winding tap, Min winding tap and Tap
nominal parameters
615 series ANSI 505

Technical Manual
The position value is available through the Monitored data view on LHMI or through other
communication tools in the tap position indication function. When the quality of the
TAP_POS value is not good, the position information in TAP_POS is not used but the last
value with the good quality information is used instead. In addition, the minimum
sensitivity of the biased stage, set by the Low trip value setting, is automatically
desensitized with the total range of the tap position correction. The new acting low trip
value is
Desensitized Low trip value = Lowtrip value + ABS ( MaxWinding tap − Min winding tap ) × Step of tap
GUID-2E5AD399-D8DD-4F64-A194-7540D55DB8ED-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 86)
Second harmonic blocking

The transformer magnetizing inrush currents occur when energizing the transformer after
a period of de-energization. The inrush current can be many times the rated current and the
halving time can be up to several seconds. To the differential protection, the inrush current
represents a differential current, which would cause the differential protection to trip
almost always when the transformer is connected to the network. Typically, the inrush
current contains a large amount of second harmonics.
Blocking the operation of the 87T biased low stage at a magnetizing inrush current is
based on the ratio of the amplitudes of the second harmonic digitally filtered from the
differential current and the fundamental frequency (Id2f /Id1f).
The blocking also prevents unwanted operation at the recovery and sympathetic
magnetizing inrushes. At the recovery inrush, the magnetizing current of the transformer
to be protected increases momentarily when the voltage returns to normal after the
clearance of a fault outside the protected area. The sympathetic inrush is caused by the
energization of another transformer running in parallel with the protected transformer
already connected to the network.
The ratio of the second harmonic to a fundamental component can vary considerably
between the phases. Especially when the delta compensation is done for a Ynd1 connected
transformer and the two phases of the inrush currents are otherwise equal but opposite in
phase angle, the subtraction of the phases in a delta compensation results in a very small
second harmonic component.
Some measures have to be taken in order to avoid the false tripping of a phase having too
low a ratio of the second harmonic to the fundamental component. One way could be to
always block all the phases when the second harmonic blocking conditions are fulfilled in
at least one phase. The other way is to calculate the weighted ratios of the second harmonic
to the fundamental component for each phase using the original ratios of the phases. The
latter option is used here. The second harmonic ratios I_2H_RAT_x are given in
Monitored data.
The ratio to be used for second harmonic blocking is, therefore, calculated as a weighted
average on the basis of the ratios calculated from the differential currents of the three
506 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
phases. The ratio of the concerned phase is of most weight compared to the ratios of the
other two phases. In this protection relay, if the weighting factors are four, one and one,
four is the factor of the phase concerned. The operation of the biased stage on the
concerned phase is blocked if the weighted ratio of that phase is above the set blocking
limit Pickup value 2.H and if blocking is enabled through the Restraint mode parameter.
Using separate blocking for the individual phases and weighted averages calculated for
the separate phases provides a blocking scheme that is stable at the connection inrush
currents.
If the peak value of the differential current is very high, that is Ir>12×In, the limit for the
second harmonic blocking is desensitized (in the phase in question) by increasing it
proportionally to the peak value of the differential current.
The connection of the power transformer against a fault inside the protected area does not
delay the operation of the tripping, because in such a situation the blocking based on the
second harmonic of the differential current is prevented by a separate algorithm based on
a different waveform and a different rate of change of the normal inrush current and the
inrush current containing the fault current. The algorithm does not eliminate the blocking
at inrush currents, unless there is a fault in the protected area.
The feature can also be enabled and disabled with the Harmonic deblock 2.H parameter.
Fifth harmonic blocking

The inhibition of 87T operation in the situations of overexcitation is based on the ratio of
the fifth harmonic and the fundamental component of the differential current (Id5f/Id1f).
The ratio is calculated separately for each phase without weighting . If the ratio exceeds
the setting value of Pickup value 5.H and if blocking is enabled through the Restraint mode
parameter, the operation of the biased stage of 87T in the concerned phase is blocked.The
fifth harmonic ratios I_5H_RAT_x are given in Monitored data.
At dangerous levels of overvoltage, which can cause damage to the transformer, the
blocking can be automatically eliminated. If the ratio of the fifth harmonic and the
fundamental component of the differential current exceeds the Stop value 5.H parameter,
the blocking removal is enabled. The enabling and disabling of deblocking feature is also
done through the Harmonic deblock 5.H parameter.
615 series ANSI 507

Technical Manual
GUID-A97464D1-3085-4F27-B829-11EEC47CA654 V1 EN
Figure 251: The limits and operation of the fifth harmonic blocking when both blocking
and deblocking features are enabled using the Harmonic deblock 5.H
control parameter.
The fifth harmonic blocking has a hysteresis to avoid rapid fluctuation between "TRUE"
and "FALSE". The blocking also has a counter, which counts the required consecutive
fulfillments of the condition. When the condition is not fulfilled, the counter is decreased
(if >0).
Also the fifth harmonic deblocking has a hysteresis and a counter which counts the
required consecutive fulfillments of the condition. When the condition is not fulfilled, the
counter is decreased (if >0).
Waveform blocking
The biased low stage can always be blocked with waveform blocking. The stage can not
be disabled with the Restraint mode parameter. This algorithm has two parts. The first part
is intended for external faults while the second is intended for inrush situations. The
algorithm has criteria for a low current period during inrush where also the differential
current (not derivative) is checked.
Biased low stage

The current differential protection needs to be biased because the possible appearance of
a differential current can be due to something else than an actual fault in the transformer
(or generator).
In the case of transformer protection, a false differential current can be caused by:
• CT errors
• Varying tap changer positions (if not automatically compensated)
• Transformer no-load current
508 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
• Transformer inrush currents

• Transformer overexcitation in overvoltage
• Underfrequency situations
• CT saturation at high currents passing through the transformer
The differential current caused by CT errors or tap changer positions increases at the same
percent ratio as the load current.
In the protection of generators, the false differential current can be caused by various
factors.
• CT errors
• CT saturation at high currents passing through the generator
GUID-0E927DF9-5641-4CAE-B808-0B75EA09EA95-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 252: Operation logic of the biased low stage
615 series ANSI 509

Technical Manual
The high currents passing through a protected object can be caused by the short circuits
outside the protected area, the large currents fed by the transformer in motor start-up or the
transformer inrush situations. Therefore, the operation of the differential protection is
biased in respect to the load current. In biased differential protection, the higher the
differential current required for the protection to trip, the higher the load current.
The operating characteristic of the biased low stage is determined by Low trip value, Slope
section 2 and the setting of the second turning point of the operating characteristic curve,
End section 2 (the first turning point is fixed). The settings are the same for all the phases.
When the differential current exceeds the operating value determined by the operating
characteristic, the differential function awakes. If the differential current stays above the
operating value continuously for a suitable period, which is 1.1 times the fundamental
cycle, the OPR_LS output is activated. The TRIP output is always activated when the
OPR_LS output is activated.
The stage can be blocked internally by the second or fifth harmonic restraint, or by special
algorithms detecting inrush and current transformer saturation at external faults. When the
operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the second harmonic blocking
functionality, the BLKD2H output is activated.
When operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the fifth harmonic blocking
functionality, the BLKD5H output is activated. Correspondingly, when the operation of
the biased low stage is blocked by the waveform blocking functionality, the BLKDWAV
output is activated according to the phase information.
When required, the trip outputs of the biased low stage can be blocked by the
BLK_OPR_LS or BLOCK external control signals.
510 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Id [%Ir]
300 Ib3
Id3
200
Ib2
100
Id1
Id2
Low Trip value
100 200 300 400 500 Ib [%Ir]
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3
End section 1 End section 2
GUID-EAAB6851-B6A9-4A69-B962-1725A4928D54-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 253: Operation characteristic for biased operation of 87T
The Low trip value of the biased stage of the differential function is determined according
to the operation characteristic:
Low trip value = Id1
Slope section 2 and Slope section 3 are determined correspondingly:
Id 2
Slope section 2 = ⋅ 100%
I b2
GUID-D1C2CAED-3D58-4405-A79D-17B203A8D3A9 V4 EN (Equation 87)
Id 3
I b3
GUID-72224800-6EE1-48E7-9B57-4ABE89DB350C V1 EN (Equation 88)
The second turning point End section 2 can be set in the range of 100 percent to 500
percent.
The slope of the differential function's operating characteristic curve varies in the different
sections of the range.
• In section 1, where 0 percent Ir < Ib < End section 1, End section 1 being fixed to 50
percent Ir, the differential current required for tripping is constant. The value of the
differential current is the same as the Low trip value selected for the function. Low trip
615 series ANSI 511

Technical Manual
value basically allows the no-load current of the power transformer and small
inaccuracies of the current transformers, but it can also be used to influence the
overall level of the operating characteristic. At the rated current, the no-load losses of
the power transformer are about 0.2 percent. If the supply voltage of the power
transformer suddenly increases due to operational disturbances, the magnetizing
current of the transformer increases as well. In general the magnetic flux density of
the transformer is rather high at rated voltage and a rise in voltage by a few percent
causes the magnetizing current to increase by tens of percent. This should be
considered in Low trip value
• In section 2, where End section 1 < Ib/In < End section 2, is called the influence area
of Slope section 2. In this section, variations in the starting ratio affect the slope of the
characteristic, that is, how big a change in the differential current is required for
tripping in comparison with the change in the load current. The starting ratio should
consider CT errors and variations in the transformer tap changer position (if not
compensated). Too high a starting ratio should be avoided, because the sensitivity of
the protection for detecting inter-turn faults depends basically on the starting ratio.
• In section 3, where Ib/In > End section 2, the slope of the characteristic can be set by
Slope section 3 that defines the increase in the differential current to the
corresponding increase in the biasing current.
Slope End
Low trip
Curve section section
value
2 2
Id [%Ir]
1 50 %Ir 50 % 100 %Ir
2 20 %Ir 30 % 150 %Ir
300 3 5 %Ir 10 % 500 %Ir
Curve 1
200
Curve 2 ( Default settigs )

100
Curve 3
100 200 300 400 500 Id [%Ir]
GUID-739E1789-778D-44BF-BD4A-6BD684BF041D-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 254: Setting range for biased low stage
If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current of the phase angle
512 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
the phase difference is 180 degrees), a fault has most likely occurred in the area protected
by 87T. Then the internal blocking signals of the biased stage are inhibited.

The instantaneous high stage operation can be enabled and disabled with the Enable high
set setting. The corresponding parameter values are "TRUE" and "FALSE."
The operation of the instantaneous high stage is not biased. The instantaneous stage trips
and the output OPR_HS is activated when the amplitude of the fundamental frequency
component of the differential current exceeds the set High trip value or when the
instantaneous value of the differential current exceeds 2.5 times the value of High trip
value. The factor 2.5 (=1.8 × √2) is due to the maximum asymmetric short circuit current.
If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current or the phase angle
the phase difference is 180 degrees), a fault has occurred in the area protected by 87T.
Then the trip value set for the instantaneous stage is automatically halved and the internal
blocking signals of the biased stage are inhibited.
I_D
TRIP
AREA (HS)
High trip value
TRIP
AREA (LS)
Slope
section 3
Slope NON-TRIP
section 2
AREA
Low trip value
End section 1 End section 2 I_B
GUID-8B8EC6FC-DF75-4674-808B-7B4C68E9F3E8-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 255: Operating characteristics of the protection. (LS) stands for the biased low
stage and (HS) for the instantaneous high stage
The TRIP output is activated always when the OPR_HS output activates.
The internal blocking signals of the differential function do not prevent the trip signal of
the instantaneous differential current stage. When required, the trip outputs of the
instantaneous high stage can be blocked by the BLK_OPR_HS and BLOCK external
control signals.
615 series ANSI 513

Technical Manual
GUID-9AACAC66-BF72-430C-AAC7-2E52C3DC4487-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 256: Operation logic of instantaneous high stage
Reset of the blocking signals (de-block)

All three blocking signals, that is, waveform and second and fifth harmonic, have a
counter, which holds the blocking on for a certain time after the blocking conditions have
ceased to be fulfilled. The deblocking takes place when those counters have elapsed. This
is a normal case of deblocking.
The blocking signals can be reset immediately if a very high differential current is
measured or if the phase difference of the compared currents (the angle between the
compared currents) is close to zero after the automatic vector group matching has been
made (in a normal situation, the phase difference is 180 degrees). This does not, however,
reset the counters holding the blockings, so the blocking signals may return when these
conditions are not valid anymore.
External blocking functionality

87T has three inputs for blocking.
• When the BLOCK input is active ("TRUE"), the operation of the function is blocked
but measurement output signals are still updated.
• When the BLK_OPR_LS input is active ("TRUE"), 87T operates normally except
that the OPR_LS output is not active or activated in any circumstance. Additionally,
the TRIP output can be activated only by the instantaneous high stage (if not blocked
as well).
• When the BLK_OPR_HS input is active ("TRUE"), 87T operates normally except
that the OPR_HS output is not active or activated in any circumstance. Additionally,
the TRIP output can be activated only by the biased low stage (if not blocked as well).
4.3.2.5 Application
87T is a unit protection function serving as the main protection for transformers in case of
winding failure. The protective zone of a differential protection includes the transformer,
514 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
the bus-work or the cables between the current transformer and the power transformer.
When bushing current transformers are used for the differential protection relay, the
protective zone does not include the bus work or cables between the circuit breaker and the
power transformer.
In some substations, there is a current differential protection for the busbar. The busbar
protection includes bus work or cables between the circuit breaker and the power
transformer. Internal electrical faults are very serious and cause immediate damage. Short
circuits and ground faults in windings and terminals are normally detected by the
differential protection. If enough turns are short-circuited, the interturn faults, which are
flashovers between the conductors within the same physical winding, are also detected.
The interturn faults are the most difficult transformer-winding faults to detect with
electrical protections. A small interturn fault including a few turns results in an
undetectable amount of current until the fault develops into an ground fault. Therefore, it
is important that the differential protection has a high level of sensitivity and that it is
possible to use a sensitive setting without causing unwanted operations for external faults.
It is important that the faulty transformer is disconnected as fast as possible. As 87T is a

unit protection function, it can be designed for fast tripping, thus providing a selective
disconnection of the faulty transformer. 87T should never trip to faults outside the
protective zone.
87T compares the current flowing into the transformer to the current leaving the
transformer. A correct analysis of fault conditions by 87T must consider the changes to
voltages, currents and phase angles. The traditional transformer differential protection
functions required auxiliary transformers for the correction of the phase shift and turns
ratio. The numerical microprocessor based differential algorithm implemented in 87T
compensates for both the turns ratio and the phase shift internally in the software.
The differential current should theoretically be zero during normal load or external faults
if the turns ratio and the phase shift are correctly compensated. However, there are several
different phenomena other than internal faults that cause unwanted and false differential
currents. The main reasons for unwanted differential currents are:
• Mismatch due to varying tap changer positions
• Different characteristics, loads and operating conditions of the current transformers
• Zero sequence currents that only flow on one side of the power transformer
• Normal magnetizing currents
• Magnetizing inrush currents
• Overexcitation magnetizing currents.
87T is designed mainly for the protection of two-winding transformers. 87T can also be
utilized for the protection of generator-transformer blocks as well as short cables and
overhead lines. If the distance between the measuring points is relatively long in line
protection, interposing CTs can be required to reduce the burden of the CTs.
615 series ANSI 515

Technical Manual
87T
87T
TR2PTDF
TR2PTDF 3dI>T
3dI>T
Distance
e.g. 500 m
G
3~
a) b)
GUID-B326703C-3645-4256-96AD-DA87FC9E9C67-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 257: Differential protection of a generator-transformer block and short cable/

line
87T can also be used in three-winding transformer applications or two-winding

transformer applications with two output feeders.
On the double-feeder side of the power transformer, the current of the two CTs per phase
must be summed by connecting the two CTs of each phase in parallel. Generally this
requires the interposing CTs to handle the vector group and/or ratio mismatch between the
two windings/feeders.
The accuracy limit factor for the interposing CT must fulfill the same requirements as the
main CTs. Please note that the interposing CT imposes an additional burden to the main
CTs.
The most important rule in these applications is that at least 75 percent of the short-circuit
power has to be fed on the side of the power transformer with only one connection to the
protection relay.
516 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-799588E3-C63F-4687-98C5-FF48284676DF-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 258: Differential protection of a three-winding transformer and a transformer

with two output feeders
87T can also be used for the protection of the power transformer feeding the frequency
converter. An interposing CT is required for matching the three-winding transformer
currents to a two-winding protection relay.
The fundamental frequency component is numerically filtered with a Fourier filter, DFT.
The filter suppresses frequencies other than the set fundamental frequency, and therefore
the protection relay is not adapted for measuring the output of the frequency converter,
that is, 87T is not suited for protecting of a power transformer or motor fed by a frequency
converter
615 series ANSI 517

Technical Manual
GUID-46FDF23A-7E78-4B17-A888-8501484AB57A V1 EN
Figure 259: Protection of the power transformer feeding the frequency converter
Transforming ratio correction of CTs

The CT secondary currents often differ from the rated current at the rated load of the power
transformer. The CT transforming ratios can be corrected on both sides of the power
transformer with the CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ration Cor Wnd 2 settings.
First, the rated load of the power transformer must be calculated on both sides when the
apparent power and phase-to-phase voltage are known.
Sn
I nT =
3 × Vn
GUID-B5467DB8-17EB-4D09-A741-1F5BB23466AA-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 89)
InT rated load of the power transformer
Sn rated power of the power transformer
Vn rated phase-to-phase voltage
518 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Next, the settings for the CT ratio correction can be calculated.

I1n
CT ratio correction =
I nT
GUID-F5F45645-C809-4F99-B783-751C8CC822BF V1 EN (Equation 90)
I1n nominal primary current of the CT
After the CT ratio correction, the measured currents and corresponding setting values of
87T are expressed in multiples of the rated power transformer current Ir (xIr) or percentage
value of Ir (%Ir).
The rated input current (1A or 5A) of the relay does not have to be same for the HV and
the LV side. For example, the rated secondary current of 5 A can be used on the HV side,
while 1A is used on the LV side or vice versa.
Example
The rated power of the transformer is 25 MVA, the ratio of the CTs on the 110 kV side is
300/1 and that on the 21 kV side is 1000/1
GUID-DC9083B2-CB07-4F6B-8C06-52979E5F484A-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 260: Example of two-winding power transformer differential protection
The rated load of the transformer is calculated:
HV side: InT_Wnd1 = 25 MVA / (1.732 x 110 kV) = 131.2 A
LV side: InT_Wnd2 = 25 MVA / (1.732 x 21 kV) = 687.3 A
Settings:
CT ratio Cor Wnd 1= 300 A / 131.2 A = “2.29”
CT ratio Cor Wnd 2= 1000 A / 687.3 A = “1.45”
615 series ANSI 519

Technical Manual
Vector group matching and elimination of the zero-sequence component

The vector group of the power transformer is numerically matched on the high voltage and
low voltage sides by means of the Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type and Clock number
settings. Thus no interposing CTs are needed if there is only a power transformer inside
the protected zone. The matching is based on phase shifting and a numerical delta
connection in the protection relay. If the neutral of a star-connected power transformer is
grounded, any ground fault in the network is perceived by the protection relay as a
differential current. The elimination of the zero-sequence component can be selected for
that winding by setting the Zro A elimination parameter.
Table 432: 87T settings corresponding to the power transformer vector groups and zero-sequence
elimination
Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination
transformer
Yy0 Y y Clk Num 0 Not needed
YNy0 YN y Clk Num 0 HV side
YNyn0 YN yn Clk Num 0 HV & LV side
Yyn0 Y yn Clk Num 0 LV side
YNy2 YN y Clk Num 2 Not needed
YNyn2 YN yn Clk Num 2 Not needed
Yyn2 Y yn Clk Num 2 Not needed
Yd1 Y d Clk Num 1 Not needed
520 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
transformer
YNd1 YN d Clk Num 1 Not needed
Dd0 D d Clk Num 0 Not needed
Dy1 D y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Dyn1 D yn Clk Num 1 Not needed
Yz1 Y z Clk Num 1 Not needed
YNz1 YN z Clk Num 1 Not needed
YNzn1 YN zn Clk Num 1 LV side
Yzn1 Y zn Clk Num 1 Not needed
615 series ANSI 521

Technical Manual
transformer
Zy1 Z y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Zyn1 Z yn Clk Num 1 Not needed
ZNyn1 ZN yn Clk Num 1 HV side
ZNy1 ZN y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Dz0 D z Clk Num 0 Not needed
Dzn0 D zn Clk Num 0 LV side
Dzn2 D zn Clk Num 2 Not needed
Dzn6 D zn Clk Num 6 LV side
Zd0 Z d Clk Num 0 Not needed
ZNd0 ZN d Clk Num 0 HV side
ZNd2 ZN d Clk Num 2 Not needed
522 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
transformer
ZNd6 ZN d Clk Num 6 HV side
Zz0 Z z Clk Num 0 Not needed
ZNz0 ZN z Clk Num 0 HV side
ZNzn0 ZN zn Clk Num 0 HV & LV side
Zzn0 Z zn Clk Num 0 LV side
ZNz2 ZN z Clk Num 2 Not needed
ZNzn2 ZN zn Clk Num 2 Not needed
Zzn2 Z zn Clk Num 2 Not needed
ZNz6 ZN z Clk Num 6 HV side
ZNzn6 ZN zn Clk Num 6 HV & LV side
Zzn6 Z zn Clk Num 6 LV side
615 series ANSI 523

Technical Manual
transformer
524 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
transformer
615 series ANSI 525

Technical Manual
Commissioning
The correct settings, which are CT connection type, Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type and
Clock number, for the connection group compensation can be verified by monitoring the
angle values I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1, I_ANGL_C1_A1,
I_ANGL_A2_B2, I_ANGL_B2_C2, I_ANGL_C2_A2, I_ANGL_A1_A2,
I_ANGL_B1_B2 and I_ANGL_C1_C2 while injecting the current into the transformer.
These angle values are calculated from the compensated currents. See signal description
from Monitored data table.
When a station service transformer is available, it can be used to provide current to the
high voltage side windings while the low voltage side windings are short-circuited. This
way the current can flow in both the high voltage and low voltage windings. The
commissioning signals can be provided by other means as well. The minimum current to
allow for phase current and angle monitoring is 0.015 Ir.
GUID-5ACBF127-85A3-4E5E-A130-9F7206A2DB4C V1 EN
Figure 261: Low voltage test arrangement. The three-phase low voltage source can
be the station service transformer.
The Tapped winding control setting parameter has to be set to “Not in use” to make sure
that the monitored current values are not scaled by the automatic adaptation to the tap
changer position. When only the angle values are required, the setting of Tapped winding
is not needed since angle values are not affected by the tap changer position adaptation.
When injecting the currents in the high voltage winding, the angle values
I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1, I_ANGL_C1_A1, I_ANGL_A2_B2,
I_ANGL_B2_C2 and I_ANGL_C2_A2 have to show +120 deg. Otherwise the phase
order can be wrong or the polarity of a current transformer differs from the polarities of the
other current transformers on the same side.
If the angle values I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1 and I_ANGL_C1_A1 show

-120 deg, the phase order is wrong on the high voltage side. If the angle values
I_ANGL_A2_B2, I_ANGL_B2_C2 and I_ANGL_C2_A2 show -120 deg, the phase
order is wrong on the low voltage side. If the angle values I_ANGL_A1_B1,
526 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
I_ANGL_B1_C1 and I_ANGL_C1_A1 do not show the same value of +120, the polarity
of one current transformer can be wrong. For instance, if the polarity of the current
transformer measuring IL2 is wrong, I_ANGL_A1_B1 shows -60 deg, I_ANGL_B1_C1
shows -60 deg and I_ANGL_C1_A1 shows +120 deg.
When the phase order and the angle values are correct, the angle values I_ANGL_A1_A2,
I_ANGL_B1_B2 and I_ANGL_C1_C2 usually show ±180 deg. There can be several
reasons if the angle values are not ±180 deg. If the values are 0 deg, the value given for CT
connection type is probably wrong. If the angle values are something else, the value for
Clock number can be wrong. Another reason is that the combination of Winding 1 type and
Winding 2 type does not match Clock number. This means that the resulting connection
group is not supported.
Example
If Winding 1 type is set to "Y", Winding 2 type is set to "y" and Clock number is set to "Clk
num 1", the resulting connection group "Yy1" is not a supported combination. Similarly if
Winding 1 type is set to "Y", Winding 2 type is set to "d" and Clock number is set to "Clk
num 0", the resulting connection group "Yd0" is not a supported combination. All the non-
supported combinations of Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type and Clock number settings
result in the default connection group compensation that is "Yy0".
4.3.2.6 CT connections and transformation ratio correction
The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as "Type 1" and "Type
2".
opposite, the CT connection type setting parameter is "Type 1". The connection
examples of "Type 1" are as shown in Figure 262 and Figure 263.
equate, the CT connection type setting parameter is "Type 2". The connection
examples of "Type 2" are as shown in Figure 264 and Figure 265.
• The default value of the CT connection type setting is "Type 1".
615 series ANSI 527

Technical Manual
A B C
P1
S1
1/5A
S2 IA
P2 N
1/5A
IB
N
1/5A
IC
N
HV
MV
P2
S2
S1
P1
1/5A
IAB
N
1/5A
IBB
N
1/5A
ICB
N
GUID-0558BCDF-6310-43EB-B699-47A9C4577861 V1 EN
528 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A B C
P2
S2
S1
P1
1/5A
IA
N
1/5A
IB
HV N
1/5A
IC
N
MV
P1
S1
1/5A
S2 IAB
P2 N
1/5A
IBB
N
1/5A
ICB
N
GUID-87B5CBC1-6128-4D49-AE38-A95F544EF5BE V1 EN
Figure 263: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 1
615 series ANSI 529

Technical Manual
A B C
P1
S1
1/5A
S2 IA
P2 N
1/5A
IB
N
1/5A
IC
N
HV
MV
P1
S1
1/5A
S2 IAB
P2 N
1/5A
IBB
N
1/5A
ICB
N
GUID-8A96C683-A9F6-4CCD-9407-1A3521D22C4B V1 EN
Figure 264: Connection of current transformers of Type 2 and example of the

currents during an external fault
530 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A B C
P2
S2
S1
P1
1/5A
IA
N
1/5A
IB
HV N
1/5A
IC
N
MV
P2
S2
S1
P1
1/5A
IAB
N
1/5A
IBB
N
1/5A
ICB
N
GUID-74AC5F89-612E-48E5-9F8F-01939241CD3C V1 EN
Figure 265: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 2
The CT secondary currents often differ from the rated current at the rated load of the power
transformer. The CT transforming ratios can be corrected on both sides of the power
transformer with the CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ratio Cor Wnd 2 settings.
4.3.2.7 Signals
I_A(1) SIGNAL 0 Phase A primary current
I_B(1) SIGNAL 0 Phase B primary current
I_C(1) SIGNAL 0 Phase C primary current
I_A(2) SIGNAL 0 Phase A secondary current
I_B(2) SIGNAL 0 Phase B secondary current
615 series ANSI 531

Technical Manual

I_C(2) SIGNAL 0 Phase C secondary current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block
BLK_OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks trip outputs from biased stage
BLK_OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks trip outputs from instantaneous stage

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip combined
OPR_LS BOOLEAN Trip from low set
OPR_HS BOOLEAN Trip from high set
BLKD2H BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic restraint block status
BLKD5H BOOLEAN 5th harmonic restraint block status
BLKDWAV BOOLEAN Waveform blocking status
4.3.2.8 Settings
Table 435: 87T Group settings (Basic)
High trip value 500...3000 %Ir 10 1000 Instantaneous stage setting
Low trip value 5...50 %Ir 1 20 Basic setting for biased operation
characteristics
Restraint Mode 5=Waveform 9=2.h + 5.h + wav Restraint Mode
6=2.h + waveform
8=5.h + waveform
9=2.h + 5.h + wav
Pickup value 2.H 7...20 % 1 15 The ratio of the 2. harmonic to fundamental
component required for blocking
532 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 436: 87T Group settings (Advanced)

Enable high set 0=False 1=True Enable high set stage
1=True
characteristics
Harmonic deblock 2.H 0=False 1=True Selects if the 2. harmonic deblocking is allowed
1=True in case of switch on to a fault (Allow / Do not
allow)
Stop value 5.H 10...50 % 1 35 The ratio of the 5. harmonic to fundamental
component required to remove 5. harmonic
blocking
Harmonic deblock 5.H 0=False 0=False Selects if the 5. harmonic deblocking is allowed
1=True in case of severe overvoltage situation (Allow /
Do not allow)

5=disable
transformers
Winding 1 type 1=Y 1=Y Connection of the HV side windings.
2=YN Determined by the transformer connection
3=D group (e.g. Dyn11 ->"D")
4=Z
5=ZN
Winding 2 type 1=y 1=y Connection of the LV side windings.
2=yn Determined by the transformer connection
3=d group (e.g. Dyn11 ->"yn")
4=z
5=zn
Clock number 0=Clk Num 0 0=Clk Num 0 Setting the phase shift between HV and LV with
1=Clk Num 1 clock number for connection group
2=Clk Num 2 compensation (e.g. Dyn11 -> 11)
4=Clk Num 4
5=Clk Num 5
6=Clk Num 6
7=Clk Num 7
8=Clk Num 8
10=Clk Num 10
11=Clk Num 11
Zro A elimination 1=Not eliminated 1=Not eliminated Elimination of the zero-sequence current: 1 ->
2=Winding 1 not eliminated, 2-> on HV only, 3 -> on LV only,
3=Winding 2 4 -> both on HV and LV
4=Winding 1 and 2
CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 0.40...4.00 0.01 1.00 CT ratio correction, winding 1
CT ratio Cor Wnd 2 0.40...4.00 0.01 1.00 CT ratio correction, winding 2
615 series ANSI 533

Technical Manual
Table 438: 87T Non group settings (Advanced)

Min winding tap -36...36 1 36 The tap position number resulting the minimum
number of effective winding turns on the side of
the transformer where the tap changer is.
Max winding tap -36...36 1 0 The tap position number resulting the
maximum number of effective winding turns on
the side of the transformer where the tap
changer is.
Tap nominal -36...36 1 18 The nominal position of the tap changer
resulting the default transformation ratio of the
transformer (as if there was no tap changer)
Tapped winding 1=Not in use 1=Not in use The winding where the tap changer is
2=Winding 1 connected to. Also used to
3=Winding 2
Step of tap 0.60...9.00 % 0.01 1.50 The percentage change in voltage
corresponding one step of the tap changer

OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=False Trip phase A
1=True
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=False Trip phase B
1=True
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=False Trip phase C
1=True
BLKD2H_A BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint block
1=True phase A status
BLKD2H_B BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint block
1=True phase B status
BLKD2H_C BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint block
1=True phase C status
BLKD5H_A BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint block
1=True phase A status
BLKD5H_B BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint block
1=True phase B status
BLKD5H_C BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint block
1=True phase C status
BLKDWAV_A BOOLEAN 0=False Waveform blocking phase A
1=True status
BLKDWAV_B BOOLEAN 0=False Waveform blocking phase B
1=True status
534 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

BLKDWAV_C BOOLEAN 0=False Waveform blocking phase C
1=True status
2nd harmonic block BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint block
1=True
phase A 1=True phase A
phase B 1=True phase B
phase C 1=True phase C
5th harmonic block BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint block
1=True
phase A 1=True phase A
phase B 1=True phase B
phase C 1=True phase C
I_AMPL_A1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
compensated primary current
phase A
I_AMPL_B1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
phase B
I_AMPL_C1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
phase C
I_AMPL_A2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
compensated secondary
current phase A
I_AMPL_B2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
current phase B
I_AMPL_C2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
current phase C
Differential Current FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential Current phase A
phase A
Differential Current FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential Current phase B
phase B
Differential Current FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential Current phase C
phase C
Restraint Current FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Restraint Current phase A
phase A
Restraint Current FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Restraint Current phase B
phase B
615 series ANSI 535

Technical Manual

Restraint Current FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Restraint Current phase C
phase C
I_2H_RAT_A FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current second
harmonic ratio, phase A
I_2H_RAT_B FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current second
harmonic ratio, phase B
I_2H_RAT_C FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current second
harmonic ratio, phase C
Angle difference FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle difference between HV
between HV PhAPhB PhAPhB
between HV PhBPhC
PhBPhC
between HV PhCPhA
PhCPhA
Angle diff betw LV FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle difference between LV
PhAPhB PhAPhB
PhBPhC PhBPhC
PhCPhA PhCPhA
Angle diff betw HVLV FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle difference between
PhA HVLV PhA
PhB HVLV PhB
PhC HVLV PhC
I_5H_RAT_A FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current fifth
harmonic ratio, phase A
I_5H_RAT_B FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current fifth
harmonic ratio, phase B
I_5H_RAT_C FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current fifth
harmonic ratio, phase C
87T Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
IA-diff FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured differential current
amplitude phase IA
IB-diff FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured differential current
amplitude phase IB
IC-diff FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured differential current
amplitude phase IC
536 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

IA-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current
amplitude phase IA
IB-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current
amplitude phase IB
IC-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current
amplitude phase IC

current: fn ±2 Hz

Low stage 36 ms 41 ms 46 ms
High stage 21 ms 22 ms 24 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5, …
1) Current before fault = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the output contact. When differential current = 2 × set operate value and fn = 50 Hz.

B 5th harmonic and waveform blockings taken to event
data set
C Added setting Slope section 3. Added input
TAP_POS
615 series ANSI 537

Technical Manual
4.3.3 Numerically stabilized low-impedance restricted ground-fault

protection 87LOZREF
Numerically stabilized low-impedance LREFPNDF dIoLo> 87LOZREF
restricted ground-fault protection
GUID-136BBBB5-17AB-41B1-81B9-F89CC3E05227 V2 EN
The numerically stabilized low-impedance restricted ground-fault protection function

87LOZREF for a two winding transformer is based on the numerically stabilized
differential current principle. No external stabilizing resistor or non-linear resistor are
required.
The fundamental components of the currents are used for calculating the residual current
of the phase currents, the neutral current, differential currents and stabilizing currents. The
operating characteristics are according to the definite time.
The function contains a blocking functionality. The neutral current second harmonic is
used for blocking during the transformer inrush situation. It is also possible to block
function outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.
The operation of 87LOZREF can be described using a module diagram. All the modules
in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
538 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-F8C2915F-CA7B-4830-B748-3E19E26803CC V1 EN
Earth fault detector

The operation is based on comparing the amplitude and the phase difference between the
sum of the fundamental frequency component of the phase currents (ΣI, residual current)
and the fundamental frequency component of the neutral current (IG) flowing in the
conductor between the transformer or generator's neutral point and ground. The
differential current is calculated as the absolute value of the difference between the
residual current (the sum of the fundamental frequency components of the phase currents
I_A, I_B and I_C) and the neutral current. The directional differential current
ID_COSPHI is the product of the differential current and cosφ. The value is available in
ID _ COSPHI = ( ΣI − IG ) × cos ϕ
GUID-FC03064F-5C0D-45D8-A329-DA66D2BB81BC V1 EN (Equation 91)
Residual current
ΣI
GUID-87E4DEDD-9288-41D9-B608-714CF3CC7A04 V1 EN
ϕ Phase difference between the residual and neutral currents

GUID-C4F98C50-7279-4DAA-8C77-5C761572F4B4 V1 EN
Neutral current
IG
GUID-7C75357D-9279-490A-AF0F-B1E2F31119FE V1 EN
A ground fault occurring in the protected area, that is, between the phase CTs and the
neutral connection CT, causes a differential current. The directions, that is, the phase
difference of the residual current and the neutral current, are considered in the operation
criteria to maintain selectivity. A correct value for CT connection type is determined by
the connection polarities of the current transformer.
615 series ANSI 539

Technical Manual
The current transformer ratio mismatch between the phase current

transformer and neutral current transformer (residual current in the analog
input settings) is taken into account by the function with the properly set
analog input setting values.
During a ground fault in the protected area, the currents ΣI and IG are directed towards the
protected area. The factor cosφ is 1 when the phase difference of the residual current and
the neutral current is 180 degrees, that is, when the currents are in opposite direction at the
ground faults within the protected area. Similarly, ID_COSPHI is specified to be 0 when
the phase difference between the residual current and the neutral current is less than 90
degrees in situations where there is no ground fault in the protected area. Thus tripping is
possible only when the phase difference between the residual current and the neutral
current is above 90 degrees.
The stabilizing current IB used by the stabilizing current principle is calculated as an

average of the phase currents in the windings to be protected. The value is available in the
I _ A + I _ B + I _C
IB =
3
GUID-E162EE11-DEDF-49BA-B60F-E22ECF1ACAE8 V2 EN (Equation 92)
ID_COSPHI/ In
1.5 TRIPPING
IB
1.0
Trip value
0.5 ID NON TRIPPING
0.0 IB/In
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0
GUID-9D592151-7598-479B-9285-7FB7C09F0FAB-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 268: Operating characteristics of the stabilized ground-fault protection

function
540 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-4BF3E289-E355-4C31-B87E-151DFDDCEBA8-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 269: Setting range of the operating characteristics for the stabilized differential
current principle of the ground-fault protection function
The Trip value setting is used for defining the characteristics of the function. The
differential current value required for tripping is constant at the stabilizing current values
0.0 < IB/In < 1.0, where In is the nominal current, and the In in this context refers to the
nominal of the phase current inputs. When the stabilizing current is higher than 1.0, the
slope of the operation characteristic (ID/IB) is constant at 50 percent. Different operating
characteristics are possible based on the Trip value setting.
For the protection of the trip, the measured neutral current has to be above 4 percent. When
the condition has been fulfilled, the measured neutral current must stay above 2 percent,
otherwise reset time is started.
To calculate the directional differential current ID_COSPHI, the fundamental frequency

amplitude of both the residual and neutral currents has to be above 4 percent of In. If
neither or only one condition is fulfilled at a time, the cosφ term is forced to 1. After the
conditions are fulfilled, both currents must stay above 2 percent of In to allow the
continuous calculation of the cosφ term.
Second harmonic blocking

This module compares the ratio of the current second harmonic (IG_2H) and IG to the set
value Pickup value 2.H. If the ratio (IG_2H / IG) value exceeds the set value, the BLK2H
615 series ANSI 541

Technical Manual
energization of a transformer running in parallel with the protected transformer connected

to the network.
The second harmonic blocking is disabled when Restraint mode is set to "None" and
enabled when set to "Harmonic2".
Timer
Once activated, the Timer activates the PICKUP output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Minimum trip
time, the TRIP output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module trips, the reset
timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the reset
timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated.
The Timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the
percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time. The value is available through
the Monitored data view.
Blocking logic
operate timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the TRIP output is not deactivated
TRIP output is not activated. The activation of the output of the second harmonic
blocking signal BLK2H deactivates the TRIP output.
4.3.3.5 Application
A ground-fault protection using an overcurrent element does not adequately protect the
transformer winding in general and the star-connected winding in particular.
The restricted ground-fault protection is mainly used as a unit protection for the
transformer windings. 80LOZREF is a sensitive protection applied to protect the star-
connected winding of a transformer. This protection system remains stable for all the
faults outside the protected zone.
87LOZREF provides higher sensitivity for the detection of ground faults than the overall
transformer differential protection. This is a high-speed unit protection scheme applied to
542 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
the star-connected winding of the transformer. 87LOZREF is normally applied when the
transformer is grounded solidly or through low-impedance resistor (NER). 87LOZREF
can be also applied on the delta side of the transformer if a grounding transformer (zig-zag
transformer) is used there. In 87LOZREF, the difference of the fundamental component
of all three phase currents and the neutral current is provided to the differential element to
detect the ground fault in the transformer winding based on the numerical stabilized
differential current principle.
Connection of current transformers

The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as "Type 1" and "Type
2".
examples of "Type 1" are as shown in figures and .
examples of "Type 2" are as shown in figures and .
examples of "Type 1" are as shown in figures 270 and 271.
In case the groundings of the current transformers on the phase side and the neutral side
are both either inside or outside the area to be protected, the setting parameter CT
connection type is "Type 1".
If the grounding of the current transformers on the phase side is inside the area to be
protected and the neutral side is outside the area to be protected or if the grounding on the
phase side is outside the area and on the neutral side inside the area, the setting parameter
CT connection type is "Type 2".
615 series ANSI 543

Technical Manual
P1 P2
A
S1 S2 P2 P1
B
S2 S1
C
N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A
I_A I_B I_C IG

GUID-3B436FE3-EBC7-499F-AEAF-C07A9FA84CCD V1 EN
Figure 270: Connection of the current transformers of Type 1. The connected phase
currents and the neutral current have opposite directions at an external
ground-fault situation. Both groundings are inside the area to be
protected.
P2 P1
A
S2 S1
P1 P2
B
S1 S2
C
N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A
I_C I_B I_A IG

GUID-1E53D59D-9402-45EA-8849-210B413BB8BD V
Figure 271: Connection of the current transformers of Type 1. The connected phase
currents and the neutral current have opposite directions at an external
ground-fault situation. Both groundings are outside the area to be
protected.
544 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
P2 P1
A
S2 S1
P2 P1
B
S2 S1
C
N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A
I_A I_B I_C IG
GUID-F72BF76A-0864-4A98-A352-D597C5864AD8 V1 EN
Figure 272: Connection of the current transformers of Type 2. The phase currents
and the neutral current have equal directions at an external ground-fault
situation. Phase grounding is inside and neutral grounding is outside the
area to be protected.
P1 P2
A
S1 S2 P1 P2
B
S1 S2
C
N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A
IG
I_C I_B I_A
GUID-D870C784-0241-4DC6-B937-B27850200227 V1 EN
Figure 273: Connection of the current transformers of Type 2. The phase currents
and the neutral current have equal directions at an external ground-fault
situation. Phase grounding is outside and neutral grounding is inside the
area to be protected.
615 series ANSI 545

Technical Manual
Internal and external faults

87LOZREF does not respond to any faults outside the protected zone. An external fault is
detected by checking the phase angle difference of the neutral current and the sum of the
phase currents. When the difference is less than 90 degrees, the operation is internally
restrained or blocked. Hence the protection is not sensitive to an external fault.
zone of
protection
Izs1 I a =0
A a
Izs1 Ib = 0
B b
Izs1 I c =0
C c
Uzs Io IN
For external fault
Io
IN Reference is Neutral
Current
Operate for Restrain for

internal fault external fault
GUID-FAC5E4AD-A4A7-4D39-9EAC-C380EA33CB78 V2 EN
Figure 274: Current flow in all the CTs for an external fault
546 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
zone of
protection
s Ia = 0
o A a
u Ib = 0
r B b
c Ic = 0
C c
e
Ifault
Io Uzs IN
For internal fault
Io
IN Reference is Neutral
Current
Operate for Restrain for

internal fault external fault
GUID-D5D712D4-2291-4C49-93DE-363F9F10801C V2 EN
Figure 275: Current flow in all the CTs for an internal fault
87LOZREF does not respond to phase-to-phase faults either, as in this case the fault
current flows between the two line CTs and so the neutral CT does not experience this fault
current.
Blocking based on the second harmonic of the neutral current

The transformer magnetizing inrush currents occur when the transformer is energized
after a period of de-energization. The inrush current can be many times the rated current,
and the halving time can be up to several seconds. For the differential protection relay, the
inrush current represents the differential current, which causes the protection relay to trip
almost always when the transformer is connected to the network. Typically, the inrush
current contains a large amount of second harmonics.
energization of a transformer running in parallel with the protected transformer already
connected to the network.
Blocking the pickup of the restricted ground-fault protection at the magnetizing inrush is
based on the ratio of the second harmonic and the fundamental frequency amplitudes of
615 series ANSI 547

Technical Manual
the neutral current IG_2H / IG. Typically, the second harmonic content of the neutral
current at the magnetizing inrush is higher than that of the phase currents.
4.3.3.6 Signals
Table 442: 87LOZREF Input signals
IG SIGNAL 0 Zero-sequence current
Table 443: 87LOZREF Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
BLK2H BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block
4.3.3.7 Settings
Table 444: 87LOZREF Group settings (Basic)
Trip value 5.0...50.0 %In 1.0 5.0 Trip value
Table 445: 87LOZREF Group settings (Advanced)

Minimum trip time 40...300000 ms 1 40 Minimum trip time
Restraint mode 1=None 1=None Restraint mode
2=Harmonic2
548 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 446: 87LOZREF Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
CT connection type 1=Type 1 2=Type 2 CT connection type
2=Type 2
Table 447: 87LOZREF Non group settings (Advanced)


Table 448: 87LOZREF Monitored data
RES2H BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint
1=True
IDIFF FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIn Differential current
IBIAS FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIn Stabilization current
87LOZREF Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 449: 87LOZREF Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz
±2.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

IFault = 2.0 × set Trip 37 ms 41 ms 45 ms
value
615 series ANSI 549

Technical Manual
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5, …
1) Current before fault = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

Table 450: 87LOZREF Technical revision history
B Unit for setting Pickup value 2.H changed from %In
to %.
C Internal Improvement.
4.3.4 High-impedance differential protection 87A, 87B, 87C
High-impedance differential protection HIAPDIF dHi_A> 87A
for phase A
High-impedance differential protection HIBPDIF dHi_B> 87B
for phase B
High-impedance differential protection HICPDIF dHi_C> 87C
for phase C
87A 87B 87C

I_A TRIP I_B TRIP I_C TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP BLOCK PICKUP BLOCK PICKUP
GUID-936A0B51-A681-4814-A3C8-742DDC670FCF V1 EN
550 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The high-impedance differential protection function 87A, 87B, 87C is a general

differential protection. It provides a phase-segregated short circuit protection for the
busbar. However, the function can also be used for providing generator, motor,
transformer and reactor protection.
The function starts and operates when the differential current exceeds the set limit. The
operate time characteristics are according to definite time (DT).
The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function outputs,
timer or the whole function.
The operation of 87A, 87B, 87C can be described with a module diagram. All the modules
615 series ANSI 551

Technical Manual
Timer
PICKUP
Level t
I_A
detector
TRIP
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
Timer
PICKUP
Level t
I_B
detector
TRIP
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
Timer
PICKUP
Level t
I_C
detector
TRIP
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-B91E3EF5-7AB5-4F2D-AC6E-5A39FF7BC7B6 V1 EN
The module diagram illustrates all the phases of the function. Functionality for phases A,
B and C is identical.
All three phases have independent settings.
Level detector
The module compares differential currents I_A calculated by the peak-to-peak
measurement mode to the set Operate value. The Timer module is activated if the
differential current exceeds the value of the Operate value setting.
Timer
Once activated, Timer activates the PICKUP output. The time characteristic is according
to DT. When the operation timer reaches the value set by Trip delay time, the TRIP output
is activated. If the fault disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated.
552 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and
the PICKUP output is deactivated.
Timer calculates the start duration PICKUP_DUR value, which indicates the percentage
ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in the
The activation of the BLOCK input resets Timer and deactivates the PICKUP and TRIP
outputs.
Blocking logic
4.3.4.5 Application
87A, 87B, 87C provides a secure and dependable protection scheme against all types of
faults. The high-impedance principle is used for differential protection due to its
capability to manage the through-faults also with the heavy current transformer (CT)
saturation.
For current transformer recommendations, see the Requirements for

measurement transformers section in this manual.
High-impedance principle
The phase currents are measured from both the incoming and the outgoing feeder sides of
the busbar. The secondary of the current transformer in each phase is connected in parallel
with a protection relay measuring branch. Hence, the relay measures only the difference
of the currents. In an ideal situation, there is a differential current to operate the relay only
if there is a fault between the CTs, that is, inside the protected zone.
If there is a fault outside the zone, a high current, known as the through-fault current, can
go through the protected object. This can cause partial saturation in the CTs. The relay
operation is avoided with a stabilizing resistor (Rs) in the protection relay measuring
615 series ANSI 553

Technical Manual
branch. Rs increases the impedance of the protection relay; hence the name high-
impedance differential scheme.
GUID-1AB5D686-3B9C-413F-9D0A-215BFCA224B4 V1 EN
Figure 278: Phase-segregated bus differential protection based on high-impedance

principle
CT secondary winding resistances (Rin) and connection wire resistances (Rm/2) are also
shown in Figure 279.
Figure 279 demonstrates a simplified circuit consisting only of one incoming and
outgoing feeder. To keep it simple, the voltage-dependent resistor (Ru) is not included.
The wiring resistances are presented as total wiring resistances Rm1 and Rm2.
Rm1 is the maximum wiring resistance concerning all incoming feeder

sets, whereas Rm2 is the maximum wiring resistance concerning all
outgoing feeder sets.
554 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The lower part of Figure 279 shows the voltage balance when there is no fault in the system
and no CT saturation.
Rm1 Rm2
Rin1 Rin2
Rs
V
E1 Id E2
E1 V≈0
E2
GUID-FC2F69DB-84BE-4597-B6E6-21860755CC50 V1 EN
Figure 279: Equivalent circuit when there is no fault or CT saturation
When there is no fault, the CT secondary currents and their emf voltages, E1 and E2, are
opposite and the protection relay measuring branch has no voltage or current. If an in-zone
fault occurs, the secondary currents have the same direction. The relay measures the sum
of the currents as a differential and trips the circuit breaker. If the fault current goes
through only one CT, its secondary emf magnetizes the opposite CT, that is, E1 ≈ E2.
615 series ANSI 555

Technical Manual
Rm1 Rm2
Rin1 Rin2
Rs
V
E1 Id E2
E1 V E2
GUID-DDE84F0A-E45F-489B-A862-374769A886BD V1 EN
Figure 280: Equivalent circuit in case of in-zone fault
Figure 281 shows CT saturation at a through-fault, that is, out-of-zone, situation. The
magnetization impedance of a saturated CT is almost zero. The saturated CT winding can
be presented as a short circuit. When one CT is saturated, the current of the non-saturated
CT follows two paths, one through the protection relay measuring branch (Rs + relay) and
the other through the saturated CT (Rm + Rin2).
The protection relay must not operate during the saturation. This is achieved by increasing
the relay impedance by using the stabilizing resistor (Rs) which forces the majority of the
differential current to flow through the saturated CT. As a result, the relay operation is
avoided, that is, the relay operation is stabilized against the CT saturation at through-fault
current. The stabilizing voltage Vs is the basis of all calculations.
556 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Rm1 Rm2
Rin1 Rin2
Rs
V
Saturated
E1 Id E2
CT
V = I x (Rm2 + Rin2)
E1 E2 ≈ 0
GUID-6F73A8DE-A7A5-4D41-8B6B-FFFC93168D8A V1 EN
Figure 281: Equivalent circuit in case of the CT saturation at through-fault
The CT saturation happens most likely in the case of an in-zone fault. This
is not a problem, because although the operation remains stable (non-
operative) during the saturated parts of the CT secondary current
waveform, the non-saturated part of the current waveform causes the
protection to operate.
GUID-D8F15382-5E3F-4371-B2AD-936D72941803 V1 EN
Figure 282: Secondary waveform of a saturated CT
The secondary circuit voltage can easily exceed the isolation voltage of the CTs,
connection wires and the protection relay because of the stabilizing resistance and CT
saturation. A voltage dependent resistor (VDR, Ru) is used to limit the voltage as shown in
Figure 278.
615 series ANSI 557

Technical Manual
Busbar protection scheme

The basic concept for any bus differential protection relay is a direct use of Kirchoff’s first
law that the sum of all currents connected to one differential protection zone is zero. If the
sum is not zero, an internal fault has occurred. In other words, as seen by the busbar
differential protection, the sum of all currents that flow into the protection zone, that is,
currents with positive value, must be equal to currents that flow out of the protection zone,
that is, currents with negative value, at any instant of time.
Figure 283 shows an example of a phase segregated single busbar protection employing
high-impedance differential protection. The example system consists of a single incoming
busbar feeder and two outgoing busbar feeders. The CTs from both the outgoing busbar
feeders and the incoming busbar feeders are connected in parallel with the polarity.
During normal load conditions, the total instantaneous incoming current is equal to the
total instantaneous outgoing current and the difference current is negligible. A fault in the
busbar results in an imbalance between the incoming and the outgoing current. The
difference current flows through the protection relay, which generates a trip signal.
558 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-C5514DFD-9FE8-4BF7-93D8-14186867D0F8 V1 EN
Figure 283: Phase-segregated single busbar protection employing high-impedance

differential protection
Figure 284 shows an example for a system consisting of two busbar section coupled with
a bus coupler. Each busbar section consists of two feeders and both sections are provided
with a separate differential protection to form different zones. The formed zones overlap
at the bus coupler.
When the bus coupler is in the open position, each section of the busbar handles the current
flow independently, that is, the instantaneous incoming current is equal to the total
instantaneous outgoing current and the difference current is negligible. The difference
current is no longer zero with a fault in the busbar and the protection operates.
With the bus coupler in the closed position, the current also flows from one busbar section
to another busbar section. Thus, the current flowing through the bus coupler needs to be
615 series ANSI 559

Technical Manual
considered in calculating differential current. During normal condition, the summation of

the current on each bus section is zero. However, if there is a fault in any busbar section,
the difference current is no longer zero and the protection operates.
Zone A
Zone B
Bus coupler
Stabilizing Stabilizing
resistor Rs resistor Rs
. . . . . . . .
Incoming / Outgoing Differential protection Differential protection Incoming / Outgoing
Feeder for Zone A (87A, 87B, 87C) for (87A, 87B, 87C) for Feeder for Zone B
Zone A Zone B
GUID-4149A38D-C708-4945-A004-75B13F4E0B4A V1 EN
Figure 284: Differential protection on busbar with bus coupler (Single-phase

representation)
Flux-balancing principle
87A, 87B, 87C can be used to realize flux-balance based phase-segregated three-phase
differential protection. Stabilizing resistors are not needed in this application as core
balance current transformers are used instead. They must be wired so that the measured
current will be the differential current between the motor terminal and the neutral sides.
560 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
IL1
A
IL2
B
IL3
C
Id3 Id2 Id1
Three-phase
differential
protection
(87A, 87B, 87C)
GUID-EECAE612-8A8F-4F89-BE9A-43C8762BBA75 V1 EN
Figure 285: Three-phase differential protection for motors based on flux-balancing

principle
In this scheme, the currents flowing through the core balance transformer cancel each
other out when there is no fault within the protected zone. When fault occurs within the
protected zone, the currents flowing through the core balance transformer add up so that
the differential protection trips when the differential current exceeds its threshold.
87A, 87B, 87C uses the peak-to-peak measurement mode.
4.3.4.6 Example calculations for busbar high-impedance differential protection
The protected object in the example for busbar differential protection is a single-bus
system with two zones of protection.
615 series ANSI 561

Technical Manual
Y Y
2000/1A 2000/1A
Bus coupler
2000/1A
2…....7
2000/1A
2000/1A
Feeder 1
Feeder 8
Stabilizing Stabilizing
resistor Rs resistor Rs
Differential protection Differential protection

(87A, 87B, 87C) for (87A, 87B, 87C) for
Zone A Zone B
GUID-97462931-644F-4EFD-8C9A-AF61A3C870B8 V1 EN
Figure 286: Example for busbar differential protection
Bus data:
Vn 20 kV
In 2000 A
Ikmax 25 kA
10 feeders per protected zone including bus coupler and incomer.
CT data is assumed to be:
CT 2000/1 A
Rin 15.75 Ω
Vkn 436 V
Ie <7 mA (at Ukn)
Rm 1Ω
562 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The stabilizing voltage is calculated using the formula:

25000 A
Vs = (15.75Ω + 1.Ω ) ≈ 209.37 V
2000
GUID-8A00B448-8331-4455-8CDC-35E4E746C5C0 V1 EN (Equation 93)
In this case, the requirement for the current transformer knee point voltage is fulfilled
because Vkn > 2Vs.
The magnetizing curve of the CT is assumed to be linear. The magnetizing current at the
stabilizing voltage can be estimated as:
Vs
Im = ⋅ Ie
Vkn
GUID-8B4549A4-1CFB-4983-B2F9-810409D699A5 V1 EN (Equation 94)
209.37V
Im = ⋅ 7mA ≈ 3.4mA
436V
GUID-1C898845-A04C-43DC-AF34-FEB9AB66F2F0 V1 EN (Equation 95)
To obtain adequate protection stability, the setting current Irs must be at the minimum of
the sum of magnetizing currents of all connected CTs.
I rs = 10 ⋅ 3.4mA ≈ 34 mA
GUID-9B9B81AE-DAA9-4D9A-823F-4D239D257E80 V2 EN (Equation 96)
The sensitivity of the stabilizing resistor is calculated based on Equation 97.
209.37 V
RS = ≈ 6160 Ω
0.034 A
GUID-A240913A-74ED-4A49-8746-182E0F53824F V1 EN (Equation 97)
The calculated value is the maximum value for the stabilizing resistor. If the value is not
available, the next available value below should be selected and the protection relay
setting current is tuned according to the selected resistor. For example, in this case, the
resistance value 5900 Ω is used.
209.37 V
I rs = ≈ 35 mA
5900 Ω
GUID-BC97F256-ECDD-432F-B8AE-74AB2769876F V1 EN (Equation 98)
The sensitivity of the protection is obtained as per Equation 99, assuming Iu = 0.
I prim = 2000 ⋅ (0.035 A + 10 ⋅ 0.0034 A + 0 A) ≈ 140 A

GUID-357A9480-16D5-488E-B92C-A6C14FD3708B V2 EN (Equation 99)
The power of the stabilizing resistor is calculated:
615 series ANSI 563

Technical Manual
2
(436V )
P≥ ≈ 32 W
5900Ω
GUID-28EF2E18-E1A9-4332-B39B-56D3C1141F70 V1 EN (Equation 100)
Based onEquation 101 and Equation 102, the need for voltage-dependent resistor is
checked.
25000 A
Vmax = (5900 Ω + 15.75Ω + 1.00 Ω) ≈ 74.0 kV
2000
GUID-385AE8B6-691A-42D0-8DAA-069769B90449 V1 EN (Equation 101)
u˘ = 2 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 436V ⋅ (74000V − 436V ) ≈ 16.0 kV

GUID-CBD7B53B-1E18-46EA-A6D7-CA3D6D1FDEC2 V2 EN (Equation 102)
The voltage-dependent resistor (one for each phase) is needed in this case as the voltage
during the fault is higher than 2 kV.
The leakage current through the VDR at the stabilizing voltage can be available from the
VDR manual, assuming that to be approximately 2 mA at stabilizing voltage
Iu ≈ 0.002 A
GUID-5E213E2C-39C4-4BC5-A8B7-514B599B0976 V1 EN (Equation 103)
The sensitivity of the protection can be recalculated taking into account the leakage
current through the VDR as per Equation 104.
I prim = 2000 ⋅ (0.035 A + 10 ⋅ 0.0034 A + 0.002 A) ≈ 142 A
GUID-1C855302-2D84-4B81-8DD8-EC3B1EAE1315 V2 EN (Equation 104)
4.3.4.7 Signals
Table 451: 87A Input signals
Table 452: 87B Input signals

564 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 453: 87C Input signals

Table 454: 87A Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
Table 455: 87B Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
Table 456: 87C Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.3.4.8 Settings
Table 457: 87A Group settings (Basic)
Trip value 1.0...200.0 %In 1.0 5.0 Pickup value, percentage of the nominal
current
Table 458: 87A Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 459: 87A Non group settings (Advanced)

615 series ANSI 565

Technical Manual
Table 460: 87B Group settings (Basic)

current
Table 461: 87B Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 462: 87B Non group settings (Advanced)

Table 463: 87C Group settings (Basic)

current
Table 464: 87C Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 465: 87C Non group settings (Advanced)

566 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 466: 87A Monitored data
87A Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Table 467: 87B Monitored data

87B Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Table 468: 87C Monitored data

87C Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 469: 87A, 87B, 87C Technical data
measured: fn ±2 Hz

value
value
Reset time <40 ms
615 series ANSI 567

Technical Manual
1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, fault current with
measurements

Table 470: 87A, 87B, 87C Technical revision history
B Function name changed from HIPDIF to HIAPDIF,
HIBPDIF, HICPDIF
4.3.5 Motor differential protection 87G
Motor differential protection MPDIF 3dI>M 87G, 87M

87G/87M
I_A1 TRIP
I_B1 OPR_LS
I_C1 OPR_HS
I_A2 INT_BLKD
I_B2
I_C2
BLOCK
BLK_OPR_LS
BLK_OPR_HS
GUID-DB494388-9E4F-42FE-B03F-F4705B717173 V1 EN
The motor winding failure protection function 87G, 87M is a unit protection function. The
possibility of internal failures of the motor is relatively low. However, the consequences
568 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
in terms of cost and production loss are often serious, which makes the differential
protection an important protection function.
The stability of the differential protection is enhanced by a DC restraint feature. This

feature decreases the sensitivity of the differential protection optionally for a temporary
time period to avoid an unnecessary disconnection of the motor during the external faults
that have a fault current with high DC currents. 87G, 87M also includes a CT saturation-
based blocking which prevents unnecessary tripping in case of the detection of the
magnetizing inrush currents which can be present at the switching operations,
overvoltages or external faults.
The operation of 87G, 87M can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in
GUID-206742C6-5514-41BE-A4F3-2FE0DA9946D5-ANSI V1 EN
Differential and bias calculation

Differential calculation module calculates the differential current. The differential current
is the difference in current between the phase and neutral sides of the machine. The phase
615 series ANSI 569

Technical Manual
currents I 1 and I 2 denote the fundamental frequency components on the phase and
neutral sides of the current. The amplitude of the differential current Id is obtained using
the equation (assuming that the positive direction of the current is towards the machine):
Id = I1 + I 2
GUID-9BC6A743-CA43-407E-8340-7463F15C8128 V1 EN (Equation 105)
During normal conditions, there is no fault in the area protected by the function block, so
the currents I 1 and I 2 are equal and the differential current Id = 0. However, in practice
some differential current exists due to inaccuracies in the current transformer on the phase
and neutral sides, but it is very small during normal conditions.
The module calculates the differential current for all three phases.
The low-stage differential protection is stabilized with a bias current. The bias current is
also known as the stabilizing current. Stabilization means that the differential current
required for tripping increases according to the bias current and the operation
characteristics. When an internal fault occurs, the currents on both sides of the protected
object are flowing into it. This causes the biasing current to be considerably smaller, which
makes the operation more sensitive during internal faults.
The traditional way for calculating the stabilized current is:
I1 − I 2
Ib =
2
GUID-34FA472E-E419-4A0E-94A3-238D7A3CE5ED V1 EN (Equation 106)
The module calculates the bias current for all three phases.
Through-fault detection
Through-fault (TF) detection module is for detecting whether the fault is external, that is,
going through, or internal. This information is essential for ensuring the correct operation
of the protection in case of the CT saturation.
• In a through-fault situation, CTs can saturate because of a high fault current
magnitude. Such AC saturation does not happen immediately when the fault begins.
Thus, the TF module sees the fault as external because the bias current is high but the
differential current remains low. If the AC saturation then occurs, a CT saturation-
based blocking is allowed to work to prevent tripping.
• Normally, the phase angle between the machine neutral and line side CTs is 180
degrees. If an internal fault occurs during a through fault, an angle less than 50
degrees clearly indicates an internal fault and the TF module overrules, that is,
deblocks the presence of any blocking due to CT saturation.
570 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
CT saturation-based blocking
Higher currents during the motor startup or abnormally high magnetizing currents at an
overvoltage (transformer-fed motor) or an external fault may saturate the current
transformers. The uneven saturation of the star and line side CTs (for example, due to
burden differences) may lead to a differential current which can cause a differential
protection to trip. This module blocks the operation of 87G, 87M biased low stage
internally in case of the CT saturation. Once the blocking is activated, it is held for a certain
time after the blocking conditions have ceased to be fulfilled.
DC component detection
On detection of a DC component, the function temporarily desensitizes the differential
protection. The functioning of this module depends on the DC restrain Enable setting.
The DC components are continuously extracted from the three instantaneous differential
currents. The highest DC component of all three is taken as a kind of DC restraint in a
sense that the highest effective, temporary sensitivity of the protection is temporarily
decreased as a function of this highest DC offset. The calculated DC restraint current is not
allowed to decay (from its highest ever measured value) faster than with a time constant
of one second. The value of the temporarily effective sensitivity limit is limited upwards
to the rated current of the machine or 3.3 times that of Low trip value, whichever is smaller.
The temporary extra limit decays exponentially from its maximum value with a time
constant of one second.
This feature should be used in case of networks where very long time constants are
expected. The temporary sensitivity limit is higher to the set operating characteristics. In
other words, the temporary limit has superposed the unchanged operating characteristics
and temporarily determines the highest sensitivity of the protection. The temporary
sensitivity is less than the sensitivity in section 1 of the operating characteristic and is
supposed to prevent an unwanted trip during the external faults with lower currents.
Biased low stage

The current differential protection needs to be biased because of the possible appearance
of a differential current which can be due to something else than an actual fault in the
motor. In case of differential protection, a false differential current can be caused by:
• CT errors
• CT saturation at high currents passing through the motor
The differential current caused by CT errors increases at the same percent ratio as the load
current.
The high currents passing through the protected object can be caused by the through fault.
Therefore, the operation of the differential protection is biased with respect to the load
current. In the biased differential protection, the higher the differential current required for
the protection of operation, the higher the load current.
615 series ANSI 571

Technical Manual
Based on the conditions checked from the through-fault module, the DC (component)
detection module and the CT saturation-based blocking modules, the biased low-stage
module decides whether the differential current is due to the internal faults or some false
reason. In case of detection of the TF, DC or CT saturation, the internal differential
blocking signal is generated, which in turn blocks the trip signal. In case of internal faults,
the operation of the differential protection is affected by the bias current.
The Low trip value setting for the stabilized stage of the function block is determined with
the equation:
I d1
Lowtrip value = ⋅100%
In
GUID-22A3726A-4B8C-418F-B8C3-D6A5AACD165F-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 107)
The Slope section 2 setting is determined correspondingly:
Id 2
Slope section 2 = ⋅100%
Ib 2
GUID-6707BA3B-6446-4B54-B09B-7D8D1F0DDF32 V1 EN (Equation 108)
Id 3
I b3
GUID-ADB22AAC-F1CD-4B6F-B103-E86DBCC8069D V1 EN (Equation 109)
The end of the first section End section 1 can be set at a desired point within the range of
0 to 100 percent (or % In). Accordingly, the end of the second section End section 2 can
be set within the range of 100 percent to 300 percent (or % In).
The slope of the operating characteristic for the function block varies in different parts of
the range.
In section 1, where 0.0 < Ib/In < End section 1, the differential current required for tripping
is constant. The value of the differential current is the same as the Low trip value setting
selected for the function block. The Low trip value setting allows for small inaccuracies
of the current transformers but it can also be used to influence the overall level of the
operating characteristic.
Section 2, where End section 1 < Ib/In < End section 2, is called the influence area of the
setting Slope section 2. In this section, variations in End section 2 affect the slope of the
characteristic, that is, how big the change in the differential current required for tripping
is in comparison to the change in the load current. The End section 2 setting allows for CT
errors.
In section 3, where Ib/In > End section 2, the slope of the characteristic can be set by Slope
section 3 that defines the increase in the differential current to the corresponding increase
in the biasing current.
572 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The required differential current for tripping at a certain stabilizing current level can be
calculated using the formulae:
For a stabilizing current lower than End section 1

I doperate [% I n ] = Set Low trip values
GUID-4FAC8F94-FBB0-47DB-A952-F995889969C6-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 110)
For a stabilizing current higher than End section 1 but lower than End section 2
I doperate [% I n ] = Low trip value + ( Ib [% I n ] − End section 1) ⋅ Slope section 2
GUID-EB0A327A-4079-45A5-87E6-AA30A8D2220C-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 111)
For higher stabilizing current values exceeding End section 2

I doperate [% I n ] = Low trip value + ( End section 2 − End section 1)) ⋅ Slope section 2 + ( Ib [% I n ] − End section 2)
GUID-E9DA330C-84A8-40C2-BCFB-1F7E517395D8-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 112)
When the differential current exceeds the operating value determined by the operating
characteristics, the OPR_LS output is activated. The TRIP output is always activated
when the OPR_LS output activates.
The trip signal due to the biased stage can be blocked by the activation of the
BLK_OPR_LS or BLOCK input. Also, when the operation of the biased low stage is
blocked by the waveform blocking functionality, the INT_BLKD output is activated
according to the phase information.
The phase angle difference between the two currents I_A1 and I_A2 is theoretically 180
electrical degrees for the external fault and 0 electrical degrees for the internal fault
conditions. If the phase angle difference is less than 50 electrical degrees or if the biasing
current drops below 30 percent of the differential current, a fault has most likely occurred
in the area protected by 87G, 87M. Then the internal blocking signals (CT saturation and
DC blocking) of the biased stage are inhibited.
615 series ANSI 573

Technical Manual
GUID-D401D103-BD7C-4096-986F-578925ADB1CC V1 EN
Figure 289: Positive direction of current

The differential protection includes an unbiased instantaneous high stage. The
instantaneous stage trips and the OPR_HS output is activated when the amplitude of the
fundamental frequency component of the differential current exceeds the set High trip
value or when the instantaneous peak values of the differential current exceed 2.5 · High
trip value. The factor 2.5 (= 1.8 · √2) is due to the maximum asymmetric short circuit
current.
The TRIP output is always activated when the OPR_HS output activates.
The internal blocking signals of the function block do not prevent the operation of the
instantaneous stage. When required, the trip signal due to instantaneous operation can be
blocked by the binary inputs BLK_OPR_HS or BLOCK.
574 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Id [%In]
300 Ib3
Id3
200
Ib2
100
Id1
Id2
Low trip value
100 200 300 400 500 Ib [%In]
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3
End section 1 End section 2
GUID-295E8CB1-B4A0-4207-A1B2-F542C5D1DF94-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 290: Operating characteristic for the stabilized stage of the generator
differential protection function
4.3.5.5 Application
The differential protection works on the principle of calculating the differential current at
the two ends of the winding, that is, the current entering the winding is compared to the
current exiting the winding. In case of any internal fault, the currents entering and exiting
the winding are different, which results in a differential current, which is then used as a
base for generating the trip signal. Due to this principle, the differential protection does not
trip during external faults. However, it should be noted that interturn faults in the same
phase are usually not detected unless they developed into some other kind of fault.
The short circuit between the phases of the stator windings normally causes large fault
currents. The short circuit creates a risk of damages to the insulation, windings and stator
core. The large short circuit currents cause large current forces which can damage other
components in the machine. The short circuit can also initiate explosion and fire. When a
short circuit occurs in a machine, there is a damage that has to be repaired. The severity
and the repair time depend on the degree of damage, which is highly dependent on the fault
time. The fast fault clearance of this fault type is of greatest importance to limit the
damages and the economic loss.
To limit the damages in connection to the stator winding short circuits, the fault clearance
time must be as short as possible (instantaneous). The fault current contributions from
615 series ANSI 575

Technical Manual
both the external power system (via the machine or the block circuit breaker) and from the
machine itself must be disconnected as fast as possible.
The DC restraint feature should be used in case of an application with a long DC time
constant in the fault currents is present. This fault current may be of a lesser magnitude
(less than rated current) but is unpleasant and tends to saturate the CT and trip the
differential protection for external faults. This feature is effective at moderate through-
currents and ineffective at higher through-currents.
Although the short circuit fault current is normally very large, that is, significantly larger
than the rated current of the machine, it is possible that a short circuit can occur between
phases close to the neutral point of the machine, causing a relatively small fault current.
The fault current fed from the synchronous machine can also be limited due to a low
excitation of the synchronous generator. This is normally the case at the run-up of the
synchronous machine, before synchronization to the network. Therefore, it is desired that
the detection of the machine phase-to-phase short circuits shall be relatively sensitive,
thus detecting the small fault currents.
It is also important that the machine short circuit protection does not trip for external faults
when a large fault current is fed from the machine. To combine fast fault clearance,
sensitivity and selectivity, the machine current differential protection is normally the best
alternative for the phase-to-phase short circuits.
The risk of an unwanted differential protection operation caused by the current

transformer saturation is a universal differential protection problem. If a big synchronous
machine is tripped in connection to an external short circuit, it gives an increased risk of
a power system collapse. Besides, there is a production loss for every unwanted trip of the
machine. Therefore, preventing the unwanted disconnection of machines has a great
economical value.
Recommendations for current transformers

The more important the object to be protected is, the more attention is paid to the current
transformers. It is not normally possible to dimension the current transformers so that they
repeat the currents with high DC components without saturating when the residual flux of
the current transformer is high. The differential protection function block operates
reliably even though the current transformers are partially saturated.
The accuracy class recommended for current transformers to be used with the differential
function block is 5P, in which the limit of the current error at the rated primary current is
1 percent and the limit of the phase displacement is 60 minutes. The limit of the composite
error at the rated accuracy limit primary current is 5 percent.
The approximate value of the actual accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to the actual
CT burden can be calculated on the basis of the rated accuracy limit factor Fn (ALF) at the
576 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
rated burden, the rated burden Sn, the internal burden Sin and the actual burden Sa of the
current transformer.
Sin + Sn
Fa = Fn ×
Sin + S a
GUID-8EFD1AED-A804-45DD-963F-D453A6B3D782 V2 EN (Equation 113)
Example 1
The rated burden Sn of the current transformer 5P20 is 10 VA, the secondary rated current
5A, the internal resistance Rin = 0.07 Ω and the rated accuracy limit factor Fn
corresponding to the rated burden is 20 (5P20). The internal burden of the current
transformer is Sin = (5A)² × 0.07 Ω = 1.75 VA. The input impedance of the protection relay
at a rated current of 5A is < 20 mΩ. If the measurement conductors have a resistance of
0.113 Ω, the actual burden of the current transformer is Sa = (5A)² × (0.113 + 0.020) Ω =
3.33 VA. Thus, the accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to the actual burden is about 46.
The CT burden can grow considerably at the rated current 5A. The actual burden of the
current transformer decreases at the rated current of 1 A while the repeatability
simultaneously improves.
At faults occurring in the protected area, the fault currents can be very high compared to
the rated currents of the current transformers. Due to the instantaneous stage of the
differential function block, it is sufficient that the current transformers are capable of
repeating the current required for an instantaneous tripping during the first cycle.
Thus the current transformers usually are able to reproduce the asymmetric fault current
without saturating within the next 10 ms after the occurrence of the fault to secure that the
trip times of the protection relay comply with the retardation time.
The accuracy limit factors corresponding to the actual burden of the phase current
transformer to be used in differential protection must fulfill the requirement:
−T
m
Fa > K r × Ikmax × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e Tdc ) + 1)
GUID-21C442C8-79F8-411A-829A-1980BC5D1A2E V2 EN (Equation 114)
Ikmax The maximum through-going fault current (in IR) at which the protection is not allowed to trip
Tdc The primary DC time constant related to Ikmax
ω The angular frequency, that is, 2 x π x fn
Tm The time to saturate, that is, the duration of the saturation-free transformation
Kr The remanence factor 1/(1-r), where r is the maximum remanence flux in pu from the saturation flux
615 series ANSI 577

Technical Manual
The parameter r is the maximum remanence flux density in the CT core in pu from the
saturation flux density. The value of the parameter r depends on the magnetic material
used and also on the construction of the CT. For instance, if the value r = 0.4, the
remanence flux density can be 40 percent of the saturation flux density. The manufacturer
of the CT has to be contacted when an accurate value for the parameter r is needed. The
value r = 0.4 is recommended to be used when an accurate value is not available.
The required minimum time-to-saturate Tm in 87G, 87M is half-fundamental cycle period

(10 ms when fn = 50 Hz).
Two typical cases are considered for the determination of the sufficient actual accuracy
limit factor Fa:
1. A fault occurring at the substation bus.
The protection must be stable at a fault arising during a normal operating situation.
The reenergizing of the transformer against a bus fault leads to very high fault
currents and thermal stress. Therefore, reenergizing is not preferred in this case. The
remanence can be neglected.
The maximum through-going fault current Ikmax is typically 6 IR for a motor. At a
short circuit fault close to the supply transformer, the DC time constant Tdc of the fault
current is almost the same as that of the transformer, the typical value being 100 ms.
Ikmax = 6 IR
Tdc = 100 ms
ω = 100π Hz
Tm = 10 ms
Kr =1
Equation 114 with these values gives the result:
−T
m
Fa > K r × Ikmax × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e Tdc ) + 1) ≈ 24
GUID-C510CA46-3857-40D3-B40A-3C237BCE6E79 V2 EN
2. Reenergizing against a fault occurring further down in the network.
The protection must be stable also during reenergization against a fault on the line. In
this case, the existence of remanence is very probable. It is assumed to be 40 percent
here.
On the other hand, the fault current is now smaller and since the ratio of the resistance
and reactance is greater in this location, having a full DC offset is not possible.
578 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Furthermore, the DC time constant (Tdc) of the fault current is now smaller, assumed
to be 50 ms here.
Assuming the maximum fault current is 30 percent lower than in the bus fault and a
DC offset 90 percent of the maximum.
Ikmax = 0.7 × 6 = 4.2 (IR)
Tdc = 50 ms
ω = 100π Hz
Tm = 10 ms
Kr = 1/(1-0.4) = 1.6667
Equation 114 with these values gives the result:
−T
m
Tdc
Fa > K r × Ikmax × 0.9 × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e ) + 1) ≈ 24
GUID-46A4591B-876D-4E32-A9AB-29F6C1657644 V2 EN
If the actual burden of the current transformer Sa in the accuracy limit factor equation
cannot be reduced low enough to provide a sufficient value for Fa, there are two
alternatives to deal with the situation.
1. A current transformer with a higher rated burden Sn can be chosen (which also means
a higher rated accurate limit Fn).
2. A current transformer with a higher nominal primary current I1n (but the same rated
burden) can be chosen.
Alternative 2 is more cost-effective and therefore often better, although the sensitivity of
the scheme is slightly reduced.
Example 2
Here the actions according to alternative 2 are taken to improve the actual accuracy limit
factor.
615 series ANSI 579

Technical Manual
 I CT 
Fa =  R  × Fn
 I R Motor 
GUID-560620F9-50B1-4DA4-AF3F-2B24212080D9 V2 EN (Equation 115)
IRCT rated primary current of the CT, for example, 1500A
IRMotor rated current of the motor under protection, for example, 1000A
Fn rated accuracy limit factor of the CT, for example, 30
Fa actual accuracy limit factor due to oversizing the CT, substituting the values in the equation, Fa = 45
In differential protection it is important that the accuracy limit factors Fa of the phase
current transformers at both sides correspond with each other, that is, the burdens of the
current transformers on both sides are to be as close to each other as possible. If high inrush
or start currents with high DC components pass through the protected object when it is
connected to the network, special attention is required for the performance and the
burdens of the current transformers and the settings of the function block.
Connection of current transformers

opposite, the CT connection type is of "Type 1". The connection examples of "Type
1" are as shown in figures 291 and 292.
580 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
P1 P2 P2 P1
A
S1 S2 S2 S1
B
N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A
ICB IBB IAB IC IB IA

GUID-BEF98DEF-6AF9-4510-B8DC-1DB02A7F4DC7 V1 EN
Figure 291: Connection of current transformer of Type 1, example 1
P2 P1 P1 P2
A
S2 S1 S1 S2
B
N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A

GUID-51666F94-A1D6-4E80-8502-ABC0998CF70D V1 EN
615 series ANSI 581

Technical Manual
P2 P1 P2 P1
A
S2 S1 S2 S1
B
N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A

GUID-1C11A816-D4BD-41D6-AE14-0C08E942375C V1 EN
P1 P2 P1 P2
A
S1 S2 S1 S2
B
N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A N 1/5A

GUID-A8CAC49E-5AED-4265-9ACF-0D7F4FDAC9AC V1 EN
582 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Saturation of current transformers

There are basically two types of saturation phenomena that have to be detected: the AC
saturation and the DC saturation. The AC saturation is caused by a high fault current where
the CT magnetic flux exceeds its maximum value. As a result, the secondary current is
distorted as shown in Figure 295. A DC component in the current also causes the flux to
increase until the CT saturates. This is known as DC saturation.
GUID-0A569D8E-6A69-43F1-848B-6AA364E130B7 V1 EN
Figure 295: AC saturation
When having a short circuit in a power line, the short circuit current contains a DC
component. The magnitude of the DC component depends on the phase angle when the
short circuit occurs. Figure 296 shows the secondary current of the CT in the fault
situation. Because of the DC component, the flux reaches its maximum value at 0.07
seconds, causing saturation. As the DC component decays, the CT recovers gradually
from the saturation.
GUID-505C1447-5FA4-43B7-8AD7-9E2449CC10C3 V1 EN
Figure 296: DC saturation
615 series ANSI 583

Technical Manual
4.3.5.6 Signals
Table 471: 87G, 87M Input signals
I_A1 Signal 0 Phase A primary current
I_B1 Signal 0 Phase B primary current
I_C1 Signal 0 Phase C primary current
I_A2 Signal 0 Phase A secondary current
I_B2 Signal 0 Phase B secondary current
I_C2 Signal 0 Phase C secondary current
BLK_OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks trip outputs from biased stage
BLK_OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks trip outputs from instantaneous stage
Table 472: 87G, 87M Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
OPR_LS BOOLEAN Trip from low set
OPR_HS BOOLEAN Trip from high set
INT_BLKD BOOLEAN Internal block status
4.3.5.7 Settings
Table 473: 87G, 87M Group settings (Basic)
Low trip value 5...30 %Ir 1 5 Basic setting for the stabilized stage pickup
High trip value 100...1000 %Ir 10 500 Instantaneous stage trip value
characteristics
End section 1 0...100 %Ir 1 50 Turn-point between the first and the second
584 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 474: 87G, 87M Group settings (Advanced)

characteristics
DC restrain enable 0=False 0=False Setting for enabling DC restrain feature
1=True
Table 475: 87G, 87M Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
transformers
CT ratio Cor Line 0.40...4.00 0.01 1.00 CT ratio correction, line side
CT ratio Cor Neut 0.40...4.00 0.01 1.00 CT ratio correction, neutral side

Table 476: 87G, 87M Monitored data
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=False Trip phase A
1=True
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=False Trip phase B
1=True
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=False Trip phase C
1=True
INT_BLKD_A BOOLEAN 0=False Internal block status phase A
1=True
INT_BLKD_B BOOLEAN 0=False Internal block status phase B
1=True
INT_BLKD_C BOOLEAN 0=False Internal block status phase C
1=True
ID_A FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential current phase A
ID_B FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential current phase B
ID_C FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential current phase C
IB_A FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Biasing current phase A
IB_B FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Biasing current phase B
IB_C FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Biasing current phase C
I_ANGL_A1_B1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle phase A
to B, line side
615 series ANSI 585

Technical Manual

I_ANGL_B1_C1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle phase B
to C, line side
I_ANGL_C1_A1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle phase C
to A, line side
I_ANGL_A2_B2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle Phase
AB, neutral side
I_ANGL_B2_C2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle Phase
BC, neutral side
I_ANGL_C2_A2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle Phase
CA, neutral side
I_ANGL_A1_A2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle diff
between line and neutral side,
Phase A
I_ANGL_B1_B2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle diff
Phase B
I_ANGL_C1_C2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle diff
Phase C
87G Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
IA-diff FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured differential current
amplitude phase IA
IB-diff FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured differential current
amplitude phase IB
IC-diff FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured differential current
amplitude phase IC
IA-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current
amplitude phase IA
IB-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current
amplitude phase IB
IC-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current
amplitude phase IC
586 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 477: 87G, 87M Technical data
measured: fn ±2 Hz
±3% of the set value or ±0.002 x In
Trip time 1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

Low stage 36 ms 40 ms 42 ms
High stage 18 ms 22 ms 27 ms
Reset time <40 ms
1) Fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

2) Includes the delay of the power output contact
4.4 Unbalance protection
4.4.1 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection 46
Negative-sequence overcurrent NSPTOC I2> 46
protection
A070758-ANSI V1 EN
615 series ANSI 587

Technical Manual
The negative-sequence overcurrent protection function 46 is used for increasing

sensitivity to detect single-phase and phase-to-phase faults or unbalanced loads due to, for
example, broken conductors or unsymmetrical feeder voltages.
46 can also be used for detecting broken conductors.
The function is based on the measurement of the negative sequence current. In a fault
situation, the function picks up when the negative sequence current exceeds the set limit.
The trip time characteristics can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse
definite minimum time (IDMT). In the DT mode, the function trips after a predefined trip
time and resets when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-
dependent timer characteristics.

The operation of 46 can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
A070660-ANSI V1 EN
Level detector
The measured negative sequence current is compared to the set Pickup value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Pickup value, the level detector activates the timer
module. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the set Pickup value is multiplied by the set
Pickup value Mult.
588 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Mult setting if the product of the settings exceeds the Pickup value setting
range.
Timer

situation.
615 series ANSI 589

Technical Manual
Blocking logic
4.4.1.5 Application
Since the negative sequence current quantities are not present during normal, balanced
load conditions, the negative sequence overcurrent protection elements can be set for
faster and more sensitive operation than the normal phase-overcurrent protection for fault
conditions occurring between two phases. The negative sequence overcurrent protection
also provides a back-up protection functionality for the feeder ground-fault protection in
solid and low resistance grounded networks.
The negative sequence overcurrent protection provides the back-up ground-fault

protection on the high voltage side of a delta-wye connected power transformer for ground
faults taking place on the wye-connected low voltage side. If a ground fault occurs on the
wye-connected side of the power transformer, negative sequence current quantities
appear on the delta-connected side of the power transformer.
Probably the most common application for the negative sequence overcurrent protection
is rotating machines, where negative sequence current quantities indicate unbalanced
loading conditions (unsymmetrical voltages). Unbalanced loading normally causes
extensive heating of the machine and can result in severe damage even over a relatively
short time period.
Multiple time curves and time multiplier settings are also available for coordinating with
other devices in the system.
590 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.4.1.6 Signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.4.1.7 Settings
2=ANSI Very Inv
3=ANSI Norm Inv
4=ANSI Mod Inv
5=ANSI DT
6=LT Ext Inv
7=LT Very Inv
8=LT Inv
9=IEC Norm Inv
10=IEC Very Inv
11=IEC Inv
12=IEC Ext Inv
13=IEC ST Inv
14=IEC LT Inv
15=IEC DT
17=Programmable
18=RI Type
19=RD Type
615 series ANSI 591

Technical Manual
Table 481: 46 Group settings (Advanced)

2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset

5=disable
curve
curve
curve
curve
curve


2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
592 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

current: fn

value
1) Negative sequence current before fault = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements

Table 486: 46 Technical revision history
multiplier setting
E Internal Improvements
4.4.2 Phase discontinuity protection 46PD
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC I2/I1> 46PD
615 series ANSI 593

Technical Manual
A070688-ANSI V1 EN
The phase discontinuity protection function 46PD is used for detecting unbalance
situations caused by broken conductors.
The function picks up and trips when the unbalance current I2/I1 exceeds the set limit. To
prevent faulty operation at least one phase current needs to be above the minimum level.
46PD trips with DT characteristic.
The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function output,
The operation of 46PD can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in
GUID-1A3E3A3D-D45B-4A88-8D65-CBE389ED1518 V1 EN
594 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
I2/I1
The I2/I1 module calculates the ratio of the negative and positive sequence current. It
reports the calculated value to the level detector.
Level detector
The level detector compares the calculated ratio of the negative and positive-sequence
currents to the set Pickup value. If the calculated value exceeds the set Pickup value and
the min current check module has exceeded the value of Min phase current, the level
detector reports the exceeding of the value to the timer.
Min current check

The min current check module checks whether the measured phase currents are above the
set Min phase current. At least one of the phase currents needs to be above the set limit to
enable the level detector module.
Timer
The timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR, which indicates the ratio
of the pickup situation and the set trip time. The value is available in the monitored data
view.
Blocking logic
615 series ANSI 595

Technical Manual
4.4.2.5 Application
In three-phase distribution and subtransmission network applications the phase

discontinuity in one phase can cause an increase of zero-sequence voltage and short
overvoltage peaks and also oscillation in the corresponding phase.
46PD is a three-phase protection with DT characteristic, designed for detecting broken

conductors in distribution and subtransmission networks. The function is applicable for
both overhead lines and underground cables.
The operation of 46PD is based on the ratio of positive-sequence and negative-sequence

currents. This gives better sensitivity and stability compared to plain negative-sequence
current protection since the calculated ratio of positive-sequence and negative-sequence
currents is relatively constant during load variations.
The unbalance of the network is detected by monitoring the negative-sequence and

positive-sequence current ratio, where the negative-sequence current value is I2 and I1 is
the positive-sequence current value. The unbalance is calculated with the equation.
I2
Iratio =
I1
Broken conductor fault situation can occur in phase A in a feeder.
IECA070699-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 301: Broken conductor fault in phase A in a distribution or subtransmission

feeder
596 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
IECA070698 V1 EN
Figure 302: Three-phase current quantities during the broken conductor fault in
phase A with the ratio of negative-sequence and positive-sequence
currents
4.4.2.6 Signals
Table 487: 46PD Input signals
I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence current

Table 488: 46PD Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
615 series ANSI 597

Technical Manual
4.4.2.7 Settings
Table 489: 46PD Group settings (Basic)
Pickup value 10...100 % 1 10 Pickup value
Table 490: 46PD Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 491: 46PD Non group settings (Advanced)

Min phase current 0.05...0.30 xIn 0.01 0.10 Minimum phase current

Table 492: 46PD Monitored data
RATIO_I2_I1 FLOAT32 0.00...999.99 % Measured current ratio I2 / I1
46PD Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 493: 46PD Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz
±2% of the set value

Pickup time <70 ms
598 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 494: 46PD Technical revision history
4.4.3 Phase reversal protection 46R
Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC I2>> 46R

46R
I2 PICKUP
BLOCK TRIP
GUID-79DAF62E-ACEA-438B-AC8A-D355CB3D1CA5 V1 EN
The phase reversal protection function 46R is used to detect the reversed connection of the
phases to a three-phase motor by monitoring the negative phase sequence current I2 of the
motor.
46R picks up and trips when I2 exceeds the set limit. 46R operates on definite time (DT)
characteristics. 46R is based on the calculated I2, and the function detects too high I2
615 series ANSI 599

Technical Manual
values during the motor start-up. The excessive I2 values are caused by incorrectly
connected phases, which in turn makes the motor rotate in the opposite direction.

The operation of 46R can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
Timer PICKUP
Level
I2
detector t
TRIP
BLOCK
GUID-F0B4B5EF-8B3C-4967-9818-24DACE686FC8-ANSI V1 EN
Level detector
The level detector compares the negative-sequence current to the set Pickup value. If the I2
value exceeds the set Pickup value, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer
module.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output. When the operation timer has
reached the set Trip delay time value, the TRIP output is activated. If the fault disappears
before the module trips, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value of
200 ms, the operation timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated.
view.
4.4.3.5 Application
The rotation of a motor in the reverse direction is not a desirable operating condition.
When the motor drives fans and pumps, for example, and the rotation direction is reversed
due to a wrong phase sequence, the driven process can be disturbed and the flow of the
cooling air of the motor can become reversed too. With a motor designed only for a
600 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
particular rotation direction, the reversed rotation direction can lead to an inefficient
cooling of the motor due to the fan design.
In a motor, the value of the negative-sequence component of the phase currents is very
negligible when compared to the positive-sequence component of the current during a
healthy operating condition of the motor. But when the motor is started with the phase
connections in the reverse order, the magnitude of I2 is very high. So whenever the value
of I2 exceeds the pickup value, the function detects the reverse rotation direction and
provides an operating signal that disconnects the motor from the supply.
4.4.3.6 Signals
Table 495: 46R Input signals
Table 496: 46R Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.4.3.7 Settings
Table 497: 46R Group settings (Basic)
Table 498: 46R Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
615 series ANSI 601

Technical Manual

Table 499: 46R Monitored data
46R Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 500: 46R Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz

value
1) Negative-sequence current before = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements

Table 501: PREVPTOC Technical revision history46R Technical revision history
602 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.4.4 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection for machines 46M
Negative-sequence overcurrent MNSPTOC I2>M 46M
protection for machines
46M
I2 PICKUP
BLOCK TRIP
BLK_RESTART
GUID-947A7DA2-8229-4A11-966B-3E3A4BA7F4AC V1 EN
The negative-sequence overcurrent protection for machines function 46M protects

electric motors from phase unbalance. A small voltage unbalance can produce a large
negative-sequence current flow in the motor. For example, a 5 percent voltage unbalance
produces a stator negative-sequence current of 30 percent of the full load current, which
can severely heat the motor. 46M detects the large negative-sequence current and
disconnects the motor.
The operation of 46M can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
615 series ANSI 603

Technical Manual
Timer
Level TRIP
I2
detector
PICKUP
BLOCK
BLK_RESTART
GUID-F890E844-B9C9-4E99-A51F-6EAB19B5239B-ANSI V2 EN
Level detector
The calculated negative-sequence current is compared to the Pickup value setting. If the
measured value exceeds the Pickup value setting, the function activates the timer module.
Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output. Depending on the value of the set
Operating curve type, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When the
operation timer has reached the value set by Trip delay time in the DT mode or the
In a drop-off situation, that is, when the value of the negative-sequence current drops
below the Pickup value setting, the reset timer is activated and the PICKUP output resets
after the time delay of Reset delay time for the DT characteristics. For IDMT, the reset
time depends on the curve type selected.
For the IDMT curves, it is possible to define minimum and maximum trip times with the
Minimum trip time and Maximum trip time settings. The Machine time Mult setting
parameter corresponds to the machine constant, equal to the I22t constant of the machine,
as stated by the machine manufacturer. In case there is a mismatch between the used CT
and the protected motor's nominal current values, it is possible to fit the IDMT curves for
the protected motor using the Rated current setting.
The activation of the TRIP output activates the BLK_RESTART output. The deactivation
of the TRIP output activates the cooling timer. The timer is set to the value entered in the
Cooling time setting. The BLK_RESTART output is kept active until the cooling timer is
exceeded. If the negative-sequence current increases above the set value during this
period, the TRIP output is activated immediately.
The T_ENARESTART output indicates the duration for which the BLK_RESTART output
remains active, that is, it indicates the remaining time of the cooling timer. The value is
available in the monitored data view.
604 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
46M supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The DT timer characteristics can be
selected with "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time" in the Operating curve type setting.
The functionality is identical in both cases. When the DT characteristics are selected, the
functionality is only affected by the Trip delay time and Reset delay time settings.
The protection relay provides two user-programmable IDMT characteristics curves, "Inv.
curve A" and "Inv. curve B".
Current-based inverse definite minimum time curve (IDMT)

In inverse-time modes, the trip time depends on the momentary value of the current: the
higher the current, the shorter the trip time. The trip time calculation or integration starts
immediately when the current exceeds the set Pickup value and the PICKUP output is
activated.
The TRIP output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of the integrator
calculating the overcurrent situation exceeds the value set by the inverse time mode. The
set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values used.
The Minimum trip time and Maximum trip time settings define the minimum trip time and
maximum trip time possible for the IDMT mode. For setting these parameters, a careful
study of the particular IDMT curves is recommended.
Inv. curve A
The inverse time equation for curve type A is:
k
t [ s] =
2
 I2 
 
 Ir 
GUID-D8A4A304-6C63-4BA4-BAEA-E7891504557A V1 EN (Equation 117)
t[s] Trip time in seconds

k Set Machine time Mult
I2 Negative-sequence current
Ir Set Rated current
615 series ANSI 605

Technical Manual
If the negative sequence current drops below the Pickup value setting, the reset time is
defined as:
 b 
t [ s] = a ×  
 100 
GUID-8BE4B6AC-FB61-4D30-B77B-3E599D5BAE81 V1 EN (Equation 118)
t[s] Reset time in seconds

a set Cooling time
b percentage of pickup time elapse (PICKUP_DUR)
When the reset period is initiated, the time for which PICKUP has been active is saved. If
the fault reoccurs, that is, the negative-sequence current rises above the set value during
the reset period, the trip calculations are continued using the saved values. If the reset
period elapses without a fault being detected, the operation timer is reset and the saved
values of pickup time and integration are cleared.
Inv. curve B
The inverse time equation for curve type B is:
k
t [ s] =
2 2
 I2   IS 
  − 
 Ir   Ir 
GUID-805DCB50-71D2-4721-830B-3343E1A5500B V1 EN (Equation 119)
t[s] Trip time in seconds

k Machine time Mult
I2 Negative-sequence current
IS Set Pickup value
Ir Set Rated current
If the fault disappears, the negative-sequence current drops below the Pickup value setting
and the PICKUP output is deactivated. The function does not reset instantaneously.
Resetting depends on the equation or the Cooling time setting.
The timer is reset in two ways:

• When the negative sequence current drops below pickup value, the subtraction in the
denominator becomes negative and the cumulative sum starts to decrease. The
decrease in the sum indicates the cooling of the machine and the cooling speed
606 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
depends on the value of the negative-sequence current. If the sum reaches zero
without a fault being detected, the accumulation stops and the timer is reset.
• If the reset time set through the Cooling time setting elapses without a fault being
detected, the timer is reset.
The reset period thus continues for a time equal to the Cooling time setting or until the
operate time decreases to zero, whichever is less.
4.4.4.6 Application
In a three-phase motor, the conditions that can lead to unbalance are single phasing,
voltage unbalance from the supply and single-phase fault. The negative sequence current
damages the motor during the unbalanced voltage condition, and therefore the negative
sequence current is monitored to check the unbalance condition.
When the voltages supplied to an operating motor become unbalanced, the positive-
sequence current remains substantially unchanged, but the negative-sequence current
flows due to the unbalance. For example, if the unbalance is caused by an open circuit in
any phase, a negative-sequence current flows and it is equal and opposite to the previous
load current in a healthy phase. The combination of positive and negative-sequence
currents produces phase currents approximately 1.7 times the previous load in each
healthy phase and zero current in the open phase.
The negative-sequence currents flow through the stator windings inducing negative-
sequence voltage in the rotor windings. This can result in a high rotor current that damages
the rotor winding. The frequency of the induced current is approximately twice the supply
frequency. Due to skin effect, the induced current with a frequency double the supply
frequency encounters high rotor resistance which leads to excessive heating even with
phase currents with value less than the rated current of the motor.
The negative-sequence impedance of induction or a synchronous motor is approximately

equal to the locked rotor impedance, which is approximately one-sixth of the normal
motor impedance, considering that the motor has a locked-rotor current of six times the
rated current. Therefore, even a three percent voltage unbalance can lead to 18 percent
stator negative sequence current in windings. The severity of this is indicated by a 30-40
percent increase in the motor temperature due to the extra current.
4.4.4.7 Signals
615 series ANSI 607

Technical Manual

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Overheated machine reconnection blocking
4.4.4.8 Settings
15=IEC DT
17=Inv. Curve A
18=Inv. Curve B
Machine time Mult 5.0...100.0 0.1 5.0 Machine related time constant

5=disable
Maximum trip time 500000...7200000 ms 1000 1000000 Max trip time regardless of the inverse
characteristic
Cooling time 5...7200 s 1 50 Time required to cool the machine

Rated current 0.30...2.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 Rated current (Ir) of the machine (used only in
the IDMT)
608 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

block restart
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

current: fn

IFault = 2.0 × set Pickup 23 25 ms 28 ms
value
1) Negative-sequence current before = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements
3) Pickup value multiples in range of 1.10...5.00

615 series ANSI 609

Technical Manual
4.5 Voltage protection
4.5.1 Three-phase overvoltage protection 59
Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 3U> 59
A070122 V2 EN
The three-phase overvoltage protection function 59 is applied on power system elements,

such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines, to protect the system from
excessive voltages that could damage the insulation and cause insulation breakdown. The
three-phase overvoltage function includes a settable value for the detection of overvoltage
either in a single phase, two phases or three phases.
59 includes both definite time (DT) and inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)
characteristics for the delay of the trip.

610 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-0C80D68A-9D22-47C6-8AAA-8E0D639764D9-ANSI V2 EN
Level detector
The fundamental frequency component of the measured three-phase voltages are
compared phase-wise to the set value of the Pickup value setting. If the measured value is
higher than the set value of the Pickup value setting, the level detector enables the phase
selection logic module. The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing
unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly differs from the Pickup value setting.
After leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area.
The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase

voltages for protection.
For the voltage IDMT operation mode, the used IDMT curve equations contain
discontinuity characteristics. The Curve Sat relative setting is used for preventing
undesired operation.
For a more detailed description of the IDMT curves and the use of the
Curve Sat Relative setting, see the IDMT curve saturation of the over
voltage protection section in this manual.

phase or phases in which the fault level is detected. If the number of faulty phases match
with the set Num of pickup phases, the phase selection logic activates the Timer.
Timer
Once activated, the Timer activates the PICKUP output. Depending on the value of the set
Operating curve type, the time characteristics are selected according to DT or IDMT.
615 series ANSI 611

Technical Manual
For a detailed description of the voltage IDMT curves, see the IDMT
curves for overvoltage protection section in this manual.
When the operation timer has reached the value set by Trip delay time in the DT mode or
the maximum value defined by the IDMT, the TRIP output is activated.
When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the trip time characteristics are
defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C,
If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the trip delay is
exceeded, the reset state is activated. The behavior in the drop-off situation depends on the
selected trip time characteristics. If the DT characteristics are selected, the reset timer runs
until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. If the drop-off situation exceeds the set
Reset delay time, the Timer is reset and the PICKUP output is deactivated.
When the IDMT operate time curve is selected, the functionality of the Timer in the drop-
off state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve and Reset delay time
settings.
Table 510: Reset time functionality when IDMT operation time curve selected
Reset functionality Setting Type of reset Setting Type of time Setting Reset delay
curve reset time
Instantaneous Operation timer is “Immediate” Setting has no Setting has no
reset “Reset effect effect
instantaneously”
when drop-off
occurs
Frozen timer Operation timer is “Def time reset” “Freeze Op timer” Operate timer is
frozen during drop- reset after the set
off Reset delay time
has elapsed
Linear decrease Operation timer “Def time reset” “Decrease Op Operate timer is
value linearly timer” reset after the set
decreases during Reset delay time
the drop-off has elapsed
situation
612 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-846395DB-B778-4782-A6FA-9D7B62D92F65-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 309: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. Operate signal is based on
settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset=
“Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented
The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT trip times.
The Minimum trip time setting parameter defines the minimum desired trip time for
The Minimum trip time setting should be used with care because the
615 series ANSI 613

Technical Manual
IDMT curves for overvoltage protection section in this manual.
The Timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR, which indicates the
Blocking logic
program. The influence of the BLOCK input signal activation is preselected with the global
Blocking mode setting.
operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the TRIP is blocked and the Timers
are reset. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset.
In the "Block TRIP output" mode, the function operates normally but the TRIP output is
not activated.
The “Freeze timers” mode of blocking has no effect during the inverse
reset mode.
The operating curve types supported by 59 are:

Table 511: Timer characteristics supported by IDMT operate curve types
Operating curve type
(5) ANSI Def. Time
(15) IEC Def. Time
(17) Inv. Curve A
(18) Inv. Curve B
(19) Inv. Curve C
(20) Programmable
614 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.5.1.6 Application
Overvoltage in a network occurs either due to the transient surges on the network or due
to prolonged power frequency overvoltages. Surge arresters are used to protect the
network against the transient overvoltages, but the relay's protection function is used to
protect against power frequency overvoltages.
The power frequency overvoltage may occur in the network due to contingencies such as:
• The defective operation of the automatic voltage regulator when the generator is in
isolated operation.
• Operation under manual control with the voltage regulator out of service. A sudden
variation of load, in particular the reactive power component, gives rise to a
substantial change in voltage because of the inherent large voltage regulation of a
typical alternator.
• Sudden loss of load due to the tripping of outgoing feeders, leaving the generator
isolated or feeding a very small load. This causes a sudden rise in the terminal voltage
due to the trapped field flux and overspeed.
If a load sensitive to overvoltage remains connected, it leads to equipment damage.
It is essential to provide power frequency overvoltage protection, in the form of time

delayed element, either IDMT or DT to prevent equipment damage.
4.5.1.7 Signals
CA

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
615 series ANSI 615

Technical Manual
4.5.1.8 Settings
Pickup value 0.05...1.60 xUn 0.01 1.10 Pickup value
15=IEC DT
17=Inv. Curve A
18=Inv. Curve B
19=Inv. Curve C
20=Programmable

2=Def time reset
Type of time reset 1=Freeze Op timer 1=Freeze Op timer Selection of time reset
2=Decrease Op
timer

5=disable
2=2 out of 3
3=3 out of 3
curve
curve
curve
curve
curve
Voltage selection 1=phase-to-earth 2=phase-to-phase Parameter to select phase or phase-to-phase
2=phase-to-phase voltages
616 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Curve Sat Relative 0.0...10.0 0.1 0.0 Tuning parameter to avoid curve
discontinuities
Relative hysteresis 1.0...5.0 % 0.1 4.0 Relative hysteresis for operation

2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

voltage: fn ±2 Hz

UFault = 1.1 × set Pickup 23 ms 27 ms 31 ms
value
Reset ratio Depends on the set Relative hysteresis
1) Pickup value = 1.0 × Vn, Voltage before fault = 0.9 × Vn, fn = 50 Hz, overvoltage in one phase-to-phase with
measurements
3) Maximum Pickup value = 1.20 × Vn, Pickup value multiples in range of 1.10...2.00
615 series ANSI 617

Technical Manual

multiplier setting.
C Curve Sat relative max range widened from 3.0 to
10.0 % and default value changed from 2.0 to 0.0 %.
D Added setting Type of time reset.
4.5.2 Three-phase undervoltage protection 27
Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV 3U< 27
GUID-B4A78A17-67CA-497C-B2F1-BC4F1DA415B6-ANSI V1 EN
The three-phase undervoltage protection function 27 is used to disconnect from the

network devices, for example electric motors, which are damaged when subjected to
service under low voltage conditions. 27 includes a settable value for the detection of
undervoltage either in a single phase, two phases or three phases.

618 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-9D762D4C-404B-4F4B-93A9-B1F071DF12F2-ANSI V1 EN
Level detector
The fundamental frequency component of the measured three phase voltages are
compared phase-wise to the set Pickup value. If the measured value is lower than the set
value of the Pickup value setting, the level detector enables the phase selection logic
module. The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary
oscillations if the input signal slightly varies above or below the Pickup value setting.
After leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase
For the voltage IDMT mode of operation, the used IDMT curve equations contain
discontinuity characteristics. The Curve Sat relative setting is used for preventing
unwanted operation.
For more detailed description on IDMT curves and usage of Curve Sat
Relative setting, see the IDMT curves for under voltage protection section
in this manual.
The level detector contains a low-level blocking functionality for cases where one of the
measured voltages is below the desired level. This feature is useful when unnecessary
pickups and trips are wanted to avoid during, for example, an autoreclose sequence. The
low-level blocking is activated by default (Enable block value is set to "True") and the
blocking level can be set with the Voltage block value setting.
615 series ANSI 619

Technical Manual

Timer
Once activated, the Timer activates the PICKUP output. Depending on the value of the set
Operating curve type, the time characteristics are selected according to DT or IDMT.
For a detailed description of the voltage IDMT curves, see the IDMT
curves for under voltage protection section in this manual.
When the operation timer has reached the value set by Trip delay time in the DT mode or
the maximum value defined by the IDMT, the TRIP output is activated.
When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the trip time characteristics are
defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C,
If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the trip delay is
exceeded, the reset state is activated. The behavior in the drop-off situation depends on the
selected trip time characteristics. If the DT characteristics are selected, the reset timer runs
until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. If the drop-off situation exceeds the set
Reset delay time, the Timer is reset and the PICKUP output is deactivated.
When the IDMT trip time curve is selected, the functionality of the Timer in the drop-off
state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings.
620 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 521: Reset time functionality when IDMT operation time curve selected
Reset functionality Setting Type of reset Setting Type of time Setting Reset delay
curve reset time
Instantaneous Operation timer is “Immediate” Setting has no Setting has no
reset “Reset effect effect
instantaneously”
when drop-off
occurs
Frozen timer Operation timer is “Def time reset” “Freeze Op timer” Operate timer is
frozen during drop- reset after the set
off Reset delay time
has elapsed
Linear decrease Operation timer “Def time reset” “Decrease Op Operate timer is
value linearly timer” reset after the set
decreases during Reset delay time
the drop-off has elapsed
situation
615 series ANSI 621

Technical Manual
GUID-EE729648-3D09-4EBE-B662-80E59DA7C0A4-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 312: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. Operate signal is based on
settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset=
“Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented
The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT trip times.
The Minimum trip time setting parameter defines the minimum desired trip time for
The Minimum trip time setting should be used with care because the
622 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Blocking logic
Timers are reset. In the "Block TRIP output" mode, the function operates normally but the
The “Freeze timers” mode of blocking has no effect during the “Inverse
reset” mode.
The operating curve types supported by 27 are:

Table 522: Supported IDMT operate curve types
Operating curve type
(5) ANSI Def. Time
(15) IEC Def. Time
(21) Inv. Curve A
(22) Inv. Curve B
(23) Programmable
4.5.2.6 Application
27 is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and

power lines, to detect low voltage conditions. Low voltage conditions are caused by
abnormal operation or a fault in the power system. 27 can be used in combination with
overcurrent protections. Other applications are the detection of a no-voltage condition, for
example before the energization of a high voltage line, or an automatic breaker trip in case
615 series ANSI 623

Technical Manual
of a blackout. 27 is also used to initiate voltage correction measures, such as insertion of

shunt capacitor banks, to compensate for a reactive load and thereby to increase the
voltage.
27 can be used to disconnect from the network devices, such as electric motors, which are
damaged when subjected to service under low voltage conditions. 27 deals with low
voltage conditions at power system frequency. Low voltage conditions can be caused by:
• Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or incorrect settings under manual control
(symmetrical voltage decrease)
• Overload (symmetrical voltage decrease)
• Short circuits, often as phase-to-ground faults (unsymmetrical voltage increase).
27 prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could cause
overheating and thus shorten their life time expectancy. In many cases, 27 is a useful
function in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the power system.
4.5.2.7 Signals
CA

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
624 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.5.2.8 Settings
15=IEC DT
21=Inv. Curve A
22=Inv. Curve B
23=Programmable

2=Def time reset
Type of time reset 1=Freeze Op timer 1=Freeze Op timer Selection of time reset
2=Decrease Op
timer

5=disable
2=2 out of 3
3=3 out of 3
curve
curve
curve
curve
curve
615 series ANSI 625

Technical Manual

Curve Sat Relative 0.0...10.0 0.1 0.0 Tuning parameter to avoid curve
discontinuities
Voltage block value 0.05...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.20 Low level blocking for undervoltage mode
Enable block value 0=False 1=True Enable internal blocking
1=True

2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage
measured: fn ±2 Hz

UFault = 0.9 × set Pickup 62 ms 66 ms 70 ms
value
626 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
1) Pickup value = 1.0 × Vn, Voltage before fault = 1.1 × Vn, fn = 50 Hz, undervoltage in one phase-to-phase with
measurements
3) Minimum Pickup value = 0.50, PIckup value multiples in range of 0.90...0.20

multiplier setting.
C Curve Sat relative max range widened from 3.0 to
10.0 % and default value changed from 2.0 to 0.0 %.
D Added setting Type of time reset.
4.5.3 Residual overvoltage protection 59N, 59G
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV Uo> 59N, 59G
GUID-F809C4BA-65E7-46D0-A46A-F51E7B90F1BA-ANSI V1 EN
GUID-AC9C406F-1A77-4135-A0A4-6F726EB18E1E V1 EN
615 series ANSI 627

Technical Manual
The residual overvoltage protection function 59N, 59G is used in distribution networks
where the residual overvoltage can reach non-acceptable levels in, for example, high
impedance grounding.
The function picks up when the residual voltage exceeds the set limit. 59N, 59G operates
with the definite time (DT) characteristic.
The operation of 59N, 59G can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules
GUID-852F56DB-266E-4CB8-BC58-01D4BA605FD0-ANSI V1 EN
Level detector
The residual voltage is compared to the set Pickup value. If the value exceeds the set
Pickup value, the level detector sends an enable signal to the timer. The residual voltage
can be selected with the VG/V0 Select setting. The options are "Measured VG" and
"Calculated V0". If "Measured VG" is selected, the voltage ratio for VG-channel is given
in the global setting Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (VG,VT). If "Calculated
V0" is selected, the voltage ratio is obtained from phase-voltage channels given in the
global setting Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (3V,VT).
Example 1: VG is measured from the open-delta connected VTs (20/sqrt(3) kV : 100/

sqrt(3) V : 100/3 V). In this case, "Measured VG" is selected. The nominal values for
residual voltage is obtained from the VT ratios entered in Residual voltage VG:
Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (VG,VT): 11.547 kV:100 V. The residual
628 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
voltage pickup value of 1.0 × Vn corresponds to 1.0 × 11.547 kV = 11.547 kV in the

primary.
Example 2: V0 is calculated from the phase quantities. The phase VT-ratio is 20/sqrt(3)
kV : 100/sqrt(3) V. In this case, "Calculated V0" is selected. The nominal value for
residual voltage is obtained from the VT ratios entered in Residual voltage V0:
Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (3V,VT): 20.000kV : 100V. The residual voltage
pickup value of 1.0 × Vn corresponds to 1.0 × 20.000 kV = 20.000 kV in the primary.
If "Calculated V0" is selected, the nominal value of residual voltage is

residual voltage Pickup value is 0.577 × Vn. The calculated V0 requires
that all three phase-to-ground voltages are connected to the protection
Timer
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in
Blocking logic
615 series ANSI 629

Technical Manual
4.5.3.5 Application
59N, 59G is designed to be used for ground-fault protection in isolated neutral, resistance
grounded or reactance grounded systems. In compensated networks, the pickup of the
function can be used to control the switching device of the neutral resistor. The function
can also be used for the back-up protection of feeders for busbar protection when a more
dedicated busbar protection would not be justified.
In compensated and isolated neutral systems, the system neutral voltage, that is, the
ground voltage, increases in case of any fault connected to ground. Depending on the type
of the fault and the fault resistance, the ground voltage reaches different values. The
highest ground voltage, equal to the phase-to-ground voltage, is achieved for a single-
phase ground fault. The ground voltage increases approximately the same amount in the
whole system and does not provide any guidance in finding the faulty component.
Therefore, this function is often used as a back-up protection or as a release signal for the
feeder ground-fault protection.
The protection can also be used for the ground-fault protection of generators and motors
and for the unbalance protection of capacitor banks.
The ground voltage can be calculated internally based on the measurement of the three-
phase voltage. This voltage can also be measured by a single-phase voltage transformer,
located between a transformer star point and ground, or by using an open-delta connection
of three single-phase voltage transformers.
4.5.3.6 Signals
VG/V0 SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
630 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.5.3.7 Settings

5=disable
VG/V0 Select 1=Measured VG 1=Measured VG Selection for used VG/V0 signal
2=Calculated V0


2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 538: 59N, 59G Technical data
voltage: fn ±2 Hz

VFault = 2 × set Pickup 48 ms 51 ms 54 ms
value
615 series ANSI 631

Technical Manual
1) Residual voltage before fault = 0.0 × Vn, fn = 50 Hz, residual voltage with nominal frequency injected from
random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
4.5.4 Negative-sequence overvoltage protection 47
Negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV U2> 47
protection
GUID-CDC32940-936F-4DC6-8E78-1F4D7965EA96-ANSI V1 EN
The negative-sequence overvoltage protection function 47 is used to detect negative-

sequence overvoltage conditions. 47 is used for the protection of machines.
he function picks up when the negative-sequence voltage exceeds the set limit. 47 operates
with the definite time (DT) characteristics.
632 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-66143AD1-B4FB-4D99-86F4-BEBF74F80E3E-ANSI V1 EN
Level detector
The calculated negative-sequence voltage is compared to the set Pickup value setting. If
the value exceeds the set Pickup value, the level detector enables the timer.
Timer
the TRIP output is activated if the overvoltage condition persists. If the negative-
sequence voltage normalizes before the module trips, the reset timer is activated. If the
reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and the
PICKUP output is deactivated.
view.
Blocking logic
615 series ANSI 633

Technical Manual
4.5.4.5 Application
A continuous or temporary voltage unbalance can appear in the network for various
reasons. The voltage unbalance mainly occurs due to broken conductors or asymmetrical
loads and is characterized by the appearance of a negative-sequence component of the
voltage. In rotating machines, the voltage unbalance results in a current unbalance, which
heats the rotors of the machines. The rotating machines, therefore, do not tolerate a
continuous negative-sequence voltage higher than typically 1-2 percent x Vn.
The negative-sequence component current I2, drawn by an asynchronous or a

synchronous machine, is linearly proportional to the negative-sequence component
voltage V2. When V2 is P% of Vn, I2 is typically about 5 x P% x In.
The negative-sequence overcurrent 46 blocks are used to accomplish a selective

protection against the voltage and current unbalance for each machine separately.
Alternatively, the protection can be implemented with the 47 function, monitoring the
voltage unbalance of the busbar.
If the machines have an unbalance protection of their own, the 47 operation can be applied
as a backup protection or it can be used as an alarm. The latter can be applied when it is
not required to trip loads tolerating voltage unbalance better than the rotating machines.
If there is a considerable degree of voltage unbalance in the network, the rotating

machines should not be connected to the network at all. This logic can be implemented by
inhibiting the closure of the circuit breaker if the 47 operation has picked up. This scheme
also prevents connecting the machine to the network if the phase sequence of the network
is not correct.
An appropriate value for the setting parameter Voltage pickup value is approximately 3
percent of Vn. A suitable value for the setting parameter Trip delay time depends on the
application. If the 47 operation is used as a backup protection, the trip time should be set
in accordance with the trip time of 46 used as the main protection. If the 47 operation is
used as the main protection, the trip time should be approximately one second.
4.5.4.6 Signals
634 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.5.4.7 Settings

5=disable


2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
615 series ANSI 635

Technical Manual

measured: fn

VFault = 1.1 × set Pickup 33 ms 35 ms 37 ms
VFault = 2.0 × set Pickup
value
1) Negative-sequence voltage before fault = 0.0 × Vn, fn = 50 Hz, negative-sequence overvoltage with nominal
frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

Table 546: NSPTOV Technical revision history
B Internal change
4.5.5 Positive-sequence undervoltage protection 47U, 27PS
Positive-sequence undervoltage PSPTUV U1< 47U, 27PS
protection
636 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
47U,27PS
V1 TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
GUID-BA2E06D5-7FFA-4231-9BE4-C5E14C37E5C9 V1 EN
The positive-sequence undervoltage protection function 47U, 27PS is used to detect

positive-sequence undervoltage conditions. 47U, 27PS is used for the protection of small
power generation plants. The function helps in isolating an embedded plant from a fault
line when the fault current fed by the plant is too low to cause an overcurrent function to
pickup but high enough to maintain the arc. Fast isolation of all the fault current sources
is necessary for a successful autoreclosure from the network-end circuit breaker.
The function picks up when the positive-sequence voltage drops below the set limit. 47U,
27PS operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics.
The operation of 47U, 27PS can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in
Timer TRIP
V1
Level t
Detector
PICKUP
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-E7F19717-CF62-4A4D-9F86-1CB5D376A420 V1 EN
Figure 318: Functional module diagram. V1 is used for representing positive phase
sequence voltage.
615 series ANSI 637

Technical Manual
Level detector
The calculated positive-sequence voltage is compared to the set Pickup value setting. If
the value drops below the set Pickup value, the level detector enables the timer. The
Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input
signal slightly varies from the Pickup value setting. After leaving the hysteresis area, the
pickup condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
to the hysteresis area.
Timer
the TRIP output is activated if the undervoltage condition persists. If the positive-
sequence voltage normalizes before the module trips, the reset timer is activated. If the
view.
Blocking logic
4.5.5.5 Application
47U, 27PS can be applied for protecting a power station used for embedded generation
when network faults like short circuits or phase-to-ground faults in a transmission or a
distribution line cause a potentially dangerous situations for the power station. A network
fault can be dangerous for the power station for various reasons. The operation of the
protection can cause an islanding condition, also called a loss-of-mains condition, in
which a part of the network, that is, an island fed by the power station, is isolated from the
638 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
rest of the network. There is then a risk of an autoreclosure taking place when the voltages
of different parts of the network do not synchronize, which is a straining incident for the
power station. Another risk is that the generator can lose synchronism during the network
fault. A sufficiently fast trip of the utility circuit breaker of the power station can avoid
these risks.
The lower the three-phase symmetrical voltage of the network is, the higher is the
probability that the generator loses the synchronism. The positive-sequence voltage is
also available during asymmetrical faults. It is a more appropriate criterion for detecting
the risk of loss of synchronism than, for example, the lowest phase-to-phase voltage.
Analyzing the loss of synchronism of a generator is rather complicated and requires a

model of the generator with its prime mover and controllers. The generator can be able to
trip synchronously even if the voltage drops by a few tens of percent for some hundreds
of milliseconds. The setting of 47U, 27PS is thus determined by the need to protect the
power station from the risks of the islanding conditions since that requires a higher setting
value.
The loss of synchronism of a generator means that the generator is unable to operate as a
generator with the network frequency but enters into an unstable condition in which it
operates by turns as a generator and a motor. Such a condition stresses the generator
thermally and mechanically. This kind of loss of synchronism should not be mixed with
the one between an island and the utility network. In the islanding situation, the condition
of the generator itself is normal but the phase angle and the frequency of the phase-to-
phase voltage can be different from the corresponding voltage in the rest of the network.
The island can have a frequency of its own relatively fast when fed by a small power
station with a low inertia.
47U, 27PS complements other loss-of-grid protection principles based on the frequency
and voltage operation.
Motor stalling and failure to start can lead to a continuous undervoltage. The positive-
sequence undervoltage is used as a backup protection against the motor stall condition.
4.5.5.6 Signals
Table 547: 47U,27PS Input signals
615 series ANSI 639

Technical Manual
Table 548: 47U,27PS Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.5.5.7 Settings
Table 549: 47U,27PS Group settings (Basic)
Table 550: 47U,27PS Group settings (Advanced)

Voltage block value 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.20 Internal blocking level
Enable block value 0=False 1=True Enable Internal Blocking
1=True
Table 551: 47U,27PS Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 552: 47U,27PS Non group settings (Advanced)


Table 553: 47U,27PS Monitored data
47U,27PS Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
640 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 554: 27PS Technical data
voltage: fn ±2 Hz

VFault = 0.99 × set Pickup 52 ms 55 ms 58 ms
VFault = 0.9 × set Pickup
value
1) Pickup value = 1.0 × Vn, positive-sequence voltage before fault = 1.1 × Vn, fn = 50 Hz, positive sequence
undervoltage with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical

Table 555: 47U, 27PS Technical revision history
B -
4.5.6 Overexcitation protection 24
Overexcitation protection OEPVPH U/f> 24
615 series ANSI 641

Technical Manual
24
I_A TRIP
I_B PICKUP
I_C BLK_RESTART
I1 COOL_ACTIVE
V_A_AB
V_B_BC
V_C_CA
V1
F
BLOCK
GUID-0ED14E17-5F46-4005-8254-65E0038E2F2B V1 EN
The overexcitation protection function 24 is used to protect generators and power

transformers against an excessive flux density and saturation of the magnetic core.
The function calculates the V/f ratio (volts/hertz) proportional to the excitation level of the
generator or transformer and compares this value to the setting limit. The function picks
up when the excitation level exceeds the set limit and trips when the set tripping time has
elapsed. The tripping time characteristic can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or
overexcitation inverse definite minimum time (overexcitation type IDMT).
This function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function outputs,
reset timer or the function itself, if desired.
642 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-93ECF983-CCBB-4277-8E7B-7EC43743A375 V1 EN
V/f calculation
This module calculates the V/f ratio, that is, the excitation level from the internal induced
voltage (E) and frequency. The actual measured voltage (Vm) deviates from the internal
induced voltage (emf) E, a value the equipment has to withstand. This voltage
compensation is based on the load current (IL) and the leakage reactance (Xleak) of the
equipment. The leakage reactance of the transformer or generator is set through the
Leakage React setting in percentage of the Z base.
The internal induced voltage (E) is calculated from the measured voltage. The settings
Voltage selection and Phase supervision determine which voltages and currents are to be
used. If the Voltage selection setting is set to "phase-to-ground" or "phase-to-phase", the
Phase supervision setting is used for determining which phases or phase-to-phase
voltages ("A or AB", "B or BC" and "C or CA") and currents are to be used for the
calculation of the induced voltage.
Table 556: Voltages and currents used for induced voltage (emf) E calculation
Voltage selection setting Phase supervision Calculation of internal induced voltage (emf) E1)
setting
phase-to-ground A or AB
(
E = 3 × VA + I A × ( j × X leak ) )
GUID-B567E82F-DDAB-4D87-A209-097D5FC072C6 V2 EN
phase-to-ground B or BC
(
E = 3 × VB + I B × ( j × X leak ) )
GUID-551F8B8A-40D2-4D99-B20D-6FC433406EFF V2 EN
phase-to-ground C or CA
(
E = 3 × VC + I C × ( j × X leak ) )
GUID-8B274F07-54A0-4CEC-9AAC-618F742D9EED V2 EN
phase-to-phase A or AB
(
E = VAB + ( I A − I B ) × ( j × X leak ) )
GUID-BA2D5CDB-BC06-4F7E-A71F-A2BEFC10F5A2 V2 EN
615 series ANSI 643

Technical Manual
Voltage selection setting Phase supervision Calculation of internal induced voltage (emf) E1)
setting
phase-to-phase B or BC
(
E = VBC + ( I B − I C ) × ( j × X leak ) )
GUID-AF78379A-78B9-466A-85E1-593333656FB8 V2 EN
phase-to-phase C or CA
(
E = VCA + ( IC − I A ) × ( j × X leak ) )
GUID-90521B6F-C9B3-411F-82AD-E5AAF3D3ACEA V2 EN
Pos sequence N/A

(
E = 3 × V1 + I1 × ( j × X leak ) )
GUID-E79E33FD-02FF-4E92-80A4-C7FEBB99C839 V2 EN
1) Voltages, currents and the leakage reactance Xleak in the calculations are given in volts, amps and ohms.
If all three phase or phase-to-phase voltages and phase currents are fed to
the protection relay, the positive-sequence alternative is recommended.
If the leakage reactance of the protected equipment is unknown or if the

measured voltage (Vm) is to be used in the excitation level calculation,
then by setting the leakage reactance value to zero the calculated induced
voltage (E) is equal to the measured voltage.
The calculated V/f ratio is scaled to a value based on the nominal Vn/fn ratio. However, the
highest allowed continuous voltage (in % Vn) can be defined by setting the parameter
Voltage Max Cont to change the basis of the voltage. The measured voltage is compared
to the new base value to obtain the excitation level.
The excitation level (M) can be calculated:

E
fm
M=
Vn Volt Max continuous
⋅
fn 100
GUID-2712EB3B-0126-44B6-AABC-AA4BD2569FFB V1 EN (Equation 120)
M excitation level (V/f ratio or volts/hertz) in pu

E internal induced voltage (emf)
fm measured frequency
Vn nominal phase-to-phase voltage
fn nominal frequency
644 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
If the input frequency (fm) is less than 20 percent of the nominal frequency (fn), the
calculation of the excitation level is disabled and forced to zero value. This means that the
function is blocked from picking up and tripping during a low-frequency condition.
The calculated excitation level (V/f ratio or volts/hertz) VOLTPERHZ is available in the
Level detector
Level detector compares the calculated excitation level to the Pickup value setting. If the
excitation level exceeds the set limit, the module sends an enabling signal to start Timer.
Timer
Once activated, Timer activates the PICKUP output. Depending on the value of the
the operation timer has reached the value set by Trip delay time in the DT mode or the
value defined by the inverse time curve, the TRIP output is activated.
In a drop-off situation, that is, when the excitation level drops below Pickup value before
the function trips, the reset timer is activated and the PICKUP output resets after the time
delay of Reset delay time for the DT characteristics. For the IDMT curves, the reset
operation is as described in the Timer characteristics chapter.
For the IDMT curves, it is possible to define the maximum and minimum trip times via the
Minimum trip time and Maximum trip time settings. The Maximum trip time setting is used
to prevent infinite pickup situations at low degrees of overexcitation. The Time multiplier
setting is used for scaling the IDMT trip times.
The activation of the TRIP output activates the BLK_RESTART output.
For the DT characteristics, the deactivation of the TRIP output activates the cooling
timer. The timer is set to the value entered in the Cooling time setting. The
BLK_RESTART and COOL_ACTIVE outputs are kept active until the cooling timer is
reset. If the excitation increases above the set value during this period, the PICKUP output
is activated immediately. For IDMT, the deactivation of BLK_RESTART and
COOL_ACTIVE depends on the curve type selected.
The T_ENARESTART output indicates in seconds the duration for which the
BLK_RESTART output still remains active. The value is available in the Monitored data
view.
615 series ANSI 645

Technical Manual
Blocking logic
24 supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The DT timer characteristics can be

selected as "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time" in the Operating curve type setting. The
functionality is identical in both cases. When the DT characteristics are selected, the
functionality is only affected by the Trip delay time and Reset delay time settings.
24 also supports four overexcitation IDMT characteristic curves: "OvExt IDMT Crv1",
"OvExt IDMT Crv2", "OvExt IDMT Crv3" and "OvExt IDMT Crv4".
Overexcitation inverse definite minimum time curve (IDMT)

In the inverse time modes, the trip time depends on the momentary value of the excitation:
the higher the excitation level, the shorter the trip time. The trip time calculation or
integration starts immediately when the excitation level exceeds the set Pickup value and
the PICKUP output is activated.
The TRIP output is activated when the cumulative sum of the integrator calculating the
overexcitation situation exceeds the value set by the inverse time mode. The set value
depends on the selected curve type and the setting values used.
The Minimum trip time and Maximum trip time settings define the minimum trip time and
maximum trip time possible for the IDMT mode. For setting these parameters, a careful
study of the particular IDMT curves is recommended.
The tripping time of the function block can vary much between different
operating curve types even if other setting parameters for the curves were
not changed.
Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output for the IDMT curves. If the
excitation level drops below the Pickup value setting before the function trips, the reset
646 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
timer is activated. If the fault reoccurs during the reset time, the tripping calculation is
made based on the effects of the period when PICKUP was previously active. This is
intended to allow a tripping condition to occur in less time to account for the heating
effects from the previous active pickup period.
When TRIP becomes active, the reset time is based on the following equation.
 PICKUP _ DUR 
reset time =   ⋅ Cooling time
 100 
GUID-14537CFF-A8C8-49DF-A0D3-02FF269FE516 V2 EN (Equation 121)
For the IDMT curves, when the fault disappears, the integral value calculated during
PICKUP is continuously decremented by a constant that causes its value to become zero
when the reset time elapses during the reset period. If a fault reoccurs, the integration
continues from the current integral value and the pickup time is adjusted, as shown in
Figure 321. The pickup time becomes the value at the time when the fault dropped off
minus the amount of reset time that occurred. If the reset period elapses without a fault
being detected, the saved values of the pickup time and integration are cleared.
GUID-47898DF5-3AC0-4EFC-AC30-23A0BBECE133 V1 EN
Figure 321: An example of a delayed reset in the inverse time characteristics. When
the pickup becomes active during the reset period, the trip time counter
continues from the level corresponding to the drop-off (reset time = 0.50 ·
Cooling time)
615 series ANSI 647

Technical Manual
Overexcitation IDMT curves 1, 2 and 3

The base equation for the IDMT curves "OvExt IDMT Crv1", "OvExt IDMT Crv2" and
"OvExt IDMT Crv3" is:
 ak +b −100 M 
 
c
t ( s ) = 60 ⋅ e 
GUID-5D74EA35-03AD-44D1-9EE0-0B1999C55BF1 V1 EN (Equation 122)
t(s) Trip time in seconds

M Excitation level (V/f ratio or volts/hertz) in pu
k Time multiplier setting
The constant "60" in Equation 122 converts time from minutes to seconds.
Table 557: Parameters a, b and c for different IDMT curves

Operating curve type a b c
setting
OvExt IDMT Crv1 2.5 115.00 4.886
OvExt IDMT Crv2 2.5 113.50 3.040
OvExt IDMT Crv3 2.5 108.75 2.443
648 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-BD1205DC-1794-4F64-A950-6199C54DB7B1 V1 EN
Figure 322: Trip time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve ("OvExt IDMT Crv1")
for parameters a = 2.5, b = 115.0 and c = 4.886
Overexcitation IDMT curve 4

The base equation for the IDMT curve “OvExt IDMT Crv4” is:
0.18k
t( s) = d +
( M − 1)2
GUID-361FE32F-D157-402D-BC70-D568AB809339 V1 EN (Equation 123)
t(s) Trip time in seconds

d Constant delay setting in milliseconds
M Excitation value (V/f ratio or volts/hertz) in pu
k Time multiplier setting
615 series ANSI 649

Technical Manual
GUID-6FC7624E-7E13-4645-8943-0FDFBAA1D184 V1 EN
Figure 323: Trip time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve 4 ("OvExt IDMT Crv4")
for different values of the Time multiplier setting when the Constant delay
is 800 milliseconds
The activation of the TRIP output activates the BLK_RESTART output.
If the excitation level increases above the set value when BLK_RESTART is active, the
TRIP output is activated immediately.
If the excitation level increases above the set value when BLK_RESTART is not active but
COOL_ACTIVE is active, the TRIP output is not activated instantly. In this case, the
remaining part of the cooling timer affects the calculation of the operation timer as shown
in Figure 324. This compensates for the heating effect and makes the overall trip time
shorter.
650 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-E62B7A83-72F7-4489-B7BC-DE30D26BF6C7 V1 EN
Figure 324: Example of an inverse time counter operation if TRIP occurs when
BLK_RESTART is inactive while COOL_ACTIVE is active.
4.5.6.6 Application
If the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a magnetic flux

density beyond its designed limits, the leakage flux increases. This results in a heavy
hysteresis and eddy current losses in the non-laminated parts. These losses can cause
excessive heating and severe damage to the insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively
short time.
Overvoltage, underfrequency or a combination of the two, results in an excessive flux

density level. Since the flux density is directly proportional to the voltage and inversely
proportional to the frequency, the overexcitation protection calculates the relative V/Hz
ratio instead of measuring the flux density directly. The nominal level (nominal voltage at
nominal frequency) is usually considered as the 100 percent level, which can be exceeded
slightly based on the design.
The greatest risk for overexcitation exists in a thermal power station when the generator-
transformer unit is disconnected from the rest of the network or in the network islands
where high voltages or low frequencies can occur.
Overexcitation can occur during the start-up and shutdown of the generator if the field
current is not properly adjusted. The loss-of-load or load shedding can also result in
overexcitation if the voltage control and frequency governor do not function properly. The
615 series ANSI 651

Technical Manual
low frequency in a system isolated from the main network can result in overexcitation if
the voltage-regulating system maintains a normal voltage.
Overexcitation protection for the transformer is generally provided by the generator

overexcitation protection, which uses the VTs connected to the generator terminals. The
curves that define the generator and transformer V/Hz limits must be coordinated properly
to protect both equipment.
If the generator can be operated with a leading power factor, the high-side voltage of the
transformer can have a higher pu V/Hz than the generator V/Hz. This needs to be
considered in a proper overexcitation protection of the transformer. Also, measurement
for the voltage must not be taken from any winding where OLTC is located.
It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon caused by events such as

loss-of-load. A high phase-to-ground voltage does not mean overexcitation. For example,
in an ungrounded power system, a single-phase-to-ground fault means high voltages of
the healthy two phases to ground but no overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-
phase voltages remain essentially unchanged. An important voltage to be considered for
the overexcitation is the voltage between the two ends of each winding.
Example calculations for overexcitation protection

Example 1
Nominal values of the machine
Nominal phase-to-phase voltage (Vn) 11000 V
Nominal phase current (In) 7455 A
Nominal frequency (fn) 50 Hz
Leakage reactance (Xleak) 20% or 0.2 pu
Measured voltage and load currents of the machine
Phase A-to-phase B voltage (VAB) 11500∠0° V
Phase A current (IA) 5600∠-63.57° A
Phase B current (IB) 5600∠176.42° A
Measured frequency (fm) 49.98 Hz
The setting Voltage Max Cont 100%

The setting Voltage selection phase-to-phase
The setting Phase supervision A or AB
652 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The pu leakage reactance XleakPU is converted to ohms.
V   
X leak Ω = X leakPU ⋅  n  = 0.2 ⋅  11000  = 0.170378 ohms


In ⋅ 3 


 ( )
7455 ⋅ 3 
 ( )
GUID-7A3ABF69-50C4-4F5D-A466-61CAB055B604 V1 EN (Equation 124)
The internal induced voltage E of the machine is calculated.
E = V AB + ( I A − I B ) ⋅ ( jX leak )
GUID-DBA66DD4-E087-4624-BDCE-E74167CAB5DE V1 EN (Equation 125)
E = 11500∠0°+ (5600∠-63.57°- 5600∠176.42°) · (0.170378∠90°) = 12490 V
The excitation level M of the machine is calculated.

12490
Excitation level M = 49.98 = 1.1359
11000 ⋅ 1.00
50
GUID-28DEBF41-9058-4C7B-985F-FA7131DF39A7 V1 EN (Equation 126)
Example 2
The situation and the data are according to Example 1. In this case, the manufacturer of the
machine allows the continuous operation at 105 percent of the nominal voltage at the rated
load and this value to be used as the base for overexcitation.
Usually, the V/f characteristics are specified so that the ratio is 1.00 at the
nominal voltage and nominal frequency. Therefore, the value 100 percent
for the setting Voltage Max Cont is recommended.
If the Voltage Max Cont setting is 105 percent, the excitation level M of the machine is
calculated with the equation.
12490
Excitation level M = 49.98 = 1.0818
11000 ⋅ 1.05
50
GUID-3422B6EB-4564-4EFD-B60A-50CB18850054 V1 EN (Equation 127)
Example 3
In this case, the function operation is according to IDMT. The Operating curve type
setting is selected as "OvExt IDMT Crv2". The corresponding example settings for the
IDMT curve operation are given as: Pickup value = 110%, Voltage Max Cont = 100%,
Time multiplier = 4, Maximum trip time = 1000 s, Minimum trip time = 1 s and Cooling
time = 200 s.
615 series ANSI 653

Technical Manual
GUID-433F1AF8-DA0B-4FEA-A281-1872487F3B97 V1 EN
Figure 325: Tripping curve of "OvExt IDMT Crv2" based on the settings specified in
example 3. The two dots marked on the curve are referred to in the text.
If the excitation level stays at 1.26, the tripping occurs after 26.364 s as per the marked dot
in Figure 325. For the excitation level of 1.4, the second dot in Figure 325, the curve
"OvExt IDMT Crv2" gives 0.2636 s as per Equation, but the Minimum trip time setting
limits the trip time to 1.0 s.
The Maximum trip time setting limits the trip time to 1000 s if the
excitation level stays between 1.1 and 1.16.
In general, however, the excitation level seldom remains constant.

Therefore, the exact trip times in any inverse time mode are difficult to
predict.
Example 4
In this case, the function operation is according to IDMT. The Operating curve type
setting is selected as "OvExt IDMT Crv4". The corresponding example settings for the
654 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
IDMT curve operation are given as: Pickup value = 110%, Voltage Max Cont = 100%,
Time multiplier = 5, Maximum trip time = 3600 s, Constant delay = 0.8 s and Cooling time
= 100 s.
GUID-78B05F4B-3434-4DD5-89F6-17F099444C04 V1 EN
Figure 326: Tripping curve of “OvExt IDMT Crv4” based on the specified settings. The
two dots marked on the curve are referred to in the text.
If the excitation level stays at 1.25, the tripping occurs after 15.20 s. At the excitation level
of 1.42, the time to tripping would be 5.90 s as per the two dots in Figure 326. In this case,
the setting Maximum trip time 3600 s does not limit the maximum trip time because the
trip time at Pickup value = 110% (1.1 pu) is approximately 75 s.
4.5.6.7 Signals
I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive-phase sequence current
615 series ANSI 655

Technical Manual

V_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage A or phase-to-phase voltage
AB
V_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage B or phase-to-phase voltage
BC
V_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage C or phase-to-phase voltage
CA
V1 SIGNAL 0 Positive-phase sequence voltage
F SIGNAL 0 Measured frequency

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Signal for blocking reconnection of an overheated
machine
COOL_ACTIVE BOOLEAN Signal to indicate machine is in cooling process
4.5.6.8 Settings
Pickup value 100...200 % 1 100 Over excitation pickup value
15=IEC DT
17=OvExt IDMT
Crv1
18=OvExt IDMT
Crv2
19=OvExt IDMT
Crv3
20=OvExt IDMT
Crv4
Time multiplier 0.1...100.0 0.1 3.0 Time multiplier for Overexcitation IDMT curves
Trip delay time 200...200000 ms 10 500 Trip delay time in definite- time mode
656 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Mode Disable/Enable
5=disable
Cooling time 5...10000 s 1 600 Time required to cool the machine
Constant delay 100...120000 ms 10 800 Parameter constant delay
Maximum trip time 500000...10000000 ms 10 1000000 Maximum trip time for IDMT curves
Voltage selection 1=phase-to-earth 3=pos sequence Selection of phase / phase-to-phase / pos
2=phase-to-phase sequence voltages
3=pos sequence
Phase selection 1=A or AB 1=A or AB Parameter for phase selection
2=B or BC
3=C or CA
Leakage React 0.0...50.0 % 0.1 0.0 Leakage reactance of the machine
Voltage Max Cont 80...160 % 1 110 Maximum allowed continuous operating
voltage ratio

Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 10 100 Resetting time of the trip time counter in DT
mode

(in %)
block restart
VOLTPERHZ FLOAT32 0.00...10.00 pu Excitation level, i.e U/f ratio or
Volts/Hertz
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
615 series ANSI 657

Technical Manual

current: fn ±2 Hz
Pickup time 1)2) Frequency change:

Typically 200 ms
Voltage change:
Typically 40 ms
Trip time accuracy in definite-time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Trip time accuracy in inverse-time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±50 ms

4.5.7 Low-voltage ride-through protection 27RT
Low-voltage ride-through protection LVRTPTUV U<RT 27RT

27RT
V_A_AB TRIP
V_B_BC PICKUP
V_C_CA
V1
BLOCK
GUID-64E07123-ED63-4775-893C-F3575ED1F7F6 V1 EN
The low-voltage ride-through protection function 27RT is principally a three-phase

undervoltage protection. It differs from the traditional three-phase undervoltage
658 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
protection 27 by allowing the grid operators to define its own Low-Voltage Ride-Through
(LVRT) curve for generators, as defined by local or national grid codes. The LVRT curve
can be defined accurately according to the requirements by setting the appropriate time-
voltage coordinates.
The function contains a blocking functionality. 27RT can be blocked with the BLOCK
input. Blocking resets timers and outputs.
The operation of 27RT is described using a module diagram. All modules in the diagram
are explained in the next sections.
V_A_AB
LVRT TRIP
V_B_BC
curve
V_C_CA
monitoring PICKUP
V1
BLOCK
GUID-4B9C3BE5-5E7E-4877-8AE7-05C142CDD6CF V1 EN
LVRT curve monitoring

LVRT curve monitoring starts with detection of undervoltage. Undervoltage detection
depends on Voltage selection setting. All selectable options are based on fundamental
frequency components.
Function uses phase-to-ground voltages when Voltage selection is set to “Highest Ph-to-
E” or “Lowest Ph-to-E” and phase-to-phase voltages when Voltage selection is set to
“Highest Ph-to-Ph” or “Lowest Ph-to-Ph”.
When the Voltage selection setting is set to “Highest Ph-to-E”, “Lowest Ph-to-E”,
“Highest Ph-to-Ph” or “Lowest Ph-to-Ph”, the measured three-phase voltages are
compared phase-wise to the set Voltage pickup value. If the measured value is lower than
the set Voltage pickup value setting in number of phases equal to that set Num of pickup
phases, the PICKUP output is activated.
The setting options available for Num of pickup phases are “Exactly 1 of 3”, "Exactly 2 of
3", and “Exactly 3 of 3”, which are different from conventional setting options available
in other functions. For example, Num of pickup phases is set to "Exactly 2 of 3", any two
voltages should drop below Voltage pickup value within one cycle network for the
615 series ANSI 659

Technical Manual
PICKUP output to activate. Even if more than two voltages drop below Voltage pickup
value, PICKUP output is not activated.
When the Voltage selection setting is “Positive Seq”, the positive-sequence component is
compared with the set Voltage pickup value. If it is lower than the set Voltage pickup
value, the PICKUP output is activated.
Once PICKUP is activated, the function monitors the behavior of the voltage defined by
Voltage selection setting with the defined LVRT curve. When defined voltage enters the
operating area, the TRIP output is activated instantaneously. The pulse length of TRIP is
fixed to 100 ms. PICKUP also deactivates along with TRIP.
If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, voltage restores above Voltage pickup value, before
TRIP is activated, the function does not reset until maximum recovery time under
consideration has elapsed, that is, PICKUP output remains active.
LVRT curve is defined using time-voltage settings coordinates. The settings available are
Recovery time 1…Recovery time 10 and Voltage level 1…Voltage level 10. The number
of coordinates required to define a LVRT curve is set by Active coordinate settings.
When Recovery time 1 is set to non-zero value, it results into horizontal

characteristics from point of fault till Recovery time 1.
Two examples of LVRT curve are defined in Figure 329 and Figure 330 with
corresponding settings in Table 565.
It is necessary to set the coordinate points correctly in order to avoid

maloperation. For example, setting for Recovery time 2 should be greater
than Recovery time 1. Recovery time 1…Recovery time 10 are the
respective time setting from the point of fault.
660 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Voltage
xVn
Vn
Voltage pickup value = 0.9Vn
0.8Vn (Recovery time 3,
(Recovery time 2, Voltage level 3)
Voltage level 2)
PICKUP
TRIP
(Recovery time 1,
Voltage level 1 = 0.2Vn Voltage level 1)
0 500 1500 10000

Point of
Time in ms
fault
GUID-6C33D2DC-E569-4008-B240-8A4BCD096603 V1 EN
Figure 329: Low voltage ride through example curve A
Voltage
xVn
Vn
Voltage pickup value = 0.9Vn
(Recovery time 5,
(Recovery time 4,
PICKUP (Recovery time 3,
Voltage level 4)
Voltage level 5)
Voltage level 3)
0.7Vn
(Recovery time 2,
Voltage level 2)
TRIP
(Recovery time 1,
Voltage level 1)
Voltage level 1 = 0.0Vn
0 150 700 1500 3000
Point of Time in ms
fault
GUID-234F7C66-9EC0-42B3-8B8E-E370B4305DB1 V1 EN
Figure 330: Low voltage ride through example curve B
Table 565: Settings for example A and B

Settings Curve A Curve B
Voltage start value 0.9 · Un 0.9 · Un
Active coordinates 3 5
Voltage level 1 0.2 · Un 0 · Un
Recovery time 1 500 ms 150 ms
Voltage level 2 0.8 · Un 0.7 · Un
Voltage level 3 0.9 · Un 0.7 · Un
615 series ANSI 661

Technical Manual
Settings Curve A Curve B

Voltage level 4 - 0.9 · Un
Recovery time 4 - 1500 ms
Voltage level 5 - 0.9 · Un
Recovery time 5 - 3000 ms
It is necessary that the last active Voltage level X setting is set greater than
or equal to Voltage pickup value. Settings are not accepted if the last active
Voltage level X setting is not set greater than or equal to Voltage pickup
value.
Figure 331 describes an example of operation of 27RT protection function set to operate
with Num of pickup phases set to “Exactly 2 of 3” and Voltage selection as “Lowest Ph-
to-Ph” voltage.
Num of start phases = Exactly 2 of 3

Voltage Voltage selection = Lowest Ph-to-Ph
xVn
Vn V_BC
V_AB
PICKUP
V_CA TRIP
Time in ms
PICKUP
TRIP
100ms
GUID-532E4687-DF59-4DA7-9F93-6186FBA14C64 V1 EN
Figure 331: Typical example of operation of 27RT function
Activation of the BLOCK input resets the timers and deactivates the function outputs.
662 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.5.7.5 Application
Distributed generation, mainly wind and solar farms, are rapidly increasing due to
liberalized markets (deregulation) and the global trend to use more renewable sources of
energy. These farms are directly connected to grids, and due to their large size may
influence the behavior of the grid. These farms are now required to comply with stringent
grid connection requirement, which was previously mandatory only for high capacity
power plants. These requirements include helping grid in maintaining system stability,
reactive power support, transient recovery and voltage-frequency regulation. These
requirements make it necessary for the wind and solar farms to remain in operation in the
event of network disturbances.
Many grid codes now demand that the distributed generation connected to HV grids must
withstand voltage dips to a certain percentage of nominal voltage (down to 0% in some
cases) and for a specific duration. Such requirements are known as Low-Voltage Ride-
Through (LVRT) or Fault-Ride-Through (FRT) and are described by a voltage versus
time characteristics.
Typical LVRT behavior of a distributed generation can be divided into three areas
according to the variation in voltage over time.
• At the time of system faults, the magnitude of the voltage may dip to Voltage level 1
for time defined by Recovery time 1. The generating unit has to remain connected to
the network during such condition. This boundary defines area A.
• Area B defines the linear growth recovery voltage level from Voltage level 1 to
Voltage level 2 in a time period from Recovery time 1 to Recovery time 2.
• Area C is the zone where voltage stabilizes. Voltage level 3 is defined to same value as
Voltage level 2. The system should remain above this voltage in a time period from
Recovery time 2 to Recovery time 3.
The system restores to a normal state and function resets when the voltage is equal or
greater than Voltage level 4 after Recovery time 4 time period.
When the voltage at the point of common coupling is above the LVRT curve, the
generation unit must remain connected, and must be disconnected only if the voltage takes
values below the curve.
615 series ANSI 663

Technical Manual
Voltage
xVn
Vn
(Recovery time 4,
Voltage level 4)
= Voltage level 4 C
Voltage level 2
B
= Voltage level 3 (Recovery time 2, (Recovery time 3,
Voltage level 2) Voltage level 3)
System back to
TRIP normal and
A 27RT resets
(Recovery time 1,
Voltage level 1 Voltage level 1)
0 Recovery Recovery Recovery time 3

Point of time 1 time 2 = Recovery time 4 Time in ms
fault
GUID-56F18EC3-0D24-431A-AFAC-13A85BCBDFF5 V1 EN
Figure 332: A typical required ride-through voltage capability of generating unit
The LVRT requirement depends on the power system characteristics and the protection
employed, varying significantly from each other. The requirement also differs from
country to country. 27RT function incorporates four types of LVRT curves which satisfy
most of the power system needs. Grid operators can fine-tune the LVRT curve by setting
the parameters as per their requirement, making the use simpler in comparison with
different conventional undervoltage protection with different operate time setting and
logics.
4.5.7.6 Signals
Table 566: 27RT Input signals
AB
V_A_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage B or phase-to-phase voltage
BC
V_A_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage C or phase-to-phase voltage
CA
Table 567: 27RT Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
664 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.5.7.7 Settings
Table 568: 27RT Group settings (Basic)
Voltage pickup value 0.05...1.20 xUn 0.01 0.90 Voltage value below which function pickups
Table 569: 27RT Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Num of pickup phases 4=Exactly 1 of 3 4=Exactly 1 of 3 Number of faulty phases
5=Exactly 2 of 3
6=Exactly 3 of 3
Voltage selection 1=Highest Ph-to-E 4=Lowest Ph-to- Parameter to select voltage for curve
2=Lowest Ph-to-E Ph monitoring
3=Highest Ph-to-
Ph
4=Lowest Ph-to-Ph
5=Positive Seq
Active coordinates 1...10 1 3 Coordinates used for defining LVRT curve
Voltage level 1 0.00...1.20 xUn 0.01 0.20 1st voltage coordinate for defining LVRT curve
Voltage level 2 0.00...1.20 xUn 0.01 0.80 2nd voltage coordinate for defining LVRT curve
Voltage level 3 0.00...1.20 xUn 0.01 0.90 3rd voltage coordinate for defining LVRT curve
Voltage level 4 0.00...1.20 xUn 0.01 0.90 4th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT curve
Voltage level 10 0.00...1.20 xUn 0.01 0.90 10th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Recovery time 1 0...300000 ms 1 500 1st time coordinate for defining LVRT curve
Recovery time 2 0...300000 ms 1 1000 2nd time coordinate for defining LVRT curve
Recovery time 3 0...300000 ms 1 10000 3rd time coordinate for defining LVRT curve
Recovery time 4 0...300000 ms 1 10000 4th time coordinate for defining LVRT curve
615 series ANSI 665

Technical Manual

Table 570: 27RT Monitored data
27RT Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 571: 27RT Technical data
voltage:
fn ±2 Hz
Reset time Based on maximum value of Recovery time setting

1) Tested for Num of pickup phases = 1 out of 3, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
4.5.8 Voltage vector shift protection 78V
Voltage vector shift protection VVSPPAM VS 78V

78V
V_A_AB TRIP
V_B_BC INT_BLKD
V_C_CA
BLOCK
GUID-87689571-BB05-4911-B2A9-23CCC8EA665C V1 EN
666 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The voltage vector shift protection function 78V, also known as vector surge or delta phi
function, measures continuously the duration of a voltage cycle. At the instance of
islanding, the duration of measured voltage cycle becomes shorter or longer than the
previous one, that is, the measured voltage cycle shifts with time. This shifting of voltage
is measured in terms of phase angle. 78V issues an instantaneous trip when the shift in
voltage vector exceeds the set value.
The function can be blocked with BLOCK input. Blocking resets timers and outputs.
The operation of 78V can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
Pulse timer
V_A_AB Vector
V_B_BC shift TRIP
V_C_CA detector
INT_BLKD
BLOCK
GUID-7482410F-B8F0-4922-881C-F641139DBC5A V1 EN
Vector shift detector

This module measures the duration of each cycle of the voltage signal phase. The duration
of the present cycle is compared to the previous cycle, considered as reference. When the
mains is lost, a sudden change is seen in the cycle length, if loading of the generator
changes suddenly and power mismatch or unbalance (generation vs. load) in the islanded
part of the network is large enough. The cycle shifts with time, that is, the frequency may
not change but a vector shift is seen in phase as shown in Figure 335.
This step is measured in degrees for each voltage signal defined by the Phase supervision
setting. The Phase supervision setting determines which voltage is used for detecting
vector shift. The available Phase supervision options are “All” and “Pos sequence”. If the
calculated value of Δδ exceeds the set Pickup value setting for all the defined phases, the
module sends an enabling signal to start the Pulse timer.
The Voltage selection setting is used to select whether the available voltage signal is
phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage.
615 series ANSI 667

Technical Manual
The recommended and the default value for Phase supervision is “Pos
sequence”.
If the magnitude of the voltage level of any of the monitored voltage signal, defined by the
Phase supervision setting, drops below Under Volt Blk value or exceeds Over Volt Blk
value, the calculation of vector shift is disabled and the INT_BLKD output is activated.
The function is blocked and LOWAMPL_BLKD is activated, if the measured frequency

deviates ±5% from the nominal value.
The magnitude of calculated vector shift for three phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase

voltages, VSHIFT_A_AB, VSHIFT_B_BC and VSHIFT_C_CA or positive sequence
voltage V1SHIFT, which resulted in the activation of last TRIP output, are available in
the Monitored data view.
The activation of BLOCK input deactivates the INT_BLKD output.
GUID-174B2AC6-B830-4A0D-B072-80FFF3EBF159 V1 EN
Figure 335: Vector shift during Loss of Mains
Pulse timer
Once the Pulse timer is activated, it activates the TRIP output. The pulse length of TRIP
is fixed to 100 ms.
The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the TRIP binary output and resets the
timer.
4.5.8.5 Application
Use of distributed generation (DG) units is increasing due to liberalized markets

(deregulation) and the global trend to use more renewable sources of energy. They
668 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
generate power in the range of 10 kW...10 MW and most of them are interconnected to the
distribution network. They can supply power into the network as well as to the local loads.
It is not common to connect generators directly to the distribution networks and thus the
distributed generation can cause some challenges for the protection of distribution
networks. From the protection point of view, one of the most challenging issue is
islanding.
Islanding is defined as a condition in which a distributed generation unit continues to

supply power to a certain part of the distribution network when power from the larger
utility main grid is no longer available after the opening of a circuit-breaker. Islanding is
also referred as Loss of Mains (LOM) or Loss of Grid (LOG). When LOM occurs, neither
the voltage or the frequency is controlled by the utility supply. These distributed
generators are not equipped with voltage and frequency control; therefore, the voltage
magnitude of an islanded network may not be kept within the desired limits which causes
undefined voltage magnitudes during islanding situations and frequency instability.
Uncontrolled frequency represents a high risk for drives and other machines. Islanding
can occur as a consequence of a fault in the network, due to circuit breaker maloperation
or due to circuit breaker opening during maintenance. If the distributed generator
continues its operation after the utility supply is disconnected, faults do not clear under
certain conditions as the arc is charged by the distributed generators. Moreover, the
distributed generators are incompatible with the current reclosing practices. During the
reclosing sequence dead time, the generators in the network tend to drift out of
synchronism with the grid and reconnecting them without synchronizing may damage the
generators introducing high currents and voltages in the neighboring network.
To avoid these technical challenges, protection is needed to disconnect the distributed

generation once it is electrically isolated from the main grid supply. Various techniques
are used for detecting Loss of Mains. However, the present function focuses on voltage
vector shift.
The vector shift detection guarantees fast and reliable detection of mains failure in almost
all operational conditions when a distributed generation unit is running in parallel with the
mains supply, but in certain cases this may fail.
If the active and reactive power generated by the distributed generation units is nearly
balanced (for example, if the power mismatch or unbalance is less than 5...10%) with the
active and reactive power consumed by loads, a large enough voltage phase shift may not
occur which can be detected by the vector shift algorithm. This means that the vector shift
algorithm has a small non-detection-zone (NDZ) which is also dependent on the type of
generators, loads, network and pickup or trip value of the vector shift algorithm. Other
network events like capacitor switching, switching of very large loads in weak network or
connection of parallel transformer at HV/MV substation, in which the voltage magnitude
is not changed considerably (unlike in faults) can potentially cause maloperation of vector
shift algorithm, if very sensitive settings are used.
615 series ANSI 669

Technical Manual
The vector shift detection also protects synchronous generators from damaging due to
islanding or loss-of-mains. To detect loss-of-mains with vector shift function, the
generator should aim to export or import at least 5...10% of the generated power to the
grid, in order to guarantee detectable change in loading after islanding or loss-of-mains.
Multicriteria Loss of Mains

Apart from vector shift, there are other passive techniques which are used for detecting
Loss of Mains. Some of these passive techniques are over/under voltage, over/under
frequency, rate of change of frequency, voltage unbalance, rate of change of power and so
on. These passive methods use voltage and frequency to identify Loss of Mains. The
performance of these methods depends on the power mismatch between local generation
and load. The advantage of all these methods is that, they are simple and cost effective, but
each method has a non detectable zone. To overcome this problem, it is recommended to
combine different criteria for detecting Loss of Mains.
Two or more protection functions run in parallel to detect Loss of Mains. When all criteria
are fulfilled to indicate Loss of Mains, an alarm or a trip can be generated. Vector shift and
rate of change of frequency are two parallel criteria typically used for detection of Loss of
Mains.
Chosen protection criteria can be included in the Application Configuration tool to create
multicriteria loss of mains alarm or trip.
4.5.8.6 Signals
Table 572: 78V Input signals
AB
BC
CA
Table 573: 78V Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
INT_BLKD BOOLEAN Protection function internally blocked
670 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.5.8.7 Settings
Table 574: 78V Group settings (Basic)
Pickup value 2.0...30.0 deg 0.1 6.0 Pickup value for vector shift
Table 575: 78V Group settings (Advanced)

Over Volt Blk value 0.40...1.50 xUn 0.01 1.20 Voltage above which function will be internally
blocked
Under Volt Blk value 0.15...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.80 Voltage below which function will be internally
blocked
Table 576: 78V Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 577: 78V Non group settings (Advanced)

Phase supervision 7=Ph A + B + C 8=Pos sequence Monitored voltage phase
8=Pos sequence
615 series ANSI 671

Technical Manual

Table 578: 78V Monitored data
VEC_SHT_A_AB FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Vector shift for phase to
ground voltage A or phase to
phase voltage AB
VEC_SHT_B_BC FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Vector shift for phase to
ground voltage B or phase to
phase voltage BC
VEC_SHT_C_CA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Vector shift for phase to
ground voltage C or phase to
phase voltage CA
VEC_SHT_U1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Vector shift for positive
sequence voltage
78V Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 579: 78V Technical data
voltage:
fn ±1 Hz
±1°
Trip time1)2) Typically 53 ms

4.5.9 Three-phase remnant undervoltage protection 27R
Three-phase remnant undervoltage MSVPR 3U< 27R
protection
672 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
27R
V_A_AB U_LOW
V_B_BC
V_C_CA
BLOCK
GUID-A48DF502-D681-405D-ADC7-AAD9F5A1EE69 V1 EN
Systems with critical motor applications may provide backup power sources to those
motors that can be switched in when an undervoltage on the original power source is
detected. The 27R function is used, after primary power has been removed, to monitor for
an undervoltage condition over a decaying frequency before allowing re-application of
backup power.
When the power to a motor is suddenly lost, the motor terminal voltage does not
immediately fall to zero but remains as the rotating motor now acts as a generator
producing its own voltage. This remanent voltage decays as the motor slows to a stop at
a rate depending on the motor and load. Re-applying a power source while the remanent
voltage is still present can result in damage to the motor shaft and windings.
The three-phase undervoltage protection 27R operates over the range of 10...70 Hz so it
can monitor the voltage while the motor is slowing and prevent application of the backup
power until the motor voltage has decayed to a safe level. 27R includes a settable value for
the detection of undervoltage either in a single phase, two phases, or all three phases.

The operation of 27R can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
615 series ANSI 673

Technical Manual
V_A_AB Timer
Level
V_B_BC t U_LOW
detector
V_C_CA
BLOCK
GUID-CD8F77F1-6350-4C18-BA29-D8D68A5F1163 V1 EN
Level detector
The fundamental frequency component of the measured three-phase voltages over the
range of 10...70 Hz is compared phase-wise to the set Pickup value . If the measured value
is lower than the set value of the Pickup value setting, the Level detector enables the phase
selection logic module. The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing
unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly varies above or below the Pickup value
setting. After leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition has to be fulfilled again and
it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the Level detector, the phase selection logic detects the
Timer
Once activated, the Timer activates the PICKUP output. The time characteristic is definite
time only.
When the operation timer has reached the value set by Trip delay time, the TRIP output
is activated.
In a drop-off situation, that is, when a fault suddenly disappears before the trip delay is
exceeded, the reset state is activated. The reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time
value is exceeded. If the drop-off situation exceeds the set Reset delay time, the Timer is
reset and the PICKUP output is deactivated.
Blocking logic
input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay
674 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.5.9.5 Application
Systems with critical motor applications provide backup power sources to those motors
that can be switched in when an undervoltage on the original power source is detected. The
three-phase undervoltage protection 27R is used to monitor for an undervoltage condition
over a decaying frequency after original power is lost, before allowing re-application of
backup power. An independent undervoltage function, operating at nominal frequency,
can be used to detect the original loss of primary power and initiate the transfer to backup
power. 27R provides a permissive signal indicating when restoration of backup power can
be completed safely.
When the power to a motor is suddenly lost, the motor terminal voltage does not
immediately fall to zero but remains as the rotating motor now acts as a generator
producing its own voltage. This remnant voltage decays as the motor slows to a stop at a
rate depending on the motor and load. Applying the backup power source while the
remnant voltage is still present can result in damage to the motor shaft and windings.
27R operates over the range of 10...70 Hz so it can monitor the voltage while the motor is
slowing and prevent transfer of the backup power until the motor voltage has decayed to
a safe level. The undervoltage setting is typically set 20...30 percent of rated voltage.
There is also a time delay setting to ensure that the remnant voltage remains below the
undervoltage setting for the set time. 27R includes a settable value for the detection of
undervoltage in either a single phase, two phases, or in all three phases. This setting value
should always be set for three phases in the remnant undervoltage application but can be
changed if 27R is used as a standard undervoltage function.
The function contains a self-blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.
615 series ANSI 675

Technical Manual
4.5.9.6 Signals
Table 580: 27R Input signals
CA
Table 581: 27R Output signals

U_LOW BOOLEAN Low remanent voltage
4.5.9.7 Settings
Table 582: 27R Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Num of phases 1=1 out of 3 3=3 out of 3 Number of phases required for voltage
2=2 out of 3 supervision
3=3 out of 3
Phase supervision 1=A or AB 7=A&B&C or Monitored voltage phase
2=B or BC AB&BC&CA
4=C or CA
7=A&B&C or
AB&BC&CA
Table 583: 27R Non group settings (Advanced)

676 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 584: 27R Monitored data
U_AMPL_A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Remanent voltage of phase A
U_AMPL_B FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Remanent voltage of phase B
U_AMPL_C FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Remanent voltage of phase C
U_AMPL_AB FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Remanent voltage of phase to
phase AB
U_AMPL_BC FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Remanent voltage of phase to
phase BC
U_AMPL_CA FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Remanent voltage of phase to
phase CA
27R Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 585: 27R Technical data
Operation accuracy ±4% of setting or ±0.01 × Vn (70 Hz > = f > 20 Hz)
±10% of setting (20 Hz > = f ≥ 10 Hz)
Pickup time1) Minimum Typical Maximum

30 ms 75 ms 140 ms
Reset time <180 ms
Reset ratio Depends on the relative hysteresis setting
Trip time accuracy2) ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics Operates only in RMS mode

2) Trip time delays do not account for variation due to pickup delay
615 series ANSI 677

Technical Manual
4.6 Frequency protection
4.6.1 Frequency protection 81
Frequency protection FRPFRQ f>/f<,df/dt 81
81
F TRIP
dF/dt OPR_UFRQ
BLOCK OPR_OFRQ
OPR_FRG
PICKUP
ST_UFRQ
ST_OFRQ
ST_FRG
GUID-F876D957-3C2B-4E50-9E51-A969FB290FEB V1 EN
The frequency protection function 81 is used to protect network components against

abnormal frequency conditions.
The function provides basic overfrequency, underfrequency and frequency rate-of-

change protection. Additionally, it is possible to use combined criteria to achieve even
more sophisticated protection schemes for the system.

678 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-9BF0484B-1BC9-4C44-B64A-A2D6AB246916-ANSI V1 EN
Over/under frequency detection

The frequency detection module includes an overfrequency or underfrequency detection
based on the Operation mode setting.
In the “Freq>” mode, the measured frequency is compared to the set Pickup value Freq>.
If the measured value exceeds the set value of the Pickup value Freq> setting, the module
reports the exceeding of the value to the trip logic module.
In the “Freq<” mode, the measured frequency is compared to the set Pickup value Freq<.
If the measured value is lower than the set value of the Pickup value Freq< setting, the
module reports the value to the trip logic module.
df/dt detection
The frequency gradient detection module includes a detection for a positive or negative
rate-of-change (gradient) of frequency based on the set Pickup value df/dt value. The
negative rate-of-change protection is selected when the set value is negative. The positive
rate-of-change protection is selected when the set value is positive. When the frequency
gradient protection is selected and the gradient exceeds the set Pickup value df/dt value,
the module reports the exceeding of the value to the trip logic module.
The protection relay does not accept the set value "0.00" for the Pickup
value df/dt setting.
Operate logic
This module is used for combining different protection criteria based on the frequency and
the frequency gradient measurement to achieve a more sophisticated behavior of the
function. The criteria are selected with the Operation mode setting.
615 series ANSI 679

Technical Manual
Table 586: Operation modes for operation logic

Freq< The function trips independently as the underfrequency ("Freq<")
protection function. When the measured frequency is below the set
value of the Pickup value Freq< setting, the module activates the
PICKUP and PICKUP_UFRQ outputs. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by
the Trip Tm Freq setting, the TRIP and TRIP_UFRQ outputs are
activated. If the frequency restores before the module trips, the reset
timer is activated. If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay
Tm Freq setting, the operation timer resets and the PICKUP and
PICKUP_UFRQ outputs are deactivated.
Freq> The function trips independently as the overfrequency ("Freq>")

protection function. When the measured frequency exceeds the set
value of the Pickup value Freq> setting, the module activates the
PICKUP and PICKUP_OFRQ outputs. The time characteristic is
the Trip Tm Freq setting, the TRIP and TRIP_OFRQ outputs are
activated. If the frequency restores before the module trips, the reset
timer is activated. If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay
Tm Freq setting, the operation timer resets and the PICKUP and
PICKUP_OFRQ outputs are deactivated.
df/dt The function trips independently as the frequency gradient ("df/dt"),

rate-of-change, protection function. When the frequency gradient
exceeds the set value of the Pickup value df/dt setting, the module
activates the PICKUP and PICKUP_FRG outputs. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has
reached the value set by the Trip Tm df/dt setting, the TRIP and
TRIP_FRG outputs are activated. If the frequency gradient restores
before the module trips, the reset timer is activated. If the timer reaches
the value set by the Reset delay Tm df/dt setting, the operation timer
resets and the PICKUP and PICKUP_FRG outputs are deactivated.
Freq< + df/dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the protection methods.

When the measured frequency is below the set value of the Pickup
value Freq< setting, the frequency gradient protection is enabled. After
the frequency has dropped below the set value, the frequency gradient
is compared to the set value of the Pickup value df/dt setting. When the
frequency gradient exceeds the set value, the module activates the
PICKUP and PICKUP_FRG outputs. The time characteristic is
the Trip Tm df/dt setting, the TRIP and TRIP_FRG outputs are
activated. If the frequency gradient restores before the module trips, the
reset timer is activated. If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset
delay Tm df/dt setting, the operation timer resets and the PICKUP and
PICKUP_FRG outputs are deactivated. The TRIP_UFRQ output is not
active when this operation mode is used.
680 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Freq> + df/dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the protection methods.
When the measured frequency exceeds the set value of the Pickup
value Freq> setting, the frequency gradient protection is enabled. After
the frequency exceeds the set value, the frequency gradient is
compared to the set value of the Pickup value df/dt setting. When the
frequency gradient exceeds the set value, the module activates the
PICKUP and PICKUP_FRG outputs. The time characteristic is
the Trip Tm df/dt setting, the TRIP and TRIP_FRG outputs are
activated. If the frequency gradient restores before the module trips, the
reset timer is activated. If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset
delay Tm df/dt setting, the operation timer resets and the PICKUP and
PICKUP_FRG outputs are deactivated. The TRIP_OFRQ output is not
active when this operation mode is used.
Freq< OR df/dt A parallel operation between the protection methods is enabled. The
PICKUP output is activated when either of the measured values of the
protection module exceeds its set value. Detailed information about the
active module is available at the PICKUP_UFRQ and PICKUP_FRG
outputs. The shortest trip delay time from the set Trip Tm Freq or Trip
Tm df/dt is dominant regarding the TRIP output. The time characteristic
is according to DT. The characteristic that activates the TRIP output
can be seen from the TRIP_UFRQ or TRIP_FRG output. If the frequency
gradient restores before the module trips, the reset timer is activated. If
the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm df/dt setting, the
operation timer resets and the PICKUP_FRG output is deactivated. If
the frequency restores before the module trips, the reset timer is
activated. If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm Freq
setting, the operation timer resets and the PICKUP_UFRQ output is
deactivated.
Freq> OR df/dt A parallel operation between the protection methods is enabled. The
PICKUP output is activated when either of the measured values of the
protection module exceeds its set value. Detailed information about the
active module is available at the PICKUP_OFRQ and PICKUP_FRG
outputs. The shortest trip delay time from the set Trip Tm Freq or Trip
Tm df/dt is dominant regarding the TRIP output. The time characteristic
is according to DT. The characteristic that activates the TRIP output
can be seen from the TRIP_OFRQ or TRIP_FRG output. If the frequency
gradient restores before the module trips, the reset timer is activated. If
the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm df/dt setting, the
operation timer resets and the PICKUP_FRG output is deactivated. If
the frequency restores before the module trips, the reset timer is
activated. If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm Freq
setting, the operation timer resets and the PICKUP_UFRQ output is
deactivated.
The module calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the
percentage ratio of the pickup situation and set trip time DT. The pickup duration is
available according to the selected value of the Operation mode setting.
615 series ANSI 681

Technical Manual
Table 587: Pickup duration value

Operation mode in use Available pickup duration value
Freq< ST_DUR_UFRQ
Freq> ST_DUR_OFRQ
df/dt ST_DUR_FRG
The combined pickup duration PICKUP_DUR indicates the maximum percentage ratio of
the active protection modes. The values are available via the Monitored data view.
Blocking logic
4.6.1.5 Application
The frequency protection function uses the positive phase-sequence voltage to measure
the frequency reliably and accurately.
The system frequency stability is one of the main principles in the distribution and
transmission network maintenance. To protect all frequency-sensitive electrical
apparatus in the network, the departure from the allowed band for a safe operation should
be inhibited.
The overfrequency protection is applicable in all situations where high levels of the
fundamental frequency of a power system voltage must be reliably detected. The high
fundamental frequency in a power system indicates an unbalance between production and
consumption. In this case, the available generation is too large compared to the power
demanded by the load connected to the power grid. This can occur due to a sudden loss of
a significant amount of load or due to failures in the turbine governor system. If the
situation continues and escalates, the power system loses its stability.
The underfrequency is applicable in all situations where a reliable detection of a low

fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed. The low fundamental frequency
682 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
in a power system indicates that the generated power is too low to meet the demands of the
load connected to the power grid.
The underfrequency can occur as a result of the overload of generators operating in an

isolated system. It can also occur as a result of a serious fault in the power system due to
the deficit of generation when compared to the load. This can happen due to a fault in the
grid system on the transmission lines that link two parts of the system. As a result, the
system splits into two with one part having the excess load and the other part the
corresponding deficit.
The frequency gradient is applicable in all the situations where the change of the
fundamental power system voltage frequency should be detected reliably. The frequency
gradient can be used for both increasing and decreasing the frequencies. This function
provides an output signal suitable for load shedding, generator shedding, generator
boosting, set point change in sub-transmission DC systems and gas turbine startup. The
frequency gradient is often used in combination with a low frequency signal, especially in
smaller power systems where the loss of a large generator requires quick remedial actions
to secure the power system integrity. In such situations, the load shedding actions are
required at a rather high frequency level. However, in combination with a large negative
frequency gradient, the underfrequency protection can be used at a high setting.
4.6.1.6 Signals
F SIGNAL 0 Measured frequency
dF/dt SIGNAL 0 Rate of change of frequency

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
OPR_OFRQ BOOLEAN Trip signal for overfrequency
OPR_UFRQ BOOLEAN Trip signal for underfrequency
OPR_FRG BOOLEAN Trip signal for frequency gradient
ST_OFRQ BOOLEAN Pickup signal for overfrequency
ST_UFRQ BOOLEAN Pickup signal for underfrequency
ST_FRG BOOLEAN Pickup signal for frequency gradient
615 series ANSI 683

Technical Manual
4.6.1.7 Settings
Trip mode 1=Freq< 1=Freq< Frequency protection trip mode selection
2=Freq>
3=df/dt
4=Freq< + df/dt
5=Freq> + df/dt
6=Freq< OR df/dt
7=Freq> OR df/dt
Pickup value Freq> 0.9000...1.2000 xFn 0.0001 1.0500 Frequency pickup value overfrequency
Pickup value Freq< 0.8000...1.1000 xFn 0.0001 0.9500 Frequency pickup value underfrequency
Pickup value df/dt -0.2000...0.2000 xFn /s 0.0025 0.0100 Frequency pickup value rate of change
Trip Tm Freq 80...200000 ms 10 200 Trip delay time for frequency
Trip Tm df/dt 120...200000 ms 10 400 Trip delay time for frequency rate of change

5=disable

Reset delay Tm Freq 0...60000 ms 1 0 Reset delay time for frequency
Reset delay Tm df/dt 0...60000 ms 1 0 Reset delay time for rate of change

PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Pickup duration
ST_DUR_OFRQ FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Pickup duration
ST_DUR_UFRQ FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Pickup duration
ST_DUR_FRG FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Pickup duration
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
684 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Operation accuracy f>/f< ±5 mHz
df/dt ±50 mHz/s (in range |df/dt| <5 Hz/s)
±2.0% of the set value (in range 5 Hz/s < |df/dt| < 15
Hz/s)
Pickup time f>/f< <80 ms
df/dt <120 ms
Reset time <150 ms

B Step value changed from 0.001 to 0.0001 for the
Pickup value Freq> and Pickup value Freq< settings.
C df/dt setting step changed from 0.005 ×Fn /s to
0.0025 ×Fn /s.
4.7 Impedance protection
4.7.1 Out-of-step protection 78
Out of step protection OOSRPSB φ> 78
615 series ANSI 685

Technical Manual
78
V1 TRIP
I1 SWING_TRIP
I2 SWING
DISABLE OSB
BLOCK OSB_Z2
GUID-169436AD-9E20-4D6E-9EF6-9DDEAF8F5901 V1 EN
The out of step protection function 78 detects out of step conditions by monitoring
impedance.
The protection uses two impedance measurement elements known as inner and outer
blinders on mho characteristics with a timer. The function calculates the impedance. If the
measured impedance stays between inner and outer blinder for a predetermined time and
moves farther inside the inner blinder, then an out of step condition is indicated. Trip is
generated if out of step is indicated and impedance moves out of mho characteristics. The
mho characteristic can be divided into two zones so separate trips can be generated based
on the zone. Tripping can also be selected to occur when the impedance is on the way into
the zone or for when the impedance is on the way out of the zone.
TRIP
Timer
I1 Out of SWING_TRIP
Impedance t
step SWING
calculation
V1 detection OSB
OSB_Z2
I2
DISABLE
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-60F5E154-F3C3-4D1D-9B33-A413F10526E8 V1 EN
686 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Impedance calculation
This module calculates the positive-sequence impedance (Z1) using positive-sequence
voltage and current. For the module to calculate impedance it is required that the positive-
sequence current is above Min Ps Seq current setting and the negative-sequence current
is below the Max Ng Seq current setting.
The calculated positive-sequence impedance amplitude Z1_AMPL and angle

Z1_ANGLE are available in ohms and degrees, respectively, in the Monitored data view.
The calculated impedance is converted to ohms as the operating

characteristics are defined with the ohm settings.
Out of step detection

The operating characteristic is a circular offset mho on the impedance plane with two pair
of blinders. The mho characteristic is defined with the Forward reach, Reverse reach, and
Impedance angle settings. Forward reach defines the impedance from the origin to the
edge of circle on the top side. Reverse reach defines the impedance from the origin to the
edge of the circle on the bottom side. The diameter of the mho characteristics is the sum of
Forward reach and Reverse reach settings. Two sets of blinders are defined by Inner
blinder R and Outer blinder R intercepting at R-axis. The blinders are at the same angle as
the Impedance angle. The second blinder of each outer and inner pair is automatically
made symmetrical with the origin of the R-X plane.
For a correct operation, it is required that the setting for Inner blinder R is
less than the setting for Outer blinder R.
The circular mho characteristic can be further divided into two zones by setting Zone 2
enable to “Yes”. The boundary between zones is set using the setting Zone 1 reach. The
lower portion of the circle, Zone 1, is separated from the upper portion, Zone 2, by a line,
perpendicular to the blinders, located at a set percentage of the Forward reach setting
from the origin.
615 series ANSI 687

Technical Manual
GUID-3C167F6E-E0BF-4AC6-B059-7FBFE5AAD307 V1 EN
Figure 342: Operating region for out of step with double blinder
An impedance is only considered to be within the mho circle if it is also

between the inner blinders.
A third zone, Zone 3, can be enabled by setting Zone 3 enable to “Yes”. Zone 3 is defined
to include the area outside of the circular mho characteristic but inside the area that is
bound with the magnitude of the minimum positive-sequence current defined by setting
Min Ps Seq current and the rated positive-sequence voltage.Figure shows the three zones.
Settings that determine the shape of the zones should be coordinated with the settings for
any distance protection functions. The zones and their respective slip counters are
applicable only for Way out operations when the Oos operation mode setting option is
“Way out” or “Adaptive”.
688 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-94CC2B30-D7CC-4CB0-AB7C-C6261C641D37 V1 EN
Figure 343: Defined zones
The impedance is continuously monitored for detecting an out of step condition. When the
impedance enters inside from the outer blinder, the out of step detection timer is triggered.
If impedance remains between outer and inner blinder for the duration of the Swing time
setting, output SWING is activated. If the impedance enters the mho circle in zone 1, out
of step blocking (OSB) for zone 1 is detected and output OSB is activated, or if the
impedance enters the mho circle in zone 2, OSB for zone 2 is detected and output OSB_Z2
is activated if setting Zone 2 enable is set to “Yes”. Both OSB and OSB_Z2 can be
activated if the impedance passes through zone 1 and zone 2 while inside the mho circle.
The OSB or OSB_Z2 output deactivates when impedance exits and remains outside the
mho circle and the inner blinder for a duration of five cycles.
Activation of the TRIP output depends on the Oos trip mode selected. The options
available are “Way in”, “Way out”, and “Adaptive”. If the “Way in” option is selected, the
function triggers the delay timer after detecting an OSB condition. When the set Trip delay
time has elapsed, the TRIP output is activated. When using the “Way in” option, the zone-
related settings and zone slip counters are not applicable.
615 series ANSI 689

Technical Manual
If the “Way out” option is selected, after detecting an OSB condition, the function further
checks if impedance exits the outer blinder. On exiting the outer blinder, Way out timer
defined by Trip delay time setting is triggered and the respective zone slip counter is
incremented after the set Trip delay time has elapsed. If the slip counter value is equal to
the set number of slips in the respective enabled zone, the TRIP output is activated. If the
swing impedance passes through both zone 1 and zone 2, only the zone 1 slip counter is
incremented. The zone 2 slip counter is incremented if the impedance passes through the
Mho circle but only through the zone 2 portion. The zone 3 slip counter is incremented if
the impedance misses the Mho circle entirely and the setting Zone 3 enable is also set to
“Yes”. Increment of slip counter triggers also the Reset timer. All of the zone slip counters
reset after the set Reset time has elapsed and the impedance does not cross into the outer
blinder again, or on activation of the TRIP output.
When the “Way out” or "Adaptive" option is selected, the breaker open time, if known,
can be incorporated to optimize breaker trip time when a way out trip command is issued.
The ideal time for the breaker to interrupt current is when the swing angle approaches zero.
If the swing angle is δ0 when the impedance exits the outer blinder, the dynamic Trip
delay, Tod, can be set as shown in Equation 128.
1 − 2 ⋅ fslip ⋅ (Tco + BrkropenTm )

Tod =
2 ⋅ fslip
GUID-43B1AF3E-06F3-44C6-AA3F-AD0F8EF18FE6 V1 EN (Equation 128)
Tod Dynamic Trip delay
Tco The time for the impedance to travel from the center impedance line (where the swing angle is π
radians) to the outer blinder on the opposite side from which it entered.
BrkopenTm Set Breaker open time
fslip Slip frequency
The Breaker open time setting should include the time from when the relay issues a trip
command to the time when the breaker receives the command. The function uses the
Breaker open time setting to determine the trip delay time if it is not set to “0”. If the
Breaker open time is set to “0”, the function does not dynamically calculate a trip delay but
uses the fixed Trip delay time before activating the TRIP output.
The slip frequency is calculated using Equation 129.
690 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
δi − δ0
fslip =
2 ⋅ π ⋅ Toi
GUID-F94B7BCA-473F-42E1-95D5-EF5DF2DCC7C6 V1 EN (Equation 129)
Toi The time for the impedance to pass from the outer to the inner blinder.
δ0 Swing angle at the outer blinder
δI Swing angle at the inner blinder
The swing angles, δ0 and δI, are estimated from the measured impedance when crossing
the blinders. It is the difference in these quantities that is important for determining the slip
frequency.
If the “Adaptive” option is selected, after detecting an OSB condition, the function further
examines the slip frequency fslip, V dip time setting, and swing angle at the outer blinder
(δ0) to determine if the trip is asserted on the way in or on the way out. TRIP is activated
on the way in, entering the mho circle from an inner blinder, if the relationship in Equation
130 is true.
(π − δ0 )
fslip ≤
π ⋅VoltagedipTm
GUID-4FEE5C5D-B60F-42E5-AFED-0EBE46145537 V1 EN (Equation 130)
δ0 Swing angle at the outer blinder
VoltagedipTm Set V dip time
Otherwise, TRIP is activated on the way out, when the impedance exits an outer blinder
and the swing repeats for the set Max number slips count in the respective enabled zone
that the swing has passed through.
If the Swing time has elapsed but the impedance exits the inner blinder and continues
through the opposite blinders without passing through the mho circle, the SWING output
is activated. The SWING output remains activated for a time determined by the Reset time
setting unless another swing occurs before the reset time expires causing the output to
remain active for another Reset time interval. If this swing is repeated for the set Max Num
slips Zn3 count and the Zone 3 enable setting is “Yes”, the SWING_TR output is activated.
The SWING_TR output remains activated for a time determined by the Trip dropout time
setting.
615 series ANSI 691

Technical Manual
If the “Adaptive” option is selected and an OSB condition is not detected, but the
impedance enters the mho circle after remaining between the inner and outer blinders for
greater than 1.5 cycles, the function assumes a severe swing and assert the TRIP output.
The drop out delay for TRIP output can be set by Trip dropout time setting.
If the polarity of the voltage signal is opposite to the normal polarity, the correction can be
done by setting Voltage reversal to “Yes”, which rotates the impedance vector by 180
degrees.
The DISABLE input can be used to coordinate the correct operation during the start-up
situation. The function is blocked by activating the DISABLE signal. Once the DISABLE
signal is deactivated, the function remains blocked (outputs disabled) for additional time
duration as set through the setting Disable time.
Blocking logic
The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the “Freeze timers” mode, the
when blocking is activated. In the “Block all” mode, the whole function is blocked and the
timers are reset. In the “Block TRIP output” mode, the function operates normally but the
4.7.1.5 Application
Out of step protection functions detect stable power swings and out of step conditions
based on the fact that the voltage/current variation during a power swing is slow compared
to the step change during a fault. Both faults and power swings may cause the measured
impedance to enter into the operating characteristic of a distance relay element. The
apparent impedance moves from the pre-fault value to a fault value in a very short time,
a few milliseconds, during a fault condition. However, the rate of change of the impedance
is much slower during a power swing or out of step condition than during a fault depending
on the slip frequency of the out of step. The impedance measurement should not be used
by itself to distinguish between a fault condition and an out of step condition from a phase
fault. The fundamental method for discriminating between faults and power swings is to
track the rate of change of the measured impedance.
The function measures the rate of change of the impedance using two impedance
measurement elements known as blinders together with a timing device. If the measured
692 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
impedance stays between the blinders for a predetermined time, the function declares a
power swing condition and asserts an output that can be used to block the distance
protection. However, if the impedance passes the inner blinder and exits on the other side
of the mho characteristics (that is, the resistive component of impedance has opposite sign
as at the time of point of entry) an out of step tripping is issued by the function.Figure 344
gives an example of out of step detection.
A
B
-R R
-X
GUID-87E27B8C-02D6-4970-AF78-55E6ACB630F0 V1 EN
Figure 344: Example of out of step detection
The shaded region indicates a fault zone in a distance protection function. For curve A, the
impedance moves into the out of step zone and leaves slowly, indicating the occurrence of
a swing that quickly stabilizes. For curve B, the impedance moves slowly into the out of
step zone and exits the zone indicating that the network is becoming unstable. For curve
C, impedance rapidly moves into, and remains in, the fault zone indicating an actual fault
and not an out of step condition.
4.7.1.6 Signals
V1 SIGNAL 0.0 Positive phase sequence voltage
I1 SIGNAL 0.0 Positive phase sequence current
I2 SIGNAL 0.0 Negative phase sequence current
DISABLE BOOLEAN 0=False Disable input
615 series ANSI 693

Technical Manual

TRIP BOOLEAN Out of step trip on zone 1 or zone 2
SWING_TRIP BOOLEAN Out of step trip on zone 3
SWING BOOLEAN Swing condition detected
OSB BOOLEAN Out of step block for zone 1
OSB_Z2 BOOLEAN Out of step block for zone 2
4.7.1.7 Settings
Oos operate mode 1=Way in 2=Way out Operate mode for tripping when out of step
2=Way out condition is detected
3=Adaptive
Forward reach 0.00...6000.00 ohm 0.01 1000.00 Forward reach of mho circle
Reverse reach 0.00...6000.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Reverse reach of mho circle
Inner blinder R 1.00...6000.00 ohm 0.01 150.00 Resistance value if inner blinder at R axis
Outer blinder R 1.01...10000.00 ohm 0.01 400.00 Resistance value of outer blinder at R axis
Impedance angle 10.0...90.0 deg 0.1 90.0 Angle of mho circle and blinders with respect to
R axis
Swing time 20...300000 ms 10 500 Time between blinders for swing to be detected

Zone 1 reach 1...100 % 1 70 Percent of Mho forward reach indicating the
end of zone 1 and the beginning of zone 2
Max number slips 1...10 1 1 Number of pole slips before operating zone 1
Max Num slips Zn2 1...20 1 1 Number of pole slips before operating zone 2
Max Num slips Zn3 1...20 1 1 Number of pole slips before operating zone 3
Trip delay time 20...60000 ms 10 300 Delay after OOS trip detected
Trip dropout time 20...60000 ms 10 100 Time trip output remains active
V dip time 500...5000 ms 10 2000 Maximum allowable time for voltage to dip
Zone 2 enable 1=Yes 0=No Enable zone 2 feature
0=No
Zone 3 enable 1=Yes 0=No Enable zone 3 feature
0=No
694 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

5=disable

Min Ps Seq current 0.01...10.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Minimum positive sequence current for
operation
Max Ng Seq current 0.01...10.00 xIn 0.01 0.20 Maximum negative sequence current for
operation
Breaker open time 0...300 ms 1 30 Opening time of the breaker
Disable time 20...60000 ms 10 5000 Additional time function is disabled after
removal of DISABLE input
Reset time 20...60000 ms 10 5000 Time to reset OOS condition and counters
Time to reset OOS 0=No 0=No Rotate voltage signals by 180 degrees
condition and counters 1=Yes

Z1_AMPL FLOAT32 0.00...99999.00 ohm Positive sequence impedance
amplitude
Z1_ANGLE FLOAT32 -180...180 deg Positive sequence impedance
phase angle
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Impedance reach Depending on the frequency of the measured
current and voltage: fn ±2 Hz
±3.0% of the reach value or ±0.2% of Vn/(√3 × In)
Reset time ±1.0% of the set value or ±40 ms

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5...
615 series ANSI 695

Technical Manual
4.7.2 Three-phase underexcitation protection 40
Three-phase underexcitation protection UEXPDIS X< 40
40
I_A TRIP
I_B PICKUP
I_C
I1
V_A_AB
V_B_BC
V_C_CA
V1
EXT_LOS_DET
BLOCK
GUID-AC8833E9-5E4E-4783-9A78-64350BD0ADD8 V1 EN
The three-phase underexcitation protection function 40 is used to protect the synchronous

machine against the underexcitation or loss of excitation condition.
The protection is based on the offset-mho circular characteristics on the impedance plane.
The function calculates the apparent impedance from the machine terminal voltages and
currents. If the impedance vector enters the offset-mho circle, the function gives the trip
signal after a set definite time. The operating time characteristics are according to definite
time (DT).
696 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
I_A
I_B
I3P I_C
I1 Timer
U_A Impedance TRIP
U_B Impedance t
reach
U_C calculation
U_AB check PICKUP
U3P U_BC
U_CA
U1
External
EXT_LOS_DET loss
detection
BLOCK
BLK_TRIP
BLK_PICKUP
FR_TIMER
GUID-134FE243-96E9-4B5D-BEB2-75DB0AEE5FC5 V1 EN
This module calculates the apparent impedance based on the selected voltages and
currents. The Measurement mode and Phase Sel for Z Clc settings determine which
voltages and currents are to be used. If the Measurement mode is set to "1Phase-earth" or
"1Phase-phase", the Phase Sel for Z Clc setting is needed for determining which phase or
phase-phase voltages ("A or AB", "B or BC" and "C or CA") and currents should be used
for calculating the impedance.
Table 604: Voltages and currents used in impedance calculation
Measurement mode Phase Sel for Z Clc Voltages and currents
1Phase-earth A or AB V_A, I_A
1Phase-earth B or BC V_B, I_B
1Phase-earth C or CA V_C, I_C
1Phase-phase A or AB V_AB, I_A, I_B
1Phase-phase B or BC V_BC, I_B, I_C
1Phase-phase C or CA V_CA, I_C, I_A
3Phase-earth N/A V_A, V_B, V_C, I_A, I_B, I_C
3Phase-phase N/A V_AB, V_BC, V_CA, I_A, I_B, I_C
Pos seqn N/A { V_A,V_B,V_C } or { V_AB,V_BC,V_CA } and I_A,
I_B, I_C
If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the protection
relay, the positive-sequence alternative is recommended.
615 series ANSI 697

Technical Manual
If the polarity of the voltage signals is opposite to the normal polarity, the correction can
be done by setting Voltage reversal to "Yes", which rotates the impedance vector by 180
degrees.
If the magnitude of the voltage is less than 0.05 · VN, the calculated impedance is not
reliable and the impedance calculation is disabled. VN is the rated phase-to-phase voltage.
The calculated impedance magnitudes and angles are available in the Monitored data
view. The impedance angles are provided between -180...180 degrees.
The calculated apparent impedance is converted to pu impedance as the

operating characteristics are defined with the pu settings.
Impedance reach check

The operating characteristic is a circular offset mho on the impedance plane. The
operating characteristics are defined with the Offset, Diameter and Displacement settings.
If the calculated impedance value enters the circle in the impedance plane, the module
sends an enabling signal to start the Timer.
698 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
X (Reactance) p.u.
-R R (Resistance) p.u.
Offset
Diameter Displacement
Operating Region
-X
GUID-A023B281-CA68-4A0C-8E90-9075DF588504 V2 EN
Figure 347: Operating region of the impedance mho circle
A fault in Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) or in the excitation system may cause a
total loss of excitation. A short circuit on the slip rings reduces the excitation voltage to
zero. This causes a gradual reduction of the excitation current and eventually a loss of
excitation. An open circuit in the field circuit also causes a loss of excitation. These are
typical examples which cause underexcitation in synchronous machines. This module
detects the underexcitation condition for the above cases when the calculated impedance
enters the operating characteristics.
External loss detection

The module checks the status information of the excitation system. It is activated when the
External Los Det Ena setting is set to "Enable". The total loss of excitation current or a
failure in the excitation system is indicated by connecting the external binary signal to the
EXT_LOS_DET input. The Timer is enabled immediately when the EXT_LOS_DET
input is activated.
615 series ANSI 699

Technical Manual
Timer
Once activated, the Timer activates the PICKUP output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the duration of the underexcitation exceeds the set definite Trip
delay time, the TRIP output is activated. If the impedance locus moves out of the offset-
mho operating characteristics before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If
the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operating timer resets and the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time (DT). The value is
available in the Monitored data view.
Blocking logic
operate timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function
is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block TRIP output" mode, the function operates
normally but the TRIP output is not activated.
4.7.2.5 Application
There are limits for the underexcitation of a synchronous machine. A reduction of the
excitation current weakens the coupling between the rotor and the external power system.
The machine may lose the synchronism and start to operate like an induction machine,
which increases the consumption of the reactive power. Even if the machine does not lose
synchronism, it is not recommended to operate in this state. The underexcitation causes
excessive heating in the end region of the stator winding. This can damage the insulation
of the stator winding and even the iron core.
The underexcitation also causes the generator to operate in the asynchronous mode. This
increases the rotor speed, which causes heating in the rotor iron and damps the windings.
A high intake of the reactive power from the network during underexcitation causes
problems in the network, for example voltage dip, stability and power swings. Power
swings stress the prime mover, causing for example turbine blade cavitation and
mechanical stress in the gearbox.
The capability curve of a synchronous generator describes the underexcitation capability

of the machine. An excessive capacitive load on the synchronous machine causes it to
700 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
drop out-of-step. The reason is the steady-state stability limit as defined by the load angle
being 90°, which can only be reached when the unit is underexcited.
Q (Reactive power) p.u.
Motor Generator
A
0.9
0.6 B
Over-Excitation
37 o
P (Active power) p.u.
0.0 18 o 0.8 1.0
Under-Excitation Xe=0.2
0.3
C
E H F
0.5
Xs=0.0
D Where,
AB= Field current limit
BC= Stator current limit
CD= End region heating limit of stator. Due to leakage flux
BH= Possible active power limit due to turbine output power limitation
EF= Steady -state limit without AVR
GUID-FD5EDD69-0D03-4A97-A1AB-46C755F531A5 V2 EN
Figure 348: Capability curve of a synchronous generator
40 protects the synchronous machines against an unstable operation due to loss of

excitation. A partial or total loss of excitation causes a reactive power intake from the
network to the machine, and the reactance of the system viewed from the machine
terminals turns negative. This kind of drop-of-reactance condition can be detected by
measuring the impedance of the system.
The operating characteristic is an offset-mho circle in the impedance plane, and the circle
is parameterized with the Offset, Diameter and Displacement setting values.
615 series ANSI 701

Technical Manual
Table 605: Parameters of the circle

Setting values Description
Offset Distance of the top of the circle from the R-axis. This is usually set equal to - xd’/2,
where xd’ is the transient reactance of the machine. The sign of the setting value
determines the top of the circle regarding the R-axis. If the sign is negative, the circle
lies below the R-axis.
Diameter Normally set equal to the machine's synchronous reactance xd, which determines the
size of the impedance circle.
Displacement Displacement of the center of the circle from the reactance axis or the R-coordinate of
the center. The setting can be used to adjust the sensitivity of the underexcitation
protection. If the sign of the setting is positive, the circle is shifted to the right, that is,
closer to the normal operating point. Respectively, if the sign is negative, the circle is
shifted to the left and thus moves away from the normal operating point.
The setting parameters of the off-set mho circle are to be given in pu values. The base
impedance (ZN) in ohms is:
VN2
ZN =
SN
GUID-FBC519FF-D196-40CE-BF5C-9826D44E2569 V1 EN (Equation 131)
VN rated (phase-to-phase) voltage in kV
SN rated power of the protected machine in MVA
The corresponding calculation to convert ohms to pu values is:

X ohm
X pu =
ZN
GUID-8F02750E-98A4-4AD9-82C6-0632CCE84F01 V1 EN (Equation 132)
Xpu pu value
Xohm reactance in ohms
ZN base impedance
Example of impedance locus in underexcitation

In an example of a typical impedance locus, once the impedance locus enters the relay
operation characteristics, the relay operates after a settable definite time.
702 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
X (Reactance)
-R R (Resistance)
a b
Relay operation
characteristics
a) Z locus in under excitation for heavily loaded machine

b) Z locus in under excitation for lightly loaded machine
-X c) Z locus for a fault in the network
GUID-C7940DC8-04A8-4FED-B089-DAA9B21D50DB V2 EN
Figure 349: Typical impedance locus in underexcitation: a) heavy load b) light load c)
fault in the network
4.7.2.6 Signals

AB
BC
CA
EXT_LOS_DET BOOLEAN 0=False External signal for excitation loss detection
615 series ANSI 703

Technical Manual

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.7.2.7 Settings
Diameter 1...6000 %Zn 1 200 Diameter of the Mho diagram
Offset -1000...1000 %Zn 1 -10 Offset of top of the impedance circle from the
R-axis
Displacement -1000...1000 %Zn 1 0 Displacement of impedance circle centre from
the X-axis

5=disable
External Los Det Ena 0=Disable 1=Enable Enable external excitation loss detection
1=Enable
Voltage reversal 0=No 0=No Rotate voltage signals by 180 degrees
1=Yes
Impedance Meas mode 1=1Phase-to-earth 5=Pos sequence Select voltage and currents for impedance
2=1Phase-to- calculation
phase
3=3Phase-to-earth
4=3Phase-to-
phase
5=Pos sequence
Phase Sel for Z Clc 1=A or AB 1=A or AB Voltage phase selection
2=B or BC
3=C or CA

704 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

(in %)
Z_AMPL_A FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 xZn Impedance amplitude phase A
Z_ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Impedance angle phase A
Z_AMPL_B FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 xZn Impedance amplitude phase B
Z_ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Impedance angle phase B
Z_AMPL_C FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 xZn Impedance amplitude phase
C
Z_ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Impedance angle phase C
Z_AMPL_AB FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 xZn Phase-to-phase A-B
impedance amplitude
Z_ANGLE_AB FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Phase-to-phase A-B
impedance phase angle
Z_AMPL_BC FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 xZn Phase-to-phase B-C
impedance amplitude
Z_ANGLE_BC FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Phase-to-phase B-C
Z_AMPL_CA FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 xZn Phase-to-phase C-A
impedance amplitude
Z_ANGLE_CA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Phase-to-phase C-A
Z1_AMPL FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 xZn Positive sequence impedance
amplitude
Z1_ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Positive sequence impedance
phase angle
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
615 series ANSI 705

Technical Manual

f = fn ± 2 Hz
±3.0% of the set value or ±0.2% Zb

Retardation time Total retardation time when the impedance returns
from the operating circle <40 ms
1) fn= 50Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

4.7.3 Three-phase underimpedance protection 21G
Three-phase underimpedance UZPDIS Z<G 21G
protection
21G
I_A TRIP
I_B PICKUP
I_C
I1
V_A_AB
V_B_BC
V_C_CA
V1
BLOCK
GUID-4C23B726-072B-4A11-BC6B-58D6B127480E V1 EN
706 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The three-phase underimpedance protection 21G is generally applied as a backup

protection for generators and transformers against short circuit faults.
The protection is based on the origin-centric circular characteristics on the impedance

plane. The function calculates the impedance value from the voltage and current phasors.
If the impedance vector enters the origin-centric circle, the function produces the tripping
signal after a set delay. The operating time characteristics are according to definite time
(DT).
reset timer or the function itself, if desired.
The operation of 21G can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
I_A
I_B
Timer TRIP
I_C
Under t
Impedance impedance
calculation PICKUP
V_A_AB detection
V_B_BC
V_C_CA
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-572750B7-5217-44AE-BEA1-380D25531343 V1 EN
This module calculates the impedance based on the selected voltages and currents. The
Impedance Meas mode and Phase Sel for Z Clc settings determine which voltages and
currents are to be used. If Impedance Meas mode is set to "1Phase-phase", the Phase Sel
for Z Clc setting is needed for determining which phase-phase voltages ("AB", "BC" and
"CA") and currents should be used for calculating the impedance.
615 series ANSI 707

Technical Manual
Table 613: Voltages and currents used in impedance calculation

Impedance Meas mode Phase Sel for Z Clc Voltages and currents used in
impedance calculation1)
1Phase-phase AB
V _ AB
ZAB =
I _ A −I _B
1Phase-phase BC
V _ BC
ZBC =
I _ B − I _C
1Phase-phase CA
V _ CA
ZCA =
I _C − I _ A
3Phase-phase N/A
V _ AB
ZAB =
I _ A −I _B
V _ BC
ZBC =
I _ B − I _C
V _ CA
ZCA =
I _C − I _ A
1) Voltages and currents in the calculations are given in volts and amps.
If all three phase or phase-phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the
protection relay, the "3Phase-phase" mode is recommended.
The current measurement of the function is based on two alternative measurement modes,
"DFT" and "Peak-To-Peak". The measurement mode is selected using the Measurement
mode setting.
If the current magnitude is below 0.02 · IN, where IN is the nominal phase current, the
impedance value is not evaluated and the maximum impedance value (99.999 pu) is
shown in the Monitored data view.
The calculated impedances are converted to a pu impedance as the

operating characteristics are defined using the Polar reach setting in %Zb.
The calculated phase-phase impedance amplitudes ZAB_AMPL, ZBC_AMPL and

ZCA_AMPL are available as pu values in the Monitored data view.
708 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Underimpedance detection
The operating characteristic is an origin-centric circle on the impedance plane. The origin-
centric circular characteristic is defined using the Polar reach setting. If the calculated
impedance value enters the circle in the impedance plane, the module sends an enabling
signal to start the Timer.
GUID-87BF61EC-937C-4C2C-928E-984CA26D23DE V1 EN
Figure 352: Origin-centric circular operating characteristics
More than one impedance value is available when Impedance Meas mode
is set to "3Phase-phase", and the function considers the lowest impedance
value for picking up and tripping.
Timer
Once activated, the Timer activates PICKUP output. The time characteristic is according
to DT. When the duration of the underimpedance condition exceeds the set definite Trip
delay time, the TRIP output is activated. If the impedance locus moves out of circular
operating characteristics before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the
615 series ANSI 709

Technical Manual
reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operating timer resets and the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time (DT). The value is
Blocking logic
4.7.3.5 Application
The three-phase underimpedance protection is used as a backup protection against short

circuit faults at the generator terminals or on the high-voltage side of a step-up
transformer. This function can be used either instead of the definite time voltage-
dependent overcurrent protection or to obtain a limited protection zone and the optimum
operating time instead of the non-directional overcurrent protection.
Comparison between overcurrent and underimpedance protection

Phase current for three-phase short circuit is shown in Figure 353. In this case, with an
ordinary over current relay having the current setting as 1.2 · In, the time setting should be
less than 0.2 seconds, since with a higher value the short-circuit current decays below the
set value and the relay drops off. The current setting can also be reduced to 1.1 · In,
although this provides no substantial rise in the time setting. In some situations, either of
the above current settings is appropriate, but if longer tripping times are required to
maintain the time selectivity, the underimpedance protection is needed.
710 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-E7269B2F-83FE-4385-8374-8F8C06D4CC0B V1 EN
Figure 353: Short circuit current waveform, fault occurs at time 0 seconds (Current
setting limit is multiplied by the square root of 2)
The phase voltage in a three-phase short circuit when a fault occurs at time = 0 s is shown
in Figure 354. The voltage drop caused by a three-phase fault provides more time for
determining the fault by means of an underimpedance protection.
615 series ANSI 711

Technical Manual
V/Vn
GUID-FE70BAC9-44A6-4390-9A96-6C0D0CF297CC V1 EN
Figure 354: Short-circuit voltage waveform, fault occurs at time 0 seconds
In a typical impedance trajectory during a short circuit, the fault impedance remains inside
the impedance circle for a longer time, in which case the underimpedance protection
provides longer tripping delay times to maintain the time selectivity.
712 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-3AE8053A-348E-4651-A1E5-F384230AF1CF V1 EN
Figure 355: Typical impedance trajectory during a short circuit
Underimpedance protection for transformers

The underimpedance function is used as a short circuit protection instead of the
overcurrent protection. It is also used as a backup to the differential protection of
transformers.
The voltage and current phasors are measured with the VTs and CTs connected on the HV
side of the transformer.
The phase and current shifts due to transformer D/Y connections and other
factors complicate the settings for the faults in the secondary winding (as
seen from the protection relay), and detailed calculations are necessary for
a good coverage.
The Polar reach setting is set to a value equal to 150 percent of the transformer short
circuit impedance. The setting also provides a backup protection for the busbar and feeder
faults on the HV side.
615 series ANSI 713

Technical Manual
Underimpedance protection for generators

The underimpedance protection is set to protect the zone between the generator windings
and the generator side windings of the step-up transformer. The function mainly protects
the generator bus, the low-voltage part of the step-up transformer and a part of the stator
winding against any short circuits.
The voltages should be measured from the generator terminals and the phase currents
from the neutral point of the generator.
GUID-E1B90616-E865-49E2-9366-616B0112CA85 V1 EN
Figure 356: Current and voltage signals for underimpedance protection
To prevent malfunctioning of the underimpedance protection in case of nearby faults, the

Polar reach setting is set to a value equal to 70 percent of the step-up transformer short
circuit impedance.
In directly connected machines where the impedance towards the network is limited only
by the lines or bus bars, it must be secured that the function does not cause any selectivity
problems. In such cases, it is recommended to use the voltage-dependent overcurrent
protection instead of the underimpedance protection.
714 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Function blocking guidelines

The operation of the underimpedance protection must be restrained if the voltage in one
or more phases suddenly drops close to zero without any significant change in the current
observed at the same time. This situation is considered as a fuse failure or a miniature
circuit breaker operation in the voltage transformer secondary circuit. The voltage drop
could cause an unwanted operation of the function block since the calculated impedance
could fall below the set operating limit even if there is no actual fault in the primary
system.
The blocking operation is provided by an external function block, the fuse failure
supervision 60, whose output is connected to the BLOCK input of 21G.
4.7.3.6 Signals
Table 614: 21G Input signals

AB
BC
CA
Table 615: 21G Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.7.3.7 Settings
Table 616: 21G Group settings (Basic)
Percentage reach 1...6000 %Zn 1 7 Radius of the origin centric circle
615 series ANSI 715

Technical Manual
Table 617: 21G Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Measurement mode 2=DFT 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
3=Peak-to-Peak
Impedance Meas mode 2=1Phase-to- 4=3Phase-to- Select voltage and current signals for
phase phase impedance calculation
4=3Phase-to-
phase
Phase Sel for Z Clc 1=AB 1=AB Voltage phase selection
2=BC
3=CA
Table 618: 21G Non group settings (Advanced)


Table 619: 21G Monitored data
(in %)
Z_AMPL_AB FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 xZn Phase-to-phase A-B
impedance amplitude
Z_AMPL_BC FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 xZn Phase-to-phase B-C
impedance amplitude
Z_AMPL_CA FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 xZn Phase-to-phase C-A
impedance amplitude
21G Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
716 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 620: 21G Technical data
current and voltage: fn ±2 Hz
±3.0% of the set value or ±0.2 %Zb


4.8 Power protection
4.8.1 Underpower protection 32U
Underpower protection DUPPDPR P< 32U
32U
I_A TRIP
I_B PICKUP
I_C
I1
V_A
V_B
V_C
V1
DISABLE
BLOCK
GUID-75685A44-A694-429C-BF8D-8F8174A6A775 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 717

Technical Manual
The underpower protection function 32U is used for protecting generators and prime
movers against the effects of very low power outputs or reverse power condition.
The function operates when the measured active power falls below the set value. The
operating characteristics are according to definite time DT.
The operation of 32U can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
Timer
I_A TRIP
Directional Level t
I_B
calculation detector
I_C PICKUP
I1 Power
U_A_AB calculation
U_B_BC
U_C_CA
U1
DISABLE
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-C92BE6B7-2B96-404B-8C42-0FD29135B44C V1 EN
Power calculation
This module calculates the apparent power based on the selected voltage and current
measurements as described in Table 621. The Measurement mode setting determines
which voltage and current measurements are to be used.
It is also possible to use positive-sequence components for calculating apparent power,

which makes the determination of power insensitive to the possible asymmetry in currents
or voltages and corresponds to the real load of the prime mover of the generator.
718 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 621: Power calculation

Measurement mode setting Power calculation
PhsA, PhsB, PhsC
S = V a ⋅ Ia* + V b + Ib* + V c ⋅ Ic*
P = Re S ( )
Arone
S = V ab ⋅ Ia* − V bc ⋅ Ic*
P = Re S ( )
Pos Seq
S = 3 ⋅ V 1 ⋅ I1*
P = Re S ( )
PhsAB
S = 3 ⋅ V ab ⋅ Ia* − Ib*
( )
P = Re S ( )
PhsBC
S = 3 ⋅ V bc ⋅ Ib* − Ic*
( )
P = Re S ( )
PhsCA
S = 3 ⋅ V ca ⋅ Ic* − Ia*
( )
P = Re S ( )
PhsA
S = 3 ⋅ V a ⋅ Ia*
P = Re S ( )
PhsB
S = 3 ⋅ V b ⋅ Ib*
P = Re S ( )
PhsC
S = 3 ⋅ V c ⋅ Ic*
P = Re S ( )
relay, the positive-sequence alternative is recommended (default).
Depending on the set Measurement mode, the power calculation calculates active power,
reactive power and apparent power values from the available set of measurements. The
calculated powers S, P, Q and the power factor angle, PF_ANGL, are available in the
Monitored data.
615 series ANSI 719

Technical Manual
The Directional calculation determines the direction of the measured power. The
measured power is considered to be in the forward direction if the active power is positive,
else it is considered to be in the reverse direction.
If the polarity of the measured power is opposite to normal, the correction can be done by
setting Pol reversal to "True", which rotates the apparent power by 180 degrees.
Level detector
The Level detector compares the calculated value of the active power with a set Pickup
value. If the calculated value of the active power falls below Pickup value in the forward
direction or if the measured power is in the reverse direction, the Level detector enables
the Timer module.
Tripping Non
area tripping
area
Pickup
Value
P
GUID-A75F4E26-38FF-4D60-992A-01E9877ACED7 V1 EN
Figure 359: Operating characteristics of 32U with setting Pickup value
Timer
Once activated, the Timer activates the PICKUP output. The time characteristics are
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Trip delay time, the
TRIP output is activated. In a drop-off situation, that is, if the underpower condition
disappears before the operation delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. If the
720 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The Timer calculates the PICKUP_DUR value which indicates the percentage of the time
elapsed since the activation of the PICKUP output with respect to Trip delay time. The
value is available in the Monitored data.
The DISABLE input can be used to coordinate the correct operation during the generator
start-up situation. By activating the DISABLE signal, both the PICKUP and TRIP
outputs are blocked. Once the DISABLE signal is deactivated, the Timer remains blocked
for an additional time duration as set through the setting Disable time.
Blocking logic
4.8.1.5 Application
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy into electrical
energy. Sometimes the mechanical power from the prime mover may decrease so much
that it does not cover the internal losses. The task of an underpower protection is to protect
the generator from very low power output conditions.
Steam turbines become easily overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the
steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Hydro turbine of the Kaplan type may be
damaged due to the fact that the turbine blade surfs on the water and sets up axial pressure
on the bearing. Diesel engines may be damaged due to insufficient lubrication.
If the generator size is very large, it is uneconomical to continue running it with low
generated power. In the reverse power condition, large generators draw a considerable
amount of power from the rest of the system to feed their internal losses. Hence, it is
desirable to disconnect the generator in such situations.
In case of the parallel-connected generators, for example, the load of one generator may
be so low that it is better to disconnect it and let the remaining generators feed the network.
Where a low value of power setting is required, for example less than 2%,
the correction parameters should be used to compensate for the measuring
615 series ANSI 721

Technical Manual
errors. The manufacturer of the measuring devices is to be contacted for

information on the measuring errors.
If the measuring errors are not compensated for, the underpower setting
should not be lower than the sum of the current-measuring and voltage-
measuring errors.
For example, if the error of the current-measuring device is 2% and that of
the voltage-measuring device is 1%, the minimum setting is (2 + 1)% =
3%.
4.8.1.6 Signals
Table 622: 32U Input signals
V_A SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage A or phase-to-phase voltage
AB
V_B SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage B or phase-to-phase voltage
BC
V_C SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage C or phase-to-phase voltage
CA
DISABLE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal to block the function during generator startup
Table 623: 32U Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.8.1.7 Settings
Table 624: 32U Group settings (Basic)
Pickup value 0.01...2.00 xSn 0.01 0.10 Pickup value
722 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 625: 32U Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 626: 32U Non group settings (Advanced)

Measurement mode 1=PhsA, PhsB, 3=Pos Seq Selection of power calculation method
PhsC
2=Arone
3=Pos Seq
4=PhsAB
5=PhsBC
6=PhsCA
7=PhsA
8=PhsB
9=PhsC
Pol reversal 0=False 0=False Reverse the definition of the power direction
1=True
Disable time 0...60000 ms 1000 0 Additional wait time after CB closing

Table 627: 32U Monitored data
P FLOAT32 -160.000...160.0 xSn Active power
00
Q FLOAT32 -160.000...160.0 xSn Reactive power
00
S FLOAT32 0.000...160.000 xSn Apparent power
PF_ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Power factor angle
32U Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
615 series ANSI 723

Technical Manual

Table 628: 32U Technical data
Operation accuracy 1) Depending on the frequency of the measured
fn ±2 Hz
Power measurement accuracy ±3% of the set value

or ±0.002 × Sn
Phase angle: ±2°

1) Measurement mode = “Pos Seq” (default)

2) V = Vn, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
4.8.2 Reverse power/directional overpower protection 32R/32O
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEE C37.2
Reverse power/directional overpower DOPPDPR P>/Q> 32R/32O
protection

32R/32O
I_A TRIP
I_B PICKUP
I_C
V_A
V_B
V_C
BLOCK
GUID-BBDFCB16-ED05-4ADF-94C6-8C56350F5FCD V1 EN
724 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The reverse power/directional overpower protection function 32R/32O can be used for
generator protection against delivering an excessive power beyond the generator's
capacity to the grid, against the generator running like a motor, and against the motor
running like a generator and for protecting a motor which consumes more reactive power
due to loss of field. It can also be used in feeder protection for indicating overload on the
distribution system, to indicate that a customer is supplying power into the grid and for
protecting the transformer from delivering an excessive load.
The function picks ups and trips when the measured power exceeds the set limit and in a
specified direction. The operate time characteristics are according to definite time (DT).
The operation of 32R/32O can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules
I_A
I_B Level
I3P I_C
detector
I1
Timer
TRIP
U_A Power t
U_B calculation
U_C
U_AB
PICKUP
U3P U_BC Directional
U_CA
U1
calculation
BLOCK
BLK_TRIP
BLK_PICKUP
FR_TIMER
GUID-7AABB604-0901-4815-841F-352961249261 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 725

Technical Manual
Power calculation
This module calculates the apparent power based on the selected voltages and currents.
The Measurement mode setting determines which voltages and currents are used. It is also
possible to use positive-sequence components for calculating the apparent power which
makes the determination of power insensitive to a possible asymmetry in currents or
voltages and corresponds to the real load on the prime mover of the generator.
Table 629: Power calculation
Measurement mode setting Power calculation
PhsA, PhsB, PhsC
S = V a ⋅ Ia* + V b + Ib* + V c ⋅ Ic*
P = Re S ( )
Arone
S = V ab ⋅ Ia* − V bc ⋅ Ic*
P = Re S ( )
Pos Seq
S = 3 ⋅ V 1 ⋅ I1*
P = Re S ( )
PhsAB
S = 3 ⋅ V ab ⋅ Ia* − Ib*
( )
P = Re S ( )
PhsBC
S = 3 ⋅ V bc ⋅ Ib* − Ic*
( )
P = Re S ( )
PhsCA
S = 3 ⋅ V ca ⋅ Ic* − Ia*
( )
P = Re S ( )
PhsA
S = 3 ⋅ V a ⋅ Ia*
P = Re S ( )
PhsB
S = 3 ⋅ V b ⋅ Ib*
P = Re S ( )
PhsC
S = 3 ⋅ V c ⋅ Ic*
P = Re S ( )
726 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
relay, the positive-sequence alternative is recommended.
The calculated powers S, P, Q and the power factor angle PF_ANGL are available in the
Level detector
The Level detector compares the magnitude of the measured apparent power to the set
Pickup value. If the measured value exceeds the set Pickup value, the Level detector sends
an enabling signal to the Timer module.
The Directional calculation module monitors the direction of the apparent power. When
the apparent power flow is in the operating area, the module sends the enabling signal to
the Timer module. The directional operation can be selected with the combination of the
settings Directional mode and Power angle. The selectable options for the Directional
mode setting are "Forward" and "Reverse". The Power angle setting can be used to set the
power direction between the reactive and active power.
A typical error is, for example, that the VT or CT poles are wrongly
connected. This is seen as a power flow opposite to that of the intended
direction. The Pol Reversal setting can be used to correct the situation. By
setting the value to "True", the measured apparent power is turned 180
degrees.
Non trippting Tripping

area area
Pickup value
P
GUID-88535C85-A1BA-414B-A73C-4E9FFAF6D630 V1 EN
Figure 362: Operating characteristics with the Pickup Value setting, the Power angle
setting being 0 and Directional mode "Forward"
615 series ANSI 727

Technical Manual
Tripping
area
Pickup value

Non tripping area

P
GUID-A486836C-CAF2-428C-AE42-4C6172394D17 V1 EN
Figure 363: Operating characteristics with the Pickup Value setting, Power angle (α)
being +45 and Directional mode "Forward"
Timer
Once activated, the Timer activates the PICKUP output. The time characteristics are
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Trip delay time, the
TRIP output is activated. If a drop-off situation happens, that is, the value of power drops
below Pickup value before the trip delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. If
the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operate timer resets and the
percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set operating time (DT). The value is
Blocking logic
mode, which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary
728 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.8.2.5 Application
32R/32O is used to provide protection against an excessive power flow in the set operating
direction. The main application is the protection of generators and turbines. It can also be
used in feeder protection applications, for example, the ring network.
32R/32O in the forward direction can be used to protect the generators or motors from
delivering or consuming excess power. For example, the generator overpower protection
can be used to shed a noncritical feeder load or to start parallel generators. A synchronous
motor may start consuming more reactive power in case of loss of excitation, in which case
the forward overpower protection is used to detect such condition.
The 32R/32O function has many applications when used as reverse power protection. A
generator in a power plant converts mechanical energy to electrical energy. Sometimes the
mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease to a limit that it does not cover the
internal losses. The synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts
importing power from the system. The effect of a generator acting as a motor implies no
risk to the machine but can cause damage to the prime mover. The extent of the damage
depends on the type of the prime mover.
Steam turbines become overheated easily if the steam flow drops too low or if the steam
ceases to flow through the turbine. The break of a main steam pipe, damage to one or more
blades in the steam turbine or an inadvertent closing of the main stop valves are typical
causes for the low steam flow. The steam turbines of turbo generators can be protected
during a low steam flow with the overpower protection operating in reverse direction.
Hydroturbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. There is a risk
that the turbine runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always
strong enough to withstand the associated stresses.
A hydroturbine that rotates in water with the closed wicket gates draws about 10% of the
rated power from the rest of the power system if the intake is blocked due to ice, snow,
branches or leaves. A complete blockage of the intake may cause cavitations. If there is
only air in the hydroturbine, the power demand drops to about 3%. The risk of damages
to the hydroturbines can justify the reverse operation of the overpower protection in
unattended plants.
Whenever a low value of the reverse power setting is required, an

underpower protection should also be used in conjunction with 32R/32O.
The limit depends on the CT and VT accuracy.
Diesel engines should have overpower protection in reverse direction. The generator takes
about 15% or more of its rated power from the system. A stiff engine may require 25% of
the rated power to motor it. A well run engine may need no more than 5%. It is necessary
615 series ANSI 729

Technical Manual
to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to measure the reverse power
during commissioning.
Reverse overpower can also act as an alternative for an under excitation protection in case
of small generators. If the field excitation is reduced, the generator may start importing the
reactive power, making the generator run as an asynchronous generator. A synchronous
generator is not designed to work asynchronously and may become damaged due to
heating in the damper windings or heating in the rotor due to slip frequency current.
When operated in reverse power direction, 32R/32O can be used as an alarm if the power
flowing from the industry is feeding the grid, which may not be desired as per the rules and
regulations of the utility owning the grid.
Q Q
Tripping area
Non Tripping
tripping Non tripping area
area
area
P P
(a) (b)
GUID-9E359F8D-AA8C-4954-A862-75C2B5F1327C V1 EN
Figure 364: Forward active overpower characteristics (a) and forward reactive
overpower characteristics (b)
730 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Q Q
Tripping Non
area tripping
area
P Non P
tripping area
Tripping area
(a) (b)
GUID-8D2C91A5-4C25-4B40-8B67-8D3EBFD3D452 V1 EN
Figure 365: Reverse active overpower characteristics (a) and reverse reactive
overpower characteristics (b)
4.8.2.6 Signals
Table 630: 32R/32O Input signals
V_A SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage A or phase-to-phase voltage
AB
V_B SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage B or phase-to-phase voltage
BC
V_C SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage C or phase-to-phase voltage
CA
Table 631: 32R/32O Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
615 series ANSI 731

Technical Manual
4.8.2.7 Settings
Table 632: 32R/32O Group settings (Basic)
Pickup value 0.01...2.00 xSn 0.01 1.00 Pickup value
3=Reverse
Power angle -90...90 deg 1 0 Adjustable angle for power
Table 633: 32R/32O Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Measurement mode 1=PhsA, PhsB, 3=Pos Seq Selection of power calculation method
PhsC
2=Arone
3=Pos Seq
4=PhsAB
5=PhsBC
6=PhsCA
7=PhsA
8=PhsB
9=PhsC
Table 634: 32R/32O Non group settings (Advanced)

Pol reversal 0=False 0=False Reverse the definition of the power direction
1=True

Table 635: 32R/32O Monitored data
P FLOAT32 -160.000...160.0 xSn Active power
00
00
732 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

S FLOAT32 0.000...160.000 xSn Apparent power
PF_ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Power factor angle
32R/32O Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 636: 32R/32O Technical data
Operation accuracy 1) Depending on the frequency of the measured current
and voltage:
f = fn ±2 Hz
Power measurement accuracy ±3% of the set value

or ±0.002 × Sn
Phase angle: ±2°

1) Measurement mode = “Pos Seq” (default)

2) V = Vn, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
4.8.3 Directional reactive power undervoltage protection 32Q-27
Directional reactive power undervoltage DQPTUV Q> ->,3U< 32Q-27
protection
615 series ANSI 733

Technical Manual

32Q-27
V_AB TRIP
V_BC PICKUP
V_CA
V1
I1
BLOCK
GUID-2C0FEE94-AF1B-4C4E-9DE2-9D1164E19992 V1 EN
The directional reactive power undervoltage protection function 32Q-27 is used at the grid
connection point of distributed power generating units as stipulated by various grid codes
to prevent voltage collapse of the grid due to network faults. 32Q-27 measures phase
voltages and current at the grid connection point. The generating facility is disconnected
from the network with a specific time delay if all phase voltages decrease and remain at
or below the specified limit and if reactive power is simultaneously consumed (that is,
under-excitation operation).
The function contains a blocking functionality to block function outputs, timer or the
function itself.
The operation of 32Q-27 can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
734 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
V_AB
Timer TRIP
Under
V_BC voltage t
V_CA detection PICKUP
V1 Reactive
power
I1 monitoring
Blocking
BLOCK
logic
GUID-66E75458-7850-40A5-8BF9-B1577E72D8DB V1 EN
Under voltage detection

Under voltage detection compares the fundamental frequency component of all three
phase-to-phase voltages with the set Voltage pickup value. When all three phase-to-phase
voltages are lower than the set Voltage pickup value, the Under voltage detection module
sends an enable signal to the Timer indicating an undervoltage condition at the grid
connection point.
Reactive power monitoring

This module calculates and monitors the reactive power based on positive sequence
current and voltage. The use of a positive sequence component makes the determination
of power insensitive to a possible asymmetry in current and voltages. When the reactive
power exceeds Min reactive power and flows in the operating area, the module sends an
enable signal to the Timer indicating that the reactive power is being consumed at the grid
connection point. A slight tilt in the curve can be obtained by the setting Pwr sector
reduction.
To avoid false tripping, reactive power calculation is blocked if the magnitude of positive
sequence current is less than the set Min PS current.
The magnitude of calculated reactive power Q is available in the Monitored data view.
615 series ANSI 735

Technical Manual
GUID-9C7C3D36-0158-47B5-902B-E4F22830C03E V1 EN
Figure 368: Operating area of 32Q-27 function
Quadrant II Generator produces active power, but draws reactive power (under-excited)
Quadrant III Generator produces both active and reactive power
The power direction can be reversed by setting Pol reversal to “True”.
Timer
Once activated by both Under voltage detection and Reactive power monitoring module,
the Timer activates the PICKUP output. The Timer characteristic is according to DT.
When the operation timer has reached the value set by Trip delay time, the TRIP output
is activated. If the fault disappears before the module operates, the Timer is reset
instantaneously.
The Timer calculates the start duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the
percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set operating time. The value is available
through the Monitored data view.
Blocking logic
736 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.8.3.5 Application
Use of distributed power generating units (PGU) is rapidly increasing due to liberalized
markets (deregulation) and the global trend to use more renewable sources of energy. As
the capacity of these generating units increase, they are connected directly to medium
voltage networks. Until recent years it had been a practice by grid operators to disconnect
the distributed power generator from the network in case of fault in the network.
If there is a considerable loss in the power generation, it may affect the system’s ability to
recover. To ensure power system stability, various grid codes have revised their
requirements and therefore require that the distributed PGUs have to make a contribution
to network support. In case of network faults, the distributed power generator should not
be immediately disconnected from the network. Instead, as a matter of principle,
generating plants connected to the medium-voltage network must be capable of
participating in steady-state voltage control and dynamic network support. However, if
the generators stay connected, it must be ensured that they do not take reactive power from
the network because this may lead to collapse of the grid. 32Q-27 is used for detecting
such situations, that is, simultaneous undervoltage and reactive power (under excited
generators) and trip the generators.
The protection function 32Q-27 is developed considering various grid codes. For
example, in the BDEW Technical Guideline “Generating Plants Connected to the
Medium-Voltage Network” (June 2008 issue, Germany), it is stated that if all three phase-
to-phase voltages at the grid connection point decrease and remain at and below a value
of 85% of the rated and if reactive power is simultaneously consumed at the grid
connection point (under-excited operation), the generating facility must be disconnected
from the network with a time delay of 0.5 s.
615 series ANSI 737

Technical Manual
Common point of coupling

distributed power generation
into the utility network
V 12
REG615
3I
Std. conf. A
3V ANSI IEC
25 SYNC
27RT U<RT
IG 32Q, 27 Q>→, 3U<
32R/32O P>/Q>
47O-/59 U2>/3V>
47U+/27 U1</3V<
50L/50NL ARC
60 FUSEF
78V VS
81 f</f>, df/dt
G G G G G G
GUID-1EEE1F81-BB0F-417F-BB2B-9CC55BF4DC59 V1 EN
Figure 369: Application example of wind power plant as distributed power generation
coupled into the utility network
738 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.8.3.6 Signals
Table 637: 32Q-27 Input signals
V_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-phase voltage AB
V_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-phase voltage BC
V_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-phase voltage CA
Table 638: 32Q-27 Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.8.3.7 Settings
Table 639: 32Q-27 Group settings (Basic)
Voltage Pickup value 0.20...1.20 xUn 0.01 0.85 Pickup value for under voltage detection
Table 640: 32Q-27 Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 641: 32Q-27 Non group settings (Advanced)

Min reactive power 0.01...0.50 xSn 0.01 0.05 Minimum reactive power needed for function to
trip
Min Ps Seq current 0.02...0.20 xIn 0.01 0.05 Minimum positive sequence current
Pwr sector reduction 0...10 deg 1 3 Power sector reduction
Pol reversal 0=False 0=False Reverse the definition of the positive reactive
1=True power direction
615 series ANSI 739

Technical Manual

Table 642: 32Q-27 Monitored data
00
32Q-27 Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 643: 32Q-27 Technical data
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current
and voltage:
fn ±2 Hz
Reactive power range |PF| <0.71
Power:
±3.0% or ±0.002 × Qn
Voltage:
Reset time <50 ms

1) Pickup value = 0.05 × Sn, reactive power before fault = 0.8 × Pickup value, reactive power overshoot 2 times,
results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
4.9 Arc protection AFD
Arc protection ARCSARC ARC AFD
740 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A070389 V3 EN
4.9.3 Functionality
The arc protection function AFD detects arc situations in air insulated metal-clad
switchgears caused by, for example, human errors during maintenance or insulation
breakdown during operation.
The function detects light from an arc either locally or via a remote light signal. The
function also monitors phase and residual currents to be able to make accurate decisions
on ongoing arcing situations.
The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and resets
timers.

The operation of AFD can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
615 series ANSI 741

Technical Manual
I_A Level
I_B detector
Dropoff
I_C 1 Operation
mode TRIP
selector t
Level
I_G detector
2
OPR_MODE
REM_FLT_ARC Dropoff
FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET
t
BLOCK
A070746-ANSI V2 EN
Level detector 1
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Phase pickup value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Phase pickup value, the level detector reports the
exceeding of the value to the operation mode selector.
Level detector 2
The measured residual currents are compared to the set Ground pickup value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Ground pickup value, the level detector reports the
exceeding of the value to the operation mode selector.
Operation mode selector

Depending on the Operation mode setting, the operation mode selector makes sure that all
required criteria are fulfilled for a reliable decision of an arc fault situation. The user can
select either "Light+current", "Light only" or "BI controlled" operation mode. The
operation is based on both current and light information in “Light+current” mode, on light
information only in “Light only” mode or on remotely controlled information in “BI
controlled” mode. When the "BI controlled" mode is in use and the OPR_MODE input is
activated, the operation of the function is based on light information only. When the
OPR_MODE input is deactivated, the operation of the function is based on both light and
current information. When the required criteria are met, the drop-off timer is activated.
Drop-off timer
Once activated, the drop-off timer remains active until the input is deactivated or at least
during the drop-off time. The BLOCK signal can be used to block the TRIP signal or the
light signal output ARC_FLT_DET.
742 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.9.5 Application
The arc protection can be realized as a stand-alone function in a single relay or as a station-
wide arc protection, including several protection relays. If realized as a station-wide arc
protection, different tripping schemes can be selected for the operation of the circuit
breakers of the incoming and outgoing feeders. Consequently, the relays in the station can,
for example, be set to trip the circuit breaker of either the incoming or the outgoing feeder,
depending on the fault location in the switchgear. For maximum safety, the relays can be
set to always trip both the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and that of the outgoing
feeder.
The arc protection consists of:

• Optional arc light detection hardware with automatic backlight compensation for lens
type sensors
• Light signal output ARC_FLT_DET for routing indication of locally detected light
signal to another relay
• Protection stage with phase- and ground-fault current measurement.
The function detects light from an arc either locally or via a remote light signal. Locally,
the light is detected by lens sensors connected to the inputs Light sensor 1, Light sensor
2, or Light sensor 3 on the serial communication module of the relay. The lens sensors can
be placed, for example, in the busbar compartment, the breaker compartment, and the
cable compartment of the metal-clad cubicle.
The light detected by the lens sensors is compared to an automatically adjusted reference
level. Light sensor 1, Light sensor 2, and Light sensor 3 inputs have their own reference
levels. When the light exceeds the reference level of one of the inputs, the light is detected
locally. When the light has been detected locally or remotely and, depending on the
operation mode, if one or several phase currents exceed the set Phase pickup value limit,
or the ground-fault current the set Ground pickup value limit, the arc protection stage
generates a trip signal. The stage is reset in 30 ms, after all three-phase currents and the
ground-fault current have fallen below the set current limits.
The light signal output from an arc protection stage ARC_FLT_DET is activated
immediately in the detection of light in all situations. A station-wide arc protection is
realized by routing the light signal output to an output contact connected to a binary input
of another relay, or by routing the light signal output through the communication to an
input of another relay.
It is possible to block the tripping and the light signal output of the arc protection stage
with a binary input or a signal from another function block.
615 series ANSI 743

Technical Manual
Cover unused inputs with dust caps.
Arc protection with one protection relay

In installations, with limited possibilities to realize signalling between protection relays
protecting incoming and outgoing feeders, or if only the protection relay for the incoming
feeder is to be exchanged, an arc protection with a lower protective level can be achieved
with one protection relay. An arc protection with one protection relay only is realized by
installing two arc lens sensors connected to the protection relay protecting the incoming
feeder to detect an arc on the busbar. In arc detection, the arc protection stage trips the
circuit breaker of the incoming feeder. The maximum recommended installation distance
between the two lens sensors in the busbar area is six meters and the maximum distance
from a lens sensor to the end of the busbar is three meters.
744 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A040362-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 372: Arc protection with one protection relay
Arc protection with several protection relays

When using several protection relays, the protection relay protecting the outgoing feeder
trips the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder when detecting an arc at the cable
terminations. If the protection relay protecting the outgoing feeder detects an arc on the
busbar or in the breaker compartment via one of the other lens sensors, it will generate a
signal to the protection relay protecting the incoming feeder. When detecting the signal,
the protection relay protecting the incoming feeder trips the circuit breaker of the
incoming feeder and generates an external trip signal to all protection relays protecting the
615 series ANSI 745

Technical Manual
outgoing feeders, which in turn results in tripping of all circuit breakers of the outgoing
feeders. For maximum safety, the protection relays can be configured to trip all the circuit
breakers regardless of where the arc is detected.
A040363-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 373: Arc flash detector with several protection relays
Arc protection with several protection relays and a separate arc protection
system
When realizing an arc protection with both protection relays and a separate arc protection
system, the cable terminations of the outgoing feeders are protected by protection relays
using one lens sensor for each protection relay. The busbar and the incoming feeder are
protected by the sensor loop of the separate arc protection system. With arc detection at
746 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
the cable terminations, an protection relay trips the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder.
However, when detecting an arc on the busbar, the separate arc protection system trips the
circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and generates an external trip signal to all protection
relays protecting the outgoing feeders, which in turn results in tripping of all circuit
breakers of the outgoing feeders.
A040364-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 374: Arc flash detector with several protection relays and a separate arc flash
detector system
4.9.6 Signals
Table 644: AFD Input signals
I_G SIGNAL 0 Residual current
615 series ANSI 747

Technical Manual

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs
REM_FLT_ARC BOOLEAN 0=False Remote Fault arc detected
OPR_MODE BOOLEAN 0=False Operation mode input
Table 645: AFD Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
ARC_FLT_DET BOOLEAN Fault arc detected=light signal output
4.9.7 Settings
Table 646: AFD Group settings (Basic)
Phase pickup value 0.50...40.00 xIn 0.01 2.50 Operating phase current
Ground pickup value 0.05...8.00 xIn 0.01 0.20 Operating residual current
Operation mode 1=Light+current 1=Light+current Operation mode
2=Light only
3=BI controlled
Table 647: AFD Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable

Table 648: AFD Monitored data
AFD Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
748 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
4.9.9 Technical data

Table 649: AFD Technical data
Operation accuracy ±3% of the set value or ±0.01 × In
Trip time Minimum Typical Maximum

Operation mode = "Light 9ms3) 12 ms3) 15 ms 3)
+current"1)2) 4 ms4) 6 ms4) 9 ms4)
Operation mode = "Light 9 ms3) 10 ms3) 12 ms3)
only"2) 4 ms4) 6 ms4) 7 ms4)
1) Phase pickup value = 1.0 × In, current before fault = 2.0 × set Phase pickup value, fn = 50 Hz, fault with
nominal frequency, results based on statistical distribution of 200 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the heavy-duty output contact
3) Normal power output
4) High-speed output
4.9.10 Technical revision history

Table 650: AFD Technical revision history
B Internal Improvement.
4.10 Motor start-up supervision 66/51LRS
Motor start-up supervision STTPMSU Is2t n< 66/51LRS
615 series ANSI 749

Technical Manual
GUID-CCCBE20D-0546-41DB-8C68-A32EFD28E9D1 V4 EN
The motor start-up supervision function 66/51LRS is designed for protection against
excessive starting time and locked rotor conditions of the motor during starting. For the
good and reliable operation of the motor, the thermal stress during the motor starting is
maintained within the allowed limits.
The starting of the motor is supervised by monitoring the TRMS magnitude of all the
phase currents or by monitoring the status of the circuit breaker connected to the motor.
During the start-up period of the motor, 66/51LRS calculates the integral of the I²t value.
If the calculated value exceeds the set value, the trip signal is activated.
66/51LRS has the provision to check the locked rotor condition of the motor using the
speed switch, which means checking if the rotor is able to rotate or not. This feature trips
after a predefined operating time.
66/51LRS also protects the motor from an excessive number of start-ups. Upon exceeding
the specified number of start-ups within certain duration, 66/51LRS blocks further
pickups. The restart of the motor is also inhibited after each start and continues to be
inhibited for a set duration. When the lock of pickup of motor is enabled, 66/51LRS gives
the time remaining until the restart of the motor.


The operation of 66/51LRS can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in
750 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-35DD1223-14B2-48BF-ADF4-4A1DF6930314 V1 EN
Startup supervisor
This module detects the starting of the motor. The starting and stalling motor conditions
are detected in four different modes of operation. This is done through the Operation mode
setting.
When the Operation mode setting is operated in the "IIt" mode, the function calculates the
value of the thermal stress of the motor during the start-up condition. In this mode, the
start-up condition is detected by monitoring the TRMS currents.
The Operation mode setting in the "IIt, CB" mode enables the function to calculate the
value of the thermal stress when a start-up is monitored in addition to the CB_CLOSED
input.
In the "IIt & stall" mode, the function calculates the thermal stress of the motor during the
start-up condition. The start-up condition is detected by monitoring the TRMS currents.
In the "IIt & stall, CB" mode, the function calculates the thermal stress of the motor during
the start-up condition but the start-up condition is detected by monitoring the TRMS
current as well as the circuit breaker status.
In both the "IIt & stall" and "IIt & stall, CB" mode, the function also checks for motor
stalling by monitoring the speed switch.
When the measured current value is used for start-up supervision in the "IIt" and "IIt &
stall" modes, the module initially recognizes the de-energized condition of the motor
when the values of all three phase currents are less than Motor standstill A for longer than
100 milliseconds. If any of the phase currents of the de-energized condition rises to a value
615 series ANSI 751

Technical Manual
equal to or greater than Motor standstill A, the MOT_START output signal is activated
indicating that the motor start-up is in progress. The MOT_START output remains active
until the values of all three phase currents drop below 90 percent of the set value of Start
detection A and remain below that level for a time of Str over delay time, that is, until the
start-up situation is over.
GUID-4475BDFB-57AE-4BFD-9EE7-AE7672F7206E V2 EN
Figure 377: Functionality of start-up supervision in the "IIt and IIt&stall" mode
In case of the "IIt, CB" or "IIt & stall, CB" modes, the function initially recognizes the de-
energized condition of the motor when the value of all three phase currents is below the
value of the Motor standstill A setting for 100 milliseconds. The beginning of the motor
start-up is recognized when CB is closed, that is, when the CB_CLOSED input is activated
and at least one phase current value exceeds the Motor standstill A setting.
These two events do not take place at the same instant, that is, the CB main contact is
closed first, in which case the phase current value rises above 0.1 pu and after some delay
the CB auxiliary contact gives the information of the CB_CLOSED input. In some cases,
the CB_CLOSED input can be active but the value of current may not be greater than the
value of the Motor standstill A setting. To allow both possibilities, a time slot of 200
milliseconds is provided for current and the CB_CLOSED input. If both events occur
during this time, the motor start-up is recognized.
The motor start-up ends either within the value of the Str over delay time setting from the
beginning of the start-up or the opening of CB or when the CB_CLOSED input is
deactivated. The operation of the MOT_START output signal in this operation mode is as
illustrated in Figure 378.
752 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
This CB mode can be used in soft-started or slip ring motors for protection against a large
starting current, that is, a problem in starting and so on.
GUID-DDAD7B3F-28BE-4573-BE79-FBB488A22ECA V1 EN
GUID-1470A4DB-310F-46BC-B775-843EAB8BA836 V1 EN
Figure 378: Functionality of start-up supervision in the "IIt, CB" mode and the "IIt and
stall, CB" mode
The Str over delay time setting has different purposes in different modes of operation.
• In the “IIt” or “IIt & stall” modes, the aim of this setting is to check for the completion
of the motor start-up period. The purpose of this time delay setting is to allow for short
interruptions in the current without changing the state of the MOT_START output. In
615 series ANSI 753

Technical Manual
this mode of operation, the value of the setting is in the range of around 100
milliseconds.
• In the “IIt, CB” or “IIt & stall, CB” modes, the purpose of this setting is to check for
the life of the protection scheme after the CB_CLOSED input has been activated.
Based on the values of the phase currents, the completion of the start-up period cannot
be judged. So in this mode of operation, the value of the time delay setting can even
be as high as within the range of seconds, for example around 30 seconds.
The activation of the BLOCK input signal deactivates the MOT_START output.
Thermal stress calculator

Because of the high current surges during the start-up period, a thermal stress is imposed
on the rotor. With less air circulation in the ventilation of the rotor before it reaches its full
speed, the situation becomes even worse. Consequently, a long start-up causes a rapid
heating of the rotor.
This module calculates the thermal stress developed in the motor during start-up. The heat
developed during the starting can be calculated with the equation.
t
W = Rs ∫ is2 ( t ) dt
0
GUID-7A92209F-7451-415B-8C3D-276A6ED4A44B V1 EN (Equation 133)
Rs combined rotor and stator resistance
is starting current of the motor
t starting time of the motor
This equation is normally represented as the integral of I²t. It is a commonly used method
in protective protection relays to protect the motor from thermal stress during starting. The
advantage of this method over the traditional definite time overcurrent protection is that
when the motor is started with a reduced voltage as in the star-delta starting method, the
starting current is lower. This allows more starting time for the motor since the module is
monitoring the integral of I²t.
The module calculates the accumulated heat continuously and compares it to the limiting
value obtained from the product of the square of the values of the Motor start-up A and
Motor start-up time settings. When the calculated value of the thermal stress exceeds this
limit, the OPR_IIT output is activated.
The module also measures the time START_TIME required by the motor to attain the
rated speed and the relative thermal stress IIT_RL. The values are available in the
754 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The activation of the BLOCK input signal resets the thermal stress calculator and
deactivates the OPR_IIT output.
Stall protection
This module is activated only when the selected Operation mode setting value is "IIt &
stall" or "IIt & stall, CB".
The start-up current is specific to each motor and depends on the start-up method used,
such as direct online, autotransformer and rotor resistance insertion. The start-up time is
dependent on the load connected to the motor.
Based on the motor characteristics supplied by the manufacturer, this module is required
if the stalling time is shorter than or too close to the starting time. In such cases, a speed
switch must be used to indicate whether a motor is accelerating during start-up or not.
At motor standstill, the STALL_IND input is active. It indicates that the rotor is not
rotating. When the motor is started, at certain revolution the deactivation of the
STALL_IND by the speed switch indicates that the rotor is rotating. If the input is not
deactivated within Lock rotor time, the OPR_STALL output is activated.
The module calculates the duration of the motor in stalling condition, the STALL_RL
output indicating the percent ratio of the start situation and the set value of Lock rotor
time. The value is available in the Monitored data view.
The activation of the BLOCK input signal resets the operation time and deactivates the
OPR_STALL output.
Cumulative start-up protection

This module protects the motor from an excessive number of start-ups.
Whenever the motor is started, the latest value of START_TIME is added to the existing
value of T_ST_CNT and the updated cumulative start-up time is available at T_ST_CNT.
If the value of T_ST_CNT is greater than the value of Cumulative time Lim, the
LOCK_START output is activated and lockout condition for the restart of motor is enabled
during the time the output is active. The LOCK_START output remains high until the
T_ST_CNT value reduces to a value less than the value of Cumulative time Lim. The start
time counter reduces at the rate of the value of Counter Red rate.
The LOCK_START output becomes activated at the start of MOT_START. The output
remains active for a period of Restart inhibit time.
615 series ANSI 755

Technical Manual
GUID-200BC4CB-8B33-4616-B014-AFCC99ED9224 V2 EN
Figure 379: Time delay for cumulative start
This module also protects the motor from consecutive start-ups. When the LOCK_START
output is active, T_RST_ENA shows the possible time for next restart. The value of
T_RST_ENA is calculated by the difference of Restart inhibit time and the elapsed time
from the instant LOCK_START is enabled.
When the ST_EMERG_ENA emergency start is set high, the value of the cumulative start-
up time counter is set to Cumulative time Lim - 60s · Emg start Red rate. This disables
LOCK_START and in turn makes the restart of the motor possible.
This module also calculates the total number of start-ups occurred, START_CNT. The
value can be reset from the Clear menu.
The old Number of motor start-ups occurred counter value (START_CNT) can be taken
into use by writing the value to the Ini start up counter parameter and resetting the value
via the Clear menu from WHMI or LHMI.
The calculated values of T_RST_ENA, T_ST_CNT and START_CNT are available in the
The activation of the BLK_LK_ST input signal deactivates the LOCK_START output.
The activation of the BLOCK input signal resets the cumulative start-up counter module.
4.10.5 Application
When a motor is started, it draws a current well in excess of the motor's full-load rating
throughout the period it takes for the motor to run up to the rated speed. The motor starting
756 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
current decreases as the motor speed increases and the value of current remains close to
the rotor-locked value for most of the acceleration period.
The full-voltage starting or the direct-on-line starting method is used out of the many
methods used for starting the induction motor. If there is either an electrical or mechanical
constraint, this starting method is not suitable. The full-voltage starting produces the
highest starting torque. A high starting torque is generally required to start a high-inertia
load to limit the acceleration time. In this method, full voltage is applied to the motor when
the switch is in the "On" position. This method of starting results in a large initial current
surge, which is typically four to eight times that of the full-load current drawn by the
motor. If a star-delta starter is used, the value of the line current will only be about one-
third of the direct-on-line starting current.
GUID-F4C17D13-48CA-480A-BBE5-DFD7D6316DB8 V1 EN
Figure 380: Typical motor starting and capability curves
The start-up supervision of a motor is an important function because of the higher thermal
stress developed during starting. During the start-up, the current surge imposes a thermal
strain on the rotor. This is exaggerated as the air flow for cooling is less because the fans
do not rotate in their full speed. Moreover, the difference of speed between the rotating
magnetic field and the rotor during the start-up time induces a high magnitude of slip
current in the rotor at frequencies higher than when the motor is at full speed. The skin
effect is stronger at higher frequencies and all these factors increase the losses and the
generated heat. This is worse when the rotor is locked.
The starting current for slip-ring motors is less than the full load current and therefore it
is advisable to use the circuit breaker in the closed position to indicate the starting for such
type of motors.
615 series ANSI 757

Technical Manual
The starting times vary depending on motor design and load torque characteristics. The
time taken may vary from less than two seconds to more than 60 seconds. The starting time
is determined for each application.
When the permissible stall time is less than the starting time of the motor, the stalling
protection is used and the value of the time delay setting should be set slightly less than the
permissible stall time. The speed switch on the motor shaft must be used for detecting
whether the motor begins to accelerate or not. However, if the safe stall time is longer than
the start-up time of the motor, the speed switch is not required.
The failure of a motor to accelerate or to reach its full nominal speed in an acceptable time
when the stator is energized is caused by several types of abnormal conditions, including
a mechanical failure of the motor or load bearings, low supply voltage, open circuit in one
phase of a three-phase voltage supply or too high starting voltage. All these abnormal
conditions result in overheating.
Repeated starts increase the temperature to a high value in the stator or rotor windings, or
both, unless enough time is allowed for the heat to dissipate. To ensure a safe operation it
is necessary to provide a fixed-time interval between starts or limit the number of starts
within a period of time. This is why the motor manufacturers have restrictions on how
many starts are allowed in a defined time interval. This function does not allow starting of
the motor if the number of starts exceeds the set level in the register that calculates them.
This insures that the thermal effects on the motor for consecutive starts stay within
permissible levels.
For example, the motor manufacturer may state that three starts at the maximum are
allowed within 4 hours and the start-up situation time is 60 seconds. By initiating three
successive starts we reach the situation as illustrated. As a result, the value of the register
adds up to a total of 180 seconds. Right after the third start has been initiated, the output
lock of start of motor is activated and the fourth start will not be allowed, provided the time
limit has been set to 121 seconds.
Furthermore, a maximum of three starts in 4 hours means that the value of the register
should reach the set start time counter limit within 4 hours to allow a new start.
Accordingly, the start time counter reduction should be 60 seconds in 4 hours and should
thus be set to 60 s / 4 h = 15 s / h.
758 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-6E9B7247-9009-4302-A79B-B326009ECC7A V2 EN
Figure 381: Typical motor-starting and capability curves
Setting of Cumulative time Lim
Cumulative time Lim is calculated by
∑ tsi = (n − 1) × t + margin
GUID-0214B677-48D0-4DD4-BD1E-67BA9FD3C345 V1 EN (Equation 134)
n specified maximum allowed number of motor start-ups

t start-up time of the motor (in seconds)
margin safety margin (~10...20 percent)
Setting of Counter Red rate
Counter Red rate is calculated by

t
∆ ∑ ts =
treset
GUID-E7C44256-0F67-4D70-9B54-1C5042A151AF V1 EN (Equation 135)
t specified start time of the motor in seconds

treset duration during which the maximum number of motor start-ups stated by the manufacturer can be
made; time in hours
615 series ANSI 759

Technical Manual
4.10.6 Signals
Table 651: 66/51LRS Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block of function
BLK_LK_ST BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks lock out condition for restart of motor
CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False Input showing the status of motor circuit breaker
STALL_IND BOOLEAN 0=False Input signal for showing the motor is not stalling
ST_EMERG_ENA BOOLEAN 0=False Enable emergency start to disable lock of start of motor
Table 652: 66/51LRS Output signals

OPR_IIT BOOLEAN Trip signal for thermal stress.
OPR_STALL BOOLEAN Trip signal for stalling protection.
MOT_START BOOLEAN Signal to show that motor startup is in progress
LOCK_START BOOLEAN Lock out condition for restart of motor.
4.10.7 Settings
Table 653: 66/51LRS Group settings (Basic)
Motor start-up A 1.0...10.0 xIn 0.1 2.0 Motor starting current
Motor start-up time 1...80 s 1 5 Motor starting time
Lock rotor time 2...120 s 1 10 Permitted stalling time
Str over delay time 0...60000 ms 1 100 Time delay to check for completion of motor
startup period
Table 654: 66/51LRS Group settings (Advanced)

Pickup detection A 0.1...10.0 xIn 0.1 1.5 Current value for detecting starting of motor.
760 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 655: 66/51LRS Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Operation mode 1=IIt 1=IIt Motor start-up operation mode
2=IIt, CB
3=IIt + stall
4=IIt + stall, CB
Counter Red rate 2.0...250.0 s/h 0.1 60.0 Start time counter reduction rate
Cumulative time Lim 1...500 s 1 10 Cumulative time based restart inhibit limit
Emg start Red rate 0.00...100.00 % 0.01 20.00 Start time reduction factor when emergency
start is On
Restart inhibit time 0...250 min 1 30 Time delay between consecutive startups
Ini start up counter 0...999999 1 0 Initial value for the START_CNT
Table 656: 66/51LRS Non group settings (Advanced)

Motor standstill A 0.05...0.20 xIn 0.01 0.12 Current limit to check for motor standstill
condition

Table 657: 66/51LRS Monitored data
START_CNT INT32 0...999999 Number of motor start-ups
occurred
START_TIME FLOAT32 0.0...999.9 s Measured motor latest startup
time in sec
T_ST_CNT FLOAT32 0.0...99999.9 s Cumulated start-up time in sec
T_RST_ENA INT32 0...999 min Time left for restart when
lockstart is enabled in minutes
IIT_RL FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Thermal stress relative to set
maximum thermal stress
STALL_RL FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Pickup time relative to the trip
time for stall condition
66/51LRS Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
615 series ANSI 761

Technical Manual

Table 658: 66/51LRS Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz

detection A
1) Current before = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, overcurrent in one phase, results based on statistical distribution of
1000 measurements

Table 659: STTPMSU Technical revision history66/51LRS Technical revision history
C Added setting Ini start up counter.
4.11 Multipurpose protection MAP
Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC MAP MAP

MAP
AI_VALUE TRIP
BLOCK PICKUP
ENA_ADD
GUID-D9D5B5B3-27B1-42ED-A429-A887E8D2A376 V1 EN
762 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The RTD based thermal protection function 38 is used as a general protection with many
possible application areas as it has flexible measuring and setting facilities. The function
can be used as an under- or overprotection with a settable absolute hysteresis limit. The
function operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics.

The operation of MAP can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
GUID-B9FE9FD4-3C86-4B1B-A377-8056B82639D3 V1 EN
Level detector
The level detector compares AI_VALUE to the Pickup value setting. The Operation mode
setting defines the direction of the level detector.
Table 660: Operation mode types
Operation Mode Description
"Under" If the input signal AI_VALUE is lower than the set
value of the Pickup value setting, the level detector
enables the timer module.
"Over" If the input signal AI_VALUE exceeds the set value of
the Pickup value setting, the level detector enables
the timer module.
615 series ANSI 763

Technical Manual
The Absolute hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if the
input signal is slightly above or below the Pickup value setting. After leaving the
hysteresis area, the pickup condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the
signal to only return to the hysteresis area. If the ENA_ADD input is activated, the
threshold value of the internal comparator is the sum of the Pickup value Add and Pickup
value settings. The resulting threshold value for the comparator can be increased or
decreased depending on the sign and value of the Pickup value Add setting.
Timer
the TRIP output is activated. If the pickup condition disappears before the module trips,
the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the
operation timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated.
view.
Blocking logic
4.11.5 Application
The function block can be used for any general analog signal protection, either
underprotection or overprotection. The setting range is wide, allowing various protection
schemes for the function. Thus, the absolute hysteresis can be set to a value that suits the
application.
The temperature protection using the RTD sensors can be done using the function block.
The measured temperature can be fed from the RTD sensor to the function input that
detects too high temperatures in the motor bearings or windings, for example. When the
ENA_ADD input is enabled, the threshold value of the internal comparator is the sum of the
764 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Pickup value Add and Pickup value settings. This allows a temporal increase or decrease
of the level detector depending on the sign and value of the Pickup value Add setting, for
example, when the emergency start is activated. If, for example, Pickup value is 100,
Pickup value Add is 20 and the ENA_ADD input is active, the input signal needs to rise
above 120 before MAP trips.
4.11.6 Signals
Table 661: MAP Input signals
AI_VALUE FLOAT32 0.0 Analogue input value
ENA_ADD BOOLEAN 0=False Enable pickup added
Table 662: MAP Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
4.11.7 Settings
Table 663: MAP Group settings (Basic)
Pickup value -10000.0...10000.0 0.1 0.0 Pickup value
Pickup value Add -100.0...100.0 0.1 0.0 Pickup value Add
Table 664: MAP Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Operation mode 1=Over 1=Over Operation mode
2=Under
Table 665: MAP Non group settings (Advanced)

Absolute hysteresis 0.01...100.00 0.01 0.10 Absolute hysteresis for operation
615 series ANSI 765

Technical Manual

Table 666: MAP Monitored data
MAP Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 667: MAP Technical data
Operation accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

Table 668: MAP Technical revision history
766 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Protection related functions
Section 5 Protection related functions
5.1 Three-phase inrush detector INR
Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 3I2f> INR
A070377-ANSI V1 EN
5.1.3 Functionality
The three-phase inrush detector function INR is used to coordinate transformer inrush
situations in distribution networks.
Transformer inrush detection is based on the following principle: the output signal BLK2H
is activated once the numerically derived ratio of second harmonic current I_2H and the
fundamental frequency current I_1H exceeds the set value.
The trip time characteristic for the function is of definite time (DT) type.
The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and resets
timers.
615 series ANSI 767

Technical Manual

The operation of INR can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
A070694 V2 EN
I_2H/I_1H
This module calculates the ratio of the second harmonic (I_2H) and fundamental
frequency (I_1H) phase currents. The calculated value is compared to the set Pickup
value. If the calculated value exceeds the set Pickup value, the module output is activated.
Level detector
The output of the phase specific level detector is activated when the fundamental
frequency current I_1H exceeds five percent of the nominal current.
Timer
Once activated, the timer runs until the set Trip delay time value. The time characteristic
is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the Trip delay time value, the
BLK2H output is activated. After the timer has elapsed and the inrush situation still exists,
the BLK2H signal remains active until the I_2H/I_1H ratio drops below the value set for
the ratio in all phases, that is, until the inrush situation is over. If the drop-off situation
768 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
occurs within the trip time up counting, the reset timer is activated. If the drop-off time
exceeds Reset delay time, the operation timer is reset.
The BLOCK input can be controlled with a binary input, a horizontal communication input
or an internal signal of the relay program. The activation of the BLOCK input prevents the
BLK2H output from being activated.
It is recommended to use the second harmonic and the waveform based

inrush blocking from the 87T function, if available.
5.1.5 Application
Transformer protections require high stability to avoid tripping during magnetizing inrush
conditions. A typical example of an inrush detector application is doubling the pickup
value of an overcurrent protection during inrush detection.
The inrush detection function can be used to selectively block overcurrent and ground-
fault function stages when the ratio of second harmonic component over the fundamental
component exceeds the set value.
Other applications of this function include the detection of inrush in lines connected to a
transformer.
615 series ANSI 769

Technical Manual
A070695 V4 EN
Figure 386: Inrush current in transformer
It is recommended to use the second harmonic and the waveform based

inrush blocking from the 87T function, if available.
5.1.6 Signals
Table 669: INR Input signals
I_2H_A SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase A current
I_1H_A SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase A current
I_2H_B SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase B current
I_1H_B SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase B current
I_2H_C SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase C current
I_1H_C SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status
770 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 670: INR Output signals

BLK2H BOOLEAN Second harmonic based block
5.1.7 Settings
Table 671: INR Group settings (Basic)
Pickup value 5...100 % 1 20 Ratio of the 2. to the 1. harmonic leading to
restraint
Table 672: INR Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Table 673: INR Non group settings (Advanced)


Table 674: INR Monitored data
INR Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
615 series ANSI 771

Technical Manual

Table 675: INR Technical data
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn
Current measurement:
Ratio I2f/I1f measurement:
Reset time +35 ms / -0 ms
Trip time accuracy +35 ms / -0 ms

Table 676: INR Technical revision history
5.2 Circuit breaker failure protection 50BF
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 3I>/Io>BF 50BF
GUID-12D6BD6F-2B26-453D-B62F-FC134EC98931 V3 EN
772 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
5.2.3 Functionality
The circuit breaker failure protection function 50BF is activated by trip commands from
the protection functions. The commands are either internal commands to the terminal or
external commands through binary inputs. The pickup command is always a default for
three-phase operation. 50BF includes a three-phase conditional or unconditional retrip
function, and also a three-phase conditional back-up trip function.
50BF uses the same levels of current detection for both retrip and back-up trip. The
operating values of the current measuring elements can be set within a predefined setting
range. The function has two independent timers for trip purposes: a retrip timer for the
repeated tripping of its own breaker and a back-up timer for the trip logic operation for
upstream breakers. A minimum trip pulse length can be set independently for the trip
output.
if desired.

The operation of 50BF can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the next sections. Also further information on the retrip and
backup trip logics is given in sub-module diagrams.
I_A Level
I_B detector
I_C 1
Timer 1
POSCLOSE Start t Retrip
TRRET
PICKUP logic logic
Timer 2
Level Back-up
IG OR Io detector t trip TRBU
2 logic
Timer 3
CB_FAULT t CB_FAULT_AL
BLOCK
GUID-982A97AE-DFE5-4AFF-B894-D12B078F25C4 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 773

Technical Manual
Level detector 1
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Current value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Current value, the level detector reports the exceeding of
the value to the start, retrip and backup trip logics. The parameter should be set low enough
so that breaker failure situations with small fault current or high load current can be
detected. The setting can be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection
function to start the breaker failure protection.
Level detector 2
The measured residual current is compared to the set Current value Res. If the measured
value exceeds the set Current value Res, the level detector reports the exceeding of the
value to the pickup and backup trip logics. In high-impedance grounded systems, the
residual current at phase-to-ground faults is normally much smaller than the short circuit
currents. To detect a breaker failure at single-phase ground faults in these systems, it is
necessary to measure the residual current separately. In effectively grounded systems,
also the setting of the ground-fault current protection can be chosen at a relatively low
current level. The current setting should be chosen in accordance with the setting of the
sensitive ground-fault protection.
Start logic
The start logic is used to manage the starting of the timer 1 and timer 2. It also resets the
function after the circuit breaker failure is handled. On the rising edge of the PICKUP
input, the enabling signal is send to the timer 1 and timer 2.
Function resetting is prevented during the next 150 ms. The 150 ms time elapse is
provided to prevent malfunctioning due to oscillation in the starting signal.
In case the setting Pickup latching mode is set to "Level sensitive", the 50BF is reset
immediately after the PICKUP signal is deactivated. The recommended setting value is
"Rising edge".
The resetting of the function depends on the CB failure mode setting.
• If CB failure mode is set to "Current", the resetting logic further depends on the CB
failure trip mode setting.
774 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 3", the resetting logic requires that the
values of all the phase currents drop below the Current value setting.
values of the phase currents and the residual current drops below the Current
value and Current value Res setting respectively.
values of all the phase currents and the residual current drop below the Current
value and Current value Res setting.
• If CB failure mode is set to the "Breaker status" mode, the resetting logic requires that
the circuit breaker is in the open condition.
• If the CB failure mode setting is set to "Both", the resetting logic requires that the
circuit breaker is in the open condition and the values of the phase currents and the
residual current drops below the Current value and Current value Res setting
respectively.
The activation of the BLOCK input resets the function.

CB failure trip mode
“1 out of 4"
IG OR I0 >
From Level detector 2 AND
OR
I>
From Level detector 1
OR
“1 out of 3"
OR AND
“2 out of 4"
CB failure mode ”Current” AND

AND
Set
Enable timer
Reset
POSCLOSE
CB failure mode ”Breaker
status” AND OR
TON
150.0 ms
PICKUP
Pickup latching mode AND

”Level sensitive”
BLOCK
GUID-623C4380-BE93-4A7D-B65F-293C304D5691 V1 EN
Figure 389: Start logic
615 series ANSI 775

Technical Manual
Timer 1
Once activated, the timer runs until the set Retrip time value has elapsed. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set with
Retrip time, the retrip logic is activated. A typical setting is 0...50 ms.
Timer 2
Once activated, the timer runs until the set CB failure delay value has elapsed. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the set maximum
time value CB failure delay, the backup trip logic is activated. The value of this setting is
made as low as possible at the same time as any unwanted operation is avoided. A typical
setting is 90 - 150 ms, which is also dependent on the retrip timer.
The minimum time delay for the CB failure delay can be estimated as:
CBfailuredelay ≥ Retriptime + tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + tmargin

tcbopen maximum opening time for the circuit breaker
tBFP_reset maximum time for the breaker failure protection to detect the correct breaker function (the current
criteria reset)
tmargin safety margin
It is often required that the total fault clearance time is less than the given critical time. This
time often depends on the ability to maintain transient stability in case of a fault close to
a power plant.
776 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-1A2C47ED-0DCF-4225-9294-2AEC97C14D5E V1 EN
Figure 390: Timeline of the breaker failure protection
Timer 3
This module is activated by the CB_FAULT signal. Once activated, the timer runs until the
set CB fault delay value has elapsed. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the
operation timer has reached the maximum time value CB fault delay, the CB_FAULT_AL
output is activated. After the set time, an alarm is given so that the circuit breaker can be
repaired. A typical value is 5 s.
Retrip logic
The retrip logic provides the TRRET output, which can be used to give a retrip signal for
the main circuit breaker. Timer 1 activates the retrip logic. The operation of the retrip logic
depends on the CB fail retrip mode setting.
• The retrip logic is inactive if the CB fail retrip mode setting is set to "Disabled".
• If CB fail retrip mode is set to the "Current check" mode, the activation of the retrip
output TRRET depends on the CB failure mode setting.
• If CB failure mode is set to the "Current" mode, TRRET is activated when the
value of any phase current exceeds the Current value setting. The TRRET
output remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until all
phase current values drop below the Current value setting, whichever is longer.
• If CB failure mode is set to the "Breaker status" mode, TRRET is activated if the
circuit breaker is in the closed position. The TRRET output remains active for
615 series ANSI 777

Technical Manual
the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or the time the circuit breaker is in
the closed position, whichever is longer.
• If CB failure mode is set to "Both", TRRET is activated when either of the
"Breaker status" or "Current" mode condition is satisfied.
• If CB fail retrip mode is set to the "Without check" mode, TRRET is activated once
the timer 1 is activated without checking the current level. The TRRET output
remains active for a fixed time set with the Trip pulse time setting.
The activation of the BLOCK input or the CB_FAULT_AL output deactivates the TRRET
output.
Timer 1 elapsed
From Timer 1
AND
CB fail retrip mode
”Without check”
OR
CB fail retrip mode
”Current check” AND TRRET
AND
CB failure mode ”Current”

AND
status”
CB failure mode ”Both”
AND OR
I>
From Level detector 1
POSCLOSE AND
OR
CB_FAULT_AL
From Timer 3
BLOCK
GUID-11B700C8-7CCF-41E4-89C7-741D4AC71887 V1 EN
Figure 391: Retrip logic
Backup trip logic

The backup trip logic provides the TRBU output which can be used to trip the upstream
backup circuit breaker when the main circuit breaker fails to clear the fault. The backup
trip logic is activated by the timer 2 module or timer-enabling signal from the start logic
module (rising edge of the PICKUP input detected), and simultaneously CB_FAULT_AL
is active. The operation of the backup logic depends on the CB failure mode setting.
• If the CB failure mode is set to "Current", the activation of TRBU depends on the CB
failure trip mode setting.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 3", the failure detection is based on any
of the phase currents exceeding the Current value setting. Once TRBU is
activated, it remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or
778 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
until the values of all the phase currents drop below the Current value setting,
whichever takes longer.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 4", the failure detection is based on
either a phase current or a residual current exceeding the Current value or
Current value Res setting respectively. Once TRBU is activated, it remains
active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until the values of all
the phase currents or residual currents drop below the Current value and
Current value Res setting respectively, whichever takes longer.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "2 out of 4", the failure detection requires that
a phase current and a residual current both exceed the Current value and
Current value Res setting respectively or two phase currents exceeding the
Current value. Once TRBU is activated, it remains active for the time set with
the Trip pulse time setting or until the values of all the phase currents drop
below the Current value, whichever takes longer.
In most applications, "1 out of 3" is sufficient.
• If the CB failure mode is set to "Breaker status", the TRBU output is activated if the
circuit breaker is in the closed position. Once activated, the TRBU output remains
active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or the time the circuit breaker
is in the closed position, whichever is longer.
• If the CB failure mode setting is set to "Both", TRBU is activated when the "Breaker
status" or "Current" mode conditions are satisfied.
The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the TRBU output.
615 series ANSI 779

Technical Manual
BLOCK
CB_FAULT_AL
From Timer 3
AND
Enable timer
From Start logic
OR
Timer 2 elapsed
From Timer 2
2 or 3 ph
I> 1, 2 or 3 ph
From level detector 1
AND TRBU
OR
AND
AND
CB failure trip mode AND

”2 out of 4"
I0 >
From level detector 2
CB failure trip mode AND OR

”1 out of 3"
OR
AND

”1 out of 4"
AND
CB failure mode ”Current”
OR
CB failure mode ”Both” OR
POSCLOSE
AND
status”
OR
CB failure mode ”Both”
GUID-E528053C-4F7E-409A-8AB1-874F6EAC0F03 V1 EN
Figure 392: Backup trip logic
5.2.5 Application
The n-1 criterion is often used in the design of a fault clearance system. This means that
the fault is cleared even if some component in the fault clearance system is faulty. A circuit
breaker is a necessary component in the fault clearance system. For practical and
economical reasons, it is not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker for the protected
component, but breaker failure protection is used instead.
The breaker failure function issues a backup trip command to up-stream circuit breakers
in case the original circuit breaker fails to trip for the protected component. The detection
of a failure to break the current through the breaker is made by measuring the current or
by detecting the remaining trip signal (unconditional).
50BF can also retrip. This means that a second trip signal is sent to the protected circuit
breaker. The retrip function is used to increase the operational reliability of the breaker.
780 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The function can also be used to avoid backup tripping of several breakers in case mistakes
occur during protection relay maintenance and tests.
50BF is initiated by operating different protection functions or digital logics inside the
protection relay. It is also possible to initiate the function externally through a binary
input.
50BF can be blocked by using an internally assigned signal or an external signal from a
binary input. This signal blocks the function of the breaker failure protection even when
the timers have started or the timers are reset.
The retrip timer is initiated after the pickup input is set to true. When the pre-defined time
setting is exceeded, 50BF issues the retrip and sends a trip command, for example, to the
circuit breaker's second trip coil. Both a retrip with current check and an unconditional
retrip are available. When a retrip with current check is chosen, the retrip is performed
only if there is a current flow through the circuit breaker.
The backup trip timer is also initiated at the same time as the retrip timer. If 50BF detects
a failure in tripping the fault within the set backup delay time, which is longer than the
retrip time, it sends a backup trip signal to the chosen backup breakers. The circuit
breakers are normally upstream breakers which feed fault current to a faulty feeder.
The backup trip always includes a current check criterion. This means that the criterion for
a breaker failure is that there is a current flow through the circuit breaker after the set
backup delay time.
A070696-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 393: Typical breaker failure protection scheme in distribution substations
615 series ANSI 781

Technical Manual
5.2.6 Signals
Table 677: 50BF Input signals
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block CBFP operation
PICKUP BOOLEAN 0=False CBFP pickup command
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False CB in closed position
CB_FAULT BOOLEAN 0=False CB faulty and unable to trip
Table 678: 50BF Output signals

CB_FAULT_AL BOOLEAN Delayed CB failure alarm
TRBU BOOLEAN Backup trip
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip
5.2.7 Settings
Table 679: 50BF Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Current value 0.05...2.00 xIn 0.05 0.30 Operating phase current
Current value Res 0.05...2.00 xIn 0.05 0.30 Operating residual current
CB failure trip mode 1=2 out of 4 2=1 out of 3 Backup trip current check mode
2=1 out of 3
3=1 out of 4
CB failure mode 1=Current 1=Current Operating mode of function
2=Breaker status
3=Both
CB fail retrip mode 1=Disabled 1=Disabled Operating mode of retrip logic
2=Without Check
3=Current check
Retrip time 0...60000 ms 10 120 Delay timer for retrip
CB failure delay 0...60000 ms 10 240 Delay timer for backup trip
782 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 680: 50BF Non group settings (Advanced)

CB fault delay 0...60000 ms 10 5000 Circuit breaker faulty delay
Measurement mode 2=DFT 3=Peak-to-Peak Phase current measurement mode of function
3=Peak-to-Peak
Trip pulse time 0...60000 ms 10 200 Pulse length of retrip and backup trip outputs
Pickup latching mode 1=Rising edge 1=Rising edge Pickup reset delayed or immediately
2=Level sensitive

Table 681: 50BF Monitored data
50BF Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 682: 50BF Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz


Table 683: 50BF Technical revision history
B Default trip pulse time changed to 150 ms
C Added new setting parameter Pickup latching mode.
Maximum value changed to 2.00 xIn for the Current
value setting.
E Maximum value for Current value and Current value
Res changed from “1.00 x In” to “2.00 x In”.
615 series ANSI 783

Technical Manual
5.3 Master trip 86/94
Master trip TRPPTRC Master Trip 86/94
A071286-ANSI V2 EN
5.3.3 Functionality
The master trip function 86/94 is intended to be used as a trip command collector and
handler after the protection functions. The features of this function influence the trip
signal behavior of the circuit breaker. The minimum trip pulse length can be set when the
non-latched mode is selected. It is also possible to select the latched or lockout mode for
the trip signal.

When the 86/94 function is disabled, all trip outputs which are intended to
go through the function to the circuit breaker trip coil are blocked.
The operation of 86/94 can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
784 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A070882-ANSI V2 EN
Timer
The duration of the TRIP output signal from 86/94 can be adjusted with the Trip pulse
time setting when the "Non-latched" operation mode is used. The pulse length should be
long enough to secure the opening of the breaker. For three-pole tripping, 86/94 has a
single input TRIP, through which all trip output signals are routed from the protection
functions within the protection relay, or from external protection functions via one or
more of the protection relay's binary inputs. The function has a single trip output TRIP for
connecting the function to one or more of the protection relay's binary outputs, and also to
other functions within the protection relay requiring this signal.
The BLOCK input blocks the TRIP output and resets the timer.
Lockout logic
86/94 is provided with possibilities to activate a lockout. When activated, the lockout can
be manually reset after checking the primary fault by activating the RST_LKOUT input or
from the LHMI clear menu parameter. When using the "Latched" mode, the resetting of
the TRIP output can be done similarly as when using the "Lockout" mode. It is also
possible to reset the "Latched" mode remotely through a separate communication
parameter.
The minimum pulse trip function is not active when using the "Lockout"
or "Latched" modes but only when the "Non-latched" mode is selected.
The CL_LKOUT and TRIP outputs can be blocked with the BLOCK input.
Table 684: Operation modes for the 86/94 trip output

Mode Operation
Non-latched The Trip pulse length parameter gives the minimum
pulse length for TRIP
Latched TRIP is latched ; both local and remote clearing is

possible.
Lockout TRIP is locked and can be cleared only locally via
menu or the RST_LKOUT input.
615 series ANSI 785

Technical Manual
5.3.5 Application
All trip signals from different protection functions are routed through the trip logic. The
most simplified application of the logic function is linking the trip signal and ensuring that
the signal is long enough.
The tripping logic in the protection relay is intended to be used in the three-phase tripping
for all fault types (3ph operating). To prevent the closing of a circuit breaker after a trip,
86/94 can block the 52 closing.
86/94 is intended to be connected to one trip coil of the corresponding circuit breaker. If
tripping is needed for another trip coil or another circuit breaker which needs, for example,
different trip pulse time, another trip logic function can be used. The two instances of the
PTRC function are identical, only the names of the functions, 86/94-1 and 86/94-2, are
different. Therefore, all references made to only 86/94-1 apply to 86/94-2 as well.
The inputs from the protection functions are connected to the TRIP input. Usually, a logic
block OR is required to combine the different function outputs to this input. The TRIP
output is connected to the binary outputs on the IO board. This signal can also be used for
other purposes within the protection relay, for example when starting the breaker failure
protection.
86/94 is used for simple three-phase tripping applications.
786 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
MASTER TRIP 1 LOGIC

+ X100
Breaker
51P Trip
OR 86/94-1 16
Open
50P-1 Trip
TRPPTRC1 PO3
50P-2 Trip BLOCK TRIP
OR Signal to
50P-3 Trip TRIP CL_LKOUT 17
51LT Trip RST_LKOUT 18 Trip Coil 1
46-1 Trip With lock-out mode
selection
TCM-1 19
46-2 Trip
51G Trip
50G-1 Trip
50G-2 Trip
50G-3 Trip
51N Trip
50N-1 Trip
50N-2 Trip
50N-3 Trip
50SEF Trip
46PD Trip
49F Trip
50BF Retrip
AFD-1 Trip
AFD-2 Trip
AFD-3 Trip
BI 4 (Lockout reset)
79 OPEN_CB
52-1 EXE_OP
A070881-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 396: Typical 86/94 connection
5.3.6 Signals
Table 685: 86/94 Input signals
TRIP BOOLEAN 0=False Trip
RST_LKOUT BOOLEAN 0=False Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function
Table 686: 86/94 Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal
CL_LKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
615 series ANSI 787

Technical Manual
5.3.7 Settings
Table 687: 86/94 Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Trip pulse time 20...60000 ms 1 250 Minimum duration of trip output signal
Trip output mode 1=Non-latched 1=Non-latched Select the operation mode for trip output
2=Latched
3=Lockout

Table 688: 86/94 Monitored data
86/94 Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 689: 86/94 Technical revision history
B -
C -
E Setting Trip output mode default setting is changed
to "Latched".
F Internal improvement.
5.4 High-impedance fault detection HIZ
High-impedance fault detection PHIZ HIF HIZ
788 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

HIZ
IG TRIP
BLOCK
CB_CLOSED
CB_OPEN
GUID-C3405080-34F8-466A-8C2F-214B852164EE V1 EN
5.4.3 Functionality
A small percentage of ground faults have a very large impedance. They are comparable to
load impedance and consequently have very little fault current. These high-impedance
faults do not pose imminent danger to power system equipment. However, they are a
substantial threat to humans and properties; people can touch or get close to conductors
carrying large amounts of energy.
ABB has developed a patented technology (US Patent 7,069,116 B2 June 27, 2006, US
Patent 7,085,659 B2 August 1, 2006) to detect a high-impedance fault.
The high-impedance fault detection function HIZ also contains a blocking functionality.
It is possible to block function outputs, if desired.
HIZ is limited to be used in 60 Hz electrical networks with efficiently

grounded or isolated neutral.

HIZ uses a multi-algorithm approach. Each algorithm uses various features of ground
currents to detect a high-impedance fault.
Although the HIZ algorithm is very sophisticated, the setting required to operate the
function is simple. The Security Level setting, with the setting range of 1 to 10, is set to
strike a balance between the extremes of security and dependability which together
constitute the reliability of any system. The setting value “10” is more secure than “1”.
The higher the Security Level setting, the lower the probability of false detection, but the
system might miss out some genuine fault. On the other hand, a lower setting would make
the system operate more dependably for high-impedance faults in the line, but the
operation is more likely for other transients in the system. There are events in electrical
615 series ANSI 789

Technical Manual
networks which can cause similar current waveforms like high-impedance faults. These
events could then be detected by the HIZ algorithm causing unnecessary detections.
Normally, electrical network operator does not know the existence of these events well
and those can also be happening very randomly. The effect is also always dependent on
event location compared to protection relay measurement location. All these facts make
the HIZ algorithm operation in certain electrical networks quite hard to measure and
forecast beforehand. There is not any direct formula which can calculate the exact right
setting based on known electrical network parameters.
It is hence recommended to set the value midway to “5” initially. Based on experience and
confidence gained in a particular application, the setting can be moved either side. In many
cases, it would be a good practice to use HIZ as an indicative function during a piloting
phase, until enough experience has been gathered and a suitable setting found.
GUID-91FFCBAB-470F-43DD-AC86-E673BAACCBA6 V1 EN
Figure 398: Electrical power system equipped with HIZ
Power system signals are acquired, filtered and then processed by individual high-
impedance fault detection algorithm. The results of these individual algorithms are further
processed by a decision logic to provide the detection decision. The decision logic can be
modified depending on the application requirement.
790 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-82695BC5-1E26-4AF4-97D9-252671CF972F V1 EN
Figure 399: Block diagram of HIZ
HIZ is based on algorithms that use ground current signatures which are considered non-
stationary, temporally volatile and of various burst duration. All harmonic and non-
harmonic components within the available data window can play a vital role in the high-
impedance fault detection. A major challenge is to develop a data model that
acknowledges that high-impedance faults could take place at any time within the
observation window of the signal and could be delayed randomly and attenuated
substantially. The model is motivated by extensive research, actual experimental
observations in the laboratory, field testing and what traditionally represents an accurate
depiction of a non-stationary signal with a time-dependent spectrum.
GUID-61D297F5-783F-4CF2-BD16-18CE537C9E95-ANSI V1 EN GUID-B9AC5923-6A67-431B-A785-171FD132E1A6-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 400: Validation of HIZ on gravel Figure 401: Validation of HIZ on

concrete
615 series ANSI 791

Technical Manual
GUID-988539D2-9893-4B16-8CF6-C32E17991628-ANSI V1 EN GUID-9F87C93B-BF44-4488-BD97-209FC90B592A-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 402: Validation of HIZ on sand Figure 403: Validation of HIZ on grass
5.4.5 Application
HIZ is used to detect a downed conductor dropping to a very resistive ground, causing a
ground fault which is very difficult to detect by a conventional protection relay
functionality. HIZ is then targeted to be used with overhead lines. HIZ is limited to be used
in 60 Hz electrical networks with efficiently grounded or isolated neutral.
Electric power lines experience faults for many reasons. In most cases, electrical faults
manifest in mechanical damage, which must be repaired before returning the line to
service.
Most of the electrical network faults are ground faults. Conventional protection systems
based on overcurrent, impedance or other principles are suitable for detecting relatively
low-impedance faults which have a relatively large fault current.
However, a small percentage of the ground faults have a very large impedance. They are
comparable to load impedance and consequently have very little fault current. These high-
impedance faults do not pose imminent danger to power system equipment. However,
they are a considerable threat to people and property. The IEEE Power System Relay
Committee working group on High Impedance Fault Detection Technology defines High
Impedance Faults as those that 'do not produce enough fault current to be detectable by
conventional overcurrent relays or fuses.
HIZ always needs sensitive IG measurement.
High-impedance fault (HIZ) detection requires a different approach than that for
conventional low-impedance faults. Reliable detection of HIZ provides safety to humans
and animals. HIZ detection can also prevent fire and minimize property damage. ABB has
792 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
developed innovative technology for high-impedance fault detection with over ten years
of research resulting in many successful field tests.
5.4.6 Signals
Table 690: HIZ Input signals
IG SIGNAL 0 Ground current measured using SEF CT
CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False Circuit Breaker Closed input
CB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Circuit Breaker Open input
Table 691: HIZ Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
5.4.7 Settings
Table 692: HIZ Group settings (Basic)
Security Level 1...10 1 5 Security Level
Table 693: HIZ Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
System type 1=Grounded 1=Grounded System Type
2=Ungrounded
615 series ANSI 793

Technical Manual

Table 694: HIZ Monitored data
Position Dbpos 0=intermediate Position
1=open
2=closed
3=faulty
HIZ Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 695: HIZ Technical revision history
C Added inputs for Circuit Breaker Closed and Circuit
Breaker Open
5.5 Binary signal transfer BST
Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO BST BST
794 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

BST
SEND_SIG_1 RECV_SIG_1
SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A
GUID-203004E3-0DF3-4D30-979F-A0951F30B159 V1 EN
5.5.3 Functionality
The binary signal transfer function BST is used for transferring binary signals between the
local and remote end line differential protection relays. The function includes eight binary
signals that are transferred in the protection communication telegram and can be freely
configured and used for any purpose in the line differential application.
BST transfers binary data continuously over the protection communication channel
between the terminals. Each of the eight signals are bidirectional and the binary data sent
locally is available remotely as a received signal.
BST includes a minimum pulse time functionality for the received binary signals. Each
received signal has its own minimum pulse time setting parameter.
The function includes two alarm output signals. The SEND_SIG_A output signal is
updated according to the status of the sent binary signals. The RECV_SIG_A output
signal is updated according to the status of the received binary signals. Each signal can be
separately included or excluded from the alarm logic with a setting parameter.

The Signal 1...8 mode setting can be used for changing the operation of the bidirectional
signal channel. The signal channel can be disabled by setting the corresponding parameter
value to “Not in use”. When the signal channel is disabled locally or remotely, the
corresponding RECV_SIG_1...8 signal status is always false on both ends.
615 series ANSI 795

Technical Manual
GUID-54526C83-99FA-478B-877A-394234289F91 V1 EN
Binary signal send

The status of the inputs is continuously sent in the line differential protection telegrams.
SEND_SIG_A can be used for alarming based on the status of SEND_SIG_1...8. By
selecting the signal mode as "In use, alarm sel.", the sending status of the corresponding
signal affects also the activation criteria of SEND_SIG_A. Further, in case more than one
signal channels are selected into the alarm logic, the activation criteria can be defined
according to "Any of selected" (OR) or "All of selected" (AND).
Binary signal receive

The function receives continuous binary data within the protection telegrams from the
remote end protection relay. This received binary data status is then available as the
RECV_SIG_1...8 outputs on the local end protection relay. RECV_SIG_A can be
used for alarming based on the status of RECV_SIG_1...8. By selecting the signal
mode as "In use, alarm sel.", the received status of the corresponding signal affects the
activation criteria of RECV_SIG_A. Further, in case more than one signal channels are
selected into the alarm logic, the activation criteria can be defined according to "Any of
selected" (OR) or "All of selected" (AND). Each signal has also the Pulse time 1...8 setting
that defines the minimum pulse length for RECV_SIG_1...8. Also, in case the
protection communication supervision detects a failure in the communication, the
RECV_SIG_1...8 outputs are not set to false sooner than the minimum pulse length
defined is first ensured for each signal.
796 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
5.5.5 Application
Among with the analog data, the binary data can also be exchanged with the line
differential protection relays. The usage of the binary data is application specific and can
vary in each separate case. The demands for the speed of the binary signals vary depending
on the usage of the data. When the binary data is used as blocking signals for the line
differential protection, the transfer response is extremely high. Binary signal interchange
can be used in applications such as:
• Remote position indications

• Inter-tripping of the circuit breakers on both line ends
• Blocking of the line differential protection during transformer inrush or current
circuit supervision failure
• Protection schemes; blocking or permissive
• Remote alarming.
The figure shows the overall chain to transfer binary data in an example application. The
position indication of the local circuit breaker is connected to the protection relay’s input
interface and is then available for the protection relay configuration. The circuit breaker
position indication is connected to the first input of BST which is used to send information
to the remote end via communication. In the remote end, this information is handled as a
remote circuit breaker open position and it is available from the first output of BST. This
way the information can be exchanged.
IED configuration IED configuration
Remote CB open Remote CB open

BSTGGIO BSTGGIO
Position indication to Position indication to
SEND_SIG_1 RECV_SIG_1 SEND_SIG_1 RECV_SIG_1
be used e.g. for SEND_SIG_2 RECV_SIG_2
be used e.g. for
SEND_SIG_3 RECV_SIG_3 blocking SEND_SIG_3 RECV_SIG_3 blocking
SEND_SIG_A SEND_SIG_A
RECV_SIG_A RECV_SIG_A
Local CB open Local CB open

position indication position indication
RED 615 RED 615
COMMUNICATION MEDIA
Local CB Local CB
GUID-85FE5892-DDA5-4ED9-9412-A3A48E364EFC V2 EN
Figure 406: Example of usage of binary signal transfer for position indication change
615 series ANSI 797

Technical Manual
5.5.6 Signals
Table 696: BST Input signals
SEND_SIG_1 BOOLEAN 0=False Send signal 1 state
Table 697: BST Output signals

RECV_SIG_1 BOOLEAN Receive signal 1 state
SEND_SIG_A BOOLEAN General logic send signal state
RECV_SIG_A BOOLEAN General logic receive signal state
798 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
5.5.7 Settings
Table 698: BST Group settings (Basic)
Signal 1 mode 1=on 2=on, logic Operation mode for signal 1
2=on, logic included
included
3=off
Signal 2 mode 1=on 2=on, logic Operation mode for signal 2
2=on, logic included
included
3=off
Signal 3 mode 1=on 1=on Operation mode for signal 3
2=on, logic
included
3=off
2=on, logic
included
3=off
2=on, logic
included
3=off
2=on, logic
included
3=off
2=on, logic
included
3=off
2=on, logic
included
3=off
Pulse time 1 0...60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 1
615 series ANSI 799

Technical Manual
Table 699: BST Non group settings (Basic)

Logic mode 1=Any of selected 1=Any of selected Selects the used logic mode for general send/
2=All of selected receive signals

Table 700: BST Technical data
Signalling delay Fiber optic link <5 ms
Galvanic pilot wire link <10 ms

Table 701: BST Technical revision history
5.6 Emergency start-up 62EST
Emergency start-up ESMGAPC ESTART 62EST
GUID-3AF99427-2061-47E1-B3AB-FD1C9BF98E76-ANSI V1 EN
800 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
5.6.3 Functionality
An emergency condition can arise in cases where the motor needs to be started despite
knowing that this can increase the temperature above limits or cause a thermal overload
that can damage the motor. The emergency start-up function 62EST allows motor start-
ups during such emergency conditions. 62EST is only to force the protection relay to
allow the restarting of the motor. After the emergency start input is activated, the motor
can be started normally. 62EST itself does not actually restart the motor.


The operation of 62EST can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
GUID-18128621-4A78-45D0-A788-9116B5213449 V1 EN
Standstill detector
The module detects if the motor is in a standstill condition. The standstill condition can be
detected based on the phase current values. If all three phase currents are below the set
value of Motor standstill A, the motor is considered to be in a standstill condition.
Timer
The timer is a fixed 10-minute timer that is activated when the ST_EMERG_RQ input is
activated and motor standstill condition is fulfilled. Thus, the activation of the
ST_EMERG_RQ input activates the ST_EMERG_ENA output, provided that the motor is
in a standstill condition. The ST_EMERG_ENA output remains active for 10 minutes or as
long as the ST_EMERG_RQ input is high, whichever takes longer.
The activation of the BLOCK input blocks and also resets the timer.
615 series ANSI 801

Technical Manual
The function also provides the ST_EMERG_ENA output change date and time,
T_ST_EMERG. The information is available in the monitored data view.
5.6.5 Application
If the motor needs to be started in an emergency condition at the risk of damaging the
motor, all the external restart inhibits are ignored, allowing the motor to be restarted.
Furthermore, if the calculated thermal level is higher than the restart inhibit level at an
emergency start condition, the calculated thermal level is set slightly below the restart
inhibit level. Also, if the register value of the cumulative start-up time counter exceeds the
restart inhibit level, the value is set slightly below the restart disable value to allow at least
one motor start-up.
The activation of the ST_EMERG_RQ digital input allows to perform emergency start.
The protection relay is forced to a state which allows the restart of motor, and the operator
can now restart the motor. A new emergency start cannot be made until the 10 minute
time-out has passed or until the emergency start is released, whichever takes longer.
The last change of the emergency start output signal is recorded.
5.6.6 Signals
Table 702: 62EST Input signals
ST_EMERG_RQ BOOLEAN 0=False Emergency start input
Table 703: 62EST Output signals

ST_EMERG_ENA BOOLEAN Emergency start
5.6.7 Settings
Table 704: 62EST Group settings (Advanced)
Motor standstill A 0.05...0.20 xIn 0.01 0.12 Current limit to check for motor standstill
condition
802 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 705: 62EST Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable

Table 706: 62EST Monitored data
T_ST_EMERG Timestamp Emergency start activation
timestamp
62EST Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 707: 62EST Technical data
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Table 708: ESM Technical revision history
5.7 Fault locator 21FL
Fault locator SCEFRFLO FLOC 21FL
615 series ANSI 803

Technical Manual

21FL
I_A ALARM
I_B
I_C
I0
I1
I2
V_A_AB
V_B_BC
V_C_CA
V0
V1
V2
BLOCK
TRIGG
TRIGG_XC0F
GUID-942FCEAA-203A-4616-B703-9A792A8FB69A V1 EN
5.7.3 Functionality
The fault locator function 21FL provides impedance-based fault location. It is designed
for radially operated distribution systems. It is applicable for locating short circuits in all
kinds of distribution networks. Ground faults can be located in effectively grounded and
in low-resistance or low-reactance grounded networks. Under certain limitations, 21FL
can also be applied for an ground-fault location in ungrounded distribution networks.
The fault distance calculation is based on locally measured fundamental frequency current
and voltage phasors. The full operation of 21FL requires that all phase currents and phase-
to-ground voltages are measured.
The fault distance estimate is obtained when the function is externally or internally
triggered.

The fault distance calculation is done in two steps. First, the fault type is determined with
the inbuilt Phase Selection Logic (PSL). Second, based on the selected impedance
measuring element (fault loop) the fault distance from the measuring point to the fault
location is calculated.
As a fundamental operation criterion, the phase current and voltage magnitudes must
exceed the threshold values of 2% xIn and 3% xUn, respectively.
The function can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding
parameter values are “Enable" and "Disable".
804 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The operation of 21FL can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
I_A
I_B
Phase ALARM
I_C
selection
V_A_AB logic Fault
impedance
V_B_BC
and Recorded
V_C_CA distance
calculation
data
I0 Trigger
I1 detection
I2
V0
V1
Alarm
V2 indication
TRIGG
TRIGG_XC0F
BLOCK
GUID-5DEC6352-438F-4B66-88F1-F72C0138AECF V1 EN
5.7.4.1 Phase selection logic
Identification of the faulty phases is provided by the built-in Phase Selection Logic based
on combined impedance and current criterion. Phase selection logic is virtually setting-
free and has only one parameter, Z Max phase load, for discriminating a large symmetrical
load from a three-phase fault. The setting Z Max phase load can be calculated using the
equation.
Vxy2
Z Max phase load = 0.8 ⋅
Smax
GUID-BDFF7D0D-9323-4610-84C6-A9B4234136B3 V1 EN (Equation 137)
Vxy Nominal phase-to-phase voltage
Smax Maximum three-phase load
For example, if Vxy = 20 kV and Smax = 1 MVA, then Z Max phase load = 320.0 Ω.
The identification of the faulty phases is compulsory for the correct operation of 21FL.
This is because only one of the impedance-measuring elements (fault loops) provides the
correct result for a specific fault type. A three-phase fault is an exception and theoretically
615 series ANSI 805

Technical Manual
it can be calculated with any of the fault loops. The fault loop used in the fault distance
calculation is indicated in the recorded data Flt loop as specified in Table 709.
Table 709: Fault types and corresponding fault loops
Fault type Description Flt loop
- No fault No fault
A-E Phase A-to-ground fault AG Fault
B-E Phase B-to-ground fault BG Fault
C-E Phase C-to-ground fault CG Fault
A-B Phase A-to-B short circuit fault AB Fault
B-C Phase B-to-C short circuit fault BC Fault
C-A Phase C-to-A short circuit fault AC Fault
A-B-C-(E) Three-phase short circuit ABC Fault
In case of two-phase-to-ground faults (A-B-E, B-C-E or C-A-E), the selected fault loop
depends on the location of the individual ground faults. When the faults are located at the
same feeder, the corresponding phase-to-phase loop (either “AB Fault” or “BC Fault” or
“CA Fault”) is used for calculation. When the faults are located at different feeders, the
phase-to-ground loop (either “AG Fault” or “BG Fault” or “CG Fault”) corresponding to
the faulty phase at the protected feeder is used for calculation.
5.7.4.2 Fault impedance and distance calculation
As soon as a fault condition is recognized by the phase selection logic, the fault distance
calculation is started with one of the seven impedance-measuring elements, that is, the
fault loops. 21FL employs independent algorithms for each fault type to achieve optimal
performance.
The inherent result from the fault distance calculation is the ohmic fault loop impedance
value.
Table 710: The calculated impedance values available in the recorded data
Impedance valule Description
Flt phase reactance Estimated positive sequence reactance from the substation to the fault location
in primary ohms.
Flt point resistance Fault resistance value in the fault spot in primary ohms. The composition of this
term depends on the fault loop as described in the following subsections.
Flt loop resistance The total fault loop resistance from the substation to the fault location in primary
ohms. Fault point resistance is included in this value. The composition of this
term is different for short-circuit and ground-fault loops as described in the
following subsections.
Flt loop reactance The total fault loop reactance from the substation to the fault location in primary
ohms. The composition of this term is different for short-circuit and ground-faults
loops as described in the following subsections.
806 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
These impedance values can be utilized as such or they can be further processed in system
level fault location applications, such as distribution management system (DMS).
Fault loops “AG Fault” or “BG Fault” or “CG Fault”

Fault loops “AG Fault”, “BG Fault” or “CG Fault” are used for single-phase-to-ground
faults. When the individual ground faults are located at different feeders, they are also
applied in the case of two-phase-to-ground fault. In this case, the phase-to-ground loop
(either “AG Fault” or “BG Fault” or “CG Fault”) corresponding to the faulty phase at the
protected feeder, is used for calculation. Figure 411 shows the phase-to-ground fault loop
model. The following impedances are measured and stored in the recorded data of 21FL.
Flt point resistance = Rfault

GUID-2503378E-4AC5-4E9F-9D77-2E7C71592C37 V3 EN (Equation 138)
Flt loop resistance = R1 + RN + Rfault

GUID-4DF67AFC-67E4-4BCB-958E-CC9E4872E252 V3 EN (Equation 139)
Flt loop reactance = X1 + X N

GUID-B4E21936-B993-4A8A-9C4A-7425F8AC4670 V3 EN (Equation 140)
Flt phase reactance = X1

GUID-56EC16DD-7F6A-4DE5-935E-4302196DE21A V3 EN (Equation 141)
R1 Estimated positive-sequence resistance from the substation to the fault location
X1 Estimated positive-sequence reactance from the substation to the fault location
R0 Estimated zero-sequence resistance from the substation to the fault location
X0 Estimated zero-sequence reactance from the substation to the fault location
RN Estimated the ground return path resistance (= (R0 – R1)/3) from the substation to the
fault location
XN Estimated is the ground return path reactance (= (X0 – X1)/3) from the substation to the
fault
Rfault Estimated fault resistance at the fault location
The recorded data Flt phase reactance provides the estimated positive-sequence reactance
from the substation to the fault location.
615 series ANSI 807

Technical Manual
GUID-B455F553-4F09-442D-9297-4262002D5D07 V2 EN
Figure 411: Fault loop impedance for phase-to-ground fault loops “AG Fault”, “BG
Fault” or “CG Fault”
The ground-fault distance calculation algorithm is selected with setting EF algorithm Sel.
Options for the selection are “Load compensation” and “Load modelling”. For the correct
operation of both algorithms there should not be any zero-sequence current sources, for
example, grounding transformers, in front of the protection relay location.
The “Load compensation” algorithm utilizes symmetrical components to compensate for

the effect of load on the measured voltages and currents. In case of radial feeders, this
algorithm should be selected with low-impedance/effectively grounded systems where
the fault current is fed from one side only and there are no in-feeds along the protected line.
The “Load modelling” algorithm takes into account the effect of the load in the measured
currents and voltages by considering it in the fault loop model. In case of radial feeders,
this algorithm can be applied with low-impedance/effectively grounded systems where
the fault current is fed from one side only. The “Load modelling” algorithm has been
especially designed for ungrounded systems.
The “Load modelling” algorithm requires the Equivalent load Dis setting, that is, an
equivalent load distance, as an additional parameter. The derivation and meaning of this
parameter is illustrated in Figure 412, where the load is assumed to be evenly distributed
along the feeder, resulting in the actual voltage drop curve as seen in the middle part of
Figure 412.
In case of evenly distributed load, Equivalent load Dis ~ 0.5. When the load is tapped at
the end of the feeder, Equivalent load Dis = 1.0. If the load distribution is unknown, a
default value of 0.5 can be used for Equivalent load Dis.
The maximum value of the voltage drop, denoted as Vdrop(real), appears at the end of the
feeder. The Equivalent load Dis parameter is the distance at which a single load tap
corresponding to the total load of the feeder would result in a voltage drop equal to
Vdrop(real). The dashed curve shows the voltage drop profile in this case.
808 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Line length = 1p.u.
0 S1 S 2 · · · · · Sn
Actual load distribution
(Evenly distributed load)
Voltage drop (% of Vn) Simplified voltage drop

curve used in algorithm
Vdrop(real)
Actual voltage
drop curve
0 0.5 1.0 Line length (p.u)
distance of equivalent load tap = Equivalent load Dis
0 1.0
ƩS i
GUID-6325E875-F7DB-4D1B-978A-1E1583EB544C V1 EN
Figure 412: Description of the equivalent load distance
The exact value for Equivalent load Dis can be calculated based on the load flow and
voltage drop calculations using data from DMS-system and the following equation.
Vd ( real )
Equivalent load Dis =
Vd ( tap,d =1)
GUID-348E8311-D555-4897-BF7E-077024585AAC V1 EN (Equation 142)
Vd(real) The actual maximum voltage drop of the feeder
Vd(tap,d=1) The fictional voltage drop, if the entire load would be tapped at the end (d=1) of the
feeder (not drawn in Figure 412). The calculation of this value requires data from the
DMS system.
Alternatively, the setting Equivalent load Dis can be determined by conducting a single-
phase ground-fault test (Rfault = 0 Ω) at that point of the feeder where the maximum actual
voltage drop takes place. This point is typically located at the end of the main line. As a
result, the calculated value is stored in the recorded data Equivalent load Dis.
615 series ANSI 809

Technical Manual
In addition, when the setting EF algorithm Sel is equal to “Load modelling”, the EF
algorithm Cur Sel setting determines whether zero-sequence “Io based” or negative-
sequence “I2 based” current based algorithm is used. The difference between “Io based”
and “I2 based” methods is that “I2 based” does not require the Ph capacitive React and Ph
leakage Ris settings. In case of “Io based”, these settings are needed to compensate for the
influence of the line-charging capacitances of the protected feeder. This improves the
accuracy of the fault location estimate when fault resistance is involved in the fault.
Under certain restrictions, the “Load modelling” algorithm can also be applied to
ungrounded networks. In this case the EF algorithm Cur Sel setting should be set to “Io
based” and thus Ph capacitive React and Ph leakage Ris settings must be determined.
The prerequisite for the operation of 21FL in ground faults in ungrounded networks is that
the ground-fault current of the network corresponding to a solid fault exceeds the pre-fault
load current; that is the Equation 143 is valid.
Ief (Rfault =0)

Flt to Lod Cur ratio = ≥1
ILoad
GUID-CABC3779-DAB9-4785-8451-DCCC8EAA034F V3 EN (Equation 143)
This ratio is estimated by 21FL and stored in the recorded data Flt to Lod Cur ratio together
with the fault distance estimate.
In case of ungrounded network, sufficient fault current magnitude resulting in Flt to Lod
Cur ratio >1 can be achieved, for example, with proper switching operations in the
background network, if possible, which increase the fault current. If the faulty feeder is re-
energized after the switching operation, a new estimate for the fault distance can be
obtained. Fault resistance decreases the fault location accuracy and the resistance should
not be too high, the maximum is a few hundred ohms. Also low value of Flt to Lod Cur
ratio causes inaccuracy and affects the quality of fault distance estimate. Considered
inaccuracies affecting the calculated fault distance estimate are reported in the recorded
result quality indicator value Flt Dist quality in Table 711.
Fault loops “AB Fault”, “BC Fault” or “CA Fault”

Fault loops “AB Fault”, “BC Fault” or “CA Fault” are used for phase-to-phase short
circuit faults as well as in the case of a two-phase-to-ground fault if the individual ground
faults are located at the same feeder. Figure 413 shows the phase-to-phase fault loop
model. The following impedances are measured and stored in the recorded data of 21FL.
Rfault
Flt point resistance =
2
GUID-F8007C95-5C0B-4FBA-B724-0BC45E64841F V3 EN (Equation 144)
Rfault
Flt loop resistance = R1 +
2
GUID-CB02F4ED-8E75-4C30-BB25-3F4984D75FC8 V3 EN (Equation 145)
810 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Flt loop reactance = Flt phase reactance = X 1

GUID-049B892B-9031-4361-843B-7102E6A4DA17 V3 EN (Equation 146)
GUID-9CBC31C7-4DF6-4555-9029-4188CCC5533C V2 EN
Figure 413: Fault loop impedance for phase-to-phase fault loops (either “AB Fault”,
“BC Fault” or “CA Fault”)
The fault distance calculation algorithm for the phase-to-phase fault loops is defined by
using settings Load Com PP loops and Enable simple model. Options for the selection are
"Disabled" or "Enabled".
Load compensation can be enabled or disabled with setting Load Com PP loops. The load
compensation should be disabled only if the ratio between the fault current and load
current is large or when the value of the fault distance estimate for the short circuit fault
is required from each shot of an autoreclosing sequence.
The fault distance calculation is most accurate when calculated with the fault loop model.
This model requires positive sequence impedances of the protected feeder to be given as
settings. If these settings are not available, valid impedance values can be calculated also
without the fault loop model with setting Enable simple model = “TRUE”. However, valid
distance estimate, that is, the conversion of measured impedance (‘’electrical fault
distance’’) into a physical fault distance requires accurate positive sequence impedance
settings.
Fault loop “ABC Fault”

Fault loop “ABC Fault” is used exclusively for the three-phase short circuit fault. Figure
414 shows the three-phase fault loop model. The following impedances are measured and
stored in the recorded data of 21FL.
Flt point resistance = Rfault

GUID-2503378E-4AC5-4E9F-9D77-2E7C71592C37 V3 EN (Equation 147)
Flt loop resistance = R1 + Rfault

GUID-F9E2B211-9C30-4A81-ABD4-525CC10AB7A8 V2 EN (Equation 148)
Flt loop reactance = Flt phase reactance = X 1

GUID-049B892B-9031-4361-843B-7102E6A4DA17 V3 EN (Equation 149)
615 series ANSI 811

Technical Manual
GUID-359785B9-1D24-4751-B018-2225F04D7A2F V2 EN
Figure 414: Fault loop impedance for a three-phase fault loop (“ABC Fault”)
The three-phase fault distance is calculated with a special measuring element using
positive-sequence quantities. This is advantageous especially in case of non-transposed
(asymmetric) lines, as the influence of line parameter asymmetry is reduced. If the line is
non-transposed, all the phase-to-phase loops have different fault loop reactances. The use
of positive-sequence quantities results in the average value of phase-to-phase loop
reactances, that is, the most representative estimate in case of three-phase faults.
The fault distance calculation algorithm for the three-phase fault loop is defined by using
settings Load Com PP loops and Enable simple model. Options for the selection are
"Disabled" or "Enabled".
Load compensation can be enabled or disabled with setting Load Com PP loops. The load
compensation should be disabled only if the ratio between the fault current and load
current is large or when the value of the fault distance estimate for the short circuit fault
is required from each shot of an autoreclosing sequence.
The fault distance calculation is most accurate when the calculation is made with the fault
loop model. This model requires positive sequence impedances of the protected feeder to
be given as settings. If these settings are not available, valid impedance values can be
calculated also without the fault loop model with setting Enable simple model = “TRUE”.
However, valid distance estimate, that is, the conversion of measured impedance
(‘’electrical fault distance’’) into a physical fault distance requires accurate positive
sequence impedance settings.
Estimation of fault resistance in different fault loops

The fault point resistance value provided by the impedance calculation is available in
recorded data Flt point resistance and it depends on the applied fault loop as shown in
Figure 415. In case of ground faults, the estimated fault point resistance includes the total
fault point resistance between the faulted phase and ground, for example, the arc and
grounding resistances. In case of phase-to-phase faults, the estimated fault point
resistance is half of the total fault point resistance between the phases. In case of a three-
phase fault, the estimated fault point resistance equals the total fault point resistance as per
phase value, for example, the arc resistance per phase.
812 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Fault loops Fault loops Fault loop

AG, BG
AB, BC and CA ABC
and CG
VL1 R1 X1 IF IF IF
A ~ Rfault/2 Rfault
VL2 R1 X1 Rfault IF IF
B ~
R1 X1 Rfault/2 IF Rfault
VL3
C ~ Rfault
IF
N
RN XN
E
GUID-5CD4F4DA-2CC5-4432-856B-B4A6C5A739B4 V1 EN
Figure 415: Definition of a physical fault point resistance in different fault loops
Steady-state asymmetry and load compensation

In reality, power systems are never perfectly symmetrical. The asymmetry produces
steady-state quantities in the form of zero-sequence and negative-sequence voltages and
currents. If not compensated, these are error sources for fault distance calculation
especially in case of ground faults. All ground-fault distance calculation algorithms of
21FL utilize the delta-quantities which mitigate the effects of the steady-state asymmetry.
Load current is another error source for fault distance calculation. Its influence increases
with higher fault resistance values. 21FL employs independent load compensation
methods for each fault type to achieve optimal performance. The purpose of load
compensation is to improve the accuracy of the fault distance calculation models by
estimating the actual fault current in the fault location. Delta-quantities are used for this to
mitigate the effect of load current on fault distance estimation. For ground faults, the load
compensation is done automatically inside the fault distance calculation algorithm. For
short circuit faults, load compensation is enabled with setting Load Com PP loops. The
default value is “Enabled”. The parameter should be set to “Disabled” only if the ratio
between the expected fault current and load current is large or when the fault distance
estimate for short circuit fault is required for each shot of an autoreclosing sequence.
The delta-quantity describes the change in measured signal due to the fault.
∆x = xfault + x pre -fault

GUID-2F67A337-58A8-40F4-B752-678A8D89083E V1 EN (Equation 150)
xfault Corresponds to the signal value during fault
xpre-fault Corresponds to the signal value during healthy state just before fault
615 series ANSI 813

Technical Manual
Result quality indicator

The quality of the estimated fault distance is judged and reported in recorded data as the
Flt Dist quality together with the fault distance estimate. The Flt Dist quality is a bit vector
indicating detected sources of inaccuracy in the fault distance estimate. In case Flt Dist
quality equals 1, the result is not affected by error sources. This results in good quality for
fault distance estimate. If factors affecting negatively to fault distance estimation are
detected, the Flt Dist quality is according to Table 711. In this case estimated fault
distance, Flt distance value is given in HMI in parenthesis.
Table 711: Fault distance quality indicator Flt Dist quality
Value Corresponding inaccuracy description
2 Estimation stability criterion has not been reached
4 Fault point resistance exceeds 500 Ω
8 Fault point resistance exceeds 5 × Xloop1)
16 Fault point resistance exceeds 20 × Xloop1)
32 Flt to Lod Cur ratio is below 1.00

64 Fault distance estimate outside tolerances (<-0.1 pu
or >1.1 pu)
128 Distance estimate calculation is not done due to too
low magnitudes of I or V
256 Distance estimate calculation cannot be performed
(for example avoiding internal division by zero)
1) Xloop is the total loop reactance according to settings
For example, if fault point resistance exceeds 500 Ω and Flt to Lod Cur ratio is below 1.0,
Flt Dist quality is “36”. As another example, if no error sources are found, but stability
criterion is not met, the value of Flt Dist quality is “2”.
Impedance settings
The fault distance calculation in 21FL is based on the fault loop impedance modeling. The
fault loop is parametrized with the impedance settings and these can be set at maximum
for three line sections (A, B and C). Each section is enabled by entering a section length,
which differs from zero to settings Line Len section A, Line Len section B or Line Len
section C in the order section A-> section B-> section C.
The ground-fault loops require both positive-sequence and zero-sequence impedances,

for example, R1 line section A and X1 line section A, R0 line section A and X0 line section
A. For the short circuit loops, only positive-sequence impedances are needed. Even these
can be omitted in the short circuit loops, if the setting Enable simple model equals
"TRUE".
814 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
If the impedance settings are in use, it is important that the settings closely match the
impedances of used conductor types. The impedance settings are given in primary ohms
[ohm/pu] and the line section lengths in per unit [pu]. Thus, impedances can be either
given in ohm/km and section length in km, or ohm/mile and section length in miles. The
resulting Flt distance matches the units entered for the line section lengths.
Positive-sequence impedance values

Fault location requires accurate setting values for line impedances. Positive-sequence
impedances are required both for location of short circuits and ground faults. As data sheet
impedance per unit values are generally valid only for a certain tower configuration, the
values should be adjusted according to the actual installation configuration. This
minimizes the fault location errors caused by inaccurate settings.
The positive-sequence reactance per unit and per phase can be calculated with a following
approximation equation which applies to symmetrically transposed three-phase
aluminium overhead lines without ground wires.
 a 
X 1 ≈ ωn ⋅ 10−4  2 ⋅ ln en + 0.5  [Ω / km ]
 r 
GUID-B7F3697A-7C8E-4BF6-A63C-7BFD307DD128 V2 EN (Equation 151)
ωn 2 × π × fn, where fn = fundamental frequency [Hz]
aen
3
( a12 ⋅ a23 ⋅ a31 )
GUID-DA850ABF-239A-4AB5-B63B-F0B54557CF2E V2 EN
the geometric average of phase distances [m]

axy distance [m] between phases x and y
r radius [m] for single conductor
A B C A B C A B C
GUID-F884BB08-6948-4327-843A-176A412EFF0B V1 EN
Figure 416: Typical distribution line tower configurations
Example values of positive-sequence impedances for typical medium voltage overhead-

lines are given in the following tables.
615 series ANSI 815

Technical Manual
Table 712: Positive-sequence impedance values for typical 11 kV conductors, “Flat” tower
configuration assumed
Name R1 [Ω/km] X1 [Ω/km]
ACSR 50 SQ.mm 0.532 0.373
ACSR 500 SQ.mm 0.0725 0.270
Table 713: Positive-sequence impedance values for typical 10/20 kV conductors, “Flat” tower
Al/Fe 36/6 Sparrow 0.915 0.383
Al/Fe 54/9 Raven 0.578 0.368
Al/Fe 85/14 Pigeon 0.364 0.354
Al/Fe 93/39 Imatra 0.335 0.344
Al/Fe 108/23 Vaasa 0.287 0.344
Al/Fe 305/39 Duck 0.103 0.314
Table 714: Positive-sequence impedance values for typical 33 kV conductors, “Flat” tower
ACSR 50 sq.mm 0.529 0.444
ACSR 100 sq.mm 0.394 0.434
ACSR 500 sq.mm 0.0548 0.346
Zero-sequence impedance values

Location of ground faults requires both positive-sequence and zero-sequence
impedances. For short circuit faults, zero-sequence impedances are not required.
The positive-sequence impedance per unit values for the lines are typically known or can
easily be obtained from data sheets. The zero-sequence values are generally not as easy to
obtain as they depend on the actual installation conditions and configurations. Sufficient
accuracy can, however, be obtained with rather simple calculations using the following
equations, which apply per phase for symmetrically transposed three-phase aluminium
overhead lines without ground wires.
R0 [50 Hz ] ≈ R1 + 0.14804 [Ω / km]
GUID-087D1F51-4C8C-4CF4-ACE5-9F43AF0DD3FC V1 EN (Equation 152)
816 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
R0 [60 Hz ] ≈ R1 + 0.17765 [Ω / km]
GUID-C33EC003-0DA2-4FFC-9496-586D7342DAF6 V1 EN (Equation 153)
 w 
X 0 ≈ 2 ⋅ ωn ⋅10 −4  3 ⋅ ln + 0.25  [Ω / km ]
 ren 
GUID-6850481D-094B-4FA0-9E73-39DCC6C49BCC V2 EN (Equation 154)
R1 conductor AC resistance [Ω/km]
W
ρ ground
658
fn
GUID-B5E58636-11CC-4A89-8E3E-57023A657FDE V1 EN
the equivalent depth [m] of the ground return path

ρground ground resistivity [Ωm]
ren
3
r ⋅ 3 a122 ⋅ a23
2 2
⋅ a31
GUID-F7698D7C-ADCC-4555-A3C7-05DAEB3FBA70 V2 EN
the equivalent radius [m] for conductor bundle

r radius [m] for single conductor
axy distance [m] between phases x and y
Ph leakage Ris and Ph capacitive React settings

The Ph leakage Ris and Ph capacitive React settings are used for improving fault distance
estimation accuracy for ground faults. They are critical for an accurate fault location in
ungrounded networks. In other types of networks they are less critical. The Ph leakage Ris
setting represents the leakage losses of the protected feeder in terms of resistance per
phase. The Ph capacitive React setting represents the total phase-to-ground capacitive
reactance of the protected feeder per phase. Based on experience, a proper estimate for Ph
leakage Ris should be about 20…40 × Ph capacitive React.
615 series ANSI 817

Technical Manual
GUID-4FEEEF83-D0D7-49A8-90F6-453E28AE27B2 V2 EN
Figure 417: Equivalent diagram of the protected feeder. RL0F = Ph leakage Ris.
The determination of the Ph capacitive React setting can be based either on network data
or measurement.
If the total phase-to-ground capacitance (including all branches) per phase C0F of the
protected feeder is known, the setting value can be calculated.
1
Ph capacitive React =
(ωn ⋅ C0 F )
GUID-3D723613-A007-47ED-B8D7-F9D55C5FBF38 V2 EN (Equation 155)
In case of ungrounded network, if the ground-fault current produced by the protected

feeder Ief is known, the setting value can be calculated.
3 ⋅ Vxy
Ph capacitive React =
Ief
GUID-B5941588-6DFC-4BF9-8EEB-DB7139F7B996 V1 EN (Equation 156)
Vxy Phase-to-ground voltage
21FL can also determine the value for the Ph capacitive React setting by measurements.
The calculation of Ph capacitive React is triggered by the binary signal connected to the
TRIGG_XC0F input when a ground-fault test is conducted outside the protected feeder
during commissioning, for example, at the substation busbar. The Calculation Trg mode
has to be “External”. After the activation of the TRIGG_XC0F triggering input, the
calculated value for setting Ph capacitive React is obtained from recorded data as
parameter XC0F Calc. This value has to be manually entered for the Ph capacitive React
setting. The calculated value matches the current switching state of the feeder and thus, if
the switching state of the protected feeder changes, the value should be updated.
818 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Figure 418 shows an example configuration, which enables the measurement of setting Ph
capacitive React.
21FL
ACTIVE (79) BLOCK ALARM
TRIP (51P) TRIGG
OR TRIGG_XC0F
TRIP (67/51N)
PICKUP (59N,59G) TON
PICKUP (67/51N) NOT
AND
CB_CLOSE
DC_CLOSE
GUID-81245FF2-702E-4B96-9845-CFA749D428B5 V1 EN
Figure 418: An example configuration, which enables the measurement of setting Ph

capacitive React
If the ground fault is detected by the residual overvoltage function (PICKUP of 59N,
59G), but not seen by the forward-looking ground-fault protection function (PICKUP of
67/51N), the fault is located outside the protected feeder. This is mandatory for valid
measurement of setting Ph capacitive React. After a set delay (TON), the input
TRIGG_XC0F is activated and the parameter XC0F Calc in the recorded data is updated.
The delay (TON) must be set longer than the pickup delay of the directional ground-fault
function 67/51N, but shorter than the minimum trip time of the directional ground-fault
functions in any of the feeders. For example, if the pickup delay is 100 ms and the shortest
trip time 300 ms, a value of 300 ms can be used. Circuit breaker and disconnector status
is used to verify that the entire feeder is measured.
Modeling a non-homogeneous line

A typical distribution feeder is built with several different types of overhead lines and
cables. This means that the feeder is electrically non-homogeneous. 21FL allows the
modeling of the line impedance variation in protection relay with three line sections with
independent impedance settings. This improves the accuracy of physical fault distance
conversion done in the protection relay, especially in cases where the line impedance non-
homogeneity is severe. Each section is enabled by entering a section length, which differs
from zero, to settings Line Len section A, Line Len section B or Line Len section C in the
order section A-> section B-> section C.
Impedance model with one line section is enabled by setting Line Len section A to differ
from zero. In this case the impedance settings R1 line section A, X1 line section A, R0 line
section A and X0 line section A are used for the fault distance calculation and for
conversion from reactance to physical fault distance. This option should be used only in
the case of a homogeneous line, that is, when the protected feeder consists of only one
conductor type.
Impedance model with two line sections is enabled by setting both Line Len section A and
Line Len section B to differ from zero. In this case the impedance settings R1 line section
A, X1 line section A, R0 line section A, X0 line section A, R1 line section B, X1 line section
B, R0 line section B and X0 line section B are used for the fault distance calculation and for
conversion from reactance to physical fault distance. This option should be used in the
615 series ANSI 819

Technical Manual
case of a non-homogeneous line when the protected feeder consists of two types of
conductors.
Impedance model with three line sections is enabled by setting Line Len section A, Line
Len section B and Line Len section C all differ from zero. In this case the impedance
settings R1 line section A, X1 line section A, R0 line section A, X0 line section A, R1 line
section B, X1 line section B, R0 line section B, X0 line section B, R1 line section C, X1 line
section C, R0 line section C and X0 line section C are used for the fault distance calculation
and for conversion from reactance to physical fault distance. This option should be used
in the case of a non-homogeneous line when the protected feeder consists of more than two
types of conductors.
The effect of line impedance non-homogeneity in the conversion of fault loop reactance
into physical fault distance is demonstrated in example shown in Figure 419 with 10
kilometer long feeder with three line types. The total line impedance for the 10 km line is
R1 = 6.602 Ω (0.660 Ω/km) and X1 = 3.405 Ω (0.341 Ω/km), consisting of the following
sections and impedance values.
• 4 km of PAS 150 (R1 = 0.236 Ω/km, X1 = 0.276 Ω/km)

• 3 km of Al/Fe 54/9 Raven (R1 = 0.536 Ω/km, X1 = 0.369 Ω/km)
• 3 km of Al/Fe 21/4 Swan (R1 = 1.350 Ω/km, X1 = 0.398 Ω/km)
The non-homogeneity of feeder impedance can be illustrated by drawing the protected

feeder in RX-diagram (in the impedance plane), as shown in Figure 419.
GUID-AEA0E874-C871-4C90-82ED-3AFE41D28145 V2 EN
Figure 419: Example impedance diagram of an electrically non-homogeneous feeder

(left), and the resulting error in fault distance if the measured fault loop
reactance is converted into physical fault distance by using only one line
section parameters (right).
In Figure 419 the feeder is modelled either with one or three line sections with parameters
given in Table 715.
820 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 715: Impedance settings

Parameter Impedance model with one section Impedance model with three
sections
R1 line section A 0.660 Ω/pu 0.236 Ω/pu
X1 line section A 0.341 Ω/pu 0.276 Ω/pu
Line Len section A 10000 pu 4000 pu
R1 line section B N/A 0.536 Ω/pu
X1 line section B N/A 0.369 Ω/pu
Line Len section B 0.000 pu 3000 pu
R1 line section C N/A 1.350 Ω/pu
X1 line section C N/A 0.398 Ω/pu
Line Len section C 0.000 pu 3000 pu
Figure 419 illustrates the conversion error from measured fault loop reactance into
physical fault distance. The fault location is varied from 1 km to 10 km in 1 km steps
(marked with circles). An error of nearly eight per cent at maximum is created by the
conversion procedure when modeling a non-homogenous line with only one section. By
using impedance model with three line sections, there is no error in the conversion.
The previous example assumed a short circuit fault and thus, only positive-sequence
impedance settings were used. The results, however, also apply for ground faults.
Taps or spurs in the feeder

If the protected feeder consists of taps or spurs, the measured fault impedance corresponds
to several physical fault locations (For example, A or B in Figure 420). The actual fault
location must be identified using additional information, for example, short circuit current
indicators placed on tapping points.
615 series ANSI 821

Technical Manual
GUID-312EE60E-1CB9-4334-83BD-39DF3FC5815E V3 EN
Figure 420: Fault on a distribution line with spurs
5.7.4.3 Trigger detection
The fault distance estimate is obtained when 21FL is triggered. The triggering method is
defined with setting Calculation Trg mode. The options for selection are: “External” or
“Internal”, where the default value is “External”. The TRIGG_OUT event indicates fault
distance value recording moment. The fault distance estimate, Flt distance, together with
the timestamp of actual triggering are saved in the recorded data of 21FL.
• In case of external triggering, an external trigger signal should be connected to the

TRIGG input. The triggering signal is typically a trip signal from a protective
function. At triggering moment the fault distance is stored into recorded data. It is
important that triggering is timed suitably to provide sufficient distance estimation
calculation time before tripping of the feeder circuit breaker.
• In case of internal triggering, the TRIGG input is not used for triggering. Instead, the
trigger signal is created internally so that the estimation is started when phase
selection logic detects a fault and the estimate is triggered when its value has
stabilized sufficiently. This is judged by maximum variation in fault distance
estimate and defined with setting Distance estimate Va (in the same unit as the fault
distance estimate). When successive estimates during one fundamental cycle are
within “final value ± Distance estimate Va”, the fault distance estimate (mean of
successive estimates) is recorded. In case stabilization criterion has not been fulfilled,
the fault distance estimate is given just before the phase currents are interrupted. The
phase selection logic is a non-directional function, and thus internal triggering should
not be used when directionality is required.
822 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Generally, 21FL requires a minimum of two fundamental cycles of measuring time after
the fault occurrence. Figure 421 illustrates typical behavior of fault distance estimate of
21FL as a function of time.
• Immediately after the fault occurrence, the estimate is affected by initial fault
transients in voltages and currents.
• Approximately one fundamental cycle after the fault occurrence, the fault distance
estimate starts to approach the final value.
• Approximately two fundamental cycles after the fault occurrence, the stability
criterion for fault distance estimate is fulfilled and the TRIGG_OUT event is sent.
The recorded data values are stored at this moment.
GUID-2C1E2C55-B61A-4200-BC8E-0F6FC9036A56 V3 EN
Figure 421: The behavior of fault distance estimate in time
5.7.4.4 Alarm indication
21Fl contains an alarm output for the calculated fault distance. If the calculated fault
distance FLT_DISTANCE is between the settings Low alarm Dis limit and High alarm
Dis limit, the ALARM output is activated.
The ALARM output can be utilized, for example, in regions with waterways or other places
where knowledge of certain fault locations is of high importance.
615 series ANSI 823

Technical Manual
GUID-59F4E262-44C8-4EF3-A352-E6358C84C791 V2 EN
Figure 422: An example of the ALARM output use
5.7.4.5 Recorded data
All the information required for a later fault analysis is recorded to 21FL recorded data. In
the protection relay, recorded data is found in Monitoring/Recorded data/Other
protection/S21FL.
The function has also monitored data values which are used for the read-out of continuous
calculation values. The cross reference table shows which of the recorded data values are
available as continuous monitoring values during a fault.
Table 716: Cross reference table for recorded and monitored data values
Recorded data Monitored data
Flt loop FAULT_LOOP
Flt distance FLT_DISTANCE
Flt Dist quality FLT_DIST_Q
Flt loop resistance RFLOOP
Flt loop reactance XFLOOP
Flt phase reactance XFPHASE
Flt point resistance RF
Flt to Lod Cur ratio IFLT_PER_ILD
Equivalent load Dis S_CALC
XC0F Calc XC0F_CALC
824 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The full operation of 21FL requires that all three phase-to-ground voltages are measured.
The voltages can be measured with conventional voltage transformers or voltage dividers
connected between the phase and ground (VT connection is set to “Wye”). Another
alternative is to measure phase-to-phase voltages (VT connection is set to “Delta”) and
residual voltage (V0). Both alternatives are covered by setting the configuration
parameter Phase voltage Meas to "Accurate".
When the Phase voltage Meas setting is set to "Ph-to-ph without Uo" and only phase-to-
phase voltages are available (but not V0), only short-circuit measuring loops (fault loops
“AB Fault”, “BC Fault” or “CA Fault” or “ABC Fault”) can be measured accurately. In
this case, the ground-fault loops (fault loops either “AG Fault”, “BG Fault” or “CG Fault”)
cannot provide correct fault distance estimates and the triggering of the function in case
of ground fault is automatically disabled.
5.7.5 Application
The main objective of the feeder terminals is a fast, selective and reliable operation in
faults inside the protected feeder. In addition, information on the distance to the fault point
is very important for those involved in operation and maintenance. Reliable information
on the fault location greatly decreases the downtime of the protected feeders and increases
the total availability of a power system.
21FL provides impedance-based fault location. It is designed for radially operated

distribution systems and is applicable for locating short circuits in all kinds of distribution
networks. Ground faults can be located in effectively grounded and low resistance/low-
reactance grounded networks. Under certain limitations, 21FL can also be applied for
ground-fault location in ungrounded distribution networks.
Configuration example
A typical configuration example for 21FL triggering is illustrated in Figure 418 where
external triggering is applied, that is, Calculation Trg mode is set to “External”. The TRIP
signal from non-directional overcurrent function 51P is used to provide an indication of
a short circuit fault. The TRIP signal from the directional ground-fault function 67/51N
is used to provide an indication of a ground fault at the protected feeder.
21FL with the autoreclosing function

When 21FL is used with the autoreclosing sequence, the distance estimate from the first
trip is typically the most accurate one. The fault distance estimates from successive trips
are possible but accuracy can be decreased due to inaccurate load compensation. During
the dead time of an autoreclosing sequence, the load condition of the feeder is uncertain.
615 series ANSI 825

Technical Manual
The triggering of 21FL can also be inhibited during the autoreclosing sequence. This is
achieved by connecting the inverted READY signal from the autoreclosing function 79,
which indicates that the autoreclosing sequence is in progress, to the BLOCK input of
21FL. Blocking of the 21FL triggering is suggested during the autoreclosing sequence
when the load compensation or steady-state asymmetry elimination is based on the delta
quantities. This applies to the short circuit faults when Load Com PP loops is set to
“Enabled” or, for ground faults, when EF algorithm Sel is set to “Load compensation” or
“Load modelling”.
5.7.6 Signals
Table 717: 21FL Input signals
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current

CA
V0 SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for blocking the triggering

TRIGG BOOLEAN 0=False Distance calculation triggering signal
TRIGG_XC0F BOOLEAN 0=False XC0F calculation triggering signal
Table 718: 21FL Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN Fault location alarm signal
826 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
5.7.7 Settings
Table 719: 21FL Group settings (Basic)
Z Max phase load 1.0...10000.0 ohm 0.1 80.0 Impedance per phase of max. load, overcurr./
under-imp., PSL
Ph leakage Ris 20...1000000 ohm 1 210000 Line PhE leakage resistance in primary ohms
Ph capacitive React 10...1000000 ohm 1 7000 Line PhE capacitive reactance in primary ohms
R1 line section A 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 1.000 Positive sequence line resistance, line section
A
X1 line section A 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 1.000 Positive sequence line reactance, line section
A
R0 line section A 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 4.000 Zero sequence line resistance, line section A
X0 line section A 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 4.000 Zero sequence line reactance, line section A
Line Len section A 0.000...1000.000 pu 0.001 0.000 Line length, section A
Table 720: 21FL Group settings (Advanced)

High alarm Dis limit 0.000...1.000 pu 0.001 0.000 High alarm limit for calculated distance
Low alarm Dis limit 0.000...1.000 pu 0.001 0.000 Low alarm limit for calculated distance
Equivalent load Dis 0.00...1.00 0.01 0.50 Equivalent load distance when EF algorithm
equals to load modelling
R1 line section B 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 1.000 Positive sequence line resistance, line section
B
X1 line section B 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 1.000 Positive sequence line reactance, line section
B
R0 line section B 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 4.000 Zero sequence line resistance, line section B
X0 line section B 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 4.000 Zero sequence line reactance, line section B
Line Len section B 0.000...1000.000 pu 0.001 0.000 Line length, section B
R1 line section C 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 1.000 Positive sequence line resistance, line section
C
X1 line section C 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 1.000 Positive sequence line reactance, line section
C
R0 line section C 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 4.000 Zero sequence line resistance, line section C
X0 line section C 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 4.000 Zero sequence line reactance, line section C
Line Len section C 0.000...1000.000 pu 0.001 0.000 Line length, section C
615 series ANSI 827

Technical Manual
Table 721: 21FL Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Phase voltage Meas 1=Accurate 1=Accurate Phase voltage measurement principle
2=Ph-to-ph without
Uo
Calculation Trg mode 1=Internal 2=External Trigger mode for distance calculation
2=External
Table 722: 21FL Non group settings (Advanced)

EF algorithm Sel 1=Load 1=Load Selection for PhE-loop calculation algorithm
compensation compensation
2=Load modelling
EF algorithm Cur Sel 1=Io based 1=Io based Selection for ground-fault current model
2=I2 based
Load Com PP loops 0=Disabled 1=Enabled Enable load compensation for PP/3P-loops
1=Enabled
Enable simple model 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Enable calc. without impedance settings for
1=Enabled PP/3P-loops
Distance estimate Va 0.001...0.300 0.001 0.015 Allowed variation of short circuit distance
estimate

Table 723: 21FL Monitored data
RF FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 ohm Fault point resistance in
primary ohms
FAULT_LOOP Enum 1=AG Fault Fault impedance loop
2=BG Fault
3=CG Fault
4=AB Fault
5=BC Fault
6=CA Fault
7=ABC Fault
-5=No fault
FLT_DISTANCE FLOAT32 0.00...3000.00 pu Fault distance in units
selected by the user
FLT_DIST_Q INT32 0...511 Fault distance quality
RFLOOP FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 ohm Fault loop resistance in
primary ohms
828 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

XFLOOP FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 ohm Fault loop reactance in
primary ohms
XFPHASE FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 ohm Positive sequence fault
reactance in primary ohms
IFLT_PER_ILD FLOAT32 0.00...60000.00 Fault to load current ratio
S_CALC FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Estimated equivalent load
distance
XC0F_CALC FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 ohm Estimated PhE capacitive
reactance of line
21FL Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Triggering time Timestamp Estimate triggering time
Flt loop Enum 1=AG Fault Fault loop
2=BG Fault
3=CG Fault
4=AB Fault
5=BC Fault
6=CA Fault
7=ABC Fault
-5=No fault
Flt distance FLOAT32 0.00...3000.00 pu Fault distance
Flt Dist quality INT32 0...511 Fault distance quality
Flt loop resistance FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 ohm Fault loop resistance
Flt loop reactance FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 ohm Fault loop reactance
Flt phase reactance FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 ohm Fault phase reactance
Flt point resistance FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 ohm Fault resistance
Flt to Lod Cur ratio FLOAT32 0.00...60000.00 Fault to load current ratio
Equivalent load Dis FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Estimated equivalent load
distance
XC0F Calc FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 ohm Estimated PhE capacitive
reactance of the line
Pre fault time Timestamp Pre-fault time
A Pre Flt Phs A Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Pre-fault current phase A,
magnitude
A Pre Flt Phs A Angl FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Pre-fault current phase A,
angle
A Pre Flt Phs B Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Pre-fault current phase B,
magnitude
A Pre Flt Phs B Angl FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Pre-fault current phase B,
angle
A Pre Flt Phs C Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Pre-fault current phase C,
magnitude
615 series ANSI 829

Technical Manual

A Pre Flt Phs C Angl FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Pre-fault current phase C,
angle
V Pre Flt Phs A Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Pre-fault voltage phase A,
magnitude
V Pre Flt Phs A Angl FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Pre-fault voltage phase A,
angle
V Pre Flt Phs B Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Pre-fault voltage phase B,
magnitude
V Pre Flt Phs B Angl FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Pre-fault voltage phase B,
angle
V Pre Flt Phs C Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Pre-fault voltage phase C,
magnitude
V Pre Flt Phs C Angl FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Pre-fault voltage phase C,
angle
A Flt Phs A Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Fault current phase A,
magnitude
A Flt Phs A angle FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Fault current phase A, angle
A Flt Phs B Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Fault current phase B,
magnitude
A Flt Phs B angle FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Fault current phase B, angle
A Flt Phs C Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Fault current phase C,
magnitude
A Flt Phs C angle FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Fault current phase C, angle
V Flt Phs A Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Fault voltage phase A,
magnitude
V Flt Phs A angle FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Fault voltage phase A, angle
V Flt Phs B Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Fault voltage phase B,
magnitude
V Flt Phs B angle FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Fault voltage phase B, angle
V Flt Phs C Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Fault voltage phase C,
magnitude
V Flt Phs C angle FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Fault voltage phase C, angle
830 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 724: 21FL Technical data
Measurement accuracy At the frequency f = fn
Impedance:
±2.5% or ±0.25 Ω
Distance:
±2.5% or ±0.16 km/0.1 mile
XC0F_CALC:
±2.5% or ±50 Ω
IFLT_PER_ILD:
±5% or ±0.05

Table 725: 21FL Technical revision history
5.8 Switch onto fault SOTF
Switch onto fault CBPSOF SOTF SOTF

SOTF
PICKUP TRIP
PICKUP_DLYD
CB_CL_CMD
BLOCK
GUID-3C5B975D-DA83-443A-A5B3-83A2FE5DE507 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 831

Technical Manual
5.8.3 Functionality
The switch onto fault function SOTF provides an instantaneous trip or a time delayed trip
when closing the breaker while a fault exists.
SOTF is activated when the CB_CL_CMD circuit breaker closing command is set high.
The function has PICKUP and PICKUP_DLYD inputs for immediate or delayed pickup
operation respectively.
the reset timers, if desired.

The operation of SOTF can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in
CB_CL_CMD
SOTF
TRIP
control
PICKUP
Trigger
PICKUP_DLYD
BLOCK
GUID-E9DDE27C-C5BA-46BA-B508-A4147781CC75 V1 EN
Trigger
This module is used for detecting possible fault immediately after closing the circuit
breaker. An external protection function for example, 51P, 50P, 50P-3 or 51N, 51G, 50N,
50G, 50N-3, 50G-3 is used for fault indication. The PICKUP and PICKUP_DLYD inputs
are available for feeding the detected fault.
• PICKUP input is used when it is required to enable SOTF control immediately after
protection function indicates a fault.
• PICKUP_DLYD input is used when time delayed SOTF control enabling is needed.
In this case, the delay can be set with a Trip delay time setting.
832 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
SOTF control
The SOTF control is activated when CB_CL_CMD circuit breaker closing command input
is activated. The module is kept active until the set SOTF reset time is exceeded after the
CB_CL_CMD is deactivated. The TRIP output is activated when a fault indication signal
is received from the Trigger module while the SOTF control is still active.
5.8.5 Application
The CB_CL_CMD input activates SOTF. In the standard configuration, the breaker close
command should be connected to this input. The SOTF reset time setting parameter is used
for keeping SOTF active for a certain time after the CB close command is executed.
The overcurrent high and instantaneous signals, for example, the 50P-3 PICKUP signal is
connected to the function PICKUP input. When the SOTF control module is active and the
PICKUP input is activated, the function trips instantaneously without any delays.
The overcurrent low stage signals, for example, 51P PICKUP signal is connected to the
function PICKUP_DLYD input. The setting parameter Trip delay time is used to delay the
operation in case of inrush situation.
5.8.6 Signals
Table 726: SOTF Input signals
PICKUP BOOLEAN 0=False Pickup from function to be accelerated by SOTF
PICKUP_DLYD BOOLEAN 0=False Pickup from function to be accelerated with delay by
SOTF
CB_CL_CMD BOOLEAN 0=False External enabling of SOTF by CB close command
Table 727: SOTF Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
5.8.7 Settings
Table 728: SOTF Group settings (Basic)
Trip delay time 0...60000 ms 1 0 Time delay for pickup input
615 series ANSI 833

Technical Manual
Table 729: SOTF Group settings (Advanced)

SOTF reset time 0...60000 ms 1 1000 SOTF detection period after initialization
Table 730: SOTF Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable

Table 731: SOTF Monitored data
SOTF Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 732: SOTF Technical data
834 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Supervision functions
Section 6 Supervision functions
6.1 Trip circuit supervision TCM
Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR TCS TCM
A070788-ANSI V1 EN
6.1.3 Functionality
The trip circuit supervision function TCM is designed to supervise the control circuit of
the circuit breaker. The invalidity of a control circuit is detected by using a dedicated
output contact that contains the supervision functionality. The failure of a circuit is
reported to the corresponding function block in the relay configuration.
The function picks up and trips when TCM detects a trip circuit failure. The operating time
characteristic for the function is of the definite time (DT) type. The function trips after a
predefined operating time and resets when the fault disappears.
The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates the ALARM output
and resets the timer.

615 series ANSI 835

Technical Manual
The operation of TCM can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in
A070785-ANSI V1 EN
TCM status
This module receives the trip circuit status from the hardware. A detected failure in the trip
circuit activates the timer.
Timer
Once activated, the timer runs until the set value Trip delay time is elapsed. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the maximum
time value, the ALARM output is activated. If a drop-off situation occurs during the operate
time up counting, the fixed 0.5 s reset timer is activated. After that time, the operation
timer is reset.
The BLOCK input can be controlled with a binary input, a horizontal communication input
or an internal signal of the relay program. The activation of the BLOCK input prevents the
ALARM output to be activated.
6.1.5 Application
TCM detects faults in the electrical control circuit of the circuit breaker. The function can
supervise both open and closed coil circuits. This supervision is necessary to find out the
vitality of the control circuits continuously.
Figure 427 shows an application of the trip circuit supervision function use. The best
solution is to connect an external Rext shunt resistor in parallel with the circuit breaker
internal contact. Although the circuit breaker internal contact is open, TCM can see the
trip circuit through Rext. The Rext resistor should have such a resistance that the current
through the resistance remains small, that is, it does not harm or overload the circuit
breaker's trip coil.
836 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A051097-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 427: Operating principle of the trip-circuit supervision with an external resistor.
The TCM blocking switch is not required since the external resistor is
used.
If TCM is required only in a closed position, the external shunt resistance can be omitted.
When the circuit breaker is in the open position, the TCM sees the situation as a faulty
circuit. One way to avoid TCM operation in this situation would be to block the
supervision function whenever the circuit breaker is open.
615 series ANSI 837

Technical Manual
A051906-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 428: Operating principle of the trip-circuit supervision without an external

resistor. The circuit breaker open indication is set to block TCM when the
circuit breaker is open.
Trip circuit supervision and other trip contacts

It is typical that the trip circuit contains more than one trip contact in parallel, for example
in transformer feeders where the trip of a Buchholz relay is connected in parallel with the
feeder terminal and other relays involved. The supervising current cannot detect if one or
all the other contacts connected in parallel are not connected properly.
838 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A070968-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 429: Constant test current flow in parallel trip contacts and trip circuit
supervision
In case of parallel trip contacts, the recommended way to do the wiring is that the TCM test
current flows through all wires and joints.
615 series ANSI 839

Technical Manual
A070970-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 430: Improved connection for parallel trip contacts where the test current flows
through all wires and joints
Several trip circuit supervision functions parallel in circuit

Not only the trip circuit often have parallel trip contacts, it is also possible that the circuit
has multiple TCM circuits in parallel. Each TCM circuit causes its own supervising
current to flow through the monitored coil and the actual coil current is a sum of all TCM
currents. This must be taken into consideration when determining the resistance of Rext.
Setting the TCM function in a protection relay not-in-use does not

typically affect the supervising current injection.
Trip circuit supervision with auxiliary relays

Many retrofit projects are carried out partially, that is, the old electromechanical relays are
replaced with new ones but the circuit breaker is not replaced. This creates a problem that
the coil current of an old type circuit breaker can be too high for the protection relay trip
contact to break.
The circuit breaker coil current is normally cut by an internal contact of the circuit breaker.
In case of a circuit breaker failure, there is a risk that the protection relay trip contact is
840 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
destroyed since the contact is obliged to disconnect high level of electromagnetic energy
accumulated in the trip coil.
An auxiliary relay can be used between the protection relay trip contact and the circuit
breaker coil. This way the breaking capacity question is solved, but the TCM circuit in the
protection relay monitors the healthy auxiliary relay coil, not the circuit breaker coil. The
separate trip circuit supervision relay is applicable for this to supervise the trip coil of the
circuit breaker.
Dimensioning of the external resistor

Under normal operating conditions, the applied external voltage is divided between the
relay’s internal circuit and the external trip circuit so that at the minimum 20 V (15...20 V)
remains over the relay’s internal circuit. Should the external circuit’s resistance be too
high or the internal circuit’s too low, for example due to welded relay contacts, a fault is
detected.
Mathematically, the operation condition can be expressed as:

VC − (R ext + Rint + Rs ) × I c ≥ 20V AC / DC
A070986-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 157)
Vc Operating voltage over the supervised trip circuit
Ic Measuring current through the trip circuit, appr. 1.5 mA (0.99...1.72 mA)
Rext external shunt resistance
Rint internal shunt resistance, 1 kΩ
Rs trip coil resistance
If the external shunt resistance is used, it has to be calculated not to interfere with the
functionality of the supervision or the trip coil. Too high a resistance causes too high a
voltage drop, jeopardizing the requirement of at least 20 V over the internal circuit, while
a resistance too low can enable false operations of the trip coil.
Table 733: Values recommended for the external resistor Rext
Operating voltage Uc Shunt resistor Rext

48 V AC/DC 1.2 kΩ, 5 W
60 V AC/DC 5.6 kΩ, 5 W
110 V AC/DC 22 kΩ, 5 W
220 V AC/DC 33 kΩ, 5 W
Due to the requirement that the voltage over the TCM contact must be 20 V or higher, the
correct operation is not guaranteed with auxiliary operating voltages lower than 48 V DC
615 series ANSI 841

Technical Manual
because of the voltage drop in Rint,Rext and the operating coil or even voltage drop of the
feeding auxiliary voltage system which can cause too low voltage values over the TCM
contact. In this case, erroneous alarming can occur.
At lower (<48 V DC) auxiliary circuit operating voltages, it is recommended to use the
circuit breaker position to block unintentional operation of TCM. The use of the position
indication is described earlier in this chapter.
Using power output contacts without trip circuit supervision

If TCM is not used but the contact information of corresponding power outputs are
required, the internal resistor can be by-passed. The output can then be utilized as a normal
power output. When bypassing the internal resistor, the wiring between the terminals of
the corresponding output X100:16-15(PO3) or X100:21-20(PO4) can be disconnected.
The internal resistor is required if the complete TCM circuit is used.
GUID-548E2DC1-D16E-4BC2-803F-96FB5021DAC2-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 431: Connection of a power output in a case when TCM is not used and the
internal resistor is disconnected
Incorrect connections and use of trip circuit supervision

Although the TCM circuit consists of two separate contacts, it must be noted that those are
designed to be used as series connected to guarantee the breaking capacity given in the
technical manual of the protection relay. In addition to the weak breaking capacity, the
internal resistor is not dimensioned to withstand current without a TCM circuit. As a
result, this kind of incorrect connection causes immediate burning of the internal resistor
when the circuit breaker is in the close position and the voltage is applied to the trip circuit.
The following figure shows incorrect usage of a TCM circuit when only one of the
contacts is used.
842 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A070972-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 432: Incorrect connection of trip-circuit supervision
A connection of three protection relays with a double pole trip circuit is shown in the
following figure. Only the protection relay R3 has an internal TCM circuit. In order to test
the operation of the protection relay R2, but not to trip the circuit breaker, the upper trip
contact of the protection relay R2 is disconnected, as shown in the figure, while the lower
contact is still connected. When the protection relay R2 operates, the coil current starts to
flow through the internal resistor of the protection relay R3 and the resistor burns
immediately. As proven with the previous examples, both trip contacts must operate
together. Attention should also be paid for correct usage of the trip circuit supervision
while, for example, testing the protection relay.
615 series ANSI 843

Technical Manual
A070974-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 433: Incorrect testing of protection relays
6.1.6 Signals
Table 734: TCM Input signals
Table 735: TCM Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output
844 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
6.1.7 Settings
Table 736: TCM Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Table 737: TCM Non group settings (Advanced)


Table 738: TCM Monitored data
TCM Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 739: TCM Technical revision history
6.2 Current circuit supervision CCM
Current circuit supervision CCSPVC MCS 3I CCM
615 series ANSI 845

Technical Manual
GUID-7695BECB-3520-4932-9429-9A552171C0CA-ANSI V1 EN
6.2.3 Functionality
The current circuit supervision function CCM is used for monitoring current transformer
secondary circuits.
CCM calculates internally the sum of phase currents (I_A, I_B and I_C) and compares the
sum against the measured single reference current (I_REF).The reference current must
originate from other three-phase CT cores than the phase currents (I_A, I_B and I_C) and
it is to be externally summated, that is, outside the protection relay.
CCM detects a fault in the measurement circuit and issues an alarm or blocks the
protection functions to avoid unwanted tripping.
It must be remembered that the blocking of protection functions at an occurring open CT

circuit means that the situation remains unchanged and extremely high voltages stress the
secondary circuit.

The operation of CCM can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
GUID-A4F2DBEE-938F-4961-9DAD-977151DDBA13 V1 EN
846 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Differential current monitoring

Differential current monitoring supervises the difference between the summed phase
currents I_A, I_B and I_C and the reference current I_REF.
The current operating characteristics can be selected with the Pickup value setting. When
the highest phase current is less than 1.0 × In, the differential current limit is defined with
Pickup value. When the highest phase current is more than 1.0 × In, the differential current
limit is calculated with the equation.
MAX ( I _ A, I _ B, I _ C ) × Pickup value
GUID-41E8DD52-0C7D-406D-9799-DA48A660D8E5-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 158)
The differential current is limited to 1.0 × In.
I_DIFF
Max trip current
27R
V_A_AB U_LO
V_B_BC
OPERATE V_C_CA NON-OPERATE
BLOCK
1.0 p.u.
Pickup value
1.0 p.u. 2.0 p.u. 3.0 p.u. 4.0 p.u.

Max(I_A , I_B , I_C)
GUID-D083BF22-574C-4603-971F-5F4371632A28 V2 EN
Figure 436: CCM operating characteristics
When the differential current I_DIFF is in the operating region, the FAIL output is
activated.
The function is internally blocked if any phase current is higher than the set Max trip
current. When the internal blocking activates, the FAIL output is deactivated
immediately. The internal blocking is used for avoiding false operation during a fault
situation when the current transformers are saturated due to high fault currents.
The value of the differential current is available in the monitored data view on the LHMI
or through other communication tools. The value is calculated with the equation.
615 series ANSI 847

Technical Manual
I _ DIFF = I _ A + I _ B + I _ C − I _ REF
GUID-9CC931FA-0637-4FF8-85D4-6F461BD996A9 V2 EN (Equation 159)
The Pickup value setting is given in units of ×In of the phase current transformer. The
possible difference in the phase and reference current transformer ratios is internally
compensated by scaling I_REF with the value derived from the Primary current setting
values. These setting parameters can be found in the Basic functions section.
The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the FAIL output immediately.
Timer
The timer is activated with the FAIL signal. The ALARM output is activated after a fixed
200 ms delay. FAIL needs to be active during the delay.
When the internal blocking is activated, the FAIL output is deactivated immediately
immediately. However, the ALARM output is deactivated immediately after a fixed delay
of three seconds.
The function resets when the differential current is below the pickup value and the highest
phase current is more than 5 percent of the nominal current (0.05 × In).
If the current falls to zero when the FAIL or ALARM outputs are active, the deactivation
of these outputs is prevented.
The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the ALARM output.
6.2.5 Application
Open or short-circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation in many
protection functions such as differential, ground-fault current and negative-sequence
current functions. When currents from two independent three-phase sets of CTs or CT
cores measuring the same primary currents are available, reliable current circuit
supervision can be arranged by comparing the currents from the two sets. When an error
in any CT circuit is detected, the protection functions concerned can be blocked and an
alarm given.
In case of high currents, the unequal transient saturation of CT cores with a different
remanence or saturation factor can result in differences in the secondary currents from the
two CT cores. An unwanted blocking of protection functions during the transient stage
must then be avoided.
The supervision function must be sensitive and have a short trip time to prevent unwanted
tripping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical protections in case of faulty CT secondary
circuits.
848 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Open CT circuits create extremely high voltages in the circuits, which

may damage the insulation and cause further problems. This must be
taken into consideration especially when the protection functions are
blocked.
When the reference current is not connected to the protection relay, the
function should be turned off. Otherwise, the FAIL output is activated
when unbalance occurs in the phase currents even if there was nothing
wrong with the measurement circuit.
Reference current measured with core-balanced current transformer

CCM compares the sum of phase currents to the current measured with the core-balanced
CT.
IL1
IL2
IL3
(protection)
protection relay
Core 1
CCM
I_A I_A FAIL
I_B I_B ALARM
I_C I_C
I_REF I_REF
BLOCK
balanced CT
Core
GUID-DA7A48EF-0F07-4665-9A09-87188E5A9982 V2 EN
Figure 437: Connection diagram for reference current measurement with core-
balanced current transformer
615 series ANSI 849

Technical Manual
Current measurement with two independent three-phase sets of CT cores

Figure 438 and Figure 439 show diagrams of connections where the reference current is
measured with two independent three-phase sets of CT cores.
IL1
IL2
IL3
(protection)
protection relay
Core 1
CCM
I_A I_A FAIL
I_B I_B ALARM
I_C I_C
I_REF I_REF
BLOCK
(protection)
Other protection devices

Core 2
GUID-8DC3B17A-13FE-4E38-85C6-A228BC03206B-ANSI V3 EN
Figure 438: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of three-
phase current transformer protection cores
When using the measurement core for reference current measurement, it

should be noted that the saturation level of the measurement core is much
850 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
lower than with the protection core. This should be taken into account
when setting the current circuit supervision function.
IL1
IL2
IL3
(protection)
Core 1 protection relay
CCM
I_A I_A FAIL
I_B I_B ALARM
I_C I_C
I_REF I_REF
BLOCK
(measurement)
Measurement device
Core 2
GUID-C5A6BB27-36F9-4652-A5E4-E3D32CFEA77B-ANSI V3 EN
Figure 439: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of three-
phase current transformer cores (protection and measurement)
Example of incorrect connection

The currents must be measured with two independent cores, that is, the phase currents
must be measured with a different core than the reference current. A connection diagram
shows an example of a case where the phase currents and the reference currents are
measured from the same core.
615 series ANSI 851

Technical Manual
IL1
IL2
IL3
(protection)
protection relay
Core 1
CCM
I_A I_A FAIL
I_B I_B ALARM
I_C I_C
I_REF I_REF
BLOCK
GUID-BBF3E23F-7CE4-43A3-8986-5AACA0433235-ANSI V3 EN
Figure 440: Example of incorrect reference current connection
6.2.6 Signals
Table 740: CCM Input signals
I_REF SIGNAL 0 Reference current
Table 741: CCM Output signals

FAIL BOOLEAN Fail output
852 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
6.2.7 Settings
Table 742: CCM Non group settings (Basic)
Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Enable / Disable
5=disable
Pickup value 0.05...0.20 xIn 0.01 0.05 Minimum trip current differential level
Table 743: CCM Non group settings (Advanced)

Max alarm current 1.00...5.00 xIn 0.01 1.50 Block of the function at high phase current

Table 744: CCM Monitored data
I_DIFF FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Differential current
CCM Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Table 745: CCM Technical data
Trip time 1) <30 ms
1) Including the delay of the output contact

Table 746: CCM Technical revision history
615 series ANSI 853

Technical Manual
6.3 Current transformer supervision for high-impedance

protection scheme MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C
Current transformer supervision for HZCCASPVC MCS I_A MCS-A
high-impedance protection scheme for
phase A
Current transformer supervision for HZCCBSPVC MCS I_B MCS-B
phase B
Current transformer supervision for HZCCCSPVC MCS I_C MCS-C
phase C

MCS-A MCS-B MCS-C
I_A ALARM I_B ALARM I_C ALARM
BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK
GUID-9C726422-7ED4-42AE-AED1-8C5829FE085D V1 EN
6.3.3 Functionality
The current transformer supervision for high-impedance protection scheme function
MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C is a dedicated phase-segregated supervision function to be used
along with the high-impedance differential protection for detecting the broken CT
secondary wires. The differential current is taken as an input for the protection relay.
During normal CT condition, the value of the differential current is zero. However, when
the CT is broken, the secondary differential current starts flowing and it is used for
generating alarms.
To avoid faulty operation, MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C should have a sensitive setting,
compared to the high-impedance differential protection. The function is likely to pick up
under through-fault conditions. However, by incorporating a high time delay (3 s or
more), the downstream protection clears the fault before an alarm is generated.
MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C generates an alarm when the differential current exceeds the set
limit. The function operates within the DT characteristic.
854 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function output,
Timer or the whole function.

The operation of MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C can be generated with a module diagram. All
the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
The module diagram illustrates all the phases of the function. However, the functionality
is described only for phase A. The functionality for phase B and C is identical.
GUID-8C5661F6-12FC-4733-886C-01F793DF2FBF V1 EN
Level detector
This module compares the differential current I_A to the set Pickup value. The timer
module is activated if the differential current exceeds the value set in the Pickup value
setting.
615 series ANSI 855

Technical Manual
Timer
The time characteristic is according to DT. When the alarm timer reaches the value set by
Alarm delay time, the ALARM output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module
generates an alarm signal, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value
set by Reset delay time, the alarm timer resets. The activation of the BLOCK signal resets
the Timer and deactivates the ALARM output.
Lockout logic
MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C is provided with the possibility to activate a lockout for the
ALARM output depending on the Alarm output mode setting. In the "Lockout" mode, the
ALARM must be reset manually from the LHMI Clear menu after checking the CT
secondary circuit. In the "Non-latched" mode, the ALARM output functions normally, that
is, it resets as soon as the fault is cleared.
6.3.5 Measuring modes

The function operates on two alternative measurement modes, DFT and Peak-to-Peak.
The measurement mode is selected using the Measurement mode setting.
6.3.6 Application
MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C is a dedicated phase-segregated supervision function to be used
along with the high-impedance differential protection for detecting the broken CT
secondary wires. The operation principle of MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C is similar to the
high-impedance differential protection function 87A, 87B, 87C. However, the current
setting of MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C is set to be much more sensitive than 87A, 87B, 87C
and it trips with a higher time delay. A typical example of the MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C
Pickup value setting is 0.1 pu with an Alarm delay time of 3 s or more.
As the current setting of MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C is more sensitive than the actual
differential stage, it can pick up internally under the through-fault conditions; however, a
sufficient time delay prevents false alarm. If the bus wire is broken, differential current
arises depending on the load of the feeder with the broken bus wire.
856 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-FB4ECBAC-1408-4EE6-9F8E-F8F903C84A90 V1 EN
Figure 443: Broken secondary detection by MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C
In the example, the incoming feeder is carrying a load of 2.0 pu and both outgoing feeders
carry an equal load of 1.0 pu However, both 87A, 87B, 87C and MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-
C consider the current as an increased differential or unbalance current because of the
broken CT wire in phase C. Both 87A, 87B, 87C and MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C receive
the differential current of approximately 1.0 pu The main differential protection 87A,
87B, 87C cannot trip because of the higher current setting.
All CTs must have the same ratio.
615 series ANSI 857

Technical Manual
The ALARM output of the CT supervision function can be used to energize an auxiliary
relay which can short-circuit the current CT wires, making the busbar differential
protection inoperative. This arrangement does not prevent unwanted operation of 87A,
87B, 87C if the pickup setting is below the rated load. For example, if the pickup setting
for 87A, 87B, 87C in the example is set as 0.8 pu 87A, 87B, 87C trips before MCS-A,
MCS-B, MCS-C.
6.3.7 Signals
Table 747: MCS-A Input signals
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating blocking mode
Table 748: MCS-B Input signals

Table 749: MCS-C Input signals

Table 750: MCS-A Output signals

Table 751: MCS-B Output signals

Table 752: MCS-C Output signals

858 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
6.3.8 Settings
Table 753: MCS-A Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Pickup value 1.0...100.0 %In 0.1 10.0 Pickup value, percentage of the nominal
current
Alarm delay time 100...300000 ms 10 3000 Alarm delay time
Alarm output mode 1=Non-latched 3=Lockout Select the operation mode for alarm output
3=Lockout
Table 754: MCS-A Non group settings (Advanced)

3=Peak-to-Peak
Table 755: MCS-B Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
current
3=Lockout
Table 756: MCS-B Non group settings (Advanced)

3=Peak-to-Peak
615 series ANSI 859

Technical Manual
Table 757: MCS-C Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
current
3=Lockout
Table 758: MCS-C Non group settings (Advanced)

3=Peak-to-Peak

Table 759: MCS-A Monitored data
MCS-A Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Table 760: MCS-B Monitored data

MCS-B Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Table 761: MCS-C Monitored data

MCS-C Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
860 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 762: MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C Technical data
measured: fn ±2 Hz
Reset time <40 ms


Table 763: MCS-A, MCS-B, MCS-C Technical revision history
B Function name changed from HZCCRDIF to
HZCCASPVC, HZCCBSPVC, HZCCCSPVC.
6.4 Protection communication supervision PCS
Protection communication supervision PCSITPC PCS PCS

PCS
OK
WARNING
ALARM
COMM
GUID-DCE29B59-34C4-4FF9-9B6C-76BE2AEDBF31 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 861

Technical Manual
6.4.3 Functionality
The protection communication supervision function PCS monitors the protection
communication channel. PCS blocks the line differential protection functions when
interference in the protection communication channel is detected. The blocking takes
place automatically for the 87L and BST functions which are dependent on the continuous
availability of the protection communication channel.
The protection communication channel is continuously monitored by PCS. The function

detects missing or delayed protection telegrams. Protection telegrams are used for
transferring the sampled analog and other protection related data. Missing or delayed
protection telegrams can jeopardize the demand operate speed of the differential
protection.
When a short-term interference is detected in the protection communication channel, the

function issues a warning and the line differential functions are automatically internally
blocked. PCS reacts fast for the protection communication interferences. The blocking
takes place at the latest when a communication interruption lasting for two fundamental
network periods is detected. When a severe and long lasting interference or total
interruption in the protection communication channel is detected, an alarm is issued (after
a five-second delay). The protection communication supervision quality status is
exchanged continuously online by the local and remote PCS instances. This ensures that
both local and remote ends protection blocking is issued coordinately. This further
enhances the security of the line differential protection by forcing both line end protection
relays to the same blocking state during a protection communication interference, even in
cases where the interference is detected with only one line end protection relay. There is
also the Reset delay time settings parameter available which is used for changing the
required interference-free time before releasing the line-differential protection back in
operation after a blocking due to an interference in communication.

The operation of PCS can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
862 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-FE089DD8-D0A0-4D3B-9287-48B11ADBAC25 V1 EN
Communication supervision
The protection communication is supervised because the differential calculation is
dependent on the refreshing of new analog phasor samples from the remote terminal
within the protection telegram. The new protection telegram also updates the status of the
binary signals sent by the remote terminal. The calculation of the differential current is
based on comparing the remote and local terminal measured current samples. It is
therefore essential that the protection communication telegrams are supervised and the
result of the sample latency calculation can be used further in the differential current
calculation. When the communication is able to receive telegrams correctly from the
remote end via the communication media, the communication is assumed to be operating
correctly and the COMM output is kept active.
Communication interference detector

The communication interference detector is continuously measuring and observing the
sample latency of the protection telegrams. This value is also available as monitored data.
The function provides three output signals of which only the corresponding one is active
at a time depending on if the protection communication supervision is in OK, WARNING or
ALARM. The OK state indicates the correct operation of the protection. The WARNING
state indicates that the protection is internally blocked due to detected interference. The
WARNING state is switched to ALARM if the interference lasts for a longer period. The
protection communication supervision can sometimes be in the WAITING state. This state
indicates that the terminal is waiting for the communication to start or restart from the
remote end terminal.
Timer
Once activated with the WARNING signal, the timer has a constant time delay value of five
seconds. If the communication failure exists after the delay, the ALARM output is
activated.
615 series ANSI 863

Technical Manual
6.4.5 Application
Communication principle
Analog samples, trip, pickup and user programmable signals are transferred in each
protection telegram and the exchange of these protection telegrams is done eight times per
power system cycle (every 2.5 ms when Fn = 50 Hz).
Master-Master communication arrangement is used in the two-terminal line differential

solution. Current samples are sent from both line ends and the protection algorithms are
also executed on both line ends. The direct-intertrip, however, ensures that both ends are
always operated simultaneously.
Time synchronization
In numerical line differential protection, the current samples from the protections which
are located geographically apart from each other must be time coordinated so that the
current samples from both ends of the protected line can be compared without introducing
irrelevant errors. The time coordination requires an extremely high accuracy.
As an example, an inaccuracy of 0.1 ms in a 50 Hz system gives a maximum amplitude

error of approximately around 3 percent. An inaccuracy of 1 ms gives a maximum
amplitude error of approximately 31 percent. The corresponding figures for a 60 Hz
system are 4 and 38 percent respectively.
In the protection relay, the time coordination is done with an echo method. The protection
relays create their own time reference between each other so that the system clocks do not
need to synchronize.
The figure shows that in the time synchronization the transmission time to send a message
from station B to station A, T1→T2, and the time to receive a message from A to B,
T4→T5, are measured. The station A protection relay delay from the sampling to the start
of send, T3→T4, and the local delay from receive to the station B protection relay
sampling T5→T6 time, are also measured for the station B protection relay, and vice
versa. This way the time alignment factor for the local and remote samples is achieved.
GUID-2DDF64E2-D635-4783-854A-A62E5EFB7186 V1 EN
Figure 446: Measuring sampling latency
864 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
(T2 − T1 ) + (T5 − T4 )
Pd =
2
GUID-0CB3B365-7081-43D4-90F5-91A8082522FE V2 EN (Equation 160)
S d = Pd + (T4 − T3 ) + (T6 − T5 )
GUID-2940B36E-3A6C-44E4-BD39-1B117E168829 V2 EN (Equation 161)
The sampling latency Sd is calculated for each telegram on both ends. The algorithm
assumes that the one-way propagation delay Pd is equal for both directions.
The echo method without GPS can be used in telecommunication transmission networks
as long as delay symmetry exists, that is, the sending and receiving delays are equal.
6.4.6 Signals
Table 764: PCS Output signals
OK BOOLEAN Protection communication ok
WARNING BOOLEAN Protection communication warning
ALARM BOOLEAN Protection communication alarm
COMM BOOLEAN Communication detected
6.4.7 Settings
Table 765: PCS Non group settings (Advanced)
Reset delay time 100...300000 ms 10 1000 Reset delay time from alarm and warning into
ok state
Alarm count 0...99999 1 0 Set new alarm count value
Warning count 0...99999 1 0 Set new warning count value

Table 766: PCS Monitored data
Health Enum 1=Ok Communication link health
2=Warning
3=Alarm
-2=Waiting
Alarm count INT32 0...99999 Number of alarms detected
WARN_CNT INT32 0...99999 Number of warnings detected
615 series ANSI 865

Technical Manual

Sample latency FLOAT32 0.000...99.999 ms Measured sample latency
PROPAGTN_DLY FLOAT32 0.000...99.999 ms Measured propagation delay
RND_TRIP_DLY FLOAT32 0.000...99.999 ms Measured round trip delay
T_ALARM_CNT Timestamp Time when alarm count was
last changed
T_WARN_CNT Timestamp Time when warning count was
last changed

Table 767: PCS Technical revision history
B Changes and additions to the monitored data
E Function name changed from PCSRTCP to PCSITPC
6.5 Fuse failure supervision 60
Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC FUSEF 60
GUID-0A336F51-D8FA-4C64-A7FE-7A4270E621E7-ANSI V1 EN
866 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
6.5.3 Functionality
The fuse failure supervision function 60 is used to block the voltage-measuring functions
when failure occurs in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer (or combi
sensor or voltage sensor) and protection relay to avoid faulty operation of the voltage
protection functions.
60 has two algorithms, a negative sequence-based algorithm and a delta current and delta
voltage algorithm.
A criterion based on the delta current and the delta voltage measurements can be activated
to detect three-phase fuse failures which usually are more associated with the voltage
transformer switching during station operations.

The operation of 60 can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
GUID-6891B535-AE42-4785-88B9-7A1C9122C9A9 V1 EN
615 series ANSI 867

Technical Manual
Negative phase-sequence criterion

A fuse failure based on the negative-sequence criterion is detected if the measured
negative-sequence voltage exceeds the set Neg Seq voltage Lev value and the measured
negative-sequence current is below the set Neg Seq current Lev value. The detected fuse
failure is reported to the decision logic module.
Voltage check
The phase voltage magnitude is checked when deciding whether the fuse failure is a three,
two or a single-phase fault.
The module makes a phase-specific comparison between each voltage input and the Seal
in voltage setting. If the input voltage is lower than the setting, the corresponding phase
is reported to the decision logic module.
Current and voltage delta criterion

The delta function can be activated by setting the Change rate enable parameter to "True".
Once the function is activated, it operates in parallel with the negative sequence-based
algorithm. The current and voltage are continuously measured in all three phases to
calculate:
• Change of voltage dV/dt
• Change of current dI/dt
The calculated delta quantities are compared to the respective set values of the Current
change rate and Voltage change rate settings.
The delta current and delta voltage algorithms detect a fuse failure if there is a sufficient
negative change in the voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in the current
amplitude in each phase separately. This is performed when the circuit breaker is closed.
Information about the circuit breaker position is connected to the CB_CLOSED input.
There are two conditions for activating the current and voltage delta function.
• The magnitude of dV/dt exceeds the corresponding value of the Voltage change rate
setting and magnitude of dI/dt is below the value of the Current change rate setting
in any phase at the same time due to the closure of the circuit breaker (CB_CLOSED
= TRUE).
• The magnitude of dV/dt exceeds the value of the Voltage change rate setting and the
magnitude of dI/dt is below the Current change rate setting in any phase at the same
time and the magnitude of the phase current in the same phase exceeds the Min Op
current delta setting.
The first condition requires the delta criterion to be fulfilled in any phase at the same time
as the circuit breaker is closed. Opening the circuit breaker at one end and energizing the
868 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
line from the other end onto a fault could lead to an improper operation of 60 with an open
breaker. If this is considered to be an important disadvantage, the CB_CLOSED input is to
be connected to FALSE. In this way only the second criterion can activate the delta
function.
The second condition requires the delta criterion to be fulfilled in one phase together with
a high current for the same phase. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk
of a false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop
in the system (not caused by the fuse failure) is not followed by a current change and a false
fuse failure can occur. To prevent this, the minimum phase current criterion is checked.
The fuse failure detection is active until the voltages return above the Min Op voltage delta
setting. If a voltage in a phase is below the Min Op voltage delta setting, a new fuse failure
detection for that phase is not possible until the voltage returns above the setting value.
Decision logic
If voltages are Wye-connected, it is recommended to scale the default

values of voltage-based settings with 1/sqrt(3) because the default setting
values apply for Delta-connected settings.
The fuse failure detection outputs FUSEF_V and FUSEF_3PH are controlled according
to the detection criteria or external signals.
Table 768: Fuse failure output control
Fuse failure detection criterion Conditions and function response
Negative-sequence criterion If a fuse failure is detected based on the negative
sequence criterion, the FUSEF_V output is activated.
If the fuse failure detection is active for more than five

seconds and at the same time all the phase voltage
values are below the set value of the Seal in voltage
setting with Enable seal in turned to "True", the
function activates the FUSE_3PH output signal.
The FUSEF_V output signal is also activated if all the

phase voltages are above the Seal in voltage setting
for more than 60 seconds and at the same time the
negative sequence voltage is above Neg Seq
voltage Lev for more than 5 seconds, all the phase
currents are below the Current dead Lin Val setting
and the circuit breaker is closed, that is CB_CLOSED
is TRUE.
615 series ANSI 869

Technical Manual
Fuse failure detection criterion Conditions and function response

Current and voltage delta function criterion If the current and voltage delta criterion detects a
fuse failure condition, but all the voltages are not
below the Seal in voltage setting, only the FUSEF_V
If the fuse failure detection is active for more than five
seconds and at the same time all the phase voltage
values are below the set value of the Seal in voltage
setting with Enable seal in turned to "True", the
function activates the FUSE_3PH output signal.
External fuse failure detection The MINCB_OPEN input signal is supposed to be

connected through a protection relay binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit
breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.The
MINCB_OPEN signal sets the FUSEF_V output signal
to block all the voltage-related functions when MCB
is in the open state.
The DISCON_OPEN input signal is supposed to be
connected through a protection relay binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line
disconnector.The DISCON_OPEN signal sets the
FUSEF_V output signal to block the voltage-related
functions when the line disconnector is in the open
state.
It is recommended to always set Enable seal in to "True". This secures that

the blocked protection functions remain blocked until normal voltage
conditions are restored if the fuse failure has been active for 5 seconds,
that is, the fuse failure outputs are deactivated when the normal voltage
conditions are restored.
The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates both FUSEF_V and FUSEF_3PH outputs.
6.5.5 Application
Some protection functions operate on the basis of the measured voltage value in the
protection relay point. These functions can fail if there is a fault in the measuring circuits
between the voltage transformer (or combi sensor or voltage sensor) and protection relay.
A fault in the voltage-measuring circuit is called a fuse failure. This term is misleading
since a blown fuse is just one of the many possible reasons for a broken circuit. Since
incorrectly measured voltage can result in a faulty operation of some of the protection
functions, it is important to detect the fuse failures. A fast fuse failure detection is one of
the means to block voltage-based functions before they trip.
870 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-FA649B6A-B51E-47E2-8E37-EBA9CDEB2BF5-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 449: Fault in a circuit from the voltage transformer to the protection relay
A fuse failure occurs due to blown fuses, broken wires or intended substation operations.
The negative sequence component-based function can be used to detect different types of
single-phase or two-phase fuse failures. However, at least one of the three circuits from the
voltage transformers must be intact. The supporting delta-based function can also detect
a fuse failure due to three-phase interruptions.
In the negative sequence component-based part of the function, a fuse failure is detected
by comparing the calculated value of the negative sequence component voltage to the
negative sequence component current. The sequence entities are calculated from the
measured current and voltage data for all three phases. The purpose of this function is to
block voltage-dependent functions when a fuse failure is detected. Since the voltage
dependence differs between these functions, 60 has two outputs for this purpose.
6.5.6 Signals
V_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase A voltage

V_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase B voltage
V_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase C voltage
615 series ANSI 871

Technical Manual


CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False Active when circuit breaker is closed
DISCON_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Active when line disconnector is open
MINCB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Active when external MCB opens protected voltage
circuit

FUSEF_3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase pickup of function
FUSEF_V BOOLEAN General pickup of function
6.5.7 Settings
5=disable

Neg Seq current Lev 0.03...0.20 xIn 0.01 0.03 Trip level of neg seq undercurrent element
Neg Seq voltage Lev 0.03...0.20 xUn 0.01 0.10 Trip level of neg seq overvoltage element
Current change rate 0.01...0.50 xIn 0.01 0.15 Trip level of change in phase current
Voltage change rate 0.25...0.90 xUn 0.01 0.40 Trip level of change in phase voltage
Change rate enable 0=False 0=False Enabling operation of change based function
1=True
Min Op voltage delta 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.50 Minimum trip level of phase voltage for delta
calculation
Min Op current delta 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Minimum trip level of phase current for delta
calculation
Seal in voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.50 Trip level of seal-in phase voltage
Enable seal in 0=False 0=False Enabling seal in functionality
1=True
Current dead Lin Val 0.05...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.05 Trip level for open phase current detection
872 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Trip time1) NPS function VFault = 1.1 × set Neg <33 ms
Seq voltage Lev
VFault = 5.0 × set Neg <18 ms
Seq voltage Lev
Delta function ΔV = 1.1 × set Voltage <30 ms
change rate
ΔV = 2.0 × set Voltage <24 ms
change rate
1) Includes the delay of the signal output contact, fn = 50 Hz, fault voltage with nominal frequency injected from
random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

D Function name changed from SEQRFUF to
SEQSPVC
615 series ANSI 873

Technical Manual
6.6 Runtime counter for machines and devices OPTM
Runtime counter for machines and MDSOPT OPTS OPTM
devices
GUID-C20AF735-FF25-411B-9EA6-11D595484613-ANSI V2 EN
6.6.3 Functionality
The generic operation time counter function OPTM calculates and presents the
accumulated operation time of a machine or device as the output. The unit of time for
accumulation is hour. The function generates a warning and an alarm when the
accumulated operation time exceeds the set limits. It utilizes a binary input to indicate the
active operation condition.
The accumulated operation time is one of the parameters for scheduling a service on the
equipment like motors. It indicates the use of the machine and hence the mechanical wear
and tear. Generally, the equipment manufacturers provide a maintenance schedule based
on the number of hours of service.

The operation of OPTM can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
874 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-6BE6D1E3-F3FB-45D9-8D6F-A44752C1477C V1 EN
Operation time counter

This module counts the operation time. When POS_ACTIVE is active, the count is
continuously added to the time duration until it is deactivated. At any time the OPR_TIME
output is the total duration for which POS_ACTIVE is active. The unit of time duration
count for OPR_TIME is hour. The value is available through the Monitored data view.
The OPR_TIME output is a continuously increasing value and it is stored in a non-volatile

memory. When POS_ACTIVE is active, the OPR_TIME count starts increasing from the
previous value. The count of OPR_TIME saturates at the final value of 299999, that is, no
further increment is possible. The activation of RESET can reset the count to the Initial
value setting.
Limit Supervision
This module compares the motor run-time count to the set values of Warning value and
Alarm value to generate the WARNING and ALARM outputs respectively when the counts
exceed the levels.
The activation of the WARNING and ALARM outputs depends on the Operating time mode
setting. Both WARNING and ALARM occur immediately after the conditions are met if
Operating time mode is set to “Immediate”. If Operating time mode is set to “Timed
Warn”, WARNING is activated within the next 24 hours at the time of the day set using the
Operating time hour setting. If Operating time mode is set to “Timed Warn Alm”, the
WARNING and ALARM outputs are activated at the time of day set using Operating time
hour.
The Operating time hour setting is used to set the hour of day in
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The setting has to be adjusted
according to the local time and local daylight-saving time.
The function contains a blocking functionality. Activation of the BLOCK input blocks both
WARNING and ALARM.
615 series ANSI 875

Technical Manual
6.6.5 Application
The machine operating time since commissioning indicates the use of the machine. For
example, the mechanical wear and lubrication requirement for the shaft bearing of the
motors depend on the use hours.
If some motor is used for long duration runs, it might require frequent servicing, while for
a motor that is not used regularly the maintenance and service are scheduled less
frequently. The accumulated operating time of a motor together with the appropriate
settings for warning can be utilized to trigger the condition based maintenance of the
motor.
The operating time counter combined with the subsequent reset of the operating-time
count can be used to monitor the motor's run time for a single run.
Both the long term accumulated operating time and the short term single run duration
provide valuable information about the condition of the machine and device. The
information can be co-related to other process data to provide diagnoses for the process
where the machine or device is applied.
6.6.6 Signals
Table 776: OPTM Input signals
POS_ACTIVE BOOLEAN 0=False When active indicates the equipment is running
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Resets the accumulated operation time to initial value
Table 777: OPTM Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm accumulated operation time exceeds Alarm value
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning accumulated operation time exceeds Warning
value
6.6.7 Settings
Table 778: OPTM Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Warning value 0...299999 h 1 8000 Warning value for operation time supervision
Alarm value 0...299999 h 1 10000 Alarm value for operation time supervision
876 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 779: OPTM Non group settings (Advanced)

Initial value 0...299999 h 1 0 Initial value for operation time supervision
Operating time hour 0...23 h 1 0 Time of day when alarm and warning will occur
Operating time mode 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Operating time mode for warning and alarm
2=Timed Warn
3=Timed Warn Alm

Table 780: OPTM Monitored data
OPTM Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
OPR_TIME INT32 0...299999 h Total operation time in hours

Table 781: OPTM Technical data
Description Value
Motor runtime measurement accuracy1) ±0.5%
1) Of the reading, for a stand-alone relay, without time synchronization

Table 782: OPTM Technical revision history
615 series ANSI 877

Technical Manual
878
Condition monitoring functions
Section 7 Condition monitoring functions
7.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring 52CM
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR CBCM 52CM

52CM
I_A TRV_T_OP_ALM
I_B TRV_T_CL_ALM
I_C SPR_CHR_ALM
BLOCK OPR_ALM
POSOPEN OPR_LO
POSCLOSE IPOW_ALM
OPEN_CB_EXE IPOW_LO
CLOSE_CB_EXE CB_LIFE_ALM
PRES_AML_IN MON_ALM
PRES_LO_IN PRES_ALM
SPR_CHR_ST PRES_LO
SPR_CHR OPEN_LO
RST_IPOW INVALIDPOS
RST_CB_WEAR CLOSEPOS
RST_TRV_T
RST_SPR_T
GUID-5057DDA1-F011-4268-B7CC-7A4AB01AC2B4 V1 EN
7.1.3 Functionality
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function 52CM is used to monitor different
parameters of the circuit breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of
operations has reached a predefined value. The energy is calculated from the measured
input currents as a sum of Iyt values. Alarms are generated when the calculated values
exceed the threshold settings.
if desired.
615 series ANSI 879

Technical Manual

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes different metering and
monitoring sub-functions. The functions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation
setting. The corresponding parameter values are “Enable” and “Disable”. The operation
counters are cleared when Operation is set to “Disable”.
The operation of 52CM can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
A071103 V4 EN
880 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
7.1.4.1 Circuit breaker status
The Circuit breaker status sub-function monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is,
whether the breaker is in open, closed or invalid position. The operation of the breaker
status monitoring can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
A071104 V3 EN
Figure 454: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status
Phase current check

This module compares the three phase currents to the setting Acc stop current. If the
current in a phase exceeds the set level, information about the phase is reported to the
contact position indicator module.
Contact position indicator

The OPENPOS output is activated when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is FALSE,
the POSOPEN input is TRUE and all the phase currents are below the setting Acc stop
current.
The CLOSEPOS output is activated when the auxiliary POSOPEN input is FALSE and the
POSCLOSE input is TRUE.
The INVALIDPOS output is activated when both the auxiliary contacts have the same
value, that is, both are in the same logical level, or if the auxiliary input contact
POSCLOSE is FALSE and the POSOPEN input is TRUE and any of the phase currents
exceed the setting Acc stop current.
The status of the breaker is indicated by the binary outputs OPENPOS, INVALIDPOS and
CLOSEPOS for open, invalid and closed position respectively.
7.1.4.2 Circuit breaker operation monitoring
The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction is to indicate if the
circuit breaker has not been operated for a long time.
The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring can be described with a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
615 series ANSI 881

Technical Manual
A071105 V2 EN
Figure 455: Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm for
circuit breaker operation monitoring
Inactivity timer
The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive, that
is, has stayed in the same open or closed state. The calculation is done by monitoring the
states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The inactive days INA_DAYS is available in the monitored data view. It is also possible
to set the initial inactive days with the Ini inactive days parameter.
Alarm limit check

When the inactive days exceed the limit value defined with the Inactive Alm days setting,
the MON_ALM alarm is initiated. The time in hours at which this alarm is activated can be
set with the Inactive Alm hours parameter as coordinates of UTC. The alarm signal
MON_ALM can be blocked by activating the binary input BLOCK.
7.1.4.3 Breaker contact travel time
The Breaker contact travel time module calculates the breaker contact travel time for the
closing and opening operation. The operation of the breaker contact travel time
measurement can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are
explained in the next sections.
A071106 V4 EN
Figure 456: Functional module diagram for breaker contact travel time
Traveling time calculator

The travel time can be calculated using two different methods based on the setting Travel
time Clc mode.
882 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
When the setting Travel time Clc mode is “From Pos to Pos”, the contact travel time of the
breaker is calculated from the time between auxiliary contacts' state change. The opening
travel time is measured between the opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact and the
closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact. The travel time is also measured between the
opening of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact and the closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary
contact.
A071107 V1 EN
Figure 457: Travel time calculation when Travel time Clc mode is “From Pos to Pos”
There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the opening
of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time gap t2 between the time
when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open. To
incorporate the time t1 + t2, a correction factor needs to be added with topen to get the actual
opening time. This factor is added with the Opening time Cor (= t1 + t2) setting. The
closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the Closing time Cor (t3 + t4) setting
to the measured closing time.
When the setting Travel time Clc mode is “From Cmd to Pos”, the contact travel time of
the breaker is calculated from the time between the circuit breaker opening or closing
command and the auxiliary contacts’ state change. The opening travel time is measured
between the rising edge of the OPEN_CB_EXE command and the POSOPEN auxiliary
contact. The closing travel time is measured between the rising edge of the
CLOSE_CB_EXEC command and the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact.
615 series ANSI 883

Technical Manual
GUID-A8C2EB5B-F105-4BF7-B1EC-77D4B8238531 V1 EN
Figure 458: Travel time calculation when Travel time Clc mode is “From Cmd to Pos”
There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
OPEN_CB_EXE command. Similarly, there is a time gap t2 between the time when the
POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open. Therefore, to
incorporate the times t1 and t2, a correction factor needs to be added with topen to get the
actual opening time. This factor is added with the Opening time Cor (= t2 - t1) setting. The
closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the Closing time Cor (t4 - t3) setting
to the measured closing time.
The last measured opening travel time T_TRV_OP and the closing travel time
T_TRV_CL are available in the monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via
communications.
Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set with the Open alarm
time setting, the TRV_T_OP_ALM output is activated. Respectively, when the measured
closing travel time is longer than the value set with the Close alarm time setting, the
TRV_T_CL_ALM output is activated.
It is also possible to block the TRV_T_CL_ALM and TRV_T_OP_ALM alarm signals by

activating the BLOCK input.
884 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
7.1.4.4 Operation counter
The operation counter subfunction calculates the number of breaker operation cycles. The
opening and closing operations are both included in one operation cycle. The operation
counter value is updated after each opening operation.
The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the modules
A071108 V2 EN
Figure 459: Functional module diagram for counting circuit breaker operations
Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state change of the
binary auxiliary contacts inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NO_OPR is available in the monitored data view on the LHMI
or through tools via communications. The old circuit breaker operation counter value can
be taken into use by writing the value to the Counter initial Val parameter and by setting
the parameter Initial CB Rmn life in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI.
Alarm limit check

The OPR_ALM operation alarm is generated when the number of operations exceeds the
value set with the Alarm Op number threshold setting. However, if the number of
operations increases further and exceeds the limit value set with the Lockout Op number
setting, the OPR_LO output is activated.
The binary outputs OPR_LO and OPR_ALM are deactivated when the BLOCK input is
activated.
7.1.4.5 Accumulation of Iyt
Accumulation of the Iyt module calculates the accumulated energy.
The operation of the module can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in
615 series ANSI 885

Technical Manual
A071109 V2 EN
Figure 460: Functional module diagram for calculating accumulative energy and
alarm
Accumulated energy calculator

This module calculates the accumulated energy Iyt [(kA)ys]. The factor y is set with the
Current exponent setting.
The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE input opening events. It ends when the
RMS current becomes lower than the Acc stop current setting value.
A071110 V1 EN
Figure 461: Significance of the Difference Cor time setting
The Difference Cor time setting is used instead of the auxiliary contact to accumulate the
energy from the time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of
energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and when the delay is equal to the value
set with the Difference Cor time setting. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts
in advance by the correction time before the auxiliary contact opens.
The accumulated energy outputs IPOW_A (_B, _C) are available in the monitored
data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications. The values can be reset by
setting the parameter Initial CB Rmn life setting to true in the clear menu from WHMI or
LHMI.
886 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Alarm limit check

The IPOW_ALM alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the value set
with the Alm Acc currents Pwr threshold setting. However, when the energy exceeds the
limit value set with the LO Acc currents Pwr threshold setting, the IPOW_LO output is
activated.
The IPOW_ALM and IPOW_LO outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input
BLOCK.
7.1.4.6 Remaining life of circuit breaker
Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to wearing. The
wearing in the breaker depends on the tripping current, and the remaining life of the
breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer. The
remaining life is decremented at least with one when the circuit breaker is opened.
The operation of the remaining life of the circuit breaker subfunction can be described
with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
A071111 V2 EN
Figure 462: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker
Circuit breaker life estimator

The circuit breaker life estimator module calculates the remaining life of the circuit
breaker. If the tripping current is less than the rated operating current set with the Rated Op
current setting, the remaining operation of the breaker reduces by one operation. If the
tripping current is more than the rated fault current set with the Rated fault current setting,
the possible operations are zero. The remaining life of the tripping current in between
these two values is calculated based on the trip curve given by the manufacturer. The Op
number rated and Op number fault parameters set the number of operations the breaker
can perform at the rated current and at the rated fault current, respectively.
The remaining life is calculated separately for all three phases and it is available as a
monitored data value CB_LIFE_A (_B,_C). The values can be cleared by setting the
parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI.
615 series ANSI 887

Technical Manual
Clearing CB wear values also resets the operation counter.
Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of any phase drops below the Life alarm level threshold setting,
the corresponding circuit breaker life alarm CB_LIFE_ALM is activated.
It is possible to deactivate the CB_LIFE_ALM alarm signal by activating the binary input
BLOCK. The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be taken into use by writing
the value to the Initial CB Rmn life parameter and resetting the value via the clear menu
from WHMI or LHMI.
7.1.4.7 Circuit breaker spring-charged indication
The circuit breaker spring-charged indication subfunction calculates the spring charging
time.
A071112 V3 EN
Figure 463: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring-charged indication
and alarm
Spring charge time measurement

Two binary inputs, SPR_CHR_ST and SPR_CHR, indicate spring charging started and
spring charged, respectively. The spring-charging time is calculated from the difference
of these two signal timings.
The spring charging time T_SPR_CHR is available in the monitored data view on the
LHMI or through tools via communications.
Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the Spring charge
time setting, the subfunction generates the SPR_CHR_ALM alarm.
888 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
It is possible to block the SPR_CHR_ALM alarm signal by activating the BLOCK binary
input.
7.1.4.8 Gas pressure supervision
The gas pressure supervision subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the arc
chamber.
A071113 V2 EN
Figure 464: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure alarm
The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals PRES_LO_IN and
PRES_ALM_IN.
Timer 1
When the PRES_ALM_IN binary input is activated, the PRES_ALM alarm is activated
after a time delay set with the Pressure alarm time setting. The PRES_ALM alarm can be
blocked by activating the BLOCK input.
Timer 2
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRES_LO_IN binary input becomes
high, activating the lockout alarm PRES_LO after a time delay set with the Pres lockout
time setting. The PRES_LO alarm can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input.
7.1.5 Application
52CM includes different metering and monitoring subfunctions.
Circuit breaker status

Circuit breaker status monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is, whether the
breaker is in an open, closed or intermediate position.
615 series ANSI 889

Technical Manual
Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is to indicate that the circuit
breaker has not been operated for a long time. The function calculates the number of days
the circuit breaker has remained inactive, that is, has stayed in the same open or closed
state. There is also the possibility to set an initial inactive day.
Breaker contact travel time

High traveling times indicate the need for the maintenance of the circuit breaker
mechanism. Therefore, detecting excessive traveling time is needed. During the opening
cycle operation, the main contact starts opening. The auxiliary contact A opens, the
auxiliary contact B closes and the main contact reaches its opening position. During the
closing cycle, the first main contact starts closing. The auxiliary contact B opens, the
auxiliary contact A closes and the main contact reaches its closed position. The travel
times are calculated based on the state changes of the auxiliary contacts and the adding
correction factor to consider the time difference of the main contact's and the auxiliary
contact's position change.
Operation counter
Routine maintenance of the breaker, such as lubricating breaker mechanism, is generally
based on a number of operations. A suitable threshold setting to raise an alarm when the
number of operation cycle exceeds the set limit helps preventive maintenance. This can
also be used to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing in case of an
oil circuit breaker.
The change of state can be detected from the binary input of the auxiliary contact. There
is a possibility to set an initial value for the counter which can be used to initialize this
functionality after a period of operation or in case of refurbished primary equipment.
Accumulation of Iyt
Accumulation of Iyt calculates the accumulated energy ΣIyt, where the factor y is known
as the current exponent. The factor y depends on the type of the circuit breaker. For oil
circuit breakers, the factor y is normally 2. In case of a high-voltage system, the factor y
can be 1.4...1.5.
Remaining life of the breaker

Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to wearing. The
wearing in the breaker depends on the tripping current, and the remaining life of the
breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer.
Example for estimating the remaining life of a circuit breaker
890 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A071114 V3 EN
Figure 465: Trip Curves for a typical 12 kV, 630 A, 16 kA vacuum interrupter
Nr the number of closing-opening operations allowed for the circuit breaker

Ia the current at the time of tripping of the circuit breaker
Calculation of Directional Coef
The directional coefficient is calculated according to the formula:
615 series ANSI 891

Technical Manual
B
log  
Directional Coef =  A  = −2.2609
If 
log  
 Ir 
Ir Rated operating current = 630 A
If Rated fault current = 16 kA
A Op number rated = 30000

B Op number fault = 20
Calculation for estimating the remaining life
Figure 465 shows that there are 30,000 possible operations at the rated operating current
of 630 A and 20 operations at the rated fault current 16 kA. Therefore, if the tripping
current is 10 kA, one operation at 10 kA is equivalent to 30,000/60=500 operations at the
rated current. It is also assumed that prior to this tripping, the remaining life of the circuit
breaker is 15,000 operations. Therefore, after one operation of 10 kA, the remaining life
of the circuit breaker is 15,000-500=14,500 at the rated operating current.
− Directional Coef
 I 
Remaining life reduction =  
 Ir 
GUID-5AA23DAD-AAF0-4D03-844F-216C80F80789 V1 EN (Equation 163)
Spring-charged indication
For normal operation of the circuit breaker, the circuit breaker spring should be charged
within a specified time. Therefore, detecting long spring-charging time indicates that it is
time for the circuit breaker maintenance. The last value of the spring-charging time can be
used as a service value.
Gas pressure supervision

The gas pressure supervision monitors the gas pressure inside the arc chamber. When the
pressure becomes too low compared to the required value, the circuit breaker operations
are locked. A binary input is available based on the pressure levels in the function, and
alarms are generated based on these inputs.
892 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
7.1.6 Signals
Table 783: 52CM Input signals
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
OPEN_CB_EXE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open command to coil
CLOSE_CB_EXE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for close command to coil
PRES_ALM_IN BOOLEAN 0=False Binary pressure alarm input
PRES_LO_IN BOOLEAN 0=False Binary pressure input for lockout indication
SPR_CHR_ST BOOLEAN 0=False CB spring charging started input
SPR_CHR BOOLEAN 0=False CB spring charged input
RST_IPOW BOOLEAN 0=False Reset accumulation energy
RST_CB_WEAR BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for CB remaining life and operation counter
RST_TRV_T BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for CB closing and opening travel times
RST_SPR_T BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for the charging time of the CB spring
Table 784: 52CM Output signals

TRV_T_OP_ALM BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRV_T_CL_ALM BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
SPR_CHR_ALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
OPR_ALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPR_LO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
IPOW_ALM BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded alarm limit
IPOW_LO BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded lockout
limit
CB_LIFE_ALM BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB exceeded alarm limit
MON_ALM BOOLEAN CB 'not tripped for long time' alarm
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
INVALIDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in invalid position (not positively open or closed)
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position
615 series ANSI 893

Technical Manual
7.1.7 Settings
Table 785: 52CM Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Acc stop current 5.00...500.00 A 0.01 10.00 RMS current setting below which engy acm
stops
Open alarm time 0...200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for open travel time in ms
Close alarm time 0...200 ms 1 40 Alarm level Setting for close travel time in ms
Spring charge time 0...60000 ms 10 15000 Setting of alarm for spring charging time of CB
in ms
Alarm Op number 0...99999 1 200 Alarm limit for number of operations
Lockout Op number 0...99999 1 300 Lock out limit for number of operations
Current exponent 0.00...2.00 0.01 2.00 Current exponent setting for energy calculation
Difference Cor time -10...10 ms 1 5 Corr. factor for time dif in aux. and main
contacts open time
Alm Acc currents Pwr 0.00...20000.00 0.01 2500.00 Setting of alarm level for accumulated currents
power
LO Acc currents Pwr 0.00...20000.00 0.01 2500.00 Lockout limit setting for accumulated currents
power
Directional Coef -3.00...-0.50 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life calculation
Initial CB Rmn life 0...99999 1 5000 Initial value for the CB remaining life
Rated Op current 100.00...5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
Rated fault current 500.00...75000.00 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
Op number rated 1...99999 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated current
Op number fault 1...10000 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated fault
current
Inactive Alm days 0...9999 1 2000 Alarm limit value of the inactive days counter
Travel time Clc mode 1=From Cmd to 2=From Pos to Pos Travel time calculation mode selection
Pos
2=From Pos to Pos
Table 786: 52CM Non group settings (Advanced)

Opening time Cor -100...100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for open travel time in ms
Closing time Cor -100...100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for CB close travel time in ms
Counter initial Val 0...99999 1 0 The operation numbers counter initialization
value
Ini Acc currents Pwr 0.00...20000.00 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accumulation energy (Iyt)
Life alarm level 0...99999 1 500 Alarm level for CB remaining life
894 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Pressure alarm time 0...60000 ms 1 10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm in ms
Pres lockout time 0...60000 ms 10 10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout in ms
Ini inactive days 0...9999 1 0 Initial value of the inactive days counter
Inactive Alm hours 0...23 h 1 0 Alarm time of the inactive days counter in hours

Table 787: 52CM Monitored data
T_TRV_OP FLOAT32 0...60000 ms Travel time of the CB during
opening operation
T_TRV_CL FLOAT32 0...60000 ms Travel time of the CB during
closing operation
T_SPR_CHR FLOAT32 0.00...99.99 s The charging time of the CB
spring
NO_OPR INT32 0...99999 Number of CB operation cycle
INA_DAYS INT32 0...9999 The number of days CB has
been inactive
CB_LIFE_A INT32 -99999...99999 CB Remaining life phase A
CB_LIFE_B INT32 -99999...99999 CB Remaining life phase B
CB_LIFE_C INT32 -99999...99999 CB Remaining life phase C
IPOW_A FLOAT32 0.000...30000.00 Accumulated currents power
0 (Iyt), phase A
IPOW_B FLOAT32 0.000...30000.00 Accumulated currents power
0 (Iyt), phase B
IPOW_C FLOAT32 0.000...30000.00 Accumulated currents power
0 (Iyt), phase C
52CM Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
615 series ANSI 895

Technical Manual

Table 788: 52CM Technical data
Current measuring accuracy ±1.5% or ±0.002 × In
±5.0%

Travelling time measurement +10 ms / -0 ms

Table 789: 52CM Technical revision history
B Added the possibility to reset spring charge time and
breaker travel times
C Removed the DIFTRVTOPALM and
DIFTRVTCLALM outputs and the corresponding
Open Dif alarm time and Close Dif alarm time setting
parameters
D The Operation cycle setting parameter renamed to
Initial CB Rmn life. The IPOW_A (_B, _C) range
changed.
E Maximum value of initial circuit breaker remaining life
time setting (Initial CB Rmn life) changed from 9999
to 99999. Added support for measuring circuit
breaker travelling time from opening/closing
command and auxiliary contact state signal change.
F Alarm Op number range increased from 9999 to
99999. Lockout Op number setting range increased
from 9999 to 99999. Counter initial value setting
range increased from 9999 to 99999.
896 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Measurement functions
Section 8 Measurement functions
8.1 Basic measurements
8.1.1 Functions
The three-phase current measurement function IA, IB, IC is used for monitoring and
metering the phase currents of the power system.
The three-phase voltage measurement function VA, VB, VC is used for monitoring and
metering the phase-to-phase voltages of the power system. The phase-to-ground voltages
are also available in VA, VB, VC.
The ground current measurement function IG is used for monitoring and metering the
ground current of the power system.
The ground voltage measurement function VG is used for monitoring and metering the
ground voltage of the power system.
The sequence current measurement I1, I2, I0 is used for monitoring and metering the
phase sequence currents.
The sequence voltage measurement V1, V2, V0 is used for monitoring and metering the
phase sequence voltages.
The frequency measurement f is used for monitoring and metering the power system
frequency.
The single-phase power and energy measurement SP, SE and the three-phase power and
energy measurement P, E is used for monitoring and metering the active power P, reactive
power Q, apparent power S, power factor PF and for calculating the accumulated energy
separately as forward active, reverse active, forward reactive and reverse reactive. P, E
calculates these quantities with the fundamental frequency phasors, that is, the DFT
values of the measured phase current and phase voltage signals.
The information of the measured quantity is available for the operator both locally in
LHMI or WHMI and remotely to a network control center with communication.
If the measured data in LHMI or WHMI is within parentheses, there are

some problems to express the data.
615 series ANSI 897

Technical Manual
8.1.2 Measurement functionality

The functions can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding
parameter values are Enable and Disable.
Some of the measurement functions operate on two alternative measurement modes:

"DFT" and "RMS". The measurement mode is selected with the X Measurement mode
setting. Depending on the measuring function if the measurement mode cannot be
selected, the measuring mode is "DFT".
Demand value calculation

The demand values are calculated separately for each measurement function and per
phase when applicable. The available measurement modes are "Linear" and
"Logarithmic". The "Logarithmic" measurement mode is only effective for phase current
and residual current demand value calculations. The demand value calculation mode is
selected with the setting parameter Configuration/Measurements/A demand Av mode.
The time interval for all demand value calculations is selected with the setting parameter
Configuration/Measurements/Demand interval.
If the Demand interval setting is set to "15 minutes", for example, the demand values are
updated every quarter of an hour. The demand time interval is synchronized to the real-
time clock of the protection relay. When the demand time interval or calculation mode is
changed, it initializes the demand value calculation. For the very first demand value
calculation interval, the values are stated as invalid until the first refresh is available.
The "Linear" calculation mode uses the periodic sliding average calculation of the
measured signal over the demand time interval. A new demand value is obtained once in
a minute, indicating the analog signal demand over the demand time interval proceeding
the update time. The actual rolling demand values are stored in the memory until the value
is updated at the end of the next time interval.
The "Logarithmic" calculation mode uses the periodic calculation using a log10 function
over the demand time interval to replicate thermal demand ammeters. The logarithmic
demand calculates a snapshot of the analog signal every 1/15 x demand time interval.
Each measurement function has its own recorded data values. In protection relay, these are
found in Monitoring/Recorded data/Measurements. In the technical manual these are
listed in the monitored data section of each measurement function. These values are
periodically updated with the maximum and minimum demand values. The time stamps
are provided for both values.
Reset of Recorded data initializes a present demand value to the minimum and maximum
demand values.
898 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Value reporting
The measurement functions are capable of reporting new values for network control
center (SCADA system) based on various functions.
• Zero-point clamping
• Deadband supervision
• Limit value supervision
In the three-phase voltage measurement function VA, VB, VC the

supervision functions are based on the phase-to-phase voltages. However,
the phase-to-ground voltage values are also reported together with the
phase-to-phase voltages.
GOOSE is an event based protocol service. Analog GOOSE uses the same
event generation functions as vertical SCADA communication for
updating the measurement values. Update interval of 500 ms is used for
data that do not have zero-point clamping, deadband supervision or limit
value supervision.
Zero-point clamping
A measured value under the zero-point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The active clamping function forces both the actual
measurement value and the angle value of the measured signal to zero. In the three-phase
or sequence measuring functions, each phase or sequence component has a separate zero-
point clamping function. The zero-value detection operates so that once the measured
value exceeds or falls below the value of the zero-clamping limit, new values are reported.
Table 790: Zero-point clamping limits
Function Zero-clamping limit
Three-phase current measurement (IA, IB, IC) 1% of nominal (In)
Three-phase voltage measurement (VA, VB, VC) 1% of nominal (Vn)
Ground current measurement (IG) 1% of nominal (In)
Ground voltage measurement (VG) 1% of nominal (Vn)
Phase sequence current measurement (I1, I2, I0) 1% of the nominal (In)
Phase sequence voltage measurement (V1, V2, V0) 1% of the nominal (Vn)
Three-phase power and energy measurement (P, E) 1.5% of the nominal (Sn)
615 series ANSI 899

Technical Manual
When the frequency measurement function f is unable to measure the

network frequency in the undervoltage situation, the measured values are
set to the nominal and also the quality information of the data set
accordingly. The undervoltage limit is fixed to 10 percent of the nominal
for the frequency measurement.
Limit value supervision

The limit value supervision function indicates whether the measured value of X_INST
exceeds or falls below the set limits. The measured value has the corresponding range
information X_RANGE and has a value in the range of 0 to 4:
• 0: "normal"
• 1: "high"
• 2: "low"
• 3: "high-high"
• 4: "low-low"
The range information changes and the new values are reported.
GUID-AAAA7367-377C-4743-A2D0-8DD4941C585D V1 EN
Figure 466: Presentation of operating limits
The range information can also be decoded into boolean output signals on some of the
measuring functions and the number of phases required to exceed or undershoot the limit
before activating the outputs and can be set with the Num of phases setting in the three-
phase measurement functions IA, IB, IC and VA, VB, VC. The limit supervision boolean
alarm and warning outputs can be blocked.
900 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 791: Settings for limit value supervision

Three-phase current measurement (IA, IB, High limit A high limit
IC)
Low limit A low limit
High-high limit A high high limit
Low-low limit A low low limit
Three-phase voltage measurement (VA, High limit V high limit
VB, VC)
Low limit V low limit
High-high limit V high high limit
Low-low limit V low low limit
Ground current measurement (IG) High limit A high limit res
Low limit -
High-high limit A Hi high limit res
Low-low limit -
Frequency measurement (f) High limit F high limit
Low limit F low limit
High-high limit F high high limit
Low-low limit F low low limit
Ground voltage measurement (VG) High limit V high limit res
Low limit -
High-high limit V Hi high limit res
Low-low limit -
Phase sequence current measurement (I1, High limit Ps Seq A high limit, Ng Seq A
I2, I0) high limit, Zro A high limit
Low limit Ps Seq A low limit, Ng Seq A
low limit, Zro A low limit
High-high limit Ps Seq A Hi high Lim, Ng Seq
A Hi high Lim, Zro A Hi high
Lim
Low-low limit Ps Seq A low low Lim, Ng Seq
A low low Lim, Zro A low low
Lim
Phase sequence voltage measurement High limit Ps Seq V high limit, Ng Seq V
(V1, V2, V0) high limit, Zro V high limit
Low limit Ps Seq V low limit, Ng Seq V
low limit, Zro V low limit
High-high limit Ps Seq V Hi high Lim, Ng Seq
V Hi high Lim, Zro V Hi high
Lim
Low-low limit Ps Seq V low low Lim, Ng Seq
V low low Lim,
615 series ANSI 901

Technical Manual

Three-phase power and energy High limit -
measurement (P, E)
Low limit -
High-high limit -
Low-low limit -
Deadband supervision
The deadband supervision function reports the measured value according to integrated
changes over a time period.
GUID-63CA9A0F-24D8-4BA8-A667-88632DF53284 V1 EN
Figure 467: Integral deadband supervision
The deadband value used in the integral calculation is configured with the X deadband
setting. The value represents the percentage of the difference between the maximum and
minimum limit in the units of 0.001 percent x seconds.
The reporting delay of the integral algorithms in seconds is calculated with the formula:
(max − min) × deadband / 1000
t (s) =
∆Y × 100%
GUID-5381484E-E205-4548-A846-D3519578384B V1 EN (Equation 164)
Example for IA, IB, IC:
A deadband = 2500 (2.5% of the total measuring range of 40)
I_INST_A = I_DB_A = 0.30
If I_INST_A changes to 0.40, the reporting delay is:
902 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
(40 − 0) × 2500 / 1000

t (s) = = 10 s
0.40 − 0.30 × 100%
GUID-D1C387B1-4F2E-4A28-AFEA-431687DDF9FE V1 EN
Table 792: Parameters for deadband calculation

Function Settings Maximum/minimum (=range)
Three-phase current A deadband 40/0 (=40xIn)
measurement (IA, IB, IC)
Three-phase voltage V Deadband 4/0 (=4xVn)
measurement (VA, VB, VC)
Ground current measurement A deadband res 40/0 (=40xIn)
(IG)
Ground voltage measurement V deadband res 4/0 (=4xVn)
(VG)
Frequency measurement (f) F deadband 75/35 (=40 Hz)1)
Phase sequence current Ps Seq A deadband, Ng Seq A 40/0 (=40xIn)
measurement (I1, I2, I0) deadband, Zro A deadband
Phase sequence voltage Ps Seq V deadband, Ng Seq V 4/0 (=4xVn)
measurement (V1, V2, V0) deadband, Zro V deadband
Three-phase power and energy -
measurement (P, E)
1) The value provided is for REF615, RET615 and REM615 in 50 Hz network. The value for 60 Hz network is
90/36 (=54 Hz). For REG615 the values are 75/10 (=65 Hz) in 50 Hz network and 90/12 (=78 Hz) in 60 Hz
network.
In the power and energy measurement functions P, E and SP, SE, the
deadband supervision is done separately for apparent power S, with the
preset value of fixed 10 percent of the Sn and the power factor PF, with the
preset values fixed at 0.10. All the power measurement-related values P,
Q, S and PF are reported simultaneously when either one of the S or PF
values exceeds the preset limit.
Power and energy calculation

The single-phase and three-phase power is calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages
and phase-to-ground currents. The power measurement function is capable of calculating
a complex power based on the fundamental frequency component phasors (DFT).
* * *
S = (V A ⋅ I A + VB ⋅ I B + VC ⋅ I C)
GUID-8BF2FBFE-B33B-4B49-86AA-C1B326BBBAC1-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 165)
Once the complex apparent power is calculated, P, Q, S and PF are calculated with the
equations:
615 series ANSI 903

Technical Manual
P = Re( S )
GUID-92B45FA5-0B6B-47DC-9ADB-69E7EB30D53A V3 EN (Equation 166)
Q = Im( S )
GUID-CA5C1D5D-3AD9-468C-86A1-835525F8BE27 V2 EN (Equation 167)
S = S = P2 + Q2
GUID-B3999831-E376-4DAF-BF36-BA6F761230A9 V2 EN (Equation 168)
P
Cosϕ =
S
GUID-D729F661-94F9-48B1-8FA0-06E84A6F014C V2 EN (Equation 169)
Depending on the unit multiplier selected with Power unit Mult, the calculated power
values are presented in units of kVA/kW/kVAr or in units of MVA/MW/MVAr.
GUID-9947B4F2-CD26-4F85-BF57-EAF1593AAE1B V1 EN
Figure 468: Complex power and power quadrants
904 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 793: Power quadrants

Quadrant Current P Q PF Power
Q1 Lagging + + 0…+1.00 +ind
Q2 Lagging - + 0…-1.00 -cap
Q3 Leading - - 0…-1.00 -ind
Q4 Leading + - 0…+1.00 +cap
The active power P direction can be selected between forward and reverse with Active
power Dir and correspondingly the reactive power Q direction can be selected with
Reactive power Dir. This affects also the accumulated energy directions.
The accumulated energy is calculated separately as forward active (EA_FWD_ACM),

reverse active (EA_RV_ACM), forward reactive (ER_FWD_ACM) and reverse reactive
(ER_RV_ACM). Depending on the value of the unit multiplier selected with Energy unit
Mult, the calculated power values are presented in units of kWh/kVArh or in units of
MWh/MVArh.
When the energy counter reaches its defined maximum value, the counter value is reset
and restarted from zero. Changing the value of the Energy unit Mult setting resets the
accumulated energy values to the initial values, that is, EA_FWD_ACM to Forward Wh
Initial, EA_RV_ACM to Reverse Wh Initial, ER_FWD_ACM to Forward VArh Initial and
ER_RV_ACM to Reverse VArh Initial. It is also possible to reset the accumulated energy
to initial values through a parameter or with the RSTACM input.
Sequence components
The phase-sequence components are calculated using the phase currents and phase
voltages. More information on calculating the phase-sequence components can be found
in Calculated measurements in this manual.
8.1.3 Measurement function applications

The measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to LHMI, a monitoring tool within PCM600, or to the station level, for example,
with IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor the measured values of active
power, reactive power, currents, voltages, power factors and so on, is vital for efficient
production, transmission, and distribution of electrical energy. It provides a fast and easy
overview of the present status of the power system to the system operator. Additionally,
it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection relays to verify the proper
operation and connection of instrument transformers, that is, the current transformers
(CTs) and voltage transformers (VTs). The proper operation of the protection relay analog
measurement chain can be verified during normal service by a periodic comparison of the
measured value from the protection relay to other independent meters.
615 series ANSI 905

Technical Manual
When the zero signal is measured, the noise in the input signal can still produce small
measurement values. The zero point clamping function can be used to ignore the noise in
the input signal and, hence, prevent the noise to be shown in the user display. The zero
clamping is done for the measured analog signals and angle values.
The demand values are used to neglect sudden changes in the measured analog signals
when monitoring long time values for the input signal. The demand values are linear
average values of the measured signal over a settable demand interval. The demand values
are calculated for the measured analog three-phase current signals.
The limit supervision indicates, if the measured signal exceeds or goes below the set
limits. Depending on the measured signal type, up to two high limits and up to two low
limits can be set for the limit supervision.
The deadband supervision reports a new measurement value if the input signal has gone
out of the deadband state. The deadband supervision can be used in value reporting
between the measurement point and operation control. When the deadband supervision is
properly configured, it helps in keeping the communication load in minimum and yet
measurement values are reported frequently enough.
8.1.4 Three-phase current measurement IA, IB, IC
Three-phase current measurement CMMXU 3I IA, IB, IC
A070777-ANSI V1 EN
906 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
8.1.4.3 Signals
Table 794: IA,IB,IC Input signals
Table 795: IA,IB,IC Output signals

HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm
HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN High warning
LOW_WARN BOOLEAN Low warning
LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN Low alarm
8.1.4.4 Settings
Table 796: IA,IB,IC Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Num of phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required by limit supervision
2=2 out of 3
3=3 out of 3
A high high limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 1.40 High alarm current limit
A high limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 1.20 High warning current limit
A low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.00 Low warning current limit
A low low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.00 Low alarm current limit
A deadband 100...100000 1 2500 Deadband configuration value for integral
Table 797: IA,IB,IC Non group settings (Advanced)

2=DFT
615 series ANSI 907

Technical Manual

Table 798: IA,IB,IC Monitored data
IA-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured current amplitude
phase A
IB-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured current amplitude
phase B
IC-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured current amplitude
phase C
Max demand IA FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Maximum demand for Phase
A
Max demand IB FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Maximum demand for Phase
B
Max demand IC FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Maximum demand for Phase
C
Min demand IA FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Minimum demand for Phase A
Min demand IB FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Minimum demand for Phase B
Min demand IC FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Minimum demand for Phase C
Time max demand IA Timestamp Time of maximum demand
phase A
Time max demand IB Timestamp Time of maximum demand
phase B
Time max demand IC Timestamp Time of maximum demand
phase C
Time min demand IA Timestamp Time of minimum demand
phase A
Time min demand IB Timestamp Time of minimum demand
phase B
Time min demand IC Timestamp Time of minimum demand
phase C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary
1=True outputs
HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False High alarm
1=True
HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN 0=False High warning
1=True
LOW_WARN BOOLEAN 0=False Low warning
1=True
LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Low alarm
1=True
I_INST_A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn IA Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I_ANGL_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg IA current angle
908 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

I_DB_A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn IA Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
I_DMD_A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Demand value of IA current
I_RANGE_A Enum 0=normal IA Amplitude range
1=high
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
I_INST_B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn IB Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I_ANGL_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg IB current angle
I_DB_B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn IB Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
I_DMD_B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Demand value of IB current
I_RANGE_B Enum 0=normal IB Amplitude range
1=high
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
I_INST_C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn IC Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I_ANGL_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg IC current angle
I_DB_C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn IC Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
I_DMD_C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Demand value of IC current
I_RANGE_C Enum 0=normal IC Amplitude range
1=high
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low

Table 799: IA, IB, IC Technical data
current: fn ±2 Hz
±0.5% or ±0.002 × In
(at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × In)

RMS: No suppression
615 series ANSI 909

Technical Manual

Table 800: IA, IB, IC Technical revision history
B Menu changes
C Phase current angle values added to Monitored data
view. Minimum demand value and time added to
recorded data. Logarithmic demand calculation
mode added and demand interval setting moved
under Measurement menu as general setting to all
demand calculations.
8.1.5 Three-phase voltage measurement VA, VB, VC
Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU 3U VA, VB, VC
GUID-5B741292-7FA6-4DEA-8D16-B530FD16A0FE-ANSI V1 EN
8.1.5.3 Signals
Table 801: VA,VB,VC Input signals
910 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 802: VA,VB,VC Output signals

LOW_WARN BOOLEAN Low warning
LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN Low alarm
8.1.5.4 Settings
Table 803: VA,VB,VC Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Num of phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required by limit supervision
2=2 out of 3
3=3 out of 3
V high high limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 1.40 High alarm voltage limit
V high limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 1.20 High warning voltage limit
V low limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.00 Low warning voltage limit
V low low limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit
V deadband 100...100000 1 10000 Deadband configuration value for integral
Table 804: VA,VB,VC Non group settings (Advanced)

2=DFT

Table 805: VA,VB,VC Monitored data
VAB-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured phase to phase
voltage amplitude phase AB
VBC-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured phase to phase
voltage amplitude phase BC
VCA-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured phase to phase
voltage amplitude phase CA
615 series ANSI 911

Technical Manual

1=True outputs
1=True
1=True
LOW_WARN BOOLEAN 0=False Low warning
1=True
LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Low alarm
1=True
V_INST_AB FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn VAB Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V_ANGL_AB FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg VAB angle
V_DB_AB FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn VAB Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
V_DMD_AB FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Demand value of VAB voltage
V_RANGE_AB Enum 0=normal VAB Amplitude range
1=high
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
V_INST_BC FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn VBC Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V_ANGL_BC FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg VBC angle
V_DB_BC FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn VBC Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
V_DMD_BC FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Demand value of VBC voltage
V_RANGE_BC Enum 0=normal VBC Amplitude range
1=high
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
V_INST_CA FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn VCA Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V_ANGL_CA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg VCA angle
V_DB_CA FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn VCA Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
V_DMD_CA FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Demand value of VCA voltage
V_RANGE_CA Enum 0=normal VCA Amplitude range
1=high
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
V_INST_A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn VA Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V_ANGL_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg VA angle
912 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

V_DMD_A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Demand value of VA voltage
V_INST_B FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn VB Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V_ANGL_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg VB angle
V_DMD_B FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Demand value of VB voltage
V_INST_C FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn VC Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V_ANGL_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg VC angle
V_DMD_C FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Demand value of VC voltage

Table 806: VA, VB, VC Technical data
measured: fn ±2 Hz
At voltages in range 0.01…1.15 × Vn
±0.5% or ±0.002 × Vn

RMS: No suppression

Table 807: VA, VB, VC Technical revision history
B Phase and phase-to-phase voltage angle values and
demand values added to Monitored data view.
8.1.6 Residual current measurement IG
Residual current measurement RESCMMXU Io IG
615 series ANSI 913

Technical Manual
A070778-ANSI V1 EN
8.1.6.3 Signals
Table 808: IG Input signals
Table 809: IG Output signals

8.1.6.4 Settings
Table 810: IG Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
A Hi high limit res 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.20 High alarm current limit
A high limit res 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.05 High warning current limit
A deadband res 100...100000 1 2500 Deadband configuration value for integral
Table 811: IG Non group settings (Advanced)

2=DFT
914 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 812: IG Monitored data
IG-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured residual current
1=True outputs
1=True
1=True
IG_INST FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Ground current Amplitude,
magnitude of instantaneous
value
IG_ANGL FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Residual current angle
IG_DB FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Ground current Amplitude,
magnitude of reported value
IG_DMD FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Demand value of residual
current
IG_RANGE Enum 0=normal Ground current Amplitude
1=high range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
Max demand IG FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Maximum demand for residual
current
Min demand IG FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Minimum demand for residual
current
Time max demand IG Timestamp Time of maximum demand
residual current
Time min demand IG Timestamp Time of minimum demand
residual current

Table 813: IG Technical data
±0.5% or ±0.002 × In
(at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × In)

RMS: No suppression
615 series ANSI 915

Technical Manual

Table 814: IG Technical revision history
B -
C Residual current angle and demand value added to
Monitored data view. Recorded data added for
minimum and maximum values with timestamps.
D Monitored data Min demand IG maximum value
range (RESCMSTA2.MinAmps.maxVal.f ) is
corrected to 40.00.
8.1.7 Residual voltage measurement VG
Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU Uo VG
A070779-ANSI V1 EN
8.1.7.3 Signals
Table 815: VG Input signals
VG SIGNAL 0 Ground voltage
Table 816: VG Output signals

916 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
8.1.7.4 Settings
Table 817: VG Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
V Hi high limit res 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.20 High alarm voltage limit
V high limit res 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.05 High warning voltage limit
V deadband res 100...100000 1 10000 Deadband configuration value for integral
Table 818: VG Non group settings (Advanced)

2=DFT

Table 819: VG Monitored data
VG-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured residual voltage
1=True outputs
1=True
1=True
VG_INST FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Ground voltage Amplitude,
magnitude of instantaneous
value
VG_ANGL FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Residual voltage angle
VG_DB FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Ground voltage Amplitude,
magnitude of reported value
VG_DMD FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Demand value of residual
voltage
VG_RANGE Enum 0=normal Ground voltage Amplitude
1=high range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
615 series ANSI 917

Technical Manual

Table 820: VG Technical data
voltage: f/fn = ±2 Hz
±0.5% or ±0.002 × Vn

RMS: No suppression

Table 821: VG Technical revision history
B -
C Residual voltage angle and demand value added to
Monitored data view
8.1.8 Frequency measurement f
Frequency measurement FMMXU f f
GUID-7561C612-FAFD-41ED-830C-3EA81E305594 V1 EN
918 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The frequency measurement range is 35...75 Hz. The measured frequencies outside the
measurement range are considered to be out of range and the minimum and maximum
values are then shown in parentheses.
When Frequency adaptivity is enabled, the measurement range is extended to 10...75 Hz

in a 50 Hz network and 12...90 Hz in a 60 Hz network. The measured frequencies outside
35...75 Hz are shown in parentheses.
When the frequencies cannot be measured, for example, due to too low voltage amplitude,
the default value for frequency measurement can be selected with the Def frequency Sel
setting parameter. In the “Nominal” mode the frequency is set to 50 Hz (or 60 Hz) and in
“Zero” mode the frequency is set to zero and shown in parentheses.
8.1.8.4 Signals
Table 822: f Input signals
F SIGNAL - Measured system frequency
8.1.8.5 Settings
Table 823: f Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
F Hi high limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 1 60.00 High alarm frequency limit
F high limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 1 55.00 High warning frequency limit
F low limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 1 45.00 Low warning frequency limit
F Lo low limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 1 40.00 Low alarm frequency limit
F deadband 100...100000 1 1000 Deadband configuration value for integral
Table 824: f Non group settings (Advanced)

Def frequency Sel 1=Nominal 1=Nominal Default frequency selection
2=Zero
615 series ANSI 919

Technical Manual

Table 825: f Monitored data
f-Hz FLOAT32 35.00...75.00 Hz Measured frequency
F_INST FLOAT32 35.00...75.00 Hz Frequency, instantaneous
value
F_DB FLOAT32 35.00...75.00 Hz Frequency
F_RANGE Enum 0=normal Frequency range
1=high
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low

Table 826: f Technical data
Operation accuracy ±5 mHz
(in measurement range 35...75 Hz)

Table 827: f Technical revision history
B Added new setting Def frequency Sel. Frequency
measurement range lowered from 35 Hz to 10 Hz.
8.1.9 Sequence current measurement I1, I2, I0
Sequence current measurement CSMSQI I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0
920 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A070784-ANSI V1 EN
8.1.9.3 Signals
Table 828: I1, I2, I0 Input signals
I0 SIGNAL 0 Zero sequence current
8.1.9.4 Settings
Table 829: I1,I2,I0 Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Ps Seq A Hi high Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 1.40 High alarm current limit for positive sequence
current
Ps Seq A high limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 1.20 High warning current limit for positive
sequence current
Ps Seq A low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.00 Low warning current limit for positive sequence
current
Ps Seq A low low Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.00 Low alarm current limit for positive sequence
current
Ps Seq A deadband 100...100000 1 2500 Deadband configuration value for positive
sequence current for integral calculation.
(percentage of difference between min and
max as 0,001 % s)
Ng Seq A Hi high Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.20 High alarm current limit for negative sequence
current
Ng Seq A High limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.05 High warning current limit for negative
sequence current
Ng Seq A low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.00 Low warning current limit for negative
sequence current
615 series ANSI 921

Technical Manual

Ng Seq A low low Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.00 Low alarm current limit for negative sequence
current
Ng Seq A deadband 100...100000 1 2500 Deadband configuration value for negative
max as 0,001 % s)
Zro A Hi high Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.20 High alarm current limit for zero sequence
current
Zro A High limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.05 High warning current limit for zero sequence
current
Zro A low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.00 Low warning current limit for zero sequence
current
Zro A low low Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 1 0.00 Low alarm current limit for zero sequence
current
Zro A deadband 100...100000 1 2500 Deadband configuration value for zero
max as 0,001 % s)

Table 830: I1,I2,I0 Monitored data
I2-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured negative sequence
current
I1-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured positive sequence
current
I0-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured zero sequence
current
I2_INST FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Negative sequence current
amplitude, instantaneous
value
I2_ANGL FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Negative sequence current
angle
I2_DB FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Negative sequence current
amplitude, reported value
I2_RANGE Enum 0=normal Negative sequence current
1=high amplitude range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
I1_INST FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Positive sequence current
value
I1_ANGL FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Positive sequence current
angle
922 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

I1_DB FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Positive sequence current
I1_RANGE Enum 0=normal Positive sequence current
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
I0_INST FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Zero sequence current
value
I0_ANGL FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Zero sequence current angle
I0_DB FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Zero sequence current
I0_RANGE Enum 0=normal Zero sequence current
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low

Table 831: I1, I2, I0 Technical data
current: f/fn = ±2 Hz
±1.0% or ±0.002 × In
at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × In

Table 832: I1, I2, I0 Technical revision history
A -
B Sequence current angle values added to the
615 series ANSI 923

Technical Manual
8.1.10 Sequence voltage measurement V1, V2, V0
Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI U1, U2, U0 V1, V2, V0
GUID-63393283-E2C1-406A-9E70-847662D83CFC-ANSI V1 EN
8.1.10.3 Signals
Table 833: V1, V2, V0 Input signals
V0 SIGNAL 0 Zero sequence voltage
8.1.10.4 Settings
Table 834: V1,V2,V0 Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Ps Seq V Hi high Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 1.40 High alarm voltage limit for positive sequence
voltage
Ps Seq V high limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 1.20 High warning voltage limit for positive
sequence voltage
Ps Seq V low limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.00 Low warning voltage limit for positive sequence
voltage
Ps Seq V low low Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit for positive sequence
voltage
924 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Ps Seq V deadband 100...100000 1 10000 Deadband configuration value for positive
sequence voltage for integral calculation.
max as 0,001 % s)
Ng Seq V Hi high Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.20 High alarm voltage limit for negative sequence
voltage
Ng Seq V High limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.05 High warning voltage limit for negative
sequence voltage
Ng Seq V low limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.00 Low warning voltage limit for negative
sequence voltage
Ng Seq V low low Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit for negative sequence
voltage
Ng Seq V deadband 100...100000 1 10000 Deadband configuration value for negative
max as 0,001 % s)
Zro V Hi high Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.20 High alarm voltage limit for zero sequence
voltage
Zro V High limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.05 High warning voltage limit for zero sequence
voltage
Zro V low limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.00 Low warning voltage limit for zero sequence
voltage
Zro V low low Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 1 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit for zero sequence
voltage
Zro V deadband 100...100000 1 10000 Deadband configuration value for zero
max as 0,001 % s)

Table 835: V1,V2,V0 Monitored data
V2-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured negative sequence
voltage
V1-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured positive sequence
voltage
V0-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured zero sequence
voltage
V2_INST FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Negative sequence voltage
value
V2_ANGL FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Negative sequence voltage
angle
615 series ANSI 925

Technical Manual

V2_DB FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Negative sequence voltage
V2_RANGE Enum 0=normal Negative sequence voltage
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
V1_INST FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Positive sequence voltage
value
V1_ANGL FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Positive sequence voltage
angle
V1_DB FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Positive sequence voltage
V1_RANGE Enum 0=normal Positive sequence voltage
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
V0_INST FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Zero sequence voltage
value
V0_ANGL FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Zero sequence voltage angle
V0_DB FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Zero sequence voltage
V0_RANGE Enum 0=normal Zero sequence voltage
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low

Table 836: V1, V2, V0 Technical data
measured: fn ±2 Hz
At voltages in range 0.01…1.15 × Vn
±1.0% or ±0.002 × Vn
926 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
8.1.11 Three-phase power and energy measurement P, E
Three-phase power and energy PEMMXU P, E P, E
measurement
GUID-E38A24DA-85CE-4246-9C3F-DFC6FDAEA302-ANSI V1 EN
8.1.11.3 Signals
Table 837: P,E Input signals
V_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A voltage
V_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B voltage
V_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C voltage
RSTACM BOOLEAN 0=False Reset of accumulated energy reading
615 series ANSI 927

Technical Manual
8.1.11.4 Settings
Table 838: P,E Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Power unit Mult 3=Kilo 3=Kilo Unit multiplier for presentation of the power
6=Mega related values
Energy unit Mult 3=Kilo 3=Kilo Unit multiplier for presentation of the energy
6=Mega related values
Active power Dir 1=Forward 1=Forward Direction of active power flow: Forward,
2=Reverse Reverse
Reactive power Dir 1=Forward 1=Forward Direction of reactive power flow: Forward,
2=Reverse Reverse
Table 839: P,E Non group settings (Advanced)

Forward Wh Initial 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for forward active energy
Reverse Wh Initial 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for reverse active energy
Forward VArh Initial 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy
Reverse VArh Initial 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy

Table 840: P,E Monitored data
S-kVA FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Total Apparent Power
99.9
P-kW FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Total Active Power
99.9
Q-kVAr FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Total Reactive Power
99.9
PF FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Average Power factor
RSTACM BOOLEAN 0=False Reset of accumulated energy
1=True reading
S-kVA FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Total Apparent Power
99.9
S_DB FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Apparent power, magnitude of
99.9 reported value
S_DMD FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Demand value of apparent
99.9 power
928 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

P-kW FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Active power, magnitude of
99.9 instantaneous value
P_DB FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Active power, magnitude of
99.9 reported value
P_DMD FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Demand value of active power
99.9
Q-kVAr FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Total Reactive Power
99.9
Q_DB FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive power, magnitude of
99.9 reported value
Q_DMD FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Demand value of reactive
99.9 power
PF FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Average Power factor
PF_DB FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Power factor, magnitude of
reported value
PF_DMD FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Demand value of power factor
EA_RV_ACM INT64 0...999999999 kWh Accumulated reverse active
energy value
ER_RV_ACM INT64 0...999999999 kVArh Accumulated reverse reactive
energy value
EA_FWD_ACM INT64 0...999999999 kWh Accumulated forward active
energy value
ER_FWD_ACM INT64 0...999999999 kVArh Accumulated forward reactive
energy value
Max demand S FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Maximum demand value of
99.9 apparent power
Min demand S FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Minimum demand value of
99.9 apparent power
Max demand P FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Maximum demand value of
99.9 active power
Min demand P FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Minimum demand value of
99.9 active power
Max demand Q FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Maximum demand value of
99.9 reactive power
Min demand Q FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Minimum demand value of
99.9 reactive power
Time max dmd S Timestamp Time of maximum demand
Time min dmd S Timestamp Time of minimum demand
Time max dmd P Timestamp Time of maximum demand
Time min dmd P Timestamp Time of minimum demand
Time max dmd Q Timestamp Time of maximum demand
Time min dmd Q Timestamp Time of minimum demand
615 series ANSI 929

Technical Manual

Table 841: P, E Technical data
Operation accuracy At all three currents in range 0.10…1.20 × In
At all three voltages in range 0.50…1.15 × Vn
At the frequency fn ±1 Hz
±1.5% for apparent power S

±1.5% for active power P and active energy1)
±1.5% for reactive power Q and reactive energy2)
±0.015 for power factor
1) |PF| >0.5 which equals |cosφ| >0.5

2) |PF| <0.86 which equals |sinφ| >0.5

Table 842: P, E Technical revision history
B Demand values added to Monitored data. Recorded
data added to store minimum and maximum demand
values with timestamps.
8.1.12 Single-phase power and energy measurement SP, SE
Single-phase power and energy SPEMMXU SP, SE SP, SE
measurement
930 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
GUID-C6D692B2-FEA1-4450-A108-09C229A9CC0C V2 EN
8.1.12.3 Signals
Table 843: SP,SE Input signals
RSTACM BOOLEAN 0=False Reset of accumulated energy reading
8.1.12.4 Settings
Table 844: SP,SE Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Power unit Mult 3=k 3=k Unit multiplier for presentation of the power
6=M related values
Energy unit Mult 3=k 3=k Unit multiplier for presentation of the energy
6=M related values
Active power Dir 1=Forward 1=Forward Direction of active power flow: forward, reverse
2=Reverse
Reactive power Dir 1=Forward 1=Forward Direction of reactive power flow: forward,
2=Reverse reverse
615 series ANSI 931

Technical Manual
Table 845: SP,SE Non group settings (Advanced)

Direction of reactive 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for forward active energy
power flow: forward,
reverse
Reverse Wh Initial 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for reverse active energy
Forward VArh Initial 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy
Reverse VArh Initial 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy

Table 846: SP,SE Monitored data
SA-kVA FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Apparent Power, Phase A
99.9
SB-kVA FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Apparent Power, Phase B
99.9
SC-kVA FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Apparent Power, Phase C
99.9
PA-kW FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Active Power, Phase A
99.9
PB-kW FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Active Power, Phase B
99.9
PC-kW FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Active Power, Phase C
99.9
QA-kVAr FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive Power, Phase A
99.9
QB-kVAr FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive Power, Phase B
99.9
QC-kVAr FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive Power, Phase C
99.9
PFA FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Average Power factor, Phase
A
PFB FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Average Power factor, Phase
B
PFC FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Average Power factor, Phase
C
Max demand SL1 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Maximum demand for phase A
99.9
Max demand SL2 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Maximum demand for phase B
99.9
Max demand SL3 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Maximum demand for phase
99.9 C
932 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Min demand SL1 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Minimum demand for phase A
99.9
Min demand SL2 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Minimum demand for phase B
99.9
Min demand SL3 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Minimum demand for phase C
99.9
Max demand PL1 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Maximum demand for phase A
99.9
Max demand PL2 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Maximum demand for phase B
99.9
Max demand PL3 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Maximum demand for phase
99.9 C
Min demand PL1 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Minimum demand for phase A
99.9
Min demand PL2 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Minimum demand for phase B
99.9
Min demand PL3 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Minimum demand for phase C
99.9
Max demand QL1 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Maximum demand for phase A
99.9
Max demand QL2 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Maximum demand for phase B
99.9
Max demand QL3 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Maximum demand for phase
99.9 C
Min demand QL1 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Minimum demand for phase A
99.9
Min demand QL2 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Minimum demand for phase B
99.9
Min demand QL3 FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Minimum demand for phase B
99.9
Time max dmd SL1 Timestamp Time of maximum demand
phase A
phase B
phase C
Time max dmd PL1 Timestamp Time of maximum demand
phase A
phase B
phase C
Time max dmd QL1 Timestamp Time of maximum demand
phase A
615 series ANSI 933

Technical Manual

phase B
phase C
Time min dmd SL1 Timestamp Time of minimum demand
phase A
phase B
phase C
Time min dmd PL1 Timestamp Time of minimum demand
phase A
phase B
phase C
Time min dmd QL1 Timestamp Time of minimum demand
phase A
phase B
phase C
RSTACM BOOLEAN 0=False Reset of accumulated energy
1=True reading
S_INST_A FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Apparent power, magnitude of
99.9 instantaneous value, Phase A
S_INST_B FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Apparent power, magnitude of
99.9 instantaneous value, Phase B
S_INST_C FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Apparent power, magnitude of
99.9 instantaneous value, Phase C
S_DB_A FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Apparent power, magnitude of
99.9 reported value, Phase A
S_DB_B FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Apparent power, magnitude of
99.9 reported value, Phase B
S_DB_C FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Apparent power, magnitude of
99.9 reported value, Phase C
S_DMD_A FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Demand value of apparent
99.9 power, phase A
S_DMD_B FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Demand value of apparent
99.9 power, phase B
S_DMD_C FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Demand value of apparent
99.9 power, phase C
P_INST_A FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Active power, magnitude of
934 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

P_INST_B FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Active power, magnitude of
P_INST_C FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Active power, magnitude of
P_DB_A FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Active power, magnitude of
P_DB_B FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Active power, magnitude of
P_DB_C FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Active power, magnitude of
P_DMD_A FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Demand value of active
99.9 power, phase A
P_DMD_B FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Demand value of active
99.9 power, phase B
P_DMD_C FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Demand value of active
99.9 power, phase C
Q_INST_A FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive power, magnitude of
Q_INST_B FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive power, magnitude of
Q_INST_C FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive power, magnitude of
Q_DB_A FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive power, magnitude of
Q_DB_B FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive power, magnitude of
Q_DB_C FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive power, magnitude of
Q_DMD_A FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Demand value of reactive
99.9 power, phase A
Q_DMD_B FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Demand value of reactive
99.9 power, phase B
Q_DMD_C FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Demand value of reactive
99.9 power, phase C
PF_INST_A FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Power factor, magnitude of
instantaneous value, Phase A
PF_INST_B FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Power factor, magnitude of
instantaneous value, Phase B
PF_INST_C FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Power factor, magnitude of
instantaneous value, Phase C
PF_DB_A FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Power factor, magnitude of
reported value, Phase A
PF_DB_B FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Power factor, magnitude of
reported value, Phase B
615 series ANSI 935

Technical Manual

PF_DB_C FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Power factor, magnitude of
reported value, Phase C
PF_DMD_A FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Demand value of power factor,
phase A
PF_DMD_B FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Demand value of power factor,
phase B
PF_DMD_C FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Demand value of power factor,
phase C
EA_RV_ACM_A INT64 0...999999999 kWh Accumulated reverse active
energy value, Phase A
EA_RV_ACM_B INT64 0...999999999 kWh Accumulated reverse active
energy value, Phase B
EA_RV_ACM_C INT64 0...999999999 kWh Accumulated reverse active
energy value, Phase C
ER_RV_ACM_A INT64 0...999999999 kVArh Accumulated reverse reactive
ER_RV_ACM_B INT64 0...999999999 kVArh Accumulated reverse reactive
ER_RV_ACM_C INT64 0...999999999 kVArh Accumulated reverse reactive
EA_FWD_ACM_A INT64 0...999999999 kWh Accumulated forward active
EA_FWD_ACM_B INT64 0...999999999 kWh Accumulated forward active
EA_FWD_ACM_C INT64 0...999999999 kWh Accumulated forward active
ER_FWD_ACM_A INT64 0...999999999 kVArh Accumulated forward reactive
ER_FWD_ACM_B INT64 0...999999999 kVArh Accumulated forward reactive
ER_FWD_ACM_C INT64 0...999999999 kVArh Accumulated forward reactive
936 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 847: SP, SE Technical data
Operation accuracy At all three currents in range 0.10…1.20 x In
At all three voltages in range 0.50…1.15 x Vn
At the frequency fn ±1 Hz
Active power and energy in range |PF| > 0.71
Reactive power and energy in range |PF| < 0.71
±1.5% for power (S, P and Q)
±0.015 for power factor
±1.5% for energy
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
8.2 Digital fault recorder DFR
Disturbance recorder RDRE DR DFR
8.2.2 Functionality
The relay is provided with a disturbance recorder featuring up to 12 analog and 64 binary
signal channels.The analog channels can be set to record either the waveform or the trend
of the currents and voltages measured.
The analog channels can be set to trigger the recording function when the measured value
falls below or exceeds the set values. The binary signal channels can be set to start a
recording either on the rising or the falling edge of the binary signal or on both.
By default, the binary channels are set to record external or internal relay signals, for
example, the pickup or trip signals of the relay stages, or external blocking or control
signals. Binary relay signals, such as a protection pickup or trip signal, or an external relay
control signal via a binary input, can be set to trigger the recording.Recorded information
is stored in a non-volatile memory and can be uploaded for subsequent fault analysis.
8.2.2.1 Recorded analog inputs
The user can map any analog signal type of the protection relay to each analog channel of
the disturbance recorder by setting the Channel selection parameter of the corresponding
615 series ANSI 937

Technical Manual
analog channel. In addition, the user can enable or disable each analog channel of the
disturbance recorder by setting the Operation parameter of the corresponding analog
channel to “Enable” or “Disable”.
All analog channels of the disturbance recorder that are enabled and have a valid signal
type mapped are included in the recording.
8.2.2.2 Triggering alternatives
The recording can be triggered by any or several of the following alternatives:
• Triggering according to the state change of any or several of the binary channels of
the disturbance recorder. The user can set the level sensitivity with the Level trigger
mode parameter of the corresponding binary channel.
• Triggering on limit violations of the analog channels of the disturbance recorder (high
and low limit)
• Manual triggering via the Trig recording parameter (LHMI or communication)
• Periodic triggering.
Regardless of the triggering type, each recording generates the Recording started and
Recording made events. The Recording made event indicates that the recording has been
stored to the non-volatile memory. In addition, every analog channel and binary channel
of the disturbance recorder has its own Channel triggered parameter. Manual trigger has
the Manual triggering parameter and periodic trigger has the Periodic triggering
parameter.
Triggering by binary channels

Input signals for the binary channels of the disturbance recorder can be formed from any
of the digital signals that can be dynamically mapped. A change in the status of a
monitored signal triggers the recorder according to the configuration and settings.
Triggering on the rising edge of a digital input signal means that the recording sequence
starts when the input signal is activated. Correspondingly, triggering on the falling edge
means that the recording sequence starts when the active input signal resets. It is also
possible to trigger from both edges. In addition, if preferred, the monitored signal can be
non-triggering. The trigger setting can be set individually for each binary channel of the
disturbance recorder with the Level trigger mode parameter of the corresponding binary
channel.
Triggering by analog channels

The trigger level can be set for triggering in a limit violation situation. The user can set the
limit values with the High trigger level and Low trigger level parameters of the
corresponding analog channel. Both high level and low level violation triggering can be
active simultaneously for the same analog channel. If the duration of the limit violation
condition exceeds the filter time of approximately 50 ms, the recorder triggers. In case of
938 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
a low level limit violation, if the measured value falls below approximately 0.05 during
the filter time, the situation is considered to be a circuit-breaker operation and therefore,
the recorder does not trigger. This is useful especially in undervoltage situations. The filter
time of approximately 50 ms is common to all the analog channel triggers of the
disturbance recorder. The value used for triggering is the calculated peak-to-peak value.
Either high or low analog channel trigger can be disabled by setting the corresponding
trigger level parameter to zero.
Manual triggering
The recorder can be triggered manually via the LHMI or via communication by setting the
Trig recording parameter to TRUE.
Periodic triggering
Periodic triggering means that the recorder automatically makes a recording at certain
time intervals. The user can adjust the interval with the Periodic trig time parameter. If the
value of the parameter is changed, the new setting takes effect when the next periodic
triggering occurs. Setting the parameter to zero disables the triggering alternative and the
setting becomes valid immediately. If a new non-zero setting needs to be valid
immediately, the user should first set the Periodic trig time parameter to zero and then to
the new value. The user can monitor the time remaining to the next triggering with the
Time to trigger monitored data which counts downwards.
8.2.2.3 Length of recordings
The user can define the length of a recording with the Record length parameter. The length
is given as the number of fundamental cycles.
According to the memory available and the number of analog channels used, the
disturbance recorder automatically calculates the remaining amount of recordings that fit
into the available recording memory. The user can see this information with the Rem.
amount of rec monitored data. The fixed memory size allocated for the recorder can
fit in two recordings that are ten seconds long. The recordings contain data from all analog
and binary channels of the disturbance recorder, at the sample rate of 32 samples per
fundamental cycle.
The user can view the number of recordings currently in memory with the Number of
recordings monitored data. The currently used memory space can be viewed with the
Rec. memory used monitored data. It is shown as a percentage value.
The maximum number of recordings is 100.
615 series ANSI 939

Technical Manual
8.2.2.4 Sampling frequencies
The sampling frequency of the disturbance recorder analog channels depends on the set
rated frequency. One fundamental cycle always contains the amount of samples set with
the Storage rate parameter. Since the states of the binary channels are sampled once per
task execution of the disturbance recorder, the sampling frequency of binary channels is
400 Hz at the rated frequency of 50 Hz and 480 Hz at the rated frequency of 60 Hz.
Table 848: Sampling frequencies of the digital fault recorder analog channels
Storage rate Recording length Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling
(samples per frequency of frequency of frequency of frequency of
fundamental analog channels, binary channels, analog channels, binary channels,
cycle) when the rated when the rated when the rated when the rated
frequency is 50 frequency is 50 frequency is 60 frequency is 60
Hz Hz Hz Hz
32 1* Record 1600 Hz 400 Hz 1920 Hz 480 Hz
length
16 2* Record 800 Hz 400 Hz 960 Hz 480 Hz
length
8 4 * Record 400 Hz 400 Hz 480 Hz 480 Hz
length
8.2.2.5 Uploading of recordings
The protection relay stores COMTRADE files to the C:\COMTRADE\ folder. The files
can be uploaded with the PCM600 or any appropriate computer software that can access
the C:\COMTRADE\ folder.
One complete disturbance recording consists of two COMTRADE file types: the
configuration file and the data file. The file name is the same for both file types. The
configuration file has .CFG and the data file .DAT as the file extension.
940 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
A070835 V1 EN
Figure 478: Disturbance recorder file naming
The naming convention of 8+3 characters is used in COMTRADE file naming. The file
name is composed of the last two octets of the protection relay's IP number and a running
counter, which has a range of 1...9999. A hexadecimal representation is used for the IP
number octets. The appropriate file extension is added to the end of the file name.
8.2.2.6 Deletion of recordings
There are several ways to delete disturbance recordings. The recordings can be deleted
individually or all at once.
Individual disturbance recordings can be deleted with PCM600 or any appropriate

computer software, which can access the protection relay's C:\COMTRADE folder. The
disturbance recording is not removed from the protection relay's memory until both of the
corresponding COMTRADE files, .CFG and .DAT, are deleted. The user may have to
delete both of the files types separately, depending on the software used.
Deleting all disturbance recordings at once is done either with PCM600 or any appropriate
computer software, or from the LHMI via the Clear/Digital fault recorder menu.
Deleting all disturbance recordings at once also clears the pre-trigger recording in
progress.
615 series ANSI 941

Technical Manual
8.2.2.7 Storage mode
The disturbance recorder can capture data in two modes: waveform and trend mode. The
user can set the storage mode individually for each trigger source with the Storage mode
parameter of the corresponding analog channel or binary channel, the Stor. mode manual
parameter for manual trigger and the Stor. mode periodic parameter for periodic trigger.
In the waveform mode, the samples are captured according to the Storage rate and Pre-
trg length parameters.
In the trend mode, one value is recorded for each enabled analog channel, once per
fundamental cycle. The recorded values are RMS values, which are scaled to peak level.
The binary channels of the disturbance recorder are also recorded once per fundamental
cycle in the trend mode.
Only post-trigger data is captured in trend mode.
The trend mode enables recording times of 32 * Record length.
8.2.2.8 Pre-trigger and post-trigger data
The waveforms of the disturbance recorder analog channels and the states of the
disturbance recorder binary channels are constantly recorded into the history memory of
the recorder. The user can adjust the percentage of the data duration preceding the
triggering, that is, the so-called pre-trigger time, with the Pre-trg length parameter. The
duration of the data following the triggering, that is, the so-called post-trigger time, is the
difference between the recording length and the pre-trigger time. Changing the pre-trigger
time resets the history data and the current recording under collection.
8.2.2.9 Operation modes
Disturbance recorder has two operation modes: saturation and overwrite mode. The user
can change the operation mode of the disturbance recorder with the Operation mode
parameter.
Saturation mode
In saturation mode, the captured recordings cannot be overwritten with new recordings.
Capturing the data is stopped when the recording memory is full, that is, when the
maximum number of recordings is reached. In this case, the event is sent via the state
change (TRUE) of the Memory full parameter. When there is memory available again,
another event is generated via the state change (FALSE) of the Memory full parameter.
942 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Overwrite mode
When the operation mode is "Overwrite" and the recording memory is full, the oldest
recording is overwritten with the pre-trigger data collected for the next recording. Each
time a recording is overwritten, the event is generated via the state change of the Overwrite
of rec. parameter. The overwrite mode is recommended, if it is more important to have the
latest recordings in the memory. The saturation mode is preferred, when the oldest
recordings are more important.
New triggerings are blocked in both the saturation and the overwrite mode until the
previous recording is completed. On the other hand, a new triggering can be accepted
before all pre-trigger samples are collected for the new recording. In such a case, the
recording is as much shorter as there were pre-trigger samples lacking.
8.2.2.10 Exclusion mode
Exclusion mode is on, when the value set with the Exclusion time parameter is higher than
zero. During the exclusion mode, new triggerings are ignored if the triggering reason is the
same as in the previous recording. The Exclusion time parameter controls how long the
exclusion of triggerings of same type is active after a triggering. The exclusion mode only
applies to the analog and binary channel triggerings, not to periodic and manual
triggerings.
When the value set with the Exclusion time parameter is zero, the exclusion mode is
disabled and there are no restrictions on the triggering types of the successive recordings.
The exclusion time setting is global for all inputs, but there is an individual counter for
each analog and binary channel of the disturbance recorder, counting the remaining
exclusion time. The user can monitor the remaining exclusion time with the Exclusion
time rem parameter (only visible via communication, IEC 61850 data ExclTmRmn) of the
corresponding analog or binary channel. The Exclusion time rem parameter counts
downwards.
8.2.3 Configuration
The disturbance recorder can be configured with PCM600 or any tool supporting the IEC
61850 standard.
The disturbance recorder can be enabled or disabled with the Operation parameter under
the Configuration/Digital fault recorder/General menu.
One analog signal type of the protection relay can be mapped to each of the analog
channels of the disturbance recorder. The mapping is done with the Channel selection
parameter of the corresponding analog channel. The name of the analog channel is user-
615 series ANSI 943

Technical Manual
configurable. It can be modified by writing the new name to the Channel id text parameter
of the corresponding analog channel.
Any external or internal digital signal of the protection relay which can be dynamically
mapped can be connected to the binary channels of the disturbance recorder. These signals
can be, for example, the pickup and trip signals from protection function blocks or the
external binary inputs of the protection relay. The connection is made with dynamic
mapping to the binary channel of the disturbance recorder using, for example, SMT of
PCM600. It is also possible to connect several digital signals to one binary channel of the
disturbance recorder. In that case, the signals can be combined with logical functions, for
example AND and OR. The name of the binary channel can be configured and modified
by writing the new name to the Channel id text parameter of the corresponding binary
channel.
Note that the Channel id text parameter is used in COMTRADE configuration files as a
channel identifier.
The recording always contains all binary channels of the disturbance recorder. If one of
the binary channels is disabled, the recorded state of the channel is continuously FALSE
and the state changes of the corresponding channel are not recorded. The corresponding
channel name for disabled binary channels in the COMTRADE configuration file is
Unused BI.
To enable or disable an analog or a binary channel of the disturbance recorder, the

Operation parameter of the corresponding analog or binary channel is set to “Enable” or
“Disable”.
The states of manual triggering and periodic triggering are not included in the recording,
but they create a state change to the Periodic triggering and Manual triggering status
parameters, which in turn create events.
The TRIGGERED output can be used to control the indication LEDs of the protection
relay. The TRIGGERED output is TRUE due to the triggering of the disturbance recorder,
until all the data for the corresponding recording has been recorded.
The IP number of the protection relay and the content of the Bay name
parameter are both included in the COMTRADE configuration file for
identification purposes.
8.2.4 Application
The disturbance recorder is used for post-fault analysis and for verifying the correct
operation of protection relays and circuit breakers. It can record both analog and binary
signal information. The analog inputs are recorded as instantaneous values and converted
944 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
to primary peak value units when the protection relay converts the recordings to the
COMTRADE format.
COMTRADE is the general standard format used in storing disturbance

recordings.
The binary channels are sampled once per task execution of the disturbance recorder. The
task execution interval for the disturbance recorder is the same as for the protection
functions. During the COMTRADE conversion, the digital status values are repeated so
that the sampling frequencies of the analog and binary channels correspond to each other.
This is required by the COMTRADE standard.
The disturbance recorder follows the 1999 version of the COMTRADE

standard and uses the binary data file format.
8.2.5 Settings
Table 849: DFR Non-group general settings
Operation 1=Enable 1 1=Enable DFR Enabled /
5=Disable Disabled
Record length 10...500 fundamental 1 50 Size of the
cycles recording in
fundamental
cycles
Pre-trg length 0...100 % 1 50 Length of the
recording
preceding the
triggering
Operation 1=Saturation 1 1 Operation
mode 2=Overwrite mode of the
recorder
Exclusion time 0...1 000 000 ms 1 0 The time during
which
triggerings of
same type are
ignored
Storage rate 32, 16, 8 samples per 32 Storage rate of
fundamental the waveform
cycle recording
615 series ANSI 945

Technical Manual

Periodic trig 0...604 800 s 10 0 Time between
time periodic
triggerings
Stor. mode 0=Waveform 1 0 Storage mode
periodic 1=Trend / cycle for periodic
triggering
Stor. mode 0=Waveform 1 0 Storage mode
manual 1=Trend / cycle for manual
triggering
946 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Table 850: RDRE Non-group channel settings

Operation 1=on 1 1=on Analog
5=off channel is
enabled or
disabled
Channel 0=Disabled 0 0=Disabled Select the
selection 1=IG signal to be
2=IA-A recorded by
3=IB-A this channel.
4=IC-A Applicable
5=IG2-A values for this
6=IA2-A parameter are
7=IB2-A product variant
8=IC2-A dependent.
9=VG-A Every product
10=VA-A variant
11=VB-A includes only
12=VC-A the values that
13=VG2-A are applicable
14=VA2-A to that
15=VB2-A particular
16=VC2-A variant
17=CI0
18=SI11)
19=SI21)
20=SU0
21=SU11)
22=SU21)
23=CI0B
24=SI1B1)
25=SI2B1)
26=SUoB
27=SU1B1)
28=SU2B1)
29=V12
30=V23
31=V31
32=VA
33=VB
34=VC
35=V12B
36=V23B
37=V31B
38=VA-B
39=VB-B
40=VC-B
Channel id text 0 to 64 DR analog Identification
characters, channel X text for the
alphanumeric analog channel
used in the
COMTRADE
format
615 series ANSI 947

Technical Manual

High trigger 0.00...60.00 pu 0.01 10.00 High trigger
level level for the
analog channel
Low trigger 0.00...2.00 pu 0.01 0.00 Low trigger
level level for the
analog channel
Storage mode 0=Waveform 1 0 Storage mode
1=Trend / cycle for the analog
channel
1) Recordable values are available only in trend mode. In waveform mode, samples for this signal type are
constant zeroes. However, these signal types can be used to trigger the recorder on limit violations of the
corresponding analog channel.
Table 851: DFR Non-group binary channel settings

Operation 1=Enable 1 5=Disable Binary channel
5=Disable is enabled or
disabled
Level trigger 1=Positive or 1 1=Rising Level trigger
mode Rising mode for the
2=Negative or binary channel
Falling
3=Both
4=Level trigger
off
Storage mode 0=Waveform 1 0 Storage mode
1=Trend / cycle for the binary
channel
Channel id text 0 to 64 DR binary Identification
characters, channel X text for the
alphanumeric analog channel
used in the
COMTRADE
format
Table 852: DFR Control data

Trig recording 0=Cancel Trigger the
1=Trig disturbance
recording
Clear 0=Cancel Clear all
recordings 1=Clear recordings
currently in
memory
948 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

Table 853: DFR Monitored data
Number of 0...100 Number of
recordings recordings
currently in
memory
Rem. amount 0...100 Remaining
of rec. amount of
recordings that
fit into the
available
recording
memory, when
current settings
are used
Rec. memory 0...100 % Storage mode
used for the binary
channel
Time to trigger 0...604 800 s Time remaining
to the next
periodic
triggering

Table 854: DFR Technical revision history
B ChNum changed to EChNum (RADR's)
RADR9...12 added (Analog channels 9...12)
RBDR33...64 added (Binary channels 33...64)
C New channels added to parameter Channel
selection
Selection names for Trig Recording and Clear
Recordings updated
D Symbols in the Channel selection setting are
updated
E New channels IL1C, IL2C and IL3C added to
Channel selection parameter
G Internal improvement
615 series ANSI 949

Technical Manual
8.3 Tap changer position indication 84T
Tap changer position indication TPOSYLTC TPOSM 84T

84T
BI0 TAP_POS
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
SIGN_BIT
TAP_POS
END_POS_R
END_POS_L
GUID-3A750618-52D7-4C0B-8EB8-781605508E6B V1 EN
8.3.3 Functionality
The tap changer position indication function 84T is used for transformer tap position
supervision. The binary inputs can be used for converting a binary-coded tap changer
position to a tap position status indication. The X130 (RTD) card, available as an option,
provides the RTD sensor information to be used and the versatile analog inputs enabling
the tap position supervision through mA.
There are three user-selectable conversion modes available for the 7-bit binary inputs
where MSB is used as the SIGN bit: the natural binary-coded boolean input to the signed
integer output, binary coded decimal BCD input to the signed integer output and binary
reflected GRAY coded input to the signed integer output.

parameter values are “Enable” and “Disable”. When the function is disabled, the tap
position quality information is changed accordingly. When the tap position information is
not available, it is recommended to disable this function with the Operation setting.
950 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
The operation of 84T can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
GUID-D3B3C7DB-1E8C-4189-9554-77C8B5ACD17D V1 EN
Tap position decoder

When there is a wired connection to the TAP_POS input connector, the corresponding tap
changer position is decoded from the mA or RTD input. When there is no wired connection
to the TAP_POS connector, the binary inputs are expected to be used for the tap changer
position information. The tap changer position value and quality are internally shared to
other functions. The value is available in the Monitored data view or as a TAP_POS output
signal.
The function has three alternative user selectable operation modes: "NAT2INT",
"BCD2INT" and "GRAY2INT". The operation mode is selected with the Operation mode
setting. Each operation mode can be used to convert a maximum of 6–bit coded input to
an 8–bit signed short integer output. For less than 6–bit input, for example 19 positions
with 5 bits when the BCD coding is used, the rest of the bits can be set to FALSE (0).
The operation mode "NAT2INT" is selected when the natural binary coding is used for
showing the position of the transformer tap changer. The basic principle of the natural
binary coding is to calculate the sum of the bits set to TRUE (1). The LSB has the factor
1. Each following bit has the previous factor multiplied by 2. This is also called dual
coding.
The operation mode "BCD2INT" is selected when the binary-coded decimal coding is
used for showing the position of the transformer tap changer. The basic principle with the
binary-coded decimal coding is to calculate the sum of the bits set to TRUE (1). The four
bits nibble (BI3...BI0) have a typical factor to the natural binary coding. The sum of the
values should not be more than 9. If the nibble sum is greater than 9, the tap position output
validity is regarded as bad.
615 series ANSI 951

Technical Manual
The operation mode “GRAY2INT” is selected when the binary-reflected Gray coding is
used for showing the position of the transformer tap changer. The basic principle of the
Gray coding is that only one actual bit changes value with consecutive positions. This
function is based on the common binary-reflected Gray code which is used with some tap
changers. Changing the bit closest to the right side bit gives a new pattern.
An additional separate input, SIGN_BIT, can be used for negative values. If the values
are positive, the input is set to FALSE (0). If the SIGN_BIT is set to TRUE (1) making
the number negative, the remaining bits are identical to those of the coded positive
number.
The tap position validity is set to good in all valid cases. The quality is set to bad in invalid
combinations in the binary inputs. For example, when the “BCD2INT” mode is selected
and the input binary combination is “0001101”, the quality is set to bad. For negative
values, when the SIGN_BIT is set to TRUE (1) and the input binary combination is
“1011011”, the quality is set to bad.
If the tap changer has auxiliary contacts for indicating the extreme positions of the tap
changer, their status can be connected to END_POS_R and END_POS_L inputs. The
END_POS_R (End position raise or highest allowed tap position reached) status refers to
the extreme position that results in the highest number of the taps in the tap changer.
Similarly, END_POS_L (End position lower or lowest allowed tap position reached)
status refers to the extreme position that results in the lowest number of the taps in the tap
changer. TAP_POS output is dedicated for transferring the validated tap position for the
functions that need tap position information, for example 87T. It includes both the actual
position information and the status of reached end positions, assuming that inputs
END_POS_R and END_POS_L are connected.
Table 855: Truth table of the decoding modes

Inputs TAP_POS outputs
SIGN_ BI5 BI4 BI3 BI2 BI1 BI0 NAT2I BCD2I GRAY2
BIT NT NT INT
... ... ... ... ... ... ...

1 0 0 0 0 1 1 -3 -3 -2
1 0 0 0 0 1 0 -2 -2 -3
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 -1 -1 -1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 2 3
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 3 2
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 4 7
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 5 6
952 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Inputs TAP_POS outputs

0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 6 4
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 7 5
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 8 15
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 9 14
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 10 9 12
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 11 9 13
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 12 9 8
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 13 9 9
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 14 9 11
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 15 9 10
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 16 10 31
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 17 11 30
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 18 12 28
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 19 13 29
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 20 14 24
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 21 15 25
0 0 1 0 1 1 0 22 16 27
0 0 1 0 1 1 1 23 17 26
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 24 18 16
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 25 19 17
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 26 19 19
0 0 1 1 0 1 1 27 19 18
0 0 1 1 1 0 0 28 19 23
0 0 1 1 1 0 1 29 19 22
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 30 19 20
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 31 19 21
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 32 20 63
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 33 21 62
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 34 22 60
0 1 0 0 0 1 1 35 23 61
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 36 24 56
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
615 series ANSI 953

Technical Manual
8.3.5 Application
84T provides tap position information for other functions as a signed integer value that can
be fed to the tap position input.
The position information of the tap changer can be coded in various methods for many
applications, for example, the differential protection algorithms. In this function, the
binary inputs in the transformer terminal connector are used as inputs to the function. The
coding method can be chosen by setting the mode parameter. The available coding
methods are BCD, Gray and Natural binary coding. Since the number of binary inputs are
limited to seven, the coding functions are limited to seven bits including the sign bit and
thus the six bits are used in the coding functions. The position limits for the tap positions
at BCD, Gray and Natural binary coding are ±39, ±63 and ±63 respectively.
In this example, the transformer tap changer position indication is wired as a mA signal
from the corresponding measuring transducer. The position indication is connected to
input 1 (AI_VAL1) of the X130 (RTD) card. The tap changer operating range from the
minimum to maximum turns of the tap and a corresponding mA signal for the tap position
are set in X130(RTD). Since the values of the X130(RTD) outputs are floating point
numbers, the float to integer (T_F32_INT8) conversion is needed before the tap position
information can be fed to 84T. When there is a wired connection to the TAP_POS
connector, the validated tap changer position is presented in the TAP_POS output that is
connected to other functions. When there is no wired connection to the TAP_POS
connector, the binary inputs are expected to be used for the tap changer position
information.
8.3.6 Signals
BI0 BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input 1
SIGN_BIT BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input sign bit
END_POS_R BOOLEAN 0=False End position raise or highest allowed tap position
reached
END_POS_L BOOLEAN 0=False End position lower or lowest allowed tap position
reached
TAP_POS INT8 0 Tap position indication
954 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual

TAP_POS INT8 Tap position indication
8.3.7 Settings
5=disable
Operation mode 1=NAT2INT 2=BCD2INT Operation mode selection
2=BCD2INT
3=GRAY2INT

1=True
1=True
1=True
1=True
1=True
1=True
SIGN_BIT BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input sign bit
1=True
END_POS_R BOOLEAN 0=False End position raise or highest
1=True allowed tap position reached
END_POS_L BOOLEAN 0=False End position lower or lowest
1=True allowed tap position reached
TAP_POS INT8 -63...63 Tap position indication
615 series ANSI 955

Technical Manual

Descrpition Value
Response time for binary inputs Typically 100 ms

B Added new input TAP_POS
D Added new inputs END_TPOS_R and END_TPOS_L
Added a new output TAP_POS
956 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
Section 9 Control functions
9.1 Circuit breaker control 52, Disconnector control 29DS

and Grounding switch control 29GS
Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR I<->O CB 52
Disconnector control DCXSWI I <-> O DCC 29DS
Grounding switch control ESXSWI I <-> O ESC (1) 29GS
615 series ANSI 957

Technical Manual
Control functions

52
POSOPEN SELECTED
POSCLOSE EXE_OP
ENA_OPEN EXE_CL
ENA_CLOSE OP_REQ
BLK_OPEN CL_REQ
BLK_CLOSE OPENPOS
AU_OPEN CLOSEPOS
AU_CLOSE OKPOS
TRIP OPEN_ENAD
SYNC_ITL CLOSE_ENAD
SYNC_ITL_BYP
GUID-25DD2582-4505-486F-A4C6-55B857BE18AA V1 EN
29DS
POSOPEN SELECTED
POSCLOSE EXE_OP
ENA_OPEN EXE_CL
ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-8D247266-A4B0-472A-9D6B-391159C6BFB0 V1 EN
29GS
POSOPEN SELECTED
POSCLOSE EXE_OP
ENA_OPEN EXE_CL
ENA_CLOSE OPENPOS
BLK_OPEN CLOSEPOS
BLK_CLOSE OKPOS
AU_OPEN OPEN_ENAD
AU_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
ITL_BYPASS
GUID-D4BACE33-494B-476E-AAB5-D3ED422FE1D2 V1 EN
9.1.3 Functionality
52, 29DS and 29GS are intended for circuit breaker, disconnector and grounding switch
control and status information purposes. These functions execute commands and evaluate
block conditions and different time supervision conditions. The functions perform an
execution command only if all conditions indicate that a switch operation is allowed. If
erroneous conditions occur, the functions indicate an appropriate cause value. The
functions are designed according to the IEC 61850-7-4 standard with logical nodes CILO,
CSWI and XSWI/XCBR.
The circuit breaker, disconnector and grounding switch control functions have an
operation counter for closing and opening cycles. The counter value can be read and
written remotely from the place of operation or via LHMI.
958 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions

Status indication and validity check
The object state is defined by two digital inputs, POSOPEN and POSCLOSE, which are
also available as outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS together with the OKPOS
information. The debouncing and short disturbances in an input are eliminated by
filtering. The binary input filtering time can be adjusted separately for each digital input
used by the function block. The validity of the digital inputs that indicate the object state
is used as additional information in indications and event logging. The reporting of faulty
or intermediate position of the apparatus occurs after the Event delay setting, assuming
that the circuit breaker is still in a corresponding state.
Table 862: Status indication
Input Status Output
POSOPEN POSCLOSE POSITION OKPOS OPENPOS CLOSEPOS
(Monitored data)
1=True 0=False 1=Open 1=True 1=True 0=False
0=False 1=True 2=Closed 1=True 0=False 1=True
1=True 1=True 3=Faulty/Bad 0=False 0=False 0=False
(11)
0=False 0=False 0=Intermediat 0=False 0=False 0=False
e (00)
Enabling and blocking

52, 29DS and 29GS have an enabling and blocking functionality for interlocking and
synchrocheck purposes.
Circuit breaker control 52

Normally, the CB closing is enabled (that is, CLOSE_ENAD signal is TRUE) by activating
both ENA_CLOSE and SYNC_OK inputs. Typically, the ENA_CLOSE comes from the
interlocking, and SYNC_OK comes from the synchronism and energizing check. The
input SYNC_ITL_BYP can be used for bypassing this control. The SYNC_ITL_BYP
input can be used to activate CLOSE_ENAD discarding the ENA_CLOSE and SYNC_OK
input states. However, the BLK_CLOSE input always blocks the CLOSE_ENAD output.
The CB opening (OPEN_ENAD) logic is the same as CB closing logic, except that
SYNC_OK is used only in closing. The SYNC_ITL_BYP input is used in both
CLOSE_ENAD and OPEN_ENAD logics.
615 series ANSI 959

Technical Manual
Control functions
GUID-AC1D16A3-6BED-4FD4-A5BE-E4079BE5FBB9 V1 EN
Figure 482: Enabling and blocking logic for CLOSE_ENAD and OPEN_ENAD signals
Disconnector control 29DS and grounding switch control 29GS

Normally, the switch closing is enabled (that is, the CLOSE_ENAD signal is TRUE) by
activating the ENA_CLOSE input. The input ITL_BYPASS can be used for bypassing
this control. The ITL_BYPASS input can be used to activate the CLOSE_ENAD
discarding the ENA_CLOSE input state. However, the BLK_CLOSE input always blocks
the CLOSE_ENAD output.
The CB opening (OPEN_ENAD) logic is identical to CB closing logic. The ITL_BYPASS

input is used in both CLOSE_ENAD and OPEN_ENAD logics.
GUID-5C49E128-422F-4991-A7FE-6FB61B72CFD9 V1 EN
Figure 483: Enabling and blocking logic for CLOSE_ENAD and OPEN_ENAD signals
960 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
Opening and closing operations

The opening and closing operations are available via communication, binary inputs or
LHMI commands. As a prerequisite for control commands, there are enabling and
blocking functionalities for both opening and closing commands (CLOSE_ENAD and
OPEN_ENAD signals). If the control command is executed against the blocking or if the
enabling of the corresponding command is not valid, 52 generates an error message.
When close command is given from communication, via LHMI or activating the
AU_CLOSE input, it is carried out (the EXE_CL output) only if CLOSE_ENAD is TRUE.
If the 25 function is used in “Command” mode, the CL_REQ output can be used in 52.
Initially, the SYNC_OK input is FALSE. When the close command given, it activates the
CL_REQ output, which should be routed to 25. The close command is then processed only
after SYNC_OK is received from 25.
When using 25 in the “Command” mode, the 52 setting Operation timeout

should be set longer than 25 setting Maximum Syn time.
GUID-36839B06-10FE-46FA-8289-5AA1EBBCD0FA V1 EN
Figure 484: Condition for enabling the close request (CL_REQ) for 52
When the open command is given from communication, via LHMI or activating the
AU_OPEN input, it is processed only if OPEN_ENAD is TRUE. OP_REQ output is also
available.
615 series ANSI 961

Technical Manual
Control functions
GUID-0683760A-9832-4A01-8E87-6E3A7E6FDFC3 V1 EN
Figure 485: Condition for enabling the open request (OP_REQ) for 52
OPEN and CLOSE outputs

The EXE_OP output is activated when the open command is given (AU_OPEN, via
communication or from LHMI) and OPEN_ENAD signal is TRUE. In addition, the
protection trip commands can be routed through the 52 function by using the TRIP input.
When the TRIP input is TRUE, the EXE_OP output is activated immediately and
bypassing all enabling or blocking conditions.
The EXE_CL output is activated when the close command is given (AU_CLOSE, via
communication or from LHMI) and CLOSE_ENAD signal is TRUE. When the TRIP
input is “TRUE”, CB closing is not allowed.
GUID-B85B9772-2F20-4BC3-A3AE-90989F4817E2 V1 EN
Figure 486: OPEN and CLOSE outputs logic for 52
Opening and closing pulse widths

The pulse width type can be defined with the Adaptive pulse setting. The function provides
two modes to characterize the opening and closing pulse widths. When the Adaptive pulse
is set to “TRUE”, it causes a variable pulse width, which means that the output pulse is
deactivated when the object state shows that the apparatus has entered the correct state. If
962 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
apparatus fails to enter the correct state, the output pulse is deactivated after the set
Operation timeout setting, and an error message is displayed. When the Adaptive pulse is
set to “FALSE”, the functions always use the maximum pulse width, defined by the user-
configurable Pulse length setting. The Pulse length setting is the same for both the
opening and closing commands. When the apparatus already is in the right position, the
maximum pulse length is given.
The Pulse length setting does not affect the length of the trip pulse.
Control methods
The command execution mode can be set with the Control model setting. The alternatives
for command execution are direct control and secured object control, which can be used
to secure controlling.
The secured object control SBO is an important feature of the communication protocols
that support horizontal communication, because the command reservation and
interlocking signals can be transferred with a bus. All secured control operations require
two-step commands: a selection step and an execution step. The secured object control is
responsible for the several tasks.
• Command authority: ensures that the command source is authorized to operate the
object
• Mutual exclusion: ensures that only one command source at a time can control the
object
• Interlocking: allows only safe commands
• Execution: supervises the command execution
• Command canceling: cancels the controlling of a selected object.
In direct operation, a single message is used to initiate the control action of a physical
device. The direct operation method uses less communication network capacity and
bandwidth than the SBO method, because the procedure needs fewer messages for
accurate operation.
The “status-only” mode means that control is not possible (non-controllable) via
communication or from LHMI. However, it is possible to control a disconnector (29DC)
from AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE inputs.
AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE control the object directly regardless of the set
Control model. These inputs can be used when control is wanted to be
implemented purely based on ACT logic and no additional exception
615 series ANSI 963

Technical Manual
Control functions
handling is needed. However, in case of simultaneous open and close

control, the open control is always prioritized.
A070878-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 487: Control procedure in SBO method
Local/Remote operations
The local/remote selection affects the 52, 29DS and 29GS.
• Local: the opening and closing via communication is disabled.

• Remote: the opening and closing via LHMI is disabled.
• AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE inputs function regardless of the local/remote selection.
9.1.5 Application
In the field of distribution and sub-transmission automation, reliable control and status
indication of primary switching components both locally and remotely is in a significant
role. They are needed especially in modern remotely controlled substations.
Control and status indication facilities are implemented in the same package with 52,
29DS and 29GS. When primary components are controlled in the energizing phase, for
example, the correct execution sequence of the control commands must be ensured. This
can be achieved, for example, with interlocking based on the status indication of the
964 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
related primary components. The interlocking on substation level can be applied using the
IEC 61850 GOOSE messages between feeders.
A070879-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 488: Status indication-based interlocking via the GOOSE messaging
9.1.6 Signals
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O1)
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O1)
ENA_OPEN BOOLEAN 1=True Enables opening
ENA_CLOSE BOOLEAN 1=True Enables closing
615 series ANSI 965

Technical Manual
Control functions

BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks opening
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks closing
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Auxiliary open1)
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Auxiliary close1)2)
TRIP BOOLEAN 0=False Trip signal
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 1=True Synchronism-check OK
SYNC_ITL_BYP BOOLEAN 0=False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE interlocking
when TRUE
1) Not available for monitoring

2) Always direct operation
Table 864: 29DS Input signals

POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus open position
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus close position
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Executes the command for open direction1)2)
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Executes the command for close direction1)2)
ITL_BYPASS BOOLEAN 0=False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE interlocking
when TRUE

Table 865: 29GS Input signals

POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus open position
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus close position
966 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions

AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Executes the command for open direction1)2)
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Executes the command for close direction1)2)
ITL_BYPASS BOOLEAN 0=False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE interlocking
when TRUE


SELECTED BOOLEAN Object selected
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_REQ BOOLEAN Open request
CL_REQ BOOLEAN Close request
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
OKPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus position is ok
OPEN_ENAD BOOLEAN Opening is enabled based on the input status
CLOSE_ENAD BOOLEAN Closing is enabled based on the input status
Table 867: 29DS Output signals

OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
615 series ANSI 967

Technical Manual
Control functions
Table 868: 29GS Output signals

9.1.7 Settings
Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation mode disable / disable
5=disable
Select timeout 10000...300000 ms 10000 30000 Select timeout in ms
Pulse length 10...60000 ms 1 200 Open and close pulse length
Control model 0=status-only 4=sbo-with- Select control model
1=direct-with- enhanced-security
normal-security
4=sbo-with-
enhanced-security
Operation timeout 10...60000 ms 1 500 Timeout for negative termination
Identification CBXCBR1 switch Control Object identification
position

Operation counter 0...10000 1 0 Breaker operation cycles
Adaptive pulse 0=False 1=True Stop in right position
1=True
Event delay 0...10000 ms 1 200 Event delay of the intermediate position
Vendor 0 External equipment vendor
Serial number 0 External equipment serial number
Model 0 External equipment model
968 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
Table 871: 29DS Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
normal-security
4=sbo-with-
enhanced-security
Identification DCXSWI1 switch Control Object identification
position
Table 872: 29DS Non group settings (Advanced)

1=True
Table 873: 29GS Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
normal-security
4=sbo-with-
enhanced-security
Identification ESXSWI1 switch Control Object identification
position
615 series ANSI 969

Technical Manual
Control functions
Table 874: 29GS Non group settings (Advanced)

1=True

POSITION Dbpos 0=intermediate Apparatus position indication
1=open
2=closed
3=faulty
Table 876: 29DS Monitored data

1=open
2=closed
3=faulty
Table 877: 29GS Monitored data

1=open
2=closed
3=faulty
970 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions

B Interlocking bypass input (ITL_BYPASS) and
opening enabled (OPEN_ENAD)/closing enabled
(CLOSE_ENAD) outputs added. ITL_BYPASS
bypasses the ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE states.
D Added inputs TRIP and SYNC_OK. Renamed input
ITL_BYPASS to SYNC_ITL_BYP. Added outputs
CL_REQ and OP_REQ. Outputs OPENPOS and
CLOSEPOS are forced to “FALSE” in case status is
Faulty (11).
Table 879: 29DS Technical revision history

B Maximum and default values changed to 60 s and 10
s respectively for Event delay settings. Default value
changed to 30 s for Operation timeout setting.
C Outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are forced to
“FALSE” in case status is Faulty (11).
Table 880: 29GS Technical revision history

s respectively for Event delay settings. Default value
changed to 30 s for Operation timeout setting.
9.2 Disconnector position indication 52-TOC, 29DS and

Grounding switch indication 29GS
Disconnector position indication DCSXSWI I<->O DC 52-TOC, 29DS
Grounding switch indication ESSXSWI I<->O ES 29GS
615 series ANSI 971

Technical Manual
Control functions

52-TOC,29DS
POSOPEN OPENPOS
POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
GUID-50D8D3AB-1042-490B-B3C0-74D37475C86B V1 EN
29GS
POSOPEN OPENPOS
POSCLOSE CLOSEPOS
OKPOS
GUID-BDAE20F6-DDD2-4577-ADD8-B7F85A516E72 V1 EN
9.2.3 Functionality
The functions 52-TOC, 29DS and 29GS indicate remotely and locally the open, close and
undefined states of the disconnector and grounding switch. The functionality of both is
identical, but each one is allocated for a specific purpose visible in the function names. For
example, the status indication of disconnectors or circuit breaker truck can be monitored
with the 52-TOC, 29DS function.
The functions are designed according to the IEC 61850-7-4 standard with the logical node
XSWI.

Status indication and validity check
The object state is defined by the two digital inputs POSOPEN and POSCLOSE, which are
also available as outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS together with the OKPOS according
to Table 881. The debounces and short disturbances in an input are eliminated by filtering.
The binary input filtering time can be adjusted separately for each digital input used by the
function block. The validity of digital inputs that indicate the object state is used as
additional information in indications and event logging.
972 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
Table 881: Status indication

Input Status Output
POSOPEN POSCLOSE POSITION OKPOS OPENPOS CLOSEPOS
(Monitored data)
1=True 0=False 1=Open 1=True 1=True 0=False
0=False 1=True 2=Closed 1=True 0=False 1=True
1=True 1=True 3=Faulty/Bad 0=False 0=False 0=False
(11)
0=False 0=False 0=Intermediat 0=False 0=False 0=False
e (00)
9.2.5 Application
In the field of distribution and sub-transmission automation, the reliable control and status
indication of primary switching components both locally and remotely is in a significant
role. These features are needed especially in modern remote controlled substations. The
application area of 52-TOC, 29DS and 29GS functions covers remote and local status
indication of, for example, disconnectors, air-break switches and grounding switches,
which represent the lowest level of power switching devices without short-circuit
breaking capability.
9.2.6 Signals
Table 882: 52-TOC,29DS Input signals
Table 883: 29GS Input signals

615 series ANSI 973

Technical Manual
Control functions
Table 884: 52-TOC,29DS Output signals

Table 885: 29GS Output signals

9.2.7 Settings
Table 886: 52-TOC,29DS Non group settings (Basic)
Identification DCSXSWI1 switch Control Object identification
position
Table 887: 52-TOC,29DS Non group settings (Advanced)

Table 888: 29GS Non group settings (Basic)

Identification ESSXSWI1 switch Control Object identification
position
974 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
Table 889: 29GS Non group settings (Advanced)


Table 890: 52-TOC,29DS Monitored data
1=open
2=closed
3=faulty
Table 891: 29GS Monitored data

1=open
2=closed
3=faulty

Table 892: 52-TOC, 29DS Technical revision history
s respectively for Event delay settings.
Table 893: 29GS Technical revision history

s respectively for Event delay settings.
615 series ANSI 975

Technical Manual
Control functions
9.3 Synchronism and energizing check 25
Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN SYNC 25
GUID-465E8B64-8E18-4C99-BB96-B27F383AC539 V2 EN
9.3.3 Functionality
The synchronism and energizing check function 25 checks the condition across the circuit
breaker from separate power system parts and gives the permission to close the circuit
breaker. 25 includes the functionality of synchrocheck and energizing check.
Asynchronous operation mode is provided for asynchronously running systems. The main
purpose of the asynchronous operation mode is to provide a controlled closing of circuit
breakers when two asynchronous systems are connected.
The synchrocheck operation mode checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit
breaker are perfectly synchronized. It is used to perform a controlled reconnection of two
systems which are divided after islanding and it is also used to perform a controlled
reconnection of the system after reclosing.
The energizing check function checks that at least one side is dead to ensure that closing
can be done safely.
timers if desired.
976 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions

25 has two parallel functionalities, the synchro check and energizing check functionality.
Energizing
check
Synchro
check
GUID-72E99872-C94E-4B9F-9EF8-C479C8ED8F6B V2 EN
If Energizing check is passed, no further conditions need to be fulfilled to permit closing.

Otherwise, Synchro check function can operate either with the V_AB or V_A voltages.
The selection of used voltages is defined with the VT connection setting of the line voltage
general parameters.
By default, voltages V_BUS and V_LINE are connected as presented in

Figure 501. If necessary, connections can be switched by setting Voltage
source switch to “True”.
Energizing check
The Energizing check function checks the energizing direction. Energizing is defined as
a situation where a dead network part is connected to an energized section of the network.
The conditions of the network sections to be controlled by the circuit breaker, that is,
which side has to be live and which side dead, are determined by the setting. A situation
where both sides are dead is possible as well. The actual value for defining the dead line
or bus is given with the Dead bus value and Dead line value settings. Similarly, the actual
values of live line or bus are defined with the Live bus value and Live line value settings.
615 series ANSI 977

Technical Manual
Control functions
Table 894: Live dead mode of operation under which switching can be carried out
Live dead mode Description
Both Dead Both line and bus de-energized
Live L, Dead B Bus de-energized and line energized
Dead L, Live B Line de-energized and bus energized
Dead Bus, L Any Both line and bus de-energized or bus de-energized
and line energized
Dead L, Bus Any Both line and bus de-energized or line de-energized
and bus energized
One Live, Dead Bus de-energized and line energized or line de-
energized and bus energized
Not Both Live Both line and bus de-energized or bus de-energized
and line energized or line de-energized and bus
energized
When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to be constant
for a time set with the Energizing time setting before the circuit breaker closing is
permitted. The purpose of this time delay is to ensure that the dead side remains de-
energized and also that the situation is not caused by a temporary interference. If the
conditions do not persist for a specified operation time, the timer is reset and the procedure
is restarted when the conditions allow. The circuit breaker closing is not permitted if the
measured voltage on the live side is greater than the set value of Max energizing V.
The measured energized state is available as a monitored data value ENERG_STATE and
as four function outputs LLDB (live line / dead bus), LLLB (live line / live bus), DLLB
(dead line / live bus) and DLDB (dead line / dead bus), of which only one can be active at
a time. It is also possible that the measured energized state indicates “Unknown” if at least
one of the measured voltages is between the limits set with the dead and live setting
parameters.
Synchro check
The Synchro check function measures the difference between the line voltage and bus
voltage. The function permits the closing of the circuit breaker when certain conditions are
simultaneously fulfilled.
• The measured line and bus voltages are higher than the set values of Live bus value
and Live line value (ENERG_STATE equals to "Both Live").
• The measured bus and line frequency are both within the range of 95 to 105 percent
of the value of fn.
• The measured voltages for the line and bus are less than the set value of Max
energizing V.
978 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
In case Syncro check mode is set to "Syncronous", the additional conditions must be
fulfilled.
• In the synchronous mode, the closing is attempted so that the phase difference at
closing is close to zero.
• The synchronous mode is only possible when the frequency slip is below 0.1 percent
of the value of fn.
• The voltage difference must not exceed the 1 percent of the value of Vn.
In case Syncro check mode is set to “Asyncronous”, the additional conditions must be
fulfilled.
• The measured difference of the voltages is less than the set value of Difference
voltage.
• The measured difference of the phase angles is less than the set value of Difference
angle.
• The measured difference in frequency is less than the set value of Frequency
difference.
• The estimated breaker closing angle is decided to be less than the set value of
Difference angle.
Difference angle = V_Bus - V_Line Difference frequency

f = fV_Bus - fV_Line
V_Bus
Difference voltage
V_Line
fV_Bus fV_Line
Live line or bus value
Dead line or bus value Frequency[Hz]
Frequency deviation
Rated frequency
GUID-72527DBF-2FC1-4E3B-BE9D-E5978DB3BDA4 V2 EN
Figure 493: Conditions to be fulfilled when detecting synchronism between systems
When the frequency, phase angle and voltage conditions are fulfilled, the duration of the
synchronism conditions is checked so as to ensure that they are still met when the
condition is determined on the basis of the measured frequency and phase difference.
Depending on the circuit breaker and the closing system, the delay from the moment the
closing signal is given until the circuit breaker finally closes is about 50...250 ms. The
selected Closing time of CB informs the function how long the conditions have to persist.
The Synchro check function compensates for the measured slip frequency and the circuit
615 series ANSI 979

Technical Manual
Control functions
breaker closing delay. The phase angle advance is calculated continuously with the
formula.
Closing angle = ( ∠VBus − ∠VLine ) ° + ( ( f Bus − fline ) × (TCB + TPL ) × 360° )

GUID-1B5A128E-E351-4847-93C8-6664FF822FE9 V1 EN (Equation 170)
∠VBus Measured bus voltage phase angle
∠VLine Measured line voltage phase angle
fBus Measured bus frequency
fline Measured line frequency
TCB Total circuit breaker closing delay, including the delay of the protection relay output contacts defined
with the Closing time of CB setting parameter value
The closing angle is the estimated angle difference after the breaker closing delay.
The Minimum Syn time setting time can be set, if required, to demand the minimum time
within which conditions must be simultaneously fulfilled before the SYNC_OK output is
activated.
The measured voltage, frequency and phase angle difference values between the two sides
of the circuit breaker are available as monitored data values V_DIFF_MEAS,
FR_DIFF_MEAS and PH_DIFF_MEAS. Also, the indications of the conditions that are
not fulfilled and thus preventing the breaker closing permission are available as monitored
data values V_DIFF_SYNC, PH_DIF_SYNC and FR_DIFF_SYNC. These monitored
data values are updated only when the Synchro check enabled with the Synchro check
mode setting and the measured ENERG_STATE is "Both Live".
Continuous mode
The continuous mode is activated by setting the parameter Control mode to "Continuous".
In the continuous control mode, Synchro check is continuously checking the
synchronism. When synchronism is detected (according to the settings), the SYNC_OK
output is set to TRUE (logic '1') and it stays TRUE as long as the conditions are fulfilled.
The command input is ignored in the continuous control mode. The mode is used for
situations where Synchro check only gives the permission to the control block that
executes the CB closing.
980 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
Closing Closing
permission command
25 52 I
GUID-3921CB7B-0BBD-4BB3-B0E7-BFF043900C97 V1 EN
Figure 494: A simplified block diagram of the Synchro check function in the
continuous mode operation
Command mode
If Control mode is set to "Command", the purpose of the Synchro check functionality in
the command mode is to find the instant when the voltages on both sides of the circuit
breaker are in synchronism. The conditions for synchronism are met when the voltages on
both sides of the circuit breaker have the same frequency and are in phase with a
magnitude that makes the concerned busbars or lines such that they can be regarded as
live.
In the command mode operation, an external command signal CL_COMMAND, besides the
normal closing conditions, is needed for delivering the closing signal. In the command
control mode operation, the Synchro check function itself closes the breaker via the
SYNC_OK output when the conditions are fulfilled. In this case, the control function block
delivers the command signal to close the Synchro check function for the releasing of a
closing-signal pulse to the circuit breaker. If the closing conditions are fulfilled during a
permitted check time set with Maximum Syn time, the Synchro check function delivers a
closing signal to the circuit breaker after the command signal is delivered for closing.
Closing Closing
request command
52 25 I
GUID-2AF445C8-388A-42DF-B5B3-070C34F3C7AB V2 EN
Figure 495: A simplified block diagram of 25 in the command mode operation
615 series ANSI 981

Technical Manual
Control functions
The closing signal is delivered only once for each activated external closing command
signal. The pulse length of the delivered closing is set with the Close pulse setting.
t = Close pulse
GUID-0D9A1A7F-58D1-4081-B974-A3CE10DEC5AF V2 EN
Figure 496: Determination of the pulse length of the closing signal
In the command control mode operation, there are alarms for a failed closing attempt
(CL_FAIL_AL) and for a command signal that remains active too long
(CMD_FAIL_AL).
If the conditions for closing are not fulfilled within the set time of Maximum Syn time, a
failed closing attempt alarm is given. The CL_FAIL_AL alarm output signal is pulse-
shaped and the pulse length is 500 ms. If the external command signal is removed too
early, that is, before conditions are fulfilled and the closing pulse is given, the alarm timer
is reset.
982 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
Maximum Syn time
GUID-FA8ADA22-6A90-4637-AA1C-714B1D0DD2CF V2 EN
Figure 497: Determination of the checking time for closing
The control module receives information about the circuit breaker status and thus is able
to adjust the command signal to be delivered to the Synchro check function. If the external
command signal CL_COMMAND is kept active longer than necessary, the
CMD_FAIL_AL alarm output is activated. The alarm indicates that the control module has
not removed the external command signal after the closing operation. To avoid
unnecessary alarms, the duration of the command signal should be set in such a way that
the maximum length of the signal is always below Maximum Syn time + 5s.
Maximum Syn time
Close pulse
5s
GUID-4DF3366D-33B9-48B5-8EB4-692D98016753 V2 EN
Figure 498: Determination of the alarm limit for a still-active command signal
615 series ANSI 983

Technical Manual
Control functions
Closing is permitted during Maximum Syn time, starting from the moment the external
command signal CL_COMMAND is activated. The CL_COMMAND input must be kept
active for the whole time that the closing conditions are waited to be fulfilled. Otherwise,
the procedure is cancelled. If the closing-command conditions are fulfilled during
Maximum Syn time, a closing pulse is delivered to the circuit breaker. If the closing
conditions are not fulfilled during the checking time, the alarm CL_FAIL_AL is activated
as an indication of a failed closing attempt. The closing pulse is not delivered if the closing
conditions become valid after Maximum Syn time has elapsed. The closing pulse is
delivered only once for each activated external command signal, and a new closing-
command sequence cannot be started until the external command signal is reset and
reactivated. The SYNC_INPRO output is active when the closing-command sequence is
in progress and it is reset when the CL_COMMAND input is reset or Maximum Syn time has
elapsed.
Bypass mode
25 can be set to the bypass mode by setting the parameters Synchrocheck mode and Live
dead mode to "Disable" or alternatively by activating the BYPASS input.
In the bypass mode, the closing conditions are always considered to be fulfilled by 25.
Otherwise, the operation is similar to the normal mode.
Voltage angle difference adjustment

In application where the power transformer is located between the voltage measurement
and the vector group connection gives phase difference to the voltages between the high-
and low-voltage sides, the angle adjustment can be used to meet synchronism.
984 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
GUID-ADDD7AE6-EF63-4AEE-AAFF-9BA3D2C53098 V2 EN
Figure 499: Angle difference when power transformer is in sychrocheck zone
The vector group of the power transformer is defined with clock numbers, where the value
of the hour pointer defines the low-voltage-side phasor and the high-voltage-side phasor
is always fixed to the clock number 12, which is same as zero. The angle between clock
numbers is 30 degrees. When comparing phase angles, the V_BUS input is always the
reference. This means that when the Yd11 power transformer is used, the low-voltage-
side voltage phasor leads by 30 degrees or lags by 330 degrees the high-voltage-side
phasor. The rotation of the phasors is counterclockwise.
The generic rule is that a low-voltage-side phasor lags the high-voltage-side phasor by
clock number * 30º. This is called angle difference adjustment and can be set for 25 with
the Phase shift setting.
615 series ANSI 985

Technical Manual
Control functions
9.3.5 Application
The main purpose of the synchrocheck function is to provide control over the closing of
the circuit breakers in power networks to prevent the closing if the conditions for
synchronism are not detected. This function is also used to prevent the reconnection of two
systems which are divided after islanding and a three-pole reclosing.
The Synchro check function block includes both the synchronism check function and the
energizing function to allow closing when one side of the breaker is dead.
Network and the generator running in parallel with the network are connected through the
line AB. When a fault occurs between A and B, the protection relay protection opens the
circuit breakers A and B, thus isolating the faulty section from the network and making the
arc that caused the fault extinguish. The first attempt to recover is a delayed autoreclosure
made a few seconds later. Then, the autoreclose function 79 gives a command signal to the
synchrocheck function to close the circuit breaker A. 25 performs an energizing check, as
the line AB is de-energized (V_BUS> Live bus value, V_LINE< Dead line value). After
verifying the line AB is dead and the energizing direction is correct, the protection relay
energizes the line (V_BUS -> V_LINE) by closing the circuit breaker A. The PLC of the
power plant discovers that the line has been energized and sends a signal to the other
synchrocheck function to close the circuit breaker B. Since both sides of the circuit
breaker B are live (V_BUS > Live bus value, V_LINE > Live bus value), the synchrocheck
function controlling the circuit breaker B performs a synchrocheck and, if the network and
the generator are in synchronism, closes the circuit breaker.
G
A B
52 52
V_Bus V_Line V_Line V_Bus
25 25
79 PLC
GUID-3C69BD5D-5D9F-44C7-87C8-D25C70829B97 V2 EN
Figure 500: Synchrocheck function 79 checking energizing conditions and

synchronism
986 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
Connections
A special attention is paid to the connection of the protection relay. Furthermore it is
checked that the primary side wiring is correct.
A faulty wiring of the voltage inputs of the protection relay causes a malfunction in the
synchrocheck function. If the wires of an energizing input have changed places, the
polarity of the input voltage is reversed (180°). In this case, the protection relay permits
the circuit breaker closing in a situation where the voltages are in opposite phases. This can
damage the electrical devices in the primary circuit. Therefore, it is extremely important
that the wiring from the voltage transformers to the terminals on the rear of the protection
relay is consistent regarding the energizing inputs V_BUS (bus voltage) and V_LINE
(line voltage).
The wiring should be verified by checking the reading of the phase difference measured
between the V_BUS and V_LINE voltages. The phase difference measured by the
protection relay has to be close to zero within the permitted accuracy tolerances. The
measured phase differences are indicated in the LHMI. At the same time, it is
recommended to check the voltage difference and the frequency differences presented in
the monitored data view. These values should be within the permitted tolerances, that is,
close to zero.
Figure 501 shows an example where the synchrocheck is used for the circuit breaker
closing between a busbar and a line. The phase-to-phase voltages are measured from the
busbar and also one phase-to-phase voltage from the line is measured.
615 series ANSI 987

Technical Manual
Control functions
GUID-8C044A41-24DE-44D0-AAB4-E52D6BD61BC5 V1 EN
Figure 501: Connection of voltages for the protection relay and signals used in
synchrocheck
9.3.6 Signals
V_BUS SIGNAL 0=False Busbar Voltage
V_LINE SIGNAL 0=False Line Voltage
CL_COMMAND BOOLEAN 0=False External closing request
BYPASS BOOLEAN 0=False Request to bypass synchronism check and voltage
check
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Blocking signal of the synchro check and voltage check
function

SYNC_INPRO BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN Systems in synchronism
CL_FAIL_AL BOOLEAN CB closing failed
988 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions

CMD_FAIL_AL BOOLEAN CB closing request failed
LLDB BOOLEAN Live Line, Dead Bus
LLLB BOOLEAN Live Line, Live Bus
DLLB BOOLEAN Dead Line, Live Bus
DLDB BOOLEAN Dead Line, Dead Bus
9.3.7 Settings
Live dead mode -1=Disable 1=Both Dead Energizing check mode
1=Both Dead
2=Live L, Dead B
3=Dead L, Live B
4=Dead Bus, L Any
5=Dead L, Bus Any
6=One Live, Dead
7=Not Both Live
Difference voltage 0.01...0.50 xUn 0.01 0.05 Maximum voltage difference limit
Difference frequency 0.001...0.100 xFn 0.001 0.001 Maximum frequency difference limit
Difference angle 5...90 deg 1 5 Maximum angle difference limit

5=disable
Synchro check mode 1=Disable 3=Asynchronous Synchro check operation mode
2=Synchronous
3=Asynchronous
Dead line value 0.1...0.8 xUn 0.1 0.2 Voltage low limit line for energizing check
Live line value 0.2...1.0 xUn 0.1 0.8 Voltage high limit line for energizing check
Dead bus value 0.1...0.8 xUn 0.1 0.2 Voltage low limit bus for energizing check
Live bus value 0.2...1.0 xUn 0.1 0.5 Voltage high limit bus for energizing check
Max energizing V 0.50...1.15 xUn 0.01 1.05 Maximum voltage for energizing
615 series ANSI 989

Technical Manual
Control functions

Control mode 1=Continuous 1=Continuous Selection of synchro check command or
2=Command Continuous control mode
Close pulse 200...60000 ms 10 200 Breaker closing pulse duration
Phase shift -180...180 deg 1 0 Correction of phase difference between
measured U_BUS and U_LINE
Minimum Syn time 0...60000 ms 10 0 Minimum time to accept synchronizing
Maximum Syn time 100...6000000 ms 10 2000 Maximum time to accept synchronizing
Energizing time 100...60000 ms 10 100 Time delay for energizing check
Closing time of CB 40...250 ms 10 60 Closing time of the breaker
Voltage source switch 0=False 0=False Voltage source switch
1=True

ENERG_STATE Enum 0=Unknown Energization state of Line and
1=Both Live Bus
2=Live L, Dead B
3=Dead L, Live B
4=Both Dead
U_DIFF_MEAS FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 xUn Calculated voltage amplitude
difference
FR_DIFF_MEAS FLOAT32 0.000...0.100 xFn Calculated voltage frequency
difference
PH_DIFF_MEAS FLOAT32 0.00...180.00 deg Calculated voltage phase
angle difference
U_DIFF_SYNC BOOLEAN 0=False Voltage difference out of limit
1=True for synchronizing
PH_DIF_SYNC BOOLEAN 0=False Phase angle difference out of
1=True limit for synchronizing
FR_DIFF_SYNC BOOLEAN 0=False Frequency difference out of
1=True limit for synchronizing
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
990 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions

measured: fn ±1 Hz
Voltage:
Frequency:
±10 mHz
Phase angle:
±3°
Reset time <50 ms

C Added new setting Voltage source switch to switch
the input signals V_BUS (bus voltage) and V_LINE
(line voltage) between each other.
9.4 Autoreclosing 79
Autoreclosing DARREC O -> I 79
615 series ANSI 991

Technical Manual
Control functions

79
INIT_1 OPEN_CB
INIT_2 CLOSE_CB
INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
INIT_4 INPRO
INIT_5 LOCKED OUT
INIT_6 PROT_CRD
DEL_INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL
DEL_INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_INIT_4 READY
BLK_RECL_T ACTIVE
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
CB_POS
CB_READY
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
RECL_ON
SYNC
GUID-3AB0D8C9-15A8-42C5-B6C1-6F21F21C79D6 V1 EN
9.4.3 Functionality
About 80 to 85 percent of faults in the MV overhead lines are transient and automatically
cleared with a momentary de-energization of the line. The rest of the faults, 15 to 20
percent, can be cleared by longer interruptions. The de-energization of the fault location
for a selected time period is implemented through automatic reclosing, during which most
of the faults can be cleared.
In case of a permanent fault, the automatic reclosing is followed by final tripping. A

permanent fault must be located and cleared before the fault location can be re-energized.
The autoreclosing function 79 can be used with any circuit breaker suitable for
autoreclosing. The function provides five programmable autoreclosing shots which can
perform one to five successive autoreclosings of desired type and duration, for instance
one high-speed and one delayed autoreclosing.
When the reclosing is initiated with pickup of the protection function, the autoreclosing
function can execute the final trip of the circuit breaker in a short trip time, provided that
the fault still persists when the last selected reclosing has been carried out.
9.4.3.1 Protection signal definition
The Control line setting defines which of the initiation signals are protection pickup and
trip signals and which are not. With this setting, the user can distinguish the blocking
signals from the protection signals. The Control line setting is a bit mask, that is, the lowest
bit controls the INIT_1 line and the highest bit the INIT_6 line. Some example
combinations of the Control line setting are as follows:
992 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
Table 903: Control line setting definition

Control line INIT_1 INIT_2 INIT_3 INIT_4 INIT_5 INIT_6
setting DEL_INIT_2 DEL_INIT_3 DEL_INIT_4
0 other other other other other other
1 prot other other other other other
2 other prot other other other other
3 prot prot other other other other
4 other other prot other other other
5 prot other prot other other other
...63 prot prot prot prot prot prot
prot = protection signal

other = non-protection signal
When the corresponding bit or bits in both the Control line setting and the INIT_X line
are TRUE:
• The CLOSE_CB output is blocked until the protection is reset
• If the INIT_X line defined as the protection signal is activated during the
discrimination time, the AR function goes to lockout
• If the INIT_X line defined as the protection signal stays active longer than the time
set by the Max trip time setting, the AR function goes to lockout (long trip)
• The UNSUC_RECL output is activated after a pre-defined two minutes (alarming
ground-fault).
9.4.3.2 Zone coordination
Zone coordination is used in the zone sequence between local protection units and
downstream devices. At the falling edge of the INC_SHOTP line, the value of the shot
pointer is increased by one, unless a shot is in progress or the shot pointer already has the
maximum value.
The falling edge of the INC_SHOTP line is not accepted if any of the shots are in progress.
9.4.3.3 Master and slave scheme
With the cooperation between the AR units in the same protection relay or between
protection relays, sequential reclosings of two breakers at a line end in a 1½-breaker,
double breaker or ring-bus arrangement can be achieved. One unit is defined as a master
and it executes the reclosing first. If the reclosing is successful and no trip takes place, the
615 series ANSI 993

Technical Manual
Control functions
second unit, that is the slave, is released to complete the reclose shot. With persistent
faults, the breaker reclosing is limited to the first breaker.
A070877 V1 EN
Figure 503: Master and slave scheme
If the AR unit is defined as a master by setting its terminal priority to high:

• The unit activates the CMD_WAIT output to the low priority slave unit whenever a
shot is in progress, a reclosing is unsuccessful or the BLK_RCLM_T input is active
• The CMD_WAIT output is reset one second after the reclose command is given or if
the sequence is unsuccessful when the reclaim time elapses.
If the AR unit is defined as a slave by setting its terminal priority to low:

• The unit waits until the master releases the BLK_RECL_T input (the CMD_WAIT
output in the master). Only after this signal has been deactivated, the reclose time for
the slave unit can be started.
• The slave unit is set to a lockout state if the BLK_RECL_T input is not released within
the time defined by the Max wait time setting , which follows the initiation of an
autoreclosing shot.
If the terminal priority of the AR unit is set to "none", the AR unit skips all these actions.
9.4.3.4 Thermal overload blocking
An alarm or pickup signal from the thermal overload protection 49F can be routed to the
input BLK_THERM to block and hold the reclose sequence. The BLK_THERM signal does
not affect the starting of the sequence. When the reclose time has elapsed and the
BLK_THERM input is active, the shot is not ready until the BLK_THERM input deactivates.
Should the BLK_THERM input remain active longer than the time set by the setting Max
Thm block time, the AR function goes to lockout.
If the BLK_THERM input is activated when the auto wait timer is running, the auto wait
timer is reset and the timer restarted when the BLK_THERM input deactivates.
994 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions

parameter values are “Enable” and “Disable”. Setting Operation to "Disable" resets non-
volatile counters.
The reclosing operation can be enabled and disabled with the Reclosing operation setting.
This setting does not disable the function, only the reclosing functionality. The setting has
three parameter values: “Enable”, “External Ctl” and ”Disable”. The setting value
“Enable” enables the reclosing operation and “Disable” disables it. When the setting value
“External Ctl” is selected, the reclosing operation is controlled with the RECL_ON input.
AR_ON is activated when reclosing operation is enabled.
A070864 V3 EN
615 series ANSI 995

Technical Manual
Control functions
9.4.4.1 Signal collection and delay logic
When the protection trips, the initiation of autoreclosing shots is in most applications
executed with the INIT_1...6 inputs. The DEL_INIT2...4 inputs are not used. In
some countries, pickup of the protection stage is also used for the shot initiation. This is
the only time when the DEL_INIT inputs are used.
A070865 V2 EN
Figure 505: Schematic diagram of delayed initiation input signals
In total, the AR function contains six separate initiation lines used for the initiation or
blocking of the autoreclosing shots. These lines are divided into two types of channels. In
three of these channels, the signal to the AR function can be delayed, whereas the other
three channels do not have any delaying capability.
Each channel that is capable of delaying a pickup signal has four time delays. The time
delay is selected based on the shot pointer in the AR function. For the first reclose attempt,
996 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
the first time delay is selected; for the second attempt, the second time delay and so on. For
the fourth and fifth attempts, the time delays are the same.
Time delay settings for the DEL_INIT_2 signal
• Str 2 delay shot 1



Normally, only two or three reclosing attempts are made. The third and fourth attempts are
used to provide the so-called fast final trip to lockout.
GUID-36912067-F77E-457B-87D8-637CE0FA73A6 V1 EN
Figure 506: Autoreclosing configuration example
615 series ANSI 997

Technical Manual
Control functions
Delayed DEL_INIT_2...4 signals are used only when the autoreclosing shot is
initiated with the pickup signal of a protection stage. After a pickup delay, the AR function
opens the circuit breaker and an autoreclosing shot is initiated. When the shot is initiated
with the trip signal of the protection, the protection function trips the circuit breaker and
simultaneously initiates the autoreclosing shot.
If the circuit breaker is manually closed against the fault, that is, if SOTF is used, the fourth
time delay can automatically be taken into use. This is controlled with the internal logic
of the AR function and the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter.
A typical autoreclose situation is where one autoreclosing shot has been performed after
the fault was detected. There are two types of such cases: operation initiated with
protection pickup signal and operation initiated with protection trip signal. In both cases,
the autoreclosing sequence is successful: the reclaim time elapses and no new sequence is
picked up.
A070867 V1 EN
Figure 507: Signal scheme of autoreclosing operation initiated with protection pickup
signal
The autoreclosing shot is initiated with a trip signal of the protection function after the
pickup delay time has elapsed. The autoreclosing picks up when the Str 2 delay shot 1
setting elapses.
998 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
A070868-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 508: Signal scheme of autoreclosing operation initiated with protection trip
signal
The autoreclosing shot is initiated with a trip signal of the protection function. The
autoreclosing picks up when the protection trip delay time elapses.
Normally, all trip and pickup signals are used to initiate an autoreclosing shot and trip the
circuit breaker. ACTIVE output indicates reclosing sequence in progress. If any of the
input signals INIT_X or DEL_INIT_X are used for blocking, the corresponding bit in
the Tripping line setting must be FALSE. This is to ensure that the circuit breaker does not
trip from that signal, that is, the signal does not activate the OPEN_CB output. The default
value for the setting is "63", which means that all initiation signals activate the OPEN_CB
output. The lowest bit in the Tripping line setting corresponds to the INIT_1 input, the
highest bit to the INIT_6 line.
615 series ANSI 999

Technical Manual
Control functions
9.4.4.2 Shot initiation
A070869 V1 EN
Figure 509: Example of an autoreclosing program with a reclose scheme matrix
In the AR function, each shot can be programmed to locate anywhere in the reclose
scheme matrix. The shots are like building blocks used to design the reclose program. The
building blocks are called CBBs. All blocks are alike and have settings which give the
attempt number (columns in the matrix), the initiation or blocking signals (rows in the
matrix) and the reclose time of the shot.
The settings related to CBB configuration are:

• First...Seventh reclose time
• Init signals CBB1…CBB7
• Blk signals CBB1…CBB7
• Shot number CBB1…CBB7
The reclose time defines the open and dead times, that is, the time between the OPEN_CB
and the CLOSE_CB commands. The Init signals CBBx setting defines the initiation
1000 615 series ANSI

Technical Manual
Control functions
signals. The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that are related to the
CBB (rows in the matrix). The Shot number CBB1…CBB7 setting defines which shot is
related to the CBB (columns in the matrix). For example, CBB1 settings are:
• First reclose time = 1.0s
• Init signals CBB1 = 7 (three lowest bits: 111000 = 7)
• Blk signals CBB1 = 16 (the fifth bit: 000010 = 16)
• Shot number CBB1 = 1
CBB2 settings are:

• Second reclose time = 10s
• Init signals CBB2 = 6 (the second and third bits: 011000 = 6)
CBB3 settings are:

• Third reclose time = 30s
• Init signals CBB3 = 4 (the third bit: 001000 = 4)
CBB4 settings are:

• Fourth reclose time = 0.5s
• Init signals CBB4 = 8 (the fourth bit: 000100 = 8)
• Blk signals CBB4 = 0 (no blocking signals related to this CBB)
If a shot is initiated from the INIT_1 line, only one shot is allowed before lockout. If a
shot is initiated from the INIT_3 line, three shots are allowed before lockout.
A sequence initiation from the INIT_4 line leads to a lockout after two shots. In a
situation where the initiation is made from both the INIT_3 and INIT_4 lines, a third
shot is allowed, that is, CBB3 is allowed to start. This is called conditional lockout. If the
initiation is made from the INIT_2 and INIT_3 lines, an immediate lockout occurs.
The INIT_5 line is used for blocking purposes. If the INIT_5 line is active during a
sequence start, the reclose attempt is blocked and the AR function goes to lockout.
If more than one CBBs are started with the shot pointer, the CBB with the
smallest individual number is always selected. For example, if the
615 series ANSI 1001

Technical Manual
Control functions
INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the second shot, that is, the shot
pointer is 2, CBB2 is started instead of CBB5.
Even if the initiation signals are not received from the protection functions, the AR
function can be set to continue from the second to the fifth reclose shot. The AR function
can, for example, be requested to automatically continue with the sequence when the
circuit breaker fails to close when requested. In such a case, the AR function issues a
CLOSE_CB command. When the wait close time elapses, that is, the closing of the circuit
breaker fails, the next shot is automatically started. Another example is the embedded
generation on the power line, which can make the synchronism check fail and prevent the
reclosing. If the autoreclose sequence is continued to the second shot, a successful
synchronous reclosing is more likely than with the first shot, since the second shot lasts
longer than the first one.

Technical Manual
Control functions
A070870 V1 EN
Figure 510: Logic diagram of auto-initiation sequence detection
Automatic initiation can be selected with the Auto initiation Cnd setting to be the
following:

Technical Manual
Control functions
• Not allowed: no automatic initiation is allowed

• When the synchronization fails, the automatic initiation is carried out when the auto
wait time elapses and the reclosing is prevented due to a failure during the
synchronism check
• When the circuit breaker does not close, the automatic initiation is carried out if the
circuit breaker does not close within the wait close time after issuing the reclose
command
• Both: the automatic initiation is allowed when synchronization fails or the circuit
breaker does not close.
The Auto init parameter defines which INIT_X lines are activated in the
auto-initiation. The default value for this parameter is "0", which means
that no auto-initiation is selected.
A070871-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 511: Example of an auto-initiation sequence with synchronization failure in the

first shot and circuit breaker closing failure in the second shot
In the first shot, the synchronization condition is not fulfilled (SYNC is FALSE). When the
auto wait timer elapses, the sequence continues to the second shot. During the second
reclosing, the synchronization condition is fulfilled and the close command is given to the
circuit breaker after the second reclose time has elapsed.
After the second shot, the circuit breaker fails to close when the wait close time has
elapsed. The third shot is started and a new close command is given after the third reclose
time has elapsed. The circuit breaker closes normally and the reclaim time starts. When the
reclaim time has elapsed, the sequence is concluded successful.
9.4.4.3 Shot pointer controller
The execution of a reclose sequence is controlled by a shot pointer. It can be adjusted with
the SHOT_PTR monitored data.

Technical Manual
Control functions
The shot pointer starts from an initial value "1" and determines according to the settings
whether or not a certain shot is allowed to be initiated. After every shot, the shot pointer
value increases. This is carried out until a successful reclosing or lockout takes place after
a complete shot sequence containing a total of five shots.
A070872 V1 EN
Figure 512: Shot pointer function
Every time the shot pointer increases, the reclaim time starts. When the reclaim time ends,
the shot pointer sets to its initial value, unless no new shot is initiated. The shot pointer
increases when the reclose time elapses or at the falling edge of the INC_SHOTP signal.
When SHOT_PTR has the value six, the AR function is in a so called pre-lockout state. If
a new initiation occurs during the pre-lockout state, the AR function goes to lockout.
Therefore, a new sequence initiation during the pre-lockout state is not possible.
The AR function goes to the pre-lockout state in the following cases:

• During SOTF
• When the AR function is active, it stays in a pre-lockout state for the time defined by
the reclaim time
• When all five shots have been executed
• When the frequent operation counter limit is reached. A new sequence initiation
forces the AR function to lockout.
9.4.4.4 Reclose controller
The reclose controller calculates the reclose, discrimination and reclaim times. The
reclose time is started when the INPRO signal is activated, that is, when the sequence
starts and the activated CBB defines the reclose time.

Technical Manual
Control functions
When the reclose time has elapsed, the CLOSE_CB output is not activated until the
following conditions are fulfilled:
• The SYNC input must be TRUE if the particular CBB requires information about the
synchronism
• All AR initiation inputs that are defined protection lines (using the Control line
setting) are inactive
• The circuit breaker is open
• The circuit breaker is ready for the close command, that is, the CB_READY input is
TRUE. This is indicated by active READY output.
If at least one of the conditions is not fulfilled within the time set with the Auto wait time
parameter, the autoreclose sequence is locked.
The synchronism requirement for the CBBs can be defined with the Synchronisation set
setting, which is a bit mask. The lowest bit in the Synchronisation set setting is related to
CBB1 and the highest bit to CBB7. For example, if the setting is set to "1", only CBB1
requires synchronism. If the setting is it set to "7", CBB1, CBB2 and CBB3 require the
SYNC input to be TRUE before the reclosing command can be given.
A070873-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 513: Initiation during discrimination time - AR function goes to lockout
The discrimination time starts when the close command CLOSE_CB has been given. If a
pickup input is activated before the discrimination time has elapsed, the AR function goes
to lockout. The default value for each discrimination time is zero. The discrimination time
can be adjusted with the Dsr time shot 1…4 parameter.

Technical Manual
Control functions
GUID-30D1A46E-563A-4AB2-8AD5-1D63DDEBB7E3 V1 EN
Figure 514: Initiation after elapsed discrimination time - new shot begins
9.4.4.5 Sequence controller
When the LOCKED output is active, the AR function is in lockout. This means that new
sequences cannot be initialized, because AR is insensitive to initiation commands. It can
be released from the lockout state in the following ways.
• The function is reset through communication with the RecRs parameter. The same
functionality can also be found in the Clear menu (79 reset).
• The lockout is automatically reset after the reclaim time, if the Auto lockout reset
setting is in use.
If the Auto lockout reset setting is not in use, the lockout can be released
only with the RecRs parameter.
The AR function can go to lockout for many reasons.
• The INHIBIT_RECL input is active.

• All shots have been executed and a new initiation is made (final trip).
• The time set with the Auto wait time parameter expires and the automatic sequence
initiation is not allowed because of a synchronization failure.
• The time set with the Wait close time parameter expires, that is, the circuit breaker
does not close or the automatic sequence initiation is not allowed due to a closing
failure of the circuit breaker.
• A new shot is initiated during the discrimination time.
• The time set with the Max wait time parameter expires, that is, the master unit does
not release the slave unit.
Technical Manual
Control functions
• The frequent operation counter limit is reached and new sequence is initiated. The
lockout is released when the recovery timer elapses.
• The protection trip signal has been active longer than the time set with the Max wait
time parameter since the shot initiation.
• The circuit breaker is closed manually during an autoreclosing sequence and the
manual close mode is FALSE.
9.4.4.6 Protection coordination controller
The PROT_CRD output is used for controlling the protection functions. In several
applications, such as fuse-saving applications involving down-stream fuses, tripping and
initiation of shot 1 should be fast (instantaneous or short-time delayed). The tripping and
initiation of shots 2, 3 and definite tripping time should be delayed.
In this example, two overcurrent elements 51P and 50P-2 are used. 50P-2 is given an
instantaneous characteristic and 51P is given a time delay.
The PROT_CRD output is activated, if the SHOT_PTR value is same or higher than the
value defined with the Protection crd limit setting and all initialization signals have been
reset. The PROT_CRD output is reset under the following conditions:
• If the cut-out time elapses

• If the reclaim time elapses and the AR function is ready for a new sequence
• If the AR function is in lockout or disabled, that is, if the value of the Protection crd
mode setting is "AR inoperative" or "AR inop, CB man".
The PROT_CRD output can also be controlled with the Protection crd mode setting. The
setting has the following modes:
• "no condition": the PROT_CRD output is controlled only with the Protection crd limit
setting
• "AR inoperative": the PROT_CRD output is active, if the AR function is disabled or
in the lockout state, or if the INHIBIT_RECL input is active
• "CB close manual": the PROT_CRD output is active for the reclaim time if the circuit
breaker has been manually closed, that is, the AR function has not issued a close
command
• "AR inop, CB man": both the modes "AR inoperative" and "CB close manual" are
effective
• "always": the PROT_CRD output is constantly active

Technical Manual
Control functions
A070875-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 515: Configuration example of using the PROT_CRD output for protection
blocking
If the Protection crd limit setting has the value "1", the instantaneous three-phase
overcurrent protection function 50P-3 is disabled or blocked after the first shot.
9.4.4.7 Circuit breaker controller
Circuit breaker controller contains two features: SOTF and frequent-operation counter.
SOTF protects the AR function in permanent faults.
The circuit breaker position information is controlled with the CB closed Pos status
setting. The setting value "TRUE” means that when the circuit breaker is closed, the
CB_POS input is TRUE. When the setting value is “FALSE”, the CB_POS input is
FALSE, provided that the circuit breaker is closed. The reclose command pulse time can
be controlled with the Close pulse time setting: the CLOSE_CB output is active for the
time set with the Close pulse time setting. The CLOSE_CB output is deactivated also when
the circuit breaker is detected to be closed, that is, when the CB_POS input changes from
open state to closed state. The Wait close time setting defines the time after the
CLOSE_CB command activation, during which the circuit breaker should be closed. If the
closing of circuit breaker does not happen during this time, the autoreclosing function is
driven to lockout or, if allowed, an auto-initiation is activated.
The main motivation for autoreclosing to begin with is the assumption that the fault is
temporary by nature, and that a momentary de-energizing of the power line and an
automatic reclosing restores the power supply. However, when the power line is manually
energized and an immediate protection trip is detected, it is very likely that the fault is of
a permanent type. A permanent fault is, for example, energizing a power line into a
forgotten grounding after a maintenance work along the power line. In such cases, SOTF

Technical Manual
Control functions
is activated, but only for the reclaim time after energizing the power line and only when
the circuit breaker is closed manually and not by the AR function.
SOTF disables any initiation of an autoreclosing shot. The energizing of the power line is
detected from the CB_POS information.
SOTF is activated when the AR function is enabled or when the AR function is started and
the SOTF should remain active for the reclaim time.
When SOTF is detected, the parameter SOTF is active.
If the Manual close mode setting is set to FALSE and the circuit breaker
has been manually closed during an autoreclosing shot, the AR unit goes
to an immediate lockout.
If the Manual close mode setting is set to TRUE and the circuit breaker has
been manually closed during an autoreclosing shot (the INPRO is active),
the shot is considered as completed.
When SOTF starts, reclaim time is restarted, provided that it is running.
The frequent-operation counter is intended for blocking the autoreclosing function in

cases where the fault causes repetitive autoreclosing sequences during a short period of
time. For instance, if a tree causes a short circuit and, as a result, there are autoreclosing
shots within a few minutes interval during a stormy night. These types of faults can easily
damage the circuit breaker if the AR function is not locked by a frequent-operation
counter.
The frequent-operation counter has three settings:

• Frq Op counter limit
• Frq Op counter time
• Frq Op recovery time
The Frq Op counter limit setting defines the number of reclose attempts that are allowed
during the time defined with the Frq Op counter time setting. If the set value is reached
within a pre-defined period defined with the Frq Op counter time setting, the AR function
goes to lockout when a new shot begins, provided that the counter is still above the set

Technical Manual
Control functions
limit. The lockout is released after the recovery time has elapsed. The recovery time can
be defined with the Frq Op recovery time setting .
If the circuit breaker is manually closed during the recovery time, the reclaim time is
activated after the recovery timer has elapsed.
9.4.5 Counters
The AR function contains six counters. Their values are stored in a semi-retain memory.
The counters are increased at the rising edge of the reclosing command. The counters
count the following situations.
• COUNTER: counts every reclosing command activation
• CNT_SHOT1: counts reclosing commands that are executed from shot 1
The counters are disabled through communication with the DsaCnt parameter. When the
counters are disabled, the values are not updated.
The counters are reset through communication with the CntRs parameter.The same
functionality can also be found in the clear menu (79 counters).
9.4.6 Application
Modern electric power systems can deliver energy to users very reliably. However,
different kind of faults can occur. Protection relays play an important role in detecting
failures or abnormalities in the system. They detect faults and give commands for
corresponding circuit breakers to isolate the defective element before excessive damage
or a possible power system collapse occurs. A fast isolation also limits the disturbances
caused for the healthy parts of the power system.
The faults can be transient, semi-transient or permanent. For example, a permanent fault
in power cables means that there is a physical damage in the fault location that must first
be located and repaired before the network voltage can be restored.
In overhead lines, the insulating material between phase conductors is air. The majority of
the faults are flash-over arcing faults caused by lightning, for example. Only a short
interruption is needed for extinguishing the arc. These faults are transient by nature.

Technical Manual
Control functions
A semi-transient fault can be caused for example by a bird or a tree branch falling on the
overhead line. The fault disappears on its own if the fault current burns the branch or the
wind blows it away.
Transient and semi-transient faults can be cleared by momentarily de-energizing the

power line. Using the autoreclose function minimizes interruptions in the power system
service and brings the power back on-line quickly and effortlessly.
The basic idea of the autoreclose function is simple. In overhead lines, where the
possibility of self-clearing faults is high, the autoreclose function tries to restore the power
by reclosing the breaker. This is a method to get the power system back into normal
operation by removing the transient or semi-transient faults. Several trials, that is,
autoreclose shots are allowed. If none of the trials is successful and the fault persists,
definite final tripping follows.
The autoreclose function can be used with every circuit breaker that has the ability for a
reclosing sequence. In 79 autoreclose function the implementing method of autoreclose
sequences is patented by ABB
Table 904: Important definitions related to autoreclosing
autoreclose shot an operation where after a preset time the breaker is closed from the breaker tripping
caused by protection
autoreclose a predefined method to do reclose attempts (shots) to restore the power system
sequence
SOTF If the protection detects a fault immediately after an open circuit breaker has been
closed, it indicates that the fault was already there. It can be, for example, a forgotten
grounding after maintenance work. Such closing of the circuit breaker is known as
switch on to fault. Autoreclosing in such conditions is prohibited.
final trip Occurs in case of a permanent fault, when the circuit breaker is opened for the last time
after all programmed autoreclose operations. Since no auto-reclosing follows, the
circuit breaker remains open. This is called final trip or definite trip.

Technical Manual
Control functions
9.4.6.1 Shot initiation
A070869 V1 EN
Figure 516: Example of an autoreclosing program with a reclose scheme matrix
In the AR function, each shot can be programmed to locate anywhere in the reclose
scheme matrix. The shots are like building blocks used to design the reclose program. The
building blocks are called CBBs. All blocks are alike and have settings which give the
attempt number (columns in the matrix), the initiation or blocking signals (rows in the
matrix) and the reclose time of the shot.
The settings related to CBB configuration are:

• First...Seventh reclose time
• Init signals CBB1…CBB7
• Blk signals CBB1…CBB7
• Shot number CBB1…CBB7
The reclose time defines the open and dead times, that is, the time between the OPEN_CB
and the CLOSE_CB commands. The Init signals CBBx setting defines the initiation

Technical Manual
Control functions
signals. The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that are related to the
CBB (rows in the matrix). The Shot number CBB1…CBB7 setting defines which shot is
related to the CBB (columns in the matrix). For example, CBB1 settings are:
• First reclose time = 1.0s
• Init signals CBB1 = 7 (three lowest bits: 111000 = 7)
CBB2 settings are:

• Second reclose time = 10s
• Init signals CBB2 = 6 (the second and third bits: 011000 = 6)
CBB3 settings are:

• Third reclose time = 30s
• Init signals CBB3 = 4 (the third bit: 001000 = 4)
CBB4 settings are:

• Fourth reclose time = 0.5s
• Init signals CBB4 = 8 (the fourth bit: 000100 = 8)
• Blk signals CBB4 = 0 (no blocking signals related to this CBB)
If a shot is initiated from the INIT_1 line, only one shot is allowed before lockout. If a
shot is initiated from the INIT_3 line, three shots are allowed before lockout.
A sequence initiation from the INIT_4 line leads to a lockout after two shots. In a
situation where the initiation is made from both the INIT_3 and INIT_4 lines, a third
shot is allowed, that is, CBB3 is allowed to start. This is called conditional lockout. If the
initiation is made from the INIT_2 and INIT_3 lines, an immediate lockout occurs.
The INIT_5 line is used for blocking purposes. If the INIT_5 line is active during a
sequence start, the reclose attempt is blocked and the AR function goes to lockout.
If more than one CBBs are started with the shot pointer, the CBB with the
smallest individual number is always selected. For example, if the

Technical Manual
Control functions
INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the second shot, that is, the shot
pointer is 2, CBB2 is started instead of CBB5.
Even if the initiation signals are not received from the protection functions, the AR
function can be set to continue from the second to the fifth reclose shot. The AR function
can, for example, be requested to automatically continue with the sequence when the
circuit breaker fails to close when requested. In such a case, the AR function issues a
CLOSE_CB command. When the wait close time elapses, that is, the closing of the circuit
breaker fails, the next shot is automatically started. Another example is the embedded
generation on the power line, which can make the synchronism check fail and prevent the
reclosing. If the autoreclose sequence is continued to the second shot, a successful
synchronous reclosing is more likely than with the first shot, since the second shot lasts
longer than the first one.

Technical Manual
Control functions
A070870 V1 EN
Figure 517: Logic diagram of auto-initiation sequence detection
Automatic initiation can be selected with the Auto initiation Cnd setting to be the
following:

Technical Manual
Control functions
• Not allowed: no automatic initiation is allowed

• When the synchronization fails, the automatic initiation is carried out when the auto
wait time elapses and the reclosing is prevented due to a failure during the
synchronism check
• When the circuit breaker does not close, the automatic initiation is carried out if the
circuit breaker does not close within the wait close time after issuing the reclose
command
• Both: the automatic initiation is allowed when synchronization fails or the circuit
breaker does not close.
The Auto init parameter defines which INIT_X lines are activated in the
auto-initiation. The default value for this parameter is "0", which means
that no auto-initiation is selected.
A070871-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 518: Example of an auto-initiation sequence with synchronization failure in the

first shot and circuit breaker closing failure in the second shot
In the first shot, the synchronization condition is not fulfilled (SYNC is FALSE). When the
auto wait timer elapses, the sequence continues to the second shot. During the second
reclosing, the synchronization condition is fulfilled and the close command is given to the
circuit breaker after the second reclose time has elapsed.
After the second shot, the circuit breaker fails to close when the wait close time has
elapsed. The third shot is started and a new close command is given after the third reclose
time has elapsed. The circuit breaker closes normally and the reclaim time starts. When the
reclaim time has elapsed, the sequence is concluded successful.
9.4.6.2 Sequence
The autoreclose sequence is implemented by using up to seven CBBs. For example, if the
user wants a sequence of three shots then only the first three CBBs are needed. Using

Technical Manual
Control functions
building blocks instead of fixed shots gives enhanced flexibility, allowing multiple and
adaptive sequences.
Each CBB is identical. The Shot number CBB_ setting defines at which point in the
autoreclose sequence the CBB should be performed, that is, whether the particular CBB
is going to be the first, second, third, fourth or fifth shot.
During the initiation of a CBB, the conditions of initiation and blocking are checked. This
is done for all CBBs simultaneously. Each CBB that fulfils the initiation conditions
requests an execution.
The function also keeps track of shots already performed. That is, at which point the
autoreclose sequence is from shot 1 to lockout. For example, if shots 1 and 2 have already
been performed, only shots 3 to 5 are allowed.
Additionally, the Enable shot jump setting gives two possibilities:

• Only such CBBs that are set for the next shot in the sequence can be accepted for
execution. For example, if the next shot in the sequence should be shot 2, a request
from CBB set for shot 3 is rejected.
• Any CBB that is set for the next shot or any of the following shots can be accepted for
execution. For example, if the next shot in the sequence should be shot 2, also CBBs
that are set for shots 3, 4 and 5 are accepted. In other words, shot 2 can be ignored.
In case there are multiple CBBs allowed for execution, the CBB with the smallest number
is chosen. For example, if CBB2 and CBB4 request an execution, CBB2 is allowed to
execute the shot.
The autoreclose function can perform up to five autoreclose shots or cycles.

Technical Manual
Control functions
9.4.6.3 Configuration examples
A070886-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 519: Example connection between protection and autoreclosing functions in

protection relay configuration
It is possible to create several sequences for a configuration.
Autoreclose sequences for overcurrent and non-directional ground-fault protection

applications where high speed and delayed autoreclosings are needed can be as follows:
Example 1.
The sequence is implemented by two shots which have the same reclose time for all
protection functions, namely 50P-1, 51P and 51N/G. The initiation of the shots is done by
activating the trip signals of the protection functions.

Technical Manual
Control functions
A070887 V1 EN
Figure 520: Autoreclosing sequence with two shots
tHSAR Time delay of high-speed autoreclosing, here: First reclose time
tDAR Time delay of delayed autoreclosing, here: Second reclose time
tProtection Operating time for the protection stage to clear the fault
tCB_O Operating time for opening the circuit breaker
tCB_C Operating time for closing the circuit breaker
In this case, the sequence needs two CBBs. The reclosing times for shot 1 and shot 2 are
different, but each protection function initiates the same sequence. The CBB sequence is
described in Table 905 as follows:
GUID-A9DFEA78-6500-46BA-96A4-8A39966BE0B0 V1 EN
Figure 521: Two shots with three initiation lines

Technical Manual
Control functions
Table 905: Settings for configuration example 1

Setting name Setting value
Shot number CBB1 1
Init signals CBB1 7 (lines 1, 2 and 3 = 1+2+4 = 7)
First reclose time 0.3s (an example)
Shot number CBB2 2
Init signals CBB2 7 (lines 1, 2 and 3 = 1+2+4 = 7)
Second reclose time 15.0s (an example)
Example 2
There are two separate sequences implemented with three shots. Shot 1 is implemented by
CBB1 and it is initiated with the high stage of the overcurrent protection (50P-1). Shot 1
is set as a high-speed autoreclosing with a short time delay. Shot 2 is implemented with
CBB2 and meant to be the first shot of the autoreclose sequence initiated by the low stage
of the overcurrent protection (51P) and the low stage of the non-directional ground-fault
protection (51N/G). It has the same reclose time in both situations. It is set as a high-speed
autoreclosing for corresponding faults. The third shot, which is the second shot in the
autoreclose sequence initiated by 51P or 51N/G, is set as a delayed autoreclosing and
executed after an unsuccessful high-speed autoreclosing of a corresponding sequence.

Technical Manual
Control functions
A071272 V1 EN
Figure 522: Autoreclosing sequence with two shots with different shot settings
according to initiation signal
tHSAR Time delay of high-speed autoreclosing, here: First reclose time
tDAR Time delay of delayed autoreclosing, here: Second reclose time
tl>> Operating time for the 50P-1 protection stage to clear the fault
tl> or lo> Operating time for the 51P or 51N/G protection stage to clear the fault
tCB_O Operating time for opening the circuit breaker
tCB_C Operating time for closing the circuit breaker
In this case, the number of needed CBBs is three, that is, the first shot's reclosing time
depends on the initiation signal.

Technical Manual
Control functions
A071274-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 523: Three shots with three initiation lines
If the sequence is initiated from the INIT_1 line, that is, the overcurrent protection high
stage, the sequence is one shot long. If the sequence is initiated from the INIT_2 or
INIT_3 lines, the sequence is two shots long.
Table 906: Settings for configuration example 2

Setting name Setting value
Shot number CBB1 1
Init signals CBB1 1 (line 1)
First reclose time 0.0s (an example)
Shot number CBB2 1
Init signals CBB2 6 (lines 2 and 3 = 2+4 = 6)
Second reclose time 0.2s (an example)
Shot number CBB3 2
Init signals CBB3 6 (lines 2 and 3 = 2+4 = 6)
Third reclose time 10.0s
9.4.6.4 Delayed initiation lines
The autoreclose function consists of six individual autoreclose initiation lines

INIT_1...INIT 6 and three delayed initiation lines:
• DEL_INIT_2
• DEL_INIT_3
• DEL_INIT_4
DEL_INIT_2 and INIT_2 are connected together with an OR-gate, as are inputs 3 and
4. Inputs 1, 5 and 6 do not have any delayed input. From the autoreclosing point of view,
it does not matter whether INIT_x or DEL_INIT_x line is used for shot initiation or
blocking.

Technical Manual
Control functions
The autoreclose function can also open the circuit breaker from any of the initiation lines.
It is selected with the Tripping line setting. As a default, all initiation lines activate the
OPEN_CB output.
A070276 V1 EN
Figure 524: Simplified logic diagram of initiation lines
Each delayed initiation line has four different time settings:

Table 907: Settings for delayed initiation lines
Setting name Description and purpose
Str x delay shot 1 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, where x is the
number of the line 2, 3 or 4. Used for shot 1.
Str x delay shot 2 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, used for shot 2.
Str x delay shot 3 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, used for shot 3.
Str x delay shot 4 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, used for shots
4 and 5. Optionally, can also be used with SOTF.
9.4.6.5 Shot initiation from protection pickup signal
All autoreclose shots are initiated by protection trips. As a result, all trip times in the
sequence are the same. This is why using protection trips may not be the optimal solution.
Using protection pickup signals instead of protection trips for initiating shots shortens the
trip times.

Technical Manual
Control functions
Example 1
When a two-shot-sequence is used, the pickup information from the protection function is
routed to the DEL_INIT 2 input and the trip information to the INIT_2 input. The
following conditions have to apply:
• protection trip time = 0.5s
• Str 2 delay shot 1 = 0.05s
• Str 2 delay shot 2 = 60s
• Str 2 delay shot 3 = 60s
Operation in a permanent fault:
1. Protection picks up and activates the DEL_INIT 2 input.

2. After 0.05 seconds, the first autoreclose shot is initiated. The function opens the
circuit breaker: the OPEN_CB output activates. The total trip time is the protection
pickup delay + 0.05 seconds + the time it takes to open the circuit breaker.
3. After the first shot, the circuit breaker is reclosed and the protection picks up again.
4. Because the delay of the second shot is 60 seconds, the protection is faster and trips
after the set operation time, activating the INIT 2 input. The second shot is initiated.
5. After the second shot, the circuit breaker is reclosed and the protection picks up again.
6. Because the delay of the second shot is 60 seconds, the protection is faster and trips
after the set operation time. No further shots are programmed after the final trip. The
function is in lockout and the sequence is considered unsuccessful.
Example 2
The delays can be used also for fast final trip. The conditions are the same as in Example
1, with the exception of Str 2 delay shot 3 = 0.10 seconds.
The operation in a permanent fault is the same as in Example 1, except that after the second
shot when the protection picks up again, Str 2 delay shot 3 elapses before the protection
trip time and the final trip follows. The total trip time is the protection pickup delay + 0.10
seconds + the time it takes to open the circuit breaker.
9.4.6.6 Fast trip in Switch on to fault
The Str _ delay shot 4 parameter delays can also be used to achieve a fast and accelerated
trip with SOTF. This is done by setting the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter to "1" and
connecting the protection pickup information to the corresponding DEL_INIT_ input.
When the function detects a closing of the circuit breaker, that is, any other closing except
the reclosing done by the function itself, it always prohibits shot initiation for the time set
with the Reclaim time parameter. Furthermore, if the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter is
"1", the Str _ delay shot 4 parameter delays are also activated.

Technical Manual
Control functions
Example 1
The protection operation time is 0.5 seconds, the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter is set
to "1" and the Str 2 delay shot 4 parameter is 0.05 seconds. The protection pickup signal
is connected to the DEL_INIT_2 input.
If the protection picks up after the circuit breaker closes, the fast trip follows after the set
0.05 seconds. The total trip time is the protection pickup delay + 0.05 seconds + the time
it takes to open the circuit breaker.
9.4.7 Signals
INIT_1 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 1
DEL_INIT_2 BOOLEAN 0=False Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 2
BLK_RECL_T BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks and resets reclose time
BLK_RCLM_T BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks and resets reclaim time
BLK_THERM BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks and holds the reclose shot from the thermal
overload
CB_POS BOOLEAN 0=False Circuit breaker position input
CB_READY BOOLEAN 1=True Circuit breaker status signal
INC_SHOTP BOOLEAN 0=False A zone sequence coordination signal
INHIBIT_RECL BOOLEAN 0=False Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
RECL_ON BOOLEAN 0=False Level sensitive signal for allowing (high) / not allowing
(low) reclosing
SYNC BOOLEAN 0=False Synchronizing check fulfilled

Technical Manual
Control functions

OPEN_CB BOOLEAN Open command for circuit breaker
CLOSE_CB BOOLEAN Close (reclose) command for circuit breaker
CMD_WAIT BOOLEAN Wait for master command
INPRO BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress, activated during dead time
LOCKED OUT BOOLEAN Signal indicating that AR is locked out
PROT_CRD BOOLEAN A signal for coordination between the AR and the
protection
UNSUC_RECL BOOLEAN Indicates an unsuccessful reclosing sequence
AR_ON BOOLEAN Autoreclosing allowed
READY BOOLEAN Indicates that the AR is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence is in progress
9.4.8 Settings
Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable/Enable
5=disable
Reclosing operation 1=Disable 1=Disable Reclosing operation (Disable, External Ctl /
2=External Ctl Enable
3=Enable
Close pulse time 10...10000 ms 10 200 CB close pulse time
Reclaim time 100...1800000 ms 100 10000 Reclaim time
Terminal priority 1=None 1=None Terminal priority
2=Low (follower)
3=High (master)
Synchronisation set 0...127 1 0 Selection for synchronizing requirement for
reclosing
Auto initiation cnd 1=Not allowed 2=When sync fails Auto initiation condition
2=When sync fails
3=CB doesn't close
4=Both
Tripping line 0...63 1 0 Tripping line, defines INIT inputs which cause
OPEN_CB activation
Fourth delay in SOTF 0=False 0=False Sets 4th delay into use for all DEL_INIT signals
1=True during SOTF
First reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB1
Second reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB2
Third reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB3

Technical Manual
Control functions

Fourth reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB4
Fifth reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB5
Sixth reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB6
Seventh reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB7
Init signals CBB1 0...63 1 0 Initiation lines for CBB1
Shot number CBB1 0...5 1 0 Shot number for CBB1
Frq Op counter limit 0...250 1 0 Frequent operation counter lockout limit
Frq Op counter time 1...250 min 1 1 Frequent operation counter time
Frq Op recovery time 1...250 min 1 1 Frequent operation counter recovery time
Auto init 0...63 1 0 Defines INIT lines that are activated at auto
initiation

Manual close mode 0=False 0=False Manual close mode
1=True
Wait close time 50...10000 ms 50 250 Allowed CB closing time after reclose
command
Max wait time 100...1800000 ms 100 10000 Maximum wait time for haltDeadTime release
Max trip time 100...10000 ms 100 10000 Maximum wait time for deactivation of
protection signals
Max Thm block time 100...1800000 ms 100 10000 Maximum wait time for thermal blocking signal
deactivation
Cut-out time 0...1800000 ms 100 10000 Cutout time for protection coordination
Dsr time shot 1 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for first reclosing
Dsr time shot 2 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for second reclosing

Technical Manual
Control functions

Dsr time shot 3 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for third reclosing
Dsr time shot 4 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for fourth reclosing
Auto wait time 0...60000 ms 10 2000 Wait time for reclosing condition fullfilling
Auto lockout reset 0=False 1=True Automatic lockout reset
1=True
Protection crd limit 1...5 1 1 Protection coordination shot limit
Protection crd mode 1=No condition 4=AR inop, CB Protection coordination mode
2=AR inoperative man
3=CB close manual
4=AR inop, CB man
5=Always
Control line 0...63 1 63 Control line, defines INIT inputs which are
protection signals
Enable shot jump 0=False 1=True Enable shot jumping
1=True
CB closed Pos status 0=False 0=False Circuit breaker closed position status
1=True
Blk signals CBB1 0...63 1 0 Blocking lines for CBB1
Str 2 delay shot 1 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start2, 1st reclose
Str 2 delay shot 2 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start2 2nd reclose
Str 2 delay shot 3 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start2 3rd reclose
Str 2 delay shot 4 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start2, 4th reclose

Technical Manual
Control functions

DISA_COUNT BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for counter disabling
1=True
FRQ_OPR_CNT INT32 0...2147483647 Frequent operation counter
FRQ_OPR_AL BOOLEAN 0=False Frequent operation counter
1=True alarm
STATUS Enum -1=Bad AR status signal for IEC61850
1=Ready
2=InProgress
3=Successful
4=WaitingForTri
p
5=TripFromProte
ction
6=FaultDisappe
ared
7=WaitToCompl
ete
8=CBclosed
9=CycleUnsucce
ssful
10=Unsuccessfu
l
11=Aborted
INPRO_1 BOOLEAN 0=False Reclosing shot in progress,
1=True shot 1
1=True shot 2
1=True shot 3
1=True shot 4
1=True shot 5
DISCR_INPRO BOOLEAN 0=False Signal indicating that
1=True discrimination time is in
progress
CUTOUT_INPRO BOOLEAN 0=False Signal indicating that cut-out
1=True time is in progress
SUC_RECL BOOLEAN 0=False Indicates a successful
1=True reclosing sequence
UNSUC_CB BOOLEAN 0=False Indicates an unsuccessful CB
1=True closing
CNT_SHOT1 INT32 0...2147483647 Resetable operation counter,
shot 1

Technical Manual
Control functions

shot 2
shot 3
shot 4
shot 5
COUNTER INT32 0...2147483647 Resetable operation counter,
all shots
SHOT_PTR INT32 1...7 Shot pointer value
MAN_CB_CL BOOLEAN 0=False Indicates CB manual closing
1=True during reclosing sequence
SOTF BOOLEAN 0=False Switch-onto-fault
1=True
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled


B The PROT_DISA output removed and removed the
related settings
C The default value of the CB closed Pos status setting
changed from "True" to "False"
D SHOT_PTR output range 0...7 (earlier 0...6)
E Monitored data ACTIVE transferred to be ACT visible
output. SHOT_PTR output range 1...7.

Technical Manual
1032
Power quality measurement functions
Section 10 Power quality measurement functions
10.1 Current total demand distortion PQI
Current total demand distortion CMHAI PQM3I PQI
GUID-972900BB-F0EB-41A7-BEB3-86ABA0F54BDF V1 EN
The current total demand distortion function PQI is used for monitoring the current total
demand distortion TDD.

The operation of PQI can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the

Technical Manual
I_A
Distortion
Demand
I_B measure- ALARM
calculation
ment
I_C
BLOCK
GUID-E5EC5FFE-7679-445B-B327-A8B1759D90C4 V1 EN
Distortion measurement
The distortion measurement module measures harmonics up to the 11th harmonic. The
total demand distortion TDD is calculated from the measured harmonic components with
the formula
N
TDD =
∑ k =2 I k2
I max_ demand
GUID-9F532219-6991-4F61-8DB6-0D6A0AA9AC29 V1 EN (Equation 171)
Ik kth harmonic component

Imax_demand The maximum demand current measured by IA, IB, IC
If IA, IB, IC are not available in the configuration or the measured maximum demand
current is less than the Initial Dmd current setting, Initial Dmd current is used for
Imax_demand.
Demand calculation
The demand value for TDD is calculated separately for each phase. If any of the calculated
total demand distortion values is above the set alarm limit TDD alarm limit, the ALARM
The demand calculation window is set with the Demand interval setting. It has seven
window lengths from "1 minute" to "180 minutes". The window type can be set with the
Demand window setting. The available options are "Sliding" and "Non-sliding".
The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the ALARM output.
10.1.5 Application
In standards, the power quality is defined through the characteristics of the supply voltage.
Transients, short-duration and long-duration voltage variations, unbalance and waveform
distortions are the key characteristics describing power quality. Power quality is,

Technical Manual
however, a customer-driven issue. It could be said that any power problem concerning
voltage or current that results in a failure or misoperation of customer equipment is a
power quality problem.
Harmonic distortion in a power system is caused by nonlinear devices. Electronic power

converter loads constitute the most important class of nonlinear loads in a power system.
The switch mode power supplies in a number of single-phase electronic equipment, such
as personal computers, printers and copiers, have a very high third-harmonic content in
the current. Three-phase electronic power converters, that is, dc/ac drives, however, do
not generate third-harmonic currents. Still, they can be significant sources of harmonics.
Power quality monitoring is an essential service that utilities can provide for their
industrial and key customers. Not only can a monitoring system provide information
about system disturbances and their possible causes, it can also detect problem conditions
throughout the system before they cause customer complaints, equipment malfunctions
and even equipment damage or failure. Power quality problems are not limited to the
utility side of the system. In fact, the majority of power quality problems are localized
within customer facilities. Thus, power quality monitoring is not only an effective
customer service strategy but also a way to protect a utility's reputation for quality power
and service.
PQI provides a method for monitoring the power quality by means of the current
waveform distortion. PQI provides a short-term 3-second average and a long-term
demand for TDD.
10.1.6 Signals
Table 915: PQI Input signals
Table 916: PQI Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for TDD

Technical Manual
10.1.7 Settings
Table 917: PQI Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Demand interval 0=1 minute 2=10 minutes Time interval for demand calculation
1=5 minutes
2=10 minutes
3=15 minutes
4=30 minutes
5=60 minutes
6=180 minutes
Demand window 1=Sliding 1=Sliding Demand calculation window type
2=Non-sliding
TDD alarm limit 1.0...100.0 % 0.1 50.0 TDD alarm limit
Table 918: PQI Non group settings (Advanced)

Initial Dmd current 0.10...1.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 Initial demand current

Table 919: PQI Monitored data
Max demand TDD IA FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Maximum demand TDD for
phase A
Max demand TDD IB FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Maximum demand TDD for
phase B
Max demand TDD IC FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Maximum demand TDD for
phase C
Time max dmd TDD Timestamp Time of maximum demand
IA TDD phase A
IB TDD phase B
IC TDD phase C
3SMHTDD_A FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of TDD
for phase A
DMD_TDD_A FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for TDD for
phase A
3SMHTDD_B FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of TDD
for phase B

Technical Manual

DMD_TDD_B FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for TDD for
phase B
3SMHTDD_C FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of TDD
for phase C
DMD_TDD_C FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for TDD for
phase C

Table 920: PQI Technical revision history
10.2 Voltage total harmonic distortion PQVPH
Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI PQM3U PQVPH
GUID-CF203BDC-8C9A-442C-8D31-1AD55110469C-ANSI V1 EN
The voltage total harmonic distortion function PQVPH is used for monitoring the voltage
total harmonic distortion THD.

Technical Manual

The operation of PQVPH can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
V_A_AB
Distortion
Demand
V_B_BC measure- ALARM
calculation
ment
V_C_CA
BLOCK
GUID-477C2AE6-EE70-4A31-A71B-EE77DBFAFD0E V1 EN
Distortion measurement
The distortion measurement module measures harmonics up to the 11th harmonic. The
total harmonic distortion THD for voltage is calculated from the measured harmonic
components with the formula
THD =
∑ kN=2Vk2
V1
GUID-EF4F9D27-6E81-4697-B02C-EDBBD68CE9A8 V1 EN (Equation 172)
Vk kth harmonic component

V1 the voltage fundamental component amplitude
Demand calculation
The demand value for THD is calculated separately for each phase. If any of the calculated
demand THD values is above the set alarm limit THD alarm limit, the ALARM output is
activated.
The demand calculation window is set with the Demand interval setting. It has seven
window lengths from "1 minute" to "180 minutes". The window type can be set with the
Demand window setting. The available options are "Sliding" and "Non-sliding".
The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the ALARM output.

Technical Manual
10.2.5 Application
PQVPH provides a method for monitoring the power quality by means of the voltage
waveform distortion. PQVPH provides a short-term three-second average and long-term
demand for THD.
10.2.6 Signals
Table 921: PQVPH Input signals
Table 922: PQVPH Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for THD
10.2.7 Settings
Table 923: PQVPH Non group settings (Basic)
5=disable
Demand interval 0=1 minute 2=10 minutes Time interval for demand calculation
1=5 minutes
2=10 minutes
3=15 minutes
4=30 minutes
5=60 minutes
6=180 minutes
Demand window 1=Sliding 1=Sliding Demand calculation window type
2=Non-sliding
THD alarm limit 1.0...100.0 % 0.1 50.0 THD alarm limit

Technical Manual

Table 924: PQVPH Monitored data
Max demand THD FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Maximum demand THD for
VA phase A
VB phase B
VC phase C
Time max dmd THD Timestamp Time of maximum demand
VA THD phase A
VB THD phase B
VC THD phase C
3SMHTHD_A FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of THD
for phase A
DMD_THD_A FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for THD for
phase A
3SMHTHD_B FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of THD
for phase B
DMD_THD_B FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for THD for
phase B
3SMHTHD_C FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of THD
for phase C
DMD_THD_C FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for THD for
phase C

Table 925: PQVPH Technical revision history

Technical Manual
10.3 Voltage variation PQSS
Voltage variation PHQVVR PQMU PQSS
PQ 3U<>

PQSS
I_A TRIP
I_B PICKUP
I_C SWELLST
V_A INPRO
V_B INTST
V_C
BLOCK
GUID-104C1E22-E049-49E3-BC03-0DDA916FC4CF V1 EN
The voltage variation function PQSS is used for measuring the short-duration voltage
variations in distribution networks.
Power quality in the voltage waveform is evaluated by measuring voltage swells, dips and
interruptions. PQSS includes single-phase and three-phase voltage variation modes.
Typically, short-duration voltage variations are defined to last more than half of the
nominal frequency period and less than one minute. The maximum magnitude (in the case
of a voltage swell) or depth (in the case of a voltage dip or interruption) and the duration
of the variation can be obtained by measuring the RMS value of the voltage for each phase.
International standard 61000-4-30 defines the voltage variation to be implemented using
the RMS value of the voltage. IEEE standard 1159-1995 provides recommendations for
monitoring the electric power quality of the single-phase and polyphase ac power systems.
PQSS contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block a set of function outputs or

the function itself, if desired.

Technical Manual

The operation of PQSS can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
GUID-91ED3E3D-F014-49EE-B4B0-DAD2509DD013-ANSI V1 EN
10.3.4.1 Phase mode setting
PQSS is designed for both single-phase and polyphase ac power systems, and selection
can be made with the Phase mode setting, which can be set either to the "Single Phase" or
"Three Phase" mode. The default setting is "Single Phase".
The basic difference between these alternatives depends on how many phases are needed
to have the voltage variation activated. When the Phase mode setting is "Single Phase",
the activation is straightforward. There is no dependence between the phases for variation
pickup. The PICKUP output and the corresponding phase pickup are activated when the
limit is exceeded or undershot. The corresponding phase pickup deactivation takes place
when the limit (includes small hysteresis) is undershot or exceeded. The PICKUP output
is deactivated when there are no more active phases.
However, when Phase mode is "Three Phase", all the monitored phase signal magnitudes,
defined with Phase supervision, have to fall below or rise above the limit setting to

Technical Manual
activate the PICKUP output and the corresponding phase output, that is, all the monitored
phases have to be activated. Accordingly, the deactivation occurs when the activation
requirement is not fulfilled, that is, one or more monitored phase signal magnitudes return
beyond their limits. Phases do not need to be activated by the same variation type to
activate the PICKUP output. Another consequence is that if only one or two phases are
monitored, it is sufficient that these monitored phases activate the PICKUP output.
10.3.4.2 Variation detection
The module compares the measured voltage against the limit settings. If there is a
permanent undervoltage or overvoltage, the Reference voltage setting can be set to this
voltage level to avoid the undesired voltage dip or swell indications. This is accomplished
by converting the variation limits with the Reference voltage setting in the variation
detection module, that is, when there is a voltage different from the nominal voltage, the
Reference voltage setting is set to this voltage.
The Variation enable setting is used for enabling or disabling the variation types. By
default, the setting value is "Swell+dip+Int" and all the alternative variation types are
indicated. For example, for setting "Swell+dip", the interruption detection is not active
and only swell or dip events are indicated.
In a case where Phase mode is "Single Phase" and the dip functionality is available, the
output DIPST is activated when the measured TRMS value drops below the Voltage dip
set 3 setting in one phase and also remains above the Voltage Int set setting. If the voltage
drops below the Voltage Int set setting, the output INTST is activated. INTST is
deactivated when the voltage value rises above the setting Voltage Int set. When the same
measured TRMS magnitude rises above the setting Voltage swell set 3, the SWELLST
There are three setting value limits for dip (Voltage dip set 1..3) and swell activation
(Voltage swell set 1..3) and one setting value limit for interruption.
If Phase mode is "Three Phase", the DIPST and INTST outputs are
activated when the voltage levels of all monitored phases, defined with the
parameter Phase supervision, drop below the Voltage Int set setting value.
An example for the detection principle of voltage interruption for "Three
Phase" when Phase supervision is "Ph A + B + C", and also the
corresponding pickup signals when Phase mode is "Single Phase", are as
shown in the example for the detection of a three-phase interruption.

Technical Manual
Voltage swell set

V_A
V_C
V_B
Voltage dip set
Voltage Int set
SWELLST TRUE
FALSE
DIPST TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
A) Three phase mode
SWELLST TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
B) Single phase mode

GUID-F44C8E6E-9354-44E4-9B2E-600D66B76C1A-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 531: Detection of three-phase voltage interruption
The module measures voltage variation magnitude on each phase separately, that is, there
are phase-segregated outputs ST_A, ST_B and ST_C for voltage variation indication.
The configuration parameter Phase supervision defines which voltage phase or phases are
monitored. If a voltage phase is selected to be monitored, the function assumes it to be
connected to a voltage measurement channel. In other words, if an unconnected phase is
monitored, the function falsely detects a voltage interruption in that phase.
The maximum magnitude and depth are defined as percentage values calculated from the
difference between the reference and the measured voltage. For example, a dip to 70
percent means that the minimum voltage dip magnitude variation is 70 percent of the
reference voltage amplitude.
The activation of the BLOCK input resets the function and outputs.
10.3.4.3 Variation validation
The validation criterion for voltage variation is that the measured total variation duration
is between the set minimum and maximum durations (Either one of VVa dip time 1, VVa

Technical Manual
swell time 1 or VVa Int time 1, depending on the variation type, and VVa Dur Max). The
maximum variation duration setting is the same for all variation types.
Figure 532 shows voltage dip operational regions. In Figure 531, only one voltage dip/
swell/Int set is drawn, whereas in this figure there are three sub-limits for the dip
operation. When Voltage dip set 3 is undershot, the corresponding ST_x and also the
DIPST outputs are activated. When the TRMS voltage magnitude remains between
Voltage dip set 2 and Voltage dip set 1 for a period longer than VVa dip time 2 (shorter time
than VVa dip time 3), a momentary dip event is detected. Furthermore, if the signal
magnitude stays between the limits longer than VVa dip time 3 (shorter time than VVa Dur
max), a temporary dip event is detected. If the voltage remains below Voltage dip set 1 for
a period longer than VVa dip time 1 but a shorter time than VVa dip time 2, an
instantaneous dip event is detected.
For an event detection, the TRIP output is always activated for one task cycle. The
corresponding counter and only one of them (INSTDIPCNT, MOMDIPCNT or
TEMPDIPCNT) is increased by one. If the dip limit undershooting duration is shorter than
VVa dip time 1, VVa swell time 1 or VVa Int time 1, the event is not detected at all, and if
the duration is longer than VVa Dur Max, MAXDURDIPCNT is increased by one but no
event detection resulting in the activation of the TRIP output and recording data update
takes place. These counters are available through the monitored data view on the LHMI
or through tools via communications. There are no phase-segregated counters but all the
variation detections are registered to a common time/magnitude-classified counter type.
Consequently, a simultaneous multiphase event, that is, the variation-type event detection
time moment is exactly the same for two or more phases, is counted only once also for
single-phase power systems.
GUID-0D3F6D81-F905-4D8D-A579-836EF7BB6773-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 532: Voltage dip operational regions
In Figure 533, the corresponding limits regarding the swell operation are provided with
the inherent magnitude limit order difference. The swell functionality principle is the
same as for dips, but the different limits for the signal magnitude and times and the
inherent operating zone change (here, Voltage swell set x > 1.0 xVn) are applied.

Technical Manual
Voltage
xVref
1.40
Instantaneous
swell Momentary
swell Temporary Maximum duration
Voltage swell set 1 swell swell
Voltage swell set 2
Voltage swell set 3

1.00
0
VVa swell time 1 VVa swell time 2 VVa swell time 3 VVa Dur Max Time (ms)
0
GUID-C1C6BEEF-439A-4DF7-8065-5F88C7517834-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 533: Voltage swell operational regions
For interruption, as shown in Figure 534, there is only one magnitude limit but four
duration limits for interruption classification. Now the event and counter type depends
only on variation duration time.
Voltage
xVref
1.00
Voltage Int set
Momentary Temporary Sustained Maximum duration

interruption interruption interruption interruption
0
VVa Int time 1 VVa Int time 2 VVa Int time 3 VVa Dur Max Time (ms)
0
GUID-0204C8EA-102C-4327-BE84-DCE27747AA30-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 534: Interruption operating regions
Generally, no event detection is done if both the magnitude and duration requirements are
not fulfilled. For example, the dip event does not indicate if the TRMS voltage magnitude
remains between Voltage dip set 3 and Voltage dip set 2 for a period shorter than VVa dip
time 3 before rising back above Voltage dip set 3.

Technical Manual
The event indication ends and possible detection is done when the TRMS voltage returns
above (for dip and interruption) or below (for swell) the activation pickup limit. For
example, after an instantaneous dip, the event indication when the voltage magnitude
exceeds Voltage dip set 1 is not detected (and recorded) immediately but only if no longer
dip indication for the same dip variation takes place and the maximum duration time for
dip variation is not exceeded before the signal magnitude rises above Voltage dip set 3.
There is a small hysteresis for all these limits to avoid the oscillation of the output
activation. No drop-off approach is applied here due to the hysteresis.
Consequently, only one event detection and recording of the same variation type can take
place for one voltage variation, so the longest indicated variation of each variation type is
detected. Furthermore, it is possible that another instantaneous dip event replaces the one
already indicated if the magnitude again undershoots Voltage dip set 1 for the set time after
the first detection and the signal magnitude or time requirement is again fulfilled. Another
possibility is that if the time condition is not fulfilled for an instantaneous dip detection but
the signal rises above Voltage dip set 1, the already elapsed time is included in the
momentary dip timer. Especially the interruption time is included in the dip time. If the
signal does not exceed Voltage dip set 2 before the timer VVa dip time 2 has elapsed when
the momentary dip timer is also started after the magnitude undershooting Voltage dip set
2, the momentary dip event instead is detected. Consequently, the same dip occurrence
with a changing variation depth can result in several dip event indications but only one
detection. For example, if the magnitude has undershot Voltage dip set 1 but remained
above Voltage Intr set for a shorter time than the value of VVa dip time 1 but the signal rises
between Voltage dip set 1 and Voltage dip set 2 so that the total duration of the dip
activation is longer than VVa dip time 2 and the maximum time is not overshot, this is
detected as a momentary dip even though a short instantaneous dip period has been
included. In text, the terms "deeper" and "higher" are used for referring to dip or
interruption.
Although examples are given for dip events, the same rules can be applied to the swell and
interruption functionality too. For swell indication, "deeper" means that the signal rises
even more and "higher" means that the signal magnitude becomes lower respectively.
The adjustable voltage thresholds adhere to the relationships:
VVa dip time 1 ≤ VVa dip time 2 ≤ VVa dip time 3.
VVa swell time 1 ≤ VVa swell time 2 ≤ VVa swell time 3.
VVa Int time 1 ≤ VVa Int time 2 ≤ VVa Int time 3.
There is a validation functionality built-in function that checks the relationship adherence
so that if VVa x time 1 is set higher than VVa x time 2 or VVa x time 3, VVa x time 2 and VVa
x time 3 are set equal to the new VVa x time 1. If VVa x time 2 is set higher than VVa x time 3,
VVa x time 3 is set to the new VVa x time 2. If VVa x time 2 is set lower than VVa x time 1,

Technical Manual
the entered VVa x time 2 is rejected. If VVa x time 3 is set lower than VVa x time 2, the
entered VVa x time 3 is rejected.
10.3.4.4 Duration measurement
The duration of each voltage phase corresponds to the period during which the measured
TRMS values remain above (swell) or below (dip, interruption) the corresponding limit.
Besides the three limit settings for the variation types dip and swell, there is also a specific
duration setting for each limit setting. For interruption, there is only one limit setting
common for the three duration settings. The maximum duration setting is common for all
variation types.
The duration measurement module measures the voltage variation duration of each phase
voltage separately when the Phase mode setting is "Single Phase". The phase variation
durations are independent. However, when the Phase mode setting is "Three Phase",
voltage variation may pick up only when all the monitored phases are active. An example
of variation duration when Phase mode is "Single Phase" can be seen in Figure 535. The
voltage variation in the example is detected as an interruption for the phase B and a dip for
the phase A, and also the variation durations are interpreted as independent V_B and V_A
durations. In case of single-phase interruption, the DIPST output is active when either
PICKUP_A or PICKUP_B is active. The measured variation durations are the times
measured between the activation of the PICKUP_A or PICKUP_B outputs and
deactivation of the PICKUP_A or PICKUP_B outputs. When the Phase mode setting is
"Three Phase", the example case does not result in any activation.
Voltage swell set

V_C
V_A V_A duration

V_B
Voltage dip set
Total variation duration
V_B duration
Voltage Int set
GUID-922C1D16-46ED-4825-8C9A-4750CCB0B778-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 535: Single-phase interruption for the Phase mode value "Single Phase"

Technical Manual
10.3.4.5 Three/single-phase selection variation examples
The provided rules always apply for single-phase (Phase Mode is "Single Phase") power
systems. However, for three-phase power systems (where Phase Mode is "Three Phase"),
it is required that all the phases have to be activated before the activation of the PICKUP
output. Interruption event indication requires all three phases to undershoot Voltage Int set
simultaneously, as shown in Figure 531. When the requirement for interruption for "Three
Phase" is no longer fulfilled, variation is indicated as a dip as long as all phases are active.
In case of a single-phase interruption of Figure 535, when there is a dip indicated in

another phase but the third phase is not active, there is no variation indication pickup when
Phase Mode is "Three Phase". In this case, only the Phase Mode value "Single Phase"
results in the PICKUP_B interruption and the PICKUP_A dip.
It is also possible that there are simultaneously a dip in one phase and a swell in other
phases. The functionality of the corresponding event indication with one inactive phase is
shown in Figure 536. Here, the "Swell + dip" variation type of Phase mode is "Single
Phase". For the selection "Three Phase" of Phase mode, no event indication or any
activation takes place due to a non-active phase.
V_A
Voltage swell set
V_C
V_B
Voltage dip set
VoltageInt set
TRUE
ST_A FALSE
TRUE
ST_B FALSE
TRUE
ST_C FALSE
TRUE
SWELLST FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
TRUE
SWELLOPR FALSE
TRUE
DIPOPR FALSE
INTOPR TRUE
FALSE
GUID-0657A163-7D42-4543-8EC8-3DF84E2F0BF5-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 536: Concurrent dip and swell when Phase mode is "Single Phase"

Technical Manual
In Figure 537, one phase is in dip and two phases have a swell indication. For the Phase
Mode Dip value "Three Phase", the activation occurs only when all the phases are active.
Furthermore, both swell and dip variation event detections take place simultaneously. In
case of a concurrent voltage dip and voltage swell, both SWELLCNT and DIPCNT are
incremented by one.
Also Figure 537 shows that for the Phase Mode value "Three Phase", two different time
moment variation event swell detections take place and, consequently, DIPCNT is
incremented by one but SWELLCNT is totally incremented by two. Both in Figure 536
and Figure 537 it is assumed that variation durations are sufficient for detections to take
place.

Technical Manual
V_A
Voltage swell set
V_C
V_B
Voltage dip set
Voltage Int set
TRUE
ST_A FALSE
TRUE
ST_B FALSE
TRUE
ST_C FALSE
TRUE
SWELLST FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
TRUE
SWELLOPR FALSE
TRUE
DIPOPR FALSE
INTOPR TRUE
FALSE
A) Three phase mode
TRUE
ST_A FALSE
TRUE
ST_B FALSE
TRUE
ST_C FALSE
TRUE
SWELLST FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
TRUE
SWELLOPR FALSE
TRUE
DIPOPR FALSE
INTOPR TRUE
FALSE
B) Single phase mode
GUID-1C0C906B-EC91-4C59-9291-B5002830E590-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 537: Concurrent dip and two-phase swell
10.3.5 Recorded data

Besides counter increments, the information required for a later fault analysis is stored
after a valid voltage variation is detected.

Technical Manual
Recorded data information

When voltage variation starts, the phase current magnitudes preceding the activation
moment are stored. Also, the initial voltage magnitudes are temporarily stored at the
variation pickup moment. If the variation is, for example, a two-phase voltage dip, the
voltage magnitude of the non-active phase is stored from this same moment, as shown in
Figure 538. The function tracks each variation-active voltage phase, and the minimum or
maximum magnitude corresponding to swell or dip/interruption during variation is
temporarily stored. If the minimum or maximum is found in tracking and a new magnitude
is stored, also the inactive phase voltages are stored at the same moment, that is, the
inactive phases are not magnitude-tracked. The time instant (time stamp) at which the
minimum or maximum magnitude is measured is also temporarily stored for each voltage
phase where variation is active. Finally, variation detection triggers the recorded data
update when the variation activation ends and the maximum duration time is not
exceeded.
The data objects to be recorded for PQSS are given in Table 926. There are totally three
data banks, and the information given in the table refers to one data bank content.
The three sets of recorded data available are saved in data banks 1-3. The data bank 1 holds
always the most recent recorded data, and the older data sets are moved to the next banks
(1→2 and 2→3) when a valid voltage variation is detected. When all three banks have data
and a new variation is detected, the newest data are placed into bank 1 and the data in bank
3 are overwritten by the data from bank 2.
Figure 538 shows a valid recorded voltage interruption and two dips for the Phase mode
value "Single Phase". The first dip event duration is based on the V_A duration, while the
second dip is based on the time difference between the dip stop and start times. The first
detected event is an interruption based on the V_B duration given in Figure 538. It is
shown also with dotted arrows how voltage time stamps are taken before the final time
stamp for recording, which is shown as a solid arrow. Here, the V_B timestamp is not
taken when the V_A activation starts.

Technical Manual
V_C amplitude & timestamp
Voltage swell set

V_C
V_A
V_A duration
V_B
Voltage dip set
Dip start
Dip stop
V_B duration
Voltage Int set
V_B amplitude & V_A amplitude &

timestamp timestamp
GUID-7A859344-8960-4CF3-B637-E2DE6D3BDA85-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 538: Valid recorded voltage interruption and two dips
Table 926: PQSS recording data bank parameters

Parameter description Parameter name
Event detection triggering time stamp Time
Variation type Variation type
Variation magnitude Ph A Variation Ph A
Variation magnitude Ph A time stamp (maximum/ Var Ph A rec time
minimum magnitude measuring time moment during
variation)
Variation magnitude Ph B Variation Ph B
Variation magnitude Ph B time stamp (maximum/ Var Ph B rec time
variation)
Variation magnitude Ph C Variation Ph C
Variation magnitude Ph C time stamp (maximum/ Var Ph C rec time
variation)
Variation duration Ph A Variation Dur Ph A
Variation Ph A start time stamp (phase A variation Var Dur Ph A time
start time moment)
Variation duration Ph B Variation Dur Ph B

Technical Manual
Parameter description Parameter name

Variation Ph B start time stamp (phase B variation Var Dur Ph B time
start time moment)
Variation duration Ph C Variation Dur Ph C
Variation Ph C start time stamp (phase C variation Var Dur Ph C time
start time moment)
Current magnitude Ph A preceding variation Var current Ph A
Current magnitude Ph B preceding variation Var current Ph B
Current magnitude Ph C preceding variation Var current Ph C
Table 927: Enumeration values for the recorded data parameters

Setting name Enum name Value
Variation type Swell 1
Variation type Dip 2
Variation type Swell + dip 3
Variation type Interruption 4
Variation type Swell + Int 5
Variation type Dip + Int 6
Variation type Swell+dip+Int 7
10.3.6 Application
Voltage variations are the most typical power quality variations on the public electric
network. Typically, short-duration voltage variations are defined to last more than half of
the nominal frequency period and less than one minute (European Standard EN 50160 and
IEEE Std 1159-1995).
These short-duration voltage variations are almost always caused by a fault condition.
Depending on where the fault is located, it can cause either a temporary voltage rise
(swell) or voltage drop (dip). A special case of voltage drop is the complete loss of voltage
(interruption).
PQSS is used for measuring short-duration voltage variations in distribution networks.

The power quality is evaluated in the voltage waveform by measuring the voltage swells,
dips and interruptions.

Technical Manual
GUID-D61DBDF6-7C1B-492E-94CB-C6A2EC7C1463-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 539: Duration and voltage magnitude limits for swell, dip and interruption
measurement
Voltage dips disturb the sensitive equipment such as computers connected to the power
system and may result in the failure of the equipment. Voltage dips are typically caused
by faults occurring in the power distribution system. Typical reasons for the faults are
lightning strikes and tree contacts. In addition to fault situations, the switching of heavy
loads and starting of large motors also cause dips.
Voltage swells cause extra stress for the network components and the devices connected
to the power system. Voltage swells are typically caused by the ground faults that occur
in the power distribution system.
Voltage interruptions are typically associated with the switchgear operation related to the
occurrence and termination of short circuits. The operation of a circuit breaker
disconnects a part of the system from the source of energy. In the case of overhead
networks, automatic reclosing sequences are often applied to the circuit breakers that
interrupt fault currents. All these actions result in a sudden reduction of voltages on all
voltage phases.
Due to the nature of voltage variations, the power quality standards do not specify any
acceptance limits. There are only indicative values for, for example, voltage dips in the
European standard EN 50160. However, the power quality standards like the international
standard IEC 61000-4-30 specify that the voltage variation event is characterized by its
duration and magnitude. Furthermore, IEEE Std 1159-1995 gives the recommended
practice for monitoring the electric power quality.

Technical Manual
Voltage variation measurement can be done to the phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase

voltages. The power quality standards do not specify whether the measurement should be
done to phase or phase-to-phase voltages. However, in some cases it is preferable to use
phase-to-ground voltages for measurement. The measurement mode is always TRMS.
10.3.7 Signals
Table 928: PQSS Input signals
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current magnitude
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current magnitude
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current magnitude
V_A SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage A
V_B SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage B
V_C SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-ground voltage C
Table 929: PQSS Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Voltage variation detected
PICKUP BOOLEAN Voltage variation present
SWELLST BOOLEAN Voltage swell active
DIPST BOOLEAN Voltage dip active
INTST BOOLEAN Voltage interruption active
10.3.8 Settings
Table 930: PQSS Group settings (Basic)
Reference voltage 10.0...200.0 %Un 0.1 57.7 Reference supply voltage in %
Voltage dip set 1 10.0...100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Dip limit 1 in % of reference voltage
VVa dip time 1 0.5...54.0 cycles 0.1 3.0 Voltage variation dip duration 1
VVa dip time 2 10.0...180.0 cycles 0.1 30.0 Voltage variation dip duration 2
VVa dip time 3 2000...60000 ms 10 3000 Voltage variation dip duration 3
Voltage swell set 1 100.0...140.0 % 0.1 120.0 Swell limit 1 in % of reference voltage

Technical Manual

VVa swell time 1 0.5...54.0 cycles 0.1 0.5 Voltage variation swell duration 1
VVa swell time 2 10.0...80.0 cycles 0.1 10.0 Voltage variation swell duration 2
VVa swell time 3 2000...60000 ms 10 2000 Voltage variation swell duration 3
Voltage Int set 0.0...100.0 % 0.1 10.0 Interruption limit in % of reference voltage
VVa Int time 1 0.5...30.0 cycles 0.1 3.0 Voltage variation Int duration 1
VVa Int time 2 10.0...180.0 cycles 0.1 30.0 Voltage variation Int duration 2
VVa Int time 3 2000...60000 ms 10 3000 Voltage variation interruption duration 3
VVa Dur Max 100...3600000 ms 100 60000 Maximum voltage variation duration
Table 931: PQSS Non group settings (Basic)

5=disable
Variation enable 1=Swell 7=Swell+dip+Int Enable variation type
2=Dip
3=Swell + dip
4=Interruption
5=Swell + Int
6=Dip + Int
7=Swell+dip+Int
Table 932: PQSS Non group settings (Advanced)

Phase supervision 1=Ph A 7=Ph A + B + C Monitored voltage phase
2=Ph B
3=Ph A + B
4=Ph C
5=Ph A + C
6=Ph B + C
7=Ph A + B + C
Phase mode 1=Three Phase 2=Single Phase Three/Single phase mode
2=Single Phase

Technical Manual

Table 933: PQSS Monitored data
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=False Pickup Phase A (Voltage
1=True Variation Event in progress)
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=False Pickup Phase B (Voltage
ST_C BOOLEAN 0=False Pickup Phase C (Voltage
INSTSWELLCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Instantaneous swell operation
counter
MOMSWELLCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Momentary swell operation
counter
TEMPSWELLCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Temporary swell operation
counter
MAXDURSWELLCN INT32 0...2147483647 Maximum duration swell
T operation counter
INSTDIPCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Instantaneous dip operation
counter
MOMDIPCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Momentary dip operation
counter
TEMPDIPCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Temporary dip operation
counter
MAXDURDIPCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Maximum duration dip
operation counter
MOMINTCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Momentary interruption
operation counter
TEMPINTCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Temporary interruption
operation counter
SUSTINTCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Sustained interruption
operation counter
MAXDURINTCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Maximum duration
interruption operation counter
PQSS Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled
Time Timestamp Time

Technical Manual

Variation type Enum 0=No variation Variation type
1=Swell
2=Dip
3=Swell + dip
4=Interruption
5=Swell + Int
6=Dip + Int
7=Swell+dip+Int
Variation Ph A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude Phase A
Var Ph A rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude Phase A
time stamp
Variation Ph B FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude Phase B
Var Ph B rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude Phase B
time stamp
Variation Ph C FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude Phase C
Var Ph C rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude Phase C
time stamp
Variation Dur Ph A FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase A
Var Dur Ph A time Timestamp Variation Ph A start time
stamp
Variation Dur Ph B FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase B
Var Dur Ph B time Timestamp Variation Ph B start time
stamp
Variation Dur Ph C FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase C
Var Dur Ph C time Timestamp Variation Ph C start time
stamp
Var current Ph A FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude Phase A
preceding variation
Var current Ph B FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude Phase B
preceding variation
Var current Ph C FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude Phase C
preceding variation
Time Timestamp Time
1=Swell
2=Dip
3=Swell + dip
4=Interruption
5=Swell + Int
6=Dip + Int
7=Swell+dip+Int
time stamp

Technical Manual

time stamp
time stamp
stamp
stamp
stamp
preceding variation
preceding variation
preceding variation
Time Timestamp Time
1=Swell
2=Dip
3=Swell + dip
4=Interruption
5=Swell + Int
6=Dip + Int
7=Swell+dip+Int
time stamp
time stamp
time stamp
stamp
stamp

Technical Manual

stamp
preceding variation
preceding variation
preceding variation

Table 934: PQSS Technical data
Operation accuracy ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.2% of reference voltage
Reset ratio Typically 0.96 (Swell), 1.04 (Dip, Interruption)

Table 935: PQSS Technical revision history
10.4 Voltage unbalance PQVUB
Voltage unbalance VSQVUB PQUUB PQVUB

Technical Manual
PQVUB
V_A MN_UNB_AL
V_B PCT_UNB_AL
V_C OBS_PR_ACT
V1
V2
V0
BLOCK
GUID-5248E9E7-BE34-4B9E-B402-611B2557E536 V2 EN
The voltage unbalance function PQVUB monitors voltage unbalance conditions in power
transmission and distribution networks. It can be applied to identify a network and load
unbalance that can cause sustained voltage unbalance. PQVUB is also used to monitor the
commitment of the power supply utility of providing a high-quality, that is, a balanced
voltage supply on a continuous basis.
PQVUB uses five different methods for calculating voltage unbalance. The methods are
the negative-sequence voltage magnitude, zero-sequence voltage magnitude, ratio of the
negative-sequence voltage magnitude to the positive-sequence voltage magnitude, ratio
of the zero-sequence voltage magnitude to the positive-sequence voltage magnitude and
ratio of maximum phase voltage magnitude deviation from the mean voltage magnitude
to the mean of the phase voltage magnitude.
PQVUB provides statistics which can be used to verify the compliance of the power
quality with the European standard EN 50160 (2000). The statistics over selected period
include a freely selectable percentile for unbalance. PQVUB also includes an alarm
functionality providing a maximum unbalance value and the date and time of occurrence.
The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block a set of function

outputs or the function itself, if desired.

The operation of PQVUB can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the

Technical Manual
V_A PCT_UNB_AL
Percentile
V_B
calculation
V_C OBS_PR_ACT
Average
calculation
V1 Voltage MN_UNB_AL
V2 unbalance
V0 detector
Recorded
BLOCK data
GUID-69B09FFB-8F8F-49AE-BEC7-42CB7272C224 V1 EN
Average calculation
PQVUB calculates two sets of measured voltage unbalance values, a three-second and a
ten-minute non-sliding average value. The three-second average value is used for
continuous monitoring. The ten-minute average is used for percentile calculation for a
longer period.
The Average calculation module uses five different methods for the average calculation.
The required method can be selected with the Unb detection method parameter.
When the "Neg Seq" mode is selected with Unb detection method, the voltage unbalance
is calculated based on the negative-sequence voltage magnitude. Similarly, when the
"Zero Seq" mode is selected, the voltage unbalance is calculated based on the zero-
sequence voltage magnitude. When the "Neg to Pos Seq" mode is selected, the voltage
unbalance is calculated based on the ratio of the negative-sequence voltage magnitude to
the positive-sequence magnitude. When the "Zero to Pos Seq" mode is selected, the
voltage unbalance is calculated based on the ratio of the zero-sequence voltage magnitude
to the positive-sequence magnitude. When the "Ph vectors Comp" mode is selected, the
ratio of the maximum phase voltage magnitude deviation from the mean voltage
magnitude to the mean of the phase voltage magnitude is used for voltage unbalance
calculation.
The calculated three-second value and ten-minute value are available in the Monitored
data view through the outputs 3S_MN_UNB and 10MN_MN_UNB.
For VT connection = "Delta", the calculated zero-sequence voltage is

always zero, hence, the setting Unb detection method = "Zero Seq" is not
applicable in this VT configuration.

Technical Manual
Voltage unbalance detector

The three-second average value is calculated and compared to the set value Unbalance
pickup val. If the voltage unbalance exceeds this limit, the MN_UNB_AL output is
activated.
The activation of the BLOCK input blocks MN_UNB_AL output.
Percentile calculation
The Percentile calculation module performs the statistics calculation for the level of
voltage unbalance value for a settable duration. The operation of the Percentile calculation
module can be described with a module diagram.
Observation
OBS_PR_ACT
period
3s_MN_UNB
(from Average calculator)
Statistics Percentile
PCT_UNB_AL
10MIN_MN_UNB recorder calculator
(from Average calculator)
BLOCK
GUID-0190AF77-2DCC-4015-8142-EA6FE5FA2228 V2 EN
Figure 542: Percentile calculation
Observation period
The Observation period module calculates the length of the observation time for the
Statistics recorder sub-module as well as determines the possible start of a new one. A new
period can be started by timed activation using calendar time settings Obs period Str year,
Obs period Str month, Obs period Str day and Obs period Str hour.
The observation period start time settings Obs period Str year, Obs period
Str month, Obs period Str day and Obs period Str hour are used to set the
calendar time in UTC. These settings have to be adjusted according to the
local time and local daylight saving time.
A preferable way of continuous statistics recordings can be selected over a longer period
(months, years). With the Trigger mode setting, the way the next possible observation
time is activated after the former one has finished can be selected.

Technical Manual
Table 936: Trigger mode observation times

Trigger mode Observation time
Single Only one period of observation time is activated.
Periodic The time gap between the two trigger signals is
seven days.
Continuous The next period starts right after the previous
observation period is completed.
The length of the period is determined by the settings Obs period selection and User Def
Obs period. The OBS_PR_ACT output is an indication signal which exhibits rising edge
(TRUE) when the observation period starts and falling edge (FALSE) when the
observation period ends.
If the Percentile unbalance, Trigger mode or Obs period duration settings change when
OBS_PR_ACT is active, OBS_PR_ACT deactivates immediately.

Technical Manual
OBS_PR_ACT
Trigger mode - Single
Obs period selection – 4 (7 days)
TIme
7 days
Trigger mode - Continuous

Obs period selection – 4 (7 days)
TIme
Trigger mode - Continuous

Obs period selection – 3 (1 day)
TIme
Trigger mode - Periodic

Obs period selection – 3 (1 day)
TIme
GUID-A70EC355-E810-4A4A-8368-97B7AEF9F65B V1 EN
Figure 543: Periods for statistics recorder with different trigger modes and period
settings
The BLOCK input blocks the OBS_PR_ACT output, which then disables the maximum
value calculation of the Statistics recorder module. If the trigger mode is selected
"Periodic" or "Continuous" and the blocking is deactivated before the next observation
period is due to start, the scheduled period starts normally.

Technical Manual
Statistics recorder
The Statistics recorder module provides readily calculated three-second or ten-minute
values of the selected phase to the percentile calculator module based on the length of the
active observation period. If the observation period is less than one day, the three-second
average values are used. If the observation period is one day or longer, the ten-minute
average values are used.
The maximum three-second or ten-minute mean voltage unbalance is recorded during the
active observation period. The observation period start time PR_STR_TIME, observation
period end time PR_END_TIME, maximum voltage unbalance value during observation
period active, MAX_UNB_VAL and time of occurrence MAX_UNB_TIME are available
through the Monitored data view. These outputs are updated once OBS_PR_ACT
deactivates.
Percentile calculator
The purpose of the Percentile calculator module is to find the voltage unbalance level so
that during the observation time 95 percent (default value of the Percentile unbalance
setting) of all the measured voltage unbalance amplitudes are less than or equal to the
calculated percentile.
The computed output value PCT_UNB_VAL, below which the percentile of the values
lies, is available in the Monitored data view. The PCT_UNB_VAL output value is updated
at the end of the observation period.
If the output PCT_UNB_VAL is higher than the defined setting Unbalance pickup val at
the end of the observation period, an alarm output PCT_UNB_AL is activated. The
PCT_UNB_AL output remains active for the whole period before the next period
completes.
The BLOCK input blocks the output PCT_UNB_VAL.
Recorded data
The information required for a later fault analysis is stored when the Recorded data
module is triggered. This happens when a voltage unbalance is detected by the Voltage
unbalance detector module.
Three sets of recorded data are available in total. The sets are saved in data banks 1...3. The
data bank 1 holds the most recent recorded data. Older data are moved to the subsequent
banks (1 to 2 and 2 to 3) when a voltage unbalance is detected. When all three banks have
data and a new variation is detected, the latest data set is placed into bank 1 and the data
in bank 3 is overwritten by the data from bank 2.

Technical Manual
The recorded data can be reset with the RESET binary input signal by navigating to the
HMI reset (Main menu/Clear/Reset recorded data/PQVUBx) or through tools via
communications.
When voltage unbalance is detected in the system, PQVUB responds with the
MN_UNB_AL alarm signal. During the alarm situation, PQVUB stores the maximum
magnitude and the time of occurrence and the duration of alarm MN_UNB_AL. The
recorded data is stored when MN_UNB_AL is deactivated.
Table 937: Recorded data

Parameter Description
Alarm high mean Dur Time duration for alarm high mean unbalance
Max unbalance Volt Maximum three-second voltage
Time Max Unb Volt Time stamp of voltage unbalance
10.4.5 Application
Voltage unbalance is one of the basic power quality parameters.
Ideally, in a three-phase or multiphase power system, the frequency and voltage

magnitude of all the phases are equal and the phase displacement between any two
consecutive phases is also equal. This is called a balanced source. Apart from the balanced
source, usually the power system network and loads are also balanced, implying that
network impedance and load impedance in each phase are equal. In some cases, the
condition of a balance network and load is not met completely, which leads to a current
and voltage unbalance in the system. Providing unbalanced supply voltage has a
detrimental effect on load operation. For example, a small magnitude of a negative-
sequence voltage applied to an induction motor results in a significant heating of the
motor.
A balanced supply, balanced network and balanced load lead to a better power quality.
When one of these conditions is disturbed, the power quality is deteriorated. PQVUB
monitors such voltage unbalance conditions in power transmission and distribution
networks. PQVUB calculates two sets of measured values, a three-second and a ten-
minute non-sliding average value. The three-second average value is used for continuous
monitoring while the ten-minute average value is used for percentile calculation for a
longer period of time. It can be applied to identify the network and load unbalance that
may cause sustained voltage unbalance. A single-phase or phase-to-phase fault in the
network or load side can create voltage unbalance but, as faults are usually isolated in a
short period of time, the voltage unbalance is not a sustained one. Therefore, the voltage
unbalance may not be covered by PQVUB.

Technical Manual
Another major application is the long-term power quality monitoring. This can be used to
confirm a compliance to the standard power supply quality norms. The function provides
a voltage unbalance level which corresponds to the 95th percentile of the ten minutes'
average values of voltage unbalance recorded over a period of up to one week. It means
that for 95 percent of time during the observation period the voltage unbalance was less
than or equal to the calculated percentile. An alarm can be obtained if this value exceeds
the value that can be set.
The function uses five different methods for calculating voltage unbalance.
• Negative-sequence voltage magnitude
• Zero-sequence voltage magnitude
• Ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence voltage magnitude
• Ratio of zero-sequence to positive-sequence voltage magnitude
• Ratio of maximum phase voltage magnitude deviation from the mean voltage
magnitude to the mean of phase voltage magnitude.
Usually, the ratio of the negative-sequence voltage magnitude to the positive-sequence

voltage magnitude is selected for monitoring the voltage unbalance. However, other
methods may also be used if required.
10.4.6 Signals
Table 938: PQVUB Input signals
V0 SIGNAL 0 Zero sequence voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block all outputs except measured values
Table 939: PQVUB Output signals

MN_UNB_AL BOOLEAN Alarm active when 3 sec voltage unbalance exceeds the
limit
PCT_UNB_AL BOOLEAN Alarm active when percentile unbalance exceeds the
limit
OBS_PR_ACT BOOLEAN Observation period is active

Technical Manual
10.4.7 Settings
Table 940: PQVUB Non group settings (Basic)
Operation 1=enable 1=enable Opeartion Enable/Disable
5=disable
Unb detection method 1=Neg Seq 3=Neg to Pos Seq Set the operation mode for voltage unbalance
2=Zero Seq calculation
3=Neg to Pos Seq
4=Zero to Pos Seq
5=Ph vectors Comp
Unbalance pickup Val 1...100 % 1 1 Voltage unbalance pickup value
Trigger mode 1=Single 3=Continuous Specifies the observation period triggering
2=Periodic mode
3=Continuous
Percentile unbalance 1...100 % 1 95 The percent to which percentile value
PCT_UNB_VAL is calculated
Obs period selection 1=1 Hour 5=User defined Observation period for unbalance calculation
2=12 Hours
3=1 Day
4=7 Days
5=User defined
User Def Obs period 1...168 h 1 168 User define observation period for statistic
calculation
Obs period Str year 2008...2076 2011 Calendar time for observation period start year
in YYYY
Obs period Str month 0=reserved 1=January Calendar time for observation period start
1=January month
2=February
3=March
4=April
5=May
6=June
7=July
8=August
9=September
10=October
11=November
12=December
Obs period Str day 1...31 1 Calendar time for observation period start day
Obs period Str hour 0...23 h 0 Calendar time for observation period start hour

Technical Manual

Table 941: PQVUB Monitored data
3S_MN_UNB FLOAT32 0.00...150.00 % Non sliding 3 second mean
value of voltage unbalance
10MIN_MN_UNB FLOAT32 0.00...150.00 % Sliding 10 minutes mean value
of voltage unbalance
PCT_UNB_VAL FLOAT32 0.00...150.00 % Limit below which percentile
unbalance of the values lie
MAX_UNB_VAL FLOAT32 0.00...150.00 % Maximum voltage unbalance
measured in the observation
period
MAX_UNB_TIME Timestamp Time stamp at which
maximum voltage unbalance
measured in the observation
period
PR_STR_TIME Timestamp Time stamp of starting of the
previous observation period
PR_END_TIME Timestamp Time stamp of end of previous
observation period
Alarm high mean Dur FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Time duration for alarm high
mean unbalance
Max unbalance Volt FLOAT32 0.00...150.00 % Maximum 3 seconds
unbalance voltage
Time Max Unb Volt Timestamp Time stamp of maximum
voltage unbalance
mean unbalance
unbalance voltage
voltage unbalance
mean unbalance
unbalance voltage
voltage unbalance
PQVUB Enum 1=Enabled Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=Disabled

Technical Manual

Table 942: PQVUB Technical data
Operation accuracy ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Vn

Technical Manual
General function block features
Section 11 General function block features
11.1 Definite time characteristics
11.1.1 Definite time operation

The DT mode is enabled when the Operating curve type setting is selected either as "ANSI
Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". In the DT mode, the TRIP output of the function is
activated when the time calculation exceeds the set Trip delay time.
The user can determine the reset in the DT mode with the Reset delay time setting, which
provides the delayed reset property when needed.
The Type of reset curve setting has no effect on the reset method when the
DT mode is selected, but the reset is determined solely with the Reset
delay time setting.
The purpose of the delayed reset is to enable fast clearance of intermittent faults, for
example self-sealing insulation faults, and severe faults which may produce high
asymmetrical fault currents that partially saturate the current transformers. It is typical for
an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so called drop-off periods, during which
the fault current falls below the set start current, including hysteresis. Without the delayed
reset function, the operation timer would reset when the current drops off. In the same
way, an apparent drop-off period of the secondary current of the saturated current
transformer can also reset the operation timer.

Technical Manual
A060764-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 544: Operation of the counter in drop-off
In case 1, the reset is delayed with the Reset delay time setting and in case 2, the counter
is reset immediately, because the Reset delay time setting is set to zero.

Technical Manual
A070421-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 545: Drop-off period is longer than the set Reset delay time
When the drop-off period is longer than the set Reset delay time, as described in Figure
545, the input signal for the definite timer (here: timer input) is active, provided that the
current is above the set Pickup value. The input signal is inactive when the current is below
the set Pickup value and the set hysteresis region. The timer input rises when a fault current
is detected. The definite timer activates the PICKUP output and the operation timer starts
elapsing. The reset (drop-off) timer starts when the timer input falls, that is, the fault
disappears. When the reset (drop-off) timer elapses, the operation timer is reset. Since this
happens before another pickup occurs, the TRIP output is not activated.

Technical Manual
A070420-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 546: Drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time
When the drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time, as described in Figure
546, the input signal for the definite timer (here: timer input) is active, provided that the
current is above the set Pickup value. The input signal is inactive when the current is below
the set Pickup value and the set hysteresis region. The timer input rises when a fault current
is detected. The definite timer activates the PICKUP output and the operation timer starts
elapsing. The reset (drop-off) timer starts when the timer input falls, that is, the fault
disappears. Another fault situation occurs before the reset (drop-off) timer has elapsed.
This causes the activation of the TRIP output, since the operation timer already has
elapsed.

Technical Manual
A070422-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 547: Operating effect of the BLOCK input when the selected blocking mode is
"Freeze timer"
If the BLOCK input is activated when the operation timer is running, as described in Figure
547, the timer is frozen during the time BLOCK remains active. If the timer input is not
active longer than specified by the Reset delay time setting, the operation timer is reset in
the same way as described in Figure 545, regardless of the BLOCK input.
The selected blocking mode is "Freeze timer".
11.2 Current based inverse definite minimum time

characteristics
11.2.1 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection

In inverse-time modes, the trip time depends on the momentary value of the current: the
higher the current, the faster the trip time. The trip time calculation or integration starts

Technical Manual
immediately when the current exceeds the set Pickup value and the PICKUP output is
activated.
calculating the overcurrent situation exceeds the value set by the inverse-time mode. The
set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values used. The curve scaling
is determined with the Time multiplier setting.
There are two methods to level out the inverse-time characteristic.

• The Minimum trip time setting defines the minimum operating time for the IDMT
curve, that is, the operation time is always at least the Minimum trip time setting.
• Alternatively, the IDMT Sat point is used for giving the leveling-out point as a
multiple of the Pickup value setting. (Global setting: Configuration/System/IDMT
Sat point). The default parameter value is 50. This setting affects only the overcurrent
and ground-fault IDMT timers.
IDMT operation time at currents over 50 x In is not guaranteed.

Technical Manual
GUID-20353F8B-2112-41CB-8F68-B51F8ACA775E V1 EN
Figure 548: Operation time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out with
the Minimum trip time setting is set to 1000 milliseconds (the IDMT Sat
point setting is set to maximum).

Technical Manual
GUID-87A96860-4268-4AD1-ABA1-3227D3BB36D5 V1 EN
Figure 549: Operation time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out with
IDMT Sat point setting value “11” (the Minimum trip time setting is set to
minimum).

Technical Manual
GUID-9BFD6DC5-08B5-4755-A899-DF5ED26E75F6 V1 EN
Figure 550: Example of how the inverse time characteristic is leveled out with
currents over 50 x In and the Setting Pickup value setting “2.5 x In”. (the
IDMT Sat point setting is set to maximum and the Minimum trip time
setting is set to minimum).
The grey zone in Figure 550 shows the behavior of the curve in case the measured current
is outside the guaranteed measuring range. Also, the maximum measured current of 50 x
In gives the leveling-out point 50/2.5 = 20 x I/I>.

Technical Manual
11.2.1.1 Standard inverse-time characteristics
For inverse-time operation, both IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time

characteristics are supported.
The trip times for the ANSI and IEC IDMT curves are defined with the coefficients A, B
and C.
The values of the coefficients can be calculated according to the formula:
 
 
A
t[ s ] =  + B⋅k
 c 
  I  − 1 
 I> 
  
t[s] t[s] = Trip time in seconds

I measured current
I> set Pickup value
k set Time multiplier
Table 943: Curve parameters for ANSI and IEC IDMT curves
Curve name A B C
(1) ANSI Extremely 28.2 0.1217 2.0
Inverse
(2) ANSI Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.0
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse 0.0086 0.0185 0.02
(4) ANSI Moderately 0.0515 0.1140 0.02
Inverse
(6) Long Time Extremely 64.07 0.250 2.0
Inverse
(7) Long Time Very 28.55 0.712 2.0
Inverse
(8) Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.185 0.02
(9) IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.0 0.02
(10) IEC Very Inverse 13.5 0.0 1.0
(11) IEC Inverse 0.14 0.0 0.02

Technical Manual
Curve name A B C
(12) IEC Extremely 80.0 0.0 2.0
Inverse
(13) IEC Short Time 0.05 0.0 0.04
Inverse
(14) IEC Long Time 120 0.0 1.0
Inverse

Technical Manual
A070750 V2 EN
Figure 551: ANSI extremely inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070751 V2 EN
Figure 552: ANSI very inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070752 V2 EN
Figure 553: ANSI normal inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070753 V2 EN
Figure 554: ANSI moderately inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070817 V2 EN
Figure 555: ANSI long-time extremely inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070818 V2 EN
Figure 556: ANSI long-time very inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070819 V2 EN
Figure 557: ANSI long-time inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070820 V2 EN
Figure 558: IEC normal inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070821 V2 EN
Figure 559: IEC very inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070822 V2 EN
Figure 560: IEC inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070823 V2 EN
Figure 561: IEC extremely inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070824 V2 EN
Figure 562: IEC short-time inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070825 V2 EN
Figure 563: IEC long-time inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
11.2.1.2 User-programmable inverse-time characteristics
The user can define curves by entering parameters into the following standard formula:
 
 
A
t [s ] =  + B ⋅k
  I c 
  −E 
I > 
t[s] Trip time (in seconds)

A set Curve parameter A
B set Curve parameter B
C set Curve parameter C
E set Curve parameter E
I Measured current
I> set Pickup value
11.2.1.3 RI and RD-type inverse-time characteristics
The RI-type simulates the behavior of electromechanical relays. The RD-type is a ground-
fault specific characteristic.
The RI-type is calculated using the formula
 
 k 
t[ s ] =  
 0.339 − 0.236 × I > 
 I 
The RD-type is calculated using the formula
 I 
t[ s ] = 5.8 − 1.35 × In  
k×I >

Technical Manual
t[s] Trip time (in seconds)

I Measured current
I> set Pickup value

Technical Manual
A070826 V2 EN
Figure 564: RI-type inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070827 V2 EN
Figure 565: RD-type inverse-time characteristics

Technical Manual
11.2.2 Reset in inverse-time modes

The user can select the reset characteristics by using the Type of reset curve setting.
Table 944: Values for reset mode
Setting name Possible values
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Immediate reset
If the Type of reset curve setting in a drop-off case is selected as "Immediate", the inverse
timer resets immediately.
Definite time reset

The definite type of reset in the inverse-time mode can be achieved by setting the Type of
reset curve parameter to “Def time reset”. As a result, the trip inverse-time counter is
frozen for the time determined with the Reset delay time setting after the current drops
below the set Pickup value, including hysteresis.The integral sum of the inverse-time
counter is reset, if another pickup does not occur during the reset delay.
If the Type of reset curve setting is selected as “Def time reset”, the current
level has no influence on the reset characteristic.
Inverse reset
Inverse reset curves are available only for ANSI and user-programmable
curves. If you use other curve types, immediate reset occurs.
Standard delayed inverse reset
The reset characteristic required in ANSI (IEEE) inverse-time modes is provided by

setting the Type of reset curve parameter to “Inverse reset”. In this mode, the time delay
for reset is given with the following formula using the coefficient D, which has its values
defined in the table below.
 
 
D
t[ s ] =  ⋅k
 2 
  I  − 1 
 I> 
  

Technical Manual
t[s] Reset time (in seconds)

I Measured current
I> set Pickup value
Table 945: Coefficients for ANSI delayed inverse reset curves

Curve name D
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse 29.1
(2) ANSI Very Inverse 21.6
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse 0.46
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse 4.85
(6) Long Time Extremely Inverse 30
(7) Long Time Very Inverse 13.46
(8) Long Time Inverse 4.6

Technical Manual
A070828 V1 EN
Figure 566: ANSI extremely inverse reset time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070829 V1 EN
Figure 567: ANSI very inverse reset time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070830 V1 EN
Figure 568: ANSI normal inverse reset time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070831 V1 EN
Figure 569: ANSI moderately inverse reset time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070832 V1 EN
Figure 570: ANSI long-time extremely inverse reset time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070833 V1 EN
Figure 571: ANSI long-time very inverse reset time characteristics

Technical Manual
A070834 V1 EN
Figure 572: ANSI long-time inverse reset time characteristics

Technical Manual
The delayed inverse-time reset is not available for IEC-type inverse time
curves.
User-programmable delayed inverse reset
The user can define the delayed inverse reset time characteristics with the following
formula using the set Curve parameter D.
 
 
 D ⋅k
t[ s ] =
 2 
  I  − 1 
 I> 
  
t[s] Reset time (in seconds)

D set Curve parameter D
I Measured current
I> set Pickup value
11.2.3 Inverse-timer freezing

When the BLOCK input is active, the internal value of the time counter is frozen at the
value of the moment just before the freezing. Freezing of the counter value is chosen when
the user does not wish the counter value to count upwards or to be reset. This may be the
case, for example, when the inverse-time function of a protection relay needs to be
blocked to enable the definite-time operation of another protection relay for selectivity
reasons, especially if different relaying techniques (old and modern relays) are applied.
The selected blocking mode is "Freeze timer".
The activation of the BLOCK input also lengthens the minimum delay
value of the timer.

Technical Manual
Activating the BLOCK input alone does not affect the operation of the PICKUP output. It
still becomes active when the current exceeds the set Pickup value, and inactive when the
current falls below the set Pickup value and the set Reset delay time has expired.
11.3 Voltage based inverse definite minimum time

characteristics
11.3.1 IDMT curves for overvoltage protection

In inverse-time modes, the trip time depends on the momentary value of the voltage, the
higher the voltage, the faster the trip time. The trip time calculation or integration starts
immediately when the voltage exceeds the set value of the Pickup value setting and the
calculating the overvoltage situation exceeds the value set by the inverse time mode. The
set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values used. The user
determines the curve scaling with the Time multiplier setting.
The Minimum trip time setting defines the minimum trip time for the IDMT mode, that is,
it is possible to limit the IDMT based trip time for not becoming too short. For example:

Technical Manual
GUID-BCFE3F56-BFA8-4BCC-8215-30C089C80EAD-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 573: Trip time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum trip time set
to 0.5 second

Technical Manual
GUID-90BAEB05-E8FB-4F8A-8F07-E110DD63FCCF-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 574: Trip time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum trip time set
to 1 second

Technical Manual
11.3.1.1 Standard inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage protection
The trip times for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves are defined with the coefficients
A, B, C, D and E.
The inverse trip time can be calculated with the formula:

k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
 V −V > 
B× −C
 V> 
GUID-6E9DC0FE-7457-4317-9480-8CCC6D63AB35-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 179)
t [s] trip time in seconds

V measured voltage
V> the set value of Pickup value
k the set value of Time multiplier
Table 946: Curve coefficients for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves
Curve name A B C D E
(17) Inverse Curve A 1 1 0 0 1
(18) Inverse Curve B 480 32 0.5 0.035 2
(19) Inverse Curve C 480 32 0.5 0.035 3

Technical Manual
GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 575: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

Technical Manual
GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 576: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

Technical Manual
GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 577: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

Technical Manual
11.3.1.2 User programmable inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage

protection
The user can define the curves by entering the parameters using the standard formula:
k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
 V −V > 
B× −C
 V > 
GUID-6E9DC0FE-7457-4317-9480-8CCC6D63AB35-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 180)
t[s] trip time in seconds

A the set value of Curve parameter A
B the set value of Curve parameter B
C the set value of Curve parameter C
D the set value of Curve parameter D
E the set value of Curve parameter E
V measured voltage
V> the set value of Pickup value
11.3.1.3 IDMT curve saturation of overvoltage protection
For the overvoltage IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the trip time does not start
until the voltage exceeds the value of Pickup value. To cope with discontinuity
characteristics of the curve, a specific parameter for saturating the equation to a fixed
value is created. The Curve Sat Relative setting is the parameter and it is given in percents
compared to Pickup value. For example, due to the curve equation B and C, the
characteristics equation output is saturated in such a way that when the input voltages are
in the range of Pickup value to Curve Sat Relative in percent over Pickup value, the
equation uses Pickup value * (1.0 + Curve Sat Relative / 100 ) for the measured voltage.
Although, the curve A has no discontinuities when the ratio V/V> exceeds the unity,
Curve Sat Relative is also set for it. The Curve Sat Relative setting for curves A, B and C
is 2.0 percent. However, it should be noted that the user must carefully calculate the curve
characteristics concerning the discontinuities in the curve when the programmable curve
equation is used. Thus, the Curve Sat Relative parameter gives another degree of freedom
to move the inverse curve on the voltage ratio axis and it effectively sets the maximum trip
time for the IDMT curve because for the voltage ratio values affecting by this setting, the
operation time is fixed, that is, the definite time, depending on the parameters but no
longer the voltage.

Technical Manual
11.3.2 IDMT curves for undervoltage protection

In the inverse-time modes, the trip time depends on the momentary value of the voltage,
the lower the voltage, the faster the trip time. The trip time calculation or integration starts
immediately when the voltage goes below the set value of the Pickup value setting and the
calculating the undervoltage situation exceeds the value set by the inverse-time mode. The
set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values used. The user
determines the curve scaling with the Time multiplier setting.
The Minimum trip time setting defines the minimum trip time possible for the IDMT
mode. For setting a value for this parameter, the user should carefully study the particular
IDMT curve.
11.3.2.1 Standard inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage protection
The trip times for the standard undervoltage IDMT curves are defined with the
coefficients A, B, C, D and E.
The inverse trip time can be calculated with the formula:

k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
   V < -V 
B × V < −C 
 
GUID-4A433D56-D7FB-412E-B1AB-7FD43051EE79-ANSI V2 EN (Equation 181)
t [s] trip time in seconds

V measured voltage
V< the set value of the Pickup value setting
k the set value of the Time multiplier setting
Table 947: Curve coefficients for standard undervoltage IDMT curves

Curve name A B C D E
(21) Inverse 1 1 0 0 1
Curve A
(22) Inverse 480 32 0.5 0.055 2
Curve B

Technical Manual
GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 578: : Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

Technical Manual
GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 579: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

Technical Manual
11.3.2.2 User-programmable inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage

protection
The user can define curves by entering parameters into the standard formula:
k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
   V < -V 
B × V < −C 
 
GUID-4A433D56-D7FB-412E-B1AB-7FD43051EE79-ANSI V2 EN (Equation 182)
t[s] trip time in seconds

A the set value of Curve parameter A
B the set value of Curve parameter B
C the set value of Curve parameter C
D the set value of Curve parameter D
E the set value of Curve parameter E
V measured voltage
V< the set value of Pickup value
11.3.2.3 IDMT curve saturation of undervoltage protection
For the undervoltage IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the trip time does not
start until the voltage falls below the value of Pickup value. To cope with discontinuity
characteristics of the curve, a specific parameter for saturating the equation to a fixed
value is created. The Curve Sat Relative setting is the parameter and it is given in percents
compared with Pickup value. For example, due to the curve equation B, the characteristics
equation output is saturated in such a way that when input voltages are in the range from
Pickup value to Curve Sat Relative in percents under Pickup value, the equation uses
Pickup value * (1.0 - Curve Sat Relative / 100 ) for the measured voltage. Although, the
curve A has no discontinuities when the ratio V/V> exceeds the unity, Curve Sat Relative
is set for it as well. The Curve Sat Relative setting for curves A, B and C is 2.0 percent.
However, it should be noted that the user must carefully calculate the curve characteristics
concerning also discontinuities in the curve when the programmable curve equation is
used. Thus, the Curve Sat Relative parameter gives another degree of freedom to move the
inverse curve on the voltage ratio axis and it effectively sets the maximum trip time for the
IDMT curve because for the voltage ratio values affecting by this setting, the operation
time is fixed, that is, the definite time, depending on the parameters but no longer the
voltage.

Technical Manual
11.4 Frequency measurement and protection
All the function blocks that use frequency quantity as their input signal share the common
features related to the frequency measurement algorithm. The frequency estimation is
done from one phase (phase-to-phase or phase voltage) or from the positive phase
sequence (PPS). The voltage groups with three-phase inputs use PPS as the source. The
frequency measurement range is 0.6...1.5 × Fn. (For REG615 the range is 0.2...1.4 × Fn
when Frequency adaptivity is enabled.) The df/dt measurement range always starts from
0.6 × Fn. When the frequency exceeds these limits, it is regarded as out of range and a
minimum or maximum value is held as the measured value respectively with appropriate
quality information. The frequency estimation requires 160 ms to stabilize after a bad
quality signal. Therefore, a delay of 160 ms is added to the transition from the bad quality.
The bad quality of the signal can be due to restrictions like:
• The source voltage is below 0.02 × Vn at fn.
• The source voltage waveform is discontinuous.
• The source voltage frequency rate of change exceeds 15 Hz/s (including stepwise
frequency changes).
When the bad signal quality is obtained, the nominal or zero (depending on the Def
frequency Sel setting) frequency value is shown with appropriate quality information in
the measurement view. The frequency protection functions are blocked when the quality
is bad, thus the timers and the function outputs are reset. When the frequency is out of the
function block’s setting range but within the measurement range, the protection blocks are
running. However, the TRIP outputs are blocked until the frequency restores to a valid
range.
11.5 Frequency adaptivity and generator start-up protection
Frequency adaptivity enables sensitive and selective protection during the start-up and
shutdown phase of the generator when low frequency and low voltage amplitude exist at
the same time. Sensitive protection is necessary because, for example, the fault current
level in generator internal fault during start-up or shutdown (when field excitation is not
present) may not exceed even the nominal current level. Frequency adaptivity, available
only in REG615, can be enabled by setting Frequency adaptivity. When selected, the
operation range of the relay measurements is extended to 0.2...1.5 xFn (10...75 Hz when
Rated frequency = 50 Hz or 12...90 Hz when Rated frequency = 60 Hz).
The frequency adaptivity uses the positive-sequence voltage in the frequency tracking and
adapts the DFT, RMS, peak-to-peak and peak measurement accuracies of the current and
voltage inputs by using the tracked frequency in the operation range of 0.2...1.5 xFn.

Technical Manual
Frequency adaptation starts when the generator terminal positive-sequence voltage level
exceeds 0.04 xUn (minimum level). As the Synchronism and energizing check (25) bus
voltage U12b voltage input always expects Rated frequency, the frequency adaptivity
does not apply for this input.
If the generator terminal positive-sequence voltage is below the minimum level, the relay
is not able to maintain frequency adaptation. The non-adaptive situation is indicated by
function PROTECTION output FRQ_ADP_FAIL. The tracked frequency is retained for
3 seconds until the FRQ_ADP_FAIL output is activated and Rated frequency is expected.
The FRQ_ADP_FAIL output can be utilized in the application configuration, if
necessary.
The operation accuracy of the protection functions in the range of 0.2...1.5 xFn can be
assumed to be according to the technical data given separately for each function. Operate
time accuracy and reset times given in technical data are only valid in the frequency range
specified for each function. Typical operate time examples at low frequencies are given in
Table.
Table 948: Protection operate time examples at low frequency
Function Characteristic Value1)
51P, 50P Trip delay time = 40 ms
IFault = 1.1 × set Pickup value, 10 Hz
Measurement mode = “RMS” or “DFT” Typically 130 ms

Measurement mode = “Peak-to-Peak” Typically 110 ms
Trip delay time = 40 ms
Measurement mode = “DFT” Typically 85 ms

Trip delay time = 40 ms
Measurement mode = “DFT” Typically 70 ms

50P-3 Trip delay time = 20 ms
Measurement mode = “P-to-P+backup”
IFault = 1.1 × set Pickup value, 10 Hz Typically 45...100 ms
IFault = 2.0 × set Pickup value, 10 Hz Typically 20...40 ms
67/51N, 67/50N Trip delay time = 50 ms

IFault = 2.0 × set Pickup value, 10 Hz Typically 110 ms
Measurement mode = “DFT”
50N, 50G Trip delay time = 40 ms
IFault = 2.0 × set Pickup value, 10 Hz Typically 100 ms
Measurement mode = “DFT”

Technical Manual
Function Characteristic Value1)

87G Biased low stage
IFault = 1.5 × set Low trip value, 10 Hz Typically 90...120 ms

IFault = 1.5 × set High trip value, 10 Hz Typically 70...95 ms
27/59THN Trip delay time = 20 ms

UFault = 1.1 × 3. harmonic bias voltage, 10 Hz Typically 55 ms
UFault = 1.1 × 3. harmonic bias voltage, 20 Hz Typically 40 ms
59N, 59G Trip delay time = 40 ms

UFault = 1.1 × set Pickup value, 10 Hz Typically 135 ms
59 Trip delay time = 40 ms

UFault = 2.0 × set Pickup value, 10Hz Typically 65 ms
24 Trip delay time = 200 ms

Voltage change, 11 Hz Typically 240 ms
1) Voltages present before the fault condition. Includes the delay of the output contact
Frequency adaptivity depends on the availability of voltages. The generator start-up

protection can be also extended by using wide peak-to-peak measurement mode
(operational from 2 Hz upward) with designated start-up overcurrent protection function
(51P). Before the generator is connected with the rest of the network by closing the circuit
breaker, the designated start-up overcurrent function should be either blocked or its start
value increased, as the Pickup value setting is typically lower than the nominal current.
11.6 Measurement modes
In many current or voltage dependent function blocks, there are various alternative
measuring principles.
• RMS
• DFT which is a numerically calculated fundamental component of the signal
• Peak-to-peak
• Peak-to-peak with peak backup
Consequently, the measurement mode can be selected according to the application.
In extreme cases, for example with high overcurrent or harmonic content, the
measurement modes function in a slightly different way. The operation accuracy is
defined with the frequency range of f/fn=0.95...1.05. In peak-to-peak and RMS

Technical Manual
measurement modes, the harmonics of the phase currents are not suppressed, whereas in
the fundamental frequency measurement the suppression of harmonics is at least -50 dB
at the frequency range of f= n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
RMS
The RMS measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode setting using the
value "RMS". RMS consists of both AC and DC components. The AC component is the
effective mean value of the positive and negative peak values. RMS is used in applications
where the effect of the DC component must be taken into account.
RMS is calculated according to the formula:
1 n 2
I RMS = ∑ Ii
n i =1
n The number of samples in a calculation cycle

Ii The current sample value
DFT
The DFT measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode setting using the
value "DFT". In the DFT mode, the fundamental frequency component of the measured
signal is numerically calculated from the samples. In some applications, for example, it
can be difficult to accomplish sufficiently sensitive settings and accurate operation of the
low stage, which may be due to a considerable amount of harmonics on the primary side
currents. In such a case, the operation can be based solely on the fundamental frequency
component of the current. In addition, the DFT mode has slightly higher CT requirements
than the peak-to-peak mode, if used with high and instantaneous stages.
Peak-to-peak
The peak-to-peak measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode setting
using the value "Peak-to-Peak". It is the fastest measurement mode, in which the
measurement quantity is made by calculating the average from the positive and negative
peak values. The DC component is not included. The retardation time is short. The
damping of the harmonics is quite low and practically determined by the characteristics of
the anti-aliasing filter of the protection relay inputs. Consequently, this mode is usually
used in conjunction with high and instantaneous stages, where the suppression of
harmonics is not so important. In addition, the peak-to-peak mode allows considerable CT
saturation without impairing the performance of the operation.

Technical Manual
Peak-to-peak with peak backup

The peak-to-peak with peak backup measurement principle is selected with the
Measurement mode setting using the value "P-to-P+backup". It is similar to the peak-to-
peak mode, with the exception that it has been enhanced with the peak backup. In the peak-
to-peak with peak backup mode, the function starts with two conditions: the peak-to-peak
value is above the set pickup current or the peak value is above two times the set Pickup
value. The peak backup is enabled only when the function is used in the DT mode in high
and instantaneous stages for faster operation.
Wide peak-to-peak
The wide peak-to-peak measurement mode is available only in the three-phase
overcurrent protection function 51P in REG615 standard configurations C and D. The
wide peak-to-peak measurement principle is available in products where it is necessary
for overcurrent protection to operate already starting from as low frequency as 2 Hz during
the generator start-up or shutdown phase. The wide peak-to-peak measurement principle
is selected with the Measurement mode setting "Wide P-to-P".
The measurement mode calculates the average from the positive and negative peak values
over the 500 ms wide measurement window, independently of the Frequency adaptivity
setting value. Retardation and reset times are longer due to the length of the measurement
window. The frequency of the fault current affects the operate time. The damping of the
harmonics is quite low and practically determined by the characteristics of the anti-
aliasing filter of the protection relay current inputs.
When using measurement mode “Wide P-to-P”, the protection relay

accepts only Trip delay time setting value 800 ms or longer and Operating
curve type 5=”ANSI Def. Time” or 15=”IEC Def. Time”.
Operation accuracy in the frequency range 2...85 Hz is ±1.5% or ±0.003 × In. Operate time
accuracy in definite time mode is ±1.0% of the set value or ±60 ms when IFault = 2 × set
Pickup value and the fault current frequency is 10...85 Hz.
11.7 Calculated measurements
Calculated residual current and voltage

The residual current is calculated from the phase currents according to equation:
Io = −( I A + I B + I C )
GUID-B9280304-8AC0-40A5-8140-2F00C1F36A9E V1 EN (Equation 184)

Technical Manual
The residual voltage is calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages when the VT
connection is selected as “Wye” with the equation:
Vo = (V A + V B + V C )
GUID-4E68CD47-9DBB-4DAD-A092-BD69DA5863F3 V1 EN (Equation 185)
Sequence components
The phase-sequence current components are calculated from the phase currents according
to:
I 0 = (I A + I B + I C ) / 3
GUID-2319C34C-8CC3-400C-8409-7E68ACA4F435 V2 EN (Equation 186)
I1 = (I A + a ⋅ I B + a2 ⋅ I C ) / 3
GUID-02E717A9-A58F-41B3-8813-EB8CDB78CBF1 V2 EN (Equation 187)
I 2 = (I A + a2 ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C ) / 3
GUID-80F92D60-0425-4F1F-9B18-DB2DEF4C2407 V2 EN (Equation 188)
The phase-sequence voltage components are calculated from the phase-to-ground

voltages when VT connection is selected as “Wye” with the formulae:
V 0 = (V A + V B + V C ) / 3
GUID-49CFB460-5B74-43A6-A72C-AAD3AF795716-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 189)
V 1 = (V A + a ⋅ V B + a 2 ⋅ V C ) / 3
GUID-7A6B6AAD-8DDC-4663-A72F-A3715BF3E56A-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 190)
V 2 = (V A + a 2 ⋅ V B + a ⋅ V C ) / 3
GUID-6FAAFCC1-AF25-4A0A-8D9B-FC2FD0BCFB21-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 191)
When VT connection is selected as “Delta”, the positive and negative phase sequence
voltage components are calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages according to the
equations:
V 1 = (V AB − a 2 ⋅ V BC ) / 3
GUID-70796339-C68A-4D4B-8C10-A966BD7F090C-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 192)
V 2 = (V AB − a ⋅ V BC ) / 3
GUID-C132C6CA-B5F9-4DC1-94AF-FF22D2F0F12A-ANSI V1 EN (Equation 193)
The phase-to-ground voltages are calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages when VT
connection is selected as "Delta" according to the equations.
(
V A = V 0 + V AB − V CA / 3 )
GUID-1677DA47-81F3-4997-8D4D-5C955198C966 V1 EN (Equation 194)

Technical Manual
(
V B = V 0 + V BC − V AB / 3 )
GUID-BC8718B1-E189-4082-8F62-F46FF3215FDA V1 EN (Equation 195)
(
V C = V 0 + V CA − V BC / 3 )
GUID-B4606B19-7510-461E-8A6B-9BFDF6F670DB V1 EN (Equation 196)
If the Vo channel is not valid, it is assumed to be zero.
The phase-to-phase voltages are calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages when VT
connection is selected as "Wye" according to the equations.
V AB = V A − V B
GUID-A2287CBF-D979-44CD-91ED-8CEBD120F1D8 V1 EN (Equation 197)
V BC = V B − V C
GUID-752436ED-0955-4C59-80C8-22DACEDE65D7 V1 EN (Equation 198)
V CA = V C − V A
GUID-4AE4B43A-B0A7-41DE-9C84-55527D9F6D78 V1 EN (Equation 199)

Technical Manual
1130
Requirements for measurement transformers
Section 12 Requirements for measurement

transformers
12.1 Current transformers
12.1.1 Current transformer requirements for overcurrent protection

For reliable and correct operation of the overcurrent protection, the CT has to be chosen
carefully. The distortion of the secondary current of a saturated CT may endanger the
operation, selectivity, and co-ordination of protection. However, when the CT is correctly
selected, a fast and reliable short circuit protection can be enabled.
The selection of a CT depends not only on the CT specifications but also on the network
fault current magnitude, desired protection objectives, and the actual CT burden. The
protection settings of the protection relay should be defined in accordance with the CT
performance as well as other factors.
12.1.1.1 Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit factor
The rated accuracy limit factor (Fn) is the ratio of the rated accuracy limit primary current
to the rated primary current. For example, a protective current transformer of type 5P10
has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10. For protective current
transformers, the accuracy class is designed by the highest permissible percentage
composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current prescribed for the accuracy
class concerned, followed by the letter "P" (meaning protection).
Table 949: Limits of errors according to IEC 60044-1 for protective current transformers
Accuracy class Current error at Phase displacement at rated primary Composite error at
rated primary current rated accuracy limit
current (%) minutes centiradians primary current (%)
5P ±1 ±60 ±1.8 5
10P ±3 - - 10
The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrent
protection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also if there are
accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering, power metering, and
so on) of the protection relay.

Technical Manual
The CT accuracy primary limit current describes the highest fault current magnitude at
which the CT fulfils the specified accuracy. Beyond this level, the secondary current of the
CT is distorted and it might have severe effects on the performance of the protection relay.
In practise, the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) differs from the rated accuracy limit factor
(Fn) and is proportional to the ratio of the rated CT burden and the actual CT burden.
The actual accuracy limit factor is calculated using the formula:
Sin + Sn
Fa ≈ Fn ×
Sin + S
A071141 V1 EN
Fn the accuracy limit factor with the nominal external burden Sn
Sin the internal secondary burden of the CT
S the actual external burden
12.1.1.2 Non-directional overcurrent protection
The current transformer selection

Non-directional overcurrent protection does not set high requirements on the accuracy
class or on the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) of the CTs. It is, however, recommended
to select a CT with Fa of at least 20.
The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermal and
dynamic strength of the current measuring input of the protection relay is not exceeded.
This is always fulfilled when
I1n > Ikmax / 100,
Ikmax is the highest fault current.
The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of the
protection relay. For that reason, in practice, even a few times smaller nominal primary
current can be used than given by the formula.
Recommended pickup current settings

If Ikmin is the lowest primary current at which the highest set overcurrent stage is to trip,
the pickup current should be set using the formula:
Current pickup value < 0.7 × (Ikmin / I1n)

Technical Manual
I1n is the nominal primary current of the CT.
The factor 0.7 takes into account the protection relay inaccuracy, current transformer
errors, and imperfections of the short circuit calculations.
The adequate performance of the CT should be checked when the setting of the high set
stage overcurrent protection is defined. The trip time delay caused by the CT saturation is
typically small enough when the overcurrent setting is noticeably lower than Fa.
When defining the setting values for the low set stages, the saturation of the CT does not
need to be taken into account and the pickup current setting is simply according to the
formula.
Delay in operation caused by saturation of current transformers

The saturation of CT may cause a delayed protection relay operation. To ensure the time
selectivity, the delay must be taken into account when setting the trip times of successive
protection relays.
With definite time mode of operation, the saturation of CT may cause a delay that is as
long as the time constant of the DC component of the fault current, when the current is only
slightly higher than the pickup current. This depends on the accuracy limit factor of the
CT, on the remanence flux of the core of the CT, and on the trip time setting.
With inverse time mode of operation, the delay should always be considered as being as
long as the time constant of the DC component.
With inverse time mode of operation and when the high-set stages are not used, the AC
component of the fault current should not saturate the CT less than 20 times the pickup
current. Otherwise, the inverse operation time can be further prolonged. Therefore, the
accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula:
Fa > 20 × Current pickup value / I1n
The Current pickup value is the primary pickup current setting of the protection relay.
12.1.1.3 Example for non-directional overcurrent protection
The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection is
implemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection.

Technical Manual
A071142-ANSI V2 EN
Figure 580: Example of three-stage overcurrent protection
The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phase short
circuit current is 22.8 kA. The actual accuracy limit factor of the CT is calculated to be 59.
The pickup current setting for low-set stage (51P) is selected to be about twice the nominal
current of the cable. The trip time is selected so that it is selective with the next protection
relay (not visible in Figure 580). The settings for the high-set stage and instantaneous
stage are defined also so that grading is ensured with the downstream protection. In
addition, the pickup current settings have to be defined so that the protection relay
operates with the minimum fault current and it does not trip with the maximum load
current. The settings for all three stages are as in Figure 580.
For the application point of view, the suitable setting for instantaneous stage (50P-3) in
this example is 3 500 A (5.83 × I2n). I2n is the 1.2 multiple with nominal primary current
of the CT. For the CT characteristics point of view, the criteria given by the current
transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the protection relay setting is
considerably below the Fa. In this application, the CT rated burden could have been
selected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons.
12.1.2 Current transformer requirements for transformer differential

protection
The more important the object to be protected, the more attention has to be paid to the
current transformers. It is not normally possible to dimension the current transformer so
that they repeat the currents with high DC components without saturating when the
residual flux of the current transformer is high. 87T operates reliably even though the
current transformers are partially saturated.

Technical Manual
The accuracy class recommended for current transformers to be used with 87T is 5P, in
which the limit of the current error at the rated primary current is 1 percent and the limit
of the phase displacement is 60 minutes. The limit of the composite error at the rated
accuracy limit primary current is 5 percent.
The approximate value of the accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to the actual current
transformer burden can be calculated on the basis of the rated accuracy limit factor Fn at
the rated burden, the rated burden Sn, the internal burden Sinand the actual burden Sa of the
current transformer.
Sin + Sn
Fa = Fn ×
Sin + Sa
GUID-26DEE538-9E1A-49A2-9C97-F69BD44591C9 V2 EN (Equation 200)
Fa The approximate value of the accuracy limit factor (ALF) corresponding to the actual CT burden
Fn The rated accuracy limit factor at the rated burden of the current transformer
Sn The rated burden of the current transformer
Sin The internal burden of the current transformer
Sa The actual burden of the current transformer
Example 1
The rated burden Sn of the current transformer 5P20 is 10 VA, the secondary rated current
is 5A, the internal resistance Rin= 0.07 Ω and the accuracy limit factor Fn corresponding
to the rated burden is 20 (5P20). Thus the internal burden of the current transformer is
Sin= (5A)2 * 0.07 Ω = 1.75 VA. The input impedance of the protection relay at a rated
current of 5A is < 20 mΩ. If the measurement conductors have a resistance of 0.113 Ω, the
actual burden of the current transformer is Sa=(5A)2 * (0.113 + 0.020) Ω = 3.33 VA. Thus
the accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to the actual burden is approximately 46.
The CT burden can grow considerably at the rated current 5A. The actual burden of the
current transformer decreases at the rated current of 1A while the repeatability
simultaneously improves.
At faults occurring in the protected area, the currents may be very high compared to the
rated currents of the current transformers. Due to the instantaneous stage of the differential
function block, it is sufficient that the current transformers are capable of repeating the
current required for instantaneous tripping during the first cycle.
Thus the current transformers usually are able to reproduce the asymmetric fault current
without saturating within the next 10 ms after the occurrence of the fault to secure that the
trip times of the protection relay comply with the retardation time.

Technical Manual
transformer to be used in differential protection fulfill the requirement.
Fa > K r × Ikmax × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e−Tm /Tdc ) + 1)

GUID-DA861DAD-C40E-4A82-8973-BBAFD15279C0 V1 EN (Equation 201)
Ikmax The maximum through-going fault current (in IR) at which the protection is not allowed to trip
Tdc The primary DC time constant related to Ikmax
ω The angular frequency, that is, 2*π*fn

Tm The time-to-saturate, that is, the duration of the saturation free transformation
Kr The remanence factor 1/(1-r), where r is the maximum remanence flux in p.u. from saturation flux
transformer is used in differential protection.
The parameter r is the maximum remanence flux density in the CT core in p.u. from
saturation flux density. The value of the parameter r depends on the magnetic material
used and on the construction of the CT. For instance, if the value of r = 0.4, the remanence
flux density can be 40 percent of the saturation flux density. The manufacturer of the CT
has to be contacted when an accurate value for the parameter r is needed. The value r = 0.4
is recommended to be used when an accurate value is not available.
The required minimum time-to-saturate Tm in 87T is half fundamental cycle period (10 ms
when fn = 50Hz).
Two typical cases are considered for the determination of the sufficient accuracy limit
factor (Fa):
1. A fault occurring at the substation bus:

The protection must be stable at a fault arising during a normal operating situation.
Re-energizing the transformer against a bus fault leads to very high fault currents and
thermal stress and therefore re-energizing is not preferred in this case. Thus, the
remanence can be neglected.
The maximum through-going fault current Ikmax is typically 10 Ir for a substation
main transformer. At a short circuit fault close to the supply transformer, the DC time
constant (Tdc) of the fault current is almost the same as that of the transformer, the
typical value being 100 ms.
Ikmax 10 Ir
Tdc 100 ms
ω 100π Hz
Tm 10 ms

Technical Manual
Kr 1
When the values are substituted in Equation 201, the result is:
Fa > K r × Ikmax × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e−Tm / Tdc ) + 1) ≈ 40

GUID-7F1019C5-C819-440B-871B-5CFD1AF88956 V1 EN
2. Re-energizing against a fault occurring further down in the network:

The protection must be stable also during re-energization against a fault on the line.
In this case, the existence of remanence is very probable. It is assumed to be 40
percent here.
On the other hand, the fault current is now smaller and since the ratio of the resistance
and reactance is greater in this location, having a full DC offset is not possible.
Furthermore, the DC time constant (Tdc) of the fault current is now smaller, assumed
to be 50 ms here.
Assuming a maximum fault current being 30 percent lower than in the bus fault and
a DC offset 90 percent of the maximum.
Ikmax 0.7* 10 = 7 (Ir)
Tdc 50 ms
ω 100π Hz
Tm 10 ms
Kr 1/(1-0.4) = 1.6667
When the values are substituted in the equation, the result is:
Fa > K r × Ikmax × 0.9 × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e−Tm / Tdc ) + 1) ≈ 40

GUID-9B859B2D-AC40-4278-8A99-3475442D7C67 V1 EN
If the actual burden of the current transformer (Sa) in Equation 200 cannot be reduced
low enough to provide a sufficient value for Fa, there are two alternatives to deal with
the situation:
• a CT with a higher rated burden Sn can be chosen (which also means a higher
rated accuracy limit Fn)
• a CT with a higher nominal primary current I1n (but the same rated burden) can
be chosen

Technical Manual
Example 2
Assuming that the actions according to alternative two above are taken in order to improve
the actual accuracy limit factor:
IrCT
Fa = × Fn
IrTR
GUID-31A3C436-4E17-40AE-A4EA-D2BD6B72034E V2 EN (Equation 202)
IrTR 1000 A (rated secondary side current of the power transformer)

IrCT 1500 A (rated primary current of the CT on the transformer secondary side)
Fn 30 (rated accuracy limit factor of the CT)
Fa (IrCT / IrTR) * Fn (actual accuracy limit factor due to oversizing the CT) = (1500/1000) * 30 = 45
In 87T, it is important that the accuracy limit factors Fa of the phase current transformers
at both sides correspond with each other, that is, the burdens of the current transformers
on both sides are to be as equal as possible. If high inrush or pickup currents with high DC
components pass through the protected object when it is connected to the network, special
attention is required for the performance and the burdens of the current transformers and
for the settings of the function block.

Technical Manual
Protection relay's physical connections
Section 13 Protection relay's physical connections
13.1 Module slot numbering

Technical Manual
1 2 3 4 5
GUID-D05F958D-8AD5-4EBB-808E-B0F9DBA68E05 V2 EN
Figure 581: Module slot numbering
1 X000
2 X100
3 X110
4 X120
5 X130

Technical Manual
13.2 Protective ground connections
A070772-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 582: The protective ground screw is located between connectors X100 and
X110
The ground lead must be at least a 12 Gauge wire and as short as possible.
13.3 Binary and analog connections
All binary and analog connections are described in the product specific
application manuals.

Technical Manual
13.4 Communication connections
The front communication connection is an RJ-45 type connector used mainly for
configuration and setting.
For RED615, the rear communication module is mandatory due to the connection needed
for the line-differential protection communication. If station communication is needed for
REF615, REG615, REM615 or RET615, an optional rear communication module is
required. Several optional communication connections are available.
• Galvanic RJ-45 Ethernet connection

• Optical LC Ethernet connection
• ST-type glass fiber serial connection
• EIA-485 serial connection
• EIA-232 serial connection
Never touch the end face of an optical fiber connector.
Always install dust caps on unplugged fiber connectors.
If contaminated, clean optical connectors only with fiber-optic cleaning

products.
13.4.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection

The protection relay is provided with an RJ-45 connector on the LHMI. The connector is
intended for configuration and setting purposes. The interface on the PC side has to be
configured in a way that it obtains the IP address automatically. There is a DHCP server
inside protection relay for the front interface only.
The events and setting values and all input data such as memorized values and disturbance
records can be read via the front communication port.
Only one of the possible clients can be used for parametrization at a time.

Technical Manual
• PCM600
• LHMI
• WHMI
The default IP address of the protection relay through this port is 192.168.0.254.
The front port supports TCP/IP protocol. A standard Ethernet CAT 5 crossover cable is
used with the front port.
The speed of the front connector interface is limited to 10 Mbps.
13.4.2 Ethernet rear connections

The Ethernet station bus communication module is provided with either galvanic RJ-45
connection or optical multimode LC type connection, depending on the product variant
and the selected communication interface option. A shielded twisted-pair cable CAT 5e is
used with the RJ-45 connector and an optical multi-mode cable (≤2 km) with the LC type
connector.
In addition, communication modules with multiple Ethernet connectors enable the

forwarding of Ethernet traffic. These variants include an internal Ethernet switch that
handles the Ethernet traffic between an protection relay and a station bus. In this case, the
used network can be a ring or daisy-chain type of network topology. In loop type topology,
a self-healing Ethernet loop is closed by a managed switch supporting rapid spanning tree
protocol. In daisy-chain type of topology, the network is bus type and it is either without
switches, where the station bus starts from the station client, or with a switch to connect
some devices and the protection relays of this product series to the same network.Internal
Ethernet switch MAC table size is 512 entries. All Ethernet ports share this one common
MAC table.
Communication modules including Ethernet connectors X1, X2, and X3 can utilize the
third port for connecting any other device (for example, an SNTP server, that is visible for
the whole local subnet) to a station bus. In RED615, the first Ethernet port X16 is
dedicated to the line differential communication and it cannot be used for station bus
communication.
The protection relay's default IP address through rear Ethernet port is 192.168.2.10 with
the TCP/IP protocol. The data transfer rate is 10 or 100 Mbps full duplex.

Technical Manual
13.4.3 EIA-232 serial rear connection

The EIA-232 connection follows the TIA/EIA-232 standard and is intended to be used
with a point-to-point connection. The connection supports hardware flow control (RTS,
CTS, DTR, DSR), full-duplex and half-duplex communication.
13.4.4 EIA-485 serial rear connection

The EIA-485 communication module follows the TIA/EIA-485 standard and is intended
to be used in a daisy-chain bus wiring scheme with 2-wire half-duplex or 4-wire full-
duplex, multi-point communication.
The maximum number of devices (nodes) connected to the bus where the
protection relay is used is 32, and the maximum length of the bus is 1200
meters.
13.4.5 Line differential protection communication connection

The dedicated line differential protection communication link uses either a single mode or
a multimode connection with an LC type connector. The line differential communication
connector (X16/LD) is always the topmost in the communication module. Line
differential communication cards COM0008 and COM0036 are provided with multimode
optical LC connector. Line differential communication cards COM0010 and COM0035
are provided with single mode optical LC connector.
The port cannot be used with any other Ethernet communication network. The interface
speed is 100 Mbps.
Use direct link. Switches, hubs or routers are not allowed between the
protection relays.
If galvanic pilot wire is used as protection communication link, the pilot wire modem
RPW600 is required. The protection communication link always requires two modems in
a protection scheme, thus delivered in pairs of master (RPW600M) and follower
(RPW600F) units. A single-mode fiber optic cable with dual LC type connectors is used
to connect RED615 with RPW600 modem. The recommended minimum length for this
cable is 3 m.
Communication port X16/LD of RED615 is used both for direct fiber

optic link and connection with the pilot wire modem.

Technical Manual
The RPW600 modem has a built-in 5 kVAC (RMS, 1 min) level insulation
against ground potential in the pilot wire connection.
13.4.6 Optical ST serial rear connection

Serial communication can be used optionally through an optical connection either in loop
or star topology. The connection idle state is light on or light off.
Using ST loop mode requires an ST serial converter that supports

detecting and removing of duplicate request after transmission trough full
circle.
13.4.7 Communication interfaces and protocols

The communication protocols supported depend on the optional rear communication
module.
Table 950: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Interfaces/Protocols Ethernet Serial
100BASE-TX RJ-45 100BASE-FX LC EIA-232/EIA-485 Fiber optic ST
IEC 61850-8-1 ● ● - -
IEC 61850-9-2 LE ●1) ● - -
MODBUS RTU/ - - ● ●
ASCII
MODBUS TCP/IP ● ● - -
DNP3 (serial) - - ● ●
DNP3 TCP/IP ● ● - -
IEC 60870-5-103 - - ● ●
● = Supported
1) Not available for RED615 line differential communication connection

Technical Manual
13.4.8 Rear communication modules
COM0001 COM0002 COM0003 COM0005 COM0006 COM0007

RJ-45 LC RS-485+ RJ-45+ARC LC+ARC RS-485+
IRIG-B IRIG-B+ARC
GUID-9942EA65-7B6F-4987-BD1A-9A88B0B222D6 V3 EN
Figure 583: Communication module options

Technical Manual
COM0008 COM0010 COM0011 COM0012 COM0013 COM0014 COM0023

LC+2xRJ-45+ LC+2xRJ-45+ RJ-45+RS485+ LC+RS485+ RJ-45+RS485+ LC+RS485+ RJ-45+RS232/485+
RS485+ST+IRIG-B RS485+ST+IRIG-B IRIG-B IRIG-B IRIG-B+ARC IRIG-B+ARC RS485+ST+IRIG-B
GUID-07821EE0-53E5-44A8-82BF-1C1D652DD21E V2 EN

Technical Manual
COM0031 COM0032 COM0033 COM0034 COM0035 COM0036 COM0037

3xRJ-45 2xLC+RJ-45+ 3xRJ-45+ LC+2xRJ-45+ 3xLC 3xLC 2xLC+RJ-45
ST+ARC ST+ARC ST+ARC
GUID-AF5B9B14-A1F1-4EED-96AD-DA0665226860 V4 EN
Ethernet ports marked with LAN A and LAN B are used with redundant Ethernet
protocols HSR and PRP. The third port without the LAN A or LAN B label is an interlink
port which is used as a redundancy box connector with redundant Ethernet protocols.
Table 951: Station bus communication interfaces included in communication modules
Module ID RJ-45 LC EIA-485 EIA-232 ST
COM0001 1 - - - -
COM0002 - 1 - - -
COM0003 - - 1 - -
COM0005 1 - - - -
COM0006 - 1 - - -
COM0007 - - 1 - -
COM00081) 2 - 1 - 1
COM00101) 2 - 1 - 1
COM0011 1 - 1 - -

Technical Manual
Module ID RJ-45 LC EIA-485 EIA-232 ST

COM0012 - 1 1 - -
COM0013 1 - 1 - -
COM0014 - 1 1 - -
COM0023 1 - 1 1 1
COM0031 3 - - - -
COM0032 1 2 - - 1
COM0033 3 - - - 1
COM0034 2 1 - - 1
COM00351) - 3 - - -
COM00361) - 3 - - -
COM0037 1 2 - - -
1) Available only for RED615
Table 952: LED descriptions for COM0001-COM0014

LED Connector Description1)
X1 X1 X1/LAN link status and activity (RJ-45 and LC)
RX1 X5 COM2 2-wire/4-wire receive activity
TX1 X5 COM2 2-wire/4-wire transmit activity
RX2 X5 COM1 2-wire receive activity
TX2 X5 COM1 2-wire transmit activity
I-B X5 IRIG-B signal activity
1) Depending on the COM module and jumper configuration
Table 953: LED descriptions for COM0008 and COM0010

X16 X16 X16/LD link status and activity
X1 X1 X1/LAN link status and activity
RX X5 COM1 2-wire receive activity/COM2 4-wire receive activity
TX X5 COM1 2-wire transmit activity/COM2 4-wire transmit activity
RX X5/X12 COM2 2-wire receive activity/COM2 4-wire receive activity
TX X5/X12 COM2 2-wire transmit activity/COM2 4-wire transmit activity
1) Depending on the jumper configuration

Technical Manual
Table 954: LED descriptions for COM0023

FX X12 Not used by COM0023
X1 X1 LAN Link status and activity (RJ-45 and LC)
FL X12 Not used by COM0023
RX X6 COM1 2-wire / 4-wire receive activity
TX X6 COM1 2-wire / 4-wire transmit activity
RX X5 / X12 COM2 2-wire / 4-wire or fiber-optic receive activity
TX X5 / X12 COM2 2-wire / 4-wire or fiber-optic transmit activity
1) Depending on the jumper configuration
Table 955: LED descriptions for COM0031-COM0034 and COM0037

LED Connector Description
X1 X1 X1/LAN1 link status and activity
RX X9 COM1 fiber-optic receive activity
TX X9 COM1 fiber-optic transmit activity
Table 956: LED descriptions for COM0035 and COM0036

LED Connector Description
X16 X16 X16/LD link status and activity

Technical Manual
13.4.8.1 COM0001-COM0014 jumper locations and connections
1 2 3
X8
X9
X7
X4
X6
X5
A070893 V3 EN
Figure 586: Jumper connectors on communication module

Technical Manual
Table 957: 2-wire EIA-485 jumper connectors

Group Jumper connection Description Notes
X4 1-2 A+ bias enabled COM2
2-wire connection
2-3 A+ bias disabled
X5 1-2 B- bias enabled
2-3 B- bias disabled
X6 1-2 Bus termination enabled
2-3 Bus termination disabled
X7 1-2 B- bias enabled COM1
2-wire connection
X8 1-2 A+ bias enabled
The bus is to be biased at one end to ensure fail-safe operation, which can be done using
the pull-up and pull-down resistors on the communication module. In 4-wire connection
the pull-up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X4, X5, X7 and X8 to
enabled position. The bus termination is selected by setting jumpers X6 and X9 to enabled
position.
The jumpers have been set to no termination and no biasing as default.

Table 958: 4-wire EIA-485 jumper connectors for COM2
1-2 A+ bias enabled
X4
2-3 A+ bias disabled 1)
1-2 B- bias enabled
X5 COM2
2-3 B- bias disabled1) 4-wire TX channel
1-2 Bus termination enabled
X6 2-3 Bus termination
disabled1)
1-2 B- bias enabled
X7
2-3 B- bias disabled1)
1-2 A+ bias enabled
X8 COM2
2-3 A+ bias disabled1) 4-wire RX channel
X9 2-3 Bus termination
disabled1)
1) Default setting

Technical Manual
It is recommended to enable biasing only at one end of the bus.
It is recommended to enable termination at each end of the bus.
It is recommended to ground the signal directly to earth from one node

using a GND pin and through capacitor from other nodes using a GNDC
pin.
Signal grounding should be used with all devices in RS-485 bus having an
isolated communication port. Grounding ensures that different RS-485
nodes have the same signal reference ground. Without grounding the
differential RS-485 signal might be superimposed between different
nodes with respect to the node's local ground. For signal grounding it is
recommended to connect to AGND pin in RS-485 connector an additional
ground wire which runs inside the shielded serial cable.
The optional communication modules include support for EIA-485 serial communication
(X5 connector). Depending on the configuration, the communication modules can host
either two 2-wire ports or one 4-wire port.
The two 2-wire ports are called COM1 and COM2. Alternatively, if there is only one 4-
wire port configured, the port is called COM2. The fiber optic ST connection uses the
COM1 port.
Table 959: EIA-485 connections for COMB01A-COMB014A
Pin 2-wire mode 4-wire mode
10 COM1 A/+ COM2 Rx/+
9 B/- Rx/-
8 COM2 A/+ Tx/+
7 B/- Tx/-
6 AGND (isolated ground)
5 IRIG-B +
4 IRIG-B -
3 -
2 GNDC (case via capacitor)
1 GND (case)

Technical Manual
13.4.8.2 COM0023 jumper locations and connections
The optional communication module supports EIA-232/EIA-485 serial communication

(X6 connector), EIA-485 serial communication (X5 connector) and optical ST serial
communication (X12 connector).
Two independent communication ports are supported. The two 2-wire ports are called
COM1 and COM2. Alternatively, if only one 4-wire port is configured, the port is called
COM2. The fiber optic ST connection uses the COM1 port.
Table 960: Configuration options of the two independent communication ports
COM1 connector X6 COM2 connector X5 or X12
EIA-232 Optical ST (X12)
EIA-485 2-wire EIA-485 2-wire (X5)
EIA-485 4-wire EIA-485 4-wire (X5)

Technical Manual
X 19
X 11
X 20
X 21
X6
X8
X5
X9
X7
1 2 3
X 26
3 2 1
X 17
X 18
X 16
1 2 3
1 2 3
X 13
X 15
X 14
X 27
X 28
1 2 3
3 2 1
2
4
6
X3
X 25 X 24
5
3
1
GUID-D4044F6B-2DA8-4C14-A491-4772BA108292 V1 EN
Figure 587: Jumper connections on communication module COM0023 revisions A-F

Technical Manual
X21
X20
X19
X11
X5
X7
X9
X6
X8
1 2 3
X26
3 2 1
X13
X15
X18
X17
X14
X16
1 2 3
1 2 3
X27
X28
1 2 3
3 2 1
X3
X24
GUID-1E542C3A-F6E9-4F94-BEFD-EA3FEEC65FC8 V1 EN
Figure 588: Jumper connections on communication module COM0023 revision G
COM1 port connection type can be either EIA-232 or EIA-485. Type is selected by setting
jumpers X19, X20, X21 and X26.
The jumpers are set to EIA-232 by default.

Technical Manual
Table 961: EIA-232 and EIA-485 jumper connectors for COM1

Group Jumper connection Description
X19 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 EIA-232
X20 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 EIA-232
X21 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 EIA-232
X26 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 EIA-232
To ensure fail-safe operation, the bus is to be biased at one end using the pull-up and pull-
down resistors on the communication module. In the 4-wire connection, the pull-up and
pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X5, X6, X8 and X9 to enabled
position. The bus termination is selected by setting jumpers X7 and X11 to enabled
position.

2-3 A+ bias disabled1)
2-3 B- bias disabled1) Rear connector X6
2-wire connection
2-3 Bus termination
disabled1)
1) Default setting
Table 963: 4–wire EIA-485 jumper connectors for COM1

2-3 B- bias disabled1) Rear connector X6
4-wire TX channel
2-3 Bus termination
disabled1)

Technical Manual

2-3 B- bias disabled1) 4-wire RX channel

2-3 Bus termination
disabled1)
1) Default setting
COM2 port connection can be either EIA-485 or optical ST. Connection type is selected
by setting jumpers X27 and X28.
Table 964: COM2 serial connection X5 EIA-485/ X12 Optical ST
X27 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 Optical ST
X28 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 Optical ST


2-3 B- bias disabled 4-wire TX channel
4-wire RX channel

Technical Manual
Table 967: X12 Optical ST connection

X3 1-2 Star topology
2-3 Loop topology
X24 1-2 Idle state = Light on
2-3 Idle state = Light off
Table 968: EIA-232 connections for COM0023 (X6)

Pin EIA-232
1 DCD
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR
5 AGND
6 -
7 RTS
8 CTS

1 - Rx/+
6 - Rx/-
7 B/- Tx/-
8 A/+ Tx/+

9 - Rx/+
8 - Rx/-
7 A/+ Tx/+
6 B/- Tx/-
4 IRIG-B +
3 IRIG-B -
2 -
1 GND (case)

Technical Manual
13.4.8.3 COM0008 and COM0010 jumper locations and connections
The EIA-485 communication module follows the TIA/EIA-485 standard and is intended
to be used in a daisy-chain bus wiring scheme with 2-wire or 4-wire, half-duplex, multi-
point communication. Serial communication can be also used through optical connection
which is used either in loop or star topology.
Two parallel 2-wire serial communication channels can be used at the same time. Also
optical serial connector can be used in parallel with one 2-wire or 4-wire serial channel.
The maximum number of devices (nodes) connected to the bus where the
protection relay is being used is 32, and the maximum length of the bus is
1200 meters.
1 2 3
X8
X9
X7
X3
X6
X5
X 16
3 2 1
1 2 3
X 24
X 15
GUID-FDC31D60-8F9F-4D2A-A1A2-F0E57553C06B V1 EN
Figure 589: Jumper connectors on communication module

Technical Manual
Table 971: 2-wire EIA-485 jumper connectors

1-2 A+ Bias enabled COM1
2-wire connection
X3 2-3 A+ Bias Disabled
1-2 B- Bias enabled
X5 2-3 B- Bias Disabled
X6 2-3 Bus termination disabled
1-2 B- Bias enabled COM2
2-wire connection
1-2 A+ Bias enabled
The bus is to be biased at one end to ensure fail-safe operation, which can be done using
the pull-up and pull-down resistors on the communication module. In 4-wire connection
the pull-up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X3, X5, X7 and X8 to
enabled position. The bus termination is selected by setting jumpers X6 and X9 to enabled
position.

1-2 A+ Bias enabled
1-2 B- Bias enabled COM2
X5 2-3 B- Bias Disabled 4-wire TX channel

1-2 B- Bias enabled
1-2 A+ Bias enabled COM2
X8 2-3 A+ Bias Disabled 4-wire RX channel


Technical Manual
Table 973: Jumper connectors for COM1 serial connection type

X16 1-2 EIA-485 selected for COM1
2-3 FO_UART selected for COM1
X15 1-2 Star topology selected for
FO_UART
2-3 Loop topology selected for
FO_UART
X24 1-2 FO_UART channel idle state:
Light on
2-3 FO_UART channel idle state:
Light off
It is recommended to enable biasing only at one end of the bus.
Termination is enabled at each end of the bus
It is recommended to ground the signal directly to ground from one node

and through capacitor from other nodes.
The optional communication modules include support for EIA-485 serial communication
(X5 connector). Depending on the configuration the communication modules can host
either two 2-wire ports or one 4-wire port.
The two 2-wire ports are called as COM1 and COM2. Alternatively, if there is only one
4-wire port configured, the port is called COM2. The fiber optic ST connection uses the
COM1 port.
Table 974: EIA-485 connections for COM0008 and COM0010
9 COM1 A/+ COM2 Rx/+
8 B/- Rx/-
7 COM2 A/+ Tx/+
6 B/- Tx/-

Technical Manual

4 IRIG-B +
3 IRIG-B -
2 GNDC (case via capasitor)
1 GND (case)
13.4.8.4 COM0032-COM0034 jumper locations and connections
The optional communication modules include support for optical ST serial

communication (X9 connector). The fiber optic ST connection uses the COM1 port.
3 3
X15 2 2 X24
1 1
GUID-CA481BBF-C1C9-451D-BC18-19EC49B8A3A3 V2 EN
Figure 590: Jumper connections on communication module COM0032

Technical Manual
3 3
2 2
X15 1 1 X24
GUID-4CAF22E5-1491-44EF-BFC7-45017DED68F4 V2 EN

Technical Manual
3 3
2 2
X15 1 1 X24
GUID-E54674FD-2E7F-4742-90AB-505772A0CFF4 V2 EN
Table 975: X9 Optical ST jumper connectors

X15 1-2 Star topology
2-3 Loop topology
X24 1-2 Idle state = Light on
2-3 Idle state = Light off

Technical Manual
1166
Technical data
Section 14 Technical data
Table 976: Dimensions

Description Value
Width Frame 6.97 inches (177 mm)
Case 6.46 inches (164 mm)
Height Frame 6.97 inches (177 mm), 4U
Case 6.30 inches (160 mm)
Depth 7.92 inches (201 mm)
Weight Complete protection relay 9.0 lbs (4.1 kg)
Plug-in unit only 4.6 lbs (2.1 kg)
Table 977: Power supply

Description Type 1 Type 2
Nominal auxiliary voltage Vn 100, 110, 120, 220, 240 V AC, 50 24, 30, 48, 60 V DC
and 60 Hz
48, 60, 110, 125, 220, 250 V DC
Maximum interruption time in the 50 ms at Vn
auxiliary DC voltage without
resetting the relay
Auxiliary voltage variation 38...110% of Vn (38...264 V AC) 50...120% of Vn (12...72 V DC)
80...120% of Vn (38.4...300 V DC)
Start-up threshold 19.2 V DC (24 V DC × 80%)

Burden of auxiliary voltage supply DC <13.0 W (nominal)/<18.0 W DC <13.0 W (nominal)/<18.0 W
under quiescent (Pq)/operating (max.) (max.)
condition AC <16.0 W (nominal)/<21.0 W
(max.)
Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Max 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 Hz)
Fuse type T4A/250 V

Technical Manual
Technical data
Table 978: Energizing inputs

Description Value
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Current inputs Rated current, In 0.2/1 A1)2) 1/5 A3)
Thermal withstand
capability:
• Continuously 4A 20 A
• For 1 s 100 A 500 A
Dynamic current
withstand:
• Half-wave value 250 A 1250 A
Input impedance <100 mΩ <20 mΩ

Voltage inputs Rated voltage 60...210 V AC
Voltage withstand:
• Continuous 240 V AC
• For 10 s 360 V AC
Burden at rated voltage <0.05 VA
1) Ordering option for residual current input

2) Not available for RET615
3) Ground current and/or phase current
Table 979: Energizing inputs (sensors)

Description Value
Current sensor input Rated current voltage (in 75 mV...9000 mV1)
secondary side)
Continuous voltage 125 V
withstand
Input impedance at 50/60 2...3 MΩ2)
Hz
Voltage sensor input Rated voltage 6 kV...30 kV3)
Continuous voltage 50 V
withstand
Input impedance at 50/60 3 MΩ
Hz
1) Equals the current range of 40...4000 A with a 80 A, 3 mV/Hz Rogowski

2) Depending on the used nominal current (hardware gain)
3) This range is covered (up to 2*rated) with sensor division ratio of 10 000:1

Technical Manual
Technical data
Table 980: Binary inputs

Description Value
Operating range ±20% of the rated voltage
Rated voltage 24...250 V DC
Current drain 1.6...1.9 mA
Power consumption 31.0...570.0 mW
Threshold voltage 16...176 V DC
Reaction time <3 ms
Adjust the binary input threshold voltage correctly. The threshold voltage
should be set to 70% of the nominal auxiliary voltage. The factory default
is 16 V to ensure the binary inputs’ operation regardless of the auxiliary
voltage used (24, 48, 60, 110, 125, 220 or 250 V DC). However, the
default value is not optimal for the higher auxiliary voltages. The binary
input threshold voltage should be set as high as possible to prevent any
inadvertent activation of the binary inputs due to possible external
disturbances. At the same time, the threshold should be set so that the
correct operation is not jeopardized in case of undervoltage of the
auxiliary voltage.
Table 981: RTD/mA inputs

Description Value
RTD inputs Supported RTD sensors TCR 0.00385 (DIN
43760)
100 Ω platinum TCR 0.00385
250 Ω platinum TCR 0.00618 (DIN
100 Ω nickel 43760)
120 Ω nickel TCR 0.00618
250 Ω nickel TCR 0.00618
10 Ω copper TCR 0.00427
Supported resistance
range 0...2 kΩ
Maximum lead
resistance (three-wire
measurement) 25 Ω per lead
Isolation 2 kV (inputs to protective ground)
Response time <4 s
RTD/resistance sensing
current Maximum 0.33 mA rms
Operation accuracy Resistance Temperature
± 2.0% or ±1 Ω ±1°C
10 Ω copper: ±2°C

Technical Manual
Technical data
Description Value
mA inputs Supported current range 0…20 mA
Current input impedance 44 Ω ± 0.1%
Operation accuracy ±0.5% or ±0.01 mA
Table 982: Signal output X100: SO1

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 5A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 1 A/0.25 A/0.15 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC
Table 983: Signal outputs and IRF output

Description Value
Make and carry 0.5 s 15 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 1 A/0.25 A/0.15 A
Table 984: Double-pole power output relays with TCM function

Description Value
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 5 A/3 A/1 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC (two
contacts connected in series)
Trip-circuit monitoring (TCM):

Technical Manual
Technical data
Description Value
• Control voltage range 20...250 V AC/DC
• Current drain through the supervision circuit ~1.5 mA
• Minimum voltage over the TCM contact 20 V AC/DC (15...20 V)
Table 985: Single-pole power output relays

Description Value
Table 986: High-speed output HSO with BIO0007

Description Value
constant L/R <40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC
Trip time <1 ms
Reset <20 ms, resistive load
Table 987: Ethernet interfaces

Ethernet interface Protocol Cable Data transfer rate
Front TCP/IP Standard Ethernet CAT 5 cable with RJ-45 10 MBits/s
protocol connector
Rear TCP/IP Shielded twisted pair CAT 5e cable with RJ-45 100 MBits/s
protocol connector or fiber optic cable with LC connector

Technical Manual
Technical data
Table 988: Serial rear interface

Type Counter connector
Serial port (X5) 10-pin counter connector Weidmüller BL
3.5/10/180F AU OR BEDR
or
9-pin counter connector Weidmüller BL 3.5/9/180F
AU OR BEDR1)
Serial port (X16) 9-pin D-sub connector DE-9
Serial port (X12) Optical ST-connector
1) Depending on the optional communication module
Table 989: Fiber optic communication link

Connector Fiber type Wave length Typical max. Permitted path attenuation2)
length1)
LC MM 62.5/125 or 1300 nm 2 km <8 dB
50/125 μm glass fiber
core
ST MM 62.5/125 or 820...900 nm 1 km <11 dB
50/125 μm glass fiber
core
1) Maximum length depends on the cable attenuation and quality, the amount of splices and connectors in the
path.
2) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together
Table 990: Fiber optic protection communication link available in RED615

Connector Fibre type Wave length Typical max. Permitted path attenuation2)
length1)
LC MM 62.5/125 or 1300 nm 2 km <8 dB
50/125 μm
LC SM 9/125 μm3) 1300 nm 20 km <8 dB
1) Maximum length depends on the cable attenuation and quality, the amount of splices and connectors in the
path.
2) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable altogether
3) Use single-mode fiber with recommended minimum length of 3 m to connect RED615 to the pilot wire
modem RPW600.
Table 991: IRIG-B

Description Value
IRIG time code format B004, B0051)
Isolation 500V 1 min
Modulation Unmodulated

Technical Manual
Technical data
Description Value
Logic level 5 V TTL
Current consumption <4 mA
Power consumption <20 mW
1) According to the 200-04 IRIG standard
Table 992: Lens sensor and optical fiber for arc protection
Description Value
Fiber optic cable including lens 1.5 m, 3.0 m or 5.0 m
Normal service temperature range of the lens -40...+100°C
Maximum service temperature range of the lens, +140°C
max 1 h
Minimum permissible bending radius of the 3.94 inches (100 mm)
connection fiber
Table 993: Degree of protection of flush-mounted protection relay

Description Value
Front side IP 54
Rear side, connection terminals IP 10
Left and right side IP 20
Top and bottom IP 20
Table 994: Environmental conditions

Description Value
Operating temperature range -25...+55ºC (continuous)
Short-time service temperature range • REF615, REG615, REM615 and RET615:
-40...+85ºC (<16 h)1)2)
• RED615: -40...+70ºC (<16 h)1)2)
Relative humidity <93%, non-condensing

Atmospheric pressure 12.47...15.37 psi (86...106 kPa)
Altitude Up to 6561.66 feet (2000 m)
Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85ºC
1) Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance outside the temperature range of -25...+55 ºC
2) For relays with an LC communication interface the maximum operating temperature is +70 ºC

Technical Manual
1174
Protection relay and functionality tests
Section 15 Protection relay and functionality tests
Table 995: Electromagnetic compatibility tests

Description Type test value Reference
1 MHz/100 kHz burst disturbance IEC 61000-4-18
test IEC 60255-26, class III
IEEE C37.90.1-2002
• Common mode
2.5 kV
• Differential mode
2.5 kV
3 MHz, 10 MHz and 30 MHz burst IEC 61000-4-18

disturbance test IEC 60255-26, class III
• Common mode 2.5 kV
Electrostatic discharge test IEC 61000-4-2

IEC 60255-26
IEEE C37.90.3-2001
• Contact discharge
8 kV
• Air discharge
15 kV
Radio frequency interference test

10 V (rms) IEC 61000-4-6
f = 150 kHz...80 MHz IEC 60255-26, class III
10 V/m (rms) IEC 61000-4-3
f = 80...2700 MHz IEC 60255-26, class III
10 V/m ENV 50204
f = 900 MHz IEC 60255-26, class III
20 V/m (rms) IEEE C37.90.2-2004
f = 80...1000 MHz
Fast transient disturbance test IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60255-26
IEEE C37.90.1-2002
• All ports
4 kV
Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5

IEC 60255-26
• Communication 1 kV, line-to-ground
• Other ports 4 kV, line-to-ground,

2 kV, line-to-line

Technical Manual

Power frequency (50 Hz) IEC 61000-4-8
magnetic field immunity test
• Continuous
300 A/m
• 1...3 s
1000 A/m
Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A/m IEC 61000-4-9

6.4/16 µs
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10
immunity test
• 2s 100 A/m
• 1 MHz 400 transients/s
Voltage dips and short 30%/10 ms IEC 61000-4-11

interruptions 60%/100 ms
60%/1000 ms
>95%/5000 ms
Power frequency immunity test Binary inputs only IEC 61000-4-16
IEC 60255-26, class A
• Common mode 300 V rms
• Differential mode 150 V rms
Conducted common mode 15 Hz...150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16

disturbances Test level 3 (10/1/10 V rms)
Emission tests EN 55011, class A
IEC 60255-26
CISPR 11
CISPR 12
• Conducted
0.15...0.50 MHz <79 dB (µV) quasi peak

<66 dB (µV) average
0.5...30 MHz <73 dB (µV) quasi peak
<60 dB (µV) average
• Radiated
30...230 MHz <40 dB (µV/m) quasi peak,

measured at 10 m distance
230...1000 MHz <47 dB (µV/m) quasi peak,
1…3 GHz <76 dB (µV/m) peak
<56 dB (µV/m) average,
3…6 GHz <80 dB (µV/m) peak
<60 dB (µV/m) average,

Technical Manual
Table 996: Insulation tests

Dielectric tests 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min IEC 60255-27
500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min, IEEE C37.90-2005
communication
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J IEC 60255-27
1 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J, IEEE C37.90-2005
communication
Insulation resistance >100 MΩ, 500 V DC IEC 60255-27
measurements
Protective bonding resistance <0.1 Ω, 4 A, 60 s IEC 60255-27
Table 997: Mechanical tests

Description Requirement Reference
Vibration tests (sinusoidal) Class 2 IEC 60068-2-6 (test Fc)
IEC 60255-21-1
Shock and bump test Class 2 IEC 60068-2-27 (test Ea shock)
IEC 60068-2-29 (test Eb bump)
IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class 2 IEC 60255-21-3
Mechanical durability • 200 withdrawals and IEEE C37.90-2005
insertions of the plug-in unit
• 200 adjustments of
protection relay's setting
controls

Technical Manual
Table 998: Environmental tests

Dry heat test • 96 h at +55ºC IEC 60068-2-2
• 16 h at +85ºC1)2) IEEE C37.90-2005
Dry cold test • 96 h at -25ºC IEC 60068-2-1

• 16 h at -40ºC IEEE C37.90-2005
Damp heat test • 6 cycles (12 h + 12 h) at IEC 60068-2-30

+25°C…+55°C, humidity
>93%
• +55°C, Rh = 95%, 96h IEEE C37.90-2005
Change of temperature test • 5 cycles (3 h + 3 h) IEC60068-2-14

at -25°C...+55°C
Storage test • 96 h at -40ºC IEC 60068-2-1

• 96 h at +85ºC IEC 60068-2-2
IEEE C37.90-2005
1) For relays with an LC communication interface the maximum operating temperature is +70oC
2) For RED615 +70oC, 16 h
Table 999: Product safety

Description Reference
LV directive 2006/95/EC
Standard EN 60255-27 (2013)
EN 60255-1 (2009)
Table 1000: EMC compliance

Description Reference
EMC directive 2004/108/EC
Standard EN 60255-26 (2013)

Technical Manual
Applicable standards and regulations
Section 16 Applicable standards and regulations
EN 60255-1
EN 60255-26
EN 60255-27
EMC council directive 2004/108/EC
EU directive 2002/96/EC/175
IEC 60255
Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC
IEC 61850
IEEE C37.90-2005

Technical Manual
1180
Glossary
Section 17 Glossary
615 series Series of numerical protection and control relays for

protection and supervision applications of utility
substations, and industrial switchgear and equipment
AC Alternating current
ACT 1. Application Configuration tool in PCM600
2. Trip status in IEC 61850
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AVR Automatic voltage regulator
CAT 5 A twisted pair cable type designed for high signal integrity
CAT 5e An enhanced version of CAT 5 that adds specifications for
far end crosstalk
CB Circuit breaker
CBB Cycle building block
COMTRADE Common format for transient data exchange for power
systems. Defined by the IEEE Standard.
CPU Central processing unit
CT Current transformer
CTS Clear to send
DAN Doubly attached node
DC 1. Direct current
2. Disconnector
3. Double command
DCD Data carrier detect
DFR Digital fault recorder
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DG Distributed generation
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Technical Manual
Glossary
DNP3 A distributed network protocol originally developed by

Westronic. The DNP3 Users Group has the ownership of
the protocol and assumes responsibility for its evolution.
DSR Data set ready
DT Definite time
DTR Data terminal ready
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
EF Ground fault
EIA-232 Serial communication standard according to Electronics

Industries Association
EIA-485 Serial communication standard according to Electronics
Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
Ethernet A standard for connecting a family of frame-based
computer networking technologies into a LAN
FLC Full load current
FPGA Field-programmable gate array
FTP File transfer protocol
FTPS FTP Secure
GFC General fault criteria
GOOSE Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event
GPS Global Positioning System
HMI Human-machine interface
HSO High-speed output
HSR High-availability seamless redundancy
HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
HV High voltage
HW Hardware
IDMT Inverse definite minimum time
IEC 61850 International standard for substation communication and
modeling
IEC 61850-9-2 LE Lite Edition of IEC 61850-9-2 offering process bus
interface

Technical Manual
Glossary
IED Intelligent electronic device

IEEE 1588 v2 Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol
for networked measurement and control systems
IP Internet protocol
IP address A set of four numbers between 0 and 255, separated by
periods. Each server connected to the Internet is assigned
a unique IP address that specifies the location for the TCP/
IP protocol.
IRF 1. Internal fault
2. Internal relay fault
IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group's time code format B
LAN Local area network
LC Connector type for glass fiber cable
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light-emitting diode
LHMI Local human-machine interface
LOG Loss of grid
LOM Loss of mains
LV Low voltage
MAC Media access control
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MM 1. Multimode
2. Multimode optical fiber
MMS 1. Manufacturing message specification
2. Metering management system
MV Medium voltage
Modbus A serial communication protocol developed by the
Modicon company in 1979. Originally used for
communication in PLCs and RTU devices.
NC Normally closed
OSB Out of step blocking
P2P peer-to-peer
PC 1. Personal computer
2. Polycarbonate

Technical Manual
Glossary
PCM600 Protection and Control IED Manager

PGU Power generating unit
PLC Programmable logic controller
PPS Pulse per second
PRP Parallel redundancy protocol
Peak-to-peak 1. The amplitude of a waveform between its maximum
positive value and its maximum negative value
2. A measurement principle where the measurement
quantity is made by calculating the average from the
positive and negative peak values without including the
DC component. The peak-to-peak mode allows
considerable CT saturation without impairing the
performance of the operation.
Peak-to-peak with A measurement principle similar to the peak-to-peak
peak backup mode but with the function picking up on two conditions:
the peak-to-peak value is above the set pickup current or
the peak value is above two times the set pickup value
RAM Random access memory
RCA Also known as MTA or base angle. Characteristic angle.
RED615 Line differential protection and control relay
REF615 Feeder protection and control relay
REM615 Motor protection and control relay
RET615 Transformer protection and control relay
RJ-45 Galvanic connector type
RMS Root-mean-square (value)
ROM Read-only memory
RSTP Rapid spanning tree protocol
RTC Real-time clock
RTD Resistance temperature detector
RTS Ready to send
Rx Receive/Received
SAN Single attached node
SBO Select-before-operate
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition

Technical Manual
Glossary
SCL XML-based substation description configuration language

defined by IEC 61850
SLD Single-line diagram
SM 1. Single mode
2. Single-mode optical fiber
SMT Signal Matrix tool in PCM600
SMV Sampled measured values
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SOTF Switch onto fault
ST Connector type for glass fiber cable
SW Software
Single-line diagram Simplified notation for representing a three-phase power
system. Instead of representing each of three phases with
a separate line or terminal, only one conductor is
represented.
TCM Trip-circuit monitoring
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TCS Trip-circuit supervision
TLV Type length value
Tx Transmit/Transmitted
UDP User datagram protocol
UTC Coordinated universal time
VT Voltage transformer
WAN Wide area network
WHMI Web human-machine interface

Technical Manual
1186
1187
—
ABB Inc.
4300 Coral Ridge Drive
Coral Springs, Florida 33065, USA
Phone +1 954 752 6700
Fax +1 954 345 5329
Phone +1 800 222 1946 (Customer
Service 24/7)
www.abb.com/mediumvoltage
www.abb.com/substationautomation
1MAC059074-MB A
© Copyright 2018 ABB. All rights reserved.

615 Series ANSI: Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

615 Series ANSI: Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

615 Series ANSI: Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

—

RELION® PROTECTION AND CONTROL

615 series ANSI

© Copyright 2018 ABB. All rights reserved

Section 2 615 series overview.............................................................45

Section 3 Basic functions.................................................................... 59

615 series ANSI 1

2 615 series ANSI

Dual single-pole high-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and

615 series ANSI 3

RESTVTR function block.................................................................133

4 615 series ANSI

Type conversion function blocks...........................................................141

615 series ANSI 5

AND function block..................................................................... 152

6 615 series ANSI

615 series ANSI 7

Section 4 Protection functions...........................................................211

8 615 series ANSI

615 series ANSI 9

Function block............................................................................ 276

10 615 series ANSI

Technical data............................................................................ 297

615 series ANSI 11

Technical data............................................................................ 359

12 615 series ANSI

Operation principle..................................................................... 410

615 series ANSI 13

Technical data............................................................................ 499

14 615 series ANSI

Motor differential protection 87G..................................................... 568

615 series ANSI 15

16 615 series ANSI

Technical revision history........................................................... 627

615 series ANSI 17

18 615 series ANSI

615 series ANSI 19

Function block............................................................................ 717

20 615 series ANSI

Section 5 Protection related functions...............................................767

615 series ANSI 21

22 615 series ANSI

Section 6 Supervision functions........................................................ 835

615 series ANSI 23

24 615 series ANSI

Section 7 Condition monitoring functions.......................................... 879

615 series ANSI 25

Technical data................................................................................. 896

Section 8 Measurement functions..................................................... 897

26 615 series ANSI

Frequency measurement f...............................................................918

615 series ANSI 27

Section 9 Control functions............................................................... 957

28 615 series ANSI

Technical revision history................................................................ 971

615 series ANSI 29

Section 10 Power quality measurement functions............................ 1033

30 615 series ANSI

Section 11 General function block features.......................................1073